4- 
 
 cu 
 
 CORNELL 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 L I BRARY 
 
 The Robert M. and Laura Lee Lintz 
 Book Endowment for the Humanities 
 
 Class of 1924 
 
CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 
 
 3 1924 090 851 753 , 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of this book is in 
 the Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924090851753 
 
TIIK 
 
 SYNTAX AND SYNONYMS 
 
 GREEK TESTAMENT. 
 
 WILLIAM WEBSTER, M.A. 
 
 LATE VELLOW OF QVEENS' COIiLEOE, CAUBUIVUl!, 
 BECENTLT OB XINO'S COLLEOE, LONDON. 
 
 "OmiBgis auctoritatibug, ip8& ro ct rationo exquirero potuumua voritatoin." 
 
 (ClOEBO, pro Lege Manit.) 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 IIIVINGTONS, WATERLOO PLACE : 
 
 AND HIGH STREET. OXFORD. 
 
 1864. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 LUNIION : 
 
 In commencing the present Work, I proposed to myself to 
 compile a Syntax, which should ombraco all that was valuable 
 in Winer, and all that was applicable in Donaldson. From 
 the large and copious, use which I have made of Dr. Donald- 
 son's " Complete Greek Grammar," I may be considered to 
 have fulfilled one part of my original design. The references 
 GiLUKiiT AND RiviNOTON, piii.NTEii&, I havo mado to the Syntax of this eminent philologist by no 
 
 ST. joii.-x's sauAUK. means adequately represent the full amount of my obligations 
 
 to him. In analyzing the varied uses of the Prepositions and 
 of the Oblique Cases, I have followed Donaldson paragraph by 
 paragraph, adopting his language, with such modifications as 
 seemed advisable, quoting some of his instances, and append- 
 ing appropriate examples from the New Testament. In the 
 arrangement of the Syntax, I have frequently followed Host, 
 borrowing occasionally the language of the "Bromsgrove 
 Greek Grammar," compiled by Dr. Jacob, of Christ's Hospital, 
 wherever the philosophical principles and logical method of 
 Donaldson appeared to rise above the level of a work designed 
 for popular comprehension. 
 
 Of Winer I have mado very little use ; chiefly because I 
 have found more reliable matter in the grammatical comments 
 ,of Bishop Ellicott, Dean Alford, Dr. Wordsworth, Dr. Vaughan, 
 and some others, among whom, I am indebted to the writer of 
 an article in the Quarterly Review for January, 1863. I would 
 hope that the annotations which I have selected from recent edi- 
 tions of the New Testament will be of service to those students, 
 who, from the deficiency of means or leisure, are unable, accord- 
 ing to the advice of the " Quarterly Review," to use Dean 
 
 A 2 
 
IV 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 Alford's work in combination with Dr. Wordsworth and Bishop 
 EUicott. If, too, these gleanings from their pages prove 
 acceptable to the laity generally, and to the large class of 
 readers wlio feel the force of the saying, /*67a jStjSXt'oi/ fiir/a 
 KUKov, I sliall not liave written in vain. 
 
 Another reason for having so sparingly availed myself of 
 the criticisms of Winer is, I must honestly confess, my want 
 of sympathy in the commendations so generally, and, I cannot 
 but think, extravagantly bestowed upon him. The use I have 
 made of his work has been out of deference to public opinion, 
 rather than from a personal sense of its merits. The Grammar 
 by Dr. S. Ch. Schirlitz (Qiessen), although it is but little 
 known, is a decidedly better work. There may be valuable 
 matter in Winer which I have not collected from other sources, 
 but his pages present to my mind an accumulation of unne- 
 cessary authorities and unnecessary polemics. By unnecessary 
 authorities, I mean repeated references to authors whose works 
 by no means deserve that degree of credit which can entitle 
 tliem to bo made standards of appeal. By unnecessary polemics, 
 I mean tlie refutation of absurd and extravagant errors in all 
 branches of Biblical Literature, of which one would think no 
 earnest and sensible student would take any notice, except to 
 dismiss them with contempt. 
 
 I do not expect that those who find or affect to find it 
 necessary to resort to Germany for their scholarship, will allow 
 that there are sufficient grounds for the opinion I have formed 
 of German critics, annotators, grammarians. But as far as 
 my own reading has extended, I see good reason to withhold 
 from German scliolars that measure of confidence which I 
 cheerfully extend to many who have written on Biblical litera- 
 ture in our own country during the last thirty years, and 
 this for the following considerations : (1) Germany is the land 
 of spcculatioi) ; but it is not the land of action or of common 
 sense ; few of their writers remember the salutary maxim, ij 
 re')(V7} fiaKpd, fipaj^yi o ^lo^. (2) We may cheerfully assign 
 to German students the palm of laborious industry ; but can 
 we say that tliis industry is sanctified by the highest motives, 
 and is directed to the noblest end? Of what advantage is 
 ■yv&ais, provided ao^ia is excluded? (3) Whatever be the 
 defects of our Authorized Version, there can be no doubt of 
 its great superiority to the Vulgate, or to Luther's translation. 
 
 PREFACK. 
 
 I have read many a tedious note of German writers, particularly 
 of Fritzsche, in which much ponderous erudition is directed 
 to the correction of a blunder in the Vulgate, or some Con- 
 tinental Version, which does not exist in our own. (4) We 
 ought not to be unmindful of the advantage which most of 
 us possess by being trained in a form of sound words, by 
 acknowledging a definite, but yet. Catholic system of faith 
 and practice. Of the Germans, it is difficult to say who of 
 them receive, and who reject the facts of Christianity embodied 
 in the three Creeds ; while none of them enjoy the benefit of 
 that practical Commentary on Holy Writ which is provided 
 in our Liturgy and Articles. To the absence of this salutary 
 check on the vagaries of 'free handling' we may attribute 
 that monstrous combination of errors which is happily confined 
 to German and Germanized theology. 
 
 Dr. Wordsworth (in the Preface to his edition of the Greek 
 Testament, p. xvi) has brought forward Lord Bacon's remark, 
 that one of the best commentaries on Scripture might be 
 extracted from the writings of English divines. This remark 
 may be amplified so as to inchide the grammatical and critical 
 exegesis of the New Testament. Our Anglo-Germans, like 
 Continental Tourists in search of scenery, need to be reminded 
 of the beautiful spots which they have never visited at home. 
 We may apply to tliem the admonition of the Koman Satirist 
 Ilor. Up. i. 12. 30. 
 
 "Quod petis, Incest; 
 .... Animus si te non deficit tcquus." 
 
 No one English annotator has availed himself of half the mate- 
 rials extant in our own tongue. Among recent editors Bishop 
 Jilhcott IS the only one who seems to have consulted tlie sound 
 and valuable suggestions of the late Professor Scholefield in his 
 llmts for an Improved Translation. It is much to bo regretted 
 that many of our learned men, who have edited the Tragedians 
 have not commented on the Greek Testament; yet there will 
 be found m their notes much valuable matter directly and 
 indirectly bearing on the grammatical interpretation of the 
 Sacred Oracles Bishop Blomfield's ^.schylus contains many 
 cnicisms of this nature; in the preparation of the First 
 Volume of the Greek Testament, in conjunction with my friend 
 Mr. Wilkinson. I dcnved more real assistance from this source 
 
VI 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 which promised little, than from the laborious pretentiousness 
 of any German annotator. 
 
 In Chapter X. I have made but slight use of the Second 
 Beries of Synonyms by Hia Grace the Archbishop of Dublin. 
 I have adopted freely the matter contained in the First Series, 
 which has become rapidly incorporated in the general stock of 
 Theological literature. As I have attempted to desynonymize 
 some words which have not been treated by previous writers, I 
 will only hope that all my readers will extend to me that 
 favourable indulgence, with which His Grace welcomed my 
 earlier efforts in this interesting and instructive pursuit. 
 
 In conclusion, I would express a hope that this Work will be 
 of some service in promoting the intelligent study of that Book 
 which is the basis of sound learning and religious education. 
 Great benefit has resulted and is likely to result from the insti- 
 tution of Competitive Examinations. Why should not a portion- 
 of the Greek Testament be required from all candidates for 
 apppintments in the Military and Civil Service P The eulogium 
 which Dr. Wordsworth has pronounced (Pref. p. xvii) on the 
 study of Holy Scripture in the Original, as the best Instrument 
 of Education, is a happy combination of rhetorical power with 
 sober truth ■.•^ 
 
 "The Bible alone, of all books in the world, addkesses 
 
 ITSELF TO THE WHOLE MAN. It EXERCISES HIS MEMORY, 
 STRENGTHENS HIS REASON, CONTROLS HIS PASSIONS, INFORMS 
 HIS JUDGMENT, REGULATES HIS CONSCIRNOE, SANCTIFIES HIS 
 WILL, ENLIVENS HIS FANCY, WARMS HIS IMAGINATION, CHERISHES 
 HIS AFFECTIONS, STIMULATES HIS PRACI'ICE, QUICKENS HIS HOPE, 
 AND ANIMATES HIS FAITH." 
 
 *,* Tlic passngca qnotcd are taken from tlie text of R. Stephens, 1550. Tlie 
 readings wliieh the Rev. F. U. Scrivener has inserted in his recent edition are con- 
 sidered of sufficient nutliority for the purposes of illustration and comment. 
 
 w 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
 I. On the Peculiuritieg of Hellenistic Greek 
 II. On the Formation of Words 
 
 III. On Nouns and Nominal Forms 
 
 IV. On the Subject with the Predicate and Copula 
 V. On the Oblique Cases 
 
 VI. Verbs, Voices, Tenses 
 VII. The Moods of Verbs . 
 VIII. Particles . 
 IX. Prepositions 
 X. Sjrnonyms 
 XI. Hints on the Authorized Version 
 XII. On Grammatical and Ehetorical Terms 
 
 Imdux I 
 
 Imdex II 
 
 Index III. 
 
 PAaE 
 1 
 
 . 17 
 
 . 26 
 
 . 60 
 
 . 62 
 
 . 80 
 
 . 100 
 
 . 118 
 
 . 149 
 
 . 186 
 
 . 238 
 
 . 262 
 
 . 263 
 . 266 
 . 271 
 
THE 
 
 i 
 
 SYNTAX AND SYNONYMS 
 
 OF THB 
 
 NEW TESTAMENT. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 INTRODUCTORY. 
 
 ON THE PECULIARITIES OF HELLENISTIC GREEK. 
 
 The term " Hellenistic " is the especial designation which is 
 usually employed to denote the Greek which is found in the 
 writings of the New Testament. 
 
 The word 'EXXijwotjJs was generally applied by the inha- 
 bitants of Attica to all foreigners who learnt to speak their 
 language by the ear for political purposes, commercial designs, 
 or social intercourse, without giving accurate attention to the 
 usages and expressions of the Attic dialects. These foreigners 
 were said to Ilellenize, eWrivi^eiv, to imitate Greeks from their 
 combining vernacular expressions and provincial peculiarities 
 with Greek phrases and idioms. 
 
 When wo consider the language of any single biography, 
 treatise, or letter, and still more when our attention is directed 
 to a collection of such writings, we must carefully bear in mind 
 all the historical circumstances of the several writers, such as 
 the time and the place of their respective compositions, the 
 previous education and the present position of the writers, the 
 objects they proposed to themselves in the work under con- 
 sideration. 
 
 Our own language as it is now spoken in different parts of the 
 globe furnishes a striking instance of the influence produced by 
 
2 
 
 TIIB PECnLIARITIES OP IIEIXENISTIC GREEK 
 
 time and place in moulding the distinguishing characteristics of 
 every tongue. The origin of Modern English is generally 
 ascribed to the days of Elizabeth ; grammarians enumerate 
 various phases of Middle English, Old English, Semi-Saxon, all 
 exhibiting peculiar features of divergence from the language, 
 either written or oral, which prevailed in the days of Alfred. 
 The familiar term Anglo-Saxon brings up before our minds two 
 distinct peoples, Angles and Saxons, who contributed their 
 different dialects to form a single tonguo. Hellenistic Greek 
 was a composite language derived from different sources like 
 our own ; it was also an imported language, not the vernacular 
 speech of those who used it ; it was acquired by the Apostles 
 and Evangelists, and was adopted, under the guidance of the 
 Holy Spirit, as the most fitting medium for the communications 
 they were inspired to make, and it was adapted by them for the 
 imparting of truths and sentiments which tried to the utmost 
 the capacity of language and the power of thought. 
 
 In Palestine, Greek was an exotic. The sources from which 
 it was transplanted were of the widest description. When we 
 speak of Classical Greek, we refer to the language which was 
 spoken in Graecia Antiqua or Greece Proper, but when we 
 speak of Hellenistic Greek we must include in our conception 
 the speech of Magna Grajcia, the south-east of Italy with Sicily, 
 of the colonies included in the discontinuous or sporadic Greece, 
 of the settlements in Asia Minor, and those which were founded 
 by the success which attended the Macedonian arms. In this 
 respect Hellenistic Greek resembles the English which is spoken 
 in America, Australia, and Hindostan far more closely than ita 
 ordinary uae in our native land. Sut even at home every 
 distinct region of the United Kingdom, and every quarter of 
 the globe, contributes its peculiar phrases and idioms to increase 
 the treasures of the Anglo-Saxon tongue. Some of these 
 additions and excrescences obtain only a partial reception, as 
 they are confined to the district which gave them birth, or are 
 limited to the local exigencies which called them into life ; but 
 many obtain from time to time universal acceptance, are 
 gradually incorporated into an ordinary speech, and maintain 
 a' position in the temple of literature. In every branch of 
 writing, especially in our periodical organs of public informa- 
 tion, words will be found which have been imported from the 
 Hebrew, Arabic, Persian, from Turkey and China, from the East 
 
 
 (■ 
 
 CONTRASTED WITH THE ENGLISH TONGUE. 3 
 
 and "West Indies, from North and South America, from Holland, 
 Italy, Portugal, Spain. But in our foreign marts, in cities of 
 commercial enterprise, beyond the limits of British civilization, 
 in the extreme East, West, and South, this confusion of tongues 
 (y>MTTO(rvyxvaKi) will be especially found to prevail. We 
 ought not then to be surprised at the occurrence of similar 
 characteristics in the records of the religious dispensation which 
 has spread through' the world from Galilee,— that populous 
 agglomeration of inhabitants of all classes and countries, which 
 Hebrew-speaking inhabitants of Jerusalem regarded with con- 
 tempt and disdain, as beyond Jordan, Galilee of the Gentiles. 
 
 But influences more powerful than the commixture of these 
 varieties of speech combined to cast the language of the Greek 
 Testament into its present mould. The inspired writings of the 
 New Covenant, are not conveyed in the language which our 
 Lord and His Apostles, as well as the earliest disciples, very 
 generally used in conversational intercourse. The vernacular 
 tongue in Judaea, after the return from the Babylonish captivity, 
 was the Syro-Chaldaic or Aramaic. In reading the Gospels, it 
 IS highly important to bear in mind the caution given by 
 Michaelis, "Syriace locutum Jesum, non Grsoce." Thus Greek 
 was a language which the writers acquired after attaining a 
 mature age, for it is probable that St. Luke was the only one 
 who knew it from his birth. 
 
 The writers of the Epistles had to contend with difficulties 
 from which the Evangelists were, in a measure, exempt. The 
 subjects which they had to discuss taxed to the utmost the 
 vaned and copious resources of the richest language on earth. 
 IJey were required to expound and elucidate truths which 
 atiect the temporal and eternal welfare of the universal famUy 
 of man truths which in length and breadth and depth and 
 height far exceeded the loftiest conceptions of philosopheiB 
 orators, and poets; these they had to present in a style and 
 manner which was capable of being comprehended by the whole 
 human race, inteUigible to the wise and unwise, level to the 
 apprehension of barbarian, Scythian, bond and free. 
 
 If then we attach the weight which is unquestionably due 
 to these peculiarities, if we consider the influence which each 
 of them would have singly, and the predominating sway 
 which all united would exercise by acting in combination one 
 with onother. wo shall not hesitate to draw the inference that 
 
 B 2 
 
4 THE PECULIARITIES OF HELLENISTIC GREEK. 
 
 without a miracle, the Greek of the New Testament could 
 not have been different from that which we find it to bo. A 
 regard to the circumstances of the writers, to the age in which 
 they lived, to the locality in which they wrote, to the associa- 
 tions of birth, of education, and position, a consideration of 
 their end and aim in writing what was to be a /m)/ta e? det, 
 unconscious though they were of the fact, all these justify 
 the conclusion that the sweeping charges of solcecisms, of 
 grammatical improprieties, of forced constructions, may be dis- 
 regarded by us as vague declamation. To expect that Pales- 
 tinian Jews should write Greek according to the refinements 
 and elegancies of the language which was current at Athens 
 in the days of Pericles, is as unreasonable as it would be to 
 require that modern English should retain the idiomatic usages, 
 expressions, and orthography, which prevailed under the Plan- 
 tagencts, or to conceive that a collection of writings from 
 different authors, designed not only for the instruction of the 
 intelligent and thoughtful, but for the use of the Boors at the 
 Cape, the Pariahs of Ilindostan, the Aborigines of Australia, 
 the Red Indians of North America, ought to bear upon its 
 front the characteristics of language, expression, and style, 
 which wo reasonably require in a critical essay, a philosophical 
 treatise, or an academical address. In such a collection of 
 writings, whether we regard the component parts singly, or 
 as a whole, we might with good reason require that no un- 
 warrantable liberties should be taken with the language, that 
 there should be no offences against good taste, no violations 
 of decorum, nothing to debase the mind, vitiate the feeling, 
 or corrupt the judgment. But all refinements of language, 
 all elegant turns of expression might well be sacrificed in 
 order to secure more thoroughly and effectually the writers' 
 end and aim, the instruction and edification of universal 
 humanity. 
 
 As it is quite unreasonable to judge of New Testament Greek 
 by the conventional standard adopted 300 n.c. in a particidar 
 city and district, so by a reference to what is now going on 
 in many parts of the world, we need not be surprised at the 
 mixture of various elements contained therein. For if we 
 consider the extent to which our own tongue is adulterated 
 in both hemispheres, by the use of extraneous words and in- 
 congruous expreasioiiB, wo shall deem it truly marvellous, and 
 
 FOUR DISTINCTIVE ELEMENTS. 
 
 a result which surpasses human wisdom, that writers of Galilee, 
 dypd/ifiaToi Kal ISuarai, have employed with such slight diver- 
 gences the language of Thucydides, Plato, and Xenophon, in 
 a connected series of works, which in subject-matter, com- 
 plexion, and object, throw into the shade the choicest specimens 
 of classical literature. 
 
 One striking charaoteristio of the Greek of the New Testa- 
 ment is the Christian element arising from the subject-matter, 
 which the writers had to unfold, 
 
 A second arises from the position of the writers, as Hebrew- 
 speaking Jews, who had to complete a revelation which had 
 already been partially revealed in Hebrew. This we may call 
 the Hebrew element. 
 
 There is a third element, which we may call the Alexandrine, 
 consisting of Latinisms, Cilicisms, Syriacisms, and extraneous 
 terms. 
 
 There is a fourth element, which had an important influence 
 on the employment of the preceding, viz., the oral. The style 
 is colloquial rather than literary. The diction is the Greek 
 of conversation rather than of composition. We have very 
 imperfect memorials of the ordinary language used by the 
 Greeks in the mart, the forum, and domestic life. The ex- 
 pressiouB employed by philosophers and poets, by orators and 
 tragedians, afford no clue to the conversational Greek which 
 regulated their social intercourse. The principal source from 
 which we can form an opinion of their vernacular speech is 
 the comedies of Aristophanes: "Ilia Comoodia vetus, specu- 
 lum quotidiansD vitao, plebeias quasdam offert loquutiones." — 
 Valckner '. The speeches in the Acts of the Apostles are faith- 
 ful recitals of words actually uttered ; and many of the epistles 
 were written from dictation. "To the oral element," says 
 Bishop Ellicott, "we may ascribe the combined simplicity and 
 force of the narrative pArtions ; the suspended structures and 
 relapses to the nominative case observable in the writings of 
 St. Paul." Its style is free from all tinge of vulgarity, and 
 from every trace of artistic diction. In fact it exhibits, as 
 Professor Masson has well remarked, the only genuine /acstV/iife 
 of the colloquial diction employed by unsophisticated Grecian 
 gentlemen of the first century, who spoke without pedantry, as 
 ISi&rai,, and not as ao^unal, 
 
 ' Sc« notei on Ij. 11. s. is. (Webster and Wilkinson.) 
 
b THE rECVIJARITIKS OF HELLENISTIC GREEK. 
 
 THE CHRISTIAN ELEMENT. 
 
 Ill every branch of science or department of study we find 
 peculiar words and technical terms which are formed by 
 enlarging the vocabulary of the language, or are old words 
 with a new and appropriate meaning. The doctrine of the 
 kingdom of heaven could not possibly be made known to man, 
 without the introduction of new words, or an accession of mean- 
 ing to words which were already in use. The writers of heathen 
 antiquity had no occasion to speak of r) iKK\tjcria tov 6eov — r&v 
 ovpav&v, evarfyikiov, ffwrifpta, Trlarif, BMaioat, eKKkqcria, in the 
 sense in which they so frequently recur in the Books of the 
 New Covenant. 
 
 The historical facts upon which Christianity rests could be 
 recorded in the language of Thucydides and Xcnophon ; but 
 the revelation of God manifest in the flesh, the dignity of the 
 Redeemer's person, the sufficiency of His atoning work, the 
 operation of the Holy Ghost, the condition of man as fallen in 
 the first Adam, the characteristics of his state as restored in the 
 second Adam, the constitution of the Christian Church,— these 
 and similar topics of discourse rendered it necessary to find 
 thought-breathing words, which no writer of an earlier age had 
 any occasion to use. With this agrees the fact which we might 
 naturally anticipate, that the Christian element is more strongly 
 marked in the writings of John, Paul, and Peter, than in the 
 synoptical Gospels, or the Acts of the Apostles. 
 
 The writers of the New Testament, if for a moment we leave 
 out of sight the divine superintendence, suggestion, and control 
 which attended them in all their labours, must have felt the 
 same difficulties which beset modem translators of the Bible in 
 finding suitable words and expressions to be the vehicle of 
 superhuman thoughts. The Chinese, for instance, with all their 
 literary, scientific, and philosophical attainments, ha^e no appro- 
 priate word for expressing " Deity," ond perhaps no language 
 which has not been amplified and enriched by the leaven of 
 Christianity, contains tolerable equivalents for the words grace, 
 humility, faith, hqj)e, charily. 
 
 A test of the character and habits of the people is furnished 
 by the copiouBness or scantiness of their vocabulary on moral 
 subjects. The languages of the South Sea Islanders are par- 
 ticularly copious in words which convey the crime of murder ; 
 
 THE CHRISTIAN ELEMENT. 
 
 there are several distinct terms to express different ways in 
 which infanticide may be committed. The universal prevalence 
 of this abominable atrocity has given birth to a deplorable rich- 
 ness of vocabulary in expressing the practice. We must ascribe 
 it to the happy influence of the oracles of God committed to our 
 trust, that our language has so many words which. denote sym- 
 pathy, condolence, fellow-feeling, compassion, pity, affection, 
 tenderness, but has no term nearer than the words " malicious- 
 ness," " spitefulness," to express eirij(aipeKaKla. Exultation at 
 the ills which befall other men is happily so rare a feeling, that 
 no distinguishing word has been adopted or compounded to 
 convey the idea. ■ The spirit of genuine benevolenco, of dis- 
 interested kindness in seeking the welfare of other men, was so 
 little recognized among the Greeks, that the Apostles had no 
 suitable word made ready to their hands, but were compelled to 
 borrow one from the x^PW^^' ^^° defrayed the expenses inci- 
 dent on providing a chorus, suitably trained and equipped, to 
 carry out the scenic representation of the Grecian drama. 
 Although the Septuagint translation had done much to render 
 Greek an appropriate vehicle for imparting Christian truth, and 
 became " a viaduct between the two covenants," yet the Apostles 
 found the language too narrow and shallow for the truths they 
 had to declare. Of some words they enlarged and deepened the 
 ■signification; other words they boldly coined, but always in 
 true analogy with the genius of the language which they served 
 to enrich. 
 
 We may trace both in the Old and New Testaments the 
 gradual growth of human language till it became fitted to com- 
 municate the things which were revealed, 7ro\vfjifpa>i kuI iroXv- 
 rpoTrav, in manifold portions and manifold methods. The Greek, 
 notwithstanding its abundant copiousness in comparison with 
 the Hebrew, required many subsidiary rills to form the broad 
 channel of language, tlmough which the final revelation of the 
 Divine mind could be imparted to man and diffused through the 
 world. 
 
 As an illustration of the Christian element, we may remark 
 that the classical terms for virtue, aperri, — for morality, n^dif 
 (mores), seldom occur ; the latter but once in a quotation, while 
 in their place we have a rich cluster of qualities and graces 
 enumerated under the term /capnoi irvevfuno^, — an idea which 
 never entered into the conception of Grecian sages. 
 
 Lest the Christian ministry should bo confounded with the 
 
8 
 
 THE PECITLIASIT1E8 OF HELLENISTIC GREEK. 
 
 Jewish priesthood, the writers of the New Testament altogether 
 avoid the word Upew as a designation of thosewho labour in 
 the Word and doctrine. To mark the contrast between Chris- 
 tianity and heathenism they use Bvaiaarripiov, Trpoi^revuv, in 
 preference to fita/io^, fiavreveaffai. It is also remarkable that 
 oKavSoKov, which occurs fifteen times in the New Testament, 
 and twenty times in LXX and Apocrypha, is scarcely ever 
 found in profane writers ; though Aristophanes, Acharn. 687, 
 uses aKavioKTidpov in a metaphorical sense. The idea of putting 
 a stumbling-block, or an occasion to fall in a brother's way, 
 never entered into the mind of the heathen. 
 
 To the Ohristian element we attribute the use of the following 
 expressions: 6 7roini)p o hoKoi, J. 10. ll. ^ d/vireKoi ■^ aXi^diio}," 
 vav K>Jjfia iv Xpurr^, /tivsiv iv Xpiar^, J. 15. l, 4r^7. avtodev 
 fewaadai, J. 3. 3. iraXifyepeaia, T. 3. s. ivaxalvaaK voot, 
 E. 12. 3, fterdvoia, A. 11. is. kmv^ lerlait, 20. 5. 17. 6 iaa 
 dvffpanro^, B. 7. 33. 6 f^at, 2 0. 4. 16. dftapria wpoi ddvarrov, 
 1 J. 5. 16, 17. 0dvaTO<{ eU rov al&va, J. 8. SI. irvevfiariKOt 
 in opposition to ■<^xrxiKo<;, <rapKiK6<i, — the combination of xard 
 adpKa with elvai, ireparareiv, (^i> — Kaivirrq^ trvevfioTOt, ira\at' 
 0T1JS ypdfifjMTOi, R. 7. 6. ipyd^eadai in opposition to iriarevew, 
 o KoapM^ oStos, J. 8. 23, rwn D7^y, oiKovop-ia tov Oeov, t^s 
 j(dpiTOi TOV Geov, To these we may add the technical senses 
 acquired by aat^eiv, avniip, and their derivatives, So^a, X*^ 
 aUoviof, Xvrpov, ^apt9, ireipaarixo^, 0809, /ivar^ptov, ^airrl^eaffat, 
 eTriarpitfteiv, iirtirrpo^, et aimilia, m&nj of which are explained 
 in our list of sy^ionyms. * 
 
 In this class we may enumerate the words which mark the 
 contrast in which Christianity stands to heathenism and Judaism, 
 atcijvoTniyia, Trpo<rq\vTOf, elS<o\60vTOt>, e^ot^oKaTpela, ^vXaAcri)' 
 ptov. 
 
 » 
 THE HEBREW ELEMENT. 
 
 It is unnecessary to give in detail an account of the unprofit- 
 able controversy which raged for a long period between the 
 Purists and the Hebraists. If the illustration which we have 
 adduced from the local incidents which affect our own tongue 
 in all parts of the world in our own day be deemed apposite and 
 analogous, no reasonable man will expect to find Attic purity in 
 the pages of the New Testament, though he will resist as alto- 
 gether unnecessary and unfounded the inference that Hellen- 
 
 r 
 
 u 
 
 !t 
 
 THE HEBREW ELEMENT. « 
 
 istic Greek is a heterogeneous confusion of several languages 
 and dialects. He will not be surprised to meet with a few 
 strange and anomalous forms of declension and conjugation ; he 
 will not stumble at the omission of the augment in some verbs, 
 or at its irregular use in other verbs ; he will not expect to find 
 consistency or uniformity in orthography or orthoepy. 
 
 The position laid down by Blackwall (Sacred Classics, i. 153) 
 will not be easily assailed. " The main substance and ground- 
 work of the language of the Gospels and Epistles is incon- 
 testably the same with that of the older Grecians, excepting 
 when the rites of the Jewish and new revelations of the Chris- 
 tian religion required new terms, or where the usage of Hebrew 
 modes of speech, and allusions to oriental customs expressed the 
 thing with more vigour, and were more intelligible to the 
 people. Even ra the Hebraisms and peculiarities of the New 
 Testament, as good a regard has been paid to the general 
 analogy and true propriety of graiqmar as in the writings 
 which make up the standard of the Greek language." 
 
 With Michaelis we may assign the causes of these disputes 
 to a want of sufficient knowledge of the Greek, the prejudices 
 of pedantry and school orthodoxy, the injudicious custom of 
 choosing the Greek Testament as the first book to be read by 
 learners. This last cause has not perhaps exerted much in- 
 fluence during the 'last thirty years ; but to these a further 
 reason may be assigned which has had very unhappy influence 
 in England, viz. that our most eminent scholars have deemed 
 the study of the Greek Testament beneath their notice ; so that 
 the seven plays of JBschylus alone have received more attention 
 from learned divines than the whole of the New Testament. 
 Others again have simply noticed the oracles of truth in order 
 to contrast the Christian element with the philosophy of Aris- 
 totle and Plato. Until a very recent period the peculiarities 
 of Hellenistic Greek had been treated of by English scholars, 
 who were certainly not well qualified for the task. These have 
 Buflbred themselves to be led away by implicit deference to the 
 authority of German grammarians and lexicographers, one of 
 whom gives the following view of their labours : " Studio 
 quserendorum Hebraismorum nimis indulsisse, in interpretandis 
 singulis verbis, imprimis pnepositionibus, conjunctionibus, par- 
 ticulis leges Groicso linguae migrasse, significationes temere 
 efiinxisse, et subtilitatem grammaticam mire ueglexisse," In 
 
 -■; 
 
10 
 
 THB PECULIARITIES OF HBLLEKISTIC OHEEK. 
 
 fact, whether we look to English or foreign theologians, we^may 
 say with Hiermann, " Tristissima profeoto sors obtigit scrip- 
 toribua saoris . . . Diligenter oaveant tirones, ne putent, viros 
 Spiritu Sanoto adflatos, sprevisse sermonem mortalium, sed 
 mominerint potiua, illam interpretandi rationem qua nonnulli 
 theologorum utuntur, nihil esse nisi blasphemiam." Or we may 
 apply to the interpretation of the New Testament the language 
 which Dr. Pusey has employed of the Old : ^' The comparison 
 of the cognate dialects opened for a time an unlimited licence of 
 innovation. Every principle of interpretation, every rule of 
 language was violated. The Bible was misinterpreted with a 
 wild recklessness to which no other book was ever subjected. 
 A subordinate meaning of mere half-understood Arabic words 
 was always at hand to remove whatever any one misliked. Now 
 the manifoldness of this reign of misrule has subsided. Sut 
 interpretations as arbitrary as any which had perished still 
 hold their sway." (Intrq^uotion to the Minor Prophets, p. vii.) 
 
 One of the terms which is frequently considered Hebraistic 
 is the occurrence of the phrase, ' to be called,' ' to be found,' 
 instead of the verb substantive ' to be.' The first continually 
 occurs in Greek, as may be seen by looking at KaKeto, in any 
 Lexicon, or at our notes on L. 1. 32. The second phrase might 
 be called a Gallicism or an Anglicism with as much propriety 
 as a Hebraism. Meyer renders A. 8. so, evpi07} ek 'Afytrovy 
 'il se trouva.' We might well render M. 1. 18, evpidti iv 
 yaarpi ej(pvaa, 'found herself with child.' We may even 
 say, without great impropriety, ' How do you find yourself P' 
 for ' How are youP' 
 
 The use of the word ' son ' to signify relation in general, 
 such us cause and effect, dependence of one thing upon 
 another, likeness, is frequently considered a Hebraism. But 
 many similar exprBssions are found in Classical Greek, as well 
 as in all other languages. The Red Indians employ per- 
 petually the word 'son.' This genitive may well be referred 
 to the genitive of quality denoting a permanent and abiding 
 possession. (See numerous examples in Chapter IV.) 
 
 So too, the use of the word 'name,' denoting pubstance, 
 personality, J. 1. 13 ; M. 28. 19. The word Svofia expresses 
 the means of identification, and implies the knowledge of one 
 in his real person and character. 
 
 It seisms very doubtful whether the uses of the word ' know,' 
 
 ii 'i - 
 
 •■' 'i 
 
 <r! 
 
 
 -.'1 ;t' 
 
 ■V ': 
 - '1 ) 
 
 ■ I'' 
 r,- 
 
 ■' 
 
 8FUBIOU8 HKBKAISMS. 
 
 11 
 
 in the sense of ' approve,' or ' hear,' in the sense of ' heed,' can 
 be called Hebraistic. 
 
 The prefixes 2 and 7 undoubtedly exercised a considerable 
 influence on the diction of Hellenists; but these have been 
 made responsible for every kind of construction which the 
 annotator could not explain. The insertion or omission of the 
 Article was doubtless very much afiected by the use of the 
 Hebrew n. There is, however, great justice in the remarks 
 
 of Meyer, who 'confirms the view already quoted from Black- 
 wall: "Ut autem Hebraismos permiscerent, non modo htec 
 causa Mt quia Hebraei drant, sed quia cum de iis rebus dis- 
 sererent quae Hebraicis Uteris erant traditse, necesse fuit multa 
 retinere, ne doctrinam quampiam novam adferre vidorentur. 
 Et certe tarn multos Hebraismos ab illis servatos fuisse minime 
 miror, cimi plerique sint ejusmodi ut nullo alio idiomate tarn 
 feliciter exprimi possint; imo interdum ne exprimi quidem; 
 ut nisi illas formulas retinuissent, nova iUis interdum vocabula 
 et nova dicendi genera comminiscenda fuerint, qum nemo plane 
 intellexisset." 
 
 SPURIOUS HEBRAISMS. 
 
 Expressions like ^p elSop, A. 7. 34 ; axoy oKowtre, M. 13. 
 14 ; anreCK^ airei\i)aa>fie0a, A. 4. 17 ; nrapar/yeXia nrapfiff^etKa- 
 fiep, A. 5. 28, have so many counterparts in classical authors, 
 that they ought not to be considered Hebraistic because they 
 frequently occur in the Old Testament. Hdt. vii. 10. 1, tjjv 
 afieivto r^vutfiijp aipeo/xepop e\ia6ai. Horn. //. i. 233, xal iwl 
 fUyap SpKop ofiovfiai. Xen. Cyrop. viii. 4. 9, inraKovup axoKrj 
 viriJKOvaa. Soph. CEd. T. 65, c5<rr' ov^ vttp^ y evBoprd fi 
 i^eipere. 0. C. 1626, 0o/9^ ZeLaaprat. ^lian, i///mji/ iplicrjae. 
 Plato, t/ Sif \iyoPT€<i SufiaWop oi Siafid\KoPTe<i ; <f>evyei iftvyp. 
 Siapofifia StapoeiaBai. ^sch., ieqaofuu vfi&p fterpiap heqaip. 
 Xen. Anab. avfi^ovKevofiepot ot/pefiovKeva-ep avrotf rdSe. 
 
 M. 2. 10, x'^P^^ /ieyd\T)p aipoSpa i^dprivap has been censured 
 as a double Hebraism. But in correspondence with fteydXrip 
 a^Spa we find in Herodotus, lOpoi /ler^a la^ypSxi, Xirjp taj(ypal 
 Tifuopiai. » 
 
 With &pBpe<i dSe\tf>ol koI irarlpef, brethren and fathers, 
 A. 7. 2, compare av8pe<i 'Adripoioi, apSpe^ SiKaarai (Demosth.) ; 
 fiaaiK^i dpSpl (Homer); &vSpa arparrr/op (Thucydides) ; apiip 
 nip<n]<} (Herodotus) ; homo gladiator (Cicero). 
 
 f' 
 
12 
 
 THK FBCIUi:.IAaiTIEa OF HELLENISnO GREEK. 
 
 The use of the word {vXov, for 'tree,' L. 23. 31, Rev. 2. 7 ; 
 22. 3. 14, has been oommented upon. But we have in Xen. 
 Anab. vi. 4. 3, Siurii vciXXait^ koI wavroSairoii km ftffydKon 
 
 M. ff. 6, ireiv&tnres /lAtl St^airres rijv &iKaioavvr)v. The pecu- 
 liarity of this passage consists in the union of the two metaphors, 
 hunger and thirst, directed at the same time to one object. 
 Each metaphor singly occurs in many, perhaps in all languages. 
 Shakspere, Ilenry |V., Fart II., ' Dost thou so hunger for my 
 empty chair P' Oicero, * sitire honores ; sitire sanguinem.' Xen. 
 Cyrop. V. 6. 1, oirrax ir/a vfuv iir^ •xapl^adat. 
 
 H. 10. 37, irvp^ i^^9 ivdUiv fUKKovTOi Toi>i inrevavrlovi. 
 . It is the same as Zeph. 1. la ; 3. s, ^MF} ^JHMp V^KIl. Isa. 
 
 26. il, LXX, i^Ji* irv/r tov? xmepavrlovt iSerat. — But the 
 devouring flame, 'ignis eda±,' is an expression which occurs 
 in many languages. Horn. H. xxiii. 182, roiiv a/ia aol irdvra'i 
 vvp iaOUi, Yirg. JEn. iv. 66, 'est mollis flamma medullas.' 
 
 M. 13. II, vfuv BiSorai jv&vm, may be compared with Xen. 
 Anab. vi. 6. 20, vfW' SiSorai iKKOfiiaai tov$ &v8pat. Mist. Or. 
 yi. 1, arri ruv de&v SeSorat v/tiv evrv^etv. 
 
 M. 20. 33, iror^putv rrlveiv. Compare .^sch. Ag. 1397, 
 vnepSiKav fiiv olv roirStvSe KpaTfjp' iv S6fioi9 xaK&p SBe 7r\i}<ra« 
 dpalwv avTm iieirivet fuiKfov. ForceUini explains Plautus, *ut 
 senex hoc eodem populo, quo ego bibi, biberet,' by ' ut eamdem 
 sentiret calamitatem.' 
 
 koiijlwtBm in reference to the sleep of death, M. 27. 62 ; J. 
 11. 11. 13; A. 7. 60, may be compared with Horn. II. xi. 241, 
 it^ i p^v aiOi ireawu Koipj^aaro j^aKKeop virvov. 
 
 avar/ieti in the sense of distress, calamity, L. 21. 23 ; 1 G. 7. 
 86, corresponds to pSiQ, Ps. 119. 143; n'12(, Job 27. 9. But 
 
 compare .^)soh. Prom. V. 107, avdr^KOK raiaS' {nre^fSypM, toKik. 
 Xen. Mem. iii. 12- 3, eit t^v avdr/ieai aKr/eivofrdrw ip-ireaovrei. 
 Tao. Annul, xi. 37, 'Supremi^ ejus necessitatibus ad misera- 
 tionem evicta erat.' 
 
 The expressions, ivSvaaaffat Xpurrov, B. 13. 14 ; ivtvaaadai 
 rov KUivov avdpanrov, E. 4. 24, which in sentiment belong to the 
 Christian element, are similar to Job 29. 14, pllt Miy>. Hom. 
 
 //, ix. 231, <( p.ii avye Soo-eai oKki^v. Od. ix. 214, fieyoKijv 
 hrui/iivov d\xi]v, Plato, Legg. 642 B, evvoia ivBveral rivd. 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 ■i i 
 
 i L 
 
 V ~ 
 
 
 A s 
 
 I 
 
 THE HEBBBW ELEMENT. 
 
 GENUINE HBBKA1SM8. 
 
 13 
 
 After we have deducted the instances in which the Hebraistic 
 tone and colouring is at least doubtful, there wiU remain many 
 phrases and idioms in which the Hebrew element must un- 
 questionably be acknowledged. It is difficult to conceive how 
 it could be otherwise. A work which is written by a foreigner 
 who has learnt English will have a pecuKar tinge derived from 
 his native tongue, and from the literature with which he was 
 conversant fromliis youth. This tinge will be more marked if 
 his work is designed for the use of his own countrymen. 
 
 The frequent occurrence of the phrase xal eyevero is doubtless 
 
 owing to Vn. The use of aCrq in M. 21. 42, where we might 
 
 have expected Tovto — Traph xvplov eyivero airnj — is owing to 
 
 the feminine n^\ in Ps. 118. 23. 
 
 Some peculiar forms of superlative, H. 9. 3, arfia affiav, 
 
 QVtlnprf ttfip. L. 1. 42, evKoYnpsvT) aviv fwai^l. Rev. 19. 
 
 16, BaaiKeixi paaOUtov zeal Kvpuxi levpUtv. 
 
 M. 25. 1. 6, e« diravrtjalv two?, or rivi, JIK^p? 1 S. 9. 14 ; 
 
 Jer. 41. 6. M. 12. 42, vSpuTa t^s w, T}^ 'OfH Ps. 2. 8. 
 
 L. 21. 8, vopeveadM mr'ura twos, nnN ^^n Judg. 2. 12 ; 
 
 1 S. 6. 13; M. 11. 25. i^p«\oyeur0M, Tri\n 2 S. 22. 50 ; 
 
 Ps. 30. 13. 
 
 Expressions for eternity and continuity, L. I. so, et? yeveh^i 
 f^eve&v. R. 16. 27, «« tows ai&va^ almmv, o^y\ aTlUf. 2 C. 4. 
 16, avaKuivovTM fmipt} Koi ripMpa, U\*l OV. R. 2. 14, ihi^eurxev 
 Tji BaKdie, the dative corresponds to *j. A. 6. 6, rjpeaey 6 
 \070v ivanriov iravrot rov ttXij^ows, ^^^^ LXX, Gen. 34. 18 ; 
 41. 37. Mk. 8. 12, dp.^v yJrym vpZv el Bodi^aeTai. This is ex- 
 plained under el among the Particles, Chapter VIII. 
 
 Among Hebraisms there is reckoned the accumulation of 
 synonyms which give force and variety to the sentiment, Mk. 
 12. 30 ; R. 2. 4 ; E. 1. 21. 
 
 It will be observed from this summary that the pure 
 Hebraisms are more of a lexical than of a grammatical character, 
 the efiect of early association rather than ignorance of more 
 ordinary modes of construction. The manner in which different 
 writers have followed one another in ascribing to this element 
 every term and expression which they did not understand. 
 
 
14 
 
 THE PEOULIARmBS OV HpiXENISTIO GREEK. 
 
 justifies the remark of I^iioke that Hebraism has been tbeir 
 hidden helper in all need. 
 
 TOKi AliEXANDBIMB ELEMEI^T. 
 
 The diction of the New Testament has been called the Alex- 
 andrine dialect from its affinity to the Septuagint version, which 
 was executed at Alexandria. This appellation is far from 
 correct, as the inspired writers were not citizens of Alexandria, 
 and it ia wrong to assume that they adopted the Alexandrine 
 dialect because they made sopve use of the Alexandrine version. 
 
 Attio Greek bean the same relation to the language spoken 
 at Alexandria which the English spoken by the educated classes 
 in Great Britain has to the speech of many foreign commercial 
 cities where all the provincial varieties in ' tone, -oooent, and 
 expression which England, Scotland, and Ireland can furnish, 
 astonish and oonAise the ear. While many of these provincial- 
 isms are confined to ootnmeroial intercourse, not a few will find 
 their way into local literature as more intelligible and expressive 
 to the parties imqjiediately addressed. 
 
 After the subjugation of the Greeks by the Macedonians, and 
 the extension of their conquests into Asia and Africa, tho 
 various dialects of ancient Greece were fused into rj Koivij 
 BidXeicrov, with an admixture of foreign words from Syrians, 
 Persians, and Jews. Of this Macedonian tongue the dialect of 
 Alexandria was a corrupt progeny engendered by the confluence 
 of Greeks, Mape^oi^ns, Africans, Carthaginians, Sicilians, and 
 of strangers from thQ renpioter regions of the East. We need 
 not then be surprised that writers of Galilee should employ 
 terms which were commonly received by their countrymen, 
 without any nice discrimination of the source from which the 
 words arose. 
 
 qiLicisMS. 
 
 Under the Alexandrine element we may arjange the Cilioisms 
 of St. Paul. 
 
 It is f^ecorded of iElschylus, himself a native of Attica, that 
 the effects of his visit to the court of Hiero at Syracuse were 
 seen in the Sicilian tinge which is discernible in his later plays. 
 Though this visit occurred after he had reached maturity, and 
 was in duration less than a year, his writings contain some 
 ^va\ SmtXiKai as the result. One of these, fiowoi, is adopted 
 
 # 
 
 
 THE ALEXANDRINE ELEMENT. 
 
 \l 
 
 
 by St. Paul's associate and companion in travel, L. 3. 6 ; 23. 
 30 As this was the case with ^schylus, we need not be sur- 
 prised that some CiUcisms are found in the Epistles of a native 
 of Tarsus, and of a student in its flourishing school of philo- 
 sophy. 
 
 1 0. 4. 3, AvaKpiveadM inrb dv^pow/iwjs ^txipai. We have in 
 Euripides and Sophocles ^fiipa Xvirpd, ^fUpai hrlrrovat, " days 
 of toU and sorrow ;" but not iveponrlvn ni^P<^* " t^e day in 
 which man bears sway." 
 
 R. 6. 19, avepomivov \eyo», " I Bpeak in a manner adapted to 
 human weakness." Plato uses, the word in a nearly similar 
 manner. Ap0pc»riv7) S6%a, "fallible human understanding." 
 Thucydides, iii. 40, has dftapretp avdpayirlvm, "human in- 
 firmity." 
 
 2 C. 11. 9, KaravapK^v tip<k, to be slothfut towards, press 
 heavUy upon, hang as a dead weight. vapKom, be torpid, 
 
 torpere. 
 
 C. 2. 18, tcvraPpaPevew rtva, give the prize against ; deprive 
 of the palm ; pass an unjust decision. Cone. Laod.,^ to fiif top 
 vucqaavra d^wvv rov fipafiehv, d\\' hip^ SiZovai airb, dSiKov- 
 fiivov rov viK^aavrov. This however is hardly a Cilicism. Dem. 
 Mid. 644, STpdrtiva xnri Mei£iov KaraPpafieudivra, " had an 
 unfair decision against him." 
 
 LATINISMS. 
 
 The departure of the sceptre from Judah by the reduction of 
 Palestine into a Roman province, was followed by the adoption 
 of Roman laws and customs, and by the use of Latin words and 
 phrases, such especially as had reference to the imposition of 
 tribute, commercial tranBactions, and military rule. 
 
 Such are dvadpiov, lerjvam, Kevrovplmv, KoTuovla, KovaraSia, 
 KoSpavrnt, ^vdpiov, 'lowrroi, Aifieprivixt, TJtniov, naKeTCKav, 
 fU/ifipava, fibitov, nrpavTUtpiov, ^ktmfi, miUKlvOtov, aiKapun, 
 aovBdpiav, atreKovKirmp, rdfiepva, TiT\o<t,.4>ponfe\\iov. 
 
 The following words are indifierentiy styled Aramaeisms, 
 Syraisms, and Chaldaisms: 'A^^a, 'AxeKSafid, "Apfioyei^v, 
 Bri0<yatSd. Kij^?, Kopfiav, 'E\a>i 'E\ai Xdfia aa^dxSavi, 
 'E<f)^a0d, Maiipj&va, Mapavadd, TaKa, Td\i0a Kovfii, Tafii0d, 
 
 Xepovfilfi.. 
 
 Some terms may be styled Rabbinical; for although the 
 Talmud was of much later date, the Rabbis in the time of 
 
16 
 
 ON THE PECULIARITIES OF HELLENISTIC GllEEK. 
 
 our Lord, used language which was subsequently known by 
 the designation Tabnudical. 
 
 There are also a few Persian words : a^apevetv, 7a(fa, /itcvyo?, 
 Hapyaplrr)^, /teyurravei. 
 
 If then the object of the writers of the New Testament be 
 kept in mind, we shall see that the fusion of the Qreek styles 
 effected ui the Kotvif StaXeKTOc, the language of the masses, 
 was admirably adapted to be the vehicle of communicating 
 divine truth to the world. Dr. Blackwall well argues (Sacred 
 Glassies, i. 38), "The old Greek writers have many foreign 
 words, as well as the sacred classics. In the times when the 
 most eminent Greek writers flourished, the Persian empire was 
 of vast extent, and had a mighty influence upon all Greece ; 
 by their wars, commerce, and travels, many of their words 
 became familial* in the Grecian language. So in the time of 
 the Apostles and Evangelists, the Roman empire had extended 
 its conquests over the greatest part of the world where. Greek 
 was spoken, which led them to introduce some of the Boman 
 words and phrases. These terms, put into Greek characters, 
 were very well understood by the persons to whom they were 
 addressed, and, upon several considerations, might be more 
 pleasing and emphatical than the original words of the lan- 
 guage. Shall it be allowed to Xenophon, Herodotus, and 
 Thucydides, freely to use Persian, JBgyptian, and other oriental 
 words P and can it be an unpardonable fault for St. Matthew, 
 St. Mark, St. Luke, St. Paul, upon occasion, to use Boman P" 
 
 If it be said that by acknowledging this fusion we surrender 
 the whole question as to the classical propriety of Hellenistic 
 Greek, we would point to the accuracy with which the inspired 
 writers have used nouns, verbs, and tenses, according to their 
 distinctive power (Chapters II., YI.), to the correctness with 
 which they have employed the several particles (Chapter 
 VIII.), and to the precision. with which they have preserved 
 the characteristic differences between words ^apparently synony- 
 mous (Chapter X.), as proofs of their acquaintance with the 
 more delicate usages of the language, at a time when Greek 
 was subject to many influences of deterioration and decay. 
 
 \ 
 
 
 ,1 
 
 J e 
 
 u. 
 
 !■- 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 ON THE FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 CLASSES OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 Substantives are to a considerable extent derived from, or 
 connected with verbs, and may be classed according to their 
 several affixes. To each affix a particular meaning is 
 attached. 
 
 The male agent or doer is represented by the affixes -rijv, 
 -TJjp, -Ttap, -ew, — as Kpirtfi, judge ; aar^p, saviour ; frnrap, 
 orator ; ^aaiKev^, king ; fiepianqis, fitatrnjii. The corresponding 
 terminations for the female agent are -reipa, -rpla, -rtv, -eta, 
 -taaa, — as awireipa, fiaaiXela, fiaatkitraa, ftaKaplrK. 
 
 Other terminations for the agent are -09, -ov : rpo^^, nur- 
 turer {rpi<fxo) ; royos, marshaller (too-o-o)) ; irofiiroi, conductor 
 {vifivw) ; aotSoi, singer (aeiSa) ; -iitjp, -fUvot ; iroi/i'^v, shepherd ; 
 -tov, -ovo^, ■fyyefidp, leader. 
 
 Nouns ending in -orta, -era, -<r«s, generally denote the action 
 as incomplete, or in progress : Biiala, sacrifice ; SoKi/ia<ria, 
 scrutiny ; irpa^ti, doing ; raft?, arranging ; av^an, increasing ; 
 Bo^a, Soic^aK, seeming. 
 
 Nouns in -/to? express the action of the verb proceeding from 
 the subject; the action and its result: Buayftov, pursuing, or 
 being pursued ; ohvpfuxs, act of lamenting, or lament ; aeiafuxi, 
 shaking, earthquake ; oraBfiof, standing, station, halting-place ; 
 BeafMi, binding, bond; oveiSurfio^, reproaching and reproach; 
 aaHf>povtafi6<:, self-control, soundness of mind. 
 
 Nouns in -fui, -fiuroi, denote the thing done, or the passive 
 object ; the result or product of an act : irpayfia, thing done ; 
 airipfia, thing sown; iroirffia, product of composition; fivfj/ia, 
 memorial; voji/ui, that which is perceived; ai^aa/ia, object 
 of worship. 
 
 Some nouns in -aii denote an action and the result : 86<rts, 
 
 c 
 
18 
 
 BUBSTANTIVBR DERIVED VROH ADJECTIVES. 
 
 giving, gift, as in English ' dose ;* vepvmlriaK, acquisition. The 
 aot of Redemption was an act of vepviroiqvvi, by which the 
 Bodeemer acquired the redeemed as a possession to Himself. 
 We may observe, Kptat^y the act or time of pronouncing sen- 
 tence ; Kpifta, the sentence pronounced ; xi^pv^n, preaching ; 
 Ki^pvy/JM, the matter preached ; fip&trii, the act of eating, to 
 be distinguished from ^p&fui, the substance eaten, B. 14. is. 
 17. 30 *, Kavj(fi<n<i, aot of glorying; wavp^/ia, subject-matter, 
 theme of glorying, 2 0. 1. la. 14. airoKpip-a is the substance 
 of the imoKpuTK, 2 0. 1. 9. iriJiptop.a has two meanings: 
 Active, rh TrXq/i^ wot«ti«, implendi actio. Passive, id quod 
 impletum est, or, id quo res impletur, 1 0. 10. 26 ; Mk. 8. so. 
 Thus O. 4. 4, T^ irXi}/M*/*a rofi -xp^vov may be taken actively, 
 i. e. a temporal space fiUed up as it were by the flowing in of 
 time; or passively, id quo temporis spatium expletur. Hdt. 
 iii. aa, iySa>Kovra fi" Srea ^6t)^ irk^pw/ta avBpi fuucporrarov. 
 So ACTtW may mean the act of creation, R. 1. 20, or the thing 
 - created, 2 0. 6. 17; R. 8. ig. Either meaning may be adopted 
 in G. 6. is: R. 4. 19, riiv viKptoaiv, the deadness: 2 0. 4. 10, 
 irdvrore rifv vlKpwrw rov Kvpiou 'lijaov iv r^ ffm/tart vepupi- 
 povre^, exhibiting in my person the putting to death of the 
 Lord Jesus : Ja. 1. as, iv ry irot^aei airrov, in his doing, in his 
 practical observance of the law. 
 
 Nouns in -ov, -eov, denote the result or -product of an action : 
 #cQSov, sorrow, irivdoi, grief, yh>o<i, birth, (f>do9 (^Q>f), light, 
 ^rei)&>9, falsehood. 
 
 Nouns of the first declension in -/*>;, ni;, denote the action 
 of the root, actively or passively : fivtjfiii, memory, that which 
 romembers, ypa/t/i^, line which has been drawn, Se<r/ii^, bundle, 
 Ti/ii), honour, price, okoJj, hearing, report, %apa, delight, £«&t^, 
 process of teaching, or' the- thing taught. ^ ireiafutvi^ may 
 mean 'conviction, the state of ' bding persuaded, or the art of 
 persuading, persuodendi sollertia; G. 5. a ; irX.i}o-/u>vi}, fulness, 
 satietas, the state, and expletio, the aot of filling, 0. 2. 23. 
 
 Nouns in -o«, ov, express the action of the verb, and some- 
 times the result : \6iyo<i, speaking, discourse, avopo^, sowing, 
 seed, ij>6p»i, bringing in, revenue. 
 
 SUnSTANTIVES DERIVED FROM* ADJECTIVES. 
 
 These are abstract words, such as those which correspond 
 to our terminations in -ness, -dom, -hood, and end in -la, -oniv 
 
 CLASSES OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 19 
 
 : ?" 
 
 ?^- 
 
 :■ 
 
 t 
 
 r 
 
 
 (-OTijTov), -avvij, -09 (-eo«) : aotftia, wisdom, iXijOeui, truthful- 
 ness, eCpoia, kindness, StKatoavvf), righteousness, tna^tpoavvri, 
 sound-mindedness, rdyp^, temporary swiftness, Ta^trn}9, habitual 
 speed, aryimaivti differs but little from d^tonyi (2 0. 1. 12 ; 
 H. 12. 10), except perhaps that it represents more the condition 
 than the abstract quality ; while arfuuriiM points primarily to 
 the process (1 Th. 4. 3, 4 ; IP. 1. a), and thence, with the 
 gradual approach of the termination in -/u>f, to that in -o-vi^, 
 which is so charaoteristie of the New Testament, the state, 
 frame of mind, or holy disposition, in which the action of the 
 verb is evinced and exemplified. (Ellicott.) 
 
 From nouns of agency we have other substantives in -r^piov, 
 -Tpov, -ctov, -pa, which signify the place of action, the means 
 or instrument with which the agent acts: tron^ptop, cup, 
 reXcAveioi', toll-house, elSetXeiov, seat of an idol, Sea/tam^putv, 
 prisoq, aporpov, plough, Xoyiov, oracle, yv/ivdaiov, school for 
 exercise, !Bpa, seat, KaXvirrpa, veil, fiKi<f>apov, eyelid, Xvrpov,, 
 ransom, iXaim^piov, the place or means of propitiation, SiSaaKd- 
 Xtov, SiKocrr^ptov, ^vkaierijpiov, rafueiov, dKpoa-rjpiov. 
 
 Personal designations signifying looaliiy end in -ei;^, -irtj^ 
 {-eiTK, fern.), -un, •voi, or parentage, in -(8i}9, -aSi;9, -uov, and 
 the feminine -(«, -M19, -lavrf, as Tapaeyi, Me^apev^t 'Ake^avBpevf, 
 ^ Afihfqpirtfi, Xavavinfi, Safutpeiri)^, Sa/iapeiTK, AepfiaSo^, 
 Na^api)v6v, 'Aauum^, Xpurrtavg^, raSapnjvoi, 'UptaSiavot. 
 
 Diminutives end in -iW, -lSu>u, -to'xo9, and belong to the 
 class of gentile nouns, or piatronymics.. From 7rat9 we have 
 TratStbi', iraiBdpiov, TTCuSiffKOi, rrcuSla-iei) ; from /lelpa^, ixeipdKutv^ 
 fietpaicvKkiov ; from Ix^ii, ix'^vBiov. But many of these forms 
 are used without any diminutive meaning: Bripiov, a wild 
 beast, fiiffkiov, a book, iftopriov, a burden, ireBiov, a plain. So 
 in Latin ' puella ' is the only word for girl. 
 
 Appropriated places end in -coi;, -tovia. Thus 'E\atmv, olive- 
 yard, arftciv, place of assembly, &/iireKu>v, vineyard, p-vKuv, mill. 
 
 CLASSES OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Adjectives derived from substantives end in -(09, -uco^, 
 denoting possession of, belonging to, as Stifioaioi, irordfuo^, 
 ^tKtoi and <I>i\ik6^, elpj)vato^ and etp^viKOfi ireptovatof, special, 
 ' peculiar, from irepiovaia, supplies ; iiriowTun, of the passing day. 
 So Sixauxi, fidrauK, yepatot, iroKatoi, apaioil StSaxTixof, apt 
 to teach, skilled in teaching. 
 
 c 2 
 
20 
 
 ADJECTIVES D]$BIV£D FROM VBllBS. 
 
 Adjeotives denoting the 'biaterial are formed in -eo9 and -ivo^ : 
 ypvaeot, golden, yAlucto^, made of bronze or copper, apyupeoi, 
 of silver, ^uXivot, of wood, \l0w(n, of stone, aKr)div6<i, of genuine 
 or true materials, adpiuvo<i, of flesh, partaking of human nature, 
 but aapKucoi, swayed by fleshly lusts. adpiavo<i indicates the 
 nature of the person, aapKucitt the bent of his mind. aKpo- 
 yuvuuov, the stone of the principal comer, as in Him the 
 two walls from the Gentile and Jewish world meet and are 
 united. 'Lapis angularis; omnia sustinens et in unam fidem 
 Abrahsa oolligens eos qui ex utroque Testamento apti sunt 
 aedifioio Dei.' hruvaiot is equivalent to ^l rijp lovaav ^/tipav, 
 sufficient for the current day. Like i<l>6Sio<i, lasting for the 
 journey, i^ftipio^, lasting for a day, xapiroi ^enjaiot, lasting 
 the whole year. Hom. Od. vii. 118. (See Wratislaw's Notes 
 and Dissertations.) 
 
 Formations in -vot, -im, denote time, place : Kadf)p.epivo^, 
 daily, ipdpivof, at the dawn, irpauvo^ early, opeivoi, in the' 
 mountain, raj^ivo^, with speed, depivo^, in the summer. 
 
 Adjectives which denote the full expression of the quality 
 expressed in English by the affixes -fill, -able, are formed in 
 •pof , -a\ui9, -et« : oltcrpm, full of olxrov, pitiful, pitiable, 
 Xvmjpo^, sorrowful, dapaoKeof, full of confidence,. ^doi/ep6$, full 
 of envy, ^^aptetv , graceful. 
 
 AMECrriVES DERIVED FROM VERBS. 
 
 Adjectives in -aiftot or -ifiot express suitableness or capa- 
 bility for the action of the verb: yp^t/Mi, useAd, ^&oS(/iof, 
 eatable, iroT(/M>9, drinkable, ffavdai/tof, deadly, Tpo^t/un, 
 nutritious. 
 
 Adjeotives in -vov, -X09, -poi, and -a9, express the meaning 
 of the verb (transitively or intransitively) : <f>av6i, (fuieipo^, 
 shining, \afi,trp6^, bright, Xonrov, remaining, arvyv6<i, odious, 
 iroOeivoi, longed for, fieti/ii?, fearful, SetXov, cowardly, diraTTiXoi, 
 deceitful, deceiving. The terminations in -tjXof, -caXov, denote 
 habit, custom : ipytKot, soon angry, irascible. Aristotle (Ethics 
 vi. 11) o( fiiv oSv opyiXoi rajfion ftiv opyl^ovrat koI oU ov SeZ 
 Kal i<ft oI« ov Set xal ftdWov ^ Set, iravovrai Si raj^iav. 
 
 Adjectives in 'fiav make the action, of the verb the pro- 
 minent attribute of the person : atSi}/ta>i/, bashful, iKei^iuov, 
 oompassiojiate, fiin^fuav, mindful, hrikt^aiiav, forgetful. 
 
 Gerundial adjectives are formed from the 2 aor. in' -rm. 
 
 ':' 
 
 VERBS DERIVED FROM NOUNS. 
 
 21 
 
 
 ■ij 
 
 n 
 
 Is' 
 
 ^ 
 
 " ^ 
 
 -Tfo?. These, like the Latin gerundials in -ndns, and the 
 supines in -tum, -tu, have the same meaning as the active 
 infinitive, conveying the idea of capability or adaptation. 
 Sometimes verbals in -tos express the result of the capability 
 or adaptation, both actively and passively : at/aero?, an eligible 
 man, a man adapted for choice, and one actually chosen; 
 /*e/*irr6?, capable of blaming and deserving blame ; direipaaroi, 
 incapable of tempting and of being tempted, Ja. 1. 13; 
 irape^o-a/CT-os. insidiously present, G. 2. 4, either introducing 
 themselves, or introduced by others; yvaxrroi, one wto is 
 capable of being known ; oSiaKpiTov, without making distinc- 
 tion; dwiTOKpnoi, without false assumption, unhypocritical ; 
 oKaKirTm, inexpressible. With these we may compare Latin 
 adjectives in -bills, and for the use of the same word in an 
 active and passive sense, we may compare • unfeignedly ' for 
 • unfeigningly.' 
 
 The termination -reo? expresses the infinitive with the 
 idea of necessity or duty : aamrria aoi i<mv -q dperq, virtue 
 is for you to cultivate, or aaieirriov itni aoi t^v apenjv, it is 
 for you to cultivate virtue ; Mk. 2. 22, L. 5, 38, otvov veov elt 
 daicov^ KMVOW pKifriov. 
 
 VERBS DERIVED FROM NOUNS. 
 
 Verbs which imply to be or to hate that which the noun 
 signifies, are formed in -da, -ia, -ewo, -d^, -^a: roKiwrn, 
 I have daring {ToXfiri), ^t\la>, I am a friend («^/Xo?), tcoipavim, 
 I am a ruler {Koipavo<i), ^veva, I am a murderer {(frnvevq), 
 dXtideva, I am truthful (aXijd^?), pxavreum, ai-xfuitMrrevm, 
 m-aytBevm, irrpareioiuu, eKKi)vify», I speak Greek or play the 
 Greek ("EXX»jv), 'lovSal^. In Ph. 2. 30, vapafioXsvadnepov 
 (Laohmann), from irapdfioXo^, making venturesome ; 1 C. 13. 4, 
 irepirepevertu, becomes not ostentatious; irepnepm, i, q. irpoirerrfi, 
 rash, heedless. In later Greek hrivKonreveiv meant hriaKovov 
 elvcu. 
 
 Words in -eww are joined to the dative when they express 
 the being in some state, or in the possession of some quality, 
 as ifiad^evae t# 'Iijaov, M. 27. 67; but to the accusative 
 when they express some action implied in, or consequent 
 upon, that state or quality," as /toftp-euffare irdvra tA Idin), 
 
 M. 28. 19. 
 Causative verbs, expressing that we carry out the act which 
 
 ■■■■ 
 
22 
 
 PABATIIBTIO COMPOUNDS. 
 
 is proper to the noun, are formed in -oa, -l^a, -afw, -wot. 
 alvm: Sov\6m, make a slave (SovKot). rarrewmo, (uaeom] 
 irurroa, make w«rro9, firm, siire, to be relied on, LXX, 1 Ki. 
 1. 36, iruTTUMrai 6 8eos: ttoXc/wJo), make hostile, TroXe/il^co, 
 make war, but woXeniat, I am at war (7r6X,6/io?), irXovri^, 
 i make rich, but irXovrim, I am rich (ttXoOtov), alj(/idKa>Ti^a>, 
 Sei^/MTl^a, dvaeefiarl^tt; X^Kalvto, make white (\6uAr09), 
 ^paivm, make dry (fi;p6s), trqualva, signify (arj^ia), Troi/miva, 
 tend as shepherd (voi/jlijv). 
 
 Frequentatives, Inchoatives, and Desideratives, are formed 
 from other V6rbs: arevofai, groan frequently (aThxo), <f,opelv, 
 wear, gestart (<l>epeiv, gerere), <rTpa><f>q,v, whirl over, voluto 
 (arpi<l>eiv, volvo), fi^daiuo, grow young (ij/Soa)), p^BiaiM, grow 
 tipsy (ludwo), jeKaaetat, desire to laugh (ytXdco), iroXefiriaeUo, 
 desire to be at war {mXe/iia), Spaaelat, desire to do {Spdw). 
 
 PARATHETIO COMPOUNDS. 
 
 Compound words are divided into two classes, parathetic ani 
 synthetic. In the parathetic class the several parts of the word 
 which are found side by side in the compound word may exist 
 distinct from each other : irapddeaKi, juxta-position. In the 
 synthetic class the inflexions of the earlier part of the combina- 
 tion are modified so as to appear in a dependent, inseparable, 
 and constant state. 
 
 In parathetic compounds we have separable juxta-positions 
 in which one or both members are adverbs, as ovKeri, ovSelv, 
 ivSefiia, ovSep, owrt?, as a proper name for Mr. Nobody; evay- 
 7e\os, Si/ffTw^ij's, Svarvxla, VTrtiperim, wn^/oenj?. 
 
 The most common of the uninflected words which stand at 
 the beginning of uninflected and separable compounds are the 
 eighteen ordinary prepositions. This facility of combination 
 distinguishes the ordinary prepositions from other words, 
 which are set before the cases of nouns, such as adverbs and 
 quasi-prepositions. In many of these combinations a new and 
 smgle meaning has superseded those of the preposition and 
 verb taken by themselves. Thus from yifyixoaKetv we have 
 warf,rfi>a>aKco, I read; iimyvyvtoaKa, I discover, decide; (lera- 
 ytyvu<TKo>, I change my mind, I repent; avyywtoaKa, I 
 pardon. From okoi/w is formed rrapaKovto, hear aside, hear 
 amiss, refuse to hear. 
 
 In some cases the construction follows the adopted meaning : 
 
 SYNTHETIC COMPOUNDS, 
 
 23 
 
 e^iarafuu, I stand out of, takes an accusative in the sense of 
 I avoid; ivrpiireaOai, turn in upon oneself, give heed to, 
 reverence. 
 
 Two or more prepositions may be found in the same com- 
 pound : vire^e<l>epev iroKepMW, bore away secretly from the war ; 
 Bunraparpifiii, obstinate contest, 1 T. 6. 5, Sid has its usual 
 primary force of thoroughness, completeness, intensifying ; 
 irapaTptfiai, collisions, hence hostilities, enmities. In avrawo- 
 SMvai, render bock a due (1 Th. 3. 9 ; 2 Th. 1. 6 ; R. 12. 19), 
 the dvrl marks the idea of return, the diro hints at the debt 
 incurred. 2 Tim. 4. 16, avfiirapeyivero, stood forward with me 
 as a ' patronus ' to plead in my defence, or as an ' advocatus,' 
 to support by his counsel. Demosth. av/ivapar/evo/iepo^ airm 
 
 SoKlpM^Ofliv^. 
 
 SYNTHETIC COMPOUNDS. 
 
 In the New Testament there are many compounds which 
 are properly synthetic, or, as they are frequently termed, 
 organic, though the parts which form the combination are so 
 obvious that they may be reckoned as juxta-positions. Such 
 are vowex&f, raweivo^ptop, raireiPo^poirvPVi ffKXrjpoKapBia, axkij- 
 poTpag^Xof, dxpoytopialoi, KapStoypaxTTqiif Sea/io^vKa^, f(peo)- 
 ^et\£Ti)v. Here we may mention aXXoT/9to67rt'o-«o7ro9, 1 P. 
 4. 15, analogous to dWorpioyptofio^, dXKorpunrarfla '. dpOptair- 
 dpeaKW, F. 6. 6 ; C. 3. 22, dpOpairoScUfuop, dpdp(iyiroeiBij<: : aifiar- 
 eie)(yaia, H. 9. 22, aifiaro')(apijv, aifiaroiTdtTrfi : BtxaioKpiaia, R. 
 2. 6, BiKauiKoyia, BtKauyirparfCa, BtKaiopofiia : aiTO/xeTpiop, L. 
 12. 43, aiTopofiot, avranoUta : licTpc»/ia, 1 0. 15. 8, perhaps for 
 i^d/i0Xa>/ia : irparoroKov, G. 1. IS, born before all the crea- 
 tion ; for the Word was the instrument of creation ; in C. 1. is, 
 raised before all from the dead. This use is analogous to 
 TrptoToirXow, spoken of the Argo (Eur. Andr. 865) going to 
 sea before all other ships; irp<or(m6po<i, going before the rest 
 of the army ; irpwroppvrov, flowing first. (Donaldson.) 
 
 In synthetic compounds the former part is an ordinary noun 
 (substantive or adjective), a verb or verbal noim, an uninflected 
 word or particle. Instances of ordinary nouns in addition to 
 many already given are o^ddKiioSovXeia, ladrf^eKoi ; verbs or 
 verbal nouns, eOeXodprjarKela. 
 
 Separable adverbs which form compounds are 0701', afia, apri, 
 eS, Trdkai, iroKip, irap, irX'^p, rfjXe. a/ia usually means con- 
 
24 
 
 SYNTHETIC COMPOUNDS. 
 
 <: 
 
 nexion in point of time: 1 Th. 4. 17, ifia ain> airoh Afma^ai^ 
 fieOa, at the pame time, together with them. Sometimes &fia 
 has the further idea of aggregation : R. 3. 12, irdvTe<i i^ixXivav, 
 dfia ffxpeuieijaav. (See Chapter VIII.) 
 
 ^ In the New Testament compounds with ei frequently occur : 
 evioKia, evepyerrji, evKMpia. evXafirji, eiikoyia, eioSoO/iot. 
 
 With &yav we have arfapaKTim, iyaWidofiai : Apri, Afnvyip- 
 vTrrot ; with ttXjjv, 7rXi)/i/ieX^t. 
 
 The numeral adjectives appear in StirXoC?, double ; hiirK&repov, 
 twofold, more than; hlarono^. double-mouthed, two-edged; rpl- 
 ^oXos, three-pointed; rplyLifvot, of three months; rerpdrfwvoi. 
 four-cornered; rtrpd^utv. company of four men; Terpdp.'^voi. 
 four months ; rerpdwow, reTpdpxn<l. 
 
 Inseparable prefixes are ij^t-, half: )}/«»^oi^9. half dead ; ij/it- 
 wptop, half an hour; ^/tttaws, half. Sva-, implying difficulty 
 adversity, like the English prefixes, iis-, mis-, un-. ill- : Svafida- 
 ToxTov, unbearable; BvaKoXot, hard to please; Sva/iop4,o<i, mis- 
 shapen; SvoTvx^i, unlucky; Svtropyot, ill-natured. 
 
 d is used in three senses, collective, intensive, negative. As 
 a coUective or copulative prefix, d is part of 5/ta: dKoXovOo^, 
 sharer of the same way ; «iS«X^6s, sprung from the same womb. 
 As an intensive d is part of di»d in the sense of remoteness, dis- 
 tance, extent : drewj?, intense, exceedingly stretched ; drevl^, 
 gaze earnestly; aairepxiv, very eagerly. As a negative it has' 
 the forms of dvd, dv-, in the sense of privation : a^/owv, without 
 mmd; ai/o/to?, without law, kwless; dvtXeut, merciless; dvey- 
 «X9/Tos, unimpeachable ; dv€(ij(vuurro<i, inscrutable; dv^pspo<i, 
 fierce ; dirdTap, afirfrup, a^va-ao^. 
 
 The latter part of the compound is frequently of verbal origin, 
 as irpoamro\r)iTTn<i, S«ftoXd/3os. Tlie use of the word in a 
 transitive or intransitive sense is sometimes determined by the 
 accent: X«^o^oXo«, throwing stones (actively); Xt^o/9oXo9, pelted 
 with stones (passively); x«t/>07/w«^''9.. writing with the hand; 
 Xetpoypa^tot, written with the hand. 
 
 Compounds with ipyd^o/uu are accented on the ultimate when 
 they signify a bodily or material action : Xtffovpyoi, worker in 
 stone; 'yeapyoi, husbandman; d/t-ireXovpyot, vinedresser; but 
 receive the accent on the antepenultimate or have the penulti- 
 mate oircumflexed when they denote a moral action, or an 
 operation and habit of the mind: Travovpya, unscrupulous 
 rogue; KUKovpyot, criminal; irepUpyoi, busybody; drfadoepyoi. 
 
 t 
 
 ' 
 
 " 
 
 THE FORCE OF THE AFFIX. 
 
 25 
 
 worker of good in a moral sense, but dr/aOoepyoi might be used 
 of an active worker. 
 
 Attention to the affix will frequently decide the meaning of 
 the passage. It has been remarked (p. 17) that nouns in -/109, 
 •fiov, express the action and its result. Apply this to Ph. 2. 6, 
 ov^ dpnrar/i/Mv ff/rfaaTo to elvai taa Sew, deemed it nothing 
 to be grasped at, no appropriation of what was not his own, to 
 be on an equality with God. Here dpnrarip.6^ is virtually equi- 
 valent to apnrarfpM, as dairaopM to Suarraapa,, haatft to hitpM. 
 The transition is very easy from the actus rapiendi to the res 
 rapienda, from ' the act of seizing ' to ' the object worth seizing.' 
 1 C. 1. 31, Bih T^f pMplat rov KfjpuypMTo^, through the (assumed) 
 fooUshness of the subject-matter of the Oospel message. H. 10. 
 1, vKthv yeip 2%o>i> o v6p,09 t&v /jteXKovruv dfyad&v, ovk avTTjv 
 T^v eUova T&v irpar/pAriov^ having a shadowing forth of evan- 
 gelical blessing, but no designed representation of the facts, 
 the historical transactions on which Christianity rests. Ja. 1. 
 17, iraaa Soo't; arfadtf koL irav BwpijpM riXeiop : the distinction 
 between Soan; and S<!>pi)pu may well be preserved, "Every 
 faculty of giving which is in its jiature good, and every gift 
 imparted which is in its nature complete." 
 
 There is no marked difference between the use of these affixes 
 and compounds in the New Testament from their general usage 
 in classical Greek. This alone ought to have exempted the 
 inspired writers from the slurs which have been cast upon 
 them. There is the tendency of the Hellenists to give graphic 
 expression by strengthening the verb with prepositions, so as 
 to describe the mode of action with greater clearness. Com- 
 pound adverbs and prepositions frequently occur, but not so 
 freely as in Byzantine authors. 
 
PECOLIAK OMISSIONS OF THE AKTICLE. 
 
 27 
 
 CHAPTER m. 
 SYNTAX, OR CONSTRUOTION. 
 
 K0UK8 BT THBHSELVEa, ASD IN COMBINATION WITH OTHER 
 NOMINAL FOKMS. 
 
 GoNSTBTTtrnoN, or Syntax, gives the rules for expressing and 
 connecting sentences. Every perfect sentence contains one or 
 more propositions. A proposition consists of three parts, 
 subject, predicate, copula : thus if we say, SoXmp ivrl xpntji, 
 Solon is judge, SoXuv is the subject, the person or thing spoken 
 of, KpiTtji is the predicate, or that which is said of the subject, 
 iari is the copula or substantive verb which connects the subject 
 with the predicate. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The article is not an essential part of sp^ch. There is no 
 trace of it in Latin; in-Syriao and Chaldee it can hardly be 
 said to exist ; with this exception, the parts of speech are essen- 
 tially the same in all languages. 
 
 The use of a part of speech not absolutely essential cannot be 
 expected to be fixed by the certain laws which govern the use 
 of other parts of speech. With this agrees the fact that no two 
 languages agree in their mode of employing the article. Though 
 it is a kind of indispensable constituent in Hebrew, Greek, 
 English, French, German, Italian, no two languages are bound 
 by the same rules. 
 
 "We may look upon the article as a kind of universal pronoun, 
 a pronoun of reference. Though it occurs occasionally in the 
 New Testament as a demonstrative, yet its power became 
 softened down, so as simply to express specification or emphasis. 
 Hence 6, i), to was used as a prepositive article corresponding 
 
 M r 
 
 
 ■.:• 
 
 more nearly to the German der, die, das, than to the English the, 
 or the French le, la. 
 
 The insertion or omission of the article would be directed by 
 the taste and judgment of the writer or speaker, as well as by 
 the genius of the language he used. That which the writer 
 supposes, imagines, or -intends to be definite and distinct, he 
 speaks of as if it were really so. His subjective views are to 
 him objective. The views of the writer, however, are not 
 equally clear to the reader, or can, at the best, be imperfectly 
 apprehended. The reason, then, for the insertion or omission 
 of the article will not be evident, unless we can look at the 
 matter from the same point of view as that in which the writer 
 regarded it. Moreover the writers of the New Testament were 
 affected to some extent by the vernacular use of the Hebrew 
 article H, which could hardly fail to impart a shade of colouring 
 
 to their employment of the article in Greek: e. g., H. 11. 31, 
 'Pa<i/3 fi iropptj : M. 26. 6, Sl/uovo'i tov XeTrpov. 
 
 The leading use of the article to express definiteness or dis- 
 tinctness will be evident from the fact that it is omitted with 
 words like fJIKuK, tQ. ovpavo^, daXaaaa, in the expressions awo 
 xara/SoX.'^f KOtTfutv, iv ap^, iv ^vpkp, am' apyrp mUrevt^, irpo 
 Kuipov. 1 P. 4. II, elf TuXaXei an Xoyia Oeov: the words \6yia 
 Geov are used without any definite article to designate the Holy 
 Scriptures of God, as being su£Sciently definite in themselves, 
 and having the distinctness of a proper name. Wordsworth. 
 
 FECULIAR OMISSIONS OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The article is omitted where no specification is designed, 
 though we naturally insert the definite article in English : M.. 
 5. 45, rov riXiov ainov avareKKft hrl irovripov^ Kal afadov<t, ical 
 ^peX^i hrX hiKaioxK Kal aZticov^, i. e. upon the class evil, and class 
 gooid, without specifying individuals of the same class, or 
 opposing one to the other: M. 9. I3, ov jap ^\0ov KoKkaai 
 BiKatovf aW* afiapruiKovi : M. 10. 21, irapaSmaei aSe\<j)Oi oSeK- 
 i^v €(« Odvarov Kal var^p riicvov, i. e., one holding the relation- 
 ship of brother, father, without specifying the individual : 1 T. 
 2. 6, el? 7^/1) &e6<i, el? kuX fieatrrji} Qeov Kal avOpanrcav : 1 T. 1. 9, 
 SiKal^ vo/to? ov Keirai, av6p.oi^ hi /ral CLVvtroraierovi, aaefiiai Kal 
 a/iapTm\oi<}, avoaiovi Kal fiefiijfKoK : 2 P. 2. 9, oZSe Kvpto? evae- 
 ^6t? e« ireipaapvv pveadtu, oZIkoxk h^ et? iipipav Kpiaea^ KoXa^o- 
 /Mvov? rripeiv : M. 17. 9, eK vexp&v avaarijpai : A. 17. 32, axov- 
 
 i ■'. 
 
28 
 
 pOUERIC VSB'OF THB ARTICLE. 
 
 I ■ 
 
 o-airret avixnaaiv veKp&v : B. 2. 36, ireptron^ jieu yhp iu^eXel 
 iiiv voftov vpdatrfff, iilp Si wapafidnit p6fu>v ^f k.t.\., if thou be 
 a law doer, but if thou be a law transgressor, &o. The absence 
 of th^ article in v6fu>v and v6/iov here makes that general and 
 indicative of the character of the person which would else have 
 been restricted to the observance of the Jewish law in particular. 
 It is as if pofiop irpdtraitp and vo/iov irapafiaTq^ were severally, 
 like PonoBereip, vo/wi^vXaicew, pofiodhn}^, pofioSiBdaKaXoii, one 
 compound word. So iii the use of irepirofiij, aKpo^vtrrla, the 
 absence of the article indicates that the meaning is not the 
 whole class of Jews and Gentiles severally, but persons having 
 the characteristic of the one and of the other. (Yaughan.) 
 
 Hence the article is often omitted with reference to our Lord : 
 M. 4. 6, ei vUti el rov OeoD, if thou hast the relation of Son to 
 God ; H, 1. 2, i\a\tia«p ^/liv ip vl^, spoke to us by one in the 
 relation of son. It is often inserted in Greek where we omit 
 it in English : M. 9. ll, /jsrh t&p TeKupuP koX dfiapTuk&p, By 
 T&p the speakers s{>ecified those who were present on the 
 particular occasion. Moreover, by the single insertion we shall 
 see that the reXopai and a/taprrnXoi were virtually regarded by 
 the speaker as one body. 1 T. 3. 8, Set oiv top iiriaKvirop, every 
 bishop, a bishop ; this is called the generic use. 
 
 HOMERIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 Before we' bring forward at length the Hellenistic use of 
 the article, we will briefly illustrate the Homeric: //. i. 11, 12, 
 ovpeKa TOP Xpvmjp ^IpAjo' aptiTrjpa 'ArpelS^s' i fdp fjKBe Boi,<: 
 hrl 1^9 'Axiu&p, because Atreides treated disrespectfully the 
 well-known Ghryses, acting as priest, for he came to the swift 
 ships of the Achssans. Here top Xpvaijp is often rendered, 
 th^t fanfous, that venerable man, Ohryses ; but the true reason 
 is that the writer spoke of him according to his subjective 
 view ; he knew no other Ohryses, and assumed that the mind 
 of his readers would go with him. In the next instance (6 
 fiip ^\0e) the article is clearly used as a personal pronoun 
 to obviate the necessity of again mentioning Chryses, as in 
 43, 2)9 liJMT evxpfiepo^' Tov S' SxXve ^ot/Soi 'AiroXKap, thus 
 he spake in prayer ; but him Phoebus Apollo heard. 
 
 The article expressed also the relative and the demonstrative : 
 125, aX.XA rh p,ep iroXUop i^errpddofiep, Tti BiSaoTai^ but the spoil 
 which we took from the sacked cities, that has been divided. 
 
 I 
 
 USE WITH 0eo9, npevfta, Kvpiot, Xpurroi. 
 
 29 
 
 With this use of to, compare the A. V., 'Take that thine is,' 
 • commanded him to be sold and all that he had.' 
 
 Again we have its use as a relative in ri, 72: km pt^ea-a 
 ifPiaaT "Ayamp "iKtop etaa "Hp 8m fiapTOffVP^P, "tVP oi irope 
 ^olfiov 'AiroWap, and acted as guide to the ships of the 
 Achseans bound to Ilium, owing to his skill in divination, 
 which Phoebus Apollo gave him. 
 
 In other passages the demonstrative force of the article is 
 almost lost: uTap tjp irore Saafibt tmjTM <rol to yipaii iroXv 
 fiel^op, but if any time distribution comes, you have the gift 
 far more distinguished, i65. 
 
 USE WITH 0609, IlpevfUl, KvplOi, XptOTOi. 
 
 There is an apparent vagueness and uncertainty in the use 
 
 of the article with words like Se6<i, irpevfia, Kvpio<i, Xpurroti, 
 
 but the following hints are worthy of attention (Q. R. No. 225, 
 
 p. 115). 0609 occurs without the article (1), where the Deity 
 
 is contrasted with what is human, or with the universe as 
 
 distinct from its Creator, or with the nature and acts of evil 
 
 spirits ; (2), when the essential attributes of Deity are spoken 
 
 of ; (3), when operations proceeding from God are appropriated 
 
 to one of the three Divine Persons; (4), when the Deity is 
 
 spoken of as heathens would speak, or a Jew who denied 
 
 the existence of the Son and of the Holy Spirit. But the 
 
 article seems to be used (1), when the Deity is spoken of in 
 
 the Christian point of view, as the one true God, opposed to 
 
 the gods of Heathenism ; (2), when the First Person of the 
 
 blessed Trinity is specially designated, unless its insertion is 
 
 unnecessary by the addition of iruTi^p, or some distinctive 
 
 epithet. Ilpevfui, without the article, denotes the Holy Spirit 
 
 as inspiring human nature, and blended with it; ^th thp 
 
 article, it denotes the Holy Spirit as distinct from the nature of 
 
 man. The article is found with Kvpun, when our Lord is 
 
 spoken of under attributes and relations peculiar to the Second 
 
 Person of the Trinity; but the article is omitted when these 
 
 attributes or relations are those of the one Godhead. Xpurr6<{, 
 
 'anointed,' gradually took the meaning of the Anointed One, 
 
 and then became a personal appellative. When our blessed 
 
 Ijord is spoken of in His more divine and imperial relations, 
 
 the article is employed ; when in His human personal relations 
 
 to man, it is omitted. (Quarterly Review, Jan., 1863.) 
 
30 
 
 TUB ABTICLB AS A POSSESSIVE. 
 
 THB A^TICLB AB A DBM0N8TRATIVB PRONOUN. 
 
 The article in the singular is used in the words cited from 
 Aratus, A. 17. 38, rod 7^/1 xal 7^vov ia/iiv. G. 4. as, rh yiip 
 'Ayap, for the word Hagar. 
 
 In distinctions and distributions, M. 13. 23, 6 fiev eKurov, 
 6 Si i^Kovra : in M. 28. 17> ol hi iSlaraaav, some doubted, in 
 antithesis to all implied in irpoaexvpriaav. A. 14. 4, oi fiiv 
 ^aav <fi)V T0($ 'lovSa/bif, oi hi aiiv tok airoaroXoK. Ph. 1. 
 16, I7t 01 ftiv i^ ipideia^ rhv Xpurrhv Kara/ffiKXovaiy oi Si 
 i^ arydiniv. E. 4. 11, iSwKev TOV9 p^p dTTOoroXot/f, tov$ Si 
 irpo^u^tK, Tov( S^ evar/yeXiardi. 
 
 In the . narrative style, 4 Si marks transition to a person 
 already mentioned, though i p,h> does not precede :-L. 7. 40, 
 o Si (fn)ai : L. 8. 46 ; Mk. 8. 28, oi Si aireKpldifaav. 
 
 THB ARTICLE A3 A POSSESSIVE. 
 
 The article often becomes equivalent to ^ possessive pronoun. 
 This use forms an intermediate step between its strict use as 
 a demonstrative and its general prepositive use. Thus nouns 
 which are in themselves indefinite become definite, as standing 
 in som^ certain relation to the definite person or thing there 
 spoken of: Thuc. i. 69, ov ry Swdp^i ciKXA r^ p-eKKqaei 
 dp,w6p£voi, defending yourselves, not by your power, but by 
 your threatening aspect: t^ iraiSUtp fiof,, the baby is crying. 
 2 0. 10. 10, ai P'iv ivurroXal fiapeiM Kal urxypal' ^ ii irapovala 
 Tov atopuTOi turOevT^i, xal X0709 i^ov0em)p4vo<i : 1 C. 5. 9 ; 
 2 0. 7. 8, iv T§ hrurroX^, in my letter: M. 11. 29, rairetvb^ 
 Tff KapSlq, in my heart: Mk. 6. 55, Vip^avro iirl toi« xpa/S- 
 fidroii Toiii KuKm ix""^"^ ireptfjiepeiv, upon their beds : A. 14. 
 10, elire p^dXy t^ <l>wpy, said at the pitch of his voice : A. 28. 
 8, iiriffelt tAv ;^«?jpa9 avr^ : so Mk. 9. 43. 45 ; 1 C. 7. 16, rl yitp 
 olSav, 7iWt, e» T9i/ dvSpa atoam; k.t.X.: 1 G. 11. S, a/cara- 
 xaXvTTTf) T^ Kf<l>dK^, with her head uncovered : B. 14. la, r6 pif 
 ridivM irpoaKoptpa r^ dZeK^, in th^ way of your brother. 
 Hev. 4. 7, TO Tphov ^&ov Sj(pv to irpoaonrov a>f AvOptoirvt, 
 the third Uving creature had its face as a human being : 
 L. 18. 1 6, irpoaitpepov Se avr^ Kal rh fipi^, even their infants : 
 Phil. 3. 19, &v 6 0€Oi ri KoCKla, the god they acknowledge is 
 their belly. H. 7. 34, airapd^arov l^ei t^v iepatavvriv, has his 
 priesthood not transferable, his priesthood which he holds 
 
 THE ARTICI,E AS A PREPOSITIVE. 
 
 31 
 
 li 
 
 ■ ;: 
 
 passes on to no other, airapd^arov is the tertiary predicate, as, 
 Eurip. Iph. A. 305, xdXop ye poi. ToUveiSov i^apeiBiaa<i, right 
 honourable to me is the reproach you cast. J. 6. 36, iym Si 
 iyw Tr)v paprvplap pelfya rov ^Itodppov, the testimony which 
 I have had borne to me is greater than the testimony given 
 by John. Isocr. to o&pa QprfTOP irdpre^ S^op-ep. 
 
 With this we may compare the use of the definite article 
 in English : " who have not bowed the knee to Baal," R. 11. 4 : 
 "the heart was affected in his case," De Quincy. 
 
 THE ARTICLE AS A PREPOSITIVE. 
 
 The prepositive article is used to distinguish the subject 
 from the predicate. This use may be traced back to an apposi- 
 tion of the name of the person or thing, with the article as 
 the pronoun of reference : J. 1. l, Oeo<i ^p 6 "Koyov : J. 4. 24, 
 Ilpevpa 6 060? : J. 17. 10, xal ra ip^ irdpra ad €<rr«, Kal rh 
 ah, ipd : J. 6. 63, ra fnqpara h iy^ \a\& vptp irpevpd iari Koi 
 Sow; iarip: M. 7. 13, 14, irKareia ^ irvki), eipvxapot V oS6<}: 
 M. 9. 37, o pip depiaphi iroXv'i, oi Si ipydrai oXiyoi : 1 0. 3. 19, 
 17 ydp aod>ia rov Koapov toutov pmpla irapei t£ 6eM iarl : 
 
 1 T. 6. 6, vopi^oprup iropurpop elvat rijp evai^euat; 1 J. 4. 8, 
 6 6eof arfdirt) iarlp. 
 
 In convertible or reciprocating propositions the predicate 
 has the article as well as the subject : M. 6. 22, 6 Xi^i;o« tov 
 ampATot eartp 6 6^aXp6<; : M. 13. 38, o Si arfpoi iariv o Koapo^ : 
 
 2 0. 3. 17, o Si Kvpio(t to irpevpa earip : Ph. 2. 13, o 0eo? eartp 
 o ipepy&p; 1 0. 15. 56. to S^KOirpop rov dapdrov ^ dpMprla- 
 7^ Si SupapK T^f apaprla^ 6 popa : 1 J. 3. 4, 17 dpuipria iarlp 
 ^ dpoplai Rev. 19. 13, KoKelrat to opopa avrov 6 Xoyo^ rov 
 OeoO. 
 
 The predicate has the article, but the subject is anarthrous 
 when the subject is a proper name, a personal or demonstrative 
 pronoun; J. 6. si, eydt eipi 6 apro^ 6 t^&p: I J. 4. is, 'Iijo-oS; 
 earip 6 v(09 tov Oeov : A. 4. 11, o&rof iartp 6 Xidoi 6 e^ov0epii0ek: 
 2 G. 3. 2, ^ ^(OToX^ ■ffpMP ipeii iare : J. 8. 18, eya> eip,t pap- 
 rvp&p: Mk. 7. 15, ixelvd iari rd Koipovpra rop apOponrop, the 
 man, i. e. mankind, the genus man as opposed to an individual. 
 When there was no reason to mark specification or emphasis the 
 article was omitted : M. 20. 16, iroXXot ydp eurt KXtyroi, oXlryoi Se 
 iKXeieroi: 1 T. 2. 8, eiralpoprat oalovi %«^a! : 2 P. 2. 14, 6<f>6aX- 
 /MVf ixovrev /tcorovv povxaXlSof : J&l. H. An. iii. 23, airia 
 
32 
 
 RETKOSPKCTIVE USE. 
 
 TOVTUV ^vcrtv arfadri : Isocr. KcCKht dt]<ravpit irap' avSpl airouSa^jt 
 
 ANTIOIPATIVE OB HYPOTHETIC USE. 
 
 The article is inserted where the existence of the person or 
 object expressed by the noun is fairly assumed : M. 5. 2S, tvffi 
 einio&v r^ avriSlict^ aov rajQJ, fi^irore ae irapaZA 6 avrtSiKO^ r^ 
 KpiT^, Koi o KpiTqii ae irapai^ r^ vmfpkTjjj, Kol elt ^vKaKriv 
 ^fjBriari, The individual addressed in tadi is assumed to have 
 an dvr/Stxof who brings the cause before a particular Kpirq^, 
 while the Kpir^t employs his hwqpknft. The article is omitted 
 before ^vKaicqv, as no single or definite mode of punishment 
 entered into the mind of the speaker. E. 6. 12, ovk iarlv fifuv 
 17 7r<£\i}: the contest assumed by the exhortation, {w) ivhvaaaOe 
 T71V iravoirXlav tov OeoO: Ph. 4. I7| ovx ^ft iiri^itTw to Softa, 
 oKXi iiri^ifra riv Kapirhv tov irkeovd^irra 6(« \6yop vfi&v. Here 
 the S6fia has the retrospective article, Kapirov the anticipative. 
 G. 4. fi, lua T^v vloffeaiav diroXd^a/ieii : in this adoption there 
 is a threefold gradation (1) as existing but not appropriated ; 
 (2) as appropriated through faith in Christ; (3) as perfected 
 by full communion in His blessedness and glory. 
 
 KETROSPECTIVE USE. 
 
 The article is inserted in the renewed mention of a person or 
 thing, or when it recalls to the mind some familiar object : M. 
 1. 24, Bieyepdeh airo tov virvov. tov refers to the 6vap (20), i><i 
 irpoaira^ev air^ 6 0776X05 Kvpiov, the article refers to aff/e\o<! 
 (20). M. 2. 1 1, iKdovre^ «('« ttiv oUiav, the house referred to in (g), 
 ov fjp TO nraiSiov. Mk. 4. I, mare axnov ifi^dtna ets to vXoiov, 
 the boat of which our Lord had ordered (Mk. 3. 9), tva irXoid- 
 piop irpoa-Kaprepy ain^ : L. 4. 20, irri^ai to ^ifikiov, diroSou? t^ 
 vTrifp&rg, the parchment or roll mentioned in (17), the attendant 
 who was in readiness to receive it: L. 9. 16, tow nrevre o/stow 
 KM TOW? hvo 'ix,^va<;, those spoken of in (13) : G. 6. 6, 6 kut- 
 70(pvnepo<i TOP \oyop. This is the same as in A. 15. 7, top Xoyop 
 TOV evafyeXiov : Tit. 1. 9, tov KUTtt TrjP 8iBaj(^v iriaTov Xoyov : 
 L. 1. 2, inrrjperai yevofiepoi tov "Koyov: G. 4. 6, 'Afifid 6 TraTr/p 
 was a customary formula of Christian prayer. At a very early 
 period the Aramaic title, Mk. 14. 36; R. 8. 15, was united to 
 the Greek synonym in reverent and affectionate remembrance 
 of Him who had taught us and enabled us truly to call God our 
 
 i 
 
 ! 
 
 ■,i :^ 
 
 J.- 
 
 RHETORICAL USE. 
 
 33 
 
 Father. Among the Jews a freedman by addressing any one 
 by the title Abba, might prepare the way for being adopted 
 by him. 
 
 RHETORICAL USE. 
 
 The article is inserted when the object is so well known that 
 the mere mention may be regarded as a repeated reference : M. 
 1. 23, ^ irap0epo<}, the virgin foretold by Isaiah 7. 14 : M. 11. 3, o 
 iprypptepot, the common expression for the Messiah, Heb. 10. 37 : 
 M. 8. 12, ixel loTai 6 K\av0fibi Kal 6 fipvyfi6<{ t&v oSoptup, the 
 weeping naturally associated with the outward darkness: M. 
 21. 12, T6>v iraXovpTap t^? irepurrepdv, 'the doves offered by the 
 poor :' J. 1. 21, o irpo^ijTiji el av, the prophet spoken of in Deut. 
 18. 16 : J. 6. 70, 71, OVK iya vfta^ rov? SeoSeKa i^e\e^d/Mi)v : . . el$ 
 &p iK tmv SwSeKa : G. 5. 10, t^ Kpifia, ' the judgment he deserves:' 
 Ja. 2. 25, inroSe^afiipi) tov^ d^iKow, 'the spies who came to 
 Jericho.' Sometimes the rhetorical use serves to mark contempt 
 and scorn: M. 18. 17, &<nrep 6 idpiKot koX 6 TeKa»vri<!. "Not a 
 heathen man, who may be a good man in his way, but as the 
 heathen in his heathenism." Wordsworth. With this compare 
 2 Chr. 28. 22, ' this is that king Ahaz.' 
 
 Under the rhetorical use may be placed monadic nouns, 
 indicating objects of which only one exists, or can be spoken of: 
 M. 4. 5, TO irrepvyiop, 'the apex of Solomon's porch:' M. 6. 15, 
 TOP futhiop, Trip \v)(piap: J. 13. 6, toi» ptirriipa: M. 26. 27, to 
 ironjpiop, ' the cup used at the Paschal feast.' So of the period 
 known as the period of the day,»week, year : M. 20. 2, ix htipo- 
 piov T^f rjfiipap: L. 18. 12, 8lf tou (ra/S/Sdroi/ : H. 9. 7, aira^ 
 tov iputvTov. Here the article is used in a distributive sense, 
 where we employ an indefinite article, as ' so much a month.' 
 
 In many of these cases where the article is not required in 
 English, we can account for its insertion in Greek by putting 
 ourselves in the position of the writer or speaker. His sub- 
 jective views are to him objective. The article limits what 
 might have been a general predicate to some particular object 
 or period present or presumed to be present to the thoughts of 
 the speaker and hearer. ' Multa quae nos indefinite cogitata 
 pronuntiamus, definite proferre soliti sunt Grseci, ejus de quo 
 sermo esset notitiam animo informatam prsesumentes.' (Sintenis, 
 quoted by Winer, § 18.) Ph. 3. 2, fiKh-ere tov? kvpo^, ^hrere 
 TOW? KaKoixi ipydrai, 'the dogs, the evil workers,* whom the 
 
 r: 
 
34 
 
 OBNXHIO USB. 
 
 Apostle had in liu mind; 3 T. 4, 4, hrl roit'uvdaw hrrpmrtf 
 aovTU : we may aocount for the insertion of the article by con- 
 sidering that in the mind of the Apostle the errors of the future 
 would bo only exaggerations and expansions of those which 
 then existed. Bey. 5. 13, i) eiXoi^la koX ij rifi^ xal ^ So^a kuI 
 r6 Kparoti the article limits the blessing, the honour, the glory, 
 the might, to those to whom it is here ascribed, as belonging to 
 them exclusively. In doxologies, wittft the exception of Ij. 2. 
 14; 19. 38, io^a regularly takes the aiticle when used alone; 
 K. a. SO ; 16. 37. E, 8. ai. Ph. 4. 20. 2 T. 4. is. H. 13. 31. 
 2 P. 8. 18. When it ia joined with one or more substantiTes it 
 appears sometimes with the artide, 1 P. 4. it. Bev. 1. 6 ; 7. la ; 
 sometimes without it, B. 2- 10. IT, 1,; |7. Jude 25. In some 
 oases Sofa may take 'the artide as an abstract noun, but it is 
 preferable to consider it aa used rhetorically. X^Uico^t on G. 
 1. 6.) 
 
 OBNBBIO. vex. 
 
 The article from its hypothetio use is applied to distinguish 
 all the individuals, members, or objects, belonging to a particular 
 class, species, *or genus. This is the case in English : ""The 
 poet* s eye in a fine frenzy rolling." 6 070^09 TroXtrijs, any one 
 answering to this description ; t^ o^iKifia aiperd, 1 T, 3, 2, 
 Set oiv rhv hriaKowoy dventkiprrov elvcu : J. 2, 26, iri'axocnce tI 
 j}v h> T^ &v0pwKf. ' in human nature ;' mankind generally : M. 
 12. 35, 6 tu^aOii dvdptnrot, < every man of whom we assume that 
 he is good :' Ja. 2. s, rotv «t»;^v«, 'those assumed to be x>oor :' 
 M. 12. 29, ToO tajfupov, 'any strong man:' h. 18. 27, ra aZwara, 
 'the things assumed (o be impossible with men:' J. 4. 23, oi 
 aKr)6ivol irpttvKwnfrcd, 
 
 It is important to bear in mind that the noun substantive is 
 aimexed to the article by means of the participle of existence 
 understood, i itnjp signifies the male being assumed to be a 
 man; o vXowrtoi, the person assumed to be rich. Sometimes 
 the participle of existence is inserted, Arist. Hth. Nic. iv. 2, oi 
 ItaKuna S^un Svrei iJKurra irXovrovai. Hence the predicate, 
 when it is expressed by a participle, contains an assumption 
 within itself: M. 4. 3, i ireipd^v: 13. 3, <nrelpav, the agent 
 assumed to be the tempter, the sower : 1 Th. 5. 7, oi yiip tcaOev- 
 Sovre^, for sleepers : 1 0. 9. 13, oi ri, ieptt ipya^ofievoi. 
 
 From the generic use the article may be omitted in English 
 
 "■I ^ 
 
 4 ': 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 '■-^ % 
 
 \ 
 
 % 
 
 THE ARTICLB WrfH AXTBIBDTIVES. 
 
 35 
 
 where it is ins»ted in Greek : J. 3. 10, av el 6 £(&unMX«f, ' a 
 teacher;' one who is teacher: 2 0. 12. 12, ret injfteia tow a'jro- 
 OToXov, ♦ the credentials of (one who is) an Apostle :' G. 3. 20, 6 
 Iteoirrfi, 'any one who acta as mediator;' G, 4. I, o K\Tipov6/io<i, 
 •any one who is heir:' Ja. 2. 6, v/m(V Si i)nitdaa,Te rhv irrarxp^t 
 • ye however count without honour any one who is poor,' ' the 
 poor man/ or 'a poor man:' B. 2, 13, oi &Kpoarra\ vofutv, oi 
 nroiifrai po/iov, the article denotes a class; iucpoaral'VttiMv, 
 woi-qraX-vo/iov, tqrm virtually one word, and the translation 
 f hearers of the law,' ' doers of the law,' is correct. 
 
 As the predicate when it is expressed by a participle always 
 contains an assumption, oi crw^o/ievoi, oi airoKKvftevoi mean 
 respectively the class assumed to be saved, lost, and may be 
 rendered 'the saved, the perishing:' L. 13. 23, Kvpu, ei oKln/oi 
 oi aw^fuvot ; A. 2. 47, o Si Kvpuyt irpoatriBei, rovi aa^opAvow 
 Koff iipJkpav t% ixicXria-ia : Bev. 21. 24, ra edvr) r&v ira^ofi,ivap : 
 1 0. 1. 18, o X070V 7ap 6 ToC (rravpov rot? fuv mroXKv/iivoK 
 fuapia iffri, tow Si ato^o/iipoK fipZp Sivap-i^ Oeov iariv ', 2 C. 2. 
 IS, Xpurrov exmSia i<r/ih> r^ 0e^ iv to(9 a-w^o/iivQK koI iv rot? 
 airoXKv/iivoK. 
 
 Bishop Ellicott remarks on these present participles, "How 
 simply yet how instructively they place before us the two 
 classes, each under its aspects of progress and development, 
 each capable of reversed attitudes and directions, but each at 
 the time of consideration wending its way, the one silentiy 
 moving onward to light and life, the other turning its sad steps 
 to darkness and to death I The mere tense is in itself a sermon 
 and a protest, a sermon of blended warning, consolation, and 
 hope to those who will pause to meditate on its significance ; a 
 protest against those who tell us that the existence of two 
 classes of men animated by two opposing principles is contrary 
 to the teaching of experience." (Aids to Faith.) 
 
 THE ARTICLB WTTH ATTKiptmVES. 
 
 When two or more attributives are assumed of the same 
 person or thing, or whore several subjects are viewed as 
 belonging to the same class, the article is inserted before 
 the first attributive, and omitted before the attributives which 
 foUow. 
 
 In English, the Secretary and Treasurer means one person, 
 the Secretary and the Treasurer mean two persons. In speak- 
 
 1)2 
 
36 
 
 THE ARTICLE 'WITH ATl'RIBUTlVES. 
 
 ing of horses, the hlack and white means the piehald, hut the 
 hlack and the white mean two different horses. 
 
 M. 21. 9, o( Bi Sx^^ ®' npoofyovrev ical oi aKoKovQownet 
 iKpa^op. The insertion of the article hefore aKoXovdovvre^ 
 indicates that the party which followed was distinct from that 
 which preceded. A. 13. 16, 'AvBpe<; 'laparpdrai Koi oi <j>o^ov- 
 fixvoi rov Oeop. The insertion of the article before ipo^ovftevoi 
 indicates that the proselytes formed a distinct party from the 
 Israelites. M. 21. 12, i^ifiaXe nrdvrai tov9 iraXovvrai koI 
 &Yopn^ovTa<i iv Tf> Up^. The buyers and sellers are regarded as 
 one class of traders, hence the article is prefixed only to the 
 first attributive. 
 
 In the following iq^tancea one person or object only is meant : 
 M. 13. 23, 6 oKovav Kol avvimv : A. 3. ] 4, tov &r/iov koL Slxaiov : 
 Mk. 16. 16, 6 irurrevaaf xal pairriadek : Mk. 9. 25, to ttvcC/ui to 
 oKakav koX k<o<I>6v: A. 17. l, StoSevaavref riiv 'Aft<f>liro\iv xal 
 'ArrdXXaplav, Amphipolis and ApoUonia were regarded by the 
 writer as one district : Mk. 15. l, oi apxiepei^ /lerh r&v irpeafiv- ■ 
 ripcov xal •ypaftftariup, the elders and scribes are regarded as 
 forming a class by themselyes, distinct from the chief priests : 
 A. 3. II, KparoifPTO^ tov uiShno^ ytoKov top Herpop Ka\ 'ladpprjp, 
 as much one as the other, regarding them as the joint per- 
 formers of the miracle: A. 17. is, XajSoi/re? iproXijP irpbv top 
 Si\ap KoX Ti/iodeop, Paul at Athens regarded Silas and Timothy 
 as one, and sent a message to one as much as the other, but 
 Silas and Timothy acted independently in staying at Thessa- 
 lonica. This is marked in 14 by the double insertion of the 
 article, vrrifievop 5 to Si^i icai o Ti,/M0eoi iKei. 2 Th. 2. 4, o 
 apTueelfUPO<i Koi {nrepatp6fievo<i : here the article really performs 
 a kind of double duty; it serves to turn avrtxet/tevot into a 
 substantive, and also indicates that the two participles refer to 
 the same individual. (Ellioott.) 1 Tim. 4. 3, Tolf irtorotv koI 
 hreypuKoat ttip oKijffeMP, these constitute a single class, the 
 latter term being explanatory of the former. Tit. 2. is, ir^oo-- 
 Sej(pfiepoi Ti/v ftaxaplap iXiriSa koI hru^avetap t^« £o^¥ toD 
 fieyoKov Oeov xal aoyr^pof ^fuop 'Iijaou Xpurrov, waiting to 
 receive the blessed hope and manifestation of the glory: T% 
 So^f depends on ikirlSa as well as on eiri^dpeiav. The two 
 substantives are closely united, and under the vinculum of a 
 common article. There is a twofold iirKftdpeia^ .the first t% 
 j(apnoi (ll) introductory to the second, which is t^« Sofijf. 
 
 . 
 
 'm 
 
 THE AKTICLE WITH THE DEFINHfO CLAUSE. 
 
 37 
 
 The latter clause must be translated, 'of our great God and 
 Saviour,' but more from exegetical considerations than from the 
 position of the single article, as iirttfuipeia is a term specially 
 and peculiarly applied to the Son, but never to the Father. 
 
 NOUNS IN BEOIMEN. 
 
 When the noim has a genitive case depending upon it, the 
 general practice is, that the article is inserted with the noun 
 that is governed, ajs well as with the noun that governs : M. 
 3. 2, i} ficuriKela t&p ovpap&p : 1 P. 3. 20, ^ tov Oeov fuiKpodviila. 
 Sometimes the article is repeated after the governing noun 
 for the sake of significancy and emphasis : M. 26. 28, to alfui 
 fiov TO t§s Kaivij<i Sia0tiicTi<i : 1 C. 1. 18, o Xoyot 6 tov aTavpov. 
 
 There are, however, so many deviations, that we cannot lay 
 down a positive rule, or point out any decided principle on 
 which the usage rests, except by referring it to the subjective 
 views of the writer. In H. 9. 13 we have to aliui Tavpap 
 Ka\ Tpar/utv, where al/aa has the distinctive article referring to 
 a well-known fact, but Tavpwp and Tparftav denote these animals 
 generally. In the mind of the ymter the phrase may have 
 formed but one idea ; or it may have been his object to lay a 
 stress on the alfui, not on the ^nimftlt^, 
 
 THE ARTICLE V^riTH THE DEFININO CLAUSE, 
 
 ' The article is generally omitted in the defining clause, as 
 the words form but one idea, and is only inserted when the 
 object of the writer is to give th^t clause prominence and 
 emphasis. 
 
 In Attic Greek the article is rarely omitted in the defining 
 clause, except after verbal substantives, or where the structural 
 connexion of the clause is palpably close with what precedes. 
 
 Where contrast is intended the article is inserted ; 1 T. 3. i3, 
 TToKKifp irappiiaiav ip TrloTei Ty ip J[purr^ 'Iijaov. By the 
 insertion of the article, two shades of thought are expressed; 
 the latter of vhich explains and expands the former. " In fide 
 eaque in Christo Jesu coUocata." nrioTi<i, the foundation, the 
 substratum of the irappi^o-la ; so 1 T. 1. u ; 2 T. 1. 13 ; 3. 15. 
 A. 20. 21, Bia/iapTvpofiepoi . . . Trjp etf tov Qsop /lerdpoiap kuI 
 •jri<TTip T^v eh tov Kvpiop tfimv 'Iijaow Xpurrop : A. 3. 16, 
 1) v(<m<i 17 St' avTou: G. 3. 21, el yap iBodTj v6(u><i Swdftepot 
 ^woiraifiaai: R. 2. 14, idpi) tA fit) vofiop exovTa: Tit. 2. 10, 
 
88 
 
 run ABTICLB WITHOUT THB NOUN. 
 
 T^v htiaaicaKtav ripf roO irmr^poi ^ft&it : A. 26. 18,' (toO Xafieiv) 
 K^Sjpov iv ToU ^ytaafUvoK, vUret if e»f i/jU. 
 
 Where no contract i* intended the article is omitted : 2 Th. 
 3. 14, «l Si T(« ovj^ {nroKovei t^ X^o» ^/i&v St^ 7% ^«rro\'^: 
 2 0. 7. r, di'a77^XXa>v ^/uv . . . tov vfmv ^\ov inrip i/ioO: 
 1 T. 6. 17, TO(t TrXovo-ZoK iv T^ i<vi> at&vt rrap^rfyeXKe. 
 
 There is no contrast between aapxa and irpevfta (or dva- 
 <rrpo^v), in B. 9. 3, rwv <rvftev&v fiov Karh aapKai E. 6. 6, 
 To!« KvploK Kurii vapKa : 1 0. 10. 18, ^fKbrem rov 'I*rpar)\ xarii 
 adpKai E. 2. II, v/Mt« iroTC rii idvrt iv aapKl, 
 
 The use or the omission of the artide befor^e a participle will 
 , firequently depend on the subjeotiTe impressiou of the writer. 
 Some indeed , have attributed to it a derisive import, which 
 is virtually contained in itfsi rhetorical use : " Artieulus irrisioni 
 servit." Yalokner. B. 2. I, tA yhp avrii vpdaatit 6 jcplvav : 
 M. .27. 40, o tearaXdov rov veiov , . i tcard^dl avb rov aravpov. 
 
 The article is omitted when the primitive verb has already 
 been construed with a particular preposition, or when the 
 adjunct clause is implied in the particular noun: E. 3. 4, 
 iwaade vofjaai t^v trvvefflv ftov iv t^ ftvanipl^ : Ph. 1. 26, 
 hul rifi ip,^ irapowlw! irpoi vfi&i i E. 3. 13, iv raU ffkiy^etrl 
 fjLov imep ipAv. So Hdt. 6. IDS, ^ ofyyeXla irepl t&v ^aphluv : 
 Thuc. 6. ao, ij itr^oKii es t^i/ ^ATrucrfv: 2. 62, f) avyKOfitBi) iK 
 T&v arfp&v era rh &mt : Plutarch, Pomp. 58, ai irapaKKqaeK 
 inrip Kalaapos. In all these the attributive, together with 
 the substantive, denotes but one leading idea. 
 
 THE ABTICLB "WITHOUT THE NOUN. 
 
 The artide is the pronoun of reference. Where the article 
 by itself is sufficient to denote the reference the noun is omitted. 
 " These omissions fall into two classes : (1) when a substantive 
 just named would be repeated in the same sentence ; (2) when 
 the substantive is some general term which is implied in the 
 words eficompanyiog tho article." Donaldson, § 399. 
 
 The following words are very generally taken for granted: 
 
 (1) Names of relationship, woy, ffvyanjp, 7W17, aSeK^i, /tifnjp : 
 M. 1. fl, Ja^lS 6 fiaaiKei>i iyivvijaa rov SoXo/i&vra iic t^ tou 
 Ovplov {ywalKoi): M. 4. 31, 'Jaxafiov rov rov ZefieSalov (viov): 
 Mk. 16. 1, Mapla, 1} rov *IaKufiov (juirrip) : J. 10. 25, Mapta ^ 
 TOU KXunra (>)/tnni). 
 
 (2) Qenerol tonus referring to location, possessions, employ- 
 
 i. 
 
 
 :■ 
 
 
 THE AUTIOLB WITHOUT THB NOUN. 
 
 39 
 
 ments : L. 2. 1, onroypa^eaBai traaav r^v olicovfievriv (yfjv), every 
 part of the inhabited world, or of the world subject to the Boman 
 sway: Ph. 4. 18, Se^d/ievoi irapA 'Eira<f>poSiTov tA irap' v/i&v 
 (Xpij/iara) : A. 28. 10, avoffoph^oit hredevro rh, vpoi rr/v -ypetav : 
 h. 19. 42, el iyv<u<i koI ait tA wpo? elp^VTjv <rov {irpdrffiara). 
 
 Dr. Donaldson remarks, the omission of irparfiui or irpd/yftara 
 is regular whenever we wish to express as generally as possible 
 all that belongs to or proceeds from the person or thing 
 signified by the accompanying word: tA rav deS>v, all that 
 proceeds from, or belongs to the gods: ri. 7^9 voKe(o<i', the 
 state and all belonging thereto : rii rov iroXi/tov, war and its 
 consequences: rii tear i/tk irdvra, all that belongs to me: rd 
 Kaff" iiftipav, every-Aaif affairs : to rtft eKevdeplas, what relate 
 to liberty : rit toO vrpriav, childish things : ri, t^9 eipijvtfi, the 
 things which make for peace : rh r^ otKoSo/i^v, things wherein 
 we may edify one another : to vepi ri, to xard Tt, the particular 
 circumstance : to Trpot ri, relation : tA irapd rivov, whatever 
 proceeds from a person, information, commands, presents, and 
 the like. 
 
 (3) The word avBpanroi is c6nstantly omitted in expressing 
 association, connexion with others jp time and place: Mk. 
 3. 21, o{ vap' avTw, his kindred, the members of his household : 
 M. 21. ll, 6 vpo^n^rni 6 diro Na^pir: A. 13. 13; 2L 8, ol 
 rrepi rov IlavKov, Paul and his companions: ot irep* rov 
 ATi/MHrdivt), Demosthenes with his party : ot irepi rov ^CXnnrov, 
 Philip and his supporters. 
 
 (4) Obvious nouns, i. e., such as express the words or works, 
 the sentiments or condition of a person, are inferred from the 
 structure of the sentence or the gender of the article : M. 6. 34, 
 fjt^ oiv fiepi/ivijarjre e/v r^v avptov (fi/tipav): A. 16. II, t§ 
 iTTiovap eit NediroKiv : A. 19. 38, d/fopaioi w/ovtm : Mk. 9. S3, 
 o Si 'It/aow elirev auTf» to (ft^/Ui) el Svvaatu rrurreOa-ai K.r.\. : 
 L. 14. 18, iip^avTO a-iro /iMi (ywoftlii, ^v\^) itapavreurOtu 
 n-dirrcfc J. 6. 2, iirl rf irpofiarucf (ttiJXjj): J. 20. 12, Xevieoii 
 Kodi^oftevot (ifuirloK) : A. 2. 25, iic Se^i&v fuw icrriv (jtep&v) t 
 33, Tff Se^i^ otn> rov Qeov vy^Otk (%£(/>(): L. 3. 5, larat rit 
 ffKoXth e^ evdeiav (oSov) : Ja. 3. 1 1, /M)rt ^ irt/y^ ^'* ^% avrfpt 
 oiriji Ppvei to 7XVICV KctL to triKpov {iSap) ; L. 12. 47, Sap^erera* 
 rroKKd^ {'ir\rjyd<i) : 2 G. 11. 24, ^0 'lovSahtv irievraKK reaaapd- 
 Kovra 'irapa /ilav e\aj8oi>. 
 
40 Tint aUtiolb m formation of the subject. 
 
 THE ARTICLE IN FORMATION OF THE SUBJECT. 
 
 Prodicable words or sentences may be turned into subjects by 
 prefixing thft article. 
 
 Adjectives, participles, M. 25. 46, oi iimioi ek ^a»r)p alwpiov : 
 
 1 0. 1. 19, Ti]v <ro<ftlav r&v ao(f>&v km, rijv aweaip r&v awer&p : 
 J. 3. 21, 6 trouiv T^i» oK^Oeiav : 2 C. 11. 4, el fiiv 6 ip)(6fi€Po<i 
 aWov 'Ii}aovv Kijpvaaei : G. 1. 23, 6 SiaKuu ij/*as irore evtvffeXl- 
 {iETat: R. 3. li, ov« Sorw i iK^ryr&v tov Qeov: E. 6. 17, tow 
 auTTjplov for t^ vtyrijpUvi : the converse to which is ^ hnri/ila, 
 
 2 0. 2. 6, for TO hrifrtiuov. 
 
 It is desirable in a literal translation to preserve the dis- 
 tinction between a participle with, and a participle virithout 
 the article. Hence we should render 2 T. 1. 10, Karapy^aavroi 
 /iiv rhv Odvarov, having made of none effect : M. 5. 22, iTa<{ o 
 6pyi^6fievo<t, every one who is angry : L. 6. 47, irai 6 ipxofievot: 
 1 C. 11. 4, was av^p •irpoaev)(6ft€vo9, every man while praying, 
 at the time of prayer: Xen. Anab. i. 2. 2$, ol /ihi e^aaav 
 a(md^ovTd<i rt KartucoirijvM . , . oi Si, v7ro\et>]>0ii>Ta<{ koI oi 
 Svpafiivovi evpetp to dKKo arpdrevfia . . . diroXiaOai: G. 6. 13, 
 oi vepiTetipoftevoi, those jwho are getting themselves circum- 
 cised: G. 5. 3, iravrl dvOpwira vepirefivofiiv^, to every man 
 submitting to be circumcised; not t^ irepiTp,r}0evTi,, or t^ 
 irepiTerfifjfiev^. It was not the circumcised as such who 
 became in a strict sense. otfi^iKhat SKop top Koafiop ir\r)p&aai, 
 but they who submitted to the rite with this object, 
 
 Infinitives, R. 7. 18, to BeKeip irapaKenal fjMi: G, 4. 18, 
 KaXoi> TO ^rjXoDaBM iv Ka\^ Trdprore : B. 11. 8, 6<]>6a\/ioi<i tov 
 ftif fiKiireip xaX &Ta to8 /li/ aKoveai, eyes of blindness and ears 
 of deafness. 
 
 ' Adverbs, L. 16. 26, oi ixeiBep irpot ■^fiat Bianrepuaip : J. 8. 23, 
 v/teii iK T&p Karto iorii M. 24. 21, L. 22. 69, to wi/ : G, 4. 25, 
 26, ^ vvp 'lepowaki^iJL, the ceutre of Judaism, and the ancient 
 theocratic' kingdom ; ij apw 'Iepovaa\'q/i, the typical representa- 
 tion of Christianity and the Messianic kingdom. Of. ' the out- 
 patient,' 'the then mayor,' 'my sometime daughter ' (K. Lear). 
 ■ Cases of nouns, L. 20. 25, ra Kaiaapoi, rd tov deov : M. 21. 
 21, TO T^? avKfji : 2 P. 2. 22, to t^? dXij^ofiv irapoi/iloM. 
 
 A conditional clause, Mk. 9. 23, t^ el Bvpaaai irurrevaai : 
 L. 1. 62, ipipsvop Ty iruTpl avrov to, tI &p BeKoi KaXeiaffai 
 
 THE ARTICLE AFTER VERBS OF EXISTENCE. 
 
 )41 
 
 r 
 
 avTOP : L. 9. 46, eUrfjKJde hk SiaXoyur/ioi ip aiiToh to, tH &p e'ri 
 fiel^wp avT&p ; 
 
 THE ARTICLE AFTER VERBS OF EXISTENCE. 
 
 When the article is inserted after a simple verb of existence, 
 the real predicate of the sentence is the identity of the subject 
 with another object ; but if the word or combination of words 
 after the verb of existence is without the article, the attribute or 
 circumstances signified by that word are predicated of the 
 subject. 
 
 Identity is expressed in convertible or reciprocating pro- 
 positions : 1 C. 10. 4, )} Bi irirpa ^p 6 Xpurros:, see p. 31 : B. 
 7. 7, o pofuxi d/tapria; ia the law sinful? has it a tendency to 
 generate sin ? If the article had been inserted, the question 
 would have been, are law and sin abstractedly the same P B. 
 7. 13, TO oSv dr/aOop ifiol yeyope OdpuTOi', did then that which 
 is good prove to me death? B. 11. 6, ^ xdpK oi/xm ylperai 
 X°'Pi^i grace loses its property of grace; grace ceases to be 
 grace : M. 13. 39, o ik depurp^i trvpriXeia tov al&poi eorw* 
 oi Si Oepurral drf/e\oi eUrai, The article is omitted before 
 <nwTe\eM, as more than one event is signified, of each of which 
 the harvest may be symbolical; 'the reapers are angels,' not 
 the entire angelic order. J. 3. 6, to yeyeppfip,h»>p ex T^f aapK09 
 adp^ iari' Ka\ to yeyepptifiivop ex tov irvev/taTOS itvevftd e<TTi, 
 is of a fleshly, is of a spiritual character. The insertion of 
 the article has a tendency to divert the attention from the 
 inherent meaning of the word. If in J. 1. l, Ge6<i ^p 6 X0709, 
 the article had been prefixed to Qeof, the sense would have 
 been that the Word was identical with the entire essence of 
 the sole Deity; but by the omission of the article, all that 
 is involved in the notion of Oeov is predicated of the Word, 
 viz., the proper nature and attributes of Deity. .M. 16. 16, 
 at) el 6 XpKJTot 6 v/09 toO OfoO tov dlui/ro?. The words 6 
 vio<t TOV 6600 occur in Mk. 3. 11 ; L. 4. 41 ; 22. 70; J. 1. 34, 
 60 ; 1 J. 4. 15 ; 5. 5, and the point involved is the identity of 
 the person spoken of with the Christ, i. e., the Messiah. In 
 other passages, where vlot is without the article, the point 
 involved is the intrinsic meaning of the expression vioi tov 
 Oeov. In M. 4. 3. 6, the challenge is not, 'if thou art the 
 Messiah,' but ' if thou claimest relationship of Son to God,* ' if 
 thou hast extraordinary power in virtue of that divine gene- 
 
42 
 
 •vrrra. vbbbs or oalliko, xBvommso, 
 
 ration.' The Miemies of oar Iiord ohafged Him with blasphemy, 
 and taunted Him on the cross with the use of the e^cpression 
 vm Tov Beov elftl. The charge brought against Him was not 
 that He asapmed to be the Messiah, but that He professed 
 to be of the same nature with God« J. 10. 33, 5ti o-v avOpamot 
 &¥, troteiv trtcmnp Oeov. A. 19. 36, ovk elai 6eol ot £(d xctp&i/ 
 fwofuvoi, the divinities made by hands have not the character 
 of gods. The predicate is generally without the article, LXX, 
 Job 28. 28, ISoit 4 Bewrifind i«m iro^Ut. 
 
 WITH VBBBS O? CKLLXSQ, APFOINTINO. 
 
 - Th« article ia omitted after vteba of calling, appointing, in 
 order to fix attention on the peculiar inherent meaning of the 
 word: EL l.a, hv WiiKt tcK*ipoviiJUty,iravr<oP: Rev. 12. 0, i 
 KoKoifietfov ididfioXoi j Lt £3. 3>, t^ tottov rhv KaTuoijupov 
 Kpavlot, -.J 
 
 It is found, howevelr, afteir subh V^rbs in the sense of a£Bxing 
 the name : Xen. Cyr<^, iii. 3. 4, iaxucaKoUvTei tov evepyeniv, 
 Toi> ivSipa TOV Jvya&ov i Anab. vL 4. 7> iitiy(eipov<n fioKKeiv t^ 
 Ai^itnrov ivaKaKovirtei ^v irfHi&oniv, 
 
 The idiom of the Greek language requires the article with 
 many words where it is not required or admitted in English. 
 Thus the article is used with indicative pronouns, 5Se, olnoi, 
 JMuwf, and even with correlatives, rotovrov, too-ovtov : L. 2« 36, 
 i <Sv0p«nro9 oStdv: 14. 13, olrro^ &vdpa»9roi ; M. 7. S3, 4v iKelvg 
 T^ ^/tiptf : 13. 14, *rhv ar/pmi iKeivov: Mk 21. 63, iKelvtxt S irKdvot: 
 24. 48, 6 Kami SoOXos ^xewof : Mk. 0. 37, it t&v rotovrtap 
 irtuBuMtt one of children who are such f 2 0. 12. 23 ( J. 4. a, 
 T^vSa r^» ir6\iP, this city here^ pointing to one in view. 
 
 60 with possessive adjectives, especially when they are used 
 for the objective genitive: L. 22. 19, era t^p ifi^p uvdfuni&iPf 
 for tiie purpose of calling me to mind: B. lit 31^ t^ vfterip^ 
 e\ie*, by the meroy shown to you : 1 0. 15. 31, r^ iifteripav 
 icavx*}fTiP, my rejoicing on account of you t 2 T« 4. 6, t% ifi^ 
 &p(£K\icreta^ * 
 
 The article with voK^, iron, SKKJoi, SKof, introduces some 
 modifications of meaning : B. 6. 16, oi voXKoi, the many, the 
 mass of mankind : 1 G^ 10. 17, ot woXKoi is opposed to etf, and 
 means though many : 2 G. 2. it,dKi oi iroKKoi, ' as the majority' 
 of the teachers at that time. R. 12. 6, ol iroXKol ip aiu/ui i<r/iep 
 iv Xpurr^, rh Bi utaff cU aX\i}Xci>i> ^MKf\, collectively we form 
 
 THE ABTICLB WITH ITa?, "O'Kot. 
 
 43 
 
 > 
 
 :: 
 
 ; 
 
 one body, individually we are related to each other as the 
 members of one body. Vaughan. M. 6. 39; 10. 23; l2. 13, 
 ti\v oKKrip, the other: 1 0. 14. 29, ot 5X\ot, the rest, cceteri, 
 J. 20. 25; 21. 8: Rev. 17. 10, 6 &\\o<i, the remaining one 
 of seven : M. 4. 2I, oKKow Svo SSeXffmK. 
 
 The radical signification of iras is all : when it is used of one 
 object its meaning is the whole, entire, all the, in an intensive 
 sense; of several objects its meaning is every, in an extensive 
 sense, like Ikooto^. 
 
 Intensive sense, the whole, M. 21. lo, rraoa ^ w6\i<ii Mk. 4. l, 
 vm o ^\o9: L. 2. 1, iraaap t^i» oUovfUpi^: 1 T. 1. 16, t^v 
 viurap fuuepodvftlap, the fulness of his long-suffering. Some- 
 times the intensive and extensive senses are found in different 
 ckuses of the same sentence: Phil, 1. 3, evxapurra t# ©e^ 
 futv ^l woffu T§ i*vela vfi&p vdprore hf nrdxrg Be^crei fiov, I give 
 thanks to my God on the ground of my whole remembrance of 
 you, at all times, in every request. 
 
 The extensive sense, every kind, species, variety: M. 3. 10, 
 vav UpSpop: L. 3. 5, Trav Spot: J. 2. lo, was av6petvo<i: Ja. 3. 
 7, vaaa ^vaK, all varieties of natural disposition : M. 4. 33, 
 vaaap poaop, disease of every kind: R. 7. 8, TrtUrav hnffv/ilav, 
 all manner of concupiscence, A. V. every kind of irregular 
 desiio: 1 T. 2. U, & veurjj {nraroff^, yielding subjection in all 
 cases : 1 T. 6, l, tow? iStow SeoTroros rrdtnii ripajii d^touv ^elv 
 dwTOP, of honour in every form and case in which it is due to 
 them: 2 T. 4. 8, iv irdaji fuuepoBviila, koI StSayy, in every 
 exhibition of long-suffering, and every mode of teaching : Tit. 
 2. 16, fierh ircun)^ ^troT^?, with every exhibition of authority : 
 K 4. 31, vaaa iriKpia : 1 P. 1. 10, vaaxi apaarpo^y : 1 T. 1. 16, 
 ireunfi aira&o)^, every kind of acceptation. 
 
 When the article is inserted iroi stands before the article and 
 noun, but when ira? is emphatic it stands between the article 
 bnd substantive : A. 20. 18, rov iravra ypopop : G. 5. 14 ; 1 T. 1. 
 16. In the plural, A. 19. 7 ; 27. 37. The adjective without the 
 article expresses not an intrinsic quality belonging to the noun, 
 but a circumstance or condition predicated of it. The adjective 
 is thus a kind of indirect predicate: E. 2. 21, iraaa oucoSo/i'^, 
 the building in every part. So in Latin, "non omnia moriar." 
 This may bo remarked more closely in the use of 0X09 : M. 4. 
 33, SKijp t^v FaXtKalap : 16. 86, tov Koa/MP SKop i L. 10. 37, i^ 
 oXiyi rifi KupSlat aov: Ph. 1. 13, ip SK(p Tf> vpantapUf. Fre- 
 
44 
 
 THB ARTIOLB WITH avTOf. 
 
 qaendy SKoi without the aitiole may be rendered adverbially : 
 J. 7. 23, SXav ivdptairov, 6. man in every part, or entirely: J. 9. 
 34, iv a/MprluK di iyennjOris SKtn. 
 
 In G. 3. 88, tnmiKKxurtv ^ fpa^ rh irdvra virh dftaprlav, 
 some interpret tA irdpra of creation generally. But in R. 11. 
 33, we have trwix'Keurev o ©eos roixi irdvrai ek atrelOeiav. The 
 difference between Toin trdina^i and tA irdura ia about the same 
 as between • all men ' and • all mankind.' The use of the neuter 
 ia natural and suitable when the object is to express a sentiment 
 in general terms : 0. 1. 16, tA vdvra, the universe. 
 
 iiravres is stronger than vdvrei. ♦' Avayrei universes nemine 
 ezoepto designat; irtwrev ssape tantum plerosque.'^ Valckner. 
 wdtrrev ivrl tow TrXiurrM, Hesyohius. 
 
 ^ The use of avrSi may be compared with the Latin ' ia,' and 
 its derivatives ' ipse,' « idem.' 6 vlot airrov is equivalent to ' fiUus 
 ejiis :' o dvi)p avrSi. < vir ipse,' the man himself: o airrbi dvijp, 
 *vir idem,' the same man. 
 
 ' 6 avTOf, the same, is followed by a dative of the person : 1 0. 
 11. 6, S»/ ydp icrri. Ka\ rh aiirb -rf i^vfnifUvy : 1 P. 6. 9, elSore<i 
 rhainh. r&v iraOrifidrav Ty iv Koa/iip ifi&v oBeX/ftirvn hrm- 
 \eur0M. See the Dative of Coincidence. 
 
 awTos is never used as a pronoun in the nominative case, but 
 merely in concord with the subject of the verb, meaning ' alone,' 
 'of one's own accord,' 'he, and no other:' M. 1 21, avrbt yip 
 araxfu rov Xoiv ainoi k.tX.: M. 8. 17, avrbv tAs da0eveia<{ 
 VMfv eXafie : H. 13. 6, aMi yhp etpijKev, for he himself has 
 aaid.^ Of. the Pythagorean term avrot i^xi. L. 6. 42, oiros 
 h T^ 6<f>6aK/i^ aov Soicbp ov fikiirap: L. 11. 4, xal yhp airol 
 d^Upxv vavrX h^tKomi fip.w: E. 6. 23, ainwi aaniip tow 
 awfiaroi: E. 4. Il, xal avroi IBaKe, 'ipse, nemo alius:' M. 27. 
 «7, Js Koi awTO? ifiaffifrewrt t# 'Jri<rov : J. 4. 2, KuiToiye 'I-qaoxK 
 ainixi oiiK ifidim^ev: L. 24. 39, airrov iyeo elfu. 
 
 avTOi is used to give emphasis to the action or state signified 
 by the verb, especially where a series of actions or^ciroumstances 
 is recorded respecting a certain subject : L. 16, 23, 24, 6p^ rhv 
 'Affpaap, . . . Koi owrov tfrnv^aat elwe. So xal airrov : L. 16. u ; 
 17. 16; 24. 31, Kal avrol: L. 2. 60; 17. 13; 18. 34; 24. 35! 
 With this we may compare the use of xai oiroi in L. 20. 28, idu 
 TWO? aSeX^s diToedvri e^t^v ywaiKa xal oSro? aTeKvo<i diroddvy. 
 Here no greater stress can be laid on the person in the second 
 cbuse than in the first ; the introduction of oirtxi calls attention 
 
 4 
 
 '; : 
 
 ON THE USB OF awTOf. 
 
 45 
 
 to the circumstance as expressing the condition on the occur- 
 rence of which the injunction rested. Where a succession of 
 facts is stated, rising one above the other in importance, koI awrov 
 is followed by xai oimxi : L. 19. 2, (Sow dvrip ovofiuTi xaXovfievo^ 
 ZaKj(aioi Kol avrm ^v apj^ireKuvT)^ xal olrroi ^ irXovato^. 
 
 In classical Greek awro? ia used in the oblique cases when 
 there is no occasion for the express mention of the subject 
 represented by it. But in the New Testament the oblique cases 
 are used so frequently as to amount to actual redundancy. 
 This probably arose from the familiarity of the writers with the 
 system of pronominal a£5xes in Hebrew. To this we may also 
 attribute the repetition of o-ow in M. 6. 6, of futv in L. 12. is : 
 M. 8. 1, Kara^dtm Si ainm diro rov ipovi ^Ko\ov0t}<ra» a\n& 
 5^Xo( iroKKoL 60 in 8. 6. 23. 28 ; Mk. 5. 2 ; J. 15. 2, irav KXij/ta 
 ip ifuii p,i) <f>ipov Kapvhv aJpei avro. 
 
 In other cases avro? occurs more frequently than perspi- 
 cuity requires: M. 5. l, leaOitravrw airrov irpoai}\0ov avr^ ol 
 fiadfp-aX airrov: L. 23. S3, xal KadeKmv aino everiiki^ev awTo 
 aivSovi Kal edijKev ainh h> fiv^/um Xa^evrm. See Mk. 10. 16. 34. 
 
 In some instances where awro? has preceded, a further de- 
 scription of the person meant is given to add vivacity to the 
 narrative : J. 9. is, arfovaip aiirop Trpof tov« ^apuraiovs, top irore 
 rv<l>\6p : J. 9. is, i^ymnjaap tow yopei^ airrov tow dvapKk^aiVTO^. 
 
 airrol in the plural is used as a collective to express the in- 
 habitants of a place or district, the persons present on a par-; 
 ticular occasion, or more remotely those embraced in the 
 antecedent notion: M. 4. 23, wepiijyep 0X171/ rifp FaXiXaiap 6 
 .'Jijo-owf Si£daK(OP €P Tali avpar/ayaK ain&p (i. e. the GalilsDans) : 
 2 C. 5. 19, 6eo<s JjP iv Xpurrm KoapMP KaraXXdaatop kavr^ fiif 
 Xorfi^ofuvoi airroK rh irapairrwfuira airrav, i. e. the inhabitants 
 of the world : L. 5. 17, Bwa/ui Kvpiov fp> ek ro laaOai airroiK, 
 i. e. the people He was teaching : 1 P. 3. 14, TOf Se <f>6^ov avr&v 
 p.i) ^o^Orjre, the fear which might be impressed on them by 
 the class indicated in 13, t^ 6 leaKuxrtov v/iav ; E. 5. 13, ra yap 
 Kpv^ ytvopsva inr' avr&p alaxpop i<m Kal Xiri/eip, i. e. t&v t^ 
 Spy a rov axoTOv^ iroiovvrav, 11. 
 
 PERSONAL FRONOUNS. 
 
 The older writers used the personal pronouns, iyut, aw, with- 
 out any particular emphasis. But these expressions for the 
 subject do not occur in the New Testament, except as in Attic 
 
46 
 
 FSRSOMAL PBONOUKS. 
 
 Greek, for the purpose of «iupliaflis, antithesis, or contrast. 
 Thus M. 6. as. 34. 34, iyit Xiyo> : M. IQ. 31, /lif oiv <f>ofiridffre- 
 ■aoKKStv oTpovOUw Suu^pere v/m!? : L. 10. 94, ttoXXoI Trpo^nfrai 
 ical fianXtK rjBilijqvav iZelv & v^(9 /SXiirere: L. II. 19, e^ hk 
 irfit^ip BeeX^efiovK iK^dWa> rii Saifiovia, oi i/loi v/i&p iv t/v» 
 . iK^dXKot/ai; J. 12. 34, ^/Mt9 ^icoi<rafiev K.r.\. koX vw <ru 
 XiyeK . . . ; 1 J. 3. u, ^/tew oiBafuv 2t( ficra^e/S^xa/iei; ix rov 
 Oavarrov evi t^i> ^riv: J. 10. 36, v/Mt9 Xeyere &Tt pKcuT^imnt. 
 Here v/m!« is opposed to & t^ viiu^ vn&v (34) : J. 10. as, t^ 
 ifr/a h iyo> vout i» ivoftari toO Ilarpw fJ-ou rtaha ftaprvpei vepi 
 ifutu t 2 0. 11. 99, T^ eurOaitl KaX oiie aadav&; vh onaviaki^erM 
 icaX ovK «7<^ <nvpovfuu ; In the second clause the excitement of 
 feeling ia marked by thp insertion of eyu. — 
 
 Sometimes the- personal pronoun is repeated: B. 7. 31, 
 evplaKa Spa rov v6/u>v t^ Oikovri ifiol imieiv to icaKov, art ifiol 
 rb KtuMV irapdiceiTM. 
 
 The pronoun of the Second Person is expressed when there is 
 a pointed manner in the address : J. 9. 36, ad imrrevt^ eit rov 
 vlovroD Qeov: 1 0. 15. 36, d^pov trv, S <nreipei,<i ov ^aovoielTM 
 iitv firi anroddvjg : J. 9. 34, iv aftapriaw <ru ir/ewrfdr)^ SKot' KaX 
 av SiSdaneK 17/M9; J. B. 48, Sanapelrry; el crv; J. 13. 6, Kvpie, 
 <ri fu>v vitrren row iroSav ; J. 5. 44, troit^ Bwaade vfieii irurrevtrai 
 So^av trapk <l\\^\a>v Xa/u/Sai^i/re? ; K. 3. 3, (n> iK<f>€v^ to Kpijxa 
 Tov Qeov; 2 Tim. 4. 6, 6, Zv hi vfj<f>e iv irSurt . . . 'Eyat yhp i]Sri 
 arrhihoiuu. 
 
 The reflexive pronoun hvrov is used in a reeiprocal sense 
 with nouns of the First and Second Person : B. 8. 33, fiftevi 
 ainoX iv iavroZi artvd^oftev: B. 13. 9, tvyainjoeK rov irk^viov 
 <Tou <09 iavTOV : 1 O. 6. 19, ovk iari iavr&v : 2 0. 1. 9> cujtoi 
 iv iavrot^ to diroxptfia toS Oavdrov i<r)(^KafLev'. Mk. 10. 36, 
 Aiyovref irpin iavroui (i. e. aWijXovv). So in provincial German, 
 *wir wollen sioh wasohen, statt, wir wollen una waschen.' 
 
 The indicative or demonstrative pronouns, SSe, oStov, iKelvof, 
 are equivalent to the Latin ' hie,' 'iste,' 'ille,' as distingfuishing the 
 three positions, where lam, where you are, where he ia. Thus oSe 
 is used for the first, and ovro; for the second personal pronoun : 
 Eurip. Ah. 690, /t^ dvijax inrep towS' avSpoi, do not die for me; 
 o&rof av, you there ; ri tovto Xir/tK ; what is that which you say? 
 The most emphatic pronoun for the third person is iKelvoi: 
 Thucyd. iv. as, ovk iifnf airoi dXX*. iKelvov arpamiyeiv, Cleon 
 said that not he himself, but the other (Nicias) was general. 
 
 DEMONSTHAirVB FRONOUNS. 
 
 47 
 
 tKetvof denotes special distinction either of credit or discredit: 
 UepucXSyi eKcivoi, that famous Pericles : A. 3. 13, Kurh vpoaayirov 
 nCKdrov Kpivairrot iKelvov diroXuetv, when that unrighteous 
 judge; where iKelvov is emphatic as opposed to vpsK (14). 
 In 2 Tim. 2. a6, owros and iKeluwi are by some referred to the 
 same person, i. e., Zid^oKov iitayprifiivoi \m ainov e« tA 
 ixelvov deXifiM, being taken captive by him to do his will ; 
 where owroO is inserted, as iKelvoi} is unfit for mere reflective 
 use, and conveys the idea of the subject with emphasis; but 
 ixelvov brings out emphatically the danger and degradation 
 of those persons who had just been taken captive at the pleasure 
 of iKelvoi, their mortal foe. Some explain the passage, 'being 
 rescued by the servant of the Lord to do the will of God.' 
 Others render the passage, 'having been taken captive by the 
 devil, they may recover themselves out of his snare to do the 
 will of God.' 
 
 In the distinction of difFerent persons, o&ros generally means 
 the latter, i. e., the nearer, and eiceti/o?, the former, i. e., the more 
 remote: L. 18. 14, o^o<i SeSiKau0/i€vo<i ets rov oUov nare^v ^ 
 iKeivof, the latter, namely, the publican, rather than the former, 
 the Pharisee, 
 
 02to9 does not always refer to the substantive last mentioned, 
 as A. 4. II, ovTOi iariv XWot o e^ovdevqdeU w^' vfUtv rStv 
 oUoSofMvvTwv. Here oiro<i 19 appropriate because of vpMv 
 which follows, 'This we do you to wit.' A. 8. 26, irrX rijv oSov 
 r^v Karapalvovaav otto 'lepovaaXtfft. ets Td^av avvq iarXv 
 Sptjfuyi'. Here ovtt) must refer to o8w, as Gaza was at that time 
 a flourishing city. 
 
 In a continued narrative oSe generally refers to the particulars 
 about to be mentioned, but oCto? to what has been already told. 
 So we have repeatedly in Herodotus rdSe, the following, Tavra, 
 the preceding : Bev. 2. I, rdBe Xeyet 6 xparm, «.t.X., says the 
 following : A. 15. 23, ypdy^avra Stit x^t/>09 airr&v rdSe : so A. 
 21. 11. M. 22. 40, iv Tairrot? Tate SvaXv ivrdKali oKo^ o vo/u)^ 
 KoX ol rrpotfnjrat KpipMvrai, on these two commandments just 
 enumerated. The same distinction applies to towOto? and 
 TototSe. The opposition between ovto« and oSc is sometimes 
 foimd in the same sentence, Plato, Phcedr. p. 76, e, ei /*^ TaOra 
 iariv oiihi rdBe. In consequence of this reference of ofiro; to 
 what has preceded we find KaX ravra used adverbially, ' and this 
 too,' to introduce a further and stronger consideration. Thus 
 
48 
 
 INTBRROOATIVK. 
 
 we may explain B. 18. 1 1, xaX tovto, and this do ye, i. e. practise 
 this obedience founded on love e^ore; rbv xaipov, recognizing 
 the proper season for action : 2 P. 1. 5, avro tovto 8e, but for 
 this very reason. Si has an adversative force ; the false teachers 
 may abuse God's grace as a plea and occasion for. sin, but (Se) 
 do you regard it as a reaq^n and encouragement for holiness. 
 Such is the use of koX tovto, ical Tavra, in 1 C. 6. 6, aXX^ 
 oSeX^of fierh aheXiftov Kpiverai, Kal tovto irrl airloTuv : 1 C. 6. 8, 
 &KKa vfitK aS(iC€(T« zeal airotmpetTe Kal tovto dSeX^vf : E. 2. 8, 
 Tg ')fiip yapvrl i<m aevaorfUvoi Siii tQ$ irurrea)9, xal tovto ovk 
 . i^ vfJMv, 6«oO T^ i&pop : H. 11. 12, iih kuI wf)' ivi^ iyevvij67f<rav, 
 Kal Tavra vtveKpanhov. 
 
 This distinction between oSto$ and 2Se is not marked in the 
 New Testament. In the following instances ovrof refers to the 
 subsequent noun : 2 J. 6, 7,- aiSn; ioTlv fi arfdinj, oSto? ioTiv 6 
 trXdvot: M. 10. 3, t&v &u£e/ea diro<rrSKa>v t^, ovSfuiTd i<m 
 Tavra: J. 1. 19, kuI avrq iariv 1} fiaprvpla tov ^latdwov: 1 Th. 
 4. 3, TOVTO yap eoTtv OeXijfta tov Qeov 6 ar/uuriMt vfi&v, where 
 TOVTO is prospective. SSe has a stronger demonstrative power 
 than ovTOi, as if pointing to the object in sight : Ja. 4. I3, iropev- 
 <Ttop,e0a ett TrjvSe t^v irSXiv, to this city here, which we see 
 before us: L. 16. 25, vvv Bh She irapaicaXetrat, this one as you 
 see. Sometimes o8e refers to one previously mentioned : L. 10. 
 39, Koi T^Se j}v aSe\tf>ri KoKovftivr) Mapla. 
 
 INTEKROOATrVE. 
 
 The interrogative r/f is used in direct and indirect questions : 
 Mk. 5. 9, Tl aot SpofM ; 30, Tit (mv r/^^aTO t&v t/iaT{av; A. 13. 
 36, Tiva fu tnrovottTe elpcu ; Sometimes it is used as equivalent 
 to «? T»« : 1 0. 7. 18, Tr€piT€T/iirifUpo<i Ti<i iK\^0ri ; /iti iinairdffffot. 
 Ja. 6. 13, KaKorradei tw iv vpXv ; irpoaevx'^ada. In these 
 instances some render tk by ' aliquis,' without any interrogation. 
 In L. 19. IS, we have a double question, Xva 71/^ r/f t( Sieirpoff- 
 fjMTevaaTO, ' who had gained and what he had gained.' So Mk. 
 16. 34, fidXKopTK K\f}pov in avrit t(9 tI dpij: Eurip. Troad. 
 248, TtV* &pa Tk SXaxev, who has gained the first choice by lot, 
 and whom he has chosen. Demosth. de Corona, 73, airo Tovnov 
 i^era^ofiivav tIs t/i/os atTi6<i i<m, yevt^aeTai <f>avep6v. 
 
 With &v followed by the optative, t/ increases the idea of 
 uncertainty, whatever : L. 6. u, SuXaXow irpot ahX^^Kovt tI &v 
 iroi.'qaeMv T^ 'Itfaov. 
 
 \ 
 
 INDEFINITE. 
 
 49 
 
 In some cases t{$ is used for oorts : M. 15. 32, ovk ej(ovai tI 
 ^yaa-i : L. 17. 6, h-olfiaaov tI hei/irv<qato. 
 
 Occasionally Tift and of are interchanged : M. 26. 60, eralpe, 
 i<ft* ^ irdpei ; But this may be a short and hasty inquiry, ' Com- 
 rade, the business for which you are come : ' Mk. 4. 24, fiXeirere 
 T( aKovere : 14. 36, ov tI eym OkXca JiXKii tI o-v : 1 T. 1. 7, fi^ 
 poovvTCi /itjTe & Xiyovai /tijre irepl TtWi/ hiafie^aiovPTcu. 
 
 tI$ is sometimes used for iroTepo^, which of the two, as quit 
 iat uter : L. 7. 42, Tk oSv avrup irXetbi' ainop ar^airi^ati ; L. 22. 
 27, tI<{ yh,p fiei^ap 6 apaKelfiepot ^ 6 Siukop&p; Ph. 1. 22, xal 
 t/ alptjaopai ov yvapi^a : M. 21. 31, Tk ix r&i' Zvo hrobjae to 
 diKij/jM TOV iraTpoi ; 
 
 Sometimes tU is used in conjunction with Xva, ut quid : M. 
 9. 4, "pa tI v/ieii ipOvfteiade iropiipd ; This is explained by the 
 insertion of yanyrax. Soph. Aj. 77, tI fti/ yipip'tu ; what is it you 
 fear lest it occur ? 
 
 The indefinite tk is used to denote importance, as aliquis, 
 quidam : A. 5. 36 ; 8. 9, \eymv elvai Twh iavrov, aliquem esse : 
 G. 2. 6, dirb t&v Bokovptcop elpai r/ : 6. 3, el yhp SoKet tk etpat 
 Tt. So 1 G. 3. 7; 10. 19; H. 2. 6, Ste/tapTvparo Si irov Tk 
 X^ap, some one — of great dignity and authority : J. 11. 49, eh 
 Si TK i( avT&p Kald<f>ai, a distinguished member of their body. 
 
 Tk may also be attached to any words which we wish to use 
 in a vague or general sense : Ja. 1. 18, airap^v tk, a kind of 
 first-fruits: H. 10. 27, <f>ofiepd tk ixSo^, terribilis qusedam 
 expectatio. So we have <l>o0ep6p ti 0ia/ia: irriiropoi tk fiio^. 
 Thus TK is used after abstract nouns to soften their import: 
 Xen. Oyr. iiL 1, towtow? ■^sIto aKpaTeia tipI ^ aSiKiq, rj dfieXela 
 direipat, he considered that these were absent by some want of 
 self-restraint, by injustice, or negligence. 
 
 o Seipa is used when we refer to some person whose name we 
 do not know, or do not wish to mention : M. 26. 18, vTrd/yere ek 
 T^p iroXtP irphs Thp Setpa. 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 
 CONNEXION OP THE SUBJECT WITH THE PRE- 
 DICATE AND COPULA. — 
 
 THE THREE CONCORDS. 
 
 We have seen that a proposition consists of three parts : (1) an 
 object of which something is declared — subject ; (2) a property 
 attributed to the object — -predicate ; (3) a word which connects 
 the subject and predicate — copula. . 
 
 The subject is designated by a noun or nominal equivalent, 
 and stands in the nominative, as it is named directly and inde- 
 pendently. The predicate is designated by an adjective or 
 adjectival equivalent as the indication of a property. The 
 simple copula is designated by some verb of existence {thai, 
 xnrdp'xeiv, f^lrpieaOai, ^vvai). 
 
 As the subject is the most important part of a proposition, 
 the two other parts must agree with it in external form ; hence 
 the copula stands in the same number with the subject ; the pre- 
 dicate in the saifie number and case, and where an adjective is 
 employed, in the same gender. 
 
 There are three kinds of grammatical concord : (1) between 
 the subject and its verb ; (2) between the substantive and its 
 adjective ; (3) between the antecedent and its relative. 
 
 FIK8T OONCOBD. 
 
 A verb agrees with its subject in number and person : iya> 
 ^ev^to, I flee : av Suokck, thou pursuest : oi avSpet epxovTai, the 
 men come. 
 
 When the subject is a neuter plural the verb is generally 
 singular : as t^ ^&a rpi-yei, the animals are running : t^ irpof/- 
 fund iari "xoKeird, the things are difficult. 
 
 The neuter plural is, strictly speaking, an objective case : t^ 
 
 FIRST CONCORD. 
 
 61 
 
 fwa T/>i^ei, as to the animals there is running. Another reason 
 for this usage seems to have been a notion that life or mind 
 gives to objects an individual existence, whereas a number of 
 inanimate things may be regarded as a single mass. Hence a 
 plural verb is used when living persons are meant, tA rekij 
 vtr&rypvTo, the magistrates promisee^; and when the plurality 
 of inanimate things is particularly marked, ^veph ^aav ixvij 
 voXXd, many footmarks were visible : M. 12. 2i, e^wj ikiriovat : 
 L. 24. II, i<f>dvri<rav t^ p^ftara. 
 
 Sometimes both usages are combined : J. 10. 27, ri, irpofiara 
 rh, ifid, Ttfi tfxupiii /lov oKOvet, koI oKoXovOoval /loi, where the 
 collective unity of ret irpo^ara is denoted by the singular verb 
 dtcovei, but the individuality of the several members is expressed 
 by the plural axoXovdovai: L. 4. 41, i^pj^ero Soi/mvui, gives a 
 general account of the whole transaction : iirnifiMv ovk da aiirii, 
 XdKeiv on fjheurav rov Xpurrov avrov etvai, here the evil spirits 
 are viewed in detail, one by one. 1 T. 5. 25, tA KoXi, ^pya trpo- 
 6r)7M itrrf kuI ri aWaxi ij(pvTa Kpvfifjuai oi Swavrai, good deeds 
 are manifest before all, and those which are not openly manifest 
 cannot be kept concealed, i. e. they come to light one by one. 
 Xen. Ci/r. v. 1. 14, tA lurxBifpii dvBpanria r&v etnOvfii&v dfcparf) 
 ioTiv K&ireira Iptora alTi&mai, unhappy man (mankind) has no 
 mastery over his desires ; and then they (individuals among 
 them) lay the blame on love. 
 
 Two or more subjects require the verb to be in the plural : A. 
 16. 36, JTaCXof Kal Bapvd^tK Siirpifiov iv 'Avrioxela : L. 8. 19, 
 -irapeyipovTO ek avrbv ^ ftijrtip Koi oi dSeX^l airrov: L. 2. 48, o 
 TraTt)p aov KOfyeo oSwm/ievot i^ryrovfUv ae. 
 
 Frequently the verb agrees with the nearest subject : L. 2. 43, 
 OVK Srfva 'Ia<rii<f> koL 1} iirfrqp avrov: 1 C. 13. 13, w/kI Bk fUvei 
 irlarK, eXirW, wfdmi. 
 
 When the subject is a noun of multitude the verb may be in 
 the plural : M. 21. 8, o 7rXet<rro$ ^ykof eorpaxrav tA tfMTia : 
 Mk. 3. 7, iroXv irX^doii diro 7% raXiXalai ■qKoKovd'qaav avr&. 
 
 The noun in its collective sense has a singular verb, but when 
 its component parts are separately regarded the verb will be in 
 the plural : Mk. 5. 24, ^KoXovOei ain^ SxXoi noXixt, ml avpeffXir 
 fiov ain6v : 1 Tim. 2. 16, aadijo-erot (ij r^vprj) hik i% reKvoyovian 
 ikv fielvaaip iv irUrra. The same usage occurs in English and 
 in Hebrew, • my people are destroyed for lack of knowledge,' 
 are not w. The word ' people ' speaks of them as a whole ; are 
 
 E 2 
 
52 
 
 FIRST CONCORD. 
 
 relates to the individuals of whom that whole is composed. 
 Together the words express the destruction of the whole, one 
 and all. (Dr. Pusey on Hosea 4. 6.) 
 
 The substantive is used in the singular in a collective or 
 general sense : Q. 3. 28, ovk <fi>t 'lovSaioi oiiBk "EWijp k.tX. : 
 C. 3. 11, OVK ivt ^dpfiapoi, SitvB7i<i, SovXo?, ikevdepoii. In col- 
 lective ideas the copula and predicate frequently stand in the 
 plural: t^ orpaTOTreSoi' ave}(a>povv: to irXSjdov ael IdeKovai 
 <rra<7(a^eti> : II, 2. 278, "tit ^daav ^ irXijdvt. Both numbers 
 are used in L. 2. 13, ^fa^i/q; iyivero trvp t^ arf^eK^ irX^do? 
 crrpariai ovpavlov, atvowrav tov Qeov Koi Xeyovrav. 
 
 The plural is frequently used though one only is meant : 
 J. 3. 11, S olBaftev XoKoDfiep xal b itopaKafiev futprvpovftev : 
 M. 2. 20, TtOv^Kcun yhp ot ^iitovvt£<i, i. e., Herod: Mk. 9. i, 
 elal Tivh T&v &Se iartiKorav, i. e., John : 1 Th. 2. 18, ijdeKrfaa- 
 ftev ikffeiv irpo; vfia<i, iyw /ikv IlavKtx:: 1 Th. 3. 1, fii^Kh-i 
 ariyoPTet eiSoKij<rafiep KardKeuftdfivai iv ^Adi^vati fuivoi.. 
 
 The subject of a verb is often omitted when some customary 
 or familiar action is expressed, also when it is some unknown 
 or imaginary agent, and the action alone is regarded : 1 C. 15. 
 52, atOuiriaet (sc. 6 trtCKinrfierrisi). Thus o Qeoi may be supplied 
 in 2 C. 6. 2 ; H. 8. 5 : i} 'Ypa^ in G. 3. 16 : to irvevfia in 
 H. 7. 17 : avBpoyTroi may be supplied as the subject in M. 1. 23, 
 KoKiaovai rh dvofta aiirov 'Efifiavoir^X : M. 5. 1 1, fUiKdpiol iare 
 Srav oveiStauMTiv v/m9 koX Su!>^a)<ri,v : L. 6. 38, fjUrpov xakiv 
 Sdxrovaiu ek top Kokirov vfuav. L. 12. 20, 'Ai^pmv, ravvp r^ 
 wicrX T^v '^up^v aov airturovcriv airb aov {arfyeXoi): L. 12. 48, 
 ^ nrapidano irokii irepiaaorepov ahr/iaovaiv axnov: J. 15. 6, 
 awtir/ovtnv airrh /vol eh irvp fioKKovai. See L. 16. 4. 9 ; J. 20. 
 2; Bev. 11. 9. 
 
 The simple copula is omitted when the coimexion between 
 the subject and predicate is obvious : L. 1. 46, naxapla i} 
 •irt<rrev<raaa: H. 5. 13, Tra? 6 /lerexav yaKaieroi aireipo^ X070V 
 ZtKOioavvrit : B. 10. 4, t^$ vo/jlov Xpiarbt etV SiKauurvinjv. 
 Especially with verbals in -t^o; : L. 5. 38, oJpov psop eh daxovi 
 Kaipoiif pKryreop, 
 
 Sometimes the imperative is omitted : B. 12. 9, ff arfairq 
 apvTTOKpiTot : H. 13. 4, rifito^ 6 ydfiot ip ircuriv Koi 17 Kolni 
 anlaPTot , . . atfaXaprfvpot 6 rpairm' apicovfiepoi tok vapovaiv. 
 
 SECOND CONCORD. 
 
 53 
 
 SECOND CONCORD. 
 
 Adjectives, pronouns, and participles, agree with their sub- 
 stantives in gender, number, and case : ')(p7)arb<i dv^p iari 
 Koipop dr/adop, a good man is a public benefit. 
 
 Xo this general rule there are many exceptions, which fall 
 under the head of rational concord. Kara avpeeriv, the concord 
 being regulated by the sense rather than by the grammatical 
 gender : E. 4. 17, tA Xotirh eOin) irepivarei ep /jMTatoTrjTi tov 
 poot airr&p, iaKornr/iipoi t$ Siapola : Bev. 19. 14, t^ orpaTevfuna 
 ^KoKovBei ipSeSv/iipoi, fivaatUop "KevKOp; M. 28. 19, iiaBryrevaare 
 irdpra t^ IOvt) ^airrl^oprei avrovt : A. 15. 17, irdvra rk eOprj 
 i<ft 0&9 hrtKiKkryTai to Spoftd [lov. 
 
 Hence a collective noun in the singular is joined to an 
 adjectival attributive in the plural, and sometimes in a different 
 gender: L. 19. 37, ^pfavTO dtrap to ifKridoii twi' fia0r)T&p 
 Xo-lpovre^ alpelp tw Qeopi A. 3. 11, avpeBpafie Trat 6 Xabt 
 CKda/i^on Mk. 8. 1, ira/tiroXXov oj^u opto<{ koX fir) ij(pprap t( 
 ^td/ycaai : A. 15. 36, iinaKey^fieda tov9 dSe\ff>ovt rfjjmp Kara 
 iravap irSXiP, ep ah Kariff^etKafiep top "Koyop tov Kvpiov. 
 
 Sometimes the word to which the adjectival attributive refers 
 is suggested by the nature of the context : A. .8. 5, ^iKtmrot 
 KaTeyJdiiP eh 7r6\ip t$¥ SafuipeUK iKtjpvaaop avroit top XpurrSp, 
 i. e., TO(f Sa/iapelraK : M. 10. 18, ^i ■qyefiopat Si Kal fiaaiXei^ 
 d'xdijaeade epeKep ifwv eh ftaprvpiop avroh Kal Toh edpetrtp. 
 Here ainoh refers to ep Tot? avpar/tiayah axn&Py v. 17, and is 
 opposed to Toh eOpeaip, meaning to(9 'Iovhaloi,<! or t^ \a&>. 
 M. 19. 13, T^e irpoa-rjpijdSr) airrw iraiZia "pa t^9 X^tpav iiriOy 
 avToh KoX trpoaev^TjTai. 01 Se fiadifra* eTrerlfiTjaav airroh. Here 
 the second avTot; refers to to(9 irpov^epovaiv, as in Mk. 10. 13. 
 1 P. 3. 14, TOV he ^o^op air&p /lif <l>ofiTj0fJTe, i. e., the fear 
 which ot KaKOMTOPTet would inspire, v. 13: L. 23. 6I, ovroi ovk 
 Tip avyKarareOei/iipoi Ty j9oi>X§ kuI tJ irpd^et air&p, i. e., twv 
 fiov\evT&p: B. 2. 26, ikv oip rj aKpofivarCa to, SiKauofiara 
 TOV pofutv tftvXda-trri, ovp^l ^ aKpofivarla avrov eh nepiTOfirip 
 Xoyiadi^aeTai ; where ovroO refers to any one who is uncircum- 
 cised, implied in dxpo^vaTia : J. 8. 44, orav XaX^ to y^evSo^ 
 ex Twi' ISuop XaXeZ- ori ^^evartfi iarl xal 6 irarrip ainov, when- 
 ever he speaks falsehood, he speaks out of his own nature, 
 inasmuch as he is a liar, and the father of lying, i. e., tov 
 XaXetv to ^^evSo^. 
 
64 
 
 THIBD CONCORD. 
 
 When (he substantives are of different genders, and inani- 
 mate objects are signified, the neuter plural is generally used, 
 but mth animated beings the masculine gender is preferred: 
 A. 2. 4S, T^ KnjfuiTa ical t^9 xnrap^eK hriirpaaKov Ka\ Ste/iipt^ov 
 airh irwrt : M. 12. 60, airii futv dSeX^of Koi a£eX^ /cat fii^p 
 
 We may remark here, that in 2 Tim. 2. I9i the adjective is 
 an attributive, not a predicate : o pivroi, arepem BefiiKtoi tov 
 Oeov i<m)Kep, nevertheless the firm foundation of God is 
 placed. 
 
 THIRD CONCORD. 
 
 The relative agrees with its antecedent in gender, number, 
 and person: J, 4. 29, ISere &v0ptnrov 89 fliri not irdvra 5aa 
 
 The case of the relative, which is naturally determined by 
 the words in its own clause, generally takes the case of the 
 antecedent. This is called the genitive or dative of attrac- 
 tion : M. 18. 19, vepl Traprbv Trpdryftaroi oi ihv alrfjawyrai : 
 L. 2. 20, hr\ iratriv ol<i ijKovaav xal elSov: J. 2. 22, hrlarrev- 
 aav T^ Xo7f> . ^ ehrev : Ja. 2. 6, K\7ipov6p,ovf Trj<; ^a<riKela<i ^ 
 iirqyyetkaTo : L. 6. 9, iiri rg Sfypa t&v Ix&vuv jj awiXafiov: 
 1 Th. 3. 9, i'trl irdaji ry xapa ^ j^alpop.ev. 
 
 The antecedent is generally omitted when it is a demonstra- 
 tive pronoun, and the relative takes its case: Mk. 15. 12, rl 
 ovv diXere voitftra hv X^ere fiaaiXia r&v 'loviabov; L. 9. 36, 
 ovhevX air^Y^elKav oiSiv &v iupaKacriv : J. 6. 29, tva irurrevaifre 
 tk hp airiareCKev iKelvoi: L. 23. 14, ovSev eipov aXriov &v 
 Kanryopeire kot ainov: L. 23. 41, a^ia fctp &v ivpd^afiev 
 airoXafifidvofiep : A. 26. 23, ovSiv J/crof Xiyap &v re ol wpo^fnjrai 
 ikdXriaav. 
 
 hf is often used with an explanatory or slightly causal force : 
 1 Tim. 2. 4, S« irdvrai dvOpdmov^ OiXei <rto0rjvM, seeing His will 
 is that all men should be saved. awOrjvai is the ultimate, the 
 ^19 67rlr/v<o<Tiv dXtjOeiaf eXdtip, an immediate end leading natu- 
 rally and directly to the former, i. e. audrjpai,. 
 
 CONCORD BETWEEN THE RELATIVE AND ANTECEDENT. 
 
 The substantive is often put in the same clause and case as 
 the relative : M. 21. 42, XlJdop hp aveSoxlfuurap oi oUoSofiovvTet 
 oSroi iytvijOri e»9 Ke^Xifp yiopiat: 1 C. 10. 16, rbp dprop hv 
 
 CONCORD BETWEEN THE RELATIVE AND ANTECEDENT. 
 
 65 
 
 KXofiev ov)(i Koaiapla rm <Tu>p,arm tov Xpurrov ecrrtv ; A. 21.^ 16, 
 Syoprei trap ^ ^epiad&fiev Mpdaapl tipl Kxnrpl^: R. 6. 'l7, 
 {nrnKovaare 8e ix KapSla<i ek hp TrapeSofftire rinrov StdaxTji. 
 
 When another noun is added by way of explanation the 
 relative may agree either with the antecedent or the subsequent 
 noun, especially with verbs of existence, calling, and the like : 
 1 0. 4. 17, eirefiy^a vpxp Ttpadeop 5? eort tUpop fiov dyainiTOP : 
 E. 1. 22, if eKKXfiala ffrw i<rrl to ff&fia ainov : C. 1. 24, tov 
 ffatfJMTOt ainov 6' ianp v cKKXtiaia: Mk. 16. 16, t^s avXifi 5 
 ioTi -irpaiTtoptopi E. 3. 13, ep rots exl^eal (lov xnrip vpMP ^Tts 
 i<rri So^a vp,ap: Ph. 1. 28, /*^ irrvpofiepoi ep fMjBepl wtto t&p 
 dpTiKeiftipap, iJTK ainoii p4p e<rrtp evSetft? aTraXeiav, vfup Sk 
 
 aaniplai. , . 
 
 ooTts is often used to express the reason, quippe qui, and 
 is thus more expressive than o?: IP. 2. 11, dirkxeaBe twi* 
 aapKM&p iiridvfu&p, aXTivet orpaTevoPTai kut^ Try: irv)(^, be- 
 cause they are warring: R. 1. 25, ofrwes fiervXXa^ap Tpp 
 dXrideiap tov Oeov ep toJ -^cwSet, seeing that they parted with 
 the true idea of God, resting in falsehood: R. 6. 2, orrtyes 
 dveddpofiep Ty afiaprla, irm eri ^rjaoiiep ep ainy ; 2 T. 2. 2, 
 ToCra nrapdOov irurTok dp0punroi<i oXTivet licapoi icrovrai Kal 
 erkpovi StSafa*. to faithful men of such a stamp as shall be 
 able, &c. See R. 1. 32 ; 2. 16 ; 1 T. 1. 4 ; 6. 9. Sorts in fact is 
 often applied to an object as coming under some class to denote 
 its genus or essence. Jelf, § 816. 4. Hence Sans is used 
 indefinitely, where the antecedent is indefinite from the way 
 the subject is presented, C. 2. 23 ; Ph. 1. 28 ; G. 4. 24 (arti/a), 
 or in its own nature as involving some general notion ; ckmifi- 
 cally, where the subject is represented as one of a class or 
 category, 1 0. 3. 17 ; G. 2. 4 ; ea^licatively, E. 1. 23 ; G. 4. 26 ; 
 differentially, where it denotes an attribute which essentially 
 belongs to the nature of the antecedent, G. 4. 24 (^ts). 
 
 As the particle of relation 'VO'A is indeclinable, the Hebrews 
 introduced a pronominal affix in the relative clause, which the 
 LXX represent by the oblique cases of axnot to mark the 
 gender, case, and number. Of this redundancy we have the 
 following instances: Mk. 7. 25, ^s elxe to BvyaTpiop ainiji 
 TTpevfia aKodaprop : Rev. 7. 2, dfyyiXoK ok eSodi] ainoii : 9, 
 SvXo^ TToXii^ hp dpuBp-fiaai ainop oiiBek ^SvpaTo. 
 
 Occasionally the relative combines this usage with rational 
 
56 
 
 APPOSITION. 
 
 concord: R. 9. 23, 34, o-xevi^ e\4ovi oft? xal eKoKeaev ^/tas. 
 Analogous to this usage is Mk. 13. 19, <7Xt^i9, ola ov y&yove 
 roMVTti : Rev. 12. 6, iirow ixei toitop, Xva eKei Tp4<f>a<nv ain^v : 
 12. u, Svov Tp&f>erai ixei Kaip6v. 
 
 APPOSITION. 
 
 Nouns which belong to the same regimen, and are used to 
 explain or describe another, are placed side by side in the same 
 case : 1 0. 9. 6, aSe\^^i> ywiuKa wepi^eiv: Ja. 5. 10, {nrSSeir/fia 
 Xdfiere roii^ Trpo^ijTa? : M. 3. I, 7«a<£wijs 6 fiamrun^i : 14, 1, 
 'HpaSiji 6 rerpdpxtyi: 1 P. 6. l, vpevfivripoxxLrov^ ev i/uv 
 vapaKoKa 6 <rvfvirpeafi{iTepo<i kuI pAprvi j&v rov Xpurrov 
 vadnitdrav, i Ka\ t^? pieXKovarfi earoKaXvirTtaOai 86^ Koivavot : 
 E. 1. 17, iv ^ exo/iev rtjv drroKvrpaaiv SUi rod alfiarof rriv 
 i^eaiv r&v irapairrwfjMrotv : 1 P. 2. 6, m \i0oi ^&vre<i oUoSo- 
 /leiaOe oIko^ irvev/iaTiKOi. 
 
 Apposition is sometimes expressed by means of &<nrep, 
 TOvricTi : R. 7. 18, iv i/iol, roxrriariv iv if aapKl fiov: A. 19. 4, 
 e*9 TW ipxofievov fier ainov ha irurreva-aai, tovtSotiv ets rov 
 Xpurrov 'Iijaovv. 
 
 Sometimes the noun which in ordinary apposition would 
 stand first is put in the genitive, i. e., the genitive is identical 
 with the governing noun ; this is called the genitive of appo- 
 sition : A. 4. 22, TO aiifielov Try: Idcrem : 2 C. 6. 5, rov dppa0&va 
 rov irvevfutrot : Ja. 3. 18, Kapvot Swotoffuwj? : Ph. 1. 11; H, 
 12. 11; M. 13. 31 ; J. 12. 24; 10. 15. 37, k6kko<i aivd7re(o<}, 
 alrov: E. 6. M, ivSvadfievot riv ffdopaxa rfji SiKouxrvvrjii, i.e., 
 righteousness as a breastplate: R. 4. i), tnjfiehv eXafie irepi- 
 roftfj^ : some read <rnp,elov irepiro^vqv : 0. 1. 6, iv r^ \6y^ t^? 
 d\riBela<! rov evtvyyeXlov, the second genitive is appositive, or of 
 •identical idea:' E. 4. 3, ri/v hor-qra rov tlveviiaroi iv rp 
 awSiarfi^ t% eip^viy;^ the unity wrought by the Spirit (causa 
 efficiens) in the" bond which is peace, genitive of identical idea: 
 E. 6. 16, 17, TrArrew?, a<on}piov, are appositional genitives with 
 OvpeSv, irepiKeifiaXalav. Compare o^fieiov trvpov (Thuoydides), 
 Xiicrpov evvfi<{ (Soph. Antig.). 
 
 The subject of a verb is in the nominative case : TratSes 
 liZdaKovrai, boys are taught. 
 
 A noun in the predicate is in the same case as the subject 
 when the verb requires a noun to complete. its meaning: 
 
 i, 
 
 COMPARATIVE, SUPEBtATIVB ADJECTIVES. 
 
 57 
 
 'Ayafii/ivav 7p> 'Apr^elmv fiaai\eu^, Agamemnon was king of 
 the Argives. 
 
 Verbs which require a noun to complete their meaning are 
 verbs of ' existence,' elfil, inrdp^a, fiyvo/uu : ' to be named ' or 
 ' called,' KoKov/iai, ukowo : ' to be chosen ' or ' elected,' atpov- 
 /uu : ' to seem ' or ' be thought,' <l>aivofuu, ioiKa. 
 
 ADJECmVES USED AS SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 In addition to the cases in which the article is inserted 
 without a noun, there are several adjectives which are used 
 regularly as substantives, such as ^/Xof, ix^pot, it&po<i, d^adoi, 
 
 KUKO^. 
 
 In many languages the article with an adjective is used for a 
 substantive, ' the sublime and beautiful.' The Chreeks have to 
 Kotvov, the common weal : to iUautv, justice, right : to aSueov, 
 injustice : to r&v de&v ei/tevif. In Thucyd. i. 68, to rrurrbv rifi 
 iroXirela^ : ii. 71, to daOevh t% "ywi/iij?: Demosth. de Cor. 
 110, Kav p,rfihi etiro) irepX r&v Xonr&v TToKirev/idreov, oitola^ trap 
 v/i&v e/caoTf) to aweiSov {nrdp)(£tv /tot. 
 
 This usage is largely employed in the New Testament : R. 1. 
 15, to rrpodvfutv for t; irpoOvfila : 20, t^ dopara rov 0eov, q. d. ^ tc 
 dittos Swa/uf Kal Oeutrtfi : 19, to yvaarov : 2. 4, to p^pi^o'Tov : 1 
 G. 1. 27, T^ fuopd, rh daOevfj, rii layypd, ril d/yanj rov Kotrfiov, 
 in opposition to tov« ao^xn : 2 Th. 2. 6, to xaT^ov : H. 7. 18, 
 hid TO avrifi dadevki, koI dvta^teKki; : H. 6. 17, to dfterdderov r^s 
 fiovXfji: Ph. 3. 8, TO inrep^ov t^v yvcoaetot: E. 6. 12, t^ rrvev^ 
 Itarucd rfp irovriplav, the spirituality of wickedness, spiritual 
 powers, bands, hosts, confraternities whose essence is to work 
 wickedness (compare rd XriarpiKa, robber hordes) : rd ainov, 
 one's own afiairs : t^ r&v de&v, the dispensations of providence. 
 r6 with a neuter adjective is sometimes adverbial, as to XotTrw, 
 roiivavriov. With a neuter in -tK6v it is a personal collective, 
 TO 'EKKiqvucov, TO fiapfiapiKov, to vavriKov. 
 
 COMPARATIVE, 8T7PERLATIVB ADJECTIVES. 
 
 The standard of comparison is represented by the genitive in 
 the sense ' in relation to,' ' in regard to,' or by the conjunction 
 ^, signifying ' as,' ' in the manner or degree in which.' 
 
 Sometimes the comparison is tacit rather than express; a 
 single subject is mentioned, but reference is tacitly made to 
 objects ftnd circumstances 'passing through the mind. Thus 
 
58 
 
 COMPARATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 we have the ooibparative in form though not in sense in //. i. 
 382, oi Bi vv "iMoX 0vij<rieov hraaavrepoi, the soldiers then kept 
 djring one after another. 
 
 We may thus explain M. 18. i, where the comparative is said 
 to be used for the superlative, rk apa luO^av icrriv; 'who then 
 is greater than others P' Also i lUKporepoi, M. 11, u, he who is 
 less than many ; he who holds a subordinate office. 
 
 Under this tacit comparison we may quote J. 13. 27, ft not€i<i 
 TToiqoov Ta^tov. what thou art doing, get done more quickly 
 than is your present purpose: A. 17. ai, Xiyen; rt xal mcovew 
 KMv6repw, news more fresh than the latest: 18. -te, oKpi^ea- 
 repov avT^ i^iOano t^i» toO Beov 6S6v, more accurately than he 
 knew before : 26. 10, dxi kcH <ri> koMuov iirirttvmTKeit, as thou 
 fully knowest better than thou ohoosest to admit, or better than 
 that I need instruct thee : 2 0. 2. 4, aXKh t^ a/ydmjv ha ti/wtc 
 fiv ^w wepura-oripaxt ek v/twi, but that ye may know that the 
 love which I have towards you is far greater than you imagine 
 it to be : 2 0.7. 7, Sore /le /i&XKov xa/J^^at, so that I rejoiced 
 more than at the simple coming of Titus: 1 0. 13. 13, fiei^tov 
 Tovrav ^ arfonrq, greater among these is love, i. e. of higher 
 spiritual rank, as it presupposes and comprehends faith and 
 love. 
 
 COMPARATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Frequently the comparison refers to the suppressed feelings 
 of the speaker, or the subject: A. 24. 82, aKptfiiarepov eiSciK ri 
 irepX -nfi oBov, 'although he had more accurate knowledge of 
 Christianity than to require the information.' This use of the 
 comparative is very convenient as suggestive of something 
 understood which it might be uncourteous to express, as in A. 
 26. 10. Other instances are 2 Tim. 1. 17, airovSaiorepov i^^njaiv 
 fie, Onesimus sought out Paul with the greater diligence when 
 he knew he was in captivity: 2 T. 1. is, fiiXriov ai, yivcl^aKeKi 
 better than I can tell thee: 1 T. 3. u, ikiri^cov i\eeip.wp6i ae 
 raxiov. sooner than I anticipate, sooner than these instructions 
 imply: H. 13. 23, /leff oi, ehv rdxwv tpxnTai Sfofuu i/iai, if he 
 return more quickly than I expect. 
 
 The comparative is frequently expressed by fiaXXov : 2 T. 3. 4, 
 it>tMBowi fMKKov ij ,l>i\6d€oi: Mk. 9. 42, kuUp eariv air& 
 
 fM)OiMV. 
 
 When the comparative contrasts two subjecta, the one which 
 
 SUPERLATIVES. 
 
 69 
 
 marks the contrast or serves as the standard of comparison is 
 subjoined in the genitive, or is put in the same case as the 
 other subject after ^. (See the Genitive of Relation.) J. 4. 12, 
 pH) ail /lel^ap el rov irarpbi fipMV 'Icuco)^ ; M. 6. 26, ovj(i "q "^^v^^ 
 irKeiov iari rtji Tptxfnj^ Kal to a&pM rov ivBvpMTOi ; J. 4. I, 
 'ir\eiova<i pM0tfrh<i iroieltl 'Icadvvf)^: R. 13. 11, eyyvrepov fipMv fj 
 aconjpla, rj Sre iirurrevaa/iev. 
 
 , COMPARATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 When the substantive is the same on both sides of the com- 
 parison, its repetition in the genitive is frequently omitted: 
 H. 3. 3, irKelova Tip,r}v ij((u toS oXkov, has honour exceeding the 
 honour of the house : 1 C. 1. 25, to /uopbv rov SeoO aotfyanepov 
 T&v dvOpmirtov iarX, koX rh dadevk^ rov Seov Uryypofrepov r&v 
 dvOponrav iarl, wiser than the wisdom of men, stronger than 
 the strength of men ; so obviously in M. 6. 20 ; J. 5. 36. 
 
 For other modes of expressing comparison, see on irapd, vrrep. 
 
 Sometimes the comparative adjective is exaggerated by the 
 addition of pSXXov, en : Mk. 7. 36, iaov avTo<; avrois SieariKXero 
 PmKKov rrepiaairepov im^pvaaov: 2 0. 7. 13, irepiaaoripa^ 
 PmXKov ixap^ip-ev : Ph. 1. 23, iroyX^ puWov xpeiaaov : H. 7. 16, 
 Kol irepuraorepov iri Kard&ijXov iari. 
 
 The adverb in the comparative is similarly used : 1 T. 5. 9, 
 j^pa KaraXeyeaOat p.ri iKa-rrov ir&v e^Kovra yeyowia : Mk. 
 16. 11, Zva /mWov tov Bappafiav diroKvari avrotv (^ tov 
 'Jijo-ow). 
 
 SUPERLATIVES. 
 
 We have some unusual forms of the superlative: L. 1. 42, 
 evXor/Tip^VT} ail iv yvvai^iv. With this we may compare hi T0Z5 
 irp&TOi. This is considered a Hebraism, LXX, Cant. 1. 8, koK^ 
 iv yvvat^L But compare Pind. Netn. 3. 138, atero? &)/kv9 iv irora- 
 poit. Liv. 23. 44, " Memorabilis inter paucas." H. 9. 3, aiajp^ 
 ri Xeyopipf) ar/ia ayitop: Rev. 19. 16; IT. 6. 15, ^aaiXeift 
 fiaaiKemp, Kvpuxi KvpUnp. With these we may compare Soph. 
 Ekclr. 849, ZeiKaia SeiXaitop: 0. It. 466, apprfr' d^f^rwp, & 
 ^iV dvSp&p. 
 
 The force of the superlative is sometimes increased by the 
 addition of irdvTiop: Mk. 12. as, Ilola iarX irpaynj iraa&v 
 ePToXi] ; Some read •irdvrap, which means more than iraaSiv, 
 
60 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 viz. What is the first commandment and principal of all 
 things P Luoian, fila vdvrav ij ye aXiid^f ^CKoao^Ca. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 It is remarkable that the first four numerals in Greek and 
 Sanscrit, and the first three in Latin, are declined, while the 
 others remain without inflexion. This is accounted for by the 
 fact that in the division of the oldest Greek year into three 
 seasons of four months each, the first four numerals would be 
 more frequently used as adjectives than the others. A similar 
 remark applies to the numerals among the Romans, whose 
 fundamental number was three. The inflexions were omitted 
 in the other numerals without inconvenience as their use was 
 more adverbial. 
 
 eh is very often used instead of the indefinite pronoun tk : 
 M. 8. 19, eU ypafifiarevt elirev avr^: J. 6. 9, ^(rTl iraiSdpiov 
 li> c!*5e. The substantive in the singular is often used without 
 eh, as in English the indefinite article ' a ' is preferred to the 
 adjective 'one :' A. 18. 11, ixddiaep iptavrbv Kal ftr}va<i 1^: Rev. 
 12. u, T/a^^erat iitei Kaipov. But in Ja. 4. 13 some copies read 
 iroii^a-wfup ixei ivMtrrov tva. 
 
 Some think that eh is used to mark a person of distinction : 
 M. 19. 16, Koi tSov elf irpoaeXOwv elrrev aiir^. In the parallel 
 passage L. 18. is, apxttv nv. See. J. 11. 49. 
 
 In enumerations eh may be rendered as an ordinal or a 
 cardinal : Rev. 6. l, ^i/ot^e t^ apvlov p,lav iK r&v oi^parf^v, 
 
 eh is used for the ordinal irpSroc M. 28. 1, eh p-lav 
 aafffidrav: Mk. 16. 2, irptot 1% /uai aaPPdratv. Tit. 3. 10, 
 alperncop avOpanrov /lerh /ilav Kol hevrepav vovdealav nrapairov. 
 
 Instead of the compoimds oiSeh, /J^Seh, the adjective wat is 
 frequently vsed with a negative particle closely connected with 
 the verb : M. 12. 25, iraaa iroKii p^piaOeiaa xaff eavT7}9 ov 
 oradiqaeTak : Mk. 13. 20, ovk &v iadtOi) iraaa adp^ : L. 1. 37, 
 ovK dZvvanjtrei irapit &em irav pfjfia : J. 3. 15, 'iva irat o 
 irurreiKov eh ainov /it/ dvoXryrai : Rev. 22. 3, irav KaravdSe/ta 
 OVK eorat Irt : M. 10. 29, iv «f avr&v ov ireaeirai evl r^v yrjv. 
 
 Reciprocity is sometimes expressed by the repetition of eh 
 in a diflerent case : 1 0. 4. 6, tva p,ij eh inrkp tov evm ^vaiovcrde : 
 1 Th. 5. It, OMoSo/tetre eh top epa. Similar forms are A. 2. 12, 
 a\Xo« irpov aXXov : R. 15. 2, ^KaaTOi r^ irXijaiop. The follow- 
 
 A' 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 61 
 
 ing expressions are peculiar: Rev. 21. 9i, &vh eh (Marov: J. 
 8. 9, el? Kadeh: R. 12. 6, 6 8i KaOeh dWv^v fiiXv. In 1 0. 
 14. 31, Bwaade y&p Kaff Ipa irdprei irpo^eveip : E. 5. 33, irXrjp 
 Kal vp,eh ot Kaff epa, eKcurroi k.t.X. 
 
 Distributives are expressed by doubling cardinal numbers: 
 Mk. 6. 7, Bvo Bvo fip^aro diro<nSsXeip. The Greeks also^ use 
 Zio with dpd or Kard. Compare Mk. 6. 39, *0, hrera^ep avToi9 
 dpoKXipai, vdpTWi avp.nr6<TM <rvfiir6aia . . . dphreaoP vpoffud 
 irpaautl: Mw\i.Pen(B, p.vpla fivpia, i. e. kotA /i,w/)ta&»«. 
 
 An ordinal may be employed to denote the companions of 
 the person so designated: Tp/rov awrw, myself and two others: 
 2 Pet. 2. 6, 57S00V Nwe i<}>vXa^e, preserved Noah and seven 
 
 with him. 
 
 ivdpta is used adverbially with cardinals : Mk. 14. 5, irpadrfpai. 
 hrdpa TpMKoattop ^popttop, to be sold for three hundred pence 
 and more: 1 0. 15. 6, a^Bri ivdpa irepraKoaCoK; oSeX«^ots, 
 appeared to five hundred brethren and more. Similar usages 
 are, Plato, nv iKarrop Se/eo erq yeyopora^ : Caesar, S. G., " occisis 
 ad hominum nullibus quatuor." 
 
CHAPTER V. 
 
 ON THE OBLIQUE OASES. 
 
 EvBRY object may be considered, (1) as an object by itself or 
 individual whole without combination or contact with other 
 things ; (2) as a member of a greater whole, in combination 
 with and relation to other objects. 
 
 An object considered by itself is in the nominative case, but 
 when it is considered in combination with and relation to other 
 objects, one only can be adduced as independent, while the 
 others must be represented as dependent and standing in rela- 
 tion to the one which is independent. This dependence is 
 designated by a change of the definite appellation, which we 
 call a dependent or oblique case. {Most, pp. 371, 372.) 
 . The oblique cases denote the relations of things to each other, 
 and are especially used to express the object of an action or 
 feeling. 
 
 The object is either immediate or remote. The immediate 
 object is the thing produced or acted upon, iroui rovro, I do 
 this : TVTTTo airrov, I strike him. 
 
 The remote object is the thing or person for which an action 
 is done, or towards which it is directed. 
 
 The accu^tive, in its primary meaning, appears to denote 
 the immediate otfject of an action, whether it be a thing pro- 
 duced by the action, or a previously existing object immediately 
 affected by it. 
 
 The dative in its primary meaning appears to denote the 
 remote object of an action as the thing or person to whom some- 
 thing is given. Hence it signifies the receiver; the object 
 toward which any thing is directed ; the object to which any 
 thing is near or united; and (from the notion of union) the 
 instrument with which an action is performed. Hence the 
 dative in Greek answers to the Latin dative and ablative. 
 
 IMMEDIATE OBJECT. 
 
 63 
 
 \M 
 
 ,Mi 
 
 The genitive in its primary meaning appears to denote an 
 object >a»» which something proceeds, and then the possessor, to 
 whom something belongs. Hence it signifies the author or 
 cause of an action or thing ; the quality which marks the class 
 to which any thing belongs; the whole from which a part is 
 taken; the object of an action or feeling; and the obj^t to 
 which some relation is expressed. Thus the genitive in Greek 
 answers to the Latin genitive and ablative. (Jacob, § 123.) 
 
 A. 9. 4, I^KOvae <f>a>vi)v Xeyovtrav, he heard and understood its 
 articukte utterance (so 26. 14) : 9. 7, a«ouow9 fi^v tIjs ifxovfri, 
 hearing the sound but not the words of the speaker. 
 
 IMMEDIATE OBJECT. 
 
 The accusative is the case of transition, and expresses the 
 immediate object of verbs, in which the action passes on from 
 the subject to an object. . -x 
 
 All verbs take an accusative of the immediate object when its 
 expression is necessary to complete the sense which the verb m 
 that particular instance is intended to convey. Of. Lat. • adire 
 aliquem,' ' convenire aUquem.' L. 24. 62, irpoaKvvii<ravTei avrov : 
 Mk. 1. 40, r^owirer&v airrov : M. 9. 27, iKiyi<rov ^fiw, vie Aa^iS: 
 M. 21. 37, iinpairwovrai rov vlov fiov: L. 8. 52, SkKuiov iravrei 
 Koi iK&irrovro airrov: A. 17. 23, hv oiv 071/001)^x6? euae^em: 
 Rev. 9. 20, Xva fiii wpotrxwiqaatai rh Saifiovta: L. 21. 36, iK4>v- 
 ryeiv ravra trdvTa rh, itiKKovra flveadai: H. 5. 2, airos irepi- 
 KeiraL aadeveuiv. 
 
 The accusative signifies that the object referred to is con- 
 sidered as the point toward which something is proceeding; 
 that it is the end of the action or motion described, or the space 
 traversed in such motion or direction. Hence it denotes (a) 
 motion to an object; (6) distance in space; (c) duration in 
 time ; (d) the immediate object of a transitive verb ; (e) the 
 more remote object of any verb, whether it has another ac- 
 cusative or not; (/) the accusative of cognate signification, 
 i. e., the secondary predication by way of emphasis of that 
 which is already predicated by the verb itself; (g) an appo- 
 sition to the object of the whole sentence; (A) the subject of 
 the objective sentence when this is expressed in the infinitive 
 mood. (Donaldson, § 460.) 
 
 The object regarded is supposed to rest and dwell upon the 
 
 '■-■■^1 
 
64 
 
 THB ACXJUSAHriVE OF OUONATS 8IONIFICATI0N. 
 
 mind for a certain time; U exhibited in length, extension, or, 
 at least, continuous repetition and duration. (Q. R No. 223.) 
 Extension, L.'22. 4I, direcnrdaOii air avr&v wael XiOov fioKriv: 
 3. 6. 19, iKtfKcucoTei «»? arailov<i elKoat irivre. Duration, J. 2. 
 I a, iicei iiKivav ov iroWiii ^ftipav iJj. 15. 29, Toaavra evq Bov 
 Xeva> aoi : 21. 9, dweSij/iijo-e xpovotn lKavov<i. 
 
 MOTION TO AN OBJECT. 
 
 The use of the simple accusative to denote motion to a place 
 is confined to the poets. Some, however, refer to this head, 
 A. 27. a, /itKKovri irXeiv roiKi xarh rijv 'Aolap roirow. The 
 older writers used the afiBx -Se: OvXvftvovBe, to Olympus: 
 otxaSey i. e., olKovSef homewards : 'Ad'^va^e, i. e., 'AffijvaaBe, to 
 Athens. Sometimes -ae was used as oipavoae, to heaven. 
 
 ACCUSATIVB OF THE BEMOTB OBJECT. 
 
 Of this there are two distinct usages : (1) when the transitive 
 verb takes two accusatives, one of which denotes the imme- 
 diate, and the other the remote object of the action ; (2) where 
 one accusative denotes the whole body, the other a particular 
 part of that body : 6 Kvpn ^pana tovs avTOfioXovs rh rStv 
 voXeniuv : irpSnov yap fuv lovra fidXe ottjOoi : iraina ae SiSd- 
 ^ofiai : fi^Be ait toi/S* airoalpeo Kovprjv. 
 
 J. 19. 2, Ifidriop irop^vpovv irepii^aXov ainov : M. 27. 31, 
 i^ktvaav avrov "rifv j^Ka/ivSa xal iviivaav ainov rh ifiMTta airoO : 
 Mk. 9. 41, 8s &v ir<n-l<rg vfulM iror^putv vSaroc 1 0. 3. 2, ydXa 
 v/tas hroTura. LXX, Num. 11. 18, t/s ij/*a9 y^wfiui Kpia; so 
 Is. 58. 14 : Rev. 3. is, KoiXXovpwv Syj^purov roitf o^dKiutv} <rov: 
 Li. 11. 46, ^pri^ere tov? avOpahrov^ tfrnprla Bvafidaraicra : . A. 
 19. 13, opKi^ofiev w/tas rbv 'Iriirovv, M3c. 5. 7; 1 Th. 5. 27: 
 J. 14. 26, ixetvoi v/Mi SiBd^ei nrdvra : J. 16. 23, iaa &v air^aifre 
 t6» iraripa ev rp ovofunL ftov : M. 21. 24, ipar^ata vfta^ /nvycb 
 \6yov Iva. To this probably belongs H. 2. 17, l\daKea0M (sc. 
 TOP Oebv) rdi dftapriaf. 
 
 The second accusative often appears as a tertiary predicate 
 or an apposition : J. 6. 5, Zva iroi'qaatnv ainov fiaaikea : L. 
 19. 46, v/xet« avTov eirotijaaTe trv^Xatov Xjjtrr&v : Ja, 5. 10, 
 inroSev^fita Xdfiere i% icaKoiraffeiat . . . tov9 ir/oo^Tas: Ph. 
 3. 7, TAvra ffft)pMi Hqfilav. 
 
 
 ■1 
 -I 
 
 ., 
 
 'i4 
 
 ^:i 
 
 THB ACCUSATIVE OF COGNATE SIGNIFICATION. 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE OF COGNATE SIGNIFICATION. 
 
 65 
 
 This is found with verbs active, passive, and neuter, by the 
 figura etymohgiea : 1 P. 3. 14, tw ^ftov ain&v ftti <f)o/3r}ff^e : 
 M. 2. 10, iydpfqaav ^a/o^v fieydXi}v : J. 7. 24, t^v SiKalav KpUriv 
 Kplvare: 1 T. 6. 12, (u/M>Xoyi}<ra« lijv Ka\iiv 6/ioXoylav. With 
 
 1 P. 4. 1, T^v avT^v iwoMv oirKlaaofBe, compare Xen. Anab. 
 vi. 3. 1, "ypii irapa^KevaaafUvoiK "njv iivmp,i)v iropeveadai. 
 
 The adverbial use of the accusative expressing a secondary 
 predicate is very frequent : A. 20. 35, irdvra inriSei^a vfiiv, 
 in all things (so 1 G. 9. 25 ; Ph. 3. s) : M. 23. 37, iv rpoirov : 
 Q. 4. 1, oiiBev Sia^pet SovKov: J. 6. 10, rov dpidphv cuo-el 
 irevTowio^/Xtot : J. 8. 25, t^v apf)^v 8, ri Koi \aK& i/uv : M. 
 10. 8, Sapehv iKdfiere Bapehv Sore: E. 3. 1. 14, tovtov x<lpii>: 
 G. 3. 19, r&v irapafidaemv x^P^"' ^- 1^* ^^> O'l^l^V^ 'co^ v/tetf 
 aawerol iare : M. 10. 23, ov itif rekkaifre t^« iroXetv, q. d., t^v 
 et9 rAf voKeiM oSov: 2 G. 3. 18, t^v ainifv elicova fiSTafjtop<j>ov- 
 /leda, after the same model we are in process of transformation : 
 
 2 G. 6. 13, Ti/v Sk ainifv dvrifuadiav irXaTwdifre km, vfieiv, 
 "upon the same principle of returning like for like be ye 
 also widened." "Wratislaw. 
 
 To this we may refer the accusative of time and space : 
 1 P. 4. 2, Tov iirtKonrov iv vapici, fiiwarai j(p6vovi J. 4. 52, 
 j(j9ei &pav efiSoftTjv a^^Acei/ ainov 6 irvperoi. 
 
 The neuters of oiTo<:^ ainoi, rk, are often thus employed 
 adverbially to denote 'why,' 'for this reason:' Latin, 'quid 
 cunctarisP' Oerman, 'was mogest duP' Gicero,,^d^ Dtv. vii. 
 1, * utrumque hetor,' I feel both delights, I am delighted on 
 both accounts : Xen. Anab. i. 9. 21, xal r/dp aino toOto : .Plato, 
 Protag. 310 e, aind rama vvv ^Kta irapd ae : Demosth. Fala. 
 Leg.,t «al davftd^a, wherefore I wonder : Aristoph. ItancB 703, 
 el Se TOVT* vfKaaofieaOa Kdiroaeftviwov/ieda t^v voKiv (so 1368). 
 
 This adverbial accusative is used in G. 2. lo ; 2 P. 1. 6, avro 
 TovTo, for this very reason : Ph. 2. 18, to S' ainh kuX vfielf 
 yalpere, and for the same reason do ye also rejoice : Ph. 1. 9, 
 KcH TOVTO Trpoaev)(pnai 'Iva k.t.X., and therefore I pray that . . . : 
 Ph. 1. 25, KciX TOVTO ireiroiOan olSa, and therefore I know with 
 Confidence: 2 0. 2. 3, xal iypai^a vfuv tovto aino, and I 
 write for this very reason : 1 C. 10. 6, Tuvra Sk tvvoi fifiStv 
 iyevj^0i]aav, in these things, however, they became models to 
 warn us ; where Mr, Wratislaw quotes Aristoph. Pax 414, 
 
66 
 
 TUB GBNITIVK. 
 
 TOUT* ipa vdKm r&v ^fupitv TrapeKKeirrirvv, thoBo then were 
 the reasons why they had long heen stealing off a portion of 
 the 'days t .^Isoh. Prom. v. 275, ravrd rot irXaviofihni irpoi 
 SKKot SXKov ir^futvii irpocri^vei, in this way calamity wanders . 
 about, and approaches sometimes one person, sometimes another. 
 (Notes and Dissertations, pp. 94. 100. 117). 
 
 THB ACCUSATIVE I}S( APPOSITION TO TUB WHOUB 8£)iTENCB. 
 
 Sometimes an acouBative is put in apposition to the object 
 of a sentence : R. 8. 3, to aSwarov rod vSfiov . . . 6 Qeii 
 Ti» iavToO vliv irifi^evt ... KoriKftn t^i» aftafyrtav: 12. l, 
 vafMKeiKM vfta^ v<ipaarf}<rat rh ad/iara vft&v dvalav ^&<rav, 
 ayiav evdpearov r^ ©e^ t^v "Koytic^v Xarpelav. So A. 26. 3. 
 
 TH^ ACCySATIVB AS flUWaCT OF THB INFIKITIVB. 
 
 The subject of the verb in the infinitive mood is put in the 
 accusative case; but after verbs of commanding, entreating, 
 tt>a with the conditional mood is used: M. 16. 13, riva fu 
 TJyowroi ol SvOptmoi elvau; A. 16. 15, d KeKpixari fie irurriiv 
 t^ Kvpi^ ehtu: K 15. 8, \^a Sk 'Ii)aovv Xpitrrbv StdKovov 
 yeyevTJireai t^ vepiTO/ifjt : 1 0. 7. 26, vofii^a olv tovto koKou 
 inrdpxew : L. 24. 23, ot TJyovaiv avriv ^jjp : A. 26. 26, \av0dveiv 
 f^ap axnov Tt Totnmv ov irel0o/iat ovSiv : M. 4. 3, elvi Xva ol \l0ot 
 o&rot aproi yevavrai. Both are used with 6eK(o Mk. 16. 35, 
 36, OeK/iftev Xva 8 ^^i; alrqaanev voi^iryi fifuv. -O Sk ehrev 
 avToif * Tt diKere Trot^aat fu iifuv ; 
 
 THB OBNITIVB. 
 
 The genitive denotes every kind of relationship. The pri- 
 mary idea is the ' whonce-case,* and invariably expresses the 
 antecedent notion. Its regular uses may be divided into the 
 three heads of ablative, partitive, relative. Under ablative 
 and partitive may be arranged all those usages which are 
 expressed by the prepositions 'of,' 'from.' Thus Donaldson 
 remarks, § 448, " Whenever we wish to express that an object 
 is the starting-point from which we set out, the cause o/ some 
 action, the substance Jrom which we derive a sensation, or the 
 source /rom which something else proceeds, the material of 
 which it is made, or of which it is full ; that it is something 
 from which we desist, ^o»i whioh we are separated or set free, 
 or <j/ which we are deprived, in all these instances we have the. 
 
 'r/^-^' 
 
 
 
 ■l*^ 
 
 ■■-, 
 
 '•■■s 
 
 K^' 
 
 i 
 
 THE OBNITIVB OF OBIQIN. 
 
 67 
 
 Oreek genitive as an ablative case. And when we wish to 
 express that an object is a whole, Jrom or out ^ which we take 
 or give a part, we employ the Qreek genitive as a partitive 
 
 case. 
 
 With this we may compare the account of the genitive in 
 English, given in Angus's Handbook of the English Tongue : 
 *' The genitive has a double force, attributive and objective. The 
 attributive genitive indicates some quality of the noun on which 
 it is dependent, as origin, or agency, possession, mutual relation 
 of persons, quality, material or substance of which something 
 is made, or the class to which it belongs as part of a whole | 
 the genitive of definition, or partitive genitive, as this last is 
 sometimes called. The objective genitive expresses the object 
 of some feeling or action." 
 
 THE GENrrrVB OF ABLATION. 
 
 With verbs of removal: L. 16. 4, Stcw ner<urrad& t^ 
 clicovofi,la<i : Mk. 2. 21, alpet t6 irXi^po/ua avToS to koipop roO 
 iraXaiov: A. 15.- 29, awijfetrdeu e^uXoOvrapi 1 T. 6. 6, 
 airetrreptmhtap Tiji aKriBeia^ : Xen. Anab. v. 1. 2, Travadfiepo^ 
 Tovroiv r&p iroptopi 1 P. 4. l, ^ itadmp hi aapxi rrhravrat 
 aftapriat: E. 4. 16, drniXKorpuiaitipoi t^$ ^arjv tov Oeov: 2 F. 
 2. 14, dKaTanrauarow ajiapfrltK. Sometimes & preposition is 
 inserted : Rev. 14. 13, Xva apuiravcriapTai ix r&p kowwp avr&p. 
 
 With verbs denoting production or its result: Hdt. v. 82, 
 j^oKkov iroUoPTOc rh, arfoKfuiTa: ii. 138, earpaphnf iarX oSo^ 
 \iSov. This use of the genitive is sometimes accompanied 
 by diro, or ix: J. 2. 15, ttomjctcw ^par/iKXutp ix v)(oipmpi M. 
 27. 29, irX^{avT£( oriiJMVop i^ UKapd&v. 
 
 THE GENITIVE OF ORIGIN. 
 
 To this head of ablation we may refer the genitive of deriva- 
 tion, source, origin: L. 3. 23, v(o$ 'Iomt^^, tou 'H\/: B. 1. 0, 
 icKifroX 'Irfffov Xpurrov: A. 1. 4, rifp iirofyyeXlap ffv ^Kowrari 
 fuov. J. 6. 45, eaopTOA irdme^ hihaicTol rov 6eov: E. 6. 11, t^v 
 ' iravoirXlap rov Oeov, source, origin, whence the* armour comes : 
 E. 6. 17 1 Ti/v fid'}(aipav rov Ilpev/juirov, the word which the 
 Spirit supplies, the word of God, the Svpaim Oeov, R. 1. 16 ; 
 1 0. 1. 18; H. 4. 12; E. 2. U, t^ fteaoroixop rov ^parfiutVi 
 the wall which resulted from the fence between Jew and 
 Gentile: 1 T. 4. i, iiZaaKc^Jm^ Stuitoplmv, doctrines sug> 
 
 F 2 
 
68 
 
 THB OBMITIVB OP FXJLNUSS AND DBFICIBNCY. 
 
 gested by devils (gen. aubjectt): E. 6. 4, ip iraiSel^ xal vovOeala 
 Kvplov, Him from whom they proceed, and by whose Spirit 
 they must be regulated. 
 
 Thus the genitive is used with substantives to denote the 
 cause or origin of a thing: 2 T. 1. 8, Sia/juov avrov, gen. 
 auotoris, whom He has made a prisoner: 2 0. 11. ae, KivSvvot<i 
 wora/mv koI Xnar&v: E. 4. 18, t^s {ia^s rov Qeov: R. 4. 13, 
 StA SiMuoavm}^ wltrrem: E. 1. 13, top Xoyov Ttyi oK-qdelai, 
 gen. tubatanticB, truth was its very essence and substance. 
 
 Also definite agency : 2 Th. 2. is, ip a^uurfi^ Tlveviumyi : 
 E. 1, 18, 4 tKirh rrfi KXi}<re(i>$ avroS, the hope which the calling 
 works in the heart (gen. of the cauaa efficiem): 1 Th. 1. «, 
 Xa/>a« IIpevfMTOi, joy inspired by and emanafing from the 
 Spirit : E. 4. 4, iv fi,i^ iXirlSi rrj^ KXijtreai vft&p. 
 
 THB GBNITIVB OP PULNESS AND DEFICIENCY. 
 
 To this we may refer verbs and nouns of fulness, as these 
 denote the matter or substance ; also of want, as these imply 
 separation or removal from the object : M. 23. 28, ftearol 
 inroKpiaem km dpo/tlav: R. 15. 13, 6 Oeoi irkripdxrM v/tai 
 vdarjii x'ipO'l itciX elpijptpi : L. 1. 63, ireiv&PTa<{ ipbrkqaep ar^ad&p: 
 A. 5. 28, 7r£7rXi;piu/caT« t^i» 'lepovaakiip, t^s ii,ha)(fp v/i&p: 
 J. 2. jr, feftlaare tA? vSpia^ vBaTO<i: M. 22. lo, hrX'^aOii 6 
 ydp.o<i avaKetfih/wv: L. 11. 39, to Saadep vfi&p fifiei dpnarftj^ 
 Ka\ TTOvTipia^ : L. 15. 17, voaot filaOioi rov irarpin fiov irepur- 
 vevovatp dprup : L. 4. 28, hrk-qadtiaap Travre; dvfuni : A. 2. 88, 
 irXfipmaevt fte eiMppoamni'i : 27. 38, Kopetrdhnet rpotfnjs : Mk. 14. 
 13, Kepd/tiop vSarov: 3, dXafiaarpop p,vpov vdpSov: J. 21. 8, 
 TO BtKTvop T&v ixjSvoip : Ja. 1. 6, et rn v/t&p Xeiirerai aotjtLtvi : 
 R. 3. 23, rrdvref varepoOvTai lifi S6^ too Oeov: L. 22. 3S, 
 ore dvlaretXa vpa^ arep fiaXaprtov koI iTQpaf Kal inro&fipMTwp 
 fiil TWO? varep^aare; 01 hi etvop- OiSevo^: A. 17. 25, ovSi 
 ffepaireverai rrpoaSeofievoi Twof. 
 
 To this class belong the collective words which are followed 
 by a genitive: A. 6. 7, hrXtiBwero 6 dpiffftm t«i» fui8ryr&p 
 — TToXw? S'X^ T«i» lepiap inriJKOvop ry irkrrei: 1. 15, S^koi 
 ovo/idrap : L. 1. lo, irap to ir\ij0o<i tow \aov : J. 5. 3, irX^^o? 
 TToXw Twi; dadepowrap : A. 28. 3, ^pvydpup TrX^^o9 : M. 8. 30, 
 dr/eKi} ■yplpop : L. 16. 6, iicarop Pdrovt iKaiov. 
 
 Quantitative noims estimated by measurement: A. 1. 13 
 aafifidrov i^ov oS6p : L. 2. 44, t^X^oi' ^p,ipwi ohop. 
 
 rrHB QBNinvB of partition. 
 
 69 
 
 This is frequently used with dvo, marking its use as the 
 genitive of ablation : J. 11. 18, Ijp ^ Bijdapia ^yyvs tmi/ 'lepoao- 
 XvpMP dn dir6 aroBUop SeKuiripTe : Rev. 14. 20, otto araSuup 
 X^XUtp k^cucoalap. 
 
 THE genitive OP PERCEPTION. 
 
 The perceptions of the senses, hearing, smelling, taste, and 
 mental emotions, are expressed by the genitive of ablation. 
 The object itself is regarded as the source or material from 
 which tiie perception emanates, and the percipient is supposed 
 to draw his perception from that object, which is therefore 
 placed in the genitive. In a secondary sense the object may be 
 said to be the generic origin of the sensation : L. 14. 24, ov5el« 
 rS»p dpSp&p iKelvwp tuv KOcXijpApcap yevaeral pav tov Sehrpov: 
 A. 23. 14, pfjSeph yevaaaBat. In the New Testament the 
 verbs i<r$Utp, ^nvyelp are repeatedly followed. by diro, ix, see 
 M. 15. 37 ; 10. 11. 28 ; H. 13. id. Of this there is no exact 
 instance in classic Greek, though diroXaveiv dfirS two; is akin to 
 it : A. 9. 1, ip,irpeap dveikfji xal ^i/ov, inwardly breathing (redo- 
 lent of) threatening and murder : Arist. Equit. 457, ovro« fj^ 
 kokUk Koi trvKo^prlof vpel: L. 15. 25, j^xovae ovp^fmpltK koI 
 Xop&p I Mk. 14. 64, ^xovo'aTe t^v pKaai^p>UK '. L. 17. 32, ptpiipo- 
 v6V£Te T^ yvpaucoi Awr : L. 1. 72, ppijadijpai SiaO^ictfi. When 
 verbs of remembrance are followed by a genitive the meaning is 
 simply 'to remember,' the object being regarded as that from 
 which the memory emanat^; by an accusative, 'to keep in 
 remembrance,' ' to bear in mind :' A. 20. 33, dpyvpkv ij "xpvaiov 
 ^ IpaTur/tov ovSepoi €ir€0vp,tfa-a: 1 T. 3. l, et tk hruricoirrfi 
 opSyerai, xaXoO Spyov hnOvp^i Philemon 20, pal h/m crov opal- 
 p.i)p : R. 15. 24, Olp vpMP wp&TOP dirb pApovi ip.irXijaffa. 
 
 THE OENITIVB OP PARTITION. 
 
 In some of the preceding instances which denote the measure- 
 ment of time, space, or which express mental perceptions, the 
 genitive of ablation passes insensibly into the genitive of 
 partition. 
 
 The genitive of time expresses within the space of a certain 
 amount of time, or within the limits of the year or day : ot 
 voXip,toi dire)(mpqaap pvieroi. In the latter usage we may 
 supply ftipei or &p<f, which renders it partitive or possessive : 
 Mk. 13. 35, oiiK otSare irore icvpio^ t% oUta^ Spj(erat o^i 
 
ro 
 
 THB OKNITITB OF VBI4ATIOS. 
 
 ^ Heaowierlou, ^ iXgwropwpmvlav, where a portion of the night is 
 evidently intend^ So M. 25. 6, ftia'^ WKrht Kpavfy y^opev : 
 A. 26. 13, ^/iifios i»Avni Kwrh, t^v ^v elSov. 
 
 The partitive ose of the genitive is clear in 1 0. 10. ai, ov 
 iwaaOe rpairi^^^ KvpCov /tere^ew Koi rpaTre^Tyi Saifiovuov : 2 T, 
 2. 6, Tov Kovi&vra feapybv Set irp&rov twi> Kapn&v tieraXa/i- 
 fidvetv: H, 7, 13, ^uX^f iripaf fteriaxOKf i 1 0. 10. 16. 18, 
 Koivavla rov aJfuvToi roO Xpurjov, kowwvqX tow Bvauurrqpiou : 
 H. 3. 1, wXi)arcci>9 iirovpavlov /UriyxQt, 
 
 80 also with adjeotives of (uv indefinite number, with pronouns 
 or Buperlativest where the substantive is ; considered' as a whole, 
 and the adjective as a part : M. 3. 7, voKKoixi r&p tapuraUov 
 Kal SaSSovKatwVi. M..15. 37, ri Vipiavfwv r&v icKacrfidrwK: L. 
 19. 8, tA ^fiitni r&v {mapxivrav nav : M. 27. 47, r/ves t&v ixei 
 iarmrav : L. 14. 19, t2c r&v tnweaiaKeiftivctv : 1 0. 15. 9, o ^Pui- 
 
 elvat and yiyvearffat are repeatedly used in this sense : M. 6. 
 
 13, aov icrriv ^ fieuriKela ; L. 20. 33, t/vo? avr&v yiveTa$ ywij; R, 
 
 14. 8, idv T< 001/ ^&fiev, idv t« dirodvTJaiuofiev, tov Kvplov iofUy : 
 2 T. 2. 19, Jyvw Kvpioi Toiq BvTa<i avrov : H. 10. 39, jJ/*«s ovie 
 iafiiv vjrooToKffi : 12. II, iraaa vatSeta ov ioKei xap&i elveui 
 1 0. 1. 13, iya> fiiv eifu IlavXov: Mk. 10.' 14, t&v 7^/9 toiovtwv 
 itrrlv ■/) ^curiKela toS 6eov, for to such belongs the kingdom of 
 God : Xen. Anab, ii. 1.4, tok yitp fidjfiiv vuaovrav kuI to apj(ei,v 
 iari, for to those, who win the battle belongs the sovereignty as 
 well : 9, ou t&v vnewvTav etrj Tit iirKa iraptiSiMvat. 
 
 Verbs which do not in themselves denote participation, but 
 which imply acquisition of port of the object, are followed 
 regularly by a genitive of partition : L. 16. 24, ha fid-^ to 
 &Kpov TOV SaicrvKov avrov vSarof : 1. 9, SXa^e tou Bvfudaai : 
 20. 35, o( /cara^uadivrei rov al&voi iKeivov Tv^eci/: A. 27. 36, 
 irpoaeKd^ovro rpo^. With this compare L. 24. 42, iiriSttKav 
 avT^ V)(j3vov onrrov fiepoi /cat diro fieKuralov icijplov : 2 T. 2. 16, 
 M, irXetov TrpoKo^ovmv dae^e'uv}, they will advance to greater 
 measures of ungodliness, 
 
 THK GENITIVE OF RELATION. 
 
 Under this head come all the uses where wo may introduce 
 the words * in regard or respect to,' ' pertaining to : ' Mk. 14. 64, 
 Svoy(pv Oavdrov: H. 6. 9, rii Kpeirrova Koi ixo/teva ffwrripiav, 
 quao ad salutem faciunt; quao ad salutem proxime adducuut: 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 IDIOMXTIO VSAOfiS OF THE GENITIVE. 
 
 71 
 
 Xen. Anab. yi. 8. 1, koivS t^ varrnplaf ixeadcu. rov wddovt 
 olierelpm ae. airi&vrai dXXi^Xot/s rov yeyevri/iivov. rrjt fiiv 
 ToKfuift ov Oavftd^a. evj(w\f}9 hnfi>kii^>erai. 
 
 The gen. marks the standard of comparison with compara- 
 tives, superlatives, and all words which denote comparison, 
 value, buying, selling, exchanging: Mk. 4. 32, iravrav r&v 
 'Kaxdvmv /lei^wv: M. 10. 29, ov^l Svo arpovBIa daraaptov 
 TTtdKeirat ; M. 16. 26, t» hutvei avOpunro^ dvrdXKarffM rijt -^n/j^? 
 avroO I M. 26. g,"ijSvvaTo rovro rb fivpov irpa$rjvai ttoXXoO: 1 0. 
 6. 20, ^opdaff'qre Tiiifji : M. 10, 31, rroKK&v orpovOiav Zia^tpere 
 vfieh: J. 8. 65, iaofieu onoiot v/t&v ^frevanji, denoting oom-i 
 parison, or resemblance in internal character. E. 4. 16, Siii 
 nrdmyi d^t rff; hrtxapriyla^, gen. deflnitivus, by which the pre- 
 dominant use, purpose, or destination of the d<f>^ is specified 
 and characterized 'through every joint for the supply,' t^ 
 denotes the specific eirixop-, which Christ supplies: E. 2. 12, 
 ^ivoi r&v Sia07)K&v, strangers in regard to the covenants ; gen. 
 of * the point of view.' So 1 Tim. 1. 16, rrpos inrorvirtaaiv r&v 
 fteWovTtov: Ot. 2. 17, dfiaprlat SidKovo<i, a ftirtherer, a promoter 
 of sin: 2 Th. 2. u, ivipyeiav TrXavq?, a working which tends to 
 enhance and develope delusion: H. 9. 21, aKewj 1^9 Xeirovpyia^, 
 vessels for th6 service : E. 1. 14, ew atroKurptoaiv rrfi irepmofq- 
 aean, to effect redemption in respect to purchasing: Kev. 18. 
 14, 17 onrutpa t^s hriBvftlai t^s '^wjc^s <''<«' (i- 6- ^ vtrmpa ^s hriSv- 
 fiei ^ fjrvxfi aov, the fruits which thy soul, desires) : E. 4. 29, 
 irpoi oiKoSofiiiv T^ j(pelai, for edification in respect of the need, 
 the genitive of remote reference or of the point of view; 
 edifying which satisfies the need: dvof^Koiov iv t§ irpoxei/ievy 
 7(pela, Theophylact. 
 
 Kence varied relations of time and place : M. 1. 11, 1^9 fieroir- 
 Kefrlai Bafiv\&vof, the transmigration in regard to Babylon: 
 C. 1. 20, Sid TOV aXfJMTO^ rov oravpov ainov : Jude 6, et? Kpiaw 
 lurfeLKi)<{ ^fiipa^. 
 
 From the genitive of price there is an immediate transition 
 to that of cause or motive : A. 21. 20, vdvret ^rpumal rod v6/iov 
 inrdpj(pv<ri : 26. 3, yvmanjv Svra ae irdvrmv r&v Kard 'lovSaiom 
 ed&v re icdX ^ifrqfidTav ', Ja. 1. 13, « ffdp Oeoi direlpaaro^ iari 
 KUK&v, is unassailed as far as regards evil thoughts. 
 
 IDIOMATIC USAGES OF TIIE GENITIVE. 
 
 Besides these there are certain idiomatic usages which are 
 
72 
 
 THE QEMITIVB Oy POSSBSSIOK. 
 
 Btamped With a special impreae, such as the possessive genitive, 
 the genitive of contact, the tentative use, and the genitive 
 absolute. (Donaldson, § 454.) 
 
 The possessive genitive is nearly allied to the genitive of 
 partition, and may be rendered by the English ' of or belonging 
 to:' E. 1, J, dTTooToXov Xp. 'Iriaov. the Master whose minister 
 and servant he was : A, 27. 23 ; R, 1. i ; I Th. 2. 6. This 
 must be distinguished from the gen. of ablation, which would 
 mark the source of his commission. The principle adopted by 
 the poets of using this genitive as a substitute for an epithet 
 is greatly extended by the writers of the New Testament from 
 the influence of corresponding expressions in Hebrew. Thus 
 we have Soph. Jntiff. 114, Xev*^ j^lotxxt trripv^. a snow-white 
 wing: Hkctra 19, &<rrpa>v ev<f>p6vri, a starry night: Eurip. 
 I^Acm. 1616, rpavfuiTa aJfiaroi, bloody wounds. These geni- 
 tives express much greater intensity than any mere qualifying 
 adjective, as the quality is considered to be an essential and 
 component part of the subject to which it is attributed. 
 
 L.-16, 8, TOP oUopo/iop T^ aSiKlai: R. 1. 26, nddri arinUm: 
 2 Th. 2. u, ipipyeuip ir\dpti<t, an efficacy of delusion: I T. 6. 
 17, ^l ir\avTov aSrjXoniTt: R. 7. 2i, autfMroi rov dapdrov 
 rovTov: H. 1. 3, tw prmari 1^5 Swa/wws awroO: Rev. 13. 3, 
 fl irharfy Tofl BapwTov avrov : Ja. 1. 25, aKpoa-riys hn\i)atiopi)<i : 
 E. 2. 2, Tot« viah Trj<; airuBeUvi, a disobedience to which they 
 belong as children to a parent. "This marks more vividly 
 than the adjectival construction the essential and innate dis- 
 obedience of the subjects." Ellicott. E. 1: 13, rh eiayyiktop riji 
 tramjplat vfmp, the good news which turns upon and reveals 
 your^ salvation: 1. 10, et? oUopo/iiap rov irX^prnjuiTixi r&v 
 Kaip&p, the dispensation characterized by, and so to be set 
 forth in, the fulness of time. " Propria plenitudini temporum." 
 R. II. 6, KUT ixXoyriv x«/>tTos, according to a selection of 
 favour, i. e. on the principle of a selection made by gratuitous 
 favour. 
 
 The genitive of possession may denote either the subject or 
 the object : E. 6. 19, to ftvaTijpiop rov evwyyeXlov subjecti, the 
 mystery which the Gospel involves: E. 1. 9, to /iv<rrtjpiop rod 
 6e\i^fiaro<t obj'ecti, in the matter of, concerning the will. In 
 Rev. 19. 10 both senses may be involved : jJ /lap-rvpia rov 
 'I-qaov iorl to vpevfta t^s irpo^eUvi, the testimony borne to 
 Jesus, or, the testimony proceeding from Jesus. 
 
 THE GENITIVE OF PKETWMINATING QTJALITT. 
 
 73 
 
 The following are objective genitives; rov dpSpo^ evfiiveia, 
 goodwill to the man: eirucovprifia t^s xtovos, defence against 
 the snow : M. 10. I, e^ovaUtp iFpevfidrap aKaddprmv, power over 
 unclean spirits : 10. 5, ek oSop iOp&p, way leading to the Gen- 
 tiles : H. 11. 26, rov opetSiafiop rov Xpiarov, reproach sustained 
 for Christ : 0. 1. 24, rh, vtrrepijfiara twv BKlyfrettp rov Xpiarov : 
 J. 2. 17, o 5^X0? toO oUov aov: Tit. 2. u, ^ijKarfiv koK&p Ipyap, 
 specifying the object about which the ^\o<i waa displayed : 2 T. 
 I. 8, rh fiaprvpu)p; rov KvpLov ^/i&p, about our Lord. " Omnia 
 prsedicatio vel confessio quaa de Ghristo fit apud homines." R. 
 9. 23, aicevi) opyfji}, i)Uov<t, vessels which are objects of wrath, of 
 mercy: A. 9. is, axevo^ ^w\o7^$, an instrument, which is an 
 object of selection : E. 4. 23, Tp Jlpeu/iari rov pobi vfi&p, the 
 Divine spirit with which the vooi is endued, of which it is the 
 receptaculum. 
 
 So with the possessive pronoun : L. 22. 19, ell rifv ifi^p apd- 
 /ivTjatp, for remembrance of me. The genitive (subjecti) is also 
 used in apposition with the personal pronoun implied in the 
 possessive adjective: 0. 4. 18, 6 aairaapm ry ifi^ X^V^ 
 HavKov. 
 
 THE GENITIVE OF PREDOMINATING QUALITV. 
 
 The genitive is used to define the characteristic quality and 
 design of the preceding substantive: M. 22. Ii, epSvfta f^dfuw: 
 24. 16, TO fiSikvyfia rr}<i ipi)pMaea»^ : 2 Th. 2. 9, ripara y^evSov^ : 
 H. I. 8, ^a/8£of evOvTrfTot: E. 5. 2, eh 6a-fii}p ewoSlan 2 P. 2. 1, 
 aipiaeK atrtitKelai, perdition was their mark and character : 2. 
 14, Kardpcn reieva, they had not the character of children at all 
 except in relation to the curse : I P. 5. u, darrdiraade cLhXrjKovi 
 iv <f>iX^fiari ar/dinf}'. G. 5. I, (Vyw hovKela^'. E. 6. 12, t^ trpev- 
 /uirucii rrjii iropriplai, the spiritual communities of wickedness, 
 characterized by essential wopifpla : I P. I. 14, riwa inreucofji, 
 children of obedience, to whom obedience is as a mother com- 
 municating her nature to yours (Wordsworth) : Mk. I. 4, 
 fidirrur/ia furavolai, baptism which binds to repentance, to 
 change of heart and life : H. 4. 2, 6 X6709 riji dKoi^<{; the word 
 of hearing, the word uttered in order to be heard : Ja. 2. 4, 
 xpiral SiaXoyia-fi&v iropijp&v, judges (under the bias) of evil 
 musings: R. 9. 31, p6fio<; SiKatoawti^, a liaw or system for 
 gaining righteousness : G. 6. 6, ix vtarettt ikrriBa SiKauurwrjit 
 direKheypiuBa. The Jew regarded Zucaioawii as something 
 
74 
 
 THB OKKITIVB OF PBEDOlllNATINO QUALITY. 
 
 outward, present, realizable; the Chriatian as flomething in- 
 ward, future, and, save through faith in Christ, unattainable. 
 Aucawawn is one of the divine results which stretch into 
 eternity, and involves the idea of future blessedness and glorifi- 
 cation. H. 13. 20; 1 Th. 6. 33, i Oeos t^s e/pjjw;9, God the 
 author of peace, the God of whom peace is a characterizing 
 attribute; the gen. marks the deep inward peace and tran- 
 quillity which as God's especial gift stands in close alliance 
 with holiness. In cognate expressions, as A. 7. 2, i eeh<; -r^e 
 Sofij?: E. 1. 17, i variip t^9 Wfij«: Ja. 2. 1, rov Kvptov ^ii&v 
 'Iijtrov XpuTTOv T^s Wfijs, the gen. is said to be a Hebraism, 
 having merely the qualifying power of an adjective. But no 
 one would render Ja. 1. 17, rov Trarpht rmv ^Ta»/, 'the 
 enlightened father,' rather than the source of all enlighteping 
 qualities. Hence we may consider -riji Sofij? to mean the 
 Author of Glory to whom all glory belongs, in whom all glory 
 consists. E. 1. 13, rp wvev/uirt t^s iwcvyyeXiav, is more than 
 the promised spirit, as it means the spirit, the main subject and 
 theme of promise : E. 3. 1 1, xarit -irpiOeaiv r&v altmmv, the 
 purpose determined on in the ages : R. 16. 6, ©eos t^s vno/wi^t. 
 "Deus qui largitur tnro/iovrjv." Tittmann. God who impartii 
 brave patience. 1 P. 5. lo, Oeos x^P'^o?, God who is the 
 author of grace. 
 
 Many substantives are joined with irvevfta to denote the 
 specific xap*<'/«»i or characteristic quality. Thus J. 14. 17, 
 t6 wpev/ia t^ oKifieUut, the Spirit, who is the author and 
 teacher of truth : H. 10. 29, rh mievfta "rij^'x^erm, the giver of 
 grace: R. 1. 4, mevfta iyuxrvvTH, essentially holy, and the 
 efficient agent of holiness, " Non quidem id ipsum quod irveSfia 
 wytov, sed gravius et ifuftariKm sermone venerandum." (Bret- 
 schneider.) Then we have a number of other passages where 
 weOfM ultimately refers to the Holy Spirit as the inworking 
 power, but immediately to the state of the inward spirit, as 
 wrought upon by the Holy Spirit : G. 6. 1, irvevnan irpa6nrrp<i : 
 R. 8. 15, imevfut viodetrlai: 2 0. 4. 13, tA owto irvev/ia t^s 
 TTMrreo)? : E. 1. 17, irvevfia ao^loi ical iiroKaXv^eai. 
 
 In R. 11. 8, we have wevfta Koravv^mi, spirit of slumber. 
 The word is used for deep sleep by LXX, in Is. 29. 10. 
 Koravv^i^ is clearly derived from Karapvatra, prick sharply, 
 A. 2. 37. The connexion between Kardvv^t^ and torpidity, 
 apathy, numbness, insensibility, is not apparent. Mr. Wratis- 
 
 i 
 
 TBB TEMTATIVB USB OF THB OEmTIVB. 
 
 75 
 
 J 
 
 < ■ 
 
 law traces it by reminding us of the effect produced by the 
 habitual use of a needle, which causes insensibility by constant 
 pricking. "A person who habitually neglects the prickings 
 of conscience becomes dead and insensible to them, just like 
 the needle-woman's fingers. And the metaphor would natu- 
 rally come to a tent-maker, which was the ordinary trade of 
 St. PauL" (Notes and Dissertations, p. 87.) 
 
 THE OEmTIVB OF CONTACT. 
 
 The genitive is used after verbs of contact and adhesion, 
 on the principle that the thing touched becomes part of the 
 object with which it is in contact: Eurip. See. 398, oiroia 
 Kiaao<i Spvot Sttok TrjaS' l^ofMi, as ivy to oak, thus will I cling 
 to h^ : J. 20, 17, p-v f^v airrov, do not fasten on me : 2 C. 6. 
 17, axaffapTov p.^ airreade : L. 8. 44, i^aro rov KpaairiSov 
 rov IpMriov avrov : H. 12. 20, k&u Orjplov 0iyj) rov 6pov^ : H. 
 11. 28, tva p.ij 6 oXoOpevav fftYB O'Vr&v : H. 6. 9, ri. ixop-eva 
 fforriplafi, things conjoined with salvation : Mk. 5. 41, xpanjaa^ 
 rrji ^etpov rov rraiSiov : A. 3. 7, indaav avrov rijv Se^Mi j(€ip6i. 
 "In all such adhesions and attachments the object attached 
 is regarded as really separable ; the idea of conjunction is 
 conveyed by the verb, and the genitive according to its proper 
 ablative meaning, implies that there is at least a partial dis- 
 junction." Donaldson. 
 
 THE TENTATIVE USE OF THB GENITIVE. 
 
 The genitive is joined to a number of verbs implying an 
 attempt to attain an object. This is in strict accordance with 
 the primary idea of the genitive as expressing the antecedent . 
 notion ; the source from which the act of body or mind takes 
 its rise: 1 T. 3. 1, el rvi eTrur Koiriji opeyerai, koXov Ifyyov 
 iiridvpeZ : H. 11. 16, xpelrrovo^ ope^ovrai rovriariv hrovpaviov : 
 M. 5. 28, 6 pKeiTwv rpn/aiKa irpoi rh hriBvp-fiaai avrrjf. 
 
 Here we may place A. 3. 12, ireiroiTiKotri rov irepnrareiv 
 avrov. LXX, Josh. 22. 26, rroi^at rov olKoSop.^aai : A. 7. 19, 
 itcdKatae rov iroieiv : A. 15. 20, hnarelXat avroii^ rov aire)(€adai : 
 A. 20. 30, i^ vp.&v avr&p avaar^aovrai, avSpe^ \a\ovvrei St- 
 etrrpappspa, rov diroarrav touv p^dt^rh^ onrurm avr&v. 
 : This usage is explained in two ways. The verbs mean to 
 set one's mind towards the attainment of an object, and may 
 tbus be connected with verbs which imply fulness or want; 
 
76 
 
 TUB DA.TIYB OF COINCIDENCE, 
 
 or they indicate motion in a presumed direction, so that until 
 the object ia reached, the genitive is used as the case of separa- 
 tion. If, however, the motion is supposed to be completed, 
 and the object is reached, then the accusative is used as the 
 case of terminated action. 
 
 THE OENinVB ABSOLUTE. 
 
 The genitive absolute expresses the time when, or the cause 
 why— the source, the fact, the event, from which something 
 else proceeds : Mk. 10. 17, iieiropevofievov avrov ek oBop irpoaSpa- 
 fiMV eh hnipuiTa avrov: Mk. 11. 27, ev t# iepm irepmarownvi 
 airrov Spxovrat irpht avrbv oi apxiepeJi: L. 17.*ia, elaepxofUvou 
 aiiTov eti riva lemiMjv air^aav avr^ Sixa Xeirpol avSpet: 
 L. 18. 40, iyyliravTOi avrov hniparrqaev avrov: A. 24^ -lO 
 aireKptdi) i ilaOXo? vevaavrot ain^ jov ^tfiovoi X^ew. In 
 all these instances the participle asserts a secondary predicate, 
 which was the occasion of the action stated by the primary 
 predicate. 
 
 TBB DATIVE. 
 
 The dative is the where-case, the case of rest, generally with 
 the aid of a preposition. 
 
 The object referred to is considered as the point of juxta- 
 position, or immediate proximity ; as receptive of accession or 
 gain, or as having additions made to it. 
 
 The usages of the genitive and dative may be thus con- 
 trasted: the genitive denotes separation, subtraction, com- 
 parison of different things; the dative denotes proximity, 
 addition, equality, or sameness. 
 
 ^ The usages of the dative are four: coincidence or con- 
 tingency; instruments, or proximate causes of the action; 
 recipients, or persons immediately interested in the action; 
 special limitations. 
 
 The dative expresses the second term of two nouns standing 
 in relation to each other, but with the additional notion of an 
 interval lying between the two objects. (Q, R. No. 225.) 
 
 THE DATIVE OF COINaDENCE. 
 
 The point of time is regularly expressed by the dative: 
 L. 2. 41, hropevovTO ot 7oi>ew airrov xar Sro^ c« 'lepovaaX^/i 
 TV ioprr^ tow irwrxa: M. 16. 21, t§ rpirn iipApa iyepd^vai-^ 
 
 THE DATIVE OF QUAtlFYING CIRCUMSTANCE. 
 
 77 
 
 Mk. 6. 21, 'HpaStii TOK f^eveaiois avrov SeiTivov hrotei : It. 
 12. 20, ravrg r§ wml: A. 21. 26, t^ ixo/iivji ^/tipa. 
 
 Sometimes also the duration: B. 16. 25, xarii mroKoKv^w 
 fUHmiplov j(p6voi^ aimvloKi treaupifihiov, in accordance with the 
 unveiling of a secret hidden in silence through eternal times, 
 L e., throughout the whole period from the commencement 
 of time : 1 Tim. 2. 6, to fiaprvpiov KotpoU tSloK, the import of 
 the testimony to be set forth in its proper seasons ; the dative 
 of the time wherein the action takes place. This form of 
 the temporal dative approximates to the ordinary use of the 
 temporal genitive, which rarely occurs in the New Testament : 
 A. 8. 11, Sih TO Ixav^ XP^^V '''"'^ fuv^eluK e^<rraKh>at airrov^. 
 
 Thus it indicates a coincident or contingent circumstance of 
 manner, accompaniment, so that it is really equivalent to an 
 adverb: 1 J. 3. 18, /i^ orfair&iiev Xtr/^ p.ifik "fkuurang, a\X' 
 epr^tp Kol oKifdelef: A. 16. 37, Seipavrei ■^fia^ Srifioalcf' \d0pa 
 filiSvi iKBatCKoviTiv: Rev. 14. is, i^vrjae Kpavr/y fieydKy: J. 
 21. 8, 01 Bi oAAoi fiadijTal r^ wKoiapl^ ^\j0ov : G. 3. 3, evap^d- 
 fiepoii TTpevftaTi vvv aapxi hrvreKeurde'. J. 21. 19, cnmalvav 
 voUp davdr^ So^daei tov 0£6p: G. 2. 6, oh ovSi rrpoi &pav 
 ei^aftev t$ vnorariy, by yielding the subjection they claimed 
 (Rhetorical Use of the Article). 
 
 THE DATIVE OF QUALIFYINQ CIRCUMSTANCE. 
 
 Hence the dative is used to indicate the definitive or quali- 
 fying circumstance, 'by,' 'in respect to:' G. 2. is, tifieh ^iaei 
 'Ipvicuot : G. 1. 22, ^p/qv arp>oovp.evo^ T^irpoodnra. 
 
 The general limiting nature of the dative may here be fully 
 recognized. St. Paul was not unknown to the churches in 
 every sense, but only in regard to his outward appearance. 
 This particular dative, commonly called the dative ' of reference 
 to,' must be clearly distinguished both from the instrumental 
 and the modal dative (1 C. 11. s), though allied to them: 
 It must rather be considered a local dative ethically used. 
 (Ellicott.) 1 T. 4. 3, & o Seiy; itcrurep eh fierdXriy^iv /terib 
 evj(api<TTla^ roh irurroh ical iireyvtoKoatp Trfp aKi^deiav irurroh '. 
 the dative marks the objects for whom the food was created 
 (fiprnfuiTa). This was indeed created for all, but it was only 
 in the case of the irurrol, after a receiving fierei, evyapurrlai, 
 which is the condition attached, that the true end of creation 
 was fully satisfied. 
 
78 
 
 THE DATIVB op PROXIMATE 0AD8E, 
 
 . The dative of norm or role: A. 16. i, ^^i; ft^ irepiri/iv^aee 
 T^ldei Matvaioxi ov Swaade a<o07Jvai: Q. 6. 16, Stroi t«S kuvSpi 
 rovnp (rroixovnv i Ph. 3. 16. * 
 
 The Bpecifio part in which one ia affected. The local dative 
 ethically used: A. 18. 6, awelxtro tw irvevfiaTi, : R. 4. 19, 
 M da0a^<rai if irlarei: M. 11, 29, T07r«i/os ry icapSla: L.' 
 1. 61, inrepfiifMvovt Stavola KaphUn air&v : A. 7. 61, amplrfvrrro^ 
 Ty mpBla xai rot? uxrlv: L. 2. 6a, irpoeKvme ao^ia koI ^Xixla: 
 1 Th. 3.^ 12, -irepurtreiaM rg iffdiTTj : Tit. 2. a, iyiaivovroi tq 
 irbrru, j% w^/dtrg, if inropavy. 
 
 External accompanimenta are regularly expressed by the 
 dative, even without a preposition: Rev. 8. 4, dve^ 6 Kairvin 
 r&v dvuMpArav rots vpoaevxaii t&u irfUov, together with the 
 prayers of the saints: 0. 2. u, i^aXetfai r6 Kaff jn&u 
 Xtipvfpa^v Tot« UypMTw, having cancelled the hostile bond, 
 together with its ordinances. 
 
 From this use we may explain its connexion with verbs 
 denoting companionship, contact, close intercourse: M. 8 \ 
 iiKoK4>v0r,aav avr^ 6x^i iroKUi: M. 12. 46, ^vrovinet airr& 
 A^»\^o-ai: A. 18. 19, heX^xOv roll 'lovSaloKi: 2 0. 12. 19, irdXiv 
 SoKthe 6ti ipTiv &iro\oyov/ie0a ; A. 24. 26, «i/*/Xet air^ : M. 6. 
 40, T9) 0i\^vTl aoi Kpi0rivai : A. 25. 24, irepi oi irav to ttX^^os 
 r&v ^lovialmv eV^i^ii; ,«,t: R. H. 2, hnvyxdvei, t<3 ©eiS 
 Karh TOW 'lapariK: M. 9. 10, awapsKeivTo t^ 'Iijerow: L. *24. 16* 
 awmopeCtero airTol<i: R. 8. 16, aM to m>e0^ta av^L/iaprvpei t^ 
 irvevfMTi ^fi&v : 2 0. 5, 20, KaTaWdrytire t# ©ep. 
 
 Verbs and nouns denoting juxta-pqsition, similarity, peculiar 
 appropriation, and the reverse, take the dative of proximity or 
 accompaniment: M. 7. 24, oftouiau ainov &vhp\ 4>povlp^: M. 
 20. 12, laovi fipZv airroi,, hrobiaa<t'. Ph. 2. 27, ^a0hni<Te 
 irapa-rrMawv davinp: H. 6. 7, (7^) W-n-owa fi^iinp, diOerov 
 tKelvoK Si oft? Kol yetupyeiTM. 
 
 THE DATIVE OP PROXIMATE CAUSE. 
 
 The dative is used to express the instrument, the proximate 
 cause, occasion, or ground of an act : Mk. 16. 19, ermrrov airou 
 riip Ketl>a\i,v xaU^: R. 11. 20, ry dnurria i^eK\da0r,aap, 
 «ri/ Se T^ vurfei foTij«a9, they were broken off by reason of their 
 unbelief, but thou standest by reason of thy faith; so 2 C. 1. 
 24: R. 11. 30, ^\€^V« Tg TOVTdP dTrei0el^: 2 0. 1. 16, towtj; 
 rji Treirot0ri<ra ipov)^p.i,p. by reason of this confidence I was 
 
 THE DATIVE OP ETHICAL RELATION. 
 
 79 
 
 ■j^ 
 
 intending : G. 6. 12, povov Ipu p,^ r^ trravptp rov Xpurrov 
 Buoietoprai, only to avoid persecution by reason of the cross of 
 Christ: M. 6. 22, opr/i^opevoi t^ dBeK<f)^: R. 12. 12, t^ iKirlBi 
 Xalpoprei : Ph. 2. 3, t§ raireivo^poavpy dXKrjKovi ftyovpxpoi 
 inrepkxovra^ iavr&p : E. 2. 8, t§ %aptT/ iare aeauapipoi Bid t^$ 
 X^ptroi : Q. 6. 26, €1 ^mp^p Itpevpari, Ilpevpari koI orot^^tu/tef. 
 The first Ilvevpari is a species of instrumental dative, if we live 
 by (the gift and efficacy of) the Spirit ; the second HvevpaTi 
 is the dative of norm, or rule, to which we are to be conformed : 
 2 P. 1. 21, ov fhp 0eKqpMTi dv0panrov i^pix^V "ftni irpwfnp-ela. 
 
 Hence the dative is used to express the agent even with 
 passive verbs, where we regularly find the genitive with tnro : 
 M. 5. 21, ipfiiOt) ToU dpxaioni L. 23. 15, -oiB^p a^iop Oavdrob 
 iari ireirpar/pivop ainm. Compare Xen. Hell, ii. 2. \7,dpapMi^a<a 
 vpip rh TOVTtp irevpoffpiva : Aristoph. JEccl. 73, rdy aW' vpHv 
 6p& ireirparfp^va : L. 24. 3S, eyp{oa0ii avroii : A. 7. 12, dveyva- 
 purOfl 'Icmr^^ rdif dBeX^ii airrov, was recognized by his 
 brethren: A. 16. 9, Spapa But Ttji pvkto^ &<f>07} r^ ITavXfi : 
 1 T. 3. 16, &^0r) dyyiXoK : 2 P. 3. 14, tnrovBdaaTt aairiXai Kal 
 dprnpryroi axn& evpe0rjpai i Ja. 3. 7, SeSdpMffrai Ty <j>vaei ry 
 dp0panrivy : 3. fS, airelperai rdtt iroiowrip etpijvfiv, 
 
 THE DATIVE OP ETHICAL RELATION. 
 
 Hence the dative is used to denote the final cause, the ethical 
 relation, the party or object 'on account of whom the thing is 
 done ; dativus commodi, the party interested : L. 7. 32, 17^X17- 
 aapep vpiv Kal ovk itpxnaaa0e iOpijvriffapev iipZp KaX ovk exXav> 
 aare: M. 3. 16, dpeairx0'ii<Tav airr^ ot ovpapoC: Mk. 9. 6, iroiijaa- 
 pep amjicd^ rpeif, aol plap, Kal Maxrei p.iap,Kal 'Hkla p,lap: 2 C. 
 5. 13, eire fdp i^ianipev, Oeof elre aa><ftpopovp.ep, vpiv: G. 6. 14, 
 Bi o5 ipx^, KoapiK iaravparai, Kor/m t^ KOtrpup, "Alter pro 
 mortuo habet alterum." Compare Thuc. ii. 7, AaKeSai/tovloK 
 phi . . . vavt iireTdx0qtrav, on which Dr. Arnold remarks : - 
 "It would not be easy to parallel the obscurity and gram- 
 matical solecisms of this sentence. — AaKeBaipovloiv may be 
 either the dative of the agent (proximate cause), and depend on 
 hr^axOif^ay, or it may be that dative which is called ' dativus 
 commodi,' extending the term ' commodi ' in a very wide sense, 
 so as to make it hardly more than mere relation. Compare v. 
 iii. iroKKovi fdp to alaxpov hreairdtraTo" 
 
CHAPTER VI. 
 
 VERBS, VOICES, TENSES. 
 
 As every verb has reference to action, and all action must 
 take place in time, whatever is predicated by a verb is a pre- 
 dication of time. 
 
 The time and state of an action are represented by tenses. 
 
 The time of an action is present, past, future. The 8tate of an 
 
 Taction is imperfect, perfect, or indefinite. In the imperfect 
 
 state the action is described as going on; in the perfect aa. 
 
 ^^lliBlLed; in the indefinite or aorist as simply acted, without 
 
 any distinct statement of progress or completion. 
 
 As there are three times, and three states of an action, nine 
 tenses would be required to express all the different modifica- 
 tions ; viz.* three imperfects, three indefinites, three perfects ; 
 but. neither the Qreek nor the English verb has all these nine 
 tenses. The English too has no imperfect without a circum- 
 locution, and except in the indicative mood has no aorist or past 
 indefinite, so that the Greek aorist in all the other moods must 
 be rendered by the present or perfect. A writer in the Quar- 
 terly Review (No. 255) remarks, the Greek tenses do not 
 primarily imply time. They are not primarily distinguished 
 as past, present, future. If aorists and prseterperfects necessa- 
 rily implied past time, these tenses could not occur in the 
 imperative mood. The infinitives and participles could not be 
 applied alike to present and past times. Their real meaning 
 relates to four stages of progress in the action : (1) preparatory 
 to the commencement, fpa^ew, to be about to write; (2) the 
 being engaged in writing while the act is going on, ypd<f>ei,v ; 
 (3) the completion of the act, ypdy^ai ; (4) the completion, with 
 the additional notion of subsequent continuance, '^efpa^evai, to 
 have written a letter and still retain it in possession. These 
 
 THE TENSES IN THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 81 
 
 four stages of an act represent the four primary Greek tenses ; 
 the several forms of the future and aorist do not differ in 
 meaning. The future is wanting in the imperative, as the 
 impatience of the Greek mind never contemplated commanding 
 a person to be about to do a thing. 
 
 THE TENSES OF VERBS. 
 
 The tenses in the indicative mood describe both the time and 
 the state of an action ; in other moods the tenses denote only 
 the state as continuing, completed, simply acted, or intended. 
 
 The declaration of time Inay be definite as regards the time of 
 speaking, or indefinite as regards some other point of time which 
 must be defined. 
 
 The definite tenses are the present, expressing simultaneity, 
 r^pdifuo, I write or am writing now at the moment of speaking. 
 The future, expTeaaiag posteriority, ypdyp-a, I shall write at some 
 time after the moment of speaking. The perfect, expressing 
 anteriority, yeypa<f>a, I have written ot some time before th© 
 moment of speaking. 
 
 The indefinite tenses are the imperfect, expressing simulta- 
 neity, Sypa^ov, I was writing at some specified time. The aorist, 
 expressing posteriority, Sypay^a, I wrote after some specified 
 time. The pluperfect, expressing anteriority, iyeypd^iv, I had 
 written, before some specified time. 
 
 THE TENSES IN THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 We proceed to illustrate these tenses as they are used in the 
 indicative mood. 
 
 The present expresses a general sentiment, or assigns proper- 
 ties permanently connected with an object, though they are not 
 particularly evinced at the present time : vdvra rii oyaBa, SlSa- 
 aw o 6e6<:, God gives all things that are good: iroKK&viauc&v 
 .avOpmnoK oirtos iariv 6 iroXe/ioi, war is the cause of many ills 
 to men. 
 
 The present denotes the beginning, attempting, or desiring 
 to do an act, though it may not be done ; also something usually 
 or habitually done : rifv Ev0olav SiBoaa-i, they are for giving 
 Euboea : elirep fidXKei Toixi hriopKow, if he is wont to strike the 
 perjured : Ja. 1. 15, ^ hriOvfila avKXa^ovaa t/ktci rtjv afiaprlav : 
 J. 14. 6, ovSeiv Ipx'^at irpov rov iraripa el iirj hi- ipav : R. 2. 4, 
 arpio&v Sri Tb -xpfloTW tov Qeov eh lurdvoidp ae ar/ei, is leading ;- 
 
 a 
 
Missing Page 
 
Missing Page 
 
84 
 
 THE INDIOATIVB rUTDBK. 
 
 cation of the' time after which it will happen ; the periphrosticp 
 future requires or implies a definition of time : PlatOi Oorg. ixt 
 oKtiOtj Svra Xi^ta eroi & fi{\Xo Xeyew, know that I will tell you 
 actual truth in what I am now going to aay : M. 2. 13, fiiWei 
 Y^/v 'HptoSiji ^rp-eiv to vaiSlov. 
 
 The future often conveys the meaning of obligation : Eur. 
 Med. 1320, Xe7' el n /SovXer xcipt S' ov ^avaei<; irori, speak 
 whatever you like, but you shall never touch me with your 
 hand. Hence it becomes equivalent to an imperative : .^Bsoh. 
 Sept. 262, fufiiv r&v^ ipein, ' you will not say,' i. e., do not 
 say. 
 
 The usage of the future for the imperative occurs repeatedly 
 in the New Testament, and has been unnecessarily accounted a 
 Hebraism : M. 5. ai, ov ^Kwevati/t : 48, iaeaOe oSt> v/leiv rdXeun : 
 A. 23. 6, &pj(pvTa ToD Xttov <rov oix ipeii kukw. The use of 
 the imperatival future appears in three cases in the New 
 Testament : (1) as a mild imperative, e. g., in prohibition : M. 
 6. 6, oiiK ia^g W9 oi tnroKpiral: (2) as a strong imperative, 
 prohibition and reproof ^ A. 13. lo, ov irava^g iuiarpe^iov t^9 
 iZovi KvpUtv; (3) as a legislative imperative, negatively, M. 
 5. 31 ; R. 7. 7, and positively, G. 5. u ; B. 13. 9- The latter 
 usage is Hebraistic. The uses of the future in the LXX are 
 more varied, and almost purely Hebraistic. They express " quod 
 non convenit, Gen. 20. g : qvod turn potest, 32. 12 : quod licet. 
 Numb. 32. 34 : quod aoUt, Deut. 2. li." (Ellicott.) 
 
 The future expresses a resolution, general sentiment, or 
 confirmed habit : &vi)p aotfto^ t^9 av/t^ph^ ftaov oXaei r&v 
 SiKKuv, a wise man will bear misfortunes more easily than 
 others : 1 T. 6. 8, ijfpvrei Biarpwftiii mil atceirdafuiTa tovtok 
 dpKe(r0t)a6fie0a : G. 6. 5, ixaaroi to tBiov (futprlov fiaaTeurei. 
 
 " Futurum in sententi& generali recte ponitur, quandoquidem 
 rei quso in nullum tempus non convenire videatur, etiam futuro 
 tempore locum futurum esse jure sumitur." (Fritsohe, Bom. 
 ii.p.9.) 
 
 The future denotes a supposed or possible case: L. 18. 23, 
 St(iSo9 irraj(pii xal l^eii Briaavpov iv oipavw : It. 3. 6, ir&i Kpivei 
 6609 TOP Koa/iov ; R. 10. 14, irm oSv eiriKoKiiTovTai eh hp ovk 
 hrlaievaav ; 
 
 The future indicates not mere futurity, but the ethical possi- 
 bility of an action, and with ol, something that neither can nor 
 will happen : G. 2. lO, i^ ipyuv vi/tov ov SueauoOi^aerM iraaa 
 
 
 THB INDICATIVB FEBFECT. 
 
 85 
 
 •<rdp^. "With irm it involves the notion of 'ability,' 'possi- 
 .bility:' 1 T. 3. 6, vm iKKXtjtriat Oeov hri/ie\ij<reTM ; 
 
 THE INDICATTVE FEBFECT. 
 
 The perfect marks the abiding effect of a terminated action : 
 Xen. Anab. i. 4. a, airoXeXoliraaip ijft&i Bepla^ Koi Haaiup, have 
 -deserted from us, are deserters: //. i. 37, S9 Xpvaijp a/i<^i- 
 V9e/9i}«a9, who continuest to protect Ghrysa: 113, Koi yap pa 
 KKtrraiitvijaTpTfi vpofii^ovXa, just because I continue to prefer 
 her ecen to Clytemnestra (I have preferred, and do prefer). 
 
 In the second perfect, erroneously called the perfect middle, 
 the iiitransitive signification predominates. Very few verbs 
 have both forms: ix tovtov tov ypopov ael koKSk irkirpof^/a, 
 from this time I have always fared well: hp eri, /liap iMyjiP 
 'Pafuilovi viKi^aafiep airoKuiKaiup, if we gain one more victory 
 over the Romans we are ruined. 
 
 Several perfects denote only finished action, of which the effect 
 is permanent, and must therefore be rendered by a present 
 in English: Kiicnffuii, I possess, I have acquired for myself 
 {leraopMi)'. (U/ipiifiai, I remember, I have called to mind 
 {fipdo/iai) : KiKkfifuu, I am called, I have been named (KoKiw) : 
 olSa, I know, I have perceived (etSm) : irei^^iuu, I fear, I 
 have been frightened (<ftofie<o). 
 
 The perfect often denotes the completion of an act, especially 
 the fixed result of a thought or determination : Dem. Phil. i. 
 19, ravra flip itrrtp & ircun BeSojdBat ^pX Beip, these are the 
 sentiments which I maintain ought to be the fixed convictions 
 of all : H. 11. 17, wtarei vpo<Tep^poj(ep 'Afipa^fi top 'laa&K 
 ireipa^fiepoi, koI top ftopoyepi) irpoae^pev o rivi iir(Vf^e\(a^ 
 apaSe^d/iepoi. Here 'irpo<repijpo)(ep expresses Abraham's settled 
 resignation of his son to the demand of God, his mental, though 
 not actual offering of him ; but irpoiTitl>epep expresses ' was in 
 t;he act of sacrificing him,' when stopped by Divine inter- 
 position (Green, p. 21): B. 8. 38, irhreKr/un yap, I am per- 
 suaded : C. 4. 3, Bi 8 KoX BiBeftai, for which I am actually in 
 bonds : L. 4. 6, ipol irapaSeBorai koI ^ ieip dekat BiBam aimjp : 
 1 C. 1. 23, ^p,eK Bi K7ipvaiTop.ep Xpurrop iaravpa/iepop : G. 3. ), 
 oh Kort 6<l>daXftoii^ 'Iijaov^ Xpurrop irpoeypwfni ev vpZp iaravpto- 
 fUpoi. The perfect here calls attention to the permanent 
 character acquired by the crucifixion, that of a Saviour; in 
 the Greeds, where the mere fact is recorded, the participle 
 
86 
 
 TUX IMDIOATIVS IPBKFXor. 
 
 is aravpttetk'. similarly 1 J. 4. a, nrav weB/ia 8 6fio\oyet 
 •Jijaow Xfturrhv hf aapKi iKiiKuffira ix rod eeov iim r ' 2 Tim. 
 2. 8, /ivij/Mveve 'Iijirow Xpurrbv efrtepiUvov iK vexpav : H. 2. 9, 
 Tiv fipaxy t» irap' ayyiKotxt riKurrwpivov : H. 4. 15, ireireiptur- 
 Htvov Si Korh irdvra; Qt. 2. ll, Kareyvotr/iSvoi ^, he stood self- 
 condemned : R. 9. 19, T^ fyhp fiovki^fum airrov rk ipdiartiKev ; 
 for who resisteth His will? who has placed himself in oppo- 
 sition P 1 0. 11. 15, 4) KOfMi avrl mpifioXalov SeSorai avrg: 
 R. 7, a, ^ y^p {hrapSpvi ffuvif t# {Sit* 6vZp\ SeSerot voiup, for 
 the married woman remains bound by the law to her husband 
 for his lifetime- 
 It is to be regretted that our language does not furnish an( 
 adequate equiTalent for this passive perfect. Luther uniformly) 
 renders y^pamrM, «• ttehet geaohrielen: L. 16. 26, xo<r/«i 
 M^a i<rTJpucTai,, stands fixt : 2 T. 1. 13, ^ irmrhrevKa, to whom 
 
 1 have given my irltm<i, in whom I have put my trust and still 
 do put it : 2 T. 4. b, roh fjr/tvtniKotTiv t^v i7rt<pdpeiav avrov, who 
 have loved and still love his appearing {.-^in a. present sense 
 only as it points to the persistence of the feeling : A. 22. 29, Srt 
 ^v airrov BeSeiaii. The tense implies the situation of legal guilt 
 in which the oflBcer had placed himself. A. 25. ii, el piv yeip 
 aSt/co) Kol a^Mv davdrov irhrpaxd ri : the tense rrhrpaxa 
 marks the permanent result of the supposed &hlici)p.a. A. 27. 
 25, TTto-Teuo) 7ip Ty QeS) hi oi5t«s S<rrM xaff 8j/ rpairov 
 XeKdXirral pat: 10. 10. 13, ireipcurpi^ ipMt om etKijiftev el p.ii 
 avdpanrtvo<i, has not formerly, and does not now : L. 5. 32, ovk 
 ikqKvda KoKkatu hiKaCov^, 
 
 The perfect often denotes an immediate consequence: Xen. 
 Cyr. iv. 2. 26, o 7ip KparStv i/ta wdvra atmjpvaKev, he who 
 conquers, at once oairies off every thing : A. 21. as, "EXKiivai 
 eurtyytvyev e« ri iepbv xal KSKolvuKe rhv Sfyiov roirov tovtov : 
 
 2 P. 2. 6, TToKeK XohopMv KaX Topx)ppa<i re^pdcrat KaTcurrpo^ 
 Karhcpwep {nroSeu/fia psKKovrwv daefiew redeixm. Here xexot 
 v(OKe is the consequence of ela^aryep, and redeucuK; the result of 
 KoriKpiPep. 
 
 Mr. Oreen points out a delicate propriety of expression in the 
 parable of the talents, M. 25. i«— so. At the time of receiving 
 the money, the aorist is used to describe the unprofitable 
 servant, 6 to 8i» "Ka^mv. at the time of reckoning he is de- 
 scribed as o ri Sv e(Xi}^iu9, where the perfect describes his 
 jinaltered condition, as far as the money was concerned. With 
 
 THB IMPBBFECr. 
 
 87 
 
 the otheir servants, the aorist is used both at the timb of 
 receiving and the time of reckoning. The money which they 
 had received was modified by their own subsequent oxertionS» 
 tind the aorist could then alone be used. 
 
 1 !P. 2. 10, o( oIk ^Xeijphfoi pw Si iKetidhnrei. The perfect 
 describes a state in which they oontinued, a state of remoteness 
 from God's mercy. The aorist describes an act, Ye were made 
 objects of taaercy. 1 J. 3. 9, irfi$ 6 rteyeppnuivm ix tov Qeoit 
 ipaprlap ov voiet, every one who hath been bom of Ood, 
 and continues in that statd, doth not work sin habitually : oA 
 Svporai apapToveiP Sri ix tov Seov yeyipvtfxai, he is not able 
 to be a sinner, because he hath been bom of God, and the life 
 given him at his spiritual birth abides in him. " The Apostle 
 does not say, ov Svparai apMpreiv, he cannot fall into sin, by 
 ignorance, error, and infirmity. Such an assertion would be 
 inconsistent with the whole tenor of Scripture." Wordsworth. 
 
 INDEFINITE TENSES. 
 THE IMFEBFBCT. 
 
 Hermann thus explains the imperfect : " In eo, quod quia 
 voluit facere, neo tamen perfecit, quod aptius adhiberi tempus 
 potest, quam quod ab ea ipsa ratione nomen habet imperfeo- 
 tumP" 
 
 Thus too, Donaldson, § 426 : " The imperfect denotes an in- 
 complete action, one that is in its course, and is not yet brought 
 to its intended accomplishment. It implies that a certain thing 
 was going on at a specified time, but excludes the assertion 
 that the end of the action was attained." It may often be ex- 
 pressed by the paraphrase, 'began to,' 'proceeded to,' 'at- 
 tempted to,' especially by the side of the aorist, which indicates 
 the single or completed action: Thuo. ii. 92. a, m ^ pav9 
 Sie<l>0eipeTO, ia^^ep eamop xal i^eireacp eh top Xtp^pa, as the 
 ship was (in process of) sinking, he slew himseK, and fell over- 
 board into the habour. The suicide and its result being single 
 and momentary acts, are expressed by the aorist. Xen. hre\ 
 inniPTla^ev ij ^Xay^ kuI &pM ^ aoKirvy^ i^dey^aro, when the 
 phalanx proceeded to meet them, and at the same time the 
 trumpet sounded {i^dey^. aor., ' single and completed act) : 
 oviciri iSi^avTo oi iroXifuoi aXX* i^tevyov, the enemies no longer 
 awaited their attack, but proceeded to flee (^S^f . aor., completed 
 
88 
 
 THE IMPBRFBCr. 
 
 result): Anab.:Y. 4. u, roit /th^ oSv ireKreurrhv iSi^avro ol 
 fidpfiapoi Kol iiMypvro. 6 xvav i^iSpafie, itai KadvKcueret avTov?, 
 016 dog ran out and kept barking at them. 
 
 The imperfect has the idea of incompleteness: M. 3. I4, 6 Si 
 *Iadvinfi SuKcilKva' avrov, John attempted to hinder him : L. 1. 
 S9, ixaKow avTo, were on the point of naming it : 5. 6, Ste^pTywro 
 vi BIktvov, the net was beginning to break : A. 26. ii, 7)ParfKa^ov 
 fiKacr^fislv, was doing my utmost to make them blaspheme : 
 A. 13. 11, irepiwT/av i^'qrei j(ei,paf^arj/ovi : A. 7. 68, ikiOo^oKow, 
 kept stoning him : G. 1. 13, iBUaxov t^v iKKKijalav tov Qeov xal 
 riropBow avri]V koI irpoharrxov k.t.X. In Qt. 4. 39, o xari adpKa 
 yevinideU iSUtien' rip Karit IIveDfui oCroii Koi vw, we have the 
 strict use of the imperfect to designate an action which still 
 spiritually continues. 
 
 ; This idea of incompleteness . frequently passes into that of 
 xepetition, especially in contrast with the aorist : 1 0. 10. 4, 
 irdinei to airi iro/ta irveviuiTucbp hrutp' Ibnvop fiip iic trvev- 
 /jMTuaji oKoXovffovtrqv irh-pa^. Here the aorist, eirtop, expresses 
 the action, without conveying any idea of duration ; the im- 
 perfect, eirwop, implies the repetition of the act, 'they kept 
 continually drinking : ' A. 28. 9, oi Xonrol oi l^^orref aaOepeiat 
 ip T^ pija^ irpovj^pxpPTo kuI idepatrevopro, kept coming to us, 
 and were getting healed: L. 24. at, ^fietf Bi ^Xirl^oftep, 'we 
 for our part were hoping,' implying that this had been their 
 habitual expectation for some period of time: M. 13. 34, xaph 
 •irapaPoX}}^ ovie iKdXei avrotf : Mk. 14. 13, Sre to irotr^a Idvop 
 (an annual offering): 16. 6, Karii Bi ioprr}p aviSvep avrait^ ipa 
 Sia/uop, i. q., M. 27. IS, eui&et drroXueip: B. 16. 33, ipeKOTrro/ttiP 
 rh TToXKil toS i\j0eip wpif v/taf: L. 4. IS, iBiZaaKCP ip Ta($ 
 avpoyuycut avrap : 2 Th. 2. 6, ov ftprj/iopeveTe ori Sri ftp irpbt 
 i/tat Tavra S'Keyop vfup ; 
 
 The imperfect is used (in verbs and phrases like ^Sei, ixP"!^* 
 eiKot Ijp, a^Xop) to signify a dissatisfaction with the present 
 state of things, and a wish that the result was different : A. 13. 
 46, i/up i^p oPorfKcuop irpSnop "KdKridrlpai top Xoyop tov Qeov : 
 1 0. 4. 8, ical S^eKov ye ifiatriKevaaTe : 2 0. 11. I, Sif>e\op 
 dp€l)(ea0e ftav : Rev. 3. 15, S^eXop •^vxpoi etrii ^ ^earot: H. 9. 
 36, ^7r«l eSei avrop ttoKKukk iradeip dirb KaTa^oX^ Koafiov: 
 Qt. 4. 30, ^eXop Bi irapelpai trpoi vfta^ &pri koX dTiXd^ai t^i> 
 ^vijv pov : B>. 9. 3, i)V)(6p,i]P yhp avdBepa eJpai avro? iyco airh 
 TOV XptffToO: 2 C. 12. II, eYO) &^CKop v^' vpMV arwlareurOat i 
 
 4 
 
 ":-■■ 
 
 i 
 
 THK AOEIST. °^ 
 
 M. 26. 9, v^vpaTO TovTO ri fivpov irpe^PM iroXKov : 34, Kohap 
 j}i» ain^ el ovk iyeppn^V « Svdpmrot iKeipo<: : 2 P. 2. 31, Kpevrrop 
 j}i» avTOt« p.ii hreypciKiptu t^i» oSop rljt Buccuoarvptfi i A. 22. 33, ov 
 yhp xad^KCP ainop ^k 
 
 . &p is often omitted colloquially, especially when the con- 
 ditional protasis is omitted. The want of absoluteness in such 
 statements is sufficiently expressed by the general indefinite 
 character of the imperfect: A. 25. 33, ifiovXapajP «ai ovtos to3 
 dpepanrov oKovaai, : R. 9. 3, ijuxowv 7^P «»^»« ^" apdOepa 
 elpai. 
 
 The following passages illustrate the difference between the 
 imperfect and aorist : L. 8. 33, -n-Xeoprtop Bi avr&p at^vTrpaMTF 
 Kul KUTifi'n \at\a^ e« t^v \lfuniv Koi avpenK^povpro leal 
 iKtpBupevop : Ja. 2. 33, i} wforts mnnjpyei rots IpyoK avrov mil ex 
 Twv ^p7a»i' 4 irloTK iTeXewtdii : G. 1. 14, Tjnowrare yhp t^p ip.fiP 
 dvaarpo^ffp irvri h> t# "IovBuktu^ Sri Koff vnrep^o\ip> eSuoicop^ 
 TTip itucKTia-lap tov 6eoS koX hropOovp avTrjp: A. 16. 33, ol 
 orpanr/ol irejotp/Jijfainre? tA i/tarm exiXevop pa^Bi^eip: G. 2. 13, 
 Trpo TOV yhp i\deip Ttvi? otto 'Idicmfiov p^h Twy idpS>P «nnn]a0iep, 
 ore Bi JfkJdop inriareXKe xal ijxopi^ep eavTOP ^^oipxpo^ tows iie 
 •jrepi,Top.fi<i. ^ , . ^ , 
 
 In 1 0. 3. 6, *yw i<f>VTevaa, 'AiroXKott inoTtacp, dXX o ©eos 
 tjv^apep, the transitory acts of human teachers are expressed 
 by aorists ; the continual bestowal of Divine grace by the im- 
 perfect : 1 P. 2. 33, 24, 8s \oiZopovp.epo<i ovk opTeXoiZopei, vdaxav 
 OVK TfireCKei, irapeBiBov Bi t& xplvoPTi Bikuuk' 8s tAs dpupTUK 
 ^p&p owTos dpt)veyKev ip t^ aapMTt airov cttI to fuXov. Here 
 we have three imperfects to denote continual and repeated 
 acts ; but an aorist to denote an act done once for all. R. 6. 13, 
 p/tjBi vapurrdpere Th peKv vpMP oifKa, aBi,Klai Ty afuipTi^, 
 d\\h irapturniaaTe eavroxKi Tp Be^. The present expresses 
 repetition, habit, continuance; the aorist, a single irrevocable 
 act of surrender. The verb vapurrdpai occurs five times in 
 this passage in the sense of 'presenting for use or service.' 
 Yaughan. 
 
 THE AORIST. 
 
 The aorist is connected with the future by the adjunct a, 
 and with the past by the augment i. Hence it confines the 
 action predicated within certain limits of previous and sub- 
 sequent time. From this arises its epistola^ use, anticipatory 
 
90 
 
 PBBVSCrr AND AOBIST COMBIMEl). 
 
 retroepecthre: 1 P. 5. ts, Si oKlffcav Sypdy^ I write briefly i 
 G. 6. II, tSert TnfKlicoK v/uv fpdititavi lypay^a t§ iftg x^ipU 
 behold in what large characters I write to you with my own 
 hand : Ph. 2. as, tnrovtaunipm^ oiv hrep^^a avrSv, I send him 
 therefore the sooner; ao 0. 4. 8; A. 23. 30 ; 3 0. 8. 18, 
 4nnieiriff\^a/iep fier' avrov t6p i£e\^v : 2 0. 9. 3, irref/e^ roiit 
 aSeX^v?. This is often called the epistolary aorist ; a graceful 
 mode of expression, by which the writer puts himself in the 
 place of the reader, and looks at the thing written from the 
 reader's point of view. Thus we may explain G. 2. lo, S koI 
 ivirovSaaa avri rovro voi^at, which also, when among yOu, I 
 was fpr this veiy reason eager to do. If St. Paul had l>ee4 
 speaking of his habitual action, we should have expected 
 iavo^a^ov, or if he described one which continued to that time^ 
 we should have looked for i<nroiiBaKa. 
 
 PXBFSCrr AND A0RI8T OOMBIKSD. 
 
 In some cases the action is really momentary, or of short 
 duration: Mk. 3. 6, irepifiXe^dfttvot avroin /ler opy^i, ovXXv* 
 irovfuvoi M, r^ irapcoaei rrj^ xapSla^ avT&v, Xiyet r^ avBponrtp' 
 'EKTeivov Tijv xe(/>a aov. Kai i^ereive koI aireKarevrdBri ij ^elp 
 ainov: J. 15. 6, ihv p,^ rn fielvji iv ip-ol, i^rjdij l^a xal i(- 
 •qpdvdij : 7. 26, /t^ irore aSajdSt^ eywaaav ol &pj(pvTes 5t( oStov 
 e<mv &K7)dm i Xpurroi ; is it possible the rulers really de- 
 cided that this is really the Ohrist P M. 17. 7, er/ipBrp-e koX ft)) 
 
 Hence we have the perfect to mark a permanent state, the 
 aorist a single act : G. 2. 7, ireirlarev/iM rb evar/yiXtov r^i aKpi>- 
 fivarlai. The perfect indicates permanent duration, 'concre- 
 ditum mihi habeo:' B. 8. 2, hrurrevBriaav t^ "KbifM rov Beov: 
 H. 2. 14, ^el oiv T^ iraiBia KeKolvqKtv aXfuiro<i kuX oapicit^, KtiX 
 avTOi irapairXtitriut p,eriaj(e r&v ain&v. Bo the four aorists in 
 H. 6. 4 — 6 mark a temporary condition or a single act, and the 
 two presents denote a continued state or an action still going 
 on: aSwarov yip roim aira^ ^xaTUrdeina^, yevaap^povt re riji 
 Supeoi Trji iirovpavlov, koI fiero^ovf yeinjffipTai ITvev/utTOf aryiov, 
 Kol koSmv yevaa/ievovi Oeov jtfjiia, Swditen re pAWotnof al&po^, 
 KoX irapaTreaovrtK, irdXiv dvaxatpl^eiv et<i fierdpoiav, dpoorav- 
 povvrtK iavroK rhp viop toO Oeov xal rrapaSeifYfuiTl^opra^, while 
 they crucify afresh to their own perdition the Son of God, and 
 while they expose him to shame : 2 0. 6. 17, rk dpxaia irapijX- 
 
 PEBFECT AND AORIST COMBINED. 
 
 91 
 
 dep, (Soi> fiyove "aivh rh irdina. So the periSect is introduced 
 between two aorists to show that the absence is continual in Ja. 
 1, 24, Karepvqaep yhp iavrop koX dire\i/i\vde, koX ev0em iTreXdOerQ 
 ffirdim liP. In Col. 1. 16, A/ ain^ iieriaOv to vdpra, the mere 
 action of creation is regarded, but in t^ irdpra Si avrov koI eis 
 flirrop Sierurrat, the permanent result of creation is introduced, 
 and the aorist is changed into the perfect. In other cases, tiiough 
 the action is one of prolonged duration, there is no occasion for 
 bringing this circumstance into notice: Xen. Cyr<^., irepi otmav 
 ip oh hpd^e—iKiXevae SuupvXd^ai ain^ t^v re yvuMKOr— 
 Tavnfv oip ixeKewep 6 Kvpo^ Sta^vXaTTew top 'Apdtnrtjp «*? S» 
 ovTW Xa/3jj, desired him to undertake and retain the custody, 
 G. 5. 24, 01 Se TOW Xpurrov t^p adpxa iaravpwaap: 3. 13. 31, 
 vvp iBo^dadri 6 vloi rov dpdpmrov : M. 3. 17, o wo? /*ou o 070^ 
 mrrbi ip ^ evBoKfjaa: Ja. 2. 13, ^ yap Kplavt dvikem r^ M 
 rroi^aapri tKeov: 1 P. 2. 3, eXirep irievaaade ort XP^«rros & 
 Kvpioi. In 1 P. 5. 2, rroipApare ro eV vp-lp rrblftpiop. tend ye 
 the flock that is among you, the aorist gathers together the 
 whole work of teaching, feeding, watching, leading into one act, 
 occupying the entire life ; 1 P. 1. 13, re\ela<i iKwlaare, direct 
 fully your hope. Their whole life is to be one act of hope, 
 (Wordsworth.) Rev. 10. 7, ereXlff^ij to p,varripu>p. IreKiae-q 
 is the prophetic past tense signifying that although the event is 
 still future it is certain, and in the divine foreknowledge and 
 decree it is already done: Rev. 15. i. Of. i^v^Vi J- 15. 6. 
 (Wordsworth.) Rev. 14. 8, hreaep hreae BafivX^p v t^^« ^ 
 HeydXi), the prophetic aorist expresses the certainty and sudden- 
 ness of the fall as if by a single blow. 
 
 When a specific time of duration is expressed by other words 
 in the sentence the aorist is used, as this tense does not repeat 
 the idea already introduced: J. 2, 20, -feaaapdKopra «col If • 
 h-eaip ^KoSop,f)67) 6 wo? owtos: H. 11. 23, Maafjt yevprjdeli 
 eKpvpi} rpip.r)P0P: IJ. 1. 1, 8 drniKOa/iep, h etopaKa/tep to*? o^OaX- 
 /tot? ^pMP, h iOeaadfuBa, xaX ai x«i/)e? h^Xd^frap rrepl toO 
 Aoyov rf)<t Jia^?. Here the aorists point to the action of the 
 Apostles in gazing at our Lord as He ascended into heaven, and 
 to their hattdling His person after the resurrection, L. 24. 39. 
 1 J. 4. 9. 14, rop Tlop avrov top fiopoyepi} drriaroKKep o ©eo? eh 
 rhp KoapMP. The perfect is used, as the effect of that mission 
 is permanent and operative. 1 J. 4. 10, ot» outo? ^dirqvev 
 ^fta<i, Koi dtriirreiKe t6i> TIop avrov tkaapiov rrepl t«i» afiapruiv 
 
62 
 
 FBKFBOX AND A0RI8T COMBINBD. 
 
 ^fjL&v. Here iiri^rretXe refers to the remarkable proof of divine 
 love, and denotes that the propitiation was effected by one aot. 
 Rev. 5. 7, Kol iJiKOe kuI er\i}^e rb fitfi\lov. The perfect marks 
 not only an act but a state, he has taken a book and holds it. 
 A. 2. 43, iyivero Si rrday ^i^ ^i3o«, noKKd re ripara xal 
 errjfieia Sui, twi; airoirroXuv iyivero, there arose fear once for all, 
 a single occurrence, signs were frequently, habitually per- 
 formed. A. 7. 59, i)u0o^<lKotfv rov STi^avov eiriKaXovfievov xai 
 Xi^ovra, Kvpie 'Itjaov, M^ai rh nveufid [mv, they kept on stoning, 
 Receive once for all. B.. 3. 33, irdvre^ yhp fj/taprov koI varepovv- 
 TM rqi So^f Tov 0eoii. The aorist gathers up as it were the 
 sins of the world into one aot regarded as prior to the manifes- 
 tation of the SiKatoavpri, and of which the result is expressed in 
 varepowrax. R. 10. 1 6, Ttf iirlarevaev rfi UKoy fujuav ; who 
 believed the message he heard from us P The aoriat expresses 
 the reflection of the prophet on his ministry as one act, he 
 returns into his Master's presence and says. Lord, when I went 
 forth in Thy name who believed P (Yaughan.) 
 
 Sometimes the aorist draws attention to the completion of a 
 prolonged action : Demosth. Phil, i., hreiZav airavra aKowrnire : 
 J. 17. 15, ipan& — tva Tifpria-ryi airrovi eK rov irovijpov: Gt. 3. 22, 
 aX\A awkicKeuTev fi ypaifti) Tit irdma inrb aftaprlav. 
 
 The force of the aorist as referring to single acts is borne out 
 by the use of the aorist in the other moods and participles : M. 
 26. 23, 6 e/i/3a^a? fisr f/iov iv r& rpv^XCa rr}v ;^£t/>a, oiroi /le 
 irapaZaxrei: 26. 26, iaBiovrav Si avr&u, \afia>v 6 'Itjaow top 
 aprop, Koi evKoyi^vai, iicKaae, koX iSiSou tok fiaO^aU, koI elire, 
 Aafiere, ^tar/ere. In E. 6. u, 16, i6, there are four aorist par- 
 ticiples specifying different acts which were completed before 
 the soldier took up his position. The imperative presents, ypdipe, 
 KXeirre, aKairre, mean ' go on writing, stealing, digging.' The 
 imperative aorists, ypdyjrop, kKp^op. axdy^v, mean, write, steal, 
 dig, some particular object and have done with it. 
 
 Dr. Donaldson translates M. 3. 8, iroiiqaare otv Kapirow d^iov^ 
 T^ fieravoUK, bring forth at once and completely fniits worthy 
 of repentance. So Bishop Andrews remarks, the word is not 
 bring forth at this time now, then it should be Troieire, but it is 
 TroMJo-are, have done bringing forth. So M. 19. 17, el Si OeKei^ 
 tureKdeip ek r^v ^taijp, T^pijirop raf ivrdkd^, keep at once and 
 completely; Trjpa would imply, continue to keep: J. 13. 27, 
 h irouli, TTolriffov Td-)(u>p, what thou art doing, get done with 
 
 PEBFECT AND AORIST COMBINED. 
 
 93 
 
 more speed: 1 0. 15. 34, iKP^re SikuIw kuI p.v a/«i/)Tavm, 
 the 1 aor., ^/o^are, impUes a momentary act; the present, 
 auaprdpere, one which requires continuous efforts. 
 
 In exhortations we frequently have the aorist imperative 
 foUowing the present imperative: 1 T. 6. 12, &)ia,pl^ov top ko^p 
 dfy&va Ttri TT^Tew?, ArtXajSoO t^ auovlov ?a)^?, where emXaPov 
 marks a distinct act in the d7«''- ^- «• "• '*''^^ ^apiarapere 
 . . . . axxa -irapaar^aare . . .: Mk. 2. 9, ^yetpe, &p6p aov top 
 Kpdpparov. "Quid mirum qui modo lenius jusserat ixKoireiTe 
 eumdem statim cum majore quadam vi et quasi intentius flagi- 
 tantemaddereXo7/aa(r<>eP" -ScAa«/er, Demosthenes. 
 
 In prohibitions Attic usage compels us to use the subjunctive 
 when we forbid a single act, M Khhrre, do not steal in general ; 
 /t^ k\^?, do not steal this particular thing. ^ 
 
 Dr. Donaldson gives as instances, iravaai pw ijSij /t»j8 epa- 
 rn<rn<i Tepa, be silent at once, and do not question further, where 
 both verbs refer to the completion of the single act; but M 
 dnroK&tiTfi, dXKk <TKi»r€i, do not be wearied, but go on consider- 
 ing, where the former verb indicates the completeness of the 
 consideration by the weariness and consequent cessation of the 
 inquirer. So again we have 0. 2. 21, /*t 5^, P-n^i yevar), p,riSi 
 einn. of single acts prohibited; but in an important passage 
 which has often been misunderstood, J. 20. 17, PV H^v airrov, 
 oina yhp k.t.X. iropevov Si irpm tow dSeX<^o6s p^v, koI elire 
 airol<i, K.T.\., do not continue to cling to me. for I have not yet 
 ascended, but proceed to my brethren, and teU them that I am 
 
 about to ascend. 
 
 The Greek aorist has been compared to the force of the 
 common Hibemicism, 'to be after,' joined with a verb.^ Thus 
 we may render II. i. 26. 28, pv <re, yipop, KotKr,atp iyi> iraph 
 p,,vaX KixeUo, let me not he after finding thee : /tJj pv to* oi, 
 Xpalffpv aurrirTpop koL arippa 0eoio, not in that case, I assure 
 thee, wiU the sceptre and fiUet of the god be after availing 
 thee. This will explain G. 5. 24, ol Si rov Xpurrov riip adpKa 
 iaravptaaap aim roi<: iraOiQpaffiv Kai rat? inidvpiaii, * are after 
 crucifying," i. e., crucify. The following is the substance of 
 Bishop Ellicott's note on G. 5. 24: "The ethical crucifixion is 
 here designated as an axitpast (R. 6. 6), though it really is, and 
 must be, a continuing act as well (R. 8. 13). St. Paul here 
 presents Ms with the idea of the true Christian, the character 
 in all its highest perfection and completeness. The aorist, 
 
94 
 
 THE SLUPERFBCT. 
 
 itrravpcaaavi is neither for the perfect, nor for the present, but 
 enunciates a general truth, correcting, marking an action 
 which was in operation at indefinite moments of the past." 
 Compare Soph. Antig. 1318, where Wex remarks on iBlSa^av, 
 "unum exemplum quod aliquando evenerit tanquam norma 
 proponitur." Hence the aorist has been aaid to express what 
 is wont to happen. 
 
 The aorist infinitive {ava/YvutrOfjvai, 1 Th. 5. 27), especially 
 after verbs of 'hoping,' 'commanding,' is often used in refer- 
 ence, not merely to single acts, but to what is either timeless 
 (' ab omni temporis definiti conditione libera et immunis '), or 
 simply eventual and dependent on the action expressed by the 
 finite verb. (Ellicott.) 
 
 irurrevaM, to make a profution of faith, or an ad of faith 
 at a particular time : wurreveiv, to believe, to be a believer : 
 SovKevirai, to do an act of service : BovXeveip, to be a slave : 
 a/Mfyretp, to commit a sin : a/tafyrdveip, to be a sinner. (Words- 
 worth on 1 J. 3. 9-) H. 11. 0, X'^P^ ^^ iriarean dSwarov 
 eiapeoT^aai, to perform a single act well pleasing to God : 
 R. 8. 8, oi Se iv aapxl Svrei 6e^ apeaai oil Svvavrai. 
 
 The aorist in a negative sentence gives the exclusive mean- 
 ing, ' at any tune,' ' at all,' as it expresses simply the verbal 
 idea, without reference to time. Compare Xenophon's lan- 
 guage about Socrates : r6v ciae^iv flip oiSip irore irepl tov9 6eov<t 
 ovt' etiropra ovre irpd^avra (on no single occasion), TOMvra Bi 
 ical X^ovra kuI TrpdrrovTa irepl de&p (habitually), old rit &p xdl 
 TiJryop Kal irpdrrap eiryre xal pofil^oiro evae^iaraTO^ (Memor. i. 
 1. 20). 2 Tim. 2. 11, 6* yhp vwatreQdpofiev. The aoiist marks 
 a single past act that took place when we gave ourselves up to 
 a life that involved similar exposure to sufferings and death : 
 the Apostle died when he embraced the lot of a daily death 
 (jcaff ^fiipap dirodprfOKtA, 1 C. 15. 3l), and of a constant 
 bearing about the viKptaaip tov 'Irjaov, 2 C. 4. 10. 
 
 THE PLUPEKFECl". 
 
 The pluperfect expresses the completion of some act before a 
 specified time : Xen. Anab. ii. 2. 14, irir/yia/e ycLp i^ apA^t 
 iropevofiepo^ Siori irerpiiyro, for he happened to be travelling in 
 a carriage, because he was suffering the effects of a wound : L. 
 16. 20, 8« ifie^irro irpo^ top TrvKupa avrov ^TucapApoi. 
 
 In some passages we find the pluperfect when we should 
 
 VOICES. 
 
 95 
 
 expect the aoristi //. i. 221, f, 8' Oiikvp-iriphe fiefii/JKet, the 
 goddess was already gone to Olympus: v. 65, top ph> 
 MtipiopTf; ire ^ KorripapTrre SiMicap /3e^^«ee*, as soon as he 
 overtook him, he smote him at once. In the New Testament 
 this usage is found in verbs where the perfect has the force of 
 the present, and the pluperfect of the imperfect : M. 12. 46, v 
 piqrnp Koi oi dBekiJHtl avrov e'urrijkeurav efo) : J. 2. 9, m 8k 
 iyevaaro 6 df^vrpi'xKiPO'i to ihap oIpop yeyepr)fUvop, kuI ovk jfSet 
 vodev etrrXp K.T.X. : 20. 9, oiSiira ^hp ^ieiaap 7^1/ 'ipa^nv, Srt Se* 
 airrop ix veKp&p apa<Trrjpai. 
 
 The paulo-post future expresses the permanent effect of a 
 future action. 
 
 From the perfects of intransitive verbs are formed present 
 tenses, which may have their own futures: BprivKw, I am 
 dying, TedptjKa, I am dead; from this is formed a present, 
 Tedp^Kca, future Tefli/»}fo», TsBp^^opai, I shall be dead: Xarnp.i, 
 I am placing, tarqKa, I have placed myself, or I stand, Itrrjjfw, 
 itrrri^opMi, I shall stand. 
 
 This rule is particularly applicable to perfects of a passive 
 form: pipp^axw, I call to mind, p^ppripm, I remember, 
 /M/tvifo-o/Mt, I shall remember: ypd^, I write, feypappxu, I 
 remain written, feypd^opM. I shall remain written : Aristoph. 
 QvSeii Kmh (nrovSh<i p£Terfpa<jfn<reTai, oX\' aavep ^p to irpSyrop 
 ir^eipdferM, no one shall be transferred by private interest to 
 another catalogue, but shall remain enrolled as he was at first : 
 /epafo), iciicparia, Keiepd^opMi : L. 19. 40, ihp oSrot aiayir^ao»<nv 
 oi \l0oi KeKpd^oprai: II. i. 139, oBeKCP Kexo^aerai, but he, I 
 ween, will long continue angry. 
 
 VOICES.' 
 
 Donaldson remarks, § 430, " The intransitive usage of verbs is 
 anterior to the transitive. The transitive is merely a causative 
 or secondary signification, and requires an objective case, as a 
 secondary predication, to complete the meaning. Even after 
 the transitive use had become the common and established 
 signification, there was a tendency to fall back on the neuter or 
 independent construction." 
 
 Verbs which are habitually spoken of as transitive are used 
 also as intransitive : eirl SdpSeK ^ei» o KSpos, Cyrus was pro- 
 ceeding to Sardes : Hepfij? e'urifiaKx i<i t^v 'EXXdia, Xerxes 
 made an irruption into Hellas : Thuc. i. 79, t«i» p.kp wXetowav 
 
96 
 
 PAfiSIVB VOICE. 
 
 i7r\ rh airh al ffv&ftot !<pepop, the seiftiments of the majority - 
 weire tending to the same point : KOK&t IP^^c*, I am ill : i irarrjp, 
 tI vpdrrei; mKik Trpdrret, how fares your father? he fares 
 well: ^ iroKtt im ri ^etpoi; iKkivev, the city fell off for the 
 worse. If this view is correct, it is altogether grotuitous to 
 assert that the transitive and intransitive significations of verhs 
 are continually interchanged, or to speak of multiplied devia- 
 tions of the voices from their proper meanings. The usage of 
 Greek writers, Homeric, Attic, Hellenistic, is in many respects 
 analogous to our own. There are many expressions we oc- 
 casionally use for the sake of convenience, though we are not 
 prepared to maintain their grammatical proprietyre. g., the 
 land grows wheat; he walks his horse; they horsed the 
 coach. 
 
 These considerations will be sufficient to show the shallow- 
 ness of the grounds on which many expressions in the New 
 Testament have been pronounced anomalous ; such as M. 6. 45, 
 T^v fJlKiov avariiCKei : L. 12. 37, dvaxXtpei avrovt : 2 0. 2. u, t^ 
 $pMi*l3evoim ^fM^ : Ph. 4. 10, aveOaKere rb tnrip ifiov ^povtlv : 
 Tit. 1. 5, Xva rk Xei-irovra hriBihp0m<rg : J. 14. 31, arfufiev 
 ivrevOev: 1 T. 5. s, t^v irianv rjpvtirat: 2 T. 1. 15, airearpd- 
 ^adv p£ irdvrei oi iv r§ 'Aala: A. 12. 10, rijv irvkTjv t^v 
 ffiirqpav, Ttjv ^povaav eU fifv iroKiv : Xen. Anab. v. 2. 16, rfj^ 
 eh Tt)v uKpav ^epotiatji oSou . . . Karh t^9 ttvIuks t^i ck fifv 
 aKpav ^epoiaa^: 2 Tim. 2. 16, rh,^ fie^ijXovi Kevo^vla^ 
 ireptlmiuro, withdraw from, ' make a circuit so as to avoid.' 
 
 No difficulty ought to be felt with the following expressions, 
 where the reflective pronoun is sometimes supplied : Mk. 4. 29, 
 Srav irapaZ^ o Kapirof : 37, t^ Kv/uiTa eirifiaXXev elf to ttXoiov : 
 A. 27. 14, ^jSaXe Kar^ avr^; dve/ttKi 7. 43, itrrpe^^e Zi 6 6e6f : 
 li. d. 13, 4 ^/tipa TJp^aro xXiveiv. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 The active verb expresses an action of the subject which is 
 directed to a certain object. The passive represents the object 
 as receiving the action thus directed. 
 
 In Greek, the object, whether it is immediate or remote, 
 becomes the subject of the passive verb : rvirrei fte, he strikes 
 me, — iym rvrrTo/uu \nf airoO: vurrevet fioi, he trusts me, 
 — iy« TTtaTcvo/Mt wjr* avTov : xparei pov, he masters me, — Ir/ut 
 KparoSpai vir ainov. 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 97 
 
 Other prepositions besides vir6 are used to express the agent, 
 as iK, dnro, irpov, vapd. The dative is also used for the agent, 
 especially with verbs of the passive perfect. 
 
 Those verbs which are followed by two accusatives in the 
 active retain in the passive the accusative of the thing, and 
 many others which in the active have generally the remote 
 object: Mk. 16. 5, eiSov veavuTKOv . . . nrepiPe^ripevov irroXiiv 
 XevK^v: A. 18. 25, o5to* J^v #caTiJX^/*iiw T^f oSbv tov Kvplov: 
 2 Th. 2. 15, Kpareire tA« irapaSoareK hi iSiZdx&vre: L. 12. 47, 
 SaptjverM iroXXav : G. 2. 7, ireirurrevpM to eiiarfikyuov t^v oKpo- 
 pvaricm : A. 28. 20, rtiv Skuaiv Tavn)v vepucecpM, : 21. 3, avtufta^ 
 vivre^ rifP Kvirpov: 0. 1. 9, tva irkiipaeijre r^v hrvivmnv tov 
 OeiJipMTOi ainov. 
 
 USAGES OF THE MIDDLE VERB. 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 The middle is only an idiomatic application of the intransi- 
 tive passive ; sometimes it is almost impossible to say whether 
 the verb is middle or passive. 
 
 There are four ordinary usages of the Greek middle verb : 
 (1) the reflexive, where it denotes action on the agent with or 
 without an accusative of the part : M. 27. 5, dinfi^aro : Mk. 7. 
 4, fiairrUrrnvrai: L. 22. SO.KaOiatiade: A. 18. is, Keipdp^voi i^v 
 Ke^dKqv: 2 Th. 3. 6, oriWeodM v/tas: L. 10. 11, tov xoviopTov 
 diropuaaop^da: 12. 15, ^vKdanretrde airb rrji irXeove^iai : R. 14. 
 
 10, iravrei yap TrapaaTi)a6p^0a j^ firfpMri roO Xpttrrov, for we 
 shall all present ourselves before : G. 6. 7, ph irKavaade : Mk. 
 7. 3, iav p,ti irvy/t^ vi^avrai rtii xet/ia?. (2) The appropriative 
 sense, where the reflexive pronoim is sometimes added by way 
 of emphasis and perspicuity : A. 20. 28, iroipMivew t^i» iKK\r)aiav 
 Tov 6eoO fiv rrepieiroirjaaTO Sih tov ISlov atpaTOi: 1 T. 3. 13, 
 fiadpov lawTots «a\oi» nrepviroutvurai : E. 5. 16, i^ofyopa^opevoi 
 TOV Kaipov : L. 21. 19, cV t^ inropov^ vp&v lerjaaade tA? yfrvxai 
 vp&v : Tit. 2. 7,.o-eauT0i> wapexop^o^ tvttov. (3) The causative 
 sense, to get a thing done by intermediate agency : L. 2. 5, 
 dTTvtpdfaaOai, to get himself enrolled: II. i. 13, \va6pevo9 
 Ovyarpa, to get his daughter set free: 1 0. 6. 7, BmtI ovxl 
 PmKKop oBiKeiade; why do ye not rather submit to injury? 
 
 11. 6, KeipdoOto, let her get herself shaven: A. 16. 1, ihp p.ri 
 irepa-ipvnaOe, except ye get yourselves circumcised. (4) The 
 
 H 
 
98 
 
 DYNAMIC MIDDLE. 
 
 PA8SIVK AND MIDDLE DEPONENTS. 
 
 99 
 
 TOoiprocal aense, where the parties mutually act with each 
 other : L. 22. 6, ij^dprjtrav xal axwidevro airra apyvpiov SoOvai, : 
 2 G. 13. II, lOLTapri^eade, irapaKaXeiade, amend each other's 
 defects, afford mutual help: 1 C. 9. 26, ird<; 6 offuvi^ofiepo^ : 
 A. 7, 26, &<l>0r) aiiroif fiajfpfievoK : 23. 9, oi '^pa/ifiarek rov 
 fiSpovi T&v fapuraUov BiepA'Xpino. Thus we may explain 
 
 1 T. 1. 18, ravTTiv ttjv irapivf^eKlav iraparidefiai trot, where the 
 ohject is represented as emanating from, or belonging to, the 
 subject of the verb ; sometimes called the appropriative middle. 
 In some verbs the reflexive is joined with the reciprocal : 
 J. 12. 10, i^ovKswravTO Bi ol apj(iepei<i, consulted among them- 
 selves : 9. 22, i^Sfij yiip awtriOeivro oi 'IqvScuoi, for the Jews had 
 already settled among themselves. 
 
 In many verbs the causative middle is the correlative of the 
 active : ^o/3£h>, to frighten, «f>ofieux0ai, to fear ; Xvaai, to 
 release, Xvawrdai, to ransom : A. 21. 24, 25, xal avrbt ^v\da- 
 aav TOP v6fu>v . . . <l>v\d(ra§a8at airoii^ to re elBcciKodvrov /c.t.X. 
 
 2 T. 4. 15, ov Kol ail (j>v\daaov : M. 5. 42, SapetaacrdM, to borrow, 
 to cause money to be lent to oneself r 20. 1. 7, fuirdovadM, to 
 hire, to cause to let to oneself. This relation is frequently 
 expressed in Latin by curare, and in German by the auxiliary 
 verb (sich) lasaen. 
 
 The term dynamic, or intensive middle, has lately been in- 
 troduced to denote the appropriate and causative usages when 
 the subject of the verb has a peculiar personal interest and 
 anxiety in the action which he does or causes to be done. 
 Thus Mk. 14. 47, <nra<rdiievo9 Ti)P fid')(ai,pap, expresses more 
 vividly than Mt. 26. 61, airioiraae ttjp fuij(eupap avrov. Many 
 of the uses of voieta0M may be referred to this head: A. 1. i, 
 TOP Trp&TOP \070v iTTOirjad/iijp : 8. 3, iiroiija-apTo xoverop : 27. 18, 
 eK^dKrjp hroiovpTO : B. 15. 26, Koiptopiap ripk irotijcraaffai : E. 4. 
 16, trap TO a&fui . , , r^p av^aip rov adtfiarofi iroielrai, all 
 parts of the body reciprocally and mutually acting on one 
 another : H. 1. 3, &' eavrov Kadapiaftop iroiijodftepoi rStp 
 dfiapri&p. Contrast Xen. Anab. i. 2. 9, e^eraaip kuI dpiOfiop 
 iiToiriaep, with i. 2. I, hroieiro r^v wp6(f)aaip. This use of the 
 middle is the application of the simple meaning of the active to 
 mental and moral forces : 1 Tim. 4. 6, ravra inroriffifiepov roit 
 dSeX^oZf . . . iprpe^ofjLepoi roll Xoyoit rij^ irlareay} : C. 2. )5, 
 aireKSvadfiepov T^f dpj(ai koX t^v i^ovcrioi : Mk. 10. 20, raOra 
 rrdpra iij>vKa^dnriv iK veoTijTo? /aou: Tit. 1. 6, ha tA Xeiirovra 
 
 i 
 
 •i 
 
 hriZiopdMrn . . . ixi h^ <ro\ Biera^dfivv : 2 Tun. 4. U, 
 'AXi^apBpoi o x«>^e^ ''■«>-'^« M« *««^ ipeBei^aro. where the 
 middle voice points to the animus displayed in the outward 
 acts of injury and wrong. 
 
 The middle form of a neuter verb is often used to denote the 
 appropriation to an individual of a state or condition. This is 
 particularly common with verbs in -evio. Some, like dpurreveiv, 
 irptareveip. ^aaCKeveip, are used only in the active form, because 
 they denote a condition, belonging actually or naturally to the 
 subject. Others employ both active and' middle forms, because 
 they admit of the idea of an appropriation of the condition : 
 crpareveip, to march on an expedition : arpareveadai, to be a 
 soldier : 2 T. 2. 4, owSels <rrparev6t^epo<i, no one while serving 
 as a soldier: L. 3. u, arparevo/upoi, men on actual service: 
 rroXireveip, to be a citizen, live in a free state : iroXireveaeai. to 
 appropriate the condition of a citizen to oneself individually, 
 to take a part in poUtics: Phil. 1. 27, f^opop af/»s toS 
 eiarrfeXlov toO Xpurrov iroXireveaOe : A. 23, 1, eyw rraaji 
 avpeiB^aei dya0y rreiroXlrevfuu Tp ©ew. Similarly, irpecr^eveip, 
 to be an ambassador : irpeafie6ea0ai, to act by means of an 
 embassy: ^ovKeiew, to give advice: pov\eve<r0ai, to act aa a 
 counseUor: Thucyd. ii. 15, airrol Smaroi, iirdkirevopro xal 
 epovKevopro. (Donaldson, § 432. 2.) 
 
 Some verbs, though active in form, are used in a middle 
 sense : 1 P. 2. 6, 7rept£x« h fV yP<*4^> i* ^ extant in Scripture 
 (Joseph. Ant. xi. 4. 7, ica0oK ip avr^ ry einaro\% rrepiix^i)-. 
 1 P. 2. 13, €tTe ^offCKei w? inrepkxopri: L. 15. 12, So? /«)» to 
 hrtpdXKoP fiipoi t% oitriai : A. 27. 14, e/3a\6 Kar avrr}<: S.pefio<i : 
 Mk. 4. 29. 37 : so lyeipe, arise, Mk. 2. 9. u ; 3. 3 ; 5. 41 ; 10. 49 : 
 A. 27. 43, airopply^aproM, hfeving cast themselves out of the 
 ship : 5. 22, dpoarph^aprti. 
 
 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE DEPONENTS. 
 
 Some middle deponents, in addition to an aorist middle, have 
 an aorist in the passive form, which is completely passive in 
 sense : 0£dopMi, e0eaadp.r}P, i8ed0r]P—tdofiai, la<rdnr)P, wfli/w— • 
 Xapl^ofiai, ixapiTdfifiP. exapi<T0W—p»otuu, ippvadfirjp, ippva0VP. 
 ■ Other deponents have an aorist, which is passive in form 
 but active in signification: as i}/3ou\^V, »jSuv^V, hre/ieXn- 
 Orip, ■qiiKap^Ofiv, i<nr\arfxyuT6rip. These are called passive de- 
 ponents. 
 
 H 2 
 
CHAPTER VII. 
 THE MOODS OP VERBS. 
 
 HTFOTHBTICAL FBOPOSITIONS. INFIMITIVB AND PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Thb Bubjunotive and optative in Greek fonn one mood, cor- 
 responding to the subjunctive mood in Latin. The Greek 
 subjunctive supplies the tenses which answer to the subjunctive 
 present and perfect in Latin, while the Greek optative fills up 
 the place of the subjunctive imperfect and pluperfect. 
 
 The indicative mood expresses certainty ; the conditional 
 mood of present and past tenses formed by the subjunctive 
 and optative expresses uncertainty. "When the result is re- 
 garded as certain, the verb is in the indicative ; when uncertain, 
 in the subjunctive ; when doubly uncertain, depending on some 
 contingency not likely to occur, the optative is used. In 
 English there are three degrees of expectation or likelihood, 
 e. g.. Will you come P Can you come P Could you come P You 
 will recover ; You may recover ; You might recover. These 
 degrees have their exact parallels in Greek, and are expressed 
 respectively by the indicative, the subjunctive, the optative" 
 (a B. No. 226). 
 
 This conditional mood frequently appears to be independent ; 
 but generally its dependence upon other words is plainly 
 marked by the employment of hypothetical particles and final 
 conjunctions. Some verb may be supplied to show the de- 
 pendence of the subjunctive and optative, even when they 
 appear to be independent. The subjunctive had originally the 
 idea of futurity, next of duty, corresponding to the English 
 ' ought.' Hence it is frequently hortative, resembling the im- 
 perative, or expresses a doubt, especially in questions. The 
 optative seems, as the word implies, to have originally ex- 
 
 SXJBJUNCriVB MOOD. 
 
 101 
 
 
 pressed the idea of wishing, 'could you come ?' then of possi- 
 bility, resembling the English 'may,' 'might.' In process of 
 time the latter meaning was distinguished by the insertion 
 of ai>. 
 
 As the subjunctive involved the idea of duty, it was naturally 
 used to denote a purpose : ' I give you this, — ^you are to use it,' 
 is much the same as, ' I give you this that you may use it.' 
 
 As the optative involved the idea of wishing, this mood was 
 also used to denote a purpose : ' I gave you this — may you use 
 it,' is much the same as, ' I gave you this, that you might use 
 it' 
 
 Thus both moods merged into a common idea of condition- 
 ality, and were used to denote a purpose, and other relations 
 which involve doubt, uncertainty, or indefiniteness in their 
 statement. From what has been already mentioned, it must be 
 remembered that the subjunctive mood refers to present or 
 future time, like the subjunctive present in Latin; and that 
 the optative refers to past time, like the subjunctive imperfect. 
 But when the past is represented as present, the subjunctive is 
 used after other tenses besides the present and future : G. 3. 19, 
 T&v irapafidaeap xapiv irpoaeridi), aypK o5 IX-^j; to <nrepfia. 
 The omission of av in this sentence evinces the idea in the 
 mind of St. Paul that all obstacles and difficulties were 
 removed. 
 
 SUBJUUCnVB MOOD. 
 
 A qualified future is expressed by the subjunctive, especially 
 when the aorist is used: "Ubique in conjunctive inest fiituri 
 notatio." Hermann : H. i. 262, ov yap irot rolow tSov avepcK oiiSi 
 tSwfuu, ' for never yet have I seen such heroes, nor is it pro- 
 bable I shall behold their like.' Here ovSi 8-»^o/uu would mean 
 'I shall certainly not see them.' 
 
 The exact translation of J. 4. 35, or 2 Th. 1. 10, Srav S\0j}, 
 would be, • whensoever the Lord shall have come.* This, how- 
 ever, is not in accordance with our usual mode of expression, 
 and had better be avoided: 1 T. 5. 11, Srav KaTa<rTpt)vida<otri 
 Tov Xpurrov, ya/ieip deKovaiVy "whensoever they regain their 
 spirits with reference to Christ, as will probably be the case, 
 they wish to marry." When the reference to the actual 
 futurity of the subsequent event ia less specially contemplated, 
 we may translate it by the present: M. 21. 40, Srav oiv i\J0p 6 
 
102 
 
 TUK OPTATIVB. 
 
 CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 103 
 
 Kvpio^ Tov d/iireXa>vo9, whenever therefore the owner of the 
 vineyard ooa\eth: Mk. 4. 39> Srav hi trapaS^ 6 xapiroi, hut 
 whenever the fruit presents itself. If this reference to actual 
 futurity is more distinct and prominent, we must translate it by 
 the future : Mk. 8. 38, 69 y&p hv hrtua'xw^d Mi ^^^ whoever 
 shall be ashamed of me : A. 23. 35, huucovaonal trov Srav Koi 
 o( Kartiyopol orov irapar/iptavTM, So R. 11. 37 ; 10. 16. 12, 
 iKevaerai Srav ev/catp^<r]}, whenever he shall have leisure. 
 
 IDEAS EXPBESSBD BY THE SOBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 From the idea of futurity, the subjunctive is used in horta- 
 tory and deliberative sentences : tI yivufjuu ; What will be- 
 come of me P vw vol rpdirmfuu ; To what quarter shall I now 
 turn myself? Thus in the hortative sense : M. 17. t, ironja-aftev 
 &Se rpeii «rmjvdi: J. 14. 31, iyelpeaffe" Srfa/ieii ivrevdev: 1 0. 
 15. 33, <pdrif<ofiev Koi vUoiieir aHputv yiip airo&vtjarKOfiev : 1 Th. 
 fi. 0, /i}/ KaffevSafiep, wf mil oi Xoiirot oKKh, ypiiyop&/i€V ical 
 yijipatfiep : H. 4. l, <f>o^0&ftev oiv x.t.X. 
 
 In some passages the hortative and deliberative ideas are 
 blended together: M. 6. 31,^ \&/ovTe<r Tl ^fxvyiofiev ; Mk. 4. so, 
 Tivi ofutuoaenftev t^v ^aaiKelav tov 6eov ; 6. 37, aire\06vre<; 
 arfopdaafiep BuiKoaiav Sijvaplcov aprow, Koi S&fiev aiiToli ifiayeiv ; 
 
 The idea of deliberation prevails in M. 6. 26, p.i) fiepifivare r^ 
 
 '^'OCV vfi&v, tI ^ofpfTS KciX ri irbyre : 23. 33, irci>t ^vyifre airh 7^9 
 
 Kplaeav t^9 jeivvTii ; ^6. 54, ttm; oiv v\fipa6&aiv al ypatftai ; 
 
 ~ L. 22. 2, i^i]TQW oi dpx^^P^K if<*l oi ypafi/juiTeii to, irSn aveKatnv 
 
 a{n6v : 23. 3l, iv t& ^p^ TliivtjTat ; 
 
 In the following there is a double act of deliberation as to 
 the person and the part : Mk. 16. 34, fiaKKovTe<t Kkfipov hr^ 
 avri rk rl apr). So in Demosth. de Cor. 73, dirb 7^/1 Tovrav 
 i^era^fUvav r/f Tlvoi atrio^ icrriv yei^aerai (JMvepov. 
 
 The idea of duty is prominent in L. 12. 5, imoSei^a Sk vfiiv 
 Tiva ^ofiijdfiTe. 
 
 After verbs implying command, exhortation, the subjunctive 
 with wa marks the purpose contemplated by the command as 
 well as the immediate subject : L. 10. 40, eiirk oiv avr^, Xva pot 
 ffVPavTiKdfiijTat. 
 
 THE OPTATIVE. 
 
 The optative expresses a matter subjectively, as conceived of 
 in the mind : Mk. 11. 14, nr/Kht i/c <roO. ew rbv aiava pLifieh 
 
 % 
 
 : 
 
 Kapnhp ipdrfoi: A. 8. 20, rh apyvpiop aov aw aol ettj et? 
 dTrmKeiav: L. 20. 16 ; R. 6. 2. 15 ; 7. 7, M yevono, far be the 
 thought : R. 15. 6, Bi Seof 85*9 vfiiv to aM ^poveiv : Philem. 
 20, *y<» <Tov ovalp.i)v iv Kvplm : 2 Tim. 4. 16, M «wtow "Kayurdeiii : 
 1 P. 1. 2, x^P'-l ^Z*'" ""^ elff/ivr) trkfiOwddri, 
 
 The optative is employed in the Oratio ObUqua, when thel 
 sentiments of a speaker are recorded, but not given in his own 
 person : L. 1. 29, BieKoyl^ero irormroi etrj 6 dtfiraa-p^ oi5to? : 
 8. 9, rk etri ij ir/ipa^oX^ aSni ; 22. 23, to, Tii apa eh) i^ avr&v 
 6 TovTO fUXXtov nrpdffaeiv : A. 17. 11, dpaKpivovrei tA? ypa^<i el 
 S}(pi Tavra ovta)?. 
 
 When an inquirer anticipates uncertainty or indecision in a 
 reply, the presumed contingency or conjectural circumstance 
 passing through his mind is marked by the insertion of av: 
 L. 1. 62, ivevevov t& iraTpl Th tI &v OiXoi KoKeurBai, ainov : 6. 1 1, 
 hieKaKow irpbi dXK^Xovi tI &u voi^aeiav tjJ 'Iijo-oO : A. 2. 12, 
 Ziirir6pow, SKKm wpbt aXKov Xiyovrei, tI &v OeKoi tovto elvai : 
 A. 17. 18, Tl &v BiXoi 6 aireppaXoyoii oiTO<i \iyeip : J. 13. 24, 
 irv0i<T0ai t/s &p eti) irepl oi Xiyei. 
 
 THE INDICATIVE CONJOINED WITH THE OPTATIVE. 
 
 In some sentences the indicative is used in conjunction with 
 the optative. Here two questions are asked, one of which can 
 be answered without great difficulty, while respecting the other 
 the inquirer assumes some uncertainty: A. 21. 33, iirvpOdpeTO 
 Tk &p ettf, KaX tI im-i TreirotijKiw, Here the inquirer anticipates 
 little difficulty in ascertaining what Paul had recently done, but 
 implies some doubt as to learning who he was. A converse 
 change of mood occurs in Xenophon, iTe0avpAica t/w? tc fjaap 
 Koi tI fiovKoiPTo. In like manner a greater degree of uncer- 
 tainty or contingency is marked by the optative than by the 
 subjunctive: Xen, Anab. v. 3. 7, hreareiKep i^p fiiv awro? <rft)(?5 
 iavT^ dvoSovpar el Si « trdOoi, dpoBeiPM, ' he charged him, in 
 case he himself is preserved, to give him back the votive 
 offering ; but if he were to suffer any mischance . to devote the 
 offering.' The greater amount of indefiniteness implied in the 
 mischance over the fact of preservation is marked by the 
 optative. 
 
 CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 In the conditional hypothetical the conditional or relative 
 
104 
 
 OONDITIONAI. PB0F0SITI0M8. 
 
 aentenoe ia called the protatia {vp&ravvt), while the eentenoe 
 which follows IB called the apodosis (aTroSoo'w). Donaldson, § 
 ^00^-602. , . 
 
 ; The protasis is regularly expressed by the particle et, and 
 when it is thought necessary to express an antecedent to this 
 relative, the particle &v appears in the apodosis. 
 
 There are four classes of conditional propositions, which 
 ;mply respectively : 
 
 ' I. Possibility, without the expression of tmcertainty : eX rt 
 ijffn StSoxrt, ' si quid habet dat,'. if he has any thing he gives it. 
 
 II. Uncertainty, with some small amount of probability : idv 
 Tt iyrt S<^«< ' Bi quid habeat dabit,' if he shall have any thing 
 (which is not improbable), he will give it. Uncertainty with 
 the prospect of decision. Objective uncertainty. 
 
 III.; Mere assumption, without any subordinate idea: eX r* 
 vxpi StBoli] &v, ' si quid habeat det,' if he were to have any thing 
 he would give it; or, as often as he had any thing he would 
 give it. Subjective uncertainly. 
 
 lY. Impossibility, i.e. when we wish to indicate that the 
 thing is not so. 
 
 (a) et Tt elx^v iSiSov &p, ' si quid haberet daret,' if he had any 
 thing, which is not the case, he would give it. 
 
 (() et Ti i<r}(ev eScdxev av, * si quid habuisset dedisset,' if he had 
 had any thing, which was not the case, he would have given it. 
 The logical form is, he gives it, therefore he has it. Hence 
 what is logically consequent is grammatically antecedent. 
 
 Bepeated instances of these forms occur in the New Testa- 
 ment, with the exception of the third, which is merely assump- 
 tive or conjectural. 
 
 The first class includes all conditional propositions in which 
 the apodosis is expressed by the indicative without av or by the 
 imperative. In these cases there is simple supposition, a mere 
 expression of possibility. Any tense of the indicative mood 
 may be used in the protasis with the relative particle et. Thus 
 the present, future, and aorist occur in the same passage : 2 Tim. 
 2. II, 12, et 7^/7 <nn>air€0dpofiev koI aw^ijaofiev, el virofiivofiev 
 Kal av/ifiaaiKevao/iev' el apvtiaSfieOa Kcucelvot apvqcrerai ^fM9: 
 M. 12. 27, et iyit iv Bee\^efioi>X iKfiaKKa rii Baifiovui, oi viol 
 vft&v iv Ttvt iK^aKKowrt ; Mk. 3. 26, et o Caracas avian} i<f> 
 iavTov KoX ne/iipurrai, ov Svvarai trraO^vai: G. 1. 9, eX t(9 vfia^ 
 eiwf>/e\l^€Tai trap h vapeXdffere, avade/ta loroi : 1 0. 7. 15, et Bi 
 
 THK FOTJB FORMS. 
 
 105 
 
 -^t 
 
 I 
 
 •I 
 
 i.-KkOavov. H. 7. n, et" /»!.' oS« reXeWt? Sti -nfi AeviTiKffi lepa- 
 avvTji fpr Tts hi xpela /c.t.X. 
 
 SECOND FORM. 
 
 This expresses uncertainty, with some small amount of pro- 
 bability or contingency, with the idea of realization: iav with 
 the subjunctive in the protasis, the indicative future in the 
 apodosis: M. 5. 19, 8« ii^v oiv Xi)a|, , . . Kal StSafi, ovra, toi/s 
 dvBp^ovi, iK&x'cro^ KMdwerai , . . : 17. 20, ihv Sy^e^ ncUrriv 
 i« \!>KKOV aiv&nem, ipelre t# «pet ToiJrp: 28. U, eav OKOvadp 
 To&ro ^l Tou ^eiJi6vo^, ^/*et? irelaofuv alniv, kuI i/tfis afieplfivow 
 •^oc^aoiuv: L. 4. 6, 7, ^ i^P Bi^ 8/80,^* air^v avow ehv 
 wpoaKuv^ar,, hximihv fiov, iarai aov ndvra. Here StSa>/tt is a 
 vivid present, assigning a permanent property. So in K.Z. 25 : 
 J 9 31. L. 19. 40, ictv ovTOi aunrncrinaw, ol \l0oi KeKpa^ovrai: 
 J. 7! 37, Uv Tt? St^a, kfrxk<r0<o irp6i lie Kal invirto, imperative 
 for future. Compare G. 1. 8: R. 12. 20; 13. 4. J- 12. 32, 
 iiiv {rh>0S» iK Tfl? 7^5. 'r«»^«' IX^iiff© wpSs ifUivTOv: G. 5. 2, 
 ihv trepvriiivnaee. Xpurrh if^ oiSiv &4>e\^aer. B«v. 3. 20, iav 
 Tt? &Ko6ari Tfjv ^1^9 /tou, *ol Avolfy rtiv Oipav, eiaeT^vaoiuu 
 
 irph avrov. . . - ii jt •«; 
 
 The first and second forms occur in A. 5. 36, 39, i&v jj ef 
 ivdp<!»r<ov fi fiovkt, oSnj, KaraT^n'^erai- el Sk iK Oeov iariv, oi, 
 Svvaaffe KaraSSiani. 
 
 \ THIRD FORM. 
 
 Mere assumption or conjecture: optative with et* ui ttie 
 protasis, foUowed by optative with &v in the apodosis. Of tt»s 
 form no decided instance occurs in the New Testament. But 
 we may refer to 1 P. 3. 14, et' «al vdaxoire StA SiKaioavvijv 
 puKdpioi {&v eXrrre), if ye were to suffer for righteousness sake 
 
 happy would ye be. . . , -v ^ i 
 
 The protasis is often expressed by a participle: Xen. Anab. 
 iii. 1. 3, viK&vrei nh> oiS' &v &o ^teir/ovra KaraKaivouv, i5ttij- 
 Bhnwv Se avr&v ovBeU &v Xet^deti;. 
 
 FOURTH FORM. 
 
 The hypothetical condition is expressecf as impossible or as 
 contrary to fact : et' with a past tense of the indicative mood in 
 
106 
 
 VSm OF THB IHPBBATIVB MOOD. 
 
 the protasia, followed by &p in tlie apodosis : M. 24. 43, el ^Sei 6 
 olicoie<nr6Tiji . . . iypiiyopTjtTev &v. So L. 12. 39 : 17. 6, el etj^ere 
 vioTiv <»$ KOKKOV awdirewv, iK^ere &p r^ avKUfiiv^ ravrp : 19. 
 43, el lyvea Kal <ri — where the apodosis is omitted : J. 4. lo, e^ 
 ^££19 T^v Stopeetv Tov 0eov . . . aii &p ^njaa^ airrov : 6. 46, £( 7^/> 
 hrurreiere M<oa%, hrurrevere &v iiutl: 8. 39, el riicva rov 
 'Afipahfi fjre, r^ Spya tov 'Afipaci.fi iiroieiTe &v: 9. 41, ei rv^'Kol 
 ^e, ovK &v elxere a/iapTiav : 18. 36, el in toC Koaftov rovrov ^v fj 
 fiaaiKfla f) i/t^, ot vtrriphai hv ol ifiol ^avl^ovro: G. 1. 10, el 
 yhp in Avdpttnroi^ ijpe&Kov, Xpurrov SoOXov ovk &v i^/ii^v: 3. 21, 
 el f/hp iSodt) v6iMK o Suvd/Mvoi ^woiroi^aai, Svra^ &p ix po/utv Tip 
 i} ZiKOMHTupff : H. 4. 8, el 7^p avrouv 'Incrovt Karhrawrev, ovk 
 &p irepl SKXiji tKoKei /tercb ravra ^fiiptK, for 4f Joshua gave 
 them rest he would not continue speaking of another day after 
 these events : 8. 4, «/ fUv yeip i^p M 7^9 ovB' &p ^p iepev^ : 1 J. 
 2. 19, el yiip Jjaap i^ ^fi&p fte/iepijiceurap &p /leff ^(imp. 
 
 There was a tendency in the later Oreek to omit &p in the 
 apodosis; but some think that &p was omitted designedly, to 
 express the utmost certainty of an event having taken place, if 
 the restriction implied or expressed in the protasis had not 
 existed : J. 15. 22, el ftij ^XOop xal iKaXifva avToi<i, afiaprCap ovk 
 ei)(pp'. 19. 11, oiiK elye^ i^ovalap ovhfftiop kwt i/iov, el fi^ j}i> 
 «roi SeSofiipop &p<oOev : 21. 25, oiiZl airrhp olfuu top Koa/MP X'''*PV' 
 aai rd 'Ypa(f>6nepa fiifiXia : G. 4. 15, el SvpaT&p, toiks 6<f>daK/iovi 
 ifi&p i^opv^aPTCi iStoKUTi fioi. In this passage some editors 
 admit &p. 
 
 THE IMPEBATIVB. 
 
 . The imperative differs very little in any of its usages from 
 the subjunctive. The subjunctive was originally a determinate 
 tense, like the future, and signified the probable occurrence of 
 something after the time of speaking. By bearing this in mind 
 we may account for the interchange between the indicative 
 future, the subjunctive aorist, and the imperative. 
 
 The following are virtually imperative: A. 13. 10, ov iravafi 
 ZuMTpi^v T^f oZoii^ Kvplov I M. 6. 6, oiiK e<rg 09 inroKpiral : 
 5. 48, iaeaOe o^ ifieti TeKeioi. 
 
 USES OF THB IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 The imperative is often used as a mere exclamation, as in 
 tliri, Sri/e, ^pe. This may. account for its use in M. 8. 32, ehrev 
 
 '? 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 USES OP THB IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 107 
 
 airrolr inrdrfere: 23. 33, Kal ifieK irKfipdHrare n fOrpov tSv 
 waTiptop ip£>p, go on till you have equalled the iniquities of 
 your fathers : 26. 45, Kadex^e rh "kamop. ^ 
 
 The imperative present and the subjunctive aonst with p-rj are 
 used to express prohibitions: Mk. 9. 39, M KtoKwre airrop: J. 
 5. 28, /tij Oavfid^ere Toxko: Mk. 10. 19, M fU>iX^»<nir M 4>opev- 
 arn : A. 18. 9, M ^/3oi), dXXa TuiXet Kal fiil atmr^arfi. 
 
 'The distinction of tenses is generally preserved, the present 
 denoting continued or frequently repeated action, and the 
 aorist that which is single: M. 6. 19, A*4 dnaavpl^ere vfup Of,- 
 ffoi;powArlTg?7^s: H. 12. 14, etp^i^vfiiw/ceTe. .... 
 
 In the two following instances the aorist impbes, do it at 
 once, do it quickly, do it for this once, not constantly: J. 2. 
 7, ^iepXaaTe tAs iSp^9 fiSaros: A. 23. 23, iroipAaaTe cTpaTu^av 
 SuiKoalovi. " Prsesens et aoristus in cseteris prseter indicativum 
 modis eo maximo differunt, quod pwesens rem durantemvel 
 scepim repetitam. aoristus rem absolutam aut smelfactam indicat. 
 Inepte dicas ypdyfrop filpKov si non aeriptum me, sed acnbi vw, 
 quia hoc longi temporis opus est ; recte vero S09 t^i' xeipa, quia 
 hoc brevi temporis momento fit." Hermann. 
 
 Two imperatives are sometimes united, either with or without 
 Kal, where the second denotes a consequence of the first: J. 1. 
 40, ifyxeaBe Koi rSere: 10. 15. 34, ^m/^are htKalaxs koX p.ri 
 iftapTdpere: 1 T. 6. 12, ayapl^ov top Kohxtp arf&pa t^ wurreaxi. 
 iiriKafiov 7^9 ala>plov ija^. 
 
 The second imperative is here equivalent to a future, as in 
 , the phrase, 'divide et impera.' This usage may be arranged 
 under the second form of hypothetical propositions, where the 
 protasis with idp is omitted: L. 10. 28, tovto iroiel- xal ^v<rv- 
 J. 2. 19, \vaaTe top vaop tovtop' kuI h Tplaiv fip^pavt iyepa 
 uMp: E. 5. 14, iyeipai 6 KaeevBtop xal apdara ix twi/ peKp&p- 
 Kal i-rrKfMwrei aot o Xpurr6<i: Ja. 4. 7, di/rAmjTe t# Sta^oX^)' 
 Kal ^ev^erai d<f> vft&p. 
 
 The infinitive is used in a preceptive sense as a substitute for 
 the imperative, to express what must or ought to take place. 
 This is especially the case in aphorisms and the language of 
 legislation, where a tone of importance, authority, or solemnity 
 is adopted: L. 9. 3, /i^re dph Zvo xtr&ptK ^ew: R. 12. 16, 
 Xalpeip /*6tA xavo*^®" ««^ KXaleip /texA kTuuoptup : Ph. 3. 16, 
 T^i ovT# oToixelp Kavopi, to aM ^popeip : Hesiod, Op. Di. 391, 
 rfvp>pbp cvelptip, 7WfH'0i» hi fiowreip. 
 
108 
 
 VSES OF TIIR INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 THE INFINinVB HOOD AND PARTICIPLE. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE AS A VEKBAI, NOUN. 
 
 109 
 
 " The use of the infinitive in dependent clauae^Sjuay be t^us 
 distinguished from the use of the participle. The infinitive is 
 used when the real object .of the governing verb is an act or 
 state, rjfvauravai rpe^iv t^v, r/K&aaav ^a\r)(oinipav. The par- 
 ticiple is used when the real object of the governing verb is a 
 person or thing whose act or state is described by the participle, 
 6p& avOpanrop airodv^iTKovTa. The infinitive is a substantive 
 expressing an act or state; th^ participle is an adjective ex- 
 pressing an act or state ; if, then, the object of the verb is an 
 act or state, the verb is followed by an infinitive used like a 
 common noun. But when the object of a verb is a person or 
 thing the participle agrees with the object, and expresses its act 
 or state." (Jacob, § 136.) 
 
 (The infinitive is most frequently used as a supplement of 
 other ideas, and especially of verbal ideas. If the idea expressed 
 by a verb is complete, the verb denotes an independent event, 
 or an action finished in itself. If the idea is incomplete, the 
 verb requires a more accurate definition by way of supplement 
 to convey the idea with perfect clearness.^ Verbs which express 
 an incomplete idea are such as denote some internal faculty and 
 power, the operation of the will, of thought, or of sensation. 
 
 (^ Verbs which denote the operation of sensation require only 
 the supplement of the object to which the feeling is directed, 
 and by which it is excited. This is expressed by the participle^ 
 Other verbs which express an incomplete idea are supplemented 
 by the epexegetical infinitive, expressive of object, design, pur- 
 pose. In this way the infinitive becomes one form of the final 
 sentence, though after verbs of ' command,' ' entreaty,' tva with 
 a conditional mood is often used instead. 
 
 USES OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 The infinitive is used for one form of the final sentence, mark- 
 ing object, purpose : J. 13. 24, vevei, oiv tovt^ SipMP ilerpof 
 mOiadat,: 1 Th. 1. 9, hrearpe^are wpbi top Oew airo t&p 
 etSdXap SovXeCeip 0e^ ^i>vri xal akTjdip^: S.ev. 16. 9, ov 
 ftereporiaap Sovpai avr^ £6fav: 22. 8, hreaa irpoam/p^aai : 
 A. 15. 24, XeyopTe<: irepirip.peadat kuI vqpeip top p6(iop. 
 . Frequently the infinitive is lised as the Latin supine, which 
 is merely a verbal substantive presentiag a supplementary idea : 
 
 
 \ 
 
 M..2. 2, fi\j9op^ irpoaKVPn^rai atn^: H- 8, Ti i^T^ere ISelp ; 
 1 C. 1. 17, ov yhp a-iri<rret\e /te Xpurroi fiairrl^eip. 
 
 Sometimes the infinitive is merely explanatory, as in 1 Th. 4. 
 3, 4. 6, inrix^aOai lp&<; iirh t^? nroppelm defines i Afytaap-mon 
 its negative side; the positive side is set forth by eiSipai 
 iKoffTOP vfMP K.T.\., of which there follows a specific exemplifi- 
 cation, TO p.if inrep^aipeip Kol irXeopeiereip. (Ellicott.) 
 
 •tHE INFINITIVE AS A VERBAL NOUN. 
 
 The infinitive is also used to denote the subject of a pro- 
 position, as in English : 
 
 " To meet, to Imow, to love, and then to part, 
 la the sad tale of many a hnman heart." 
 
 Ph. 1. 21, iiMi -thp TO ^p Xpurrov Ka\ rh mrodapelp xipSo^ : 
 M. 12. 12, lfe<rrt toZs adPPaai KaX&i iroieip: 19. to, ov 
 c^p4>ipet 'iap.rjaai : A. 20. l6,07ra)s /ifi yeprrrai axn^ 'xpoporpifif}- 
 <rai ip TV 'Aaux : Ja. 1. 27, epn<rKela nadaph hrtai^eadai 
 op^apow : 2 P. 2. 21, Kpeirrop fhp ^p uvtok m eireypoiKepai, ti\p 
 oSop rrji hiKaioavptjt. ^ „ 
 
 The infinitive is also employed to express the object : II. ii. 
 290, oSvpoprai oIkopSb pieadai, they lament the voyage home- 
 ward: Xen. Cyr. vii. 1, tw Bk Kvptp Ka\ toIs d/*f awToi; 
 vpoo^veyicap ol depairoin-es ip^aryeip tuI i/iirtelp: J. 4. 7, So? /tot 
 iriop: 33, M Tts ^i'e7««»' avr^ <^«7"'': ^- 2. 2>, « Kvpvatrtop 
 fiTI K-Keirreip KKhrrei<: ; 15. 24, ikiri^ot humopev6psPO<s eedaaaffat 
 {,(M<i : 2 T. 1. 18, ia»i ouVy o KvpuK evpelp eKeo<i : 1 Th. 3. 10, 
 Seofiepoi, ek to IMp vft&p to nrpoamrop, the purport and object 
 of the prayer : 1 Th. 3. 13, e« to artipl^at v/i&p rhi KupSlav, the 
 end and aim of the irXeopdaai xal m-epunrevaai: 2 Th. 3. 6, 
 iraparfieKKop.ep vfUP . . • (rriWeaOai vpM<t. 
 
 The infinitive is used as a verbal substantive in the genitive 
 to explain the purpose, design, or object, from which the action 
 of the principal verb arose: M. 2. 13, /teWet 7ap 'H/)i»S»;s 
 ^7)Teip TO TraiZlop tow airoTJaai avro : 21. 32, vpxK lB6pTe<i ov 
 fierefiekrjO'nTe varepop rov irurrevcrai avrw : L. 5. 7, icaripevaap 
 ... TOW iKJd6pra<i avWafiiadai awTot? : A. 7. 19, itcaKaae tows. 
 iruTipoi fifi&v TOW Troteti' iKOera rh fipi^ air&p : 1 0. 2. 2, oiJ 
 7ap ixpiva rov elBipai Tt ^i* v/tti;: H. 11. 6, Jltoret 'Epa>x 
 fiererWri rov fit) iieip Baparop. 
 
 Thus the infinitive is used according to the usual rules 
 
110 
 
 PARTIOIFLES. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Ill 
 
 affecting the genitiTe, 'in relation to,' 'in respect to:' L. 24. 
 25, avinrrot km fipaZeh t§ xapSlq, tov iritrreveiv: A. 14, 9, 
 t&i)i» oTt vlariv ix'* toO amOfivM: 20. 3, ijevero yixofitj tow 
 inrooTpe^iv iui MaxeSopia^. 
 
 The infinitive is also used in tlie dative: M. 13. 25, iv t^ 
 KaOevSeiv tow? av0punrov<t (this iisage with iv and an. accusative 
 as the subject of the infinitive is very common : L. 1. 8 ; 9. 36 ; 
 A. 3. 26; 8. 6; G. 4. is): 2 0. 2. 13, tS /*^ eipeiv fie Tlrov: 
 1 Th. 3. 3, T^ fiffhiva aalveaOai. 
 
 ■ PARTICIPLES. 
 
 The participle describes an act or state, and agrees vrith the 
 subject or object of another verb : iXade tovto itoimv, he was 
 unobserved in doing this: ip& avrbv ipxpftevov, I see him 
 coming. 
 
 The use of the participle in Greek is much more frequent and 
 diversified than in other languages. We may arrange its em- 
 ployment under two general heads. 
 
 I. In a dependent proposition as a supplement to verbs which 
 express an incomplete idea. 
 
 II. In intermediate propositions to assign closer definitions 
 ' of the principal verb, or of a noun in the principal proposition. 
 
 I. THE PARTICIPLE IN DEPENDENT PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 Verbs wbich denote a result of sensation and express a 
 perception by the organs of sense or by internal comprehension, 
 as well as those which describe a state of feeling, take their 
 supplement in the participle : olBa diayrbt &v : fiifivijiro avOpct- 
 wos &v: M. 1. 18, evpidi) iv f^currpX Ij^p^'^'*' ^- 4. 23, oaa ^kov- 
 aafuv yevo/ieva: 8. 46, iya> yiip eyvav Svvafuv i^ekBovaav: A. 
 16. 34, vya\\(a<raTO iravoiKl irenurrevicm r^ 0ej>: 1 0. 14. 18,- 
 ev)(apurr& tA 0e^ ftov yXuurcraK \a\&v : L. 19. 17, ta0i exav, be 
 assured that you have. 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE TO EXPRESS THE SUPPLEMENTARY IDEA. 
 
 The participle imparts the supplementary idea to verbs of 
 ceasing, beginning, continuing, because the action of the prin- 
 cipal verb can only be realized by the occurrence of the act 
 expressed by the dependent verb. As the ideas of commence- 
 ment, cessation, &c., can only be predicated of a real action, 
 this reality is inconsistent with the abstract nature of the 
 
 I 
 
 V 
 
 I 
 
 . 
 
 infinitive: M. 11. l, irekeaev 6 'Itjatm Siardaarav: L. 5. 4, w? 
 i-iravaaro "KdK&v : •7. 45, ov SteXnre Kara^iKovad ftov rovv TroSat : 
 A. 12. 16, iirifieve Kpovav: Col. 1. 9, ov iravopJeOa inrep vft&v 
 irpoaevxofievoi. These may be considered temporal sentences 
 where the participle appears as a secondary predicate. 
 
 If the subject which belongs to the participle stands with the 
 principal verb as the remote object in the genitive or dative, 
 the participle agrees with it in case : yad6fi/t)v avr&v otopAvav 
 ehai <To<}>andraY, I perceived that they fancied themselves very 
 wise: oiShroTe /jieTefieKrjai pxn airfqaavri, ^derf^afikvtfi hk iroK- 
 "KoKK, I at no time repented of being silent, but many times of 
 speaking. With these verbs a participle is used, because in the 
 dependent proposition a state is assigned in which the subject 
 or object of the chief proposition exists. If however the state 
 is one which either has yet to take place, or merely might take 
 place, the reason for the use of the participle disappears and the 
 verbs are followed by the infinitive. Hence many verbs differ 
 in meaning as they are followed by the infinitive or participle. 
 Alffxwofuu is followed by the infinitive when the action is not 
 performed through shame, but by the participle when an action 
 has been performed of which the doer is ashamed : aW* iao><i 
 aUrxyvji Xifew ravra, but perhaps you are ashamed to say these 
 things, and therefore do not say them : ata^^wo/iat rrotelv, I am 
 ashamed to do it ; I refrain from doing it through shame : ryu 
 Zi v/Mv irapaivatv alajfvvoinriv av, I shoidd be ashamed were I to 
 admonish you : aUrxyvofuu iroi^aa';, I am ashamed that I did 
 it. 'Apxpfitu is followed by the participle when the assigned 
 state has already taken place, but by the infinitive when it is 
 just about to take place : o ^et/M>i' ^p^aro yevo/ievot, the winter 
 was come on: 6 x^i/imv rjpjfero ytyvevdai, the winter was 
 beginning to come on. But in the New Testament &pxo/iai, ia 
 used with the infinitive: Mk. 4. i, fip^aro SiSdaxeiv: 6. 7, 
 ^p^aro avTOVi diroareWeiv : A. 1. I, c!>i> rjp^aro 'Irjaow iroieiv 
 re KM BiSda-K€iv, 
 
 'Akowo, navddva take the participle when a fact is adduced 
 which we know or perceive with our own senses; the infini- 
 tive when we rely on the authority of others : ^KovaOijv roC 
 AijiutaOhiovi \iyovToi, I heard Demosthenes speak ; I heard his 
 voice : okovco rov Arj/ioadivri Xeyeiv, I am told that Demosthenes 
 says. 
 
 ^alvo/uu is followed by the participle when the object really 
 
112 
 
 PARTICIPtES. 
 
 PAHTICIPLES. 
 
 113 
 
 is as it appears to be ; by the infinitive when the likeness is not 
 real, but only apparent: ^a/verat &v ar/ad6<i, he is eyidently 
 and really good : ^talverat elpat ar/a06<i, he appears to be good : 
 &IUI Xiyav ravra aatftui KXaieiv iipaivero, on speaking these 
 things, he was just as though he wept ; but icKaUop e^lvero, 
 he evidently wept: M. 6. 16, ottuv <l>av&<ri roiv avdpanroiv 
 vqoTcvovref, that in the sight of men they may really fast: 
 vtitrreveiv would imply thot they were satisfied with the appear- 
 ance, even though it was considered to be on outward show. 
 
 THE FAKTICIPLB IN DEPBNDEMT FBOFQSITIONS. 
 
 Yerbs of declaring, announcing, take the participle when 
 an event is stated as a fact; the infinitive when an event is 
 stated as a matter of intelligence : oTrrrfteKBri Htniiaia iroKutp- 
 KovfUvri, when it is certain that Potidsea is besieged : airrrfyiKOij 
 HorlZata iroXtopKeurffai, when the intelligence comes in the 
 form of a report. 
 
 Verbs which express subordinate definitions of aU action 
 take frequently the participle of the verb which expresses the 
 principal action. Such verbs are rvyxovta, \av0di>ta, ^dva, 
 SuiTeKia, x'^^P'^t otx**!*'^'* and sometimes troUm: oi OTrXtrat ot 
 irv)(pv irapovrei ifioi^dow, who happened to be present, or who 
 were present : erv^e Oavatv, he was dead : rirfx,d,vovaa> lj(pvTev, 
 they have : xaipoww hraivovvre^, they praise gladly : Stf>07)u 
 a^iKop,ev<K, I arrived first : of^erat ^vyuv, he is fled and gone. 
 In these cases the participle expresses the principal idea, to 
 which the idea of the verb is merely accessary (see 1 Tim. 1. 12, 
 13, quoted in Chapter YIII., under Sri) : M. 17. 26, wpoitf>0aaev 
 airrov 6 'IrjaoOi \^av, Jesus said to him in anticipation : H. 13. 
 ' 2, SKoBov Tive<i (evlaavrei roiii dr/yiKovf : Xen. Anab. i. 1. 9, 
 TOVTO S* av ovrm Tpe<l>6fievov iKavdavev aiir^ rb arpdrevfia, was 
 secretly maintained for him. Thus we may explain A. 10. 33, 
 av re xaXui hroiiqaa^ vapar/evo/iei/oi, and you have come most 
 seasonably: Ph. 1. 25, xal tovto weiroiOon olSa, and on this 
 account I know confidently : LXX, Jer. 23. 6, 'Japa^X xara- 
 amivtaaei trerroiOuxi. 
 
 II. THE PARTICIPLE IN INTERMEDIATE PROPOSITIONS. 
 TERTIARY PBBDXCATE. 
 
 The participle in intermediate propositions may be arranged 
 under seven heads: (1) explanatory, giving collateral defini- 
 
 tions of single words, expressed by the relative icho, which ; (2) 
 temporal, marking relations of time, expressed by particles, 
 while, after, when; (3) causal, adducing reasons, expressed by 
 the particles because, since, as; (4) conditional, marking rela- 
 tions of condition, concession, expressed by the particles if, 
 although; (5) the final sentence; (6) periphrastic tenses; (7) 
 absolute use. The correct translation of participles will always 
 be modified by the context ; as from this alone we can deter- 
 mine to which of these uses it ought to be assigned. 
 
 (1) As an instance of collateral definitions we may refer to 
 M. 10. 4, 'IoiBa<i 'laKaputyTfit 6 koL rrapaSoixi avrov : A. 4. 36, 
 ^laatfi 6 iviKXtjOeh Bapvd^a^. 
 
 THE TEMPORAL AND CAUSAL RELATIONS OF PARTICIPLES. 
 
 (2) Temporal relations of participles may denote coincident 
 or antecedent acts : A. 10. 38, os Sif>\Oev evepyer&v koI Id/ievoi 
 K,T,\. : A. 6. 4, ov^i fiivop <rol e/ieve, Koi irpaOev iv -ry <rp e^ov<ria 
 {nnjpxe ; 1 Th. 3. 1, /iijicert aTeyovre^ evSoK^aafiev KaTa\enj>dTJvai 
 iv ^Adrivai<; fiovoi. 
 
 When a participle and verb are combined together, both in 
 the past tense, we can only determine by the sense whether the 
 action described by the participle is antecedent to that of the 
 verb or is coincident with it. In the following it seems to be 
 coincident : R. 7. 8, d<j>opfi7jv Xa^ovaa i] apaprLa Sia T^f ivrdKiyi 
 Kareipydaaro iv i/iol traaav eiridvuiav : Mk. 15. 37, o Se 'Ji^aoOf 
 a^£(f <l>wvr)v fieydXriv i^eirvevae : A. 7. 36, o&ro$ i^^cvy€v avrov^ 
 iroi'qa-at ripara koI aritieia. 
 
 In the following, the action denoted by the participle is 
 antecedent to the action described by the verb : as in II. i. 6, 
 i^ oS Si) rh irp&Ta Siarr^Tijv iplaavre, just from the time when 
 at first they quarrelled and separated : Mk. 15. 43, T6K/iijtTa<i 
 elaijXffe, had the courage to go in: L. 11. 8, et koI ov Saurei 
 dva<rra<i Bta to etvai avrov ^IXov, Bid ye rrfv dvaiBeiav avrov 
 iyep0€l<i Sdtaei avra otrav xp'g^ei : A. 5. 30, Bv v/hk Buxeipi<raa0e 
 Kpe/idaavrei ivl (vKov (so A. 10. 39 ; 5. 6 ; 16. 34. 37) : A. 15. 
 22, iKke^afiivov! avBpai i^ avr&v irifi-^^ai : G. 4. 15, el Swarov, 
 TOW 6<f>dakfiovv vft&v i^opv^avTev hv eStoKare fioi. 
 
 (3) Causal relations, 'because,' 'since:' A. 4. 21, ot Si 
 Trpoa-atreiXtjo-dfievoi, aireXvcrav avroin p,7)Biv evpiaKovrei to ir&f 
 KoXdaavrat avTov<i, since they found no matter on which to 
 punish them : B. 6. 6, tovto yivmaKovre^, since we know this 
 
 1 ' 
 
114 
 
 THE FINAL SENTENCE. 
 
 (2 P, 1. 10; I T. 1. 9) : 0. 1. 3, evxapicrrov/iev r^ Qe^ 
 aKovtravrev rriv wltrrw vfi&v, because we heard : E. 1. 12, et? 
 TO elfai rifia^ et? thraivov Sofi;? qvTov tow? nporiKirneoTa^ iv t«5 
 Xpiar^, seeing that we previously hoped in Christ: IT. 1. 12, 
 •maTov (le ff^i^iTaTo de/ievoii el<: iiaKoviav, judged me faithful in 
 that he put me into the ministry : E. 2. 4, 6 hk &eo<i TrXownoi 
 &v ip i\£€i : 2 Tim. 4. lO, Aijfiai} yap fie iyKaTiXiirep ar^airr^aa^ 
 yav vvp al&pa', R. 10. 3, arfPoovvTe<i yap rifp tov Qeov hiKautawqv, 
 Koi TTiP ISiap SiKaioavpriv' ^Tyrovpres (rTijaai, rp Simfioavpr) tov 
 6eov oirx_ {nreTar/rjaap : 1 Tim. 4. 8, iTrarfyeXlap lj(pvaa fm^? rf}<i 
 VVP Kai rrj<! fieXKovati^, 'since it has ;' the participle confirms the 
 previous assertion : R. 3. 23, TravTCV ijfiaprop, kuI verrepovprai 
 riji £o^f ToC Qeov, SitKaiovfievoi Supetip ry airov j(apiTi. 
 
 CONDITIONAL RELATIONS. 
 
 (4) Conditional relations, 'although,' 'if:' J. 12. 37, roo-aCra 
 Si avTov aijfieta ireiroi/ificoTOii l/nrpoaOep ain&p ouk eirlarevop eh 
 avTOP: J. 21. ll, roaovrtov 6vtu)p ovk ia-j^iaBi) to Siktvop: 1 C. 
 9. 19, ikevOepov &v ix ndirrtop iraaip ifiavrop iSovXaxra : 1 Tim. 
 3. 10, Staieopehtiia-ap apeyK\.t]Toi oj/re?: 4. 4, ovBep airofiXrirop, 
 p-erh evy(api<TTla<t TM/i^apo/xepop : 1. 7, Oe\ovTe<; elpai vofioSiBda- 
 
 Kokoi flij VOOVPTt^ K.T.X. 
 
 The participle in a concessive sense is often used with Kal, 
 Kuhrep : L. 18. 7, xal fiaKpodvfiSip eir ainol<s : -Ph. 3. 4, xaiirep 
 iyat i)(utp 7reiroi07i<rip xal ip aapici: H. 5. 8, Kahrep 6>p v(o« 
 efiadep a<j> &p tirade rijp inraKoriP. 
 
 The Hellenistic use of /ii; with the participle embraces the 
 ideas ' if not,' ' because not,' ' though not : ' L. 9. 33, pi} ei'Soif 
 8 Xeyec here p,iq introduces an apology. 1 T. 6. 4, p/qhiv 
 hriardfiepot, yet knowing nothing; ovSip eTriarrd/ievoi would 
 have been a somewhat more emphatic declaration of absolute 
 ignorance. Frequently /ii; introduces a reason : M. 1. ig, Kal 
 p,r) OeKmp irapaSetyfutTiaai : 22. 29, irKapoiaBe p-rf elhoref ra? 
 ypa^wi; R. 4. 19, nal fit) aadepjjaai t^ iruTTei: 9. II, fuqirm 
 yap yeppTfdipTwp. See other instances under ov, /ti}, Chapter 
 VIII. 
 
 THE FINAL SENTENCE. 
 
 (5) The future participle is employed in one form of the 
 final sentence, ^XOep aSiKijffup : A. 8. 27, 89 ekriXvdei irpoaKvpij- 
 awv evi 'lepowaXi^p,, When the actions of the participle and 
 the verb are coincident the present ia used: R. 16. 2&, vwl 
 
 PERIPUUASTIC TENSES. 
 
 115 
 
 iropevofuii et? 'lepovadXiip, SiaKOv&v rot? ar/loK, ' now I am ou 
 my way to Jerusalem, ministering to the saints.' His whole 
 journey waa an act of ministration. 
 
 PEIUPHRASTIC TENSES. 
 
 (6) Periphrastic tenses are often formed with the participle 
 and ej(<a. Thus arifidaat top apSpa fj^et, having dishonoured 
 the man he keeps him so ; i. e. he keeps dishonouring, he con- 
 tinues to dishonour : L. 14. 19, ipa>T& <re l^e fie iraprffrtfpApap. 
 But the expression is probably a Latinism : " Excusatum me 
 habeas, rogo." This periphrastic usage is very common in the 
 New Testament, with elfii, yipofiai, denoting habit, or the un- 
 interrupted continuance of an action : M. 7. 29, ^p yap SiSdaxap 
 avToiKi (L. 13. 10) : Mk. 15. 43, ffp trpoalexop^vo'i : M. 19. 22, 
 ffp yd.p exfop KTrjfiaTa voXXd: Mk. 13. 25, oi darepei tov 
 ovpapov iooprai, itarlvTovrei : L. 21. J 7, eaeade fiurovfiepoi : 24, 
 lepovaaXrffi ioTai iraTovfiipif : H. 5. 1 2, yeyopare j^etai* ^j^oi^res 
 ydXaicTOv, ye have become such as have need : Mk. 1. 4, iyepero 
 'ladppjfi fiairri^atp ('extitit;' there arose, there appeared) : L. 
 15. 1, ^<rap eyyi^opTei avra iravre? oi TeX&pai: 24. 32, ovx), rf 
 icapSia fffi&p KatofiipT) 7fp ip rffiiv ; A. 12. 6, trpoaevj^ hi f/p 
 iKTepifii yepofiipTj, now prayer was continually offered in full 
 strain. 
 
 Mr. Wratislaw remarks: "Almost any verb may be peri- 
 phrased by the corresponding substantive with e^o>, either in an 
 active or passive sense : " Ildt. viii. 143, oirip ex^w 0e&p, to 
 reverence the gods: Soph. Si. 400, irarifp Toincap avyypdtfiijp 
 exei, i. e., forgives, excuses : (Ed. Col. 557, tIpu iroXean i-ireamyi 
 •irpo<TTpoTrijp epov y extop ; what do you desire ? Plato, Menex. 
 243 A, &p Ivaipop exovai, whom they commend: Mk. 11. 22, 
 exere trUmp &eov, believe in God : A. 24. 23, exeip tc apeaip, 
 allow him liberty: 2 T. 1. 13, virorwruaip exe vyiaipopTutp 
 Xoyap, draw up an outline of the wholesome words, exeip 
 Kaprrop is used in the sense of awdyetp, reap, or ^epeiv, produce. 
 It may be doubtful which sense is to be preferred in R. 1. 13, 
 tva Tti»A KapiTop axS>'- R. 6. 21, rlpa oJip KOfyirop er^ere TOTe; 
 what fruit did ye then reap? 22, ^ere top Kapirop vfi&p ek 
 dyuKTfiop, ye bear your fruit re.sulting in holiness. So Xafifid- 
 peip with a substantive is frequently used as a periphrasis for a 
 verb : H. 11. 29, ^? ireipap Xa^oprev oi Air/vimoi KaTeirodijaav. 
 (Notes and Dissertations, pp. 47. 126.) 
 
 i2 
 
116 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE USED AIISOLUTELY. 
 
 ABSOLUTE CASES. 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 117 
 
 (7) The participle is not only attached to one of the nouns in 
 the principal proposition, but may receive a new subject of its 
 own. Thus the participle forms with its subject a distinct 
 member in the proposition, and as it is put in u case which is 
 independeat of the principal verb, the participle is said to be 
 used absolutely. As the general use of the participle absolute 
 is to designate a relation of time or to assign a cause, we find 
 that the genitive is used absolutely more frequently than any 
 other case, though all the cases are thus used > occasionally. 
 Instances of the genitive absolute have been already given in 
 Chapter V. 
 
 The nominative is used absolutely in expressions of time : 
 L. 9. 28, eyevero Bi fieret tovv Xoyov^ tovtov; aael ^/lipM oktw 
 Kal irapaXa^mp x.r.X. Here we may supply hidantfia, jfpovot : 
 M. 15. 32, oTt ijSri fifiepai, T/)€t9 Trpoafiivoval fioi,. Some other 
 instances may be classed under the head of anacoluthon or 
 change of construction : M. 12. 36, trav pijfia dpyw b ihv 
 XdK^aaxriv oi avdpwiroi aTroBdaovai irepl airrov : M. 7. 24, vof 
 oiv oarK aKoia /mov tov; \6yov^ tovtov^ , . . ofiouixrta ainov 
 avhpX <}>povlfi^. Participles in the nominative are put absolutely 
 in proverbial expressions and quotations : 2 P. 2. 22, Kvaiv iiri- 
 aTpii^av irri to ISutv i^ipafui' koI *T<i \oviTa/jiiin] eli KiiKia/xa fiop- 
 ^opov: 1 0. 3. 19, o Bpaaa6fievo<i roii^ ao^ov<} iv Ttj iravovpyia 
 avT&v. By supplying the verb of existence, participles and 
 adjectives become equivalent to imperatives. Repeated in- 
 stances occur in R. 12. 9 — 13. 16 — 19: 1 P. 3. l, ofiouov, ai 
 fyvvaiKtv, inroTaaaofievai tok tS^t? avhpdaiv. Another instance 
 occurs in the same passage by adopting the correct punctuation, 
 (fi) ft>? Zappa vtrrfKovaev rm 'Afipadfi, Kvpiop ainov KaTuovaa, fft 
 iyepijffijTe reicva. 'Ayaffovoiovcrai Kal fit) <j>ofiovfievai firjSefiiav 
 ino-qaiv. The aorist points to a definite, special act. Hence we 
 must understand it to mean, " Whose daughters ye became on 
 the profession of your faith in Christ. Go on doing good, and 
 have no fear of any sudden alarm." 
 
 The dative may be put absolutely in M. 8, l, Kara^dvri ainA 
 OTTO ToO opow ■^KoXovdijffav avrm oy(\ot iroWoi. (But here the 
 second oury may be regarded as redundant. Chapter III.) In 
 classical Greek this dative defines the time and assigns the 
 cause : irepitovri xy eviavr^, as the year came to a close : 
 
 elpyofiivovs aiiroK t^S BaXdaffifii Kal Kara fyriv iropffovftivoi^ 
 evej(eipfijadv Tive<s irpbi 'Adifvalov^ 07076(1/ t^v TroXti', because 
 they were cut off from the sea, and ravaged by land, some 
 attempted to bring the state to the Athenians. 
 
 The accusative is used absolutely when a narrator assigns 
 by conjecture the motives which influenced the agent. Fre- 
 quently we can only account for the accusative by considering 
 that the construction is defective, or that the mode of ex- 
 pression is too compressed : A. 26. 2, ^ynifiai ifuivrop fuiKapiov 
 fieWuv diroXoyeiaffai, iirl am a^q/iepov ftaKurra yvdarriv ovra 
 ae trdvTtov Kara 'lovBalav^ idStv re kclL ^ifnjfiArtov (here we 
 might repeat ijrytj/iai before fPUMrrtjv) : L. 24. 46, otrrw? iBei 
 iradeiv tov Xpiarop, koI KJjpvjfdfjpai tirl ra* opofiari ainov fierdr 
 voiav Kal a<l>e<np d/tapri&p eh irdma to edpij, dp^dfiepov diro 
 'lepoviraX^fi (here dp^d/iepop agrees with K^pir/fia, implied' 
 in K7)pi;j(j9fjpai) : E. 1. 18, ireifMoricrfiipow tow? o0daX/tov9 7^? 
 Siapola<: vfi&p. This we may regard as a quasi-apposition with 
 the preceding verse, or may consider that St. Paul intended to 
 begin the verse with eh rb elSh/ai vfmt, as denoting the effect 
 of hnrfpauTei. Dean Alford quotes Soph. Electr. 479, vrrearl 
 HOI 0pdao^ aZvnpowp K\vovaav dpria^ weipdjoiv : ^sch. Choeph, 
 396, iretraXTai S' aine fioi. <f>l\op Keap ropBe K\vovaap oIktop. 
 
 ^•V 
 
CHAPTER VIII. 
 PARTICLES. 
 
 Under the term particles are included all the parts of speech 
 which are not declined or conjugated, as adverbs, conjunctions, 
 prepositions. 
 
 In the present chapter the conjunctions and some of the 
 adverbs are presented as nearly as possible in alphabetical 
 order. Copulatives like xa/, tS, negatives as ov, /i>7, and final 
 particles as tva, oira>9, will be considered together. 
 
 (Jacob, § 102. Donaldson, § 547.) 
 
 "Conjunctions connect words or sentences, and mark the 
 nature of their coimexion. Connected sentences are either co- 
 ordinate, or one of them is subordinate to the other. 
 
 " Co-ordinate sentences are connected (a) by copulatives con- 
 necting objects to be considered conjointly, as kuI, re, re—Kul, 
 both — and; (J) by disjunctives connecting objects to be con- 
 sidered separately, as t}, ^toi, either ; (c) by adversatives ex- 
 pressing opposition or distinction, dWd, fiev — 8e. 
 
 "Subordinate sentences are appended to the principaf by 
 temporal conjunctions when they are supplementary." 
 
 'AXXd, pi. of aWov, 'other,' 'otherwise.' Generally ren- 
 dered ' but,' ' but on the contrary,' ' but still ; ' an adversative 
 conjunction used after negative sentences, seclusive and anti- 
 thetical, to express something diiferent from what was before 
 said; limiting or opposing whole sentences or single clauses. 
 The sentence introduced by aXXd corrects and explains the 
 preceding clause. In many cases the denial is comparative 
 rather than absolute ; but the negative clause precedes to give 
 emphasis to the positive assertion : A. 5. 4, ovk it^evira avdpdt- 
 irovt, a>iXa Qeu : M. 27. 24, I8a>v a UiXdroi on oiSkv axf>e\fi, 
 dWil /laXKov 0opv/3o$ fyivertu : Mk. 9. 37, ovk ifik Bej(€Tat, 
 
 PARTICLES — oKXa. 
 
 119 
 
 AXXh Thu &^o<rreiKavrd ^e, 'nicht so wol-als,' 'sondem 
 
 fip&a^p J,u fJvovaav ek t^v aUiv^v: M. 6. 17, ovk tiK0ov 
 KaraXvaM, aXKci nfktjpSurai. 
 
 Sometimes d\\i is omitted: Tit. 2. 3, M oa>v rroWy 
 Se8ou\a,/t^ra9, KoKohSaaKdXov,: Tit. 3. 4, p-V^eva ^a^f^eiP, 
 
 auayoi/« elvai, hruiKek. 
 
 dXKd introduces an emphatic antithesis after a full negative: 
 L 1. 60, oM "5^^ K\v0^a€jaL 'Ii^dvvvi: R. 3. 31, vof^ou^ ow 
 Kuraiyfov^Leu S^d t^9 TrArreo,?; M '/^''ono' dWi p6,u,v urru,,^. 
 ' After a negative clause followed by a parenthesis, where the 
 translation may be, 'Nay rather-on the contrary: H. 10.^, 
 a\X' iv avraii dvdfuniai<i duapn&v kot ivtavrov. 
 
 d\\d is used in exhortations and entreaties where a negative 
 clause is suppressed: Horn. Jl. i. 32, dW I0i, M /*' ep^^'^e., 
 • begone. I pray you ;' 126, d\\d ai, ,.iv vvv rvvSe Oe^ 7rpo« 
 'but do you, I pray, at once give up:' Arnan, v. 26, oKKA 
 nrapaixeivare &vSpe<i: A, 10. 20, dXKddvaaTa<i Kara^d,: M. 9. 
 
 M, dXSM iKJdoiV iiride'i Tr,v X^'^pa- '^f*^ ^"^^ '^^'^^' . ., 
 
 In a series of questions involving distinct or opposite ideas: 
 M xi. 8, dWd ri Oiny^ere tB^lv; In introducing an objec- 
 tion, or series of objections : R. x. 16, dlOC ov irdpre^ {nrr,Kovaav 
 T« ^va^^\lv: so 18, 19: 1 C. 15. 35, dXK ^p« tk, Ilm 
 iyeipovra, ol ueKpol; In an exclusive sense, ' except : «•/• 12. 
 oiSk 'vdp h^ irapd dpOpdmov irapeKafiov avro, oxne eSi^ax(ft)v, 
 dXU &' diroKoKOfem 'Ii,«roi) XpL<rrov: M. 20. 23. to^ Se 
 KoBiaai. iK Se^mv fwv Kal i^ eiwvip^v ixov oi,K iartv epxtp Sovvai, 
 dW" oh riToCimarai viro rov irarpot pov. ^ 
 
 dXKd introduces a new and cumulative argument, 'sanb, 
 'imo:' J. 16. 2, diroawariwriov} irovnaovaiv vpMt, dW epxerai 
 &pa K.T.X.: Ja. 2. 18, aW ipel t»s- Sv iriarw ex«« «-t^" 
 « Nay, a man will rightly say.' t 10 ., 
 
 dWd augments and strengthens a previous idea: h. 1^. 7, 
 dWd KoX al Tpixet T% «6</)a\^s i>p£>v n&aai. rjpi0p.r,vTai : 
 A. 19. 2, d\\' ovSk el ■trvevfia 07161; iarw ^Kovaafiev : Dem. 
 1455. is.'Toii' p,h> ip^ip(ov -^^t^AioTwi/. dXX ovSk to p,iKpoTaTOV 
 dtpovritovaiv : 2 T. 2. 9, iv ^ KaKOTraOio iiixpt Beap&v «? 
 Zkovi^^o,, dX\d 6 \67o? ToO 0eov oi SeSerat,^ 'nevertheless, 
 the Word of God has not been and is not bound.' 
 
 dXKu confirms a preceding statement, 'yea:' 1 0. 3. 2, oi«ra. 
 ^ap ihvuaa0€, d\K' oiS' l« vvv Upaa0e: G. 4. 17, ^v^vaiv 
 
120 
 
 PARTICLES— aVX«i»?. 
 
 PARTICLES— a/)0. 
 
 121 
 
 v/iat ov koXm^ aWA iKicKeiaai vfUK OeXovaiv, ' hoc semper 
 tenendum est oppositione Grascis id cfficere, quod nos affirmatione 
 consequi studemus.' £lotz. This is especially the case after ov 
 fiovov: J. 5. 18, ov fiovov IXve to adfi^aTOv, aX\A xal iruTipa 
 ISiov i\eye top Seov. So J. 13. 9 : 1 J. 5. 6: M. 21. 21: 1 
 Th. 1. 8, oi) fiovov iv t§ MuKeSovl^ leal 'Ax^io, d\V ev iravrl 
 Tonw, K.r.X., 'posterior notio, ut gravior, in locum prions sub- 
 stituitur, priore non plane sublato.' 
 
 oKKd strengthens the inference after a hypothetical clause, 
 and may be rendered 'assuredly:' Mk. 14. -29, xal el irdvre<i 
 ffKavSaKtadTJaovrai, aW' ovk iyui : R. 6. 6, el yhp avfi^vroi 
 yeyova/tev r^ Ofioiti/tart rov davdrov ainov, dWh koI rrj^ ava- 
 ardaetoi ia6fie6a: 1 0. 4. 16, i^v yhp (ivplov<i vatBayaiyoini 
 l;^T« iv XpuTT^, dX)C oil ttoWow? iraripa^ : 1 0. 9. 2, £( aWotf 
 OVK elfii aTTcSoToXof, d\\d yt vfuv elfil: 2 0. 13. 4, Koi yap 
 iaravpwdri i^ aadevelat, dWei (^ ix Swdfteat 6eov. • Sometimes 
 a verb or clause may be supplied: Mk. 14. 49, dWA (rovro 
 yeyovev) iva •jrXijpaO&aiv ai ypcvpaL So J. 15. 25 ; 1. 8, oiiK 
 ^v €Kelvo<i TO ^wv, dW' («t? toOto ffKdev) Xva /laprvpijar) irepl rov 
 ^Moroi : 1 J. 2. 19, d\\d (ef ^p,&v i^Xdov) Xva ^avep(o6Staiv, on 
 OVK elffl TToinres e'f ^fi&v. Some would quote Mk. 9. 8 ; 10. 40, 
 but in these passages d\\d has the exclusive sense ' except.' 
 
 dKXd after a negation, followed by ^, may be rendered ' other 
 than,' though here it is the neuter aXXo, aWa, and not dWd : 
 L. 12. 51, SoKsire oti elprpn^v irapeyevo/iTjv hovvai iv ttj yfj ; 
 ov^, \eyto vp.lv, dW' ff Biafiepiafiov, no other than division : 
 2 G. 1. 13, ov yap a\\a ypd<^p.ev vfiiv, d\\' ^ h dvar/ivtoaKere. 
 So in 1 G. 3. 5, though some editors omit dX,X* ^. Xen. Anab. 
 iv. 6. 8, av^69 Si ovSafirj ^vXdTTOvrev r}lM<! tpavepoi elaiv, 
 dW' ^ Kard ravTifv rijv oSov: vii. 7. 31, dpyvpiov filv ovk evoi, 
 dXfC fj fUKpov T«, Kal Tovro aoi SiSa»/ii rakavrov : Hdt. ix. 209, 
 oiSeU dW f) ixelvi}, no other except she. 
 
 dWd is often joined with other particles, and in this combina- 
 tion has a special idiomatic value: dW o/xiu?, but still: dX\* 
 oiv, but at any rate : dWd fi^v, d\\d ftivroi, but surely : dWd 
 Tot, but yet : d\Xd S7, but now : dWd yap, but in point of fact : 
 dX\' ov p.riv, d\\' oi) fiivToi, followed by 7*, but at any rate not. 
 
 aX\<u«, otherwise than rightly, fruitlessly: 1 T. 6. 25, rd 
 dWaxi exovra Kpvfiijvai ov Bvvarai, tho works which are not 
 openly manifest, cannot remain concealed : Thucyd. i. 109, rd 
 Xpij^oTa oXXws dvoXowTo, otherwise than for any good, i, e. in 
 
 1 
 
 vain : aXXo)9 tc xal, both otherwise and so, i. e. especially above 
 all. 
 
 &fia, ' at the same time,' strengthens the participle in temporal 
 sentences, and often indicates emphatically an additional cir- 
 cumstance : A. 24. 26, apM Sk Kal iXiri^tov : 27. 40, a/ia dvivret 
 Ta?' ^evKTijptafi r&v 7rijSaX/a>i/: R. 3. 12, irdvrev i^eK\ivav, d/ia 
 ffXpeiMdfjaav: Philem. 22: 1 Th. 4. 17, fi/wt vvv auTOt? dpirayi)- 
 aofieda iv ve^XaK. Also without avv : M. 13. 29, firiirore <rvX- 
 Xiyovrei rd ^i^dvia iKpi^dtaiyre dfia avroi^ top avrov. Here apM 
 serves to unite very different actions : //. viii. 64, dp! olp^yiq re 
 Kal evxaX'^: Xen. Anab. iii. 1. 47, rrjv dyyeXia^ dpa {n)0eitrn<i 
 i^orfBow, as soon as the tidings came they rushed to g^ve help. 
 All instances of the adverb have the notion of time, though it 
 sometimes involves that ot place or quality. 
 
 dpa, ' still farther,' ' beyond that,' an iUative particle marking 
 a transition, or drawing a conclusion, 'therefore ;' sometimes as 
 in Homer it merely fixes attention on a word : //. i. 96, rovveic 
 dp dXrfe' eSuKev, 'just on this account:' 56, OTt pa 0vi]aKovra<{ 
 opdro, ' namely, because :' 93, oir' dp" o y evxo>Xi)<! i-irifie/tijierai,, 
 'neither to say the truth :' M. 18. 1, rk dpa fiei^av iariv iv rfj 
 ^aaiXefcf r&v ovpav&v ; Here rii conveys the interrogation, dpa 
 refers to a previous discourse on the subject : Mk. 9. 34 : H. 4. 
 9, dpa diroTi^lirerai aafifiariaiin r& Xaoi tov Qeov. Marking 
 oblique inference : A. 11. 18, dpa ye kcu toi? eOveaiv o 6 em rijv 
 fterdvoiav eSatKev ek ^toijv — . Denoting slight surprise, sudden 
 and unexpected inference : A. 21. 38, ovk dpa av el 6 Avfvimo^, 
 thou art not then as 1 supposed. In Epic usage dpa marks 
 immediate transition and actual connexion; in Attic usage it 
 has a regular illative force in direct conclusions and by way of 
 oblique inference. 
 
 Logical conclusion in the apodosis of hypothetical proposi- 
 tions : M. 12. 28, el hk eydt iv irvevpuTi Oeov iK^dXXm rd Sair 
 fiovM, dpa e<^aaev i^' vfuLt ^ fiaaiiXeCa rov Qeov : 1 G, 15. 14, 
 el Se XpiffTot OVK iy^eprai, xevov dpa ro K^pvyfia rip&v : H. 12. 
 8, £( Se ^o>p(f itrfk iraiSeuK, dpa v60oi i<rri : G. 6. II, dpa Kan^p- 
 ytfrai, to aKdvBaXov rov aravpov, if it be so then. " dpa habet 
 significationem levioris cujusdam ratiocinationis quae indicat 
 rebus ita comparatis aliquid ita aut esse aut fieri." Klotz. 
 
 The weaker ratiocinative force of dpa is sometimes supported 
 by the collective power of oSv : G. 6. 10, dpa olv . . . ipya^dtfieda 
 to dyadov wpoi irdvra^, accordingly then. 
 
122 
 
 PABTICLKS— 76. 
 
 ..FABTICLBS — yap. 
 
 123 
 
 el with apa marks a result about which some uncertainty is 
 felt s= * si forte : ' A. 7. 1, elire Si 6 aprjftepevf El apa ravra otn-CDf 
 e^ft ; Mk. 11. 13, JihJdev el apa evp^aei tI iv airy : A. 17. ?7, 
 ^tfretv TOP BeoVy el &pa ye i^Xaipiijaetap airrov : A. 8. 22, ieridi)Ti, 
 Tov Oeov, el apa cupeOi^aeTal ffoi t) enrlvoia ii\<i KapZiat <rov. 
 
 apa is also used as an interrogative, and is written dt,pa. 
 When ipa stands first in the sentence the stress is laid on the 
 verb, when it stands second the stress is laid on the interroga- 
 tive : (Ipa T(f ftvaerai ; will any one save ? t/v apa pvaerai ; who 
 is there to save ? L. 18. 8, ifKriv 6 vutt rov avdpunrov ekdatv S.pa 
 evpi^ffti T^i» irlarai M, Trft 71)? ; can we infer — P A. 8. 30, ''Apa 
 ye ylPuxTKeiv & iparfivataKei<! ; may we infer that thou under- 
 standestP expecting the answer in the negative: G^. 2. 17, el Bi 
 ^i}TovvTei- hiKauodrjpai ip Xpurr^, evped^ptep Koi axnoi dp,apT(o- 
 Xol, ipa Xpurroi dfiapriai Smkopo^ ; M^ yepovro. 
 
 In some of these instances apa occurs in combination with ye, 
 which is one of the particles employed to invigorate discourse, 
 to give strength and prominence to single ideas. Other par- 
 ticles of the same class are irep, Bq. ye repeatedly occurs pre- 
 ceding apa, and thus forms the compound yap. 
 
 The force of ye is to strengthen the idea of the word to which 
 it is attached. It is found in combination with other particles, 
 and is frequently joined to personal pronouns. Qenerally it is 
 used in rejoinders and answers, either to confirm or restrict, and 
 in exhortations to render them more impressive. In English 
 ye can only be rendered by laying an emphasis on the word to 
 which it is attached, but frequently it may be translated by 
 certainly, at least, now, yes, quite, very, surely. L. 11. 8, Xeyea 
 vpXv, el xal oil Baxrei avr^ apaareii SiA to elpai avrov ^iXop, Bui 
 ye apalSetap airrov iyepffel^ Sdaei avrm oaap XPV^^^- Here ye 
 heightens the contrast between the two grounds, friendship and 
 emergency; between the two acts, rising up and raised from 
 sleep: H. 8. 32, 5i ye rov iBlov vlov ovk e^telaaro, he surely 
 seeing that he spared not — ' quippe qui : ' 10. 4. 8, «ai o<f>eX6p ye 
 e^aaiXeiiaaTe, Xva km, "qfieK v(iiv arvp,fiaai\eva<opep, ye marks 
 strong satire, and I quite wish ye wore kings, that we too may 
 be kings jointly with you. 
 
 So also it is used with adverbs and conjunctions : p,evdvv ye, 
 /iijTi ye. Thus in L. 24. 21 it increases the tone of despondency : 
 ahXd ye avv iraai tovtqk, Tpinjp ravTifP TjfUpav ar/et at^fiepop^ 
 aj> oh ravra eyepero. * 
 
 ^ 
 
 rdp is regularly used in causal sentences, expressing the 
 force of 76, verily, combined with apa, there/ore, further, nearly 
 the same in signification as yovp (ye ovp) : yap signifies * the 
 fact is,' ' in fact,' ' as the case stands,' having a more extensive 
 meaning than the English for, since it expresses the cause, 
 reason, motive, principle, occasion, inducement, of what has 
 been previously afi&rmed or implied. 
 
 Explanatory of a preceding statement, 'namely,' 'to wit:' 
 M. 1. 18, iiprjaTeifdeurr)^ yap rqi fiiyrpov avrov, the yap refers to 
 the preceding ovran, which implies that there was something 
 extraordinary in the manner of Christ's birth : R. 2. 12, oaot 
 yap dvofutvi ^pMprov K.r.X,, in point of fact : Rev. 21. 25, Koi ol 
 irv\<i>i/e9 ain^ ov fiij KXeiadSxrai ^fiepai" pii^ yap oxik earat eKel. 
 The yap explains the reason why night is not mentioned in the 
 preceding clause. 
 
 Introductory of a reason for a statement or an inquiry : Mk. 
 5. 42, fjp yap erStp BdtBeKa: M. 15. 4, o yiip Qeoi ivereiKaro 
 yjyap : 24. 7:10. 15. 3, irapeBuKa yhp vp,ip ep rrpdnoi'} h k(A 
 trapeXafiop : J. 4. 41 : G. 6. 15 : Ja. 4. H, rroia yap if ^a>^ vpMP ; 
 drpX<i yap earip, k.t.X.., a vapour in fact it is. 
 
 To introduce the discussion of a proposition : 2 0. 12. l, nav- 
 j(jS,adai Sii ov avp^^epet pai' e^vaopMi, yetp elv orrraalav Kal diro- 
 xaXv^tf Kvplov : L. 12. 57, 58, rl Be Koi aif>' eavr&p ov Kplvere 
 TO BUaiop ; <of yap inrarfeK perd. rov optiBIkov aov err ap'xpvra, 
 K.r.\. 
 
 To recall attention to a thought already expressed : 1 Th. 2. 
 20, V/U6W yap iare ij So^a rjpMP «cal ^ X'^P^' J^^ — Y^ '^^^ *^® 
 glory we desire, ye the joy : R. 5. 7, fioXis yap xnrep Bixaiov Tt? 
 dvodapeirai' Inrep yct,p rov dyadou rdj(a Tt? Kal roX/i^ diroOapeip. 
 The yap after /uoXtf refers to iirip dve^&p diredape (6). The 
 second yap corrects the preceding thought in reference to 
 /x6Xt9 : R. 15. 27, evBoKrjaap yap, Kal oifteiXerai ain&v elatp, yes 
 they thought good, at the same time their debtors they are : 1 
 0. 9. 10, ff'Bi fiiMf TravToi? Xeyet ; St' fjpM<s yap eypaffyti, or for 
 our sakes in every sense does the law say it ? for our sakes, in 
 fact, it was written. Such is its force in answers; the apa 
 serves to sum up the premisses in which the assertion is made ; 
 the ye strengthens the assertion : J. 9. 30, ep ydp rovrtp Oavpua- 
 rop e<rri, k.t.\. : A. 16. 37, xal pvv \ddpa ■qpa^ eK^aXKovaip ; ov 
 yap, no indeed, as tUo case stands. 
 
124 
 
 Particles —^irou. 
 
 PAKT1CLE8— €t. 
 
 125 
 
 Introducing a parenthetical clause : 1 0. 9. 19, ikevdepo^ yhp 
 £>v ix irdvrmv iraaiv ifuwrbv iSovKatra, Xva tov$ ifKxlova^ 
 
 With an interrogative yap introduces a remonstrance : A. 19. 
 SSt'AvSpei 'E^eiTun, rit yap iartv avdpumo^ ; Ephesians (why 
 this disturbance) for what man — P M. 27. 23, t/ yap KaKov 
 hroir]<T€v ; (why this demand) for what evil did he P 9. s, tI yap 
 6otIi» evtconrdnepov; (why think ye evil) for in what respect is it 
 easier ? R. 3. 3, rl yap ; ei ffirl<rT7)aav rivet ; what conclusion 
 then do we draw, in case some disbelieved P J. 7. 41, /i^ yhp ix 
 T% Fa\(Xa/af 6 Xpitrrbt Spj(erai ; what I can we suppose the 
 Christ comes out of the Galilee-country P 
 
 £1^ is probably shortened from ^St;, and as the weaker form is 
 piut after one or more words in a sentence, it usually serves to 
 strengthen or limit the word to which it is attached. Sj 
 denotes the definiteness and certainty of an expression. We 
 find it with adverbs o{ place and time, to restrict their indefinite 
 sense to some certain point, like the English just, even, now, 
 only; with interrogative particles and hortatives for stronger 
 emphasis, but, then, well, nay ; for a sign of authenticity, 0/ a 
 truth, really, assuredly. Compare 76, irep : ireipdao/uii Bri xal 
 eym coi ovrutt eliretv, well — I also will attempt to speak to thee 
 thus: hel hri irpaorepov irtot airoKplveaOai, one must indeed 
 answer somewhat more mildly : rovro apa r& iKevOip^ irphrei 
 Kal Tfi SiKal^ S^, this then befits the free man, and certainly 
 the just : LXX Job 15. 17, & Bi) kdapaKa avar/yeku aoi : M. 13. 
 33, ht Bj) Kapvofpopei : L. 2. 1 6, BiiXOiop^v Bt) Itoi BrjOXee/i ; 2 C. 
 12. 1, Kavj(jaa0ai Sri ov a-ufupipei fioi, to boast assuredly is not 
 for my advantage. 
 
 Br/ indicates an act to be executed without delay : 1 C. 6. so, 
 Bo^daare B^ rbv Seov : A. 15. 36, eirurrpi'^avTet B^ erriaKei^^a- 
 fieda Tovv dSeX^ovt fffiMV : 13. 2, d^opiaare Bij fiot tov Bappdfiav 
 Kal TOV XavKop eh to epyov h irpoaKeKXrifun airovt. 
 
 Btjnrov is equivalent to 'opinor,' I wot and you allow, ^j; 
 with an assertion gives decision and confidence, vov univer- 
 saliises this decision and confidence, implies the success of an 
 universal appeal for the truth of what is said. (Alford.) B^qttov 
 does not occur in LXX. H. 2. 16, ov yap B^wov dyyiXuv evi- 
 Xap^dverai. B^Oev, 'as they said,' is used when the writer 
 states the declarations of other persons, and wishes to remind 
 
 '^ 
 
 •r 
 
 ) 
 
 ■ 5 
 
 the reader that he does not vouch for their sincerity, but merely 
 repeats what they themselves professed to be true. (Arnold, 
 Thucyd. i. 92.) 
 
 edv, el, in case—. (See on apa, and on Hypothetical Propo- 
 sitions, Chapter VII.) If and ei have in reality no connexion^ 
 el is used after verbs expressing mental emotion ; Mk. 15. 44, 
 idavfuurep el ^&) redmiKe : IJ. 3, 13, /in- 0eutpM^eTe dBeX^oi fiov 
 el fuaet vfiat o KOfffjuxi, in case the world hates you. 
 
 Thus we may explain the alleged use of el for etde : L. 12. 49, 
 a;oI Tt 0e\a) ; el ^Si; avrii^^er}, and what will I P in case it were 
 already kindled I should have my desire, el ia used with the 
 optative mood to express a wish, but with past tenses of the in- 
 dicative to express an impossible wish, ei introduces a statement 
 which is hardly credible: A. 26. 8, Tt atrurrov Kplverai irap 
 ipip el 6 Qeot peKpoiit eyelpei ; what ! is it past belief in your 
 judgment, in case we assert God raises the dead P 
 
 As an interrogative particle in a question implying some 
 doubt or uncertainty, an, ne : L. 22. 49, Kvpie, el irard^onep eV 
 p^xaipa ; in case we shall strike with the sword will it please 
 you ? 13. 23, Kvpie, ei oKlyoi oi iT(ii>^6p.epoi, tell us whether the 
 saved are few : A. 26. 23, Xeywi; . . . ei tto^ijtos 6 Xpiaroi, . ei 
 irp&Tot, K.T.\., discussing whether the Christ is to suffer, 
 whether first after rising from the dead he is to announce light 
 to the people and to the Gentiles. 
 
 Also where a negative reply is anticipated, num : Mk. 15. 44, 
 emipayrrjaap airrop el irdXai diridave. 
 
 In some cases, as in A. 26. 8. 23, ei may be considered as 
 equivalent to oti, especially in H. 7. 15, where on is in the 
 preceding verse : Kal vepicraoTepop ert xaTdBriXop eari, el kut^ 
 TTjP ofioiorriTa Me\j(^iaeBeK dpiaToaai iepevt erepot, and with 
 more abundant evidence still it is manifest, that according to 
 the similitude of Melchizedek there arises a priest of a different 
 line. Mr. Wratislaw refers to Plato as using el for on after 
 drfapaKTW, vvoTideadai, diroBeBei-xOat, BffSxtp : also after arianrdp, 
 auryypeadai., and in Hdt. i. 24, after elaeXBeip rjSovTJp. 
 
 In oaths and solemn assertions there is an ellipsis of a clause, 
 ' non vivam,' giving to ei the force of a negative : I stake my 
 ejrtstence upon the truth of what I say. The fuU form is found 
 in LXX, Ezek. 14. 16, fw eyco, ei viol ^ dvyarepet o-wfljjffovrot : 
 Mk. 8. 12, dp.i)v \ey<o v/up {ov TrtoTO? elfu) el BodiqaeTai, rp 7ei;e^ 
 ravrfi aijp^top (in case) : 11. 3. ll, ws wnoaa ep ry opy^ (utv {ovk 
 
126 
 
 PARTICLES — hrei, iiretSi^. 
 
 PARTICLES - 
 
 -ij, iiSti. 
 
 127 
 
 iariv oKrideia iv i/tol), el eureXevaovrai eh rifv KOTairavaiv 
 (tov. 
 
 el with rk loses its hypothetical force, like ' si quis,' in case 
 any, whosoever, whatever : L. 14. 26, et tk 0i\et : Mk. 4. 23, 
 et Tis ^e* &Ta axoveiv : Ph. 4. 8, et rii aperri : 1 0. 3. 14, eX 
 rivoi TO efiyov fiepel : H. 13. 9, et Tt? iripa iinoKij, whatever dif- 
 ferent precept there is. 
 
 el with /it) introduces an incredihle or untenable hypothesis : 
 2 0. 3. 1, «( nil xp^tjojuev is tw^s avaraTiK&p iiruTToKStv : 13. 6, 
 et {ixfTt aZoKifiol iare. 
 
 Hence we may explain the alleged use of el fii^ for aWd : L. 
 4. 26, irpo9 oiSefilap airr&v hrift^Ofi 'Hkiat, el /lii eli "Sapeirra Try: 
 XiZ&im irpo^ yvvaiKa "X^pav : where by el p.^ our Lord rejects 
 the hypothesis, that they would bring forward this case as an 
 exception to his remark : G. 1. 7, o ovk lariv SKKo- el p.ri rivh 
 elaivol rapdaffovre^ «.T.X.,you caimot apply the name of Gospel 
 to the teaching of such men: G. 2. 16, oi SiKatoDrai apOpavov 
 i^ Ipyup 'v6p,ov, iei,p p,)/ Su>, irlarea^ 'Irjffov Xpurrov. Here we 
 may translate eAp p,ij literally and simply, ' in case he is not 
 justified.' 2 Th. 2. 3, 8ti ehp p,^ e\0y ^ airoaraala irp&Top, 
 seeing that (the day will not arrive at all) in case there come 
 not the falling away first. 
 
 eZra is connected with et, as relative to antecedent, marking 
 succession of time, then, next, Lat. deinde ; succession of thought, 
 accordingly, Lat. ita, itaque. Closely connected is eiretra, the 
 relative of iirel, marking the sequence of one thing from 
 another, tftereupon, immediately nfterwardt: L. 16. 7, Sirena 
 erip^ elire. 
 
 elra strengthens a concessive sentence, and introduces a 
 further consideration : H. 12. 9, eha roin p.kp t^9 aapKht ^p&p 
 etj(ppep iratSeirrdv. 
 
 •iirel, iireiSij are causal particles, since, since if so, otherwise, 
 since if otherwise : M. 21. 46, iireiSi) (u$ irpo<f>ijTf}P avrop el^op : 
 18. 32, iraaap ttip 6<l>et\^p iKelprjP- a<j»fiKd act, iirel irapeKaKetrdf 
 pe : H. 4. 6, iirel oSp diroXehrerai ... at the beginning of the 
 protasis ; the apodosis to which commences (9) with apa : H. 
 9. 17, ZuxBr/icri yeip iirl pexpoii fie^ala, iirel p,ij iroTe l<ry(yei ore 
 Q 6 htaOipeptK, an arrangement by will is valid when men are 
 dead, otherwise we can never conceive of its having force when 
 he who disposed of the property continues alive : H. 10. 2, iirel 
 OVK &p iiravaavro irpoa^epop-ePM ; since if otherwise (if these 
 
 i 
 
 sacrifices could have rendered complete the drawers-mgh), 
 would they not have ceased in being offered P 
 
 R. 3. 6, M fivoiTo- iirel irm Kpipel 6 eeoi top Koapop; far • 
 be the thought ; for if so, if there be any force in such an 
 objection, how shall God judge the world? Dr. Vaughan weU 
 remarks : " Thus intellectual difficulties in reUgion are best met 
 by moral axioms. It may sound pkusible to say, 'If man's 
 sin contributes ultimately to God's justification, God cannot 
 justly punish it.' But conscience, ever a safer guide than the 
 inteUect, echoes the language of revelation, which declares 
 the coming judgment; and that judgment presupposes that 
 sin can be, and wiU be, justly punished. Let this suffice 
 us. So also in R. 9. 18. The method of Scripture is to state 
 each of two apparently conflicting principles (e. g., God's 
 grace, and man's responsibility) singly and separately, and 
 leave conscience, rather than intellect, to reconcile and adjust 
 
 them." 
 
 ri, a disjunctive particle, ' either— or,' like ' vel,' aiid a com- 
 
 parative, like ' quam.* ^ _ 
 
 • In the disjunctive sense, rj is sometimes united with roi : R. 
 6. 16, SoOXot iare & vtraKovere, ffroi apMfyruKi eU Oaparop, ^ 
 inraicoff} eh ZiKaioawrfv ; 
 
 The positive adjective with ^ (quam) is equivalent to the 
 comparative : M. 18. 8, koKop aoi eorli; elaeKdeiP ek Tr)p fo»^i» 
 X<o\op <) KoWop, ^ Bvo X6V«? exopra pKr)6^vai ek to irvp to 
 aldptop. 
 
 ^ is used after aXKoi, Ire/Jo?, ' alius— ao :' A. 17. 21, 'AdTjpalot 
 ek ovSep erepop evKaipow, i) \&yeip tI kuI dicoveiv Kaiporepop. 
 
 ^, truly, verily, is used to strengthen or confirm an assertion 
 in close combination with other vocables. 
 
 fj p.r)p, the usual intensive form of oaths: H. 6. 14, ^ p.r]P 
 evXoy&p evXoy^av «re: -^sch. Theb. 6p,pvaip rj pUfP Xaird^etp 
 darv. 
 
 ■ rj&ti, now, already, a temporal particle, marks an action as 
 completed in time past aaA. present : M. 3. lo, ^&j Bi koI ^ d^lpri 
 wpos T^i» pl^p r&p BepBpuv Kelrat : Mk. 8. 2, ^&j -fipApa^ rpei^ 
 irpotrpipoval pot : J. 3. 18, 6 p.ii irunevmp ffiv) KiKpirai. 
 
 Also of the immediate future, presently, soon : R. 1. lo, efjrft)? 
 
 * fjSi) TTOT^ euoS«a^^o-o/Mit. »}8»/ in its primary sense has a local 
 relation, what is near to this place : Hdt. iii. 5, airb Taxnyt ^Sij 
 A1rtvirTO<i, directly after this is Egypt. Hence what is near 
 
128 
 
 PARTICLES — Hva, Sirat. 
 
 to tbe present time, calling attention to what is taking place on 
 the spot, and at the moment : Aristoph. Rana 527, ov rax', 
 aXV ^Srj voui. Both place and time are combined in Mk. 8. 2, 
 fjSri ^/Jiipa<; Tpei<i trpoafievoval /tot : 2 T. 4. 6, iym yilp ijBr) 
 inrivSo/iM. 
 
 tva and Sttoo; are final particles, indicating purpose, ' to the 
 end that,' ' in order that.' They also mark the event or result 
 of an action, that in vrhich the action- terminates, so that. In 
 these cases the final sentence approximates to the illative. 
 The eventual conclusion is so prominently contemplated, aa to 
 obscure the notion of finality. These senses are termed re- 
 spectively the telus and ecbatio. There is also a third sense, 
 partially final, marking the purport of prayer, in which the 
 telio and ecbatio are combined. The telio is the original sense, 
 the other meanings arise from the context. 
 
 The object or end designed : J. 5. 34, ravra X,l76> Jva v/iei<i 
 aaOrjre: Mk. 3. 14, iiroirfa-e SdSeKa tva &ai /xer airrov: M. 6. 16, 
 a^avl^ov(Ti, rk irpoawira avr&v ^Troif ^av&tri to(( avdpdnroi^ 
 ifri<TTevovTe<i : A. 20. 16, expive fap 6 IlavXov TrapairXevaai rijv 
 'E^eaov oirax; /li) yevt/TM avT& ■xpovorpi^riaM ev rp 'Atria : R. ' 
 6. 20, vofio^ he TTapeKrfjXOev tva irXeovdari to irapdirrapM, now 
 law comes in by the way for a special purpose — that the trans- 
 gression may be more clearly displayed. 2 0. 4. 7, Ix^f*^" ^^ 
 Tov Offaavpov tovtov iv oarpaKivoK (TKeveaiv, Xva jf {nrepfioXfi 7^9 
 iwdfieuti jj ToO Beov, ' in order that,' marking God's provi- 
 dential design. Cf. 1 0. 1. 15; Philem. (13) : 1 J. 1. 9, ttjotos 
 cart Koi ZUauyt Xva a<f>y ■^filv t^$ afiaprlai. He is faithful and 
 just, in order to forgive us our sins. The divine attributes of 
 faithfulness and righteousness are exercised in order to our 
 pardon. God is able to treat sinners as righteous without any 
 impeachment of His own righteousness. In fulfilling the pro- 
 mises of forgiveness through Christ, He establishes His own 
 faithfulness. G. 5. 1 7, ravra Se aXk^Xon avriKeiTai, tva fifi & &v 
 OeXtfre ravra irot^re: here the telio force of tva is to be re- 
 tained, ' tending to prevent you doing.' There are two op- 
 posing principles. The ultimate end of either principle is to 
 prevent man executing what the other principle woidd lead 
 him to. " To nvev/ia impedit vos quo minus perficiatis rci'rij<i 
 aapKo<;, contra 17 aap^ adversatur vobis ubi ri, rov Ilvevfjiaroi 
 peragere studetis." Winer. 
 
 There are three instances in which tva occurs in a tclic sense 
 
 PASTICLBS — ft/o, Siroi. 
 
 129 
 
 ' 
 
 m 
 
 with verbs of the indicative mood : 0. 4. 17, tva aMiv rrXMipoii : 
 G. 4. 17, tva avToix; ^f}XovTe : 1 0. 4. 6, tva p,^ eti inrkp evm 
 (pviTiovade Karh rov erepov. But these forms may be considered 
 subjunctive, as all these verbs end in -oto. " The subjunctive 
 and optative were both formed by lengthening the vowel of the 
 indicative. Where that lengthening had already taken place, 
 the Greeks remained content with it, and employed the one 
 inflexion for the double purpose. So ri/ioffde stands both for 
 the indicative and the subjunctive." (Q. R. Jan. 1863.) This 
 will explain 1 Th. 4. 13, where many read tva fitj \vireur0e. In 
 Tit. 2. 4, Scholz reads tva ffto^popi^atri. , < « 
 
 In G. 2. 4, the indicative future is probably the correct 
 reading, Karaa-Kornjaai rifv iKevOeplav ^fi&v . . .'tva ^/ia<i 
 tcaraSovXdxrovaw : the future conveys the idea of duration more 
 distinctly than would have been done by the aorist. An ecbatio 
 or eventual sense may here be given to tva, 'in which case, 
 ' under these circumstances,' analogous to the use of tva by 
 classical writers as an adverb marking place, circumstance: 
 tva 7%, ubi terrarum : Soph. Aj'ax 386, ov^ opf^ tv eZ imkov ; 
 seest thou not in what a depth of woe thou art? So oirov, 
 which is properly an adverb of place, is also used as an illative 
 particle. 
 
 It is not easy to state the exact difference between Sttox and 
 tva in this usage. It may be that the relatival compound ^Trcof 
 involves reference to manner, while tva retains some tinge of its 
 primary reference to locality. "The real practical differences 
 are that ottox has often more of an eventual aspect, and is used 
 with the future, and occasionally associated with av — both 
 which constructions are inadmissible with the final tva." 
 (Ellicott, 2 Th. 1. 12.) Sirt»<i is not only a final conjunction, 
 denoting end or purpose, but is also a simple conjunction, cor- 
 relative to iron, denoting the way or manner. In Latin, ut is 
 used reXiKon and iK^ariKw, both to express a design and 
 result. Tbe later Greek writers frequently violated the dis- 
 tinction between tva and &<Tre from confusion of thought. Dr. 
 Arnold well remarks (Thuc. i. 72) : " opare OTroif is ' videte qua 
 ratione,' and in this sense the indicative future is more usual 
 and more reasonable than the subjunctive aorist. The alleged 
 differences between the future and aorist are so fine that com- 
 mon language cannot be expected always to distinguish be- 
 tween them ; nor can wo say with confidence which of the twq 
 
 K 
 
130 
 
 PARTICLES — iva, OirOK. 
 
 the context most reqaires, even if we could be 8ure that the 
 author was aware of the distinction and meant to observe it." 
 
 The following are generally referred to the ecbatio or even- 
 tual sense, as marking the event, result, consequence : M. 1. 22, 
 TOVTo Bi S\ov r^irfovev Xva ir\i)p<o0y to fnjdev k.t.X. : Mk. 11. 28, 
 t/s <rot T^i' i^ovaiav towtijv SStoKep %va ravra wotp? ; J. 5. 20, 
 Hei^ova Tovrap iei^n a\n^ ^p7a, ha vfieU 0ai»/*a?ijTe : L. 16. 26, 
 Xo<ri*a It-^a iirrilipucTai ottws oi 0i\ovTe<: hia^fjvai ivrevOev vpb<{ 
 vfM<i fii) Bvvtovrai, : A. 3. 19, fUTavoriaa-re oiv Koi hrurrph^are 
 eh TO i^dkei^ijvM vpAv t^s afiapTtai, otto)? &p eXdaai xaipol 
 dra^v^eoK. In L. .16. 26, &irm may have the telio sense, ' in 
 order that.' In A. 8. 19, iiraxi in the eventual sense may be 
 rendered, 'with the effect that,* 'so that this being the case.' 
 But it will he better to connect /terai/oijo-aTe" with «« to 
 i^aKeK^dfjvai «.t.X., and hrurrphyure with ottw? hv eXBoxri, * in 
 order that.' Thus the force of av will be to mark that the 
 further spiritual blessings implied in KaipoX dva^vfeo)? are con- 
 tingent on the reality of the change denoted by /jLeravoetv and 
 iirtarpi^eiv. M, 2. 15, tpa ifKripady to pifBh . , . i^ Alyxnrrov 
 eKoKeaa rov viop futv. The passage in Hosea (11. l) refers 
 historically to the deliverance of Israel from the land of bond- 
 age. But from the typical connexion between Christ and 
 Israel, the record of the past was regarded as prophetically 
 indicative of something under the Gospel. "The Scripture 
 fulfilled was prophetical simply because the circumstance it — 
 recorded was typical." (Fairbaim's Typology, i. 140.) — 
 
 Xpa and Sttju? combine the telio and ecbatio sense when they 
 describe the subject and object of prayer : 2 Th. 1. ii, irpoaev- 
 •)^yxQa •navTvte trepX vfMP ha w/*a? a^uaat) rijv «Xij«r6«w o Bebi 
 ripMP: E. 1. 16, 17, upelav vfi&p irotov/iepoi iirl tAv vpoaevx&P 
 fiov, ha 6 Oeo<t . . . St^ vfiip wevfia ao^iaf Ka\ diroKaXvy^em : 
 M. 9. 38, Se^0rp-e otip rov Kvplov rov Beptafiov ovax; eK^aXri 
 ifyyarai e« toi» Oepiafiov ainov. ha marks the subject of the 
 prayer blended with the purpose of making it in Mk, 5. I8 ; 
 7. 26 ; 8. 22 ; 14. 35 ; L. 8. 31 ; 1 C. 1. lo ; 16. 12 ; 2 0. 9. 5 ; 
 Ph. 1. 9. So 5^0)9, A. 25. 3, irapeKoKow avrop . . . oirm 
 lieTairiufvrai. ainop. But in 2 Th. 1. 12, oirwv ivio^dadri rh 
 opofia K.T.X., in order that the name may be glorified. 
 
 After verbs of telling, commanding, ha is used in the New , 
 Testament where one might expect oTt, ware : M. 4. 3, eM ha 
 01 Xitfot ovToi, &pToi rflvavrai : 8. 8, ovk el/ii waws &/« /tow inr6 
 
 THE EXTERNAL CONNEXION OF PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 131 
 
 T^v oTefqp eureXdjii : L. 1. 43, irSBep /tot tovto, ha eXdji fi ii^rqp 
 rov Kvpiov irp6<i fie : J. 2. 26, oi j^peiav el)(ev, ha riv ftaprvpija^ 
 irepl rov avOpumov. 
 
 Sometimes the principal verb is omitted : E. 5. 33, f) hi yvpi) 
 iva <l>o^r}rai rop avBpa, I command that, or, let the wife see 
 that — . Sometimes ha is simply exegetical: J. 17. 3, aCni 
 Se iarip ff aUopio^ ftoi), ha yipoMrKaai ae. 
 
 The notion of finality seems lost in the eventual sense in 
 1 Th. 6. 4, 6vK iark ip <rK6ret, Xpa^ 1} ^fiipa vfiav an xXen-n;? 
 KarcCKd^ri: J, 12. 23, ikijjKvdep 17 &pa ha So^aad^ 6 vio<t rod 
 apOpamov: 16. 2, dXX' epy(erai &pa ha rra^ o airoKreipat vfia^ 
 S6^ \arpelap irpoa^peip tcS Oe^. 
 
 Some, however, would retain the telic force of ha in the 
 foregoing passages. Thus 1 Th. 5. 4, may be explained, 'Te 
 are not in the element or region of darkness— darkness, not 
 only of the mind and understanding (E. 4. is), but of the heart 
 and will (1 J. 2. 9), in order that the day should surprise you 
 as a thief.' Thus the passage is not merely a statement of 
 result, but of the purpose contemplated by God in His merciful 
 dispensation, implied in ovk iark ip o-xoTct. 
 
 THE EXTERNAL CONNEXION OF PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 Among the particles which are employed for the external 
 connexion of propositions Kai and re imite, while fiev, Se oppose 
 the parts one to another. ' 
 
 In the union of the members of a proposition, either several 
 subjects are assigned as belonging to certain predicates, or 
 several predicates are enumerated as belonging to one subject. 
 
 The distinction between the copulatives Kai and the enclitic 
 Te is not clearly marked. But it may be said that Kai unites 
 ideas which follow directly and necessarily from what precedes, 
 while Te annexes something which does not thus directly and 
 necessarily follow. " Kai conjungit, re adnectit. t£ non copulat 
 sed lenius affirmat quam to», unde natum est." (Herm.) 
 
 Practically there is no great difference between them, Kai and 
 re singly indicate mere addition ; Te kuI join the two statements 
 or objects so closely together that they may almost be con- 
 sidered as one. The first clause with tc is often less emphatic 
 than that which has Kai. Thus we have rd Te aXKa kuI — , 
 dXXo>f Te Kai — , as well in matters not worth mentioning, as Sfo. 
 
 The usages of Kai combine the usages of et, etiam in Latin. 
 
 K 2 
 
132 
 
 COPULATIVES — KuL 
 
 Adjunctive : Mk. 1, 4, fia7rrl^<o»v iv -ry ipi^fi^ «al KT^pwraav : E. 
 1. 21, imepdva rrcunyi apj^, k. i^ovolai, k. Svvdfiem k. Kvpto- 
 •njTo?, Koi TraiTO? 6v6(iaTo<i, ' and indeed,' ' and in a word,' where 
 a general term is appended to foregoing details. 
 
 Consecutive : M. 15. 6, «ol ^Kvpioaare Tr]v ivroXijv rov Oeov 
 Bui ri)v irapdSoaiv vpMV, ' and so,' ' and then :' M. 23. 32 : L. 6. 
 37 ; 18. 26 : 2 Th. 2. 3, kuI diroKa\vif>0p o avBpomot -rij? a/jLaprlai. 
 Epexegetic, explanatory of a previous word or clause : L. 3. 
 20, irpoviOriKe koX toOto ^l 7ro<r», #coi KareKKeicre top ^ItoAmniv h> 
 t5 <f>v\aK^ : 1 T, 2. 4, 8? iravras avdpuyirow BkXei, <ra0rjvM xal 
 e« hriyvtixTip oKriOetai tKdeiv : G. 2. 20, rov aiyairi^aatn6^ /*e ical 
 vapaZ6vTo<i iavrhv tnrip i/iov, and as a proof of love: 1 0. 8. 12, 
 oSto) Si anaprdvovret ek tov9 d£eX^v9, Kal rvTrtowref ain&v 
 TTiu <rwe£^<Tiv aadevovffav. In 1 T. 3. 7, tva fii) ew ii»«Stir/*oi» 
 iffireaji, xai trarylSa rod SiafioKov, Kal is adjunctive rather than 
 epexegetic, marking the temptations that will be sure to follow 
 the loss of character, ".quid spei restat ubi nullus est peccandi 
 pudorP" Calvin. 
 
 Adversative, marking comparison or contrast, used in ex- 
 pressions of similarity and identity, ac, atque : Thuc. ii. 60, 6 
 71/ows Koi p.r) <ra<l>&<: SiSd^a<: iv tatp Kal el /it) ipeffufii^Oij, he who 
 knows, supposing he gives no clear information, is in the same 
 position as if he never had the thought: M. 11. 19, ISov 
 reXuv&v <^/Xo« Kal'aftaprtiK&v Kal iSncauaffri ^ aoiftla airo r&v 
 riKvav ainfi<! : R. 1. 13, TToWaw? irpoi0ip.i}v ekdeip irpoi vfta<i, 
 Kai. iKa>\v07)p axpi rov Sevpo. In 1 C. 12. 4—6 Kal, Se are used 
 alternatively : 1 Th. 2. 18, SA ■fiBt\qaap.ev iKBup irpoi vpSst . . . 
 Kal eptKoy^ep ^fia<; 6 SaTapa<i : 2 Th. 3. 14, 15, M <rvpapafip)fpva0e 
 airr^ tva ivrparr^ Kal /i^ m ix^pov fnwx06. 
 
 Denoting emphasis: Eurip. Hippol. 1171, irm Kal SuiXer 
 elwi ; say, how did he die P Thucyd. ii. 87, ■^v Si t« apa Kal 
 PovKnOV' hwt if aiiy one should choose to behave so ; where Dr. 
 Arnold' remarks : " The force of the Kal here, and in other 
 similar passages, is given in English by an emphasis on the 
 auxiliary verb." 2 C. 3. 6, 8? Kal Udvaaev fipMt SiaKOPovi 
 Kaipfii Sia0^Kri<i, who did qualify us to be ministers of the 
 new covenant: G. 6. l, iap Kal 'irpo\t)<f>0^ ap0puvo<: ip Ttvl 
 vapairrdtfiaTi, if ever a man be surprised in any transgression. 
 
 Adverbial of time : Mk. 15. 25, ^p Be &pa T/OiVij Kal iaravpa- 
 cap aiirop : L. 7. 12, «? Si i^iae tJ irvKy t^ ttoX^ow, Kal ISov 
 i^eKOfil^ero reOprjKdk : A. 22, 22, t^kovov Si ainov axpi toxnov toO 
 
 COPULATIVES — Kai — fKV. 
 
 133 
 
 X070U KcH eTrfipav t^v ^vf/v air&p : 1 T. 4. 10, Kal KOTrutfiep 
 Kal op€i£i^fie0a, we both labour and are the objects of reproach, 
 ' as well the one as the other ; ' both parts are simultaneously 
 presented in one predication; re—Kal would mean, 'where 
 shame, there toil.' 
 
 Kal is inserted in Greek after iroXvf , which is considered as a 
 substantival word : ttoXX^ xal Seivd, many fearful events : Tit. 
 1. 10, iroXXol Kal dwiroraKToi /lOTaioXoyoi, many unruly vain- 
 talkers : A. 25. 7, TToW^ Kal fiapia alrid/uiTa tftipovrei, bringing 
 many heavy charges. 
 
 dXKd, Si, re, are often mere notices that the speaker had 
 something else to say, some additional fact or thought to com- 
 municate. On this principle Se, re are sometimes used in the 
 apodosis of a sentence, and are equivalent to elra. But with 
 reference to these subtle uses Dr. Arnold has well remarked 
 (Thuc. i. 133) : " The errors of etymology committed by very 
 eminent men in past times from a want of sufficient knowledge 
 should make us suspect that we too may fall into the same 
 snare, if while we are really making progress we overrate that 
 progress as compared with what remains to be accomplished, 
 and think that the very sanctuary of the mysteries of language 
 is already on the point of being opened to us. I cannot think 
 that we are yet in a condition to understand the process by 
 which language was formed, if indeed it ever was formed and 
 not rather given, and to explain the nature of its very simplest 
 elements. And I am quite certain that what has hitherto been 
 attempted in this way, although as all such attempts do, it 
 contains in it much that is valuable, and will aid our further 
 researches, has yet failed of attaining its object." Though this 
 was written twenty-four years ago with reference to some long 
 dissertations on the particle re in the New Cratylus, the above 
 remarks supply a caution applicable to the labours of all 
 '' modem philologists. 
 
 Opposition between the different members of a proposition is 
 marked by nip, the first thing (the old neuter of fitK, /ila, /*ip), 
 and Si a short form of Svo, the second thing, 
 
 flip is generally followed by Se when a mutual relation 
 between two propositions is indicated: M. 3, 11, iyo> p,iv /8air- 
 rl^to K.r.\. Si imlam fiov ep)(0fi£P09. Frequently there is no 
 corresponding Se, as in A, 1. 1, or the adversative sentence may 
 be mentally supplied : A. 19. 4 ; 26. 4 : B. l.'s. Instead of Si 
 
134 
 
 AtJVERSATIVBS— /t^j Si. 
 
 an equivalent particle is (sometime^ used aft^r fUv. Thus xal, 
 L. 8. 6 : re, A. 13. 4 : eiretra, Ja. 3. 17* 
 
 When ftiv stands by itself without any corresponding Si, the 
 latter or some equivalent is virtually implied, and /Up looks 
 forward to the completion of the sentence, just as oip looks back 
 to what has been already said. 
 
 Si is adversative: 1 G. 11. 17: B. 6. 17, is. In some cases it 
 is simply transitional, marking the introduction of a fresh 
 subject, 1 0. 8. 1 : in other cases it is resumptive, 2 0. 6. i : 
 and in negative sentences has the conjunctive force which 
 attaches to xal in affirmative sentences. 
 
 If the firat clause is intended to prepare the reader for the 
 opposition in the second, fiiv is inserted, but /liv is omitted 
 where the first clause is not necessarily connected with a sub- 
 sequent : E. 6. 8, ^6 yap irore o-zkoto;, vvp SI <f>&i iv Kvpiqt ; B. 
 6. 17, xdpi^ Si T^ Oe^, art ffre Sovkoi rffs d/iapriw imificovaare 
 Si ex KupSuKi K.r.\., whereas ye were once servants of ain, yet 
 now ye obey from the heart: where {nrrfKOvaare (aorist) 
 denotes a single act which transpired once for all at the time 
 of conversion. 
 
 The formula Koi — Si is like the Latin 'et — vero,' 'et— autem :' 
 1 T. 3. 10, KM otrroi Si SoKifui^iadaaav . . .: 2 T. 3. 12, 
 Kol irairre? Si oi OiKovrev, x.t.X. : A. 3. 24, Kai iravrev Si oi 
 irpo^rJTM: B. 11. 23, KaKehoi Si. While each particle retains 
 its proper force, both together often have 'notionis quandam 
 consociationem.' Thus while xal connects or enhances, and Se 
 contrasts, the union of the two frequently causes Si to revert 
 from its more marked to its primary and less marked oppoeitive 
 force, ' in the second place,' so that the whole formula has more 
 of an ac[/'unctive character, and only retains enough of a re- 
 trospective opposition to define more sharply, expand, or 
 strengthen, the tenor of the preceding words. ' /cat conjungit, 
 Se intendit.' The true rationale of the construction is best seen 
 when flip is found in the preceding clause, as in A. 3. 22, fol- 
 lowed by Kal irdvTt^ Si (24). The formula may be translated 
 and — also, and — too. The form repeatedly occurs, especially in 
 St. Luke and St. John. In L. 10. 8 the true reading is xal ek 
 fjv 8' &p iroKip: J. 6. si, xal apToi Si. (EUicott on 1 T. 3. 10.) 
 1 T. 6. 8, exoprev Si Starpo^av teal <rKerrdafiara rovroi<i dpKeadf)- 
 aofitSa. In the preceding verse the Apostle said, ' we brought 
 nothing into the world, &o./ the Si points to a suppressed 
 
 PARTICLES— mt. 
 
 135 
 
 thought which is suggested by ovSi i^eveyKetp rt Svpdfieda, viz., 
 it is true that we must have something while we are in this 
 world, but {f we have, Ix""^^ ^^ k.t.\. Thus the adversative 
 force of the particle is preserved, ' aliquid in mente habet ad 
 quod respiciens oppositionem infert.' (Klotz.) Tit. 1. 1, SovXoi 
 Oeov dTTocrroKoi Si 'Ir/ffov JCpurrov, and further an apostle, more 
 exact definition. Si distinguishes and specifies the subject by 
 the action of another relation in which it stood to another 
 genitive : 2 Tim. 2. e, cAv Si koI affKg 719, Si introduces a new 
 image in the second place, xal consecutive pointing to the 
 previous image of the soldier. 
 
 elwep, ' in case that,' ' if indeed,' ' if at all,' assimiing the pro- 
 position as true, whether justly or not. veplike ye is an enclitic 
 intimately allied to ye in signification, denoting comprehension 
 or inclusion, trep frequently is combined with relative pronouns, 
 with temporal, causal, and conditional particles, to confirm their 
 signification. Like ye it imparts emphasis, and may be rendered 
 by very, even; with a participle it may be rendered although: 
 \iyei airep Xiyei SiKata irdpra, he says all whatever he does say 
 justly : /tijTC ail topS' iyado^ irep ii»p diroaipeo leovprjp, neither 
 do thou, however brave thou art, take away the damsel from 
 this one: evBiiv vopeverat irpo^ top Kvpop ^irep eij(ep, imme- 
 diately he proceeds to Cyrus just as he was : B. 8. 9, etvep 
 irpev/ut Oeov olKel ip vfup : 1 0. 8. 6, xal yetp etirep elai \ey6- 
 (upoi deoi: 15. 15, etirep apa pexpoi-ovK iyelpoprai: 1 P. 2. 3, 
 elirep iyev<ra<rOe on ;^/Mj<fTos o Kvpto^. etye, ' si quidem,' must 
 not be confounded with etirep, *si omnino.' " etirep usurpatur de re 
 qu8B esse sumitur " (Hermann) : 2 Th. 1. 6, etirep SUaiop, regards 
 as an assumption what is really felt to bo a certain and recog- 
 nized verity. Kaiirep, concessive, is often followed by a participle, 
 although : H, 7. 6, roix; dSeXiftovi airr&p Kaiirep i^eXtiXvdoTo^ ix 
 T^s oa^vot 'Afipadu: 5. 8: 12. 17, ixerapoUvt yap rvirop oix 
 eipe Kaiirep fieri, SoKpviop iK^tfrvaav avrny: 2 P. 1. 12, Kaiirep 
 elSoraf. See Ph. 3. 4. Kaddirep, 'even as,' 'just as,' where KoOd 
 marks the comparison, irep the extent of the application : 1 Th. 
 2. II, Kaddirep oiSare: H. 4. 2; 5. 4. 
 
 pai, ' yes,' is used in affirmations or affirmative answers : M. 9. 
 28, irurreiere oti Suvaftat toOto iroirjaai ; Xiyovtrip ain^ Nat, 
 Kupie : L. 7. 26, pal, "Keya vfiip kuI irepuraorepop irpo^r^rov : Bev. 
 22. 20, val, epxofiai rayy (yai, epxpv, Kvpie). 
 
 With the article to, pal, the word 'yea :' 2 C. 1. 17, ipa y irap 
 ifUil TO pal, pal- xal to ov, oi. 
 
136 
 
 TEMPORAL FARTICLES— oral*. 
 
 vvv, vw &7, vwi, ' now/ a particle of time ; the enclitic form vw 
 is a particle of inference. 
 
 Spoken of the actual present : J. 13. 27, vw ^ "^vyri ftov rerd- 
 paKTM. Of time just past : A. 7. 62, (tov SiKalov) oi vw ift€i<i 
 irpoiorai KaX <f>opel<i yeyhn!)ade. Of time future, 'just at hand,* 
 'even now,' 'presently:* J. 12. 31, vtw o apxf^v toS kov/xov 
 tovTou iicpKriBri<TeTai l^o). 
 
 As a particle of transition marking a conclusion or inference, 
 like vw enclitic in earlier Qreek, 'now then:' A. 12. ii, vvv 
 oiZa aKridSxi : 22. 16, Koi vw rl i*i)iKen ; 
 
 Enforcing an exhortation : Ja. 6. I, Sye vvv oi irXowrtoi : A. 7. 
 34, Koi vvv Sevpo aTroaTeXa at ait Atr/mrrov. 
 
 Bfuoi, 'at the same time,' 'nevertheless,' strengthens a con- 
 cessive sentence : G. 3> 16, 5fUi9 avdpanrov KeKvpapAinpf hiaSriieiiv 
 ovieXt dfferei. 
 
 ofuin, ' equally,' ' in like manner,' is a synonym of ifiouot : 1 
 0. 14. 7, opM^ rh ayfrv}(a tfxovriv SiSovra : J. 12. 42, OfiSn fUv rot 
 Kol ix T&v ap-}(pvTav iroKkoX inrlaTewav e(9 ainov. 
 
 oTTov is properly an adverb of place, answering to iKei as its 
 antecedent, but is used as an illative particle referring to an 
 existing fact: 1 0. 3. 3, Snrov y&p iv vp.lv {i^Xo; Koi ipti Koi 
 Siyfoaraalai, oij(i capicucol iare ; 2 P. 2. 11, oirov arfyeXot . . . 
 ov ijtipovai, Har ain&v Traph Kvpiov pKaa^pav Kplaiv. Gf. 
 Thucyd. viii. 96, ottov Tooavri) ^ ^vp^ph iireyeyevfiro, Trwf avie 
 eutoTOV rjBvpow ; 
 
 Sirioi is an adverb of manner answering to vw ; used as a 
 particle of comparison with ovrttf, &Se, as its antecedent, how, 
 in what way : with superlatives Ihrw Tap^iora, ' quam celerrime,* 
 ' as quickly as possible ;' as the correlative of irw in oblique in- 
 terrogations : L. 24. 20, iwui re irapiScaKav airrhv oi apf)(iepeit, 
 where Snrw<i continues the answer to trola (t9) : ^sch. Prom., 
 oiiK olS' &irat vp.lv airiffTrjaai pe XPV' 
 
 For the use of ottos as a final particle see iva, p. 128. 
 
 The mpst common particles of time are ore, orav, onrore, 
 onrorav, onijviKa. 
 
 ore is regularly used with the indicative as relating to an 
 actual event, usually of time past, but sometimes of , the future, 
 used once with subjunctive aorist: L. 13. 35, &>f &v i}^, ore 
 tlinyTe. 
 
 orav has the accessary idea of uncertainty, probability, when- 
 toever, so often as ; used regularly with the subjunctive ; once 
 with the imperfect in narrating events which occurred re- 
 
 OAUSAL PARTICtES— ^«. 
 
 137 
 
 peatedly: Mk; 3. ll, koI mevpara rh axaffapra orav airrov 
 iOeiopei,. 
 
 0T«, ' that,' is used in objective sentences as an equivalent for 
 the accusative with the infinitive, and as a particle of explana- 
 tion, ' because,' ' inasmuch as,' ' seeing that.' 
 
 ' Formula loquentis ' after Xeyeiv : Mk. 8. 16, SieKoyi^ovro Trpo? 
 aXXi}Xoi;9 \iyovTe9''OTi aprovs ovk ijfppev. Compare in English, 
 ' I affirm him to be,' and, ' I affirm that he is.' 
 
 Alleging a reason or proof: M. 16. 17, puKapun el, Slpav 
 Bap 'lava, art akp^ kw, aXpa ovk aireicakv^i <toi : L. 7. 47, 
 oi p^a^w, Xiyo) ooi, 'Atftitovrai ai apaprlai airrffi ai ttoXXo/, on 
 ^dirriat irokv. Sri here introduces the proof: 'her sins, her 
 many sins, have been, and are remitted ; of this you have proof, 
 seeing that she loves much :' E. 6. 16, i^ofyopa^opevoi rov Kaipbv 
 Sri ai fip.epai irovripai eiai, seeing that : R. 8. 29, ori. obt irpoiyva 
 Kol rrpodpiae avfip6p«l>ow r^f eiKovos tov Tiov avrov, inasmuch 
 as ; this may be called the sub-causal, or secondary causal uso 
 of OTi. IT. 1. 12, 13, Kal xdptv t)(t» Tf> ivBwap<iuravri p,6 Xp. 
 'I. T. Kvpl<p ripMV, OTi'iriarov pe ^y^aaro Oipevoi ci9 BtaKovlav 
 .... aW* ^\ei]0t)v Sti ayvo&v hrolriaa iv dvurria. This, per- 
 haps, should be rendered, " And I thank Christ Jesus our Lord, 
 who gives me strength to fulfil the ministry, seeing that He 
 put me into it, esteeming me faithful . . . but I had mercy 
 shown me, because I knew not what I did in my state of 
 unbelief." The participles, 04p.evo<t, ar/vo&v, present the princi- 
 pal ideas to which the verbs in the indicative mood are merely 
 accessary. 
 
 In H. 8. 9, 10, the considerations which explain SiaOijieiiv 
 Kaivqv are introduced by ori : ori ovk evepeivav iv t$ ZuidiqKrf 
 p.ov, seeing that they failed to abide in my covenant : on avrt) 
 ij itadr^Kii k.tX., now, I say, for this is the covenant, &c. : 2 Th. 
 2. 13, OTi cTXcTo vpas o Qeos, expositive sentence stating the 
 matter or grounds. 
 
 Referring to known facts as confirmatory of a preceding 
 assertion: 1 Th. 1. 6, ort to evaf/>/e\tov ijp&v ovk iyev^ffi) eii 
 vpas iv Xoym povov k.t.\. : 2. 13, ^pels evy(api<TTOvpev r^ Oecu 
 aSiaXeiirrto^ on irapaXafiovres \6yov aKoiji k.t.X. : objective 
 sentence, defining the matter and grounds of the eiij^apurrla. 
 
 on is used with forms of solemn asseveration : R. 14. 1 1, ^& 
 iyw, Xeya Kvpun, Sri ipol xa/i^et vav yovv : 2 G. 1. is, ttiotos 
 Bi i 0eo<i 5t( 6 Xo70( ^pav 6 wpii vpas ovk iyevero va\ xal o6 : 
 
138 
 
 NEOiLTIVS PABTICLBS. 
 
 11. 10 : Q. 1. 20, 5ti ov ^vSofuti, I testify that I lie not : 
 compare A. 10. 42, StafiapTvpaadai on. 
 
 oij^ OTt conveys a limitation of a previous statement : J. 6. 46, 
 ovx oTi rbv iraripa m eotpaitev; 7. 22: 2 C. 1. 23, 24, to// 
 Oebv hriKoKjoviuu, 6ti <f>eiS6fiepoi vfi&i! omiri ^\0ov eif Kopivdov 
 ov^ OTi Kvpievofiev vfi&v tQ? iriareaxi, . not thereby implying 
 that : 3. 5, ov^ on tKavol iapsv Xoyi<ra<r6al ti a<j> iavr&v, not 
 as if deeming ourselves competent to form- any conclusion of 
 ourselves : 2 Th. 3. 9, ovx ^ti ovk S^oiiev e^ovalap. 
 
 Between the merely objective and the strictly causal force 
 of OTi, it is not only very difficult to decide, but in several 
 passages (e. g., B. 8. 2i) exegetical considerations of some 
 moment will be found to depend on the decision. (Ellicott on 
 2 Th. 1. 3.) See 1 Tim. 4. 4, 6, where drt, the objective, is 
 followed by yap, the subjective causal particle. Dean Alford 
 remarks : " on introduces that which rests on a patent fact, as 
 here on a Scripture quotation ; yap introduces that which is in 
 the writer's mind, and forms part of his own reasoning." 
 
 NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 
 
 \\ 
 
 The two simple negative particles are, ov, /tij, ov conveys a 
 direct and absolute denial ; /u>} conveys a subjective and con- 
 ditional denial. In a conditional proposition, fii] belongs to 
 the protasis, ov to the apodosis. /ii} negatives a supposition ; it 
 prohibits or forbids, ov negatives an affirmation, affirming 
 that it is not so. ov is used when an object is regarded in- 
 dependently in itself ; fiij, when it is regarded as depending on 
 some thought, wish, purpose. " ov negat rem ipsam ; p,ij, cogi- 
 tationom rei." ov implies non-existence simply ; but ^17 implies 
 non-existence, when existence was probable or possible, ov is 
 negative; fiij is privative.' We may render /tij by 'except,' 
 •without,' 'omitting,' 'abstaining from,' 'avoiding;' in every 
 instance including the idea, that what is said not to exist, might 
 have existed, rovf /*^ irtaTevvavrai airdtKeaev means, those 
 who, having the opportunity, refused to believe. A. 9. 9, ^1/ 
 fip,epa<; rpeli; fit) ffKeiratp, xal oiiK €<f>ayeif oiiSe eiriev. ov PXAirav 
 would simply mean that he was blind, firj fiXiircov, without 
 sight, one in whom the faculty of sight was suspended for a 
 season. " ovk eav simplicitor est prohibere ; fit) ffv autem dicitur 
 quum quern crcdas situruin non sinit." 1 J. 5. 16, afutpTapoirra 
 
 NEC ATI VB PARTICLES— ov, fUJ. 
 
 139 
 
 afiaprlap (lij ^po<i ddparop, which he conceives to be not unto 
 death : 17, absolutely, eanv d/iaprla ov w/)os ffdparov. 
 
 When the negation is confined to a single word, the direct 
 opposite is affirmed, as ov (jitjfti, I deny: ^ ov SuiXvan, the 
 non-dissolution: ovj^ rJKtara, especially: ovx i7r*<''X'"'''A*««. I 
 refuse. If the single word refers to something dependent on 
 the thought or mental idea, then /*ij is used : Thuc. L 22, to /t^ 
 fiyffaSei avr&p, ' their want of fables,' in the reader's estima- 
 tion. 
 
 The spirit of many passages depends on our preserving this 
 privative or reversive power of the negative: 1 0. 2. 14, 
 yjtvxtiebii Be dpffpayiroi ov Sixerai, rejects, disowns : M, 15. 26, 
 OVK ion, KaliMy Xafieip k.t.X., it is unfair, unhandsome to take : 
 22. 3, OVK 7J0eXA>p eKdelp, they refused to come : 18. 14, ovk eon 
 deXqua, it is contrary to the purpose : Rev. 12. 11, ovk vydirriaap 
 7^1; ^InpciiP avT&p dxpt Bapdrov, they disregarded their life to 
 the point of death : R. 13. 10, 17 dyaTni rat irMaiop kukop ovk 
 ipyd^erai, love refuses to work ill to his neighbour : 1 01 7. 9, 
 et Bi oiiK iyKparevoprai, but in case they have no self-control : 
 11. 22, KarataxweTe tow? p,^ ?;;^;ojn-a9, do ye put to the blush 
 those who are without houses : 1 P. 2. 10 ; R. 9, 20 ; 10. 19, 
 OVK e0poi, ov Xaof, a non-people. 
 
 From this privative power of ov we may account for its 
 occurrence after et, as in 1 C. 7. 8. Here ov coalesces with the 
 verb so as to form a single and opposite idea, or imparts a 
 direct and absolute negation to the entire period : M. 26. 24, et 
 OVK eyeppridfi, if he were unborn : 42, el ov Svparai, if it is im- 
 possible : J. 5. 47, el ov iriarevere, if ye disbelieve : 1 C. 9. 2, e* 
 aWoii OVK elpX aTrocTToXo?, if as regards others I am no apostle : 
 15. 13, et Se dpdaraaKi peKp&p ovk earip, but if the resurrection 
 of the dead is a nullity. 
 
 'The privative or reversive power of the negative prevails in 
 Latin and English, • nego (ne aio),' means, ' I say no.' The Lord 
 will not hold him guiltless = the Lord will hold him guilty. 
 So 'a thing of nought,' lit. a non-thing (no- whit, nought), not 
 merely a thing valueless, but a non-thing, that has no existence 
 at all, as nothing has any substantial existence out of God. (Dr. 
 Pusey on Amos 6. 13.) 
 
 fiV is often used with the participle to introduce delicate 
 modifications of meaning: 1 C. 9. 21, )iii &p dpojuxt Be^, being 
 not in my opinion without law as regards God : 2 0. 5. 21, rov 
 
140 
 
 NEGATIVB VAKtlCtTSa—llfj. 
 
 NEGATIVE PARTICLES— /tl^. 
 
 141 
 
 fiil fvivra i/iapTlav, in God's judgment : G. 4. 8, toU h^ ^vaei 
 otxrw deoK, 'si qui haudquaquam natur&, sed ex hominum 
 opinione tantum dii aunt.' But if we read tok ^wrei ovk oieriv 
 deois, then we have an unconditionBl denial of their being gods 
 at all : 1 Th, 4. 6, ri e^vv rii ft-h .elBora toi» ©ew, being so 
 regarded by the writer. Thus B. 2. 14, otnoi vo/iov fii/ e;^oinref : 
 2 Th. 1. 8 : A. 9. a6, irdvrei i^^rnvro avrov fiii nrKrr€vovr€<} 
 oTt itrrlv /iadi)Ti}9, since they did not believe, though they 
 might have learnt the reality of the matter : 1 T. 1. 7, deKome<i 
 . elvat vofioZiidtrKoXoi, /itf voovtne^ k.t.X. ' though they understand 
 not ;' the participle has a slight antithetical, or perhaps even 
 concessive force. See other examples in Chapter YII. 
 
 In a question, ov implies that an answer ia expected in the 
 affirmative : o^ SS' f^p 6 Sp&v rdSe, was it not he who did this P 
 fttj forbids or negatives an assumption, anticipating a reply in 
 the negative: ipa fiij iariv daOeviji ; he is not ill, I suppose — 
 or, he is not ill, is he P M. 7. 9, l*il \i0ov hriBdaet avr^ ; 22, ov 
 Tf> <r& ivoftan irpoe^revirafieu ; L. 6. 39, p-rfn huvarat tu^\o$ 
 TV^Xov oSiffeiv ; ov^l ap^repoi ek fioBwov ireaovvTM ; 
 
 The Greeks were fond of coupling the ov and /t»j, and of pre- 
 fixing them to a single verb used interrogatively, oii /tij, with 
 the second person of the future, conveyed a prohibition ; with 
 the other persons of the future, and with the subjunctive, it 
 expressed a categorical negation. 
 
 The difference between the indicative future and subjunctive 
 aorist is, that the formte implies duration and futurity, the 
 latter denotes speedy occurrence. Of this rule there are sonie 
 violations in the New Testament, as 1 Th. 4. is ; but in many 
 passages where ov ft^ occurs, the readings vary ; and in later 
 Greek there was a tendency to use the subjunctive mood rather 
 than the indicative future : M. 16. 22, oit fit} l<rrai aoi rovro : 
 L. 18. 7, 6 Si 6<o« ov /if) irotrioei rijv iK,Siicij<nv rSitv iicKeicTStv 
 ainov ; J. 18. II, to iror^piov i SiSuKi fioi, 6 Harqp, ov fiij irlat 
 airro ; 
 
 After verbs of denying, hindering, fuj is inserted where, 
 according to the English idiom, it seems unnecessary : G. 6. 7, 
 T('f v/xa? iviico^ev t$ aXijde/a fit) ireiOeadai ; The insertion of 
 /i?| is to be explained by the lax way in which the infinitive is 
 used to denote result or effect. The negative particle must 
 thus be considered closely bound up with the infinitive, and the 
 result is stated as the non-recurrence of the action represented 
 
 by the infinitive : Aristoph. Pax 315, ifiwoSav ripHv yevrirai 
 li/p Beov /*^ 'feX«i5<ro«. 
 
 /ti; is followed by the indicative mood, after verbs of anxiety, 
 fear, circumspection, when the contingency is regarded as 
 already realized : " p,ri etiam indicativum adjunctum habet, ubi 
 rem a nobis pro ver& haberi indicare voluimus." Hermann. 
 L. 11. 35, ffKowei oiv /iii TO <l>Sn to iv aoX <rK&To<i iarlv : G. 4. 11, 
 ^Povfuu v/ia$ firf iraif etx^ KexoirlaKa eh vfim, I am appre- 
 hensive of you, lest somehow I have extended my labour to you 
 in vain. 
 
 /ii;, with the future after verbs of fearing, gives prominence 
 to the idea of futurity : H. 3. 12, fiXAwere, aSe\ff>ol, ftijiroTe Itrrai 
 ev rivt v/i&v xapSla iromjpii airurrla^. 
 
 fiij being generally used after verbs of apprehension, as 
 ippovT^a, aKOTTu, inroirrevoa, at<ry(wo/uu, its proper adversative 
 power became forgotten; and it was used in later Greek in 
 combination with other words, without any adversative force. 
 So liTfirorre became really equivalent to et irore, or implied only a 
 latent apprehension concerning the contemplated result : 2 T. 
 2. 29, iv vpavrqTt iraiSevovra Tovf avTiZunideiUvov^ fujirore 
 S^ avToti 6eo9 fierdvotav eh hrtyvaviv rfji oKT/ffelai. 
 
 Sometimes firfirore is used to express expectation or doubt : 
 L. 3. IS, irpoahoKuvTO^ tov \aov . . . Kal Sia\oyi,^ofi,evov iv 
 Tah KapSian fitjirore eiii o Xpurro^ : 1 Tim. 2. 9, /jlt) iv irKey- 
 /laaiv. The use of fiij arises from fiovXofiai (s), which is the 
 regular and natural particle after verbs of 'will,' expressing 
 what is thought of in the mind. 
 
 & ov Bet points to things which are definitely improper or 
 forbidden * h p,ri iel, to things which are so either in the mind 
 of the writer, or which derive a seeming contingency only from 
 the mode in which they are presented: Tit. 1. it, hiiaaKovre^ 
 h fit} Set, the class is spoken of as only conceived to be in 
 existence, though in reality that existence was not doubtful. 
 
 In questions where /») ov is used, firi alone is interrogative, 
 and ov coalesces with the verb: R. 10. 18, firj ovk ^xovaav ; 
 fievovvye k.t.\., had they no means of hearing P nay, rather, so 
 far from this, their sound, &c. : R. 10. 19, ftrj ovk eyvct ^I<rpa^\ ; 
 was Israel not instructed P 1 C. 9. 4, /t^ ovk ej(pfiev i^ovaiav 
 <f>ayelv Kai trietv ; is it to be supposed we have no right to cat 
 and drink P So 1 0. 11. 22. 
 
142 
 
 TUB INDICATIVE MOOD WITH fiij. 
 
 THE INDICATIVE HOOD WITH /*i;. 
 
 The following passage illustrates the force of /*»; with the 
 indicative when the occurrence of the result is anticipated ; the 
 change of mood expresses a second consequence, resulting 
 from the fulfilment of the first : Eurip. Phcen. 92, hrUrxet «s 
 hv irpov^epevir^aw •arlfiov, firing iroKir&v iv Tplfitp tpavrd^erM, 
 Kaiioi fiiv S\j9ri ^vKoi, «k SovXjjfi, '<^iyoi, «rol S' <a? avdaaig, ' wait, 
 that I may previomsly examine the road, whether any of the 
 citizens is in the path, lest an evil reproach come alike to me, 
 as servant, and to thee, as mistress,' where the indicative 
 ^vToCerai indicates the probability, that there would be some 
 one in the street. 
 
 In the following, the indicative marks a consequence which 
 the Apostle feared had already occurred, and the subjunctive, a 
 second event resulting from the first : 1 Th. 3. 6, eirefiy^a tii to 
 ffv&vai, TTJv irlffTiv v/t&v, fi^qvav hrtlpaaev v/xa^ 6 ireipd^v, Koi 
 ell Kevov ihnfTiu i koito^ fifiMV, where the aorist subjunctive 
 is used of a transient state occurring in particular cases, the 
 future would have represented something to occur at some 
 indefinite future time. This change of mood is also found after 
 on-bif: Thucyd. vii. 17, vaw re oi Kopivdtoi hrKripow ottoi? 
 vavftayuK rt avoireipdoatai, Kal tA? oXxaSa? ainStv ^aaop ot 
 'ABrfvaloi KaiKuoiev airalpew. See Eurip. Seo. 1120 — 3. 
 
 In the New Testament the indicative is used to mark the- 
 second or remote oonsequeaee, where in earlier Greek the sub- 
 junctive or optative would have been employed : L. 14. 8, /*») 
 KaTaK\t0§<i «ts rt)v irpuTOKXto-lav fujirore ivTi/iorepSi aov ^ 
 KeK\rjfiepo<i inr avrov, koX ikBmv 6 ae koI aiirov Ka\i<Aii ipel aov 
 Ao<{ Tovrqt TOirov. Here ji KeKXijfiivoi marks the immediate 
 consequence, but ipet the remote. J. 15. 8, ip rovrip iho^dadr) i 
 war^p fiov tpa teapnop iroXvp if)ep7)re, Kal <fepri<reade ifiol fiaOfiTal. 
 ■ Here f^ep^aeaOe is the result of iftipriTe. E. 6. 3, tpa ei aoi 
 r^ivirrai, Koi iafi /uiKpoj^povio^ eiri rfl? 7^9: LXX, Gen. 27. J a, 
 /MjTTOTe ■^'Ka^<r[i p,e o variip «ol eaofuxi, ain^ dm KaTa<f>pov&v. 
 
 In Greek, two or more negatives have the effect of strengthen- 
 ing the negation : Mk. 9. 8, oiiKhi oiSepa elBop : 11. u, iitiKeri 
 ix aov €ts TOP al&pa /tij8el9 Kapirop ^drfoi.. 
 
 ' Nor never,' in a negative sense, occurs in Shakspere : " I 
 never was, nor never will be false." So Milton, on Ezek. 40 — 
 
 PARTICLES— /aijW. 
 
 143 
 
 
 \ 
 
 48 : " the description is typical and shadowy, but in such manner 
 as never yet came to pass, nor never must -literally, unless we 
 mean to annihilate the Gospel." 
 
 ovKeri is often used in its simple logical sense, without any 
 temporal reference : B. 11. 6, el Si ;^ap(Tt oviceTt ef Ipytov. So 
 B. 7. so; 14. 15, el Sk Sth fipa/ia 6 dSeX^v aov Xweirat, ovKert 
 Karii ar/dmiP irepiiraTeti : G. 3. 18, el yap ex vopav ^ KK-qpopofilfi 
 ovKin i^ iirarf^eXiai, the latter supposition is excluded by the 
 former : G. 2. 20. 
 
 ovKovp introduces a consequence, which is expressed in the 
 form of a question, anticipating an affirmative reply : J. 18. 37, 
 OVKOVP fiaaiXeii el av ; 
 
 In OVKOVP the meaning of ovk is dropped, "is it then P" In 
 OVKOVP the meaning of ovp is dropped, " is it not P" Soph. Aj., 
 OVKOVP fyeXa^ ^St<rro$ el<} e^Opow yeXap. ovkovv wrap Hf p.ii 
 adkpta weiravaofun ; 
 
 ovre, MTe, may be considered as connecting negative particles 
 employed in couplets, but ovSe, /ti}8e, strengthen the negation, so 
 that clause rises above clause or word above word at each suc- 
 cessive repetition of the particle : M. 6. so, ottov ovre aifi ovre 
 PpStavi a^vifet : M. 11. 18, JjKJde yap 'Ia>ai<n}f /ujre iaffuop /ujre 
 wipwp : 1 Tim. 1. 7, p-fi voovpret firjre & XeyovatP /ii^re •trep\ tIpwp 
 tiaPepautvprai, the objects to which the negation applies, and 
 with respect to which the ignorance of the false teachers extends, 
 are stated in two clauses. Their ignorance was thus complete ; 
 it extended alike to the assertions they made and the subjects 
 on which they made them (EUicott). M. 5. 34, the negation 
 p.i} oftoaai Skon is divided into four heads by the adjunctive 
 negatives ^tijre : compare Ja. 5. 12. 
 
 The ascending scale with oiiSe, p>ifie, is very observable in M. 
 6. 26, ov airelpovatp, oiSi 0epl^ovaip, ovBe awdr/ovaiv elf diro- 
 6riKa<i : 10. 9, /t^ KT'qatjade ^(pvaop, fiijSe apyvpop, /iijBk j(a\K6p. 
 
 When oiiSi, firiSe are used singly they must be rendered, 'not 
 even,' 'ne — quidem:' 2 Th. 3. 10, et tk ov deXei ipyd^eaffai 
 fi7}Se iaOiirm, in case any one refuses to work, let him not even 
 eat : Mk. 2. 2, ware /itiKeri xtopelv p/t}Bi tA vpoi ttiu dvpav : M. 
 6. 29, oiiik SoKo/juop. 
 
 In G. 3. 28 the alterable social distinctions are contrasted by 
 ovSi, the unalterable natural one is expressed by Kal, 
 
 Sometimes ni]Si connects a new clause with the preoeding 
 ' nor yet :' E. 4. 27, nv^i SiSore rorrop r^ Sia/36X^. In negative 
 
144 
 
 ILLATIVE PABTICLK3 — OWi;. 
 
 Bentences Bi has j>raotically much of the conjunctive force which 
 belongs to kuI in affirmative sentences. " Si sequentia adjungit 
 prioribus, non apte connexa, sed potius fortuito concursa acce- 
 dcntia " (Klotz) : 2 Th. 2. 2, eh to fti) Ta^6<u« aaXevdrjvai vfM<i 
 airb roO poof, /irjSi Bpoetadai, that ye should not be soon shaken 
 from your ordinary state of mind, nor yet be terrified. 
 
 ILLA,TIVB PARTICLES. 
 
 oSv. Its uses may be divided into two general heads, col- 
 leclice and reflexive, ' accordingly/ ' in accordance with what has 
 been said;' a particle of retrospective reference, collecting into 
 one sentence the preceding argument. oSv does not imply a 
 logical inference like apa, but merely recalls attention to what 
 has been said in the way of confirmation and correction, oiv 
 looks back to the line of reasoning, as fiev looks forward to the 
 completion of the sentence, while Si appends an explanatory 
 statement. In composition with relatives and relative particles 
 oiv ia equivalent to the Latin ' — cunque;' aWof oarK oiv, 
 another, whoever he may be ; Svwi oSv, in whatever way. 
 
 Mere external connexion, transition, or continuation, there- 
 upon, now, then : L. 6. 9, ehrev otiv o 'Itfaow irpb<! airrov^ : J. 19. 
 29, ffKevot ovp eKeiTo S^ovv ftearbv — . Also with participles and 
 temporal particles : J. 6. 14, oi ovp apOpayiroi ISoprei. 
 
 The internal connexion of two sentences, the relation of 
 cause and effect: J. 9. 7, iir^XOep oiiv koX iviy^aro xal ^X0e 
 /8Xc7r&>i/: 9. 19 : A. 17. 29, 7^1/05 oip wTrapj^ovre? tow Qeov ovk 
 o^fiKofiep pofii^eip, k.t.X. : 11. 5. 1, SiKauodiprei oip e< irLarewii 
 elp^pTfP exofiep tt/jo? top Oeop : 1 T. 3. 2, Sei o5j» top iirUrKoirop 
 avewlXtfirTOP etpat. 
 
 Illative, expressing an inference : L. 20. 44, /iafilS oJw Kvpiop 
 avTOP KoKei, xal ira>9 1//09 aiiTov i<mp ; 
 
 Resumptive, where a sentence has been interrupted by a 
 parenthesis or by intervening clauses : M. 7. 24, 7ra« oIp octtk 
 aKovei pov Toiii Xoyov^ tovtow kuI irotet avrovv, Ofiouaact avrop 
 apSpl tftpopipip: n. 4. II, airovSda-<up,ep ovp elaeXdelp el<s iKeiptjp 
 TTjp KaTcmavaip. 
 
 In interrogative sentences referring to a previous assertion : 
 M. 13. 28, deXetf ovp aire\06vTe<: avWe^topep avrd ; 17. jo, tI 
 OVP oi fpappMTeii Xeyovo-iv OTi ^HXiap Set iKdeip irp&TOP ; 
 
 ovp frequently introduces the summing up of the whole, par- 
 
 
 \ 
 
 ■4 
 
 4 
 
 ILLATIVE PARTICLES — TrktJP — irpiP. 
 
 145 
 
 tioularly after a digression: 1 0. 10. 31 ; 15. 11 : fih oip sums 
 up what is to be said on the topic in hand, and prepares the way 
 for a transition to another subject : A. 5. 41 ; 8. 4 ; 9. 31 ; 11. 
 19; 16. 3; 16. 5: Ph. 3. 8, a\\^ p,epovpye xal rfyovput irdpra 
 ^Tfp,lap elpai. Here the main point is concedeid, but some 
 emphatic addition or correction is appended to the concession. 
 
 irX^p (derived from ttXc— fill up) introduces an additional 
 idea, something that is necessary to express more fuUy the 
 sentiment of the speaker, and is thus diflFerent from aWd, the 
 disjunctive conjunction, which apart from the idea of filling up 
 may introduce another circumstance. 
 
 wXiJi; may be rendered 'nevertheless,' 'moreover,' 'besides,' 
 'except;' and is used as an adverb, quasi-preposition, conjunc- 
 tion, also as a substitute for Si in distributive sentences. wX^p 
 is often united with el or some other particle to introduce an 
 exception: Xen. Anab. iv. 1. 11, oi Sk eireWopTo, irX^p el tIi t* 
 SxKey^ep. 
 
 As a preposition: Mk. 12. 32, ovk iaTip oKKaxs ttX^i/ ainov: 
 A. 8. 1, 9rai<T£9 TC Sieatrdpffaap ttX^v twi* dirocrroKiop. 
 
 As an adverb wXiJi/ is an adversative particle: 1 0. 11. 11, 
 irKifp ovre dp^p x«p«? yvpaiKOi owre 710/^ X«/(>ts dpSpbi & Kvpi^ : 
 L. 19. 27, 7r\^i» TOWS i-xdpoixi iKeiPov} of^dr/eTe &Se. 
 
 After a digression marking the return to a previous topic : 
 E. 6. 33, trkijp KaX i/ieii oi Koff ha iKatrtot t^i» lawToC •yvpaiKa 
 ovToxt dyairdTto m eavrop, but in addition to what has been 
 said, waiving all further considerations. 
 
 irplp is a temporal particle, 'before,' 'until,' a locative form 
 of nrpo. The full form is TrpXp ^ or irpXp ^ ore, before that when. 
 But the adverbial relative is generally omitted, so that vpip, 
 which is properly an antecedent, is used as a relative. In the 
 adverbial sentence after wpip we may use the indicative, sub- 
 junctive, optative, or infinitive. " Post irpiP perfecto status indi- 
 ca(ur, qui factum sequitur (irpip SeSenrpffKepcu, before I have 
 risen from supper) ; aoristo, perfectio rei {rrpXp Sei-mnjaai, before 
 I take my supper) ; praesente, initium {-irpXp Seiirpeip, before I go 
 to supper)." 
 
 irplp is used with the indicative to express past actions both 
 in positive and negative sentences : ^ofiijp S' dpi/p dar&p p^ia- 
 Tos Twi/ eK€% irplp pai Tvxri TotoS' irrioTf) (Soph. 0. T. 775), and 
 I was considered the most distinguished man of the citizens 
 here untQ such a misfortune came on me : owx fjv aU^ft ovBiv 
 
 L 
 
14G 
 
 ILLATIVE PAHTICLES — Tol—am. 
 
 ILLATIVE PARTICLES — ft)?. 
 
 147 
 
 — irplv iyat ar^laiv ISei^a itpdaeK rfirUixv aKSffiidrmv, there was 
 no means of defence, none at all— until I showed to them the 
 way of compounding soothing remedies (^sch. Prom.). There 
 is no instance of irpbi with the indicative in the New Testament. 
 
 Tlpiv is used with the subjunctive of an act, both probable 
 and future, after a negative sentence : L. 2. 26, ffv avr^ tceyprj- 
 fMTKTfiivop fit) ISelu davarov trpw ^ tSp tov Xpiarov Kvplov : 22. 
 34, oi fii) ^(ovijoret <Trip,epov iCKltcrap, irplv ^ Tpt? airapv^ay fii) 
 etSeyat fie. Here irplv »} may be rendered 'until;' thus Dr. 
 Donaldson explains the ellipse in 2 Th 2. 3, Srt cAi» fif/ e\0y ^ 
 avoaraa-la irp&Tov (oil Bvvarai ikffeiv o Kvpioi). 
 
 IIplv is used with an optative in oratione obliqud after an 
 optative ; also after a negative sentence if the oratio directa 
 has passed into the ohliqua : Xen. Anab. vii. 7. 67, itkovro fj.r) 
 aireKdeiv irplv &v dirofyaryoi : A. 25. 16, trpoi ofts dweKpidi)v, St* 
 ovK eariv eOoi 'Pmfiaioiv x^p'fEo-^at ripa avdpairov el<i aTTioXeiav, 
 irplv ^ 6 Karrfyopovfievoi Kara irpoaayirov ly^oi tow? Karffyopovt, 
 Toirov re aTroXoyia^ Xa/3o( irepl rov iyxKi^fuiroif. Here the 
 optative indicates what was passing in the mind of the speaker. 
 
 Ilpiv is used with the infinitive whenever the subsequent act 
 is regarded as an object : J. 8. 58, irplv 'A^padfi yeviaffat iyu) 
 eifii : M. 26. 34, irplv oKkicTopa <f>a>VT)a-ai, rpU dirapvTjert} fie : 
 A. 2. 20, 6 ffXioi fieraarpciffii^aeTat et? <r/c6To? . . . irplv ^ eXdeti/ 
 Tr)v Tffiepav Kvplov TifV fieydXriv Kal eiri.(l>avr}. 
 
 Tol, ' assuredly,' is often an enclitic affixed to other particles ; 
 as i^Toi, • either,' or, Kalroiye, ' and yet.' In certain cases it is 
 prefixed, as toIwv, 'therefore:' roiryap, roiyapovv, Toi/ydproi, 
 and the like, signifying an inference : tjroi, E.. 6. 16, see under 
 V : J. 4. 2, KaiTotye 'Iijo-ofl? airroi ovk e/Sdirri^ev, dX\' ol fiadi)Tal 
 avTov: A. 14. 17, KaiToiye ovk dfidprvpov iavrbv d<f>T]Kev: 17. 27, 
 Kairoifye ov /laxpdv diro ivoi eKotrrov rffiStv virdpj(0VTa, 
 
 Tovyapow, ' by certain consequence : ' 1 Th. 4. 8, roi/yapovv o 
 dOer&v OVK dvOponrov dderel : H. 12. I, rotyapovv ■fffie'vi joaovrov 
 €)(pvT€<i irepiKelfievov fffilv ve<f>ov fiaprvpwv, 
 
 Toivvv, drawing an inference : L. 20. 25, dirohore roivvv rd 
 Kaiaapoi Kalaapi : 1 0. 9. 26, eyit roivvv ovra Tpkya &>? ovx 
 d8)j\ci>? : H. 13. 13, roivvv e^ep^dfieda irpbi avrov. 
 
 (u? in comparative sentences means ' as ; ' in objective, ' that ; ' 
 in final, ' in order to ; ' in causal, ' for on the ground that.' In 
 the comparative sense it is strengthened by irep : aairep, 'just 
 as.' In the old combination, ware is the regular attendant of 
 
 
 the illative clause, signifying * so as to ; ' in which sense, how- 
 ever, it is sometimes superseded by the simple m: 2 C. 10. 9. 
 
 In comparative sentences : 1 0. 3. 15, airrb^ Sk ffo)0i]<reTai' 
 olrria<! Bk m Bid irvp6<t : Mk. 1. 22, Tfv yap BiBdaKtov avroixi (o? 
 e^ovalav extov koI ov^ <»>? oi ypdfifiareii : 1 Th. 2. 4, dKKa 
 Kado)^ BeBoKifida-fieda inro rov 6eov marevdrfvai ro evcvfyiKiov, 
 ovruii XaXovfiev. 
 
 KuOm stands in correlation to oSrm, marking the measure or 
 proportion existing between their approval by God to preach 
 the Gospel, and their actual performance of the commission. 
 
 With (»?, &<rre, elvai is sometimes omitted: 2 C. 11. 15, ol 
 SuiKOVOi ainov fxeraayiffMiTl^ovrcu, &>? Bimkovoi BiKaioavvryi. 
 
 In objective sentences, equivalent to on, ' to wit that,' ' how 
 that :' A. 10. 28, vfiet<i eirlaraade &<: dOifiirov eariv. 
 
 m is used with ort in 2 0. 5. 18, 19, Bovro^ rffilv rijv Buucovlav 
 riji KaraXKarftji, cb? on 0eo? rjv iv Xpurrm Koafiov KaraXXdaatov 
 eavrw. 
 
 In final sentences, 'in order to:' H. 7. 9, <»9 eirov elireiv, 
 ' ut ita dicam :' A. 20. 24, ovBi ^oi rifv y^vjffjv fiov n/ilav ifiavr^ 
 an TsXei&aai tov Bpofiov fiov fierd x'*P'^^' Some take this in the 
 comparative sense : ' I do not even regard my life precious in 
 my own estimation, as I hold precious the reXei&aai.' 
 
 In causal sentences, <o$ assigns the reason : L. 16. 1, oSto? 
 Ste^n^dij avr^ d>i BuurKopirl^av rd inrdp^ovra avrov : A. 23. 20, 
 d>i fieKXMvrii n dxpt^iarepov irvvOdveadat irepl airrov, ' on the 
 ground that they intend:' 28. 19, ^var/Kda0r)v iirtKuXeaaaffai 
 KaUrapa, ovx ft)? toS idvov} fiov e^^ftif n Karriyoprj<Tai, not on the 
 ground that I had to make any accusation against my nation. 
 
 a>f is also used with participles, ' considering that,' ' being 
 convinced that,' and imparts to the verbal notion the impress of 
 a persuasion or purpose : 2 P. 1. 3, at? irdvra rjfiiv rrj^ Bvvdfiewi 
 avrov tA irpb<i fyjtjv Kai evae^eiav BeBii)prjfievr]<i : Xen. Cffr. iii. 
 3. 4, m elpi^vt)^ ovarii : 1. 9, ft>? rdkifOi) ipovvroi: R. 15. is, <»« 
 hravafii,fivqaK<ov vfidi, as bringing to your recollection, and not 
 teaching what you know not. 
 
 ft>? characterizes the action and defines the aspect in which 
 the whole was to be regarded : 1 Th. 2. 4, ov^ m dvdpunron 
 dpioKovrei, oKKd &e^, not as striving to please men, but as 
 striving to please God: A. 3. 12, ^ ^puv rl drevi^ere, w^ IBla 
 Bvvdfiei 7) eiaefiele^ ireiroiijKoai rov irepnrarelv airrov ; 
 
 In A. 17. 14 Ol? seems to be used for etti, 'usque ad:' rov 
 
 L 2 
 
 \ 
 
148 
 
 ILLATIVE FAUTICLSS— Jiore. 
 
 IlaSKov i^atriareiKav ol dSeX^l iropeveaOai mi hrl 0dKaa<rap, 
 ihey sent him forth on his journey, even to the sea: Pausan. 
 ii. 26, KarafidpTctv co« hrl OdXavaav : Xen. Anab. vii. 6. i, 
 AaxeSaiftovlon Soksi (rrpaTeu&rdtu am ^l Turaatjtipvfjv, 
 
 maei, ' as if," as though: ' M. 9. 36, ijifiififievoi wo-el irpo^ara fi^ 
 i)(oina irotfUva : 28. 3, 4, rh SvSvfta airav XevKov Jaaei 'Xffdtv. . . . 
 eyivovTo mael vexpol : 3. 16, elSe t6 IlveOiia tov Qeov Karafiaivov 
 iaaei irepurrepdv, 
 
 &<nrep, 'just as,' 'as indeed:' M. 18. 17> ^crro) <rol atrirep S 
 idpiKOi I 1 0. 8. S, KM yhp el irep tlal "Kerfip-evoi BeoX . . . &<nrep 
 tlal ffeol iroXKol. " Trip vim earn oomparativam quam habet co« 
 usitato more auget atque effort." Slotz. 
 
 dnnrepel softens the boldness of the figure (larat t^ ToKittipd, 
 Longinus, § 32) : 1 0. 15. 8, mairapeX t^ imrpwiiaTi &^>0i) icdftol, 
 as to the untimely-bom one, he appeared even to mo. — 
 
 &<rre is used with the infinitive when the result is represented 
 as a necessary and logical consequence of what has been already 
 stated ; with the indicative, when the result is represented as a 
 simple and unconditional fact. 
 
 The indicative describing a fact which actually takes place : ' 
 M. 23. 31, aare fjutprvpeire iavToit, ot( viol itrre r&v ^vevadvrmv 
 T0V9 irpo^ijTCK : G. 2. 13, xal trwtnreKpl0r)aav ain^ koL oi "KotiroX 
 'JovSatot &<Tr6 /cal Bapvd^ai awarrff)(dri ain&v Ty inroKpiaen 
 3. 24, &are o vo/mk iratSar/tt^oi ^ft&v yeyovev ew Xpiarov : 4. 
 7, uore ovK Sri el SovKo^, d\\' vloi. \ 
 
 The infinitive describing acts contemplated but not realized ;^ 
 acts capable of occurring or likely to occur : M. 27. i, avfu^ov- 
 Xiov iXa^ov . . . Sxrre davar&aai avT6v: L. 12. } , hrKTVva)(ffeit 
 auv T&v fivpidSap mare Karaitajov aWi^Xot/f. 
 
 (Sore marks the result : 1 P. 1. 31, &<rre Ttfv irloTtv vft&v xal 
 iXvlBa etvM ek 6e6v: the degree, extent, amount, especially 
 after oSra, J. 3. 16, ovra ^hp ^dinjaep 6 0eoi top Koafiop Sarre 
 TOP vlop avTOv TOP fJMPor/eprj IBaxep. 
 
 Often illative : B. 7. 12, mare 6 p.ip pS/un Sf^un. 
 
 Introducing a concluding exhortation : 1 0. 15. 58, (S<rre 
 aSeXfpol fiov drfainfToi eSpaioi ylpeaOe : 1 Th. 4. 18, more irapa- 
 KaXeire aWijXou? iv rot? Xo7ot« tovtok : 1 P. 4. 19, &<rre koI oi 
 ird(Tj(ppTe<i Karit to OiXrifta tov Qeov <is irurr^ lericrTg irapariffia- 
 dwaap Ta« '^vp^Af eavr&p ip ar/aBoriroita. 
 
 Ei 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 "Prbpositions represent primarily the local relation of one 
 object to another ; and this in the most precise manner by 
 suggesting the geometrical parts of an object considered in a 
 geometrical point of view ; as a line, a superficies, a soM. By 
 analyzing these three ideas we obtain an exact mathematical 
 analysis and enumeration of the Qreek prepositions. A solid, 
 or cube, has six geometrical parts; the upper plane, virip, 
 the under, inro, the front, ianl, the side, irapd, both ' sides, 
 dfi^l: the rear, out of sight, may be expressed by Siriaffep. 
 The plane of the superficies is hrl, the boundary line round it 
 is Trepl, the inside of the line ip, the outside ix : the surface, 
 divided into two by an intersecting line, is Sid. Lines are 
 either vertical or horizontal. ' Of vertical lines the top is dpd, 
 the bottom Kurd : of horizontal lines the front is irpo, the 
 hinder extremity may be indicated by hrl, or inro. A line has 
 three parts ; the extremities, and the middle. But the middle 
 may be of three kinds ; if it is of the same substance as the 
 extremities, as the middle of a beam, furd is used ; if a different 
 substance, as when a rope connects two trees, avp is used ; if it 
 is empty space, as in drawing a line from one star to another, 
 the relation between them is indicated by otto. If the particle 
 of motion, ae, is added to irpo, it becomes vpoi, towards, to the 
 point of an object ; if it is added to ip, it becomes eli, into. 
 Prepositions do not govern cases in the sense of determining 
 them. That which determines the case is the idea which the 
 case expresses. The preposition only adds a more precise 
 geometrical view of the relation in which the two objects stand 
 to each other." (Q. R., Jan., 1803.) 
 
160 
 
 PREPOSITIONS — VpO. 
 
 In ascertaining the respective powers of prepositions, we must 
 keep in view (1) the extent to which later Greek, and the collo- 
 quial Hellenic of the Apostles, extended the use of prepositions, 
 overlooked nice distinctions, or sanctioned irregidar usages; 
 
 (2) the influence of the Aramaean on the writers of the New 
 Testament, which delights in the use of prepositions, and views 
 numerous relations under aspects difierent from the Greek ; 
 
 (3) the efPect of the Christian element on the use of particular 
 prepositions. In different languages the same relation, heing 
 viewed under different aspects, is expressed by prepositions of 
 opposite significations. There is apparently no connexion be- 
 tween the English prepositions in and under ; but we may^ often 
 use indifferently, in these circumstances, and under these cir- 
 cumstances. So also we say, under arms, where with, in, would 
 be equally applicable. 
 
 Prepositions followed by a genitive only — ami, trpo, arri, ix. 
 
 avri and Trpo are nearly synonymous : ' in front of,' ' on behalf 
 of,' ' instead of 'for the sake of irpi is the more general word, 
 as it denotes whatever is before one, or in view ; ami denotes 
 what is in a definite place, or stands in a specific relation. 
 
 The primary meaning of irpo is ' in tight,' in some place 
 opposite, priority in place : A. 5. 23, evpo/iev tf>vKaKa<i ia^wraf 
 irpo r&v dvp&v: 12. 6. u, irph tow irvX&i/oc 14. 13, trpo t^s 
 nroKefot ainrnv. Repeatedly nrpit irpooatnrov. 
 
 From this meaning irpo passes on to denote priority in tim&c 
 J. 17. 24, irpo KarafioKryi KSa/iov: A. 5. 36, Trpo Tovrctv r&v^ 
 ■/ifiep&v : M. 5. 12, tows irpo^^ra^ tows irpit vfi&v. 
 
 So with a trajection in its use : J. 12. l, irpo If ^fiep&v rov 
 irdiTj(a: 2 0. 12. 2, irpo ir&v ieKareaadpmv : Amos 1. 1, LXX, 
 iTfM Svo ir&v TOW tretcrftov. 
 
 Hence irpo has the idea of , preference, superiority, import- 
 ance: Ja. 6. 12; 1 P. 4. 8, irpo irdmcav. 3 Mace. 2. 21, 6eov 
 irpo iravTav Sr/iov, 
 
 From this we have the phrase irpi> ttoXXow iroieiaOai, to 
 estimate a thing more than much, to set a very high value 
 upon it. 
 
 Sometimes irpo means in behalf of, as Trpo t^s 'EXXaSos 
 mro0vqaK€ip, ' pro patria mori.' irpo may bo used in all these 
 senses in C. 1. 17, awT^s iari irpo irammv. • 
 
 irpo in composition has generally a temporal reference : Tit. 
 3. 1 4, KoKuv Spymv irpolaraaOai, to be prompt in attending to 
 
 PEBPOSITION8 — aiTt. 
 
 151 
 
 good works for supplying necessary wants, that they be toot 
 unfruitful, i. e., without showing practical proofs of their faith 
 by acts of love. 
 
 Sometimes irpo has an intensive power: irpoSrfKot, H. 7. 14 ; 
 
 1 Tim. 6. 24, openly manifest. 
 
 The primary signification of ami is * over-against.' The 
 original form may be &ma, Cf. avnJXtos, opposite to the sun. 
 Akin to German ' ant-,' ' antworten,' ' Antlitz.' 
 
 'Instead of,' 'in the place of:' M. 2. 22, 'Apxe'Kao<i fiaffiKevei 
 ami 'HptoBov: 5. 38, o^BaXiutP avrl o^Odkfiov: L. Ilk II, fifi 
 avrl ij(6voi S<fuv iiriSa>aei, ain^ ; 
 
 Hence it denotes an equivalent, ' set against ; ' Latin, pro, 
 inatar; that which may take the place of an object in value : 
 amX iroKK&v Xa&v iart, II. ix. 116 : Xen. Anab. vii. 4. 6, em^pero 
 o 'Sevdifi Tov iralia el iralaeiev avrov dm\ iKeiPOv, On which' 
 Hutchinson remarks : " Phrasi ilia Noster vicariam plane mortem 
 denotat." In the previous sentence wTrep is used in the same 
 sense as ami: 7i koI iffiXoK &u tnrep towtow airoOavetv ; where 
 Hutchinson quotes R. 5. 8, Xpiarb^ tnrep tfn&v aireffave, i. e., 
 "vice nostrd, ut nos scilicet mortis poena liberaremur." dm^i 
 is the more definite 'instead of,' denoting equivalence and 
 exchange. Inrip implies merely 'for the deliverance of men,' 
 leaving undetermined the precise sense in which Christ died for 
 them. M. 20. 28, Sovpai t^v •^vx'f <*vtow \inpop~ amX iro)sXS»v : 
 H. 12. 16, aprX ^pataeon fuS^ aireSoro t& irpioToroKia avrov : 2, 
 aprl riji irpoKei/iipr)^ airr^ XapcK vire/teipe <navp6p. 
 
 'In behalf of;' 'to be set to the account of:' M. 17. 27, 
 ixeipop Xafiatp Sos awrots avrl ifutv ical aov. 
 
 Adducing a principle, cause, reason, motive: E. 5. 31, avrl 
 towtow KaraXei^ei apOpanro^ top iraripa avroO. 
 
 This use occurs frequently with the relative : apff" &v, because, 
 wherefore : apri rovrav on, L. 1. 20 ; 12. 3 ; 19. 44 ; A. 12. 23 ; 
 
 2 Th. 2. 10, ' in requital for this that.' 
 
 In J. 1. 16, jfaptp ami jfapiro^, the preposition is used in all 
 these senses, ' one grace or blessing in place of,' * accumulating 
 upon,' and ' multiplied after,' another. Compare Theognis 344, 
 avT dpi&p apiai, grief upon grief. 
 
 In composition, dprl means opposition, as omiKeyca : in turn, 
 as dpriKoKea : correspondence, as dpTlrviro<i : in the place of, as 
 di/dwTraTos, aml\vrpov. In avr^^eo-^at the preposition involves 
 a faint idea of holding out against something hostile, or opposing 
 
162 
 
 PBEPOSITIOKS — airo. 
 
 ♦ 
 
 PBBFOSITIONS — ix. 
 
 163 
 
 wbich, however, passes into that of stedfast application, Tit 
 1.9. 
 
 airo, ix, corresponding in origin and signification .to the 
 Latin 'ab,' .'ex,' are followed by a genitive of ablation. air6 
 denotes motion from the surface of an object (extrinsecus), as a 
 line drawn from the circumference of a circle; ex denotes 
 motion from within an object (intrinsecus), as a line drawn 
 from the centre of a circle. 
 
 Separation in space with the idea of motion : M. 3. 16, avi^'q 
 airo rov vSarov : 8. l, KaTafidvri diro tov Spow : A. 16. 38, 
 airoordtna air avrutv airo Ha/i^vXlai, separated from them, 
 and departed from Pamphylia. 
 
 Marking the distance : J. 11. 18, fjv Si ^ Bijdavia iyyi><i r&v 
 'JepoaoXvfuop, w? airi oraSuov BeKairivre. 
 
 Subsequence in time : Mk. 7. 4, airo drfopa<i : M. 19. 4, air' 
 apyffi : '&. 15. 23, airo iroXK&v hStv. So cuft oi (xpovov), a<f>' ^ 
 {rffiipasi) : //. viii. 64, airit ielirvov dap^affovro. 
 
 Origin of all kinds ; place of birth, descent, residence : M. 
 15. ], oi airo 'lepovaaKij/t: 21. li, 6 air6 Na^apiO: A. 10. 23, 
 oi airo 'linnnfi : 17. 1 3, oi airo t^s Oea-aaXavlierii 'lovSdioi, : M. 
 2. 1, fidrjfoi air" avaroX&v : Soph., el? airo Sirdpriji, a Spartan : 
 Xen. Andb. vii. 2. ll, 6 'A0i)vaiov 6 airo orpaTevftaToi. 
 
 The occasion or the effect produced by a cause: A. 11. 19, 
 huunrapePT€9 iiro T^f OXly^ea^ : H. 5. 7, eiaaKovadeli airo t^v 
 evXajSet'af, graciously heard by reason of his piety; as in the 
 margin of the Authorized Version, ' for his piety,' i. e., because 
 he feared God : A. 12. 14, airo t^s x<*P"' *"^* rjvoi^e top irv- 
 "Koiva, by reason of her joy she opened not the door : M. 14. 
 26, airo rov ^fiov licpa^av: L. 24. 41, diri<rrovvTO>p avr&p diro 
 TTJ^ j(apai: 22. 46, el/pep avroiii Koi/itofiipovi diro rfji Xviriji: 
 A. 22. 11, (uf Si ovK ivipKeirop diro r^f So^rfi toS ^to9 ixelpov: 
 L. 21. 26, diror^v)(pvrav dpffpanrwp dir6 <f>6^ov Kai irpoaSoKta^ 
 •r&p hrepjfpniptov r§ olKOVftipfj. So airo SiKaiotrvv]^, on account 
 of, by reason of: ^sch. Ag. 1302, rX'^fuov air cvtoX/miu <f>pev6<i, 
 stedfast in consequence of his brave soul. 
 
 Derivation from a source : A. 17. 2, Stekeyero avrotf diro twi» 
 rfpa<fMP : 2 T, 1. 3, "ydpip ex<o tm 6ea* m XaTpeva diro irpoyopup. 
 
 The source of information : M. 7. 16, diro rup Kapir&p ain&p 
 hrirpxitaeaOe airrovv : in A, 10. 17, direaraXfiipoi airo tov Kopprj- 
 X/bv. diro may denote subordinate agency, 'on the part of,' 
 as in the following; Ja. 1. 13, p-rfSeh viipa^/iepoi Xe^era on 
 
 ir 
 
 diro "rau Seov ireipd^o/uu : M. 11. 19, Kal iSiKauuffi) ^ ao<j)la dirb 
 T&p tSkpup avriji : Mkl 8. 31, diroSoxifuiaOrjpai diro r&v irpea- 
 fivrepwp KoX dp^iepkav Koi ypafifiariwp : 2 G. 7. 13, dpaireiravrai 
 TO irpevfui atrov diro irdprwp v/i&p, i. e., by what we saw and 
 heard ; direct efforts for that purpose would be marked by viro : 
 R. 9. 3, dpdOefta elvai diro rov Xpiarov : Rev. 12. 6, roirop ■fyrot- 
 fiaafiepov diro rov GeoO. Compare Hdt. vii. 130, rh diro rivo^ 
 yevoftepa, the things done on any one's part: Thuc. i. 17, 
 hrpdydi) air fivrov ovSep. 
 
 From this signification, ' on the part of,' it has beraa thought 
 that diro is used for viro, but viro implies a cause immediate and 
 active ; diro intimates that the cause is less immediate, and 
 virtually passive. 
 
 Of the state from which deliverance is effected : M. 1. 21, 
 eraurei rov Xooi/ avrov diro tcSi' dfiapruop axrr&p : Mk. 6. 34, taOt 
 vyiii^ diro riji fiAffrirfOi aov : H. 11. 34, ipeSvpafiutOiivav dirh 
 dadevelai. 
 
 Adverbial use, diro fUpovf, 'partially :' R. 11. 25, 'with many 
 exceptions already : ' Thucyd. i. 76, diro rov dvBptanre'iov rpoirov, 
 remote from the common practice of mankind. 
 
 In composition diro means ' away from,' as dirwya>, diripy(pfiai : 
 'cessation,' as dirdXryita: 'completion,' as diroSeUpv/it, diroOvijarKio : 
 ' back again,' as diroSIZtafu : sometimes it merely strengthens 
 the force of the simple verb, as dirixfo, diro$\lfiio, diroSeKaroto : 
 diroxpijtrdai, ' use out, use thoroughly,' diro^i; ' live upon,' ' live 
 off,' dirooTvyia, diroro\/ido : or has a privative force, as diro- 
 KoKvirrto, diro/cdXtr^tf . 
 
 In dirodrjaavpl^ovrcn;, 1 T. 6. 19, the diro points to the source 
 from which, and the process by which they are to make their 
 67)travpov<t, ' reponendo thesaurum colligere.' The rich are ex- 
 horted to take from {diro) their own plenty, and by devoting it 
 to the service of God and the relief of the poor, to treasure it up 
 as a good foundation for the future. So diro&uo-et, 2 T. 4. 8, 
 alludes to the reward as having been laid up, and taken as out 
 of some reserved treasures ; cf. R. 2. 6. 
 
 ix denotes removal or procession from the interior of an 
 object, and is used of place, time, origin. 
 
 Motion from, deliverance out of: Mk. 9. 7, fjkJBev ^vi) ix t^« 
 ve^eKrif : M. 8. 28, ix r&v fivqfieuov i^epj(pnevoi : A. 28. 3, ej(,tSva 
 ix rfyi depfiifi i^eKOovaa : 4, SuuraOevra ix 7% 6a\d<r<rri^ : 2 0. 
 6. 17, i^iXOere ix /liaov airr&v. 
 
154 
 
 PREPOSITIONS — ix. 
 
 iic, ' out of/ as distinguished from av6, ' away from,' is marked 
 by the expressions : Mk. 16. 3, Tk airoKvXicret vfuv top \ldov ix 
 Tijf 6vpa<: Tov fivtjfielov ; L. 24. 2, (nipov rov \Wov airoK€Kv\ur- 
 fiivop airo tov fivqfiximi : 1 Th. 2. 6, otrre ^ryrovvrei i^ dpOpmiruv 
 Si^av, ovre d<f> ifi&v, ovre air &XKoiu Suvdfievoi iv fidpei etvcu, 
 'neither seeking high estimation out of men (e^)/ this was the 
 residt of internal feeling ; no money or temporal benefit from 
 you {d<f>' vfi&v), this was external assistance. 
 
 Ik marks position with verbs of rest: M. 20. 2i, ix Be^uov 
 KaOfladai, i^ evavvfuop : Soph. Ani. 411, Kod^aBai ex irdrfrnp^ to 
 sit on the heights and look from them. 
 
 Of time : i^ ov (xpovov), Lat. ' ex quo.' 
 
 Of particular points of time : M. 19. 20, ix veonyroi fu»v : A. 
 9. 33, i^ ir&p OKTco: J. 6. 64. 66, i^ dpyfrji: ix tovtov: J. 13. 4, 
 eyelpeTM ix rov Seltrvov, he riseth from or after supperT' Cf. Hdt. 
 i. 60, iie 0va(ai yepiaffai, to have just finished sacrifice : Thuo., 
 ^f elpijp7)<i iroKe/jietv, to go to war after or out of peace. 
 
 Origin from, material, means: M. 3. 9, iie t&v \lBap rovrtov 
 iyeipai riKva: J. 2. IS, ironjaofi <f>par/e\\top iic tr-xpipuap : 2 C. 8. 
 II, TO ivireKkaai ix tov e)(€ip: Xen. Anab. ii. 1. 6, to orpdTevfia 
 hropi^ero alTOP, Sirot^ ihwaro, ix t&v inro^vyUov xorrropre^ tov$ 
 fiow xal Spov<!. 
 
 Of physical origin, birth, descent : J. 3. 6, to yeyepprjuhfov ix 
 Ttfi oapxm adp^ itrri : M. 1. 20, to yhp ip aurp yepptjOip ix irpev- 
 fiaro<: dr/iov iaTi; M. 1. 16. In G. 4. 4, f^evo/ievop ix yvpaixo^ 
 is added to toi^ viop avrov to attest the real manhood of Ohrist : 
 //. y. 896, i^ ifiov yipo^ iaal, thou comest of me by descent. 
 
 Appurtenance: 1 J.. 3. 12, ov xadixi Kdip ix tov Trovrjpov ^p: 
 J. 18. 37, o i>p ix T^ dXiideiai, he that is on the side of the 
 Author of Truth. 
 
 Derivation from some source, occasion, cause, inducement : 2 
 
 0. 2. 4, ix rro\Xi]t 0\i^emii ir/pa^a : 1 T. 1. 6, drfd-mi ix xadapoM 
 xapSian Bey. 15. 2, vix&ptu^ ix tov drjplov: J. 8. 44, ix t&v 
 iZuov "KoKel, he speaks from the essential properties of his 
 nature. 
 
 ix denotes result, consequence of: G. 3. is, el ydp ix vofiov ^ 
 xkijpopoula, if the inheritance be the result of obedience to the 
 law : G. 3. 21, SvT(oi ix vofiov &p ^v ^ Zixaioavvt) : so 22, 24 : R. 
 
 1. 17, 6 StVatof ix TTtoreo); ([i/o'fTat. 
 
 In its primary ethical sense ix denotes more immediate 
 origin; mro more remote origin; it then passes through the 
 
 i 
 
 \ 
 
 / 
 
 PREP081TION8- 
 
 155 
 
 intermediate ideas of result from, consequence of, to that of nearly 
 direct causality. Immediate origin may be rendered from, 
 direct causaljiy by. We may employ of to express the inter- 
 mediate meanings. Xen. Anah. ii. 5. 2, tow p^v ix iiafioKffi, 
 TO\)<i il i^ {nroy^ia<i, some from calumny, others from suspicion : 
 E. 6. 6, 7, TTOtowjn-e? to Bikij/ta tov Geov ix •^i%^?, /ter evpoia<i 
 Sov'\evovre<{ x.t.\. " ix ■^i^? marks the relation of a servant 
 to his work; /tcT* evvoia<i points to his relation to his master 
 with a weU-afifected mind." (Ellicott.) 
 
 From its sense of derivation ix is used with some verbs for 
 the agent : J. 6. 65, ih> fti} ^ SeSopApop airrw ix tov ttot/jos /tow : 
 Xen. Anab. i. 1. 6, 'lavixai iroXew . . . ix ffaaiXeon SeSop^pat : 
 Cyrop. viii. ix fiaaiXia<i elal xade<rrqxore<}. 
 
 To distinguish a part from the whole : M. 10. 29, Jv e| avr&p : 
 25. 2, Trerre i^ avr&p: A. 10. 45, ol ix irepirop.^<i inaToi: -15. 23, ' 
 dSeX^K TOW ef iffp&v : M. 25. 8, Sore fifiiv ix tov ikalav : 1 C. 
 12. 15, ovx e<m,v ix tov atop^roi. 
 
 ix is used in a periphrasis for adjectives and adverbs : R. 2. 
 8, oi i^ iptBeiafs, those who act from a principle of factious oppo- 
 sition : II. 10. 6, Ti)P hixaioffwnjp Tijv ix rov vopov, the righteous- 
 ness which proceeds from the law: 1 J. 2. 19, «f ■qp&v i^\0ov, 
 dW ovx ^aap ef ■qp^av : Tit. 2. 8, o ef ipapTiai (ypcop,!^) : 
 Xen. Anab. iii. 4. 28, ovx ef taov i<rp,€P, we are not on equal 
 terms: i^ ditpoaZoxrfrov, unexpectedly: ix iro'KKxiv, from a 
 distance. 
 
 ix is sometimes used in a combination of senses : R. 1. 4, c^ 
 dvaaTdae(o<i vexp&p, from, after, by his resurrection from the 
 dead: 1. 17, ix Tr/oreo)? eh iritmv, out of faith as a root, to 
 faith as a tree : 4. 14, oi ix vopjov, those who are of the law, 
 they who spring forth from it, and rest upon it, as a tree rises 
 from and stands upon its root ; opposed to 01 ix Tr/area;, G. 3. 
 9 : cf. R. 2. 8, oi i^ ipiBelat '. 4. 12, oi ix •trepvrop.rfi. 
 
 A contrast between ix and Zm is marked in R. 3. 30, Sf 
 StxaM&o-et ireptTop.riP ix irtoreoif xal dxpo^vtrrlap iih t^« Tr/o-TCO)?, 
 who shall account righteous the circumcision, out of or by faith, 
 which they have as members of the covenant, and the uncir- 
 cumcision passing through the door of faith. " The Gentiles oi 
 1^0) must enter the door of the faith of Abraham, and pass 
 through it in order to be justified" (Wordsworth): R. 11. 36, 
 if auTov xaX BC avrov xal £t9 avrov r^ irairra, " God is the origin, 
 the agent, and the end of all things." (Yaughan.) 
 
166 
 
 PABFOSITIONS — iv, aiv. 
 
 PBEP08ITION8 — ^V. 
 
 157 
 
 CK indicates the closest connexion ; iirS, one less strict ; irapd, 
 OTTO, connexions more remote ; dmo denotes simply the point 
 from which action proceeds, if that point is a person irapd or 
 tnro is employed. If the person is indicated merely in general 
 terms as a spring of action Trapd is used ; but if it is represented 
 as the special, efficient, and producing cause inro is required. 
 airS denotes distance and separatum. The notions of disjoining 
 and removal are implied in airo, ix, which are not conveyed by 
 irapd, V1T&. (Winer.) 
 
 In composition the signification of removal prevails, out, 
 away, off; as iK^oKXa, iKKva, origin; Ixyovn, carrying out, 
 accomplishing ; ix^iyria, utterly ; i^vmxK, SK<f>o^of, ixret^ : 1 
 T. 2. 14, i^airaniOeura, being completely, thoroughly deceived: 
 PhiL 3. II, T^v i^avdajaariv, the thorough, complete resurrec- 
 tion. ■ 
 
 FREFOSITIONS GOVBRNINO THB DATIVB ONLT. 
 
 'Ev and avv agree in origin and signification with the Latin 
 in and cum. But the Greeks employ the larger form evi (eVf) 
 for the Latin in with the accusative. 
 
 iv denotes inclusion, <rw conjunction : 
 
 Of place, of all situated within a given space: L. 11. i, iv 
 Toirtf rivl : M. 8. 6, iv t§ oIkui. 
 
 In the life of, the history of: K. 11. 2, ovk olZare iv 'Hklq. tI 
 Xir^ei 1} 7pa^i} ; H. 4. 7, ^i' ^a/3(S Xer/av. 
 
 Continuance in space: M. 10. I6, avoareKKa vpui iv piatp 
 \vK<ov : L. 5. 16, i^v inroj(ci>p&v iv rati iprifiOK. 
 
 The sphere of action : B. 1. 6, & iraa-i tok lOveaiv : 1. 8, ^i« 
 SK^ t^ Koafup'. M. 17. 12, ivoiijaav iv airr^ S<ra ^diKijaav: 14. 
 2, ai SwdfieK ivegiyoikriv iv avr^: 1 Th. 6. 12, roixi kovi&vtos iv 
 v/uv: R. 1. 31, i/taTauofftjaav iv rot; BiaXoyur/iOK avr&v, the 
 sphere in which their emptiness revelled : B. 6. 4, iv /cati/on^rt 
 ^onjv irepf7raTi]<rii>ft,€v, walk in a new state, of which the charac- 
 teristic is life : E. 2. 10, tva iv avroi^ irepiiraTi^aafiev, in good 
 wor]fs as the field or area in which the motion or conduct is 
 exercised : B. 3. 7, et yiip ^ dX'qdeia toO Qeov iv r& ifim y^eva- 
 fuiTi, hrtpUraevffev eh Tqv ho^av airrov, in my lie, my unfaithful- 
 ness BS the field of its operation : 2 0. 8. l, r^v 'xdpiv rov Geov 
 T^if SeSofUvTiv iv iKKX-qalaK, the gift of God's grace which 
 operated among men : A. 4. 12, ovre yap Svofid iariv Irepov inro 
 Tov ovpavov TO ZiZofiivov iv avOpayiroi^, which is set forth among 
 
 \ 
 
 men: B. 5. 21, &cnrep ifiaatKevtrev fi d^prla iv Tip Oavdrv, as 
 sin reigned in death, the arena of its triumph. (Vaughan.) ^ 
 Element of fxistence: B. 8. l, oiikv &pa vDv Kard^pifia to« 
 iv Xptar^ 'Ivrov, those who are included in Christ, having 
 been inserted into Him, J. 15. 2 ; clothed with Him, G. 3. 27 ; 
 abiding in Him, Ph. 3. 9: B. 9. 1, dX^flewi/ Xi7» «* Xpiimp: 
 B. 14. 14, oUa Kal iriireurfjMi iv Kvpitp 'Iri<rov, (where ev ex- 
 presses the opposite of xwpls Xpurrov E. 2. 12, J. 15. 6, e^ra- 
 neous to, or independent of Christ,) under the influence of Him 
 who is the truth, included in Him, and exercising that union m 
 the particular judgment formed and expressed: 1 T. 4. 15, ev 
 TovTOit Udii 1 0. 15. 18, oi KotfivSivTei iv Xpiara: G. 3. 28, 
 iravres i/iet? els iare iv Xpurr^: 3. 8, ivev7u)ri0^<rovrai, iv aol 
 irdvra rk S0vv: Ph. 3. 9, Kal evpe0& iv avr^, and may be 
 abiding in Him: E. 1. 20, fiv ivnpn<rev iv^ r£ Xpurr^, as the 
 sphere of action: 1. 17, A* iirvyvaurei airov, in mature acquaint- 
 ance with Him. The knowledge of God was to be the sphere, 
 the circumambient element in which they were to receive 
 wisdom and revelation : 2. 2, & ah irori irepixnarnaare, the 
 sphere in which they usually moved : 4. 1, o Uafuot iv Kvpup^ 
 the captivity is referred to union with Christ and devotion to 
 His service; so 6. 21, hui,icovo<: iv KvpCtp: 3. 18, iv a/fdiry ippu- 
 ^(OfiivoL Kal Tedep^Xuopivoi, this was to be their basis and foun- 
 dation if they would realize all the majestic proportions of 
 Christ's love to man. Both these meanings are sometimes 
 combined: L. 4. 32, X070? iv i^ovala: 1 T. 2. 7, Si£dtrKdXm iv 
 irlaTei Kal aXvOelq : 3. 4, riKva iv {nrorar^ : Tit. 3. 5, ouk ef 
 epymv r&v iv iiKauxrwr) &v hrovfiffaiiev VH^h : 2 P. 2. 7, tnro 
 tQs t&v dOeapMV ev dtreXrfeia dvatrrpo^i. 
 
 The efficient cause: M. 9. 34, iv tw apxovri t&v Saifutvluv 
 iK^dXXei Th, Sai/tovia: H. 10. lo, eV ^ 0eXr}(MiTt rnuurpxvoi 
 ifffiev, in the fulfilment of which will (9). 
 
 Instrumental adjunct, or adjunct of manner, the iv of investi- 
 ture: L. 22. 49, el iraTa^ofiev iv iMxalpq, sword in hand: Ja. 
 3. 9, iv avT^ iiXaairp) evXoyovp.ev tov Beov : 1 C. 2. 4,^ to 
 Kripvip-d nov OVK iv ireidoh dvOparrrlviii ao^ia<i "XMyoK, oXX' iv 
 dirohei^et irvevpuTO^ : 4. 21, iv pd^l<p eXdw irpo? u/tSs ; H. 9. 22, 
 iv alfJMTt irdvra Kadapl^erai : E. 6. 2, ivroXi) irpmn) iv eVoTye- 
 Xia. in point of promise; the first command we meet with 
 which involves a promise. 
 
 E. 3. 12, T^i» vpoaarftayr^v iv veiroiOtjaet, an admission in 
 
158 
 
 PREFOSITIONa-T-^l'. 
 
 i 
 
 PREPOSITIONS— ev. 
 
 159 
 
 oonfidenoe ; h>, the predication of manner, defining the tone 
 of mind in which the admission is enjoyed and realized i E. 
 4. 17, /laprvpo/uu ip Kvpl^, the element in which, the sphere 
 in which the declaration is made ; so R. 9. i : 2 0. 2. 17 : 1 Th. 
 4. 1. 
 
 ip Xpurr^, a term of deep significance, implying union and 
 fellowship with Christ. 
 
 E. 4. 19, lavTov9 irapiBaKav t0 daeKfyel^ ew ipyaaiav okoi- 
 dapa'uvi TTocnfi iv •n\eove^i<f, the condition, the prevailing state 
 or frame of mind in which they wrought the aKadapvla. 
 
 E. 4. 33, 6 Qeh<i iv Xptorf), God in Ohrist ; in giving Him to 
 be a propitiation for our sins : 0. 3. 17, trdvra iv ivofiari Kvplov 
 'Itjaov : E. 6. 20, the name of Ohrist is that general holy element 
 in which every thing is to be received, to be enjoined, to be 
 done, to be suffered : E. 6. 21, viroTaaa6fievoi dXXij^ois iv <f>6^<p 
 Xpurrov, the prevailing feeling or sentiment in which inrortvfij 
 is to be exhibited. " Ex timore Ghristi, quia scilicet Ohristum 
 veneremur, eumque timemus offendere." (Corn.-a-Lap.) 
 
 E. 6. 1, inraKovere to($ yovevaiv vfi&v iv Kvpup, this defines 
 and characterizes the nature of the obedience: iv oh &v ftij 
 irpoaKpovaji^ Kvpltp. (Ghrysostom.) 
 
 E. 1. 15, irioTW iv t^ Kvpl^ 'Iiiaov, Christ-centered faith. 
 When the defining prepositional clause is incorporated with, 
 appended to, or structurally assimilated with the substantive 
 as to form only a single conception, the article is correctly 
 omitted. See p. 37. 
 
 G. 1. 16, diroKaXvy^at tov vlov airov iv ifioi, within me. 
 XpuTTov el'}(ev iv iavr^ XaXofivra. (Ghrysost.) The Apostle 
 was prepared for the work of the ministry subjectively by deep 
 inward revelations, as well as objectively by outward manifesta- 
 tions. (Ellicott.) 
 
 1 Th. 2. 3, iv SoXf>, in any deliberate intention to deceive. 
 "The use of iv, especially with abstract or non-personal sub- 
 stantives, is always somewhat debateable in the New Testament, 
 and can only be fixed by the context: it sometimes librates 
 towards Sui, both with genitives (1 P. 1. 5), and accusatives 
 (M. 6. 7), sometimes towards fterd (C. 4. 2), sometimes towards 
 Kara (H. 4. u), but is commonly best referred to the imaginary 
 sphere in which the action takes place." (Ellicott.) 
 
 1 Th. 3. 13, rat KapSitu dfiefvirroiK iv dyiaavvjj, their hearts 
 were to bo unblameablo (proleptio use of the adjective, like 
 
 dvefKK^ov,, 1 0. 1. 8 ; a6fi^p4>ov. Ph. 3. 21). and not simply 
 bkmeless, but in a sphere and element of holiness. 
 
 1 Th 4 18, the iv is here used in that species of instrumental 
 sense in which the action of the verb is conceived as existmg 
 in the means. The -^apdKMai^ may be conceived as contained 
 in the divinely-inspired words themselves: "Solent Graeci pro 
 Latinorum ablative instrumenti saepe iv prsepositionem ponere, 
 significaturi in e& re cujus nomini praepositio adjuncte est, vim 
 aut facultatem aUcujus rei agenda sitam esse." Wunder. ^ ^ 
 
 1 Th. 5. 18, toOto 7Ap eSKrilM Oeov iv Xpump- Ii»^w e« 
 Ip&t. Christ is represented as the sphere, in which the dikfiiM 
 is evinced, and has its manifestation. ^ ^ 
 
 1 Th. 5. 26, d<nrdaaaee roi>v aSeX^ow vdvra^s ev ^CKruuiTi 
 S^U. iv, simply instrumental, the .^t'Xij/*a^ being that in which 
 the o^nrflo^/w? was involved, where 'the object may be con- 
 sidered as received into, contained, held, existing in the means. 
 
 Jelf, Or. § 622. 3. - „ / . 
 
 2 Th. 2. 13, erXaro ifiav . . . iv aryiaap^ nvevfuiro<i. ev 
 denotes the spiritual state in which the £?XaTo ek atarnpUv 
 was realized. 
 
 2 Th. 2. 16. ikirlha c^aO^v iv x«/>t". m the accompanying 
 element of grace and love. y , a • *.< 
 
 1 T. 2. 7, Bi£daKaXo<t idv&v iv irurrei koI aXijOeu}, the 
 spheres in which the Apostle performed his mission. ^ We may 
 refer wt'«rr« to the subjective faith of the Apostle, oXij^eia to 
 the objective truth of the doctrine he delivered. 
 
 1 T. 3. 4, T^w« ex""^* «'" virortviy. If a participle or ad- 
 jective had been used, though the meaning would have been 
 nearly the same, the idea presented to the mind would have 
 been different; in the one case, subjection would have been 
 noticed as a kind of attribute ; in the present case it is repre- 
 sented as the moral element with which they were surrounded, 
 "The transition from actual, L. 7. 25, to figurative environment, 
 M. 6. 29, and thence to moral deportment, 1 T. 2. 9, or as here, 
 to moral conditions, seems easy and natural." (Ellicott, 1 T. 
 
 3 4.^ 
 
 Tit. 1. 13, e\efx,e avroixs diroT6/uo<:, Xva {riMotuxriv iv ty 
 irurrei. the object of the sharp reproof was to restore them to 
 health ; the sphere and element in which that doctrinal element 
 was to be enjoyed was ir/ort?. 
 
 Ground, or occasion, of mental emotion : B. 2. 23, 6s iv voiup 
 
160 
 
 IPRBPOSITIONS — avp. 
 
 aura,.: L 10 20. iu to.^.^ ^ X««'^e: E. 3. 13. ^ «*^««rf. 
 
 Continuance in time: M. 2. i, & ^;*4pa.9 'HpciSow: J. 11. lo. 
 iu TV vvKT,: M. 27. 40, «V rpuAv ^^Spai, oIkoSo^p. 
 A point of time : 1 0. 16. 6l, iXKa^a6^ie0a iv droM^. 
 lo result in, take effect in, time yet future : E. 2. 5, d^aavpl- 
 
 Vfiav a><s ep -qfiip^ a^uv^ii. '^ 
 
 Adverbial uses are ip ry ^„ep^. openly : A. 26. 38 : E. 3. 3. 
 
 iv oX^p. in a short compass : A. 7. 13, ip r^ Bevripq,. 
 
 ip m composition retains its usual signification, near. at. in. as 
 
 ipepyia,. evdv^^. i^al^a, : with adjectives it modifies the 
 
 meaning, as ift^tap^, gpSo^i. 
 tnSp denotes close connexion, union, identification in time and 
 
 circumstances, avp impKes coherence, a closer conjunction 
 
 than Mera. coexistence; as, in English, mtA differs from amid, 
 
 among. ' 
 
 In company with: L. 2. 13, iyipero ain> t^J «iyy^ ,rX^^09 
 YpO'Tia^: ovpaplov: A. 14. 28. hi^ptpop i^ei <ri,p toU fmenralii- 
 4. 13 «ru./ T^ 7,«roS iiaap: 1 Th. 4. 17. iraiaore ai,; Kvpm 
 iaop^Oa: L. 1. 56, S^^pe MapiAfi. oiV oir^: Mk. 8. 34, irpoa- 
 KoK^aafiepoi top 6x^v aiv rots /w^^rats airoS : 15. 27. ai>p 
 avT^ aravpovai Bvo Xrjardv. 
 
 Identification : A. 14. 4, oi ^Lh, ^aap ain> rot? 'lovBaU, ol Se 
 <Tvp roK a'n-o<rT6\oK : G. 3. 9, ol iK Triareaxt eiXoyovvra^ ain, rS 
 VKrro, A^padft. Compare ol aip rtw. the friends of any one : 
 aw Ttvt ehai, or ylyveaffai,. to be of his party. 
 
 Assistance, co-operation : 1 C. 5. 4. airp ry ivpdp^i rov Kvplov : 
 IS. 10. r, xapK rov Oeov <ri>p i^l: A. 14. 6, i^hero 6p^i, r&p 
 iff PUP reKal lovSaiap trim to?? apxpvaip airr&p. 
 
 Addition, accession, over and above, besides: M. 25 27 
 iKo^i<rdp,yp &p ri i^p aip roKtp: L. 24. 21, ai,p -iraai robots.- 
 Ja. 1. II, apereiXe yetp 6 ^Xtos avp r^ Kauatopi. 
 
 Thus avp is used of necessary connexion, consequence : Xen. 
 Cyr. aw ry cr^ d^a0^. to your advantage, ' tuo cum commodo : ' 
 21. ly. 161, aw fieydXa, diroriaai. to pay with a great loss. 
 
 aw 18 often used in combination with &^, which generally 
 means connexion in respect of time: as 1 Th. 4. 17, 5/xa aip 
 avToi<i apnrarnaop^ea. at the same time, together with them: 
 but m some passages has the further idea of aggregation : R 
 
 i 
 
 PREPOSITIONS— ei<S. 
 
 161 
 
 'li 
 
 3. 12, &fui ^eutBrjaap. Hence the force of 1 Th. 6. 10, i/*o 
 owv avT^ ^•qaa/iep, all together (£/ua) united with him (avp). 
 
 avp in composition denotes fellowship, union, agreement, as 
 avveadUo. av/JL<pa>pea : the completion of an action, as avfi- 
 irXripoa : intensity, as avyKvirra. 
 
 e*9 is a lengthened form of & (= ivi), and signifies 'to' or 
 ' into.* with a decided expression of motion or tendency ; ad or 
 in c. accus. 
 
 Motion to an object: M. 2. 11. ik06vre<: eli t^v oUiapi 3, 10, 
 6« irvp ^dWerai: L. 8. 8. eireaep eti t^i» y^v: A. 16. 40, 
 elaffKJdop e« i^w Avhlav, i. e.. her house ; as Ter. Eun. ' Eamus 
 ad me.' So perhaps A. 23. 11, ew 'lepovaaKrip,, ek 'Pio/iitv, as 
 thou bearest witness by coming to Jerusalem, so thou shalt 
 bear witness by going to Rome. 
 
 The object to which an action is directed: M. 18. 15, iap 
 apMpriqari eU ak o aSeX^o? aov '. 26. 10, eprfov Kokap etpydaaro 
 eh ifii. 
 
 Thus we may explain G. 3. 27, eh Xpiarop i^airriadiyre, ye 
 were admitted into Christ by baptism; "ut Christo addicti 
 essetis" (Schott.): 1 C. 12. 13, iv evi irvevfiaTi,, ■^fteh iravre'; eh 
 iv a&fta i^airrladrjfiep : R. 6. 3, oaoi i^airrlaBTjiiev eh Xptarop 
 ^Irjaovv eh top ddvarov avrov i^airrladtjfiep. " Our union is 
 with Christ crucified ; with Christ, not as a man living upon 
 earth before death, but as one who has died, and vrith dis- 
 tinct reference to His death. See J. 12. 24. Before dea,th He 
 was a Teacher: death alone could make Him a Saviour." 
 (Vaughan.) Compare R. 8. 3*4 : 1 P. 3. 22. 
 
 The meaning of eh with fiairrl^at appears twofold : unto, 
 object, purpose, M. 3. 1 1 ; A. 2. 38 ; into, union and communion 
 with ; the context showing whether it be of the most complete 
 and mystical nature, as G. 3. 27; R. 6. 3 ; 1 C. 12. 13, or as in 
 1 C. 10. 2, necessarily less comprehensive and significant. The 
 expression, fiairr. eh to opofia, M. 28. 19 ; A. 8. 16 ; 19. S, is 
 not identical in meaning with Pairr. ip t^ opo/uiti,, but ever 
 implies a spiritual and mystical union with Him in whose 
 name the sacrament was administered. M. 10. 41, o Sep^o/ievos 
 irpo<f>i^rn^p eh Svo/ia irpotfujrov. i. e. to do him honour as a 
 prophet. 
 
 In the cases where eh is said to be used for iv, motion is 
 implied. This is obviously the case in M. 2. 23, ixdmp KaTttucri- 
 aev eh iriikiv \erfop4pifP Na^pir. 
 
 M 
 
162 
 
 PREPOSITIONS— et?. 
 
 We may obserre, too, that ^hJBev precedes in Mk. 1. 0, 
 ifiairriadt) {nri 'ladwov eli top 'lopSdvTjv: L. 11. 7, t^ iraiSla 
 ftov fier iftoD et? ttiv Koirqv elalp, my children, with myself, 
 have gone to bed, and are there still: Bey. 6. is, Hxpuyfrav 
 eavToixi elt rh, <nrr{Kaui, ran into the caves for shelter, and kept 
 themselves hid: Caesar, B. (?., "abdidenmt se in silvas:" 
 Thucyd. i. 133, ii 9)v (xoKvfi'qv) t&v re i<f>6p<ov imoi riva^ 
 CKpir^e. L. 7. 60, iropevov eh etpi^vijv: here eh marks a tran- 
 sition of feeling ; in Ja. 2. 16, {nrar/ere iv elp^vjn, no such change 
 is implied. 
 
 In other cases where iv is said to be used for eh, continuance 
 in the state is implied : L. 24. 38, BmtI StdKoyurfiol ava^aivovaiv 
 h) rah KupSlaii v/t&v} 1 T. 3. I6, ipe\ij^0r} iv Sofy. With 
 this we may compare Thucyd., airotrriXXeiv OTrXtra; iv t§ 
 StKfXla : Ovid, Fast. iii. 664, ' in sacri vertice mentis abit.' 
 
 The use of eh in the New Testament closely corresponds 
 with the three idiomatic meanings, with respect to, with a view 
 to, to the amount of. (Donaldson, 478.) 
 
 ' With respect to : ' A. 2. 25, AafilB \Sr/ei, eh avrov : A. 
 25. 20, diropoviievoii eh rrpi irepi tovtov ^rJTTjaiv: M. 12. 41, 
 fterevoriaav eh to Kijpvyfia 'lava: B. 15. 31, ^ huiKovla /lov 
 ^ eh 'lepovtraX^fi. 
 
 Mental direction towards : B. 16. 6, iicoviaaev eh v/ioi. 
 
 ' With a view to,' ' the end designed,' ' destination :' Mk. 1. 4, 
 Ktipvaaav Pdirriafut fieravola^ eh a^eaiv anapriStv. M. 27. 7, 
 rf^opaaav rbv ayphv eh raipifv Toi? ^evoh : 1 Th. 3. 5, ^Tre/i^a eh 
 TO fv&vai T^i* irlcrnv Vfi&v : 2 T. 1. 12, £t9 ixeivrjv ri)v fifiipav : 
 E. 4. 30, iv ^ ia<f>pa/yla07p-e eh ^fiipav dTroKirrpda-em. 
 
 To this ethical sense of destination we may ascribe some 
 passages in which the primary force seems to be lost: Ph. 2. I6, 
 2r( ovK eh Kevov iBpa/iov ovSe eh xevop ixoirlaaa, fbr a fruitless 
 object : G. 2. 3 : 1 Th. 3. 5, eh kcvov yivnirai, prove in vain. 
 
 'To the amount of,' 'the end attained:' A. 19. 27, KivBvpevei 
 Tjfuv TO (lepo^ eh aire\eyfiip iXdetp ... to t^s fieydXryi Oeat 
 'ApTefuSo<i lephp eh oiSip Xoyiaffijvai, : B. 2. 26, owj^i 1} dxpo^vorla 
 avTov eh irepno/iriv XoyiaBijaeTai ; 4. 22, ikor/iadif ainm eh 
 SiKauxTvvtjv : 10. 1, ^ Ser}aii ^ vpo^ top Oeov inrip tow 'I<rpa'^\ 
 iariv eh <Ta>Tqpiav : 1 P. 1. 5, >}>povpovfiepovi Stit triaTea^ eh 
 cunriplap: B. 8. 18, irpo^ rijp fieWovaap So^ap d'iroKa\v(l>6rjpai, 
 eh ^/ia?, reaching to us : G. 2. 8, eh airoaroXijp, for the success- 
 ful performance of the Apostleship : iriareveiv eh Xpiarop, eh 
 
 VBEPOSITIONS — e«. 
 
 163 
 
 
 TO Spop^ airrov, is to be brought by beUef into the body of 
 Christfto be made a member of His body. The spint which 
 He gave, eh f,p^^, not merely f,f^tv. is the spirit infused into us 
 
 Though the above comprehend the principal uses ofew, yet 
 from the frequency of its occurrence in the New Testament we 
 may make further subdivisions. « «• 
 
 'Intention,' 'aim,' without the accessory idea of attam- 
 ment: 1 Th. 2. 12, d?ifi.« tow BeoO roO Ka\4,vvro^ w/*as e« t^i; 
 iavrov ^oaiK^lav Kal Sofav: 1 Th. 5. 16, rh i^adop huoKere Koi 
 eh dWnXov^ Ka\ ehfrdprai: 1 T. 6. 17, t^ ,rap^om vf^^ 
 •hdvra -KKovaiax; eh MXavaiv : 2 Th. 1. 5, iple^p^ rr,^ St*a«x? 
 Kpl<rem rov Oeov eh ri Kara^uoOnv^ ifi&<: t^« ^aaiUCa^rov 
 Seov, not purely the purpose, but rather ^he object to which 
 the SvBevyua tended; "the general direction and tendency ot 
 the KpUr^i was that patient and holy sufferers should be ac- 
 counted worthy of God's kingdom. Their sufferings estabbBhed 
 no claim to the kingdom, but formed the avenue which led to it, 
 A. 14. 22; B. 8. 17." (Ellicott.) . , , . , 
 
 Attainment is impUed in 2 0. 4. 4, eh to /*», avyacra, mn-ot? 
 Til/ dx^iaabv K.T.X.: 7. 9, iKviHfiTrre eh fierdpoMPi L. Id. 19, 
 iyipero eh BipBpop p^a: G. 3. 24, Sore i p6^ wa^Swy^o^ 
 f,pJ!>p •y^opev eh Xpwriv, so that the law became our slave- 
 tutor, handing us over to Christ. 
 
 Besult, without any expression of intention or aim : K. 1. so, 
 eh rh elva^ airoi^s ai/aTroXoT^row : 1 Th. 2. 16, eh to AvoTrXijpo)- 
 aa» Thi dp.apTia<: nrdvTore : H. 11. 3. m to p.i, iic ^vop^v rh 
 ffKejr6p.€va fyeyovhai: B. 11. 32, <rvviK)uuTe yhp 6 Oeo? tow 
 nrdvroi eh irreldeiap: B. 6. 16, Bov^i i<rre ^ inraKovere, Jjro* 
 dp^fnlai eh Bdvarop fj {maKafp eh SiKauxrvprjv, either of sin 
 resulting in death, or of obedience resulting in righteousness: 
 2 0. 8. 6, eh ro irapaKuXiaai ij/ta? Tirov: G. 3. 17, eh to 
 Karafy^aai T^v i-iroffyeKuiP : 1 Th; 2. 12, fiaprvpop^oi eh to 
 irepiirareip i/ta? a^lon. 
 
 The preposition indicates the purpose of the foregomg ex- 
 hortation and appeal : perhaps in no case does it simply indicate 
 result; yet there are several passages in which the purpose is 
 so far blended with the subject of the prayer, entreaty, &c.. or 
 the issues of the action, that we may recognize a secondary and 
 weakened force in reference to purpose, analogous to the ecbatic 
 
 use of ha. v v • 
 
 In some passages we have irpo? marking one object, which is 
 
 M 2 
 
■t.\>t 
 
 PSEFOSIXIOMS —dvd. 
 
 Ae means of acoomph«hing an ulterior object denoted by «V : 
 
 mln« o7»i-^'^ '""'"^*' ""^^'^ *^« ^'"'"^'^e t° Christ is the 
 means of being incorporated into Him: R. 4. 26. -^ph, &S«ft„ 
 
 rrj' """'*''?':>f^'' ^^^ '^'- «» ^P70. &a.o.^, eh oUoSof^l 
 rov <r(ofiaTov tov Xptarov. 
 
 The foUowing adverbial usages occur in Xenophon • eh 
 -Vo.. seasonabbr: eh d^^oylav, abundantly: ef, T^^auv 
 to the u most of our power: eh Z.Ka.oaivr,l i>CKl2 J^Zvl 
 
 resDecr^.i/ V ?""'' *"" ""^ "^ "««= "» '^«'^«. ^^ every 
 res^^t. e« ;.i. „..«, as to this; Latin, -quod attinet:' Z 
 
 «JL"""?^''*'°" "' '"^^' ^*^ "^^^^ Bignification. .Wo: «V. 
 
 2^ ^««r.W«. «^o„ ^, i^ovpdvu>v, shaU save and bring me to 
 
 3 t""!!^" '"?nf ° ^™™ P°"*^°°- 'r^« P'-^^'^t sovereignty 
 and kmgdom of Christ in heaven is impUed in E. 1. 20 • ?7 
 and expressed in 1 C. 15. 26. . ^" "*" ' ^' **• •♦ 
 
 «W occurs in the New Testament only in the accusative 
 Wfif ™^'^ "fifi-tion «^. «^.„; fi^ed from «W i 
 ^ax« from ^aro.. The poets use it with other cases, equiva ent 
 to wrep with the genitive,^,' with the dative. ^ 
 
 -.rind W ""r*'"' *^T " "^ ^""'*""* '^'^*^*^««^ ^'^^^ 
 L^nJ- 1 ; ? """ ""/'"' verticaUy, upward. Kard means 
 
 toX If ^^ ^; ""^r^**- " -"- «"P^««««« ^°"-°^t«l "motion 
 to ttie east, Kard would express motion to the west 
 
 Up and down: M. 13. 25, Sa^e^p, fi{ii^,„ «va u^«ro,; toO 
 
 -.ro.: Mk. 7 3.. «.a ;».W ra. 6pi^. J.^-^^Xeo., : 1 sT 
 
 ^rottrrrbrir * '^' '*^'"'' -' ''^^^ -^- ^*— 
 
 • 7^!^"°"""^^ n"" ^"^^ * distributive force : M. 20. 9. S^uBov 
 
 Adverbial usages : 1 14. 27. d.a ;.^po,, by turns: E«v. 
 xil. 21. aud eU eKatrrot. each one severaUy 
 
 In composition d.ci has the force of uptcards, as clv«;9a/.a. • 
 as avapi^m : improvement, as dvuKoivl^. pewaon. 
 
 Sid WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 165 
 
 Prepositions which govern a genitive and accusative are Sia, 
 Kard, irepl, vtrip. 
 
 Sid denotes separation and disjunction. With the accusative 
 it indicates the final cause, the primary, remote invisible end ; 
 with the genitive it indicates the medium, the secondary, proxi- 
 mate visible means. Sid with the genitive corresponds to per; 
 with the accusative to propter, lliis distinction is well pre- 
 served in the foUowing passages: Arist. £lth. iv. 13, § 16. aJ 
 yiip Swaareiai xal 6 TrXourof Sid t^v rifu^v (propter honorem) 
 ioTiv aiperd' oi yow ly(pvre^ avrd ri/ta<T0ai Si ain&v (per ea) 
 fiovKovrai : H. 2. 10, Si hv rd irdvra xai Si oi ra trdvra : 1 0. 
 11. 9. 12. ovK iicTUT07i dviip Sidrtiv ywaiKa, dWd 71/1/^ Std tov 
 avSpa ... 6 dv^p Sid rfjv ywaiKov : H. 6. J, Si o{^ yetopr/eirai, 
 for the sake of whom : Si' &v, by the instrumentality of whom. 
 
 This distinction is not invariably maintained, as in answer to 
 the question ' whither P' (quo.) Sui has the accusative, and is 
 rendered by per, e. g., Sid wovtiop mifui, along the ocean 
 wave. Yet here we may render Sid, ' by favour of,' ' by the aid 
 of,' ' owing to.' 
 
 Sid WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 Sid, 0. gen., has the local sense of passing throtigh, which 
 includes that of proceeding from, and passing out : Mk. 1 1. 16. 
 oyic i]ifu€» "va rh Sieveyien ffxevoi Sid rov lepov: 1 T. 2. IS. 
 tnoO^aerai Sid tQ? reievoyoviai: Rev. 21. 24, irepiirarijaovai rd 
 eOvq Sid rov ^rof ainif;, as their element and atmosphere: 
 1 G. 3. IS, ainot SI atoBijaerai, ovra^ Sk ci>f Sid irvpo^ : 1 P. 3. 20, 
 SieamdTjaav St* vSaroi, 'through and out of:' Cicero de Divin.. 
 " Non nasci longe optimum, nee in hos scopulos incidere vitse ; 
 proximum autem, si natus sis. tanquam ex incendio efibgere 
 fortunse." 
 
 In a temporal sense ; after an interval : M. 26. 61, Sid rpi&v 
 fifiep&v'. Mk. 2. 1, Si ffitepuv. G. 2. 1. Sid SeKareaadpav ir&v. 
 
 Duration: 11. 2. is, St^ iravro^ roO ^v: L. 5. s. Si SKr/i rifi 
 wicrov Kormd(iavre<{. 
 
 From the ideas of space and time Sid acquires the general 
 idea of intervention, and denotes any cause, primary or secon- 
 dary, material or instrumental, through the medium of which 
 an action passes to its accomplishment : J. 1. 3. irdvra St' avrov 
 iyevero : M. 1. 22. to pr)dh> xnrb rov Kvpiov Sid rov irpo^»irov : 
 A. 3. 16, 4 TTi'oTtf 1} Si airrov : 1 C. 16. 3, oD« idv 8om/ta<njTe 
 
166 
 
 Sid WITH THE OKMITIVK. 
 
 ii hrioTok&p: 2 0. 9. 13, Bui i^s SoKifiiyi rffi SiuKovloi ravTi]<i 
 Sofafoi/res TOi/ Geov: 2 P. 1. 3, tou KdKeaavTO<! v/'^i Sia So^v 
 Kol dpeTTJv, by a display of glory and goodness : G. 2. 16, St/eat- 
 ovTM avOpomrtxs . . . Sid nrlarem 'Iijffov Xp., ' faith is not the 
 mean by which grace is wrought or conferred, but the mean 
 whereby it is accepted or received' (Waterland) : G. 3. is, t^ 
 'Afipadfi Si hra/f)fe\ia<i Ke)(dpiaTai o 8e6<s, God freely gave the 
 inheritance to Abraham by means of promise. " The enjoyment 
 of the inheritance depended on no conditions, came through no 
 other medium save that of promise." (Ellicott.) 
 
 So Sid denotes any attending circumstance or quality, par- 
 ticularly in a state of transition, literally passing through a 
 state, being in the state, way, or manner : 2 0. 3. 1 1, et yap to 
 KUTapyov/iepop Sid So^i iroKK^ fiaKKov to fUvov iv So^j), for if 
 that which was in a vanishing condition was invested with 
 glory, much more that which remaineth abideth in glory. The 
 law passes, the prophets pass Sid S6^, but the Gospel remains, 
 ever remains ip So^y. 2 0. 5. 7, Sid irlareai wepiiraTovfiep, ov 
 Sid elSov<i, by faith, by sight, as the means by which we are 
 guided, the way we pass through : comp. Xen. Anab. ii. 5. 2, 
 Sid aKOTow Tra? Trora/io? Svatropov, where one has no knowledge 
 every river is di£Scult to pass: iii. 2. 4, Sid ■jrioTeat airroii 
 eavToiKi epej(eiptaap, committed themselves to them with confi- 
 dence : R. 8. 25, et Se h ov fikerrofiep iKiri^ofiep Si vtrop,opr)<i 
 wKiKSejfpixeda : H. 12. l , St' inro/iopfjv Tpejftap.ep top TrpoKeifiepop 
 SpofMP : R. 16. 32, J*a S\0<o -irpo<! vfiai Sid deKruiaTOt Qeov. 
 
 This usage may be traced to its local sense, and is generally 
 found with verbs of motion marking the road or line of action : 
 H. 9. 12, Sid 70V ISiov aifiuToi; eiariKBep: R. 2. 27, top Sid f^pap,- 
 pMTOi Kal vepiTO/irjii irapafidTt)p, that hast broken through tho 
 barrier of the written law, and hast violated the rite of circum- 
 cision. 
 
 R. 14. so, xamp tw dpdpanr^ t& Sid TrpoaK6p,pMTO<i iaOiovri, 
 it is evil to the man who eats breaking through the con- 
 sideration of the scandal. Comp. Caesar, B. O. i. 46, "eos a 
 se per fidem in colloquio circumventos," under cover of plighted 
 faith, with a breach of faith : 2 C. 6. lO, 'iva Kop,UnyTai iKatrrot 
 Td S(d TOW aa>pMTo<i, that each one may receive for himself his 
 store, by the instrumentality of the body : 2 C. 10. i, irapaKoKu 
 i/ta? Sid Ttjii wpavTtiTO'i Kai eirieiKeiai tou Xpurrov, as the in- 
 strument and means by Avhich I would move you. So R. 12. 
 
 Sid WITH THE ACCXJSATIVE. 
 
 167 
 
 • 
 
 , ; 15. 30,, a., .p^ess. the i^tn^^t ^ -^^or^^o. ^f^^ 
 
 tL -P'^^^^';^T!Lri'^^^^^^ were 
 
 as the 'causa medians through wuom "^ ''" ^ ^^ 
 
 declared, by whose blessed "^A^-'^^/^^^irth" impor- 
 
 deUver them. The ^^^^^^XTIToC^^^^^^ ^-^"^ 
 tance of the commands. ^ JJ' *• '*^;VJ^ J^ recounted as 
 ^Inaov. those who through his Tf^? S^ tlvxa),, uapT.5p«v, 
 .1 •„„.' 9T 2 2 & r^/cou<ra? Trap ipav bM voKKov p^prtu^i , 
 
 be gone t^-°"g^^^![°;«. J^f '^\ ,a ^ad^p^ra t&. i^xtS. 
 circumstances attending it. ^- * ; "'. ' iTL^^o \y^ oppasion 
 
 h „, JverbUl «m»: B. M. », <^ "^ ^ ""'"■ "" 
 thing u imdean in Mid of ite own nature. 
 
 5l(i WITH THE ACCTJSATIVB. 
 
 ± M hLdToek\vnA.aovfi<rapKa\licTUTOriaav. 
 
 4. 11, ftM* TO i/eA.7,^ ' s.f^eopovSidThp'Iri'fovppaPov. 
 
 t^iZ z t ^;l : 16. ... 8.^ -r fr ^ '-'""' '"' ■■ 
 
168 
 
 Kurd WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 KUra WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 169 
 
 Satan takes advantage of the want of self-control to tempt : B. 
 
 4. 36, h<i irapeSoOt) Siei rit irapairrdfjuna '^fi&v Koi ff^epdr) iih, rijv 
 hiKaUoaw ^fi&p, for the sake of our offences which rendered his 
 death necessary, for the sake of securing our acceptance : B. 13. 
 
 5. ov fMvov BiA TTiv OfTf^v, dXXd Acat Zih rifv awelSTjaiv, not only 
 for the sake of wrath to avoid it, hut also for the sake of con- 
 science to preserve it, Kadapav 1 T. 3. 9, and avpoaicoirov A. 
 24. 16 : J. 6. 67, fu Sih rov iraripa, for the sake of, to carry out 
 his intentions and purposes : R. 6. ig, avdpdmtvov Xeya) Sik ttiv 
 aaOeveuw t^« aapKov vfuitv, I use a human illustration, as the 
 infirmity of your flesh demands such a mode of instruction : H. 
 
 6. 3, Kal St' aMfv o^elXei k.t.X., by reason of this very human 
 infirmity he is morally bound : B. 14. 15, el f^hp Sia ^p&fia 6 
 aSeX^Mf aov Xweirai, for if owing to meat thy brother is 
 distressed in mind: B. 8. ll, ^tooiroiija-ei koI rh Binyrk aafuvra 
 vn&v iih TO ivoiKovv avrov itvevfut hi vfilv. 
 
 We may regard as adverbial usages : H. 6. 12, hUi top xpovov, 
 by reason of the length of time : Siii rl ; or huvrl ; for what P 
 wherefore : comp. Od., Si araadaXiaf hradov, they suffered for 
 their follies : hik troKKd, for many reasons. 
 
 In composition £«£ has the meaning of all through, across, as 
 Siafiaivot: thoroughly, as SiuKadapl^m: mutually, SiaXKdaam, 
 BiaXeyofiai : asunder, SiayvyvdxrKto, Stavifuo. 
 
 KOTO. WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 Kara, with the genitive denotes vertical motion or direction, 
 doion upon; with the accusative it signifies horizontal motion or 
 direction, along. 
 
 Descent from a higher place: M. 8. 32, ap/tijcrev iraaa ^ 
 ofyeXtj icarh, rov Kprfuvov: Mk. 14. 3, Korexeev avrov xarit t^s 
 Ke^aXrj^. 
 
 Motion or direction upon, through: A. 27. I4, e^aXe Kar 
 avriy! avefjux} TVif>a»viK6i : L. 4. 14, 0j;/mj e^X0e Kaff SXijs t^v 
 •Kipi-^uipov, hence from the action of raising the hand in attesta- 
 tion of the oath : M. 26. 63, i^opKl^a ae Karh, rov Qeov. 
 
 The object to which the action is directed : Jude 1 5, iroirfaai, 
 KpuTiv Korii iravrav : J. 18. 29, rlva KaTtjyoplav <f>ipeTe Korci. rov 
 avBpunrov toutov ; So we say, "down upon him,' in a hostile 
 sense. Mk. 9. 40, &« ovk iart xaff v/i&p, inrep vfi&p iartp : M. 
 10. 35, Statural apdpanrop Karh rov irarpoi avrov : A. 25. 27, fiif 
 Kol Tav Kar airrov atrial vrjuaPM. 
 
 i 
 
 1 • on A 9 i Karh BaJBov: nrrax^la airrap. 
 So we may f P^^^^^^^.; V;J^^^^^ reached downward 
 their deep-sunk poverty, their penury wm 
 
 to the depth. 
 
 Kara WITH THE accusative. 
 With an accusative Kard denotes the point ^-'^f^^^f'^;^ 
 tenl^h. course along whi^ ^^ ^^^ZH^^^^^^' ^^^^ 
 
 From this arises the distributive sense : L. 8. i. Siu>beve 
 
 voXap KaX Karh KmiiTfV. x ..^^.LQolap- Vh. 
 
 Direction towards: A. 8. 26, rropeiov Karh ,ieavfPplap. rn 
 
 3. 14, Karh aKonhp Su!>k<o. . Q T 1 l. a7ro<rroXo5 
 
 Sometimes purpose, object, intention. 2 1. X. i, « 
 Z' hraZexZ Km^, to make known the proxmse of Me 
 ^t' T 1 lT^w1Lxe«Tfi. 0eov, to promote the faith of 
 G^d's eU 1 T. 6. 3, rv >car' eiai^e.ap StW«X.'a, the doctnne 
 God 8 elect. ^ ^- »' '(^ « quae pietaticonsentanea est. 
 
 •^Zl^Z^ of A. -crd i. derived from to locd 
 
 H. 3. 8, <»tA t^ Vf"' "S ^"P^l^- M- 37- ■>. «"™ 
 ^"'SVt!;l?:r:t:^t^ressestherela^ 
 
 aMp M Tot«Te : L. 2. 22, Karh rhp pi^op : M. 16. 27, «J0 W« 
 ZZr-car^ rvv -P«f- airrov: 25. 16, l«^« -r^ ri^p iBu.p 
 
 ''Zle operation of: R. 1. 4. -i ye^,a ^^<r^.: 1 
 
 12 8. &XX^Bi X670. 7v«««^ --t "" "^^ '^"'^ • ' 
 
 icarA Tov &pyopra T»)« ifowffta? tow oepo?. 
 
 Helifl used'of any general -f--« » f J^ = "J". 
 11 21 Kar inuiav X^«, I speak on the subject of disgrace. 
 Ph. 2.' Tfjll^car' TpieLv, nothing by way of fa^housness : 
 
170 
 
 FtlBPOSITIONS — Tre/Jt. 
 
 B. 11. 28, Karh, fiiv rh eiarffiXuv ^dpol St vftS.'i, viewed with 
 reference to the Gospel. 
 
 We may notice too some adverbial and adjectival uses. 
 
 Adverbial: L. 10. 31, Kara avyKvpiav: M. I. 19, '/car' ovap: 
 J. 10. 3, Kar Svofia : A. 18. 14, Kara Xoyov : G. 2. 2, Kara airo- 
 KuXv^iv, in accordance with revelation, not for my own 
 purposes : xar iZiav, privately. 
 
 Adjectival : 2 C. 7. lo, " -q Kark Qeov X&irt), dolor animi Deum 
 Bpectantis et aequentia : dolor ob cidpam : ^ Karct Koaftop Xtrmj, 
 dolor animi mundum spectantia et sequentis; dolor amissi; 
 dolor ob pcenam:" R. 11. 31, t&v Kara <f>vaiv KKaSav: 0. 3. 22, 
 Tot$ Karh adpKa KupioK : A. 17. 28, Ti,ve<: r&v xaff vfi&s iroirjT&v : 
 18. 16, vofjtov Tov leas' vfta<{: E. 1. 15, t^v leaS' vfia<i irUrrw. 
 
 In composition Kurd denotes reference, frequently of an un- 
 favourable kind : KaTeiirelv ri rivoi, to say any thing of another, 
 to make him the subject of some assertion or statement : Kara- 
 fiwiuTKew tI Tivoi, to think or impute in our judgment any 
 thing to another. So KaTa<f>poveiv, KaraBiKci^ew, KaTay^tf>i^ew, 
 KaraKpiveui. Opposed to these are verbs compounded with airo, 
 which deny and in a manner remove the thing spoken of from 
 the subject, and make a separation between them. So anropr 
 vwai, aTTciKoyeiv, airoSiKd^ew, diroKpiveadai. From usage, how- 
 ever, Ka-niyopeiv, and other similar verbs, are generally taken in 
 a bad sense : Kanjyopelp, to accuse ; xaraSt/ca^eu/, to condemn ; 
 Kara^povelv, ' to think down upon,' to despise. (Arnold, Thucyd. 
 i. 95.) 
 
 irepL has nearly the same meaning as d/x^t, which does not 
 occur in the New Testament, trepi means around, * circum,' a 
 completed circle, d/t^t means about, ' utrinque,' an imperfect 
 circle. 
 
 The object about which the action is executed : M. 2. 8, aKpi- 
 0&V i^erda-aTe irepX rov waiSlou : 20. 24, rjyavaKTtiaav irepl t&v 
 8vo aSe\<f>&v: L. 19. 37, aiveiv rov Gebv vepl iracr&v &v elSov 
 Swdfteav : E. 6. 22, rd vepi fipMV (irpdr/fjtara), the circumstances 
 which surround one : 1 J. 2. 2, i\aap>6<: e<m irepl r&v a/uipri&v 
 ^fi&v, propitiation on account of our sins : Xen. Anab. i. 2. 8, 
 viKriaa<i epi^ovra oi irepl <ro<f)ia<i. 
 
 irepi marks the object round about which the action of the 
 verb takes place. In the use of irepi with a genitive the 
 derivative meanings, 'as concerns,' "as regards,' greatly pre- 
 dominate ; the primary idea however still remains : irepi with a 
 
 ^{nrep wrrH the genitive. 
 
 171 
 
 genitive serves to mark an object which is the -ntral ^^nt^rf 
 ^- •*„. 1 f! 19 1 ireolr&v irveviiariKav ov tfi\a» w/**? «7^"^ 
 tteJv^'plt^ Sa formed The centre of the d^p. the 
 fm;ther iTea^ any aetion or motion round it is supplied by 
 ;;r^;h the acLative: 1 T. 6. 4. voa&v irep. ?,t,««. 
 
 ^^!i;frepresents the notion of visible inferiority, one rising 
 above the rest from a visible circle of objects, 'pne ceteris . //. 
 i 287 dXX' 58' dvi,p mxei. irepl iravrwv efip^vai oWubv. 
 
 Ji With the accusative signifies motion or extension around 
 L.T3 8 I.., Stou a.df<o irepl airr^v:^^. 9. 42, X.|o, ,*vW 
 l^epl rh, rpdyriKov airrov: 3. 8, o.' irepl Tipov Kal ^S<.va: A. 
 28. 7, A/ 8^ TOW irepl TOTTow ewetwi/. _x j t in ^n 
 
 The object about which an action is exerted: L. 10. 40, 
 irepteairaro itepl iroKKnv S.aKoviav: A. 19. 25, rov, -/>-«-"- 
 iJidra,: 1 T. 1. 19, irepl rifv irl^^" evavarmcav : 2 T. 2. 18 
 oW irepl rhv d^e^^av i,ar(^<rav, such as concemmg the 
 truth missed their aim: comp. Su^rpl^etv irept rrp, ^^erop^puxv, 
 
 arrovSdtew irepl ri. -.«■ on « _««l 
 
 With vague indications of time and number: M. 20. 3, jep., 
 ri,v rpirriv &pav: A. 22. 6, irepl ,^<n,^fipiav. irepl rpuxxO^ov^ 
 three thousand, moreor less. 
 
 xnrep with the genitive. 
 inrh with the genitive signifies ' super,' above, over an object, 
 in a relative rather than absolute sense; with the accusative 
 the meaning is ' ultra.' with motion implied beyond an object. ^ 
 ' In the pkce of:' Plato, Qorg. 515 c, h,,o virep aov airoKpivov- 
 uat: Philem. 13, Iva inrlp aov pot i^vf,: J. 11. so, <7UAt«^6p« 
 buZv 'iva eh &vdpwiro<: diroddvr, inrkp tow Xuov Kat p.r, o\ov to 
 e-^m diriXvrat: 18. 14, avp^ipet tva &vdp<^ova^o\ea0ai, virep 
 rov -Kaov: R. 5. 6, Xp«rri? irrrkp dae^&vairedave: 1 T. 2. 6, 
 8oi5 iavrhv dvriXxnpov inrep irdvn^v. Comp Eur. ^ ^fc., p.^ 
 dv^ay inrkp roiiS dvlpit. " Tenendum est airodaveiv virep rtvoi 
 non tontum in N. T., sed et apud scriptores profanes sigmficare 
 mori loco alterius." (Valckner.) This comes from the notion 
 of standing over to protect, as a bird wUl receive a blow in- 
 tended for her young ones, or as a shield receives a blow in 
 place of the person who raises it in defence. ^ 
 
 In these passages inrip may mean 'in commodum alicujus, or 
 
I 
 
 172 
 
 inrip WITH THE ACCUSATIVE, 
 
 ' in loco alicujuB.' In doctrinal passages inrep admits the second 
 meaning united with the first, where the context and nature of 
 the argument seem to require it. Where the second is exclu- 
 sively meant the preposition would be ami (vice alicujus). 
 
 In behalf of: M. 5. 44, Trpoaevy^eaffe inrip r&v hntpea^ovriou 
 vftai: A. 26. l, eirirpeireral aoi inrip aeavrov Xeyeiv. Compare 
 //. i. 444, eKaTOfifijjv pi^ai inrep Aavamv: Xen., inrip t^$ 
 iroXeo>9 Bveiv. 
 
 For the purpose of; to carry out, to accomplish : Ph. 2. 13, 
 inrlp rrfi evhoKioi : 2 0. 12. 19, t^ Si irdvra, aryaiTTiToi, inrip t^c 
 vfiav o(Ko8o/t^« : J. 11. 4, imip Sofij? : R. 15. 8, inrip oKijOelai 
 Oeov. 
 
 Concerning, as to taU^ over a matter: Hdt., rh Xeyofieva 
 inrep Tti/09: Virg., "Multa super Priamo rogitans:" R. 9. 27, 
 'Hffata<i Kpd^ei, inrip rov ^laparjKl 2 Th. 2. I, iparufiev i/pM^ 
 inrip t^$ irapovata^ rov Kvpiov ^fi&v: 2 0. 1. 8, ov 6eKop.ev 
 w/*as arfvoelv inrip t^s ffKl-ip-eai ^pMv: 12. 8, inrip tovtov rph 
 rov Kvpiov irapeKoXeaa. 
 
 In these instances inrip has the sense of irepl, with which it 
 is connected, inrep designates the apex of the compass, whereas 
 irepi denotes the circle described, inrip expresses more feeling 
 than irepi, as it applies to an advocate ple*ading in the place of 
 a client ; maintaining a cause which has been misrepresented 
 by others. Xpiaroi airidave inrip daefi&v, in their stead, but 
 irepl apapri&v, which rendered it necessary that He should die. 
 Thus inrip is used with the person, ' sinners,' but irepi with the 
 thing, 'sins:' 1 P. 3. 18, Xpurro<t &ira^ irepl &p<ipri&v eiraOe, 
 SiKaun inrip oZIkwv. Perhaps the only exception is H. 6. 3, for 
 we must not overlook the presence of ■fifiav in 1 0. 16. 3. In 
 2 Th. 2. 1 virip may mark the duty and interest of believers in 
 furthering the irapovaCa. So virip 1 T. 2. 1, 2. 
 
 inrip WITH THE ACCOSATIVE. 
 
 With the accusative, inrep denotes ' beyond,' excess in honour, 
 measure, number, time : M. 10. 24, ovic eari pM0i]r^<i inrip rov 
 SiSdaKoXov : Ph. 2. 9, ej(aplaaro ain^ Svofia to inrip irav 8po/xa : 
 Philem. 16, ovxiri a>? SoCKov, oXX' inrip SovXov : 2 C. 12. 13, rl 
 ffdp iariv h ryrrridrire inrip rii^ Xo(7r^9 iiCKKria-lwi ; Xen. Anab. 
 L 1. 9, iiro'Kip.ei, rot? Qpq^l rots inrip 'EXKijairovrov olxovai. 
 
 iiri WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 173 
 
 From the idea of excess comes the notion of 'contrary to:' 
 inrtpTrXeoi/oSo). 
 
 PKEPOSmONS OO-EKKIKO GENITIVE. DA,^. ACCUSATIVE. 
 hri WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 Mk. Id. 9. "".".^ . 24 19. oln JS«. hr\ <tm ir,timmi. 
 
I 
 
 ■ 
 
 174 
 
 iirl WITH tHB DATIVE. 
 
 under which, an event takes place : R. 1. o, iravrore iirl t&v 
 irpoaevx&v /xov Seoftevot : E. 1. 16, five{av vfi&v iroiovftevot iirl 
 tS>v irpoaevx&v fu>v: A. 10. 34, ^-n-* oK-qdela^ KaraXaftfidvo- 
 
 (UU. 
 
 M WITH THE' DATIVE. 
 
 With a dative hrl implies actual superposition, rest upon, 
 close to : Mk. 6. 39. dvuKiupat irdvrm iirl r<a ■)(Kiop^ X°P''^V '• 
 M. 14. 8, So9 fioi &Be hrX irlvaiu riiv Kc^aX^v 'ladwov : 24. 33, 
 irffu^ iariv hrX dvpcw : J. 8. 7, 6 dvaftdfyrtjTO^ Vfi&v wpSno<i rbv 
 \!Bov hr ain^ ^aXhw : Xen. Anab. vii. 3. 17, (of Sk iju ijXioi 
 
 Accession or addition : M. 25. 30, &KKa rdXavra sKip&ijaa iir 
 avroK : L. 3. 20 ; 16. 26, iirl iraai tovtok. 
 
 Subsequence or successions A. 11. 19, ffKiyp^ui t^9 lyevofiiptyi 
 Ari ST€«J>dva> : Ph. 2. 27, 7va fi)/ Xvtttiv iirl Xvirji «rx&. 
 
 Co-existeince in time : H. 9. 26, hrl avineKeia t&v alatvam : 
 2 G. 3. 14, hrl T^ dvaryimaet -riji 7rfi\aia<{ huid-qicifi : H. 9. 15, 
 hrX T$ "jrpdnji SuiB'qtcp : Xen. Anab. vi. 1. 7, iirl rovr^ op&p 6 
 Mvabi imrKTjTTOftepovi avT0V9> 
 
 Basis, foundation: M. 4. «, ovk hr aprtp /i6v^ ^ijaerat 
 ayOpanroii : R, 16. 12, iir' avr^ edvrj SKiriovaw : Mk. 10. 24, 
 ireTToi^ora? eirl tow j(pr)iuunv: A. 4. 18, StSda-xeiv ivi r^ 
 oi/6/uiTi 'Iija-ov : L. 5. 6, iirl r^ pij/iarl trov j(a\d<rco to Slietvov : 
 1 T. 1. 16, ■jriarevew iir avr^ : L. 24. 26 : R. 9. 33 ; 10. 1 1 : 
 1 P. 2. 6. Christ is represented as the basis, foundation, on 
 which faith rests. With the primary meaning of ivi with the 
 dative, ' absolute superposition,' is connected the accessory 
 notion of 'dependence on:' Xen. Anab. i. 4, fiovKevetai owav 
 /jLrfiroTe Irt larai iirl t^ dSe\<Pp, Gyrus devises measures by 
 which he shall no longer be dependent on his brother. 
 
 The ethical basis; occasion or cause. of an action or emotion : 
 M. 18. 13, p^a//}£( iir ain^ (cf. 1 Th. 3. 9) : L. 1. 47, iqyaWlaae 
 TO mievfid ftov iirl .t^ Se^ t& aanijpi fiov : Mk. 3. 5, avKKvirou- 
 fievov ini Ty irtapuurei Try; KopBiaf. 2 G. '12. 21, fi^ fieravorj- 
 advrav iirl Ttj aKodapvla: R. 6. 21, i(l> oh vvp ivai<r}(6pea0e : 
 Xen. Anab. ii. 6. I3, drfdWerat iirl Geoaefieia Kal dXijdeia kuI 
 BiKaiOT»]Ti, : vi. 6. 19, i&vero iirl rg iropeia. 
 
 Both these iises are found in 1 Th. 3. 7, irapexKijOrjfiev 
 dSeX^ol e^' vfiip iirl irdtrg tji dvar/icri koX 0\ly^t •fjp&p, where 
 the first iirl marks the objects which were the substratum of 
 
 iTrl WITH th6 dativb. 
 
 175 
 
 \ 
 
 
 the Apostle's oo'^"^', P^^^J". ***J^;elunuperstructa est:' 
 ^«p««C« rested: ' l^^^'^^'^^ ZlT^Or^^' il^- The 
 as in 2 0. 7. 7, h. rv irapaKKv<re^i I'^^lVal force noticing 
 second iirl marks the ««^rr ' ^ Inril ixnmediate contact 
 
 that with which ^^^^'^%X\t^^Tpurae6op.. ^ X-P? 
 and connexion: as m 2 U. '• «. " i' '' 
 
 ^,rl ird<ni rv ^^f" ^'*"''' _«„„ motive ; accompanying con- 
 
 r «?^r«r. ^d=r» .^rve », t^>^ «■-'. 
 
 to do him good: vu. 0. 3. «J'«' . i^auai for the purpose 
 hospitaHty: u. 4. 3 ^ IrM^^^aH^rtX "-^-^^^ 
 of war: Thucyd. 1. 103, f'^'^P^f^'' / . e„,i„rating: 113, 
 
 airovS^i iroL-nTapsvoi €<}, ^ "'^ ""^^^ „ff their men : Demosth. 
 on the condition that they shaU «*2w«t« 7^^/-"* ^^ -S 
 
 ever, they made their P-^^l^i M X-'-^'^!^'-- " ''^'»' 
 
 -Zt^tZ incudes - W. to^th^ ;^^^^^^^ 
 and object of an action: ^ T- ?.J;^^^^ ^^^^^^^end about 
 Xp^«;«,., ^l '^'^^'^Z'^S^i^rZA^g in the subversion of 
 
 „U,. ' what wa« the next best thing to be done. 
 
A/e 
 
 hrl WITH TUB ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 hrl WITH THB ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 With acousatives ivl signifies motion, with a view to super- 
 position: M. 9. 18, eK0a>v eiridei t^i; ^e(/)a aov eir airijv: 4. 6, 
 taTr](Tiv avTOP hrl irrepvyiov tou Upov : J. 8. 59, ^pav oip \i0ov9 
 Xva ^dXcoaiv hr' avrov : A. 10. 9, ave^i) em to B&fia. 
 
 Any extended motion : M. 27. 45, o-acoto? e^ivero iiri ircurav 
 TTjv ofyv : 18. J 2, •iropev0eL<! itrX rh Bpt) : 13. 2, 6 5j^\os ^i top 
 airftoKop eto-r^/cet, had gone to the shore and stationed them- 
 selves there : 19. 28, Kadlaeade v/tetv eirl ScoSexa dpopovi, along 
 upon the circle of thrones : 23. 36, Svui} S\9jj e<f> vftav ir&p atfia 
 SiKawp : L. 21. 35, (U9 ira7l« eireXewrerai hrl irdina': : M. 14. 19, 
 apaic\i0fjpM eirl tov9 ^^ojotow. 
 
 Motion from heaven to earth : Mk. 1. lo, t^ Ilpevfjui dtt irepur- 
 Tephp KUTafiaipop hr' avrop: A. 11. I5, hrhreae to Ilpevfui to 
 wytop hr' avTovt: 2 0. 12. 9, tpa iirurmjptoari eir e/ii ■^ Svpafin 
 Tov Xpurrov : Q. 6. 16, eiprprq hr ainoixi koX eKeo^. 
 
 The centre of attraction : Mk. 5. 21, avpt'/xOv Sx\oi iroXi/^ 
 eir ainov : 2 Th. 2. I, '^/i&p hriavpcvyoy^i} hr airrop. iiri marks 
 the point to which the avpo^atyij was directed, and loses its idea 
 of superposition in that of approximation or juxtaposition. The 
 difference between hrl and tt/oo? in this combination is, that 
 while irpoi points more to the direction to be taken, iiri marks 
 more the point to be reached. (Ellicott, 2 Th. 2. i.) 
 
 Temporal sense : L. 4. 25, iicKeiadif o ovpapoi iiri err) Tpia : 
 10. 35, €7ri TTjP avpiop, 'bis Morgen:' A. 3. l, iiri t^i» &pap t^s 
 irpo<Tev)(ii<{ Trjp ippaTqp, ' bis neun Uhr,* 
 
 The direction, bent of the mind or feeling : H. 6. l, iriaTCwi 
 iiri Qeop: M. 27. 43, irhroidep iiri Oeop; 1 P. 1. 13, reXe^)? 
 ikirlaarre inrl Tt)p <ftepoftept]p vfup x^P*" '• M!. 25. 21, iirl oKfya ^( 
 iriaTOi, iiri iroXK&p ae KaTaar^trea : L. 9. 6, top KOPiopTOP airo- 
 Tipd^aTe et's /naprvpiop hr airrovt: 2 Th. 1. 10, iiriaTevOr) to 
 fiapTvptop i<f> vfiat, a testimony directed to you, involving some 
 idea of ' nearness or approximation : ' M. 10. 2i, iirapaanjaoprai 
 T^Kpa inrl fopsK : 2 Th. 2. 4, virepaipo/jiepoi iiri irdvTa Xeyofiepop 
 Qeop: LXX, Dan. 11. 36, ir^iod^aerai koI fieyakvpffi^a-eTai iiri 
 irdvra Seop. hrl with its general local meaning involves the 
 more specific and ethical one of opposition. 
 
 The difference between eU and iiri may be marked in H. 3. 
 22, hKau»avpr) Sk Oeov Stit, iriaTeuxi 'Ir)<ToO XpiaToi eli irdpTWi 
 Koi hrl irdpTat Toixi iriarevopTat, God's plan of justifying 
 
 PREPOSITIONS — ftera. 
 
 177 
 
 ^t 
 
 through faith in Christ Jesus extending to and resting upon; 
 reaching to and efficacious for aU who beheve. 
 
 hrl in composition expresses rest; as irriiMep<^, £^/-c«/*at. 
 direction, hr^x^a,: motion towards, i^x^cpio,: »^«r««' ««"!- 
 pleteness, iirvycp^aKu,, hriypa>a„: addition, imKoKet.: repeti- 
 
 """"uZlZxin^o^, M marks the imaginary point of applica- 
 tion, that on which the feeling is based; used with persons Mk 
 8 3 ; L. 9. 26. and with things R. 1. .6 ; 1 T. 1 ^6- --«f ;' 
 iKirivp are followed by ip, ek, iiri, but generally with a differ- 
 once of meaning, a. the exercise of faith -.--<--? ^^^.^^/^'j 
 different aspects. ir^^ie.P eV, E. 10 9. ^vo Wes "a^«f 
 being in Christ as the substratum of spiritual life, ir^aTeve^u 
 efe M 18. 6 ; J. 3. .5 ; A. 22. I9 ; Ph. 1. 29. implies union of a 
 fxSler and more mystical nature, with probably some accessory 
 ideas of mental direction towards the object of faith ; irc<rTeve.P 
 evTwith the dative. R. 10. u ; 1 T. 1. 16. involves repose, 
 reliance on; ^.a«.5«. iiri, with the accusative, J. 14. ,. denotes 
 mental direction with a view to that reliance. So ^'"f"" f" 
 marks the basis or foundation of hope. 1 C. 15 19 ; e\m^^p e« 
 the direction of the hope with the further idea of union and 
 communion with the object of hope. J. 5 45; 2 O. 1. lo; 1 r. 
 3 5. e\irl^e,p iiri, with the dative, marks the foundation on 
 which the hope rests, 1 T. 6. 17 ; R. 15. 12. ^^TtCe.,; eirl, with 
 the accusative, the mental direction. 1 T. 5. »• 
 
 Merd. in common Greek, is joined only with the gen. and 
 accus. In poetry it is found with the dative. 
 
 oeTd denotes companionship, or pursuit with a view to com- 
 panionship, and thus differs from avp, which expresses conjunc- 
 tion, union, coherence. Thus E. 6. 23, dyairv l^a ir^ea>^, 
 love in company with faith, implying their coexistence, artam, 
 aiw TTtWt would denote their coherence, or confusion; the one 
 quality being identified with the other, which would have no 
 meaning; yet we have, E. 4. 3i, mKpia ...aw Kanla, as bitter- 
 ness is identical with some badness of disposition, and m 1 C. 
 10 13, aip T& iretpaa,.^ Kal Ti,P 'eK^aa^P, as the one is insepa- 
 rably united 'with the other: 1 Thess. 3. 13, ,.eTairapTcoPTu>p 
 ^dp airrov, the saints are represented as attending our Lord 
 ot^IIis coming and sweUing the majesty of His train : aup to., 
 dyloK would describe them as united with Him. Hence auv is 
 used C. 3. 3, V r«^ vii&v KUpimrai aiv t« XpuxTa ep T<p Wey. 
 
178 
 
 FRGFOSITIOMS — fiera. 
 
 Amid, among : M. 26. S8, iKadifro fierh t&v {nrqperiov : Eev. 
 21. 3, ^ <rK7)vi) rov Seov fierh tS>v avBpanrav Koi aK7}va>aei fier' 
 avT&v : Mk. 1. 13, ^i> fteret t&v 6i)platv. The original significa- 
 tion of ixerd is connected with iiiaoi, ' medius,' with the German 
 • mit,' • Mittel,' and the English * mid,' ' middle.' 
 
 In company with: J. 11. 31, oi SvTe<; fier avr^t iv Ty oixit}'. 
 M. 9. 15, i<^ baov fier ain&v iariv o vvfi^itxi'. Bev. 14. 13, rk 
 Zl ipya avTuv aKoTMvdeZ fier aiir&Pi 2 Th. 1. 7, aveaiv fieff 
 ■^fi&v . . . air ovpavou fter ay^iXttv Bvvd/ieav airov. 
 
 fierd refers especially to the mental feeling and disposition 
 with which an action is performed : L. 1. 39i /^er^ airov^i : 2 
 0. 7. 16, &if fierii <f>6ffov xai rpo/iou iBi^aaOe ainov : Mk. 3. 5, 
 trepiffX^dfUiHK aurovf /itr 6pyfj<{. Hence it is expressive of 
 sympathy, of one's side or party : M. 12. 30, 6 fiij &v /ler iftov 
 KUT ifu>v iarl: L. 9. 49, ovk aKoKovBei fieff ^fi&v. 
 
 Occasionally with the idea of aid or blessing: J. 8. 29, o 
 wifiyfraii fie fier i/iov earl: H. 13. 25, fj X'^P'^ f'^^ irdvrav 
 v/i&v : A. 2. 28, irXijpwaeii fie eiMl>potTviir]v fierd rov irpoauyirov 
 
 aov. 
 
 Mutual action, interest, feeling : M. 12. 30, fit) awarftav fier 
 ifiov: 18. 23, ifdiXifae awapai \6yov fierh rStv iovXav ainov'. 
 22. 16, unoareXKoww avr^ tow fiadrirhi avr&v fierd r&v 'Hfief 
 Biav&v: L. 10. 37, o irotjjo-os eXeoi fier airov, marking the 
 mutual action of giver and receiver : 2 J. 2, Bih, rtjv dX^deiav 
 rrjv fiivovaav iv ruiiv Koi fieff iifi&v lorat eli al&va, the subjec- 
 tive doctrinal truth is expressed by iv. The personal truth 
 Christ Himself who aids us, as sharing our nature, is expressed 
 by fierd. 
 
 After words implying accord, discord : L. 23. 1 2, eyivovro 
 tf>i\oi fier dWijXuv: R. 12. 18, fierh wdvratv dvdpdnrav etptj- 
 vevovre^: 1 J. 4. 17, rereXeltorai ^ dfydwrj fieff rjfi&v: Rev. 2. 
 16; voXefiTfata fier avr&v. 
 
 Participation: 2 C. 6. 16, 16, rlt fiepU iria-rw fierct, diriarov ; 
 J. 13. 8, ovK «x«« fiipov fier ifiov: L. 22. 37, fieri, dvofiatv 
 eXo^ladtj : 1. 72, iroiijaai eXeo<i fierd r&v iraripav : Mk. 6. 60, 
 eiOiatfi eXaXfjaev fier avr&v. 
 
 The concomitant of an action, marking the circumstance or 
 condition with which another event is attended : M. 14. 7, fied' 
 opKov a>fioX6yr)aev airr^: 2 Th. 3. 12, fierd ^(ri/^/a; epya^ofievoi : 
 1 T. 1. 14, virepeirXeovaaev ij ^apts rov Kvpiov ^/i&v fierd rria- 
 Tca>9 Ka\ arfdirr)'} i^f iv Xptar^ 'Itjaov : Mk. 9. 24, /cat eiiOeas 
 
 PKEFOsmoNS — irapa. 
 
 179 
 
 Kpd^a<t irarrip rov iraiSiov fierd BaKpvov eXeye: E. 6. 23, 
 elp^vTf Tot? aSeX^ot? xal dydTnj fierd rrUrrem, as if enhanced by 
 faith. 
 
 fierd with the accusative implies succession in time : M. 17. i, 
 fieff ftfiepat l^: J. 13. 7, fierd ravra: M. 26. 32, fierd ro eyep- 
 dffval fie : in place, H. 9. 3, fierd ro Sevrepov Karaireraufia, i. e. 
 behind. 
 
 In composition fierd expresses community, participation, 
 fieraBlStofii, fierexo> '• sequence or succession in time, furavoiio, 
 fierafiiXofuu : backwards, reversion, fierddeaK : change of place 
 or condition, fieraffaivto, fiera^dXXa. Thucyd. fierd x"/"*? 
 ^eiv, to have in hand. 
 
 The uniform meaning oirrapd is, 'by the side of:* rrapd aov, 
 from, by thy side ; rrapd o-ol, at, by thy side : irapd ae, to, by 
 thy side. 
 
 rrapd with THE genitive. 
 
 Genitive of person after verbs of motion, coming, sending : 
 J. 1. 6, avOptoiroi direaraXfievoi irapd Oeov : Mk. 14. 43, nrapa- 
 ylverat 'lovSa^ , . . irapd r&v apxt^P^^v : J. 7. 29, irap' avrov 
 elfii, KaKelvot fie d'weareiXev. 
 
 The source whence any thing proceeds: L. 6. 19, Svvafxi<i 
 trap' avrov e^XBev : M. 21, 42, irapd Kvpiov eyevero avnj : 
 L. 2. 1, e^XOe Soy/ia irapd Kaioapoi: Phil. 4. 18, Se^dfievos 
 irap' 'Eira<f>poSirov rd rrap vfi&v: M. 2. 4, eirwddvero rrap 
 avr&v: A. 26. I2, fier e^ovaia^ xal eirirpoirifi t^? irapd r&v 
 dpxiepeav. 
 
 Sometimes it appears to be used for the agent; but irapd 
 marks the instigators : A. 22. 30, to ri Karijyopetrai irapd r&v 
 'lovSaltov. Here viro could not have been used, as the Jews had 
 laid no formal charge. " If the action proceeds from a person, 
 irapd or viro is employed, irapd indicates merely in general 
 terms the source of motion ; viro indicates the special efficient 
 and producing cause." Winer, § 47. 
 
 Hence it is used as a periphrasis for the genitive of possession 
 or relation: Mk. 3. 2l, ol irap' avrov, his kindred: 5. 26, rd 
 irap' eavrrj^ irdvra, all her property : i. q., L. 8. 43, SKov rov 
 
 ^iov. 
 
 irapd denotes emonation from a personal source ; diro, emana> 
 tion simply: dir ou/javoO, predication of place: Mk. 8. ii, 
 ^■qrovvret irap' ainov <rq(ieu>v airb toO ovpavov. 
 
 N 2 
 
180 irapd with the dative and accusative. 
 
 vapa WITH the dative. 
 
 Dative of person or place, expreseing rest, position: J. 
 19. 25, etar^Keiaav iraph to. crravp^: A. 9. 43, fteivai irapd 
 T(K( Xlfitovi, * 
 
 Proximity: M. 22. 25, ^av irap ^fjiiv hrrii dBe\<j>ol: 1 C. 
 16. 2, riOera nap' iavr^, at home. 
 
 In tlie power of: L. 1. 37, oiic dSwar^aei nraph ra ©ew irav 
 lifj/JM ' M. 19. 26, irapil dvdptovoi<t tovto dZvvarov eari, iraph, hi 
 Qe^ irdvra hvpord Icni. 
 
 In the judgment of : IP. 2. 4, irapii Be^ iKke/crov ivrifiov : 
 1 0. 3. 19, ij ao^la Tov Koa/Mv rovrov fuopla iraph rm Bern e<rrt : 
 A. 26. 8, airtarrov Kplvertu Trap' vpZv el Beix; vexpoiKi eyelpei. 
 
 In the court of heaven : TL. 2. 13, SUaioi vapa r^ Be^ : 
 R. 2. 11, ou yap iari vpoaioiroXtp^ia irapk r^ 0ep: 2 P. 2. 11, 
 oi <f>epov<rt Kar avr&v irapit Kvpl^ l3\d<r<fyii/Aov Kplaiv. 
 
 In fellowship with God : 1 0. 7. 24, SKaaTo<; iv «S eKk^Ori ev 
 rovTti fievera irapa t£ Beai. 
 
 The following may be classed under the head of rest, posi- 
 tion; ^iV/ up ioith; in store with: M. 6. 1, ftiadov ovk exere 
 irapii to) irarpX vfiStv : _L. 1. 30, €vpe<{ "ydpiv iraph, to) Bew. 
 
 Accusative. Motion to a place; alongside: M. 15. 29, «al 
 /i6Ta/3^f . . . fjKOe irapa Ttfv 0d\aaaai> : 30, xal ippf<^av avrovt 
 irapa tow? iroia^ to3 'Irjaov : Mk. 4. 1 5, ol irapa t^i/ oBov. 
 
 With verbs of rest where previous motion is implied: M. 
 13. 1, kicdBifTO irapa rriv Bd'Kairaav'. L. 7. 38, araaa iraph, Toifi 
 iroSai aiiTOv oiriaoi. 
 
 irapa with the accusative. 
 
 Of the ground or reason, along with which a conclusion 
 follows : 1 0. 12. IS, ov irapil tovto ovk itrrw Ik tov ad/iaTO^, 
 not for this reason is it no part of the body. 
 
 Hence it has the force of ' beside ' in English, which means, 
 'by the side.' Compare 'beside the question,' 'inconsistent 
 with,' 'different from,' 'beyond,' 'except :' G. 1. 8, iau 0776X0? 
 ef ovpavov €vafyye\.i^r}Tai vfui> irap' b evriyye7uadfi,e0a : 1 C. 
 3. II, OefieKiov aXKop ouSel? Bvparat ffeivai iraph TOf Kei/ievov: 
 A. 18. 13, irapd TOV vofiov ovTOi dvaireldei, tow? dvOpdnrov; 
 ai^eadat tov Beov : R. 1. 25, eKdTpevaav Tfi icriaei irapd tov 
 lerrbravra, to the neglect of the Creator. Compare R. 1. 26, 
 
 PBEPOSITIONS— wo. 
 
 181 
 
 I 
 
 nraph ^vaiv: 4. 18, irap' iKiriBa, 'praeter naturam,' 'prseter 
 spem.' 
 
 Beside, less than: 2 C. 11. 24, Teaaapd/covra irapd /liav: 
 more than, beyond a line real or imaginary : L. 13. 2, dfiap- 
 TtoXol irapd irdvra^. This has been referred to the use of the 
 Hebrew particle ^0, but compare irapd irdvra^ 'A-x,aiovi /leyaii : 
 Xen. Anah. vi. 6. 8, evioi fiev avr&v irap' oXlyov iiroiovvTo tov 
 KXiavSpov: L. 3. 13, fir]Siv irXkov irapd to BtareTor/fiivov vpZv 
 irpdaaere : R. 12. 3, irap h Set ^poveiv. 
 
 So 'prseter,' 'passing beyond,' is nearly synonymous with 
 ' propter,* ' praster opinionem.' 
 
 In composition irapd has the meaning of ' alongside,' ' by the 
 side of,' irapafioX^, irapaOaKdaouv;, irapuTTtjfu : ' to the side of,' 
 'to one's hand,' 7ra/)aS(Sci>/it, irape^io, irapaKaXiio: 'to one side of,' 
 'past,' irapepxp/iat, irapairXeo) : 'beyond,' 'amiss,' 'wrongly,' 
 irapaKovu), irapa^aiva : ' with bad intent,' irapaTTipito, iraporpvva. 
 Compare the German 'ver-,* in ' verschworen,' 'forswear.' 
 irapaiTovfiah decline, have nothing to do with : Thucyd. i. 132, 
 irapairotTjardfievoi a^parfiha, having counterfeited the seal. 
 
 inro, from which virep is formed, is used in the New Testa- 
 ment with genitive and accusative. The significations are, with 
 the' genitive, motion from beneath; with the dative, position 
 below; with the accusative, motion or extension underneath. 
 
 inro is used with verbs neuter and passive to mark th§ 
 efficient or instrumental cause, and denotes the subject or 
 agent from under whose hand, power, agency, causation, the 
 action of the verb generally proceeds. 
 
 The local signification may be traced in 2 P. 1. 17, ^i;^? 
 ive-xOelaTfis inro t^? fJieya\orrpe7rov<i Sofi;?. 
 
 The agent: M. 1. 22, to fnjdev inro toO Kvplov: 2. 16, 
 iveiralj^Bi) Inrb t&v pdr/tav: L. 14. 8, OTav KKr)6^^ inro Ttvo? et? 
 ydfiovi : 21. 20, KVK\ovp,evriv inro aTpaTOireSwv t^v ' lepovaaXijfi. 
 
 The cause: L. 8. U, inrb fiepifai&v . . . iropevofievoi avfiirvC- 
 yovrai : 7. 24, KoKafiov i/jrb dvifiov traXevofievov : 2 P. 2. 17, 
 ve^eXai inro XatKairoii iKavvofievai. 
 
 Though inro is generally used with verbs of the passive 
 voice, it is joined also to neuter verbs having a passive force, 
 and to transitive verbs where a passive sense is implied: L. 
 9. 7, rd yivofuva inr avrov: A. 23. 30, /M)i>vde(<n}? iirifiovXrjv 
 /leXKeiv ea-eadai inrb t&v 'lovSaitov ; M. 17. 12, /liWei irdayeiv 
 
182 
 
 FBEP0SITI0N8 — TT/JO?. 
 
 Trpos WITH THE AOdUSATIVE. 
 
 183 
 
 vir' aiiT&v: 2 0. 11. 24, vvo ^lovBalcov ireinaKii TeaaapaKoina 
 iraph fiiav iXafiov. 
 
 inro with the accusative of place, whither, or extension tinder- 
 neath: M. 8. 8, inro Tr)v aTtrpjv elaipj(ea0M : Mk. 4. 32, inrb 
 Tr)p aKuiv avTov rd irereiPcL Karaaiajvovv : Ja. 2. 3, xadov (SSe 
 vn-o TO inroiroSiov fiov. 
 
 Of moral subjection: 1 T. 6. i, inrb ^vyhv SovKoi: B. 16. 20,' 
 avvrpiy^ei tok Saravav inrb rov^ iriSa^ vfi&v iv rd^ei : 7. 14, 
 ireTrpap,ev(K xnrh rriv afiapriav: 6. 14, ov yap iore virb v6p,op, 
 aX\* {nro %apH> : 3. 9, irdtnat v^ afiaprlav elvai : M. 8. 9, koX 
 yhp i<ya> avOpiarroi elfu inrb i^ovaiav, i^av inr e/iavrbv arpo: 
 Tuuraf. 
 
 Of time, Latin, 'sub:' A. 5. 21, inrb tov SpOpov. 
 
 In composition iiro has the force of 'under,' inrripirn^, 
 inr^Kooii : ' underhanded,' ' secretly,' inrofidWa, inroZeUvvm : 
 * under one's roof,' inroSi)(pfi,at, inrovoia, ' surmise,' 1 T. 6. 4 : 
 Demosth. xnrovouu irXjaxrraX Koi •irpo<f>d<Teiii S£i,koi. 
 
 IIp6<i has a signification of motion onwards. The full form 
 is irpoTi, a lengthened form of trapd, denoting adversua rather 
 than apud. The general meaning with the several cases is 
 irpof TovraVy in consideration of these things, as a motive: 
 irpbi Tourotf, in addition to these things, as an act : irpbii ravra, 
 with a view to these things, as an end. irapd denotes an actual 
 motion or change of place in some object ; 7rp6<: merely indi- 
 cates a direction or tendency. Hence irapd and irpoi nearly 
 concur in their use with the dative, as the case of rest ; but 
 most plainly differ in their use Mrith the genitive and accusative. 
 
 irpOl WITH THE GENITIVE AND DATIVE. 
 
 Genitive, in consideration of, in behalf of, for the benefit 
 of : A. 27. 34, TovTO irpbt r^t vfieriptK aa>Tripla<i xnrdp^ei. iSuch 
 is the repeated use of irpot in classical authors. Thucyd. iv. 92, 
 6 deo<i irpbi rifiMV eiTTai, the god will be on our side : ii. 86, 17 eV 
 aTevio vaviufxiu. irpb<i AaKeSaifiovicov iari, the fighting in the 
 narrow sea is in favour of the Lacedaemonians : Xen. Mem. ii. 
 3. IS, aroira Xeyeif kuI ovBa/i&v irpof aov, you ulter absurdities, 
 and by no means to your credit : Xen. Anab. ii. 5. 20, nrpo^ fiev 
 0e&v da6^e<i, -rrpbi Si apOpanrtov ala-j^pop, in the estimation of 
 gods, of men. Hence the use of tt/do; with the genitive in 
 adjurations: irpo; 0e&p, as regarded by the gods. In this 
 
 * 
 
 usage TT/Jos answers to the Latin 'per,' which is otherwise 
 equivalent to Bid, c. gen. 
 
 IT/JOT, on the part of, refers to external agency, while he 
 denotes internal action : Soph. Track. 676, 7, Sidfiopop irpbt 
 ovSepbt T&p epSop, oKX' iBearbp i^ ainov <f>dipei. 
 
 irptn often means, in accordance with: Xen. Anab. 1. 2. il, 
 oi) yap ^p nrpbi rov Kvpov rpoirov Sx^ptu /*^ diroBiSopai : 
 Ariatoph. Plut. 353—5, to re yhp i^al^pprii a/yap ovrm inrep- 
 •n-Xovreip to t ai BeBpiKipai Trpbi dpBpb<: ovBkp vyiet ivr elpya<r- 
 fiepov : Schol., 17 ' irpo? ' to Kadijieop <ni/iaip6i. 
 
 Dative; at, near: J. 18. 16, ei<JT»;«et irpb<; t^ ffvpei: 20. 12, 
 Beapei Bvo dyyi\ov<!, tva wpo? t^ KeipaXfj, Kal epa wpos to« 
 iroalp; L. 19. 37, efyl^oproi Bi avrov rjBi) Trpos ry Karafidaei. 
 TOM Spow, as he drew near Jerusalem, being already at the 
 declivity of the mount. 
 
 irpoi WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 irpoi with, the accusative signifies the direction of motion, or 
 the relation between two objects. 
 
 Actual motion : M, 2. 12, /ii/ apaKdp,-<^ai, vpbv 'HpdiSrjp : 3. 6, 
 i^aropevero irpbi uvtop: 1 iTi. 3. 6, iX.0oPTO<i irpos ^/ifis d<f> 
 v/iAp; M. 21. 34, dirioreiXe Toi? BovKow airrov irpbi tows 
 yeupyow : 26. 67, dir^ar/op irpbi Kauuf>ap. 
 
 Also where antecedent motion is implied : Mk. 5. 22, irlirrei 
 9rpb<t tows TToSas awToO : M. 3. 10, ^ af twj w/30s rijp pl^ap Kelrat : 
 L. 16. 20, OS i^epKifTO irpbf rop irvXStpa ainov : A. 5. 10, efevev- 
 KaPTSi eda'^ap irpb<t top avBpa avrif; : M. 26. 18, irp6<i ae iroiSt 
 TO irda')(a : 65, irpb<i vfioM iKa0el^6p,i)P BiBdaKup : Mk. 11. 4, evpop 
 TOP irS>\op BeBe/iepop Trpos t^v Ovpap. 
 
 . Mere direction : L. 7. 44, arpa^eU w/>os rrip yvpaiKa : E. 
 3. 14, Kdpmrta t^ yopard fiov irpbf rbp irarepa : Mk. 14. 54, 
 0eppMtp6fiepo<i irpbi to ^s: O-. 6. 10, €pya^<ofie0a to aya0op 
 TT/sos iroiTos. From this arises its use with verbs of speaking. 
 
 The object of a disposition or feeling : 2 O. 3. 4, 'iTeiroL0i)<np 
 ixoM^ '"'P^ Toi; Qeop : 1 Th. 1. 8, ^ irwrts v Tpos toi» 6e6v : 
 A. 6. 1, yayyvofun irpb^ tows 'Efipahv^: L. 23. 12, 7rpov7r!jpj(OP 
 ip ex0pf Spre^ vpot eavrovf : A. 28. 25, davp,^poi Spre^ irpos 
 aXX)}Xows. 
 
 The relation which one object has towards another. 
 . The remote obj^t : Mk. 12. 13, eyptocrap &ti irpos awTows rr)p 
 irapa^oX^p ehre : A. 24. 16, dirpbaKowop avpeC&^atv e)(€ip irpbs. 
 
184 
 
 irpos WITH THE ACCDSATIVB. 
 
 Tov &e6v: M. 27. 4, t/ irpov Vf^t S what in reference to us? 
 So H. 1. 7i 7r/)09 ftev tow? oty^Xou? X^ec H. 9. 13, aryid^ei rrpot 
 riju Ttji aapKOi KaOapoTqra: L. 18." 1, eXeye vapa^o\r)v awrot? 
 TT/oo? TO Seiv irdvTOTe irpoaev)(eadai : M. 27. 14, oi/c a7reKp(0r) 
 ain^ vpbi ovSk dv prjfta. • 
 
 Conformity to a rule or standard : L. 12. 47, fii]^^ irotijaai 
 Trpif TO OeXijfia avrov : 2 C. 6. 10, '{pa Koixiaryrai iieaffTOi t^ Bm 
 TOV a-<afiaTO<i Trpo<i b. eirpa^ev : G. 2. 14, ow/e opBoiroSovai vpoi 
 Tijv oKqdeiav tov evar/yeklov : Xen. Anab. vi. 1. 3, tt/bos avXov 
 itpX^cravTO, 
 
 Henoe it denotes comparison : E. 8. 18, ovic d^ia Th iradijiuira 
 TOV vvv Kuipov vpb<t T^i> fiiWovcTav Bo^av : Plato, Tti Be &\\a 
 fffUKph &p etf) iTpiti Tavrd ftoi fiKd^t}, 
 
 Looking to, the occasion of an act: Mk. 10. s, Trpof t^v 
 aKk-qpOKupBiav vfi&v ey/)a'^ei» vixtv Trjv ivToXijv Tavr^p. 
 
 The subjective purpose of the agent: A. 3. lo, oSrof ijv 6 
 irpm TTjp iKei}iui<nnn)p leadi^fievo^ : 1 C 6. G, ttjoo? ivrpoTrtiv vfup 
 "Ker/a', H. 6. 11, t^i> ainifp ivBeiKPvaBai <nrovBi}P rrpo^ t^i> 
 Tr\f)poif>oplav T^9 iKiriBov &XP^ t£Xou9 : 1 Th. 2. 9, vvktov km, 
 ■/HJ^pai epya^ofiepoi irpo^ to fiii iirifiaptjtral Tipa vfi&p: E. 4. II, 
 12, eSioKe .TOiKt p,kv dTrooroXou? . . . trpin top xaTapriaiMV Ta>i« 
 drfuopi Philom. 6, aKovwp aov Tf)P dr/dmjp koX ttjp irUmp tjp 
 l)(€i<! vpoi TOP Kvpiop ^Itfaovp hoI eh Truprav tov9 eeyiow, the 
 Lord was the object towards which thair feelings were directed 
 (TTpof ) ; the operation of their feelings, as testified by their acts 
 of benevolence among the saints, is set forth by el<:. 
 
 Of a result or tendency : 2 P. 3. 16, & aTpe^\ov(riv irphi t^p 
 IBlap airr&p dirdXetapi J. 11. 4, aadipeia irpo<i Ouputop : 1 J. 
 5. 16, dfuiprui vpbi Odparop. 
 
 In some expressions the primary idea of direction is lost, 
 especially with persons : M. 26. ss, irpov ifta^ iKaOe^ofttjp : 
 G. 1. 18, etrifietpa irpht airrop : 2. 6; 4. 18: 1 Th. 3. 4, ot« 
 irpoi vfiai ^fiep : 2 Th. 2. 5. wpov is followed by the accusative 
 with verbs of rest, and is equivalent to wapd with the dative, 
 ' apud aliquem.' lii several of these instances previous motion 
 is implied ; so that with this iise of tt/jov wo may compare the 
 alleged interchange of eh and ep. 
 
 In the expressions; J. 1. l, 6 ^6709 ^p 7rpb<i top Qeop, and 
 1 J. 1. 2, r[rt<i »}»» irpof top Harlpa^ there is no exact equivalent 
 in English. The meaning is ' united to God ; ' ever abiding in 
 and with Him. 
 
 ADVERBS USED AS PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 185 
 
 Adverbial uses are, irpof Kaipop, wpos &pap, irpk to irapov. ^ 
 Adjectival: L. 14. 32, tA nrpK elp^pr,p: A. 28. 10 Ta irpot 
 Tnv ypelap: A. 23. 30 : R. 15. 17, tA irpw top Oeopi 2 P. 1. 3, 
 Ttt Trpo? ^torjp. „ . - J 
 
 vpoi in composHion has the meaning of motion towards, 
 irpoadyio, irpoaepx,of^h irpo<nrarTa : addition, besides, -irpoffat- 
 Tso),. irpoaBairapda. ■trpocraireCKkut : direction, trpoaeyxoiuu, 
 TrpoaKXipa: intensity, strengthening the force of the simple 
 word : Trp6<nnipo<s, irpoa^iKrj^. 
 
 ADVERBS USED AS PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 The following adverbial prepositions are used with a genitive : 
 &pev, without, 1 P. 3. 1 : &xph /*«XP'. ^^ V^'^^ ^^^ *™®' ^ 
 far as, until, M. 13. 30: A. 11. 5: R. 5. 13; 15. 19: axpii 
 oi, until, whilst, as long as: iyyv<!, near, J. 3. 23; 6. 19: ' 
 H. 6. 8 ; 8. 13 : einrpoaOep, before, of place, M. 5. 24 : in the 
 presence of, 6. i: precedence, J. 1. 15: Spapri, epaprlov, 
 ivdmiop, in the presence of: eveKa, xap*", o" account of, for 
 the sake of: iirdpto, above, of place, price, dignity, M. 21. 7: 
 Mk. 14. 5 : L. 19. 17, 18 : &w, as far as, of place, until, of 
 time: &>? ov, sc. -xpopov, M. 1. 25: oTriadep, oirurm, behind, 
 after : vXifiriop, near, 
 
 XdpiP does not always mean in gratiam, but is used especially 
 by later writers to express aU shades of meaning, from those 
 of favour, furtherance, to those of mere causal relation. The 
 meanings of x^P'" range from in gratiam to eaus6, and propter, 
 just as those of ei/e/ca range from causa to quod attinet ad. In 
 G. 3. 19, tS>p ■/rapa^daetiP x^P*". ao™^ give a negative meaning 
 to xa/Jti*: 'pecoatorum coercendorum gratia,' but the correct 
 meaning probably is, " Transgressionum causa ut transgressiones 
 palam faceret, eoque modo homines oogeret ad agnitionem sui 
 reatus." Calvin. " The object of the law was to make trans- 
 gressions palpable, to awaken a conviction of sin in the heart, 
 and muke man feel his need of a Saviour. It was thus also 
 necessarily temporary {dxpK o5 IXBji to airepfia), for when 
 the seed did come, higher influences began to work within." 
 (Ellioott, G. 3. 19.) 
 
? 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 SYNONYMS. 
 
 'Ayae69, good in ite kind. moraUy good, virtuoua, the opposite 
 ot KUKOi, bad in its kind. Contrasted with StWto?, i;ya06i 
 descnbos a man of eminent kindness and philanthropy, a dis- 
 tinguiahed benefactor, 'qui commodum aliis pnebet;' whereas 
 SUaioi describes one who does what is just and right according 
 to law, • qui recti et honesti legem sequitur.' The &'/ca»09 may 
 exemplify the maxim, 'Summum jus, summa injuria,' and thus 
 forfeit his title to be regarded as 6^a06<i. In contrast with 
 SiKam, and approximating to ^a069, is iwieiK^v, one who 
 tempers the rigour of strict justice, corrects its inaccuracies and 
 supplies its defects with the gentleness and firmness of equity. 
 hrieUeid iariv ij BmoUov iKdrr«>at<t. Some derive hrie'uceia from 
 rf«a., cedo, others correctly from 6t'«<5? (e'ot«a), 'quod deeet.' 
 X/MJOT09, 'well disposed,' actively beneficent in spite of in- 
 gratitude: L. 6. 35, ainhi xPV<^oi iariv iirX roi^ ix'^pUrrov^ 
 Kal TToi^poi/?, 'moraUy good :' Demosth. jfo Cor. 269, i^i, w/ttf« 
 rhv fiiv «5 vaffovra Betv /ie^tn]a0(u top irdvra ■xpovov, tw U 
 irofqaavTa eiffixi eiriXeXijadai, el Set rov flip xPV<^rov, top Si fii, 
 fuKpofvxpv, iroietp Ipyop avdpuyirov: xPI'ttottiv, the goodness of 
 the Divine attributes, showing itself by <t>i\ap0ponr^. benevo- 
 lence to man. In human agents xpV<rr6Tr}<i is ' attractiveness,' 
 I'benignitas qua9 in dandis beneficiis cemitur; sive suavitas 
 mvitans ad famUiaritatem sui, dulcis alloquio, moribus tem- 
 perata:" afyadaawti, sterling goodness apart from winning 
 attractiveness. "Potest bonitas esse tristior, et fronte severis 
 moribus irrugata bcaie quidem facere, et praestare quod poscitur." 
 " XpriaroTtpt, arioBaavm), are nearly synonymous, -jfp. may 
 perhaps denote that benevolence and sweetness of disposition 
 which finds its sphere and exercise in our intercourse with one 
 
 SYNONYMS— wyawow, ar/atrri. 
 
 187 
 
 another, joined with <f>i\ap0panr{a, Tit. 3. 4. aryaOaaipv, which 
 occurs R. 15. 14 ; E. 5. 9 ; G. 5. 22 ; 2 Th. 1. ii, seems to mark 
 that propension of mind which leads a man both to tvill and to do 
 what is good, including necessarily the idea of bountifulness, 
 Neh. 9. 25. ar/a06Tf)<i is a later word, and may bo distinguished 
 from a/Ya0a>avini as denoting rather ' goodness in its essence,' 
 and is thus commonly used in reference to God." (Ellicott, G. 
 5. 22.) 
 
 Philo remarks oa-ioTtj^ p,ip w/aos top Oeop, SiKaioawfj Si tt/jos 
 ap0pw7row 0eu>pelTai, But oarUtTtii involves the idea of holy 
 purity, TO Ka0ap6v : 1 T. 2. 8 ; H. 7. 26, TrepX /lev av0pamov<t tA 
 irpoarfKonna irpdmop SUaC &p irpuTTOi, irepl Se 0eoi»? oaia, 
 Plato, "oaloi and Sixalav form on the positive side a com- 
 pound idea of holy purity and righteousness, whether towards 
 God or towards men, while afii/iirrci^ states on the negative , 
 side the general blamelessness in both aspects and relations." 
 (Ellicott, 1 Th. 2. 10.) 
 
 In the New Testament KaXo^ is equally co-extensive in 
 meaning with arfa0ov, and frequently denotes what is simply 
 and morally good : 1 Th. 5. 2i ; G. 6. 9 ; 1 T. 1. 8, otSafiep oTt 
 KaXov 6 pofici, morally good, not merely useful but positively 
 excellent. Archbishop Trench remarks that the usual distinction 
 between oo-tof and S/icatov, which would refer otrioi to the keeper 
 of the first table of the law, and SiKaioi to the keeper of the 
 second, is not observed, and could hardly be maintained in the 
 New Testament. The Scripture which recognizes all righteous- 
 ness as one, as growing out of a single root, and obedient to a 
 single law, gives no room for such an antithesis. He who loves 
 his brother, and fidfils his duties towards him, loves him in 
 God and for God. The second great commandment is not co- 
 ordinated with the first greatest, but subordinated to, and in 
 part included in it. (Mk. 12. 30, 31.) 
 
 afyandto denotes the result of the deliberative exercise of the 
 judgment; the giving a decided preference to one object or 
 person out of many; love for the character; 'deligere;' ite- 
 quently it implies regard and satisfaction rather than afiection 
 with especial reference to external acts. <l>CKia denotes greater 
 strength of feeling, springing from passion or instinct, love for 
 the person, * amare' ' delight in doing,' hence ' am wont to do.' 
 Sexual love is expressed by epqv. 
 
 dfavri is more expressive and diffiisive than ^CKm>0ptair(a^ 
 
188 
 
 STKONYMB — aytx;, ar/opa^. 
 
 STNONTMS — eiSoKlfUK, alS<0<}. 
 
 189 
 
 It extends not only to tlie brotherhood, but to all men, even 
 enemies. Hence AyaTn; is the crown of Christian virtues. 
 apxi) /lev trurrtf!, riX-of hi Ar/din). (Ignatius.) 
 
 ^of, any matter inspiring religious awe or reverence {agonal, 
 stand in awe of), affvln, pure, clean in a ceremonial sense, clear 
 of reproach, honest, free from suspicion and above suspicion. 
 arfvw implies properly an outward, and thence an inward 
 purity, " in quo nihil est impuri." (Tittmann.) A simplicity of 
 holy motive carried out in consistency of holy action, a/yv^at, 
 ayvurfLo^, applied to the purifications which the Jews adopted 
 previous to the celebration of the Jewish festivals; hence 
 applied to the purification of the heart, 1 P. 1. 22 ; 1 J. 3. 3 ; 
 Ja. 4. 8. £7tof, consecrated to God, ' tanctm,' separated from a 
 common to a holy use, I P. 1. is; implying essential purity, 
 subjective sanctity. Hence aryid^a, ar^iaar/iov are connected 
 with Kadaplfyt. Syun, the opposite of kowo^, fiifirjXov, open to 
 any one, combined with, K\i}T6i : H. 3. i, dSek^ol Sfi/un, xXijo-eoif 
 hrovpavlov iieToj(ot. offvof denotes freedom from inward im- 
 purity ; afiUivTo^, from stain outwardly contracted, or pollution ; 
 Kadapoi, from alien admixture. " In &yio<i cogitatur potissimum 
 verecundia quae affv^ rei vel personea debetur." — ayo<i corre- 
 sponds to the Latin word 'sacer,' and implies 'set apart' or 
 •devoted,' whether for good or for evil. In Thucyd. i. 126, to 
 £709 T^« Oeov, is the accursed thing devoted to the vengeance of 
 the goddess, or that would draw down her vengeance. (Arnold.) 
 
 arfopd^a, buy, as in a market-place, for a certain price (rt/ui}) ; 
 Xurpoa, effect deliverance, by the payment of ransom and 
 exertion of power. Xurpop is the price paid for releasing any 
 one from captivity, punishment, or death (kvea, loose), the 
 buying back by paying the price of what had been sold 
 (airotva), or the redeeming what had been devoted by substi- 
 tuting something in its place. So avrlXurpov, with the further 
 idea 'in room of,' denoting exchange, the price paid for pro- 
 curing the liberation of another by ransom or forfeit. XirpuaK, 
 airoKxnpuxTK, the process of deliverance; tKaa/i6<i, e^iKaapMi, 
 are the same as Xvrpov, with the leading idea of propitiation, 
 expiation, the means of averting displeasure, and of providing 
 for the exercise of mercy in harmony with justice ; applied to 
 our Lord as the propitiator, in 1 J. 2. 2; 4. 10. Thus the 
 death of Christ has an effect on our salvation over and above 
 its subjective power in subduing the heart and moulding the 
 
 will, for it is a ransoming and redemption from the penalties of 
 Stvo^iU, as well as its bondage, Tit. 2. u. irepiiroUopM, make 
 one's own, acquircfor oneself, without reference to the manner. 
 E. 1. 14, 6« imoXinpaaiv -rryi irepmoi^aetK, with a view to that 
 deliverance by purchase; the end and purpose of which was to 
 acquire the inheritance in heaven, a deliverance from shame 
 and woe, and an acquisition of an inheritance in glory and bhss. 
 Hence the redeemed are called 'Kao<; ets ireptirolrjaiv, 1 P. 2. 9 ; 
 Xais irepMvauxi. Tit. 2. u. Christ has made them His own ; 
 their title to the kingdom of heaven consists in their being His. 
 airokvrpuxTKi includes three ideas: (1) a state of captivity ;^ (2) 
 the interposition of a Xinpov (M. 20. 28 ; Mk. 10. 45), or avrl- 
 Xvrpov (1 T. 2. 6), a price or valuable consideration ; (3) a con- 
 sequent deliverance. Sometimes the dTroXwrpowrt? is spoken of 
 as completed, R. 3, 24 ; E. 1. 7 ; C. 1. u : sometimes as future, 
 R. 8. 23; E. 1. 14; 4. 30. It is the difference between the 
 spiritual resurrection of J. 5. 25, and the bodily resurrection of 
 J. 5. 28, 29. (Vaughan.) The avrl in iarriKurpov is not redun- 
 dant, but expresses the idea of exchange ; " permutationem qua 
 veluti capite caput et vita vitam redemit." (Waterland on 
 Fundamentals, v. 72.) Bishop Ellicott has well remarked, " All 
 the. modem theories of atonement seem to overlook that God 
 hates sin as ««, not as a, personal offence against Himself." 
 
 aZoKip^, in, a passive sense, • rejected on trial,' not standing 
 the test, spurious ; in an active sense, undisceming, unable to 
 distinguish truth from error, alien to ; KaTe^Oappivoi tov vovv, 
 vitiated in principle ; p>ep.uuTpAvo<{, polluted in heart ; oTrtoro?, 
 unfaithful to profession; aira&oKi,p.afy>, reject as unsuitable or 
 disqualified ; iSotrai/ifw, apply a touchstone, examine by words 
 or torture, afflict ; SoKipm, approved on examination. SoKi.p,d^a» 
 is used in the two senses, prove by test, approve on trial : R. 2. 
 18, SoKip,dXen Tct, SKt^povTOy art a discemer of things that 
 differ. So Ph. 1. 10, to test right and wrong, true and false. 
 
 ai&i?, the inner grace of reverence, 'verecundia;' the turn- 
 ing in upon oneself (iin-j»oir^), which recoils "from any thing 
 unseemly or impure, an innate moral repugnance to the doing 
 of the dishonourable act ; ' shamefastness.' aiaxwnj, the sense 
 of disgrace ; the feeling of shame, ' pudor,' which attends the 
 performance of a dishonourable deed, and the feeling which 
 deters a man from bad conduct, through fear of being put to 
 
190 
 
 SYNONYMS ^a(T^6>. ahCa, alaxpoXoyla. 
 
 shame. alh<o<i wiU always restrain a good man from an un- 
 worthy act ; ataxvvri will sometimes restrain a bad man. 
 <Tw<f,poavvri is to the inteUectual faculty what at8w? is to the 
 heart and spirit: am^poown "f^erai diro tow awav tA? ^piva<{ 
 iX^iv, Ohrysostom. aiSim a<o<f>poavvr)ii irketarov fierixei, Thucyd. 
 i. 84. The soundness of mind or discretion which regulates 
 and controls all inordinate desires, and exercises a dignified 
 restraint on the actions and deportment. A well-balanced state 
 of mind, resulting from habitual self-restraint: A. 26. 2S, 
 au^poayvri iarlv iirKpdreia r&v infidvm&v, 4 Maco. 1. 31. 
 
 The importance of aw^poavvr) is significantly shown by the 
 connexion in which it stands in 1 T. 2, i«, idv fielvmaip iv 
 irlarei koX arfd-irji KaX dfyiaa-ft^ /lerA (ra<ffpoirutn)i. 
 
 .ahia, entreat, beg, supplicate, implies a distinction in position 
 and circumstances between the parties, and expresses a petition 
 from an inferior to a superior. ipaT§.v is a word of wider 
 meaning ; to ask for information, question, as well as suppUcate. 
 Both words are used in A. 3. 2, alrelv, beg alms ; ipcnav, make 
 inquiry with that object. This distinction may be traced in 
 1 J. 6. 16. Many of the diflSculties in J. 16. 23, 24 ; 17. 8, 9. is, 
 will be removed by bearing in mind this distinction. In J. ll! 
 22, Martha applies alretv to our Lord in addressing His Father ; 
 perhaps from overlooking His divine nature. Our Lord uses 
 ipt^dat, not alria, when He speaks of the Father, epundoi, in 
 the sense of beseech, is a derivative and non-classical use sug- 
 gested by the double use of bm, Ps. 122. 6, ipaTrjaare Bti tA 
 
 ell eiprjvijv rf) 'lepovaaKiqp,. Compare 1 Th. 4. 1 : 5. 12 : 2 Th 
 2. I : Ph, 4. 3 
 
 atria, affair, matter; not necessarily fault or accusation; 
 charge, whether true or false. ^KXr/fia, formal indictment; 
 IXeyxoi, charge, of which the offender is self-convinced; 
 paStovpyla, wanton mischief, whatever is done carelessly or 
 at random; pe^uvpyij/ia, deed of wanton villainy, a^inst 
 person, property, or religion; iravovpyo^, one who is ready 
 for any thing, ' facinorosus ; ' generally, but not necessarily, in 
 a bad sense, like 'facinus;' -irapovpyia, the character of such 
 an one. L. 20. 23, n. 
 
 ^ "alpeam schisma inveteratum; o-^^/tr/uz recens congrega- 
 tionis ex aliqua sententiarum diversitate dissensio." Aug. 
 
 alaxpoXoyla, foul-mouthed abusiveness of every kind; the 
 
 SYNONYHS— atOIV, KOfffUK. 
 
 191 
 
 t 
 
 licence of the ungovemed tongue ; but incorrectly limited to 
 obscene discourse, 'turpiloquium ;' such communication as 
 ministers to wantonness ; SxVfia iropvela^, Chrysostom. aiO' 
 Xponyi, filthiness, ' immunditia ; ' whatever is offensive to 
 modesty and Christian purity ; joined by Plato to da-vfifierpia, 
 impropriety of conduct. luopoXoyla, ' stultiloquium,' that talk 
 of fools which is alike folly and sin ; the vav jnifia dptjov of 
 our Lord, M. 12. 36 ; the ttwi X^of aavpoi of St. Paul, E. 4. 29. 
 evrpaireXla, the power of giving a witty turn to the discourse 
 which often showed itself in indelicacy of language ; (ei 
 irpeireaOai), wit and elegance enlisted in the service of sin. 
 " In fia>po\oyia the foolishness, in aUrxpoKor/la the foulness, in 
 eirrpaireXla the false refinement of discourse which is not 
 seasoned with the salt of grace, are especially noted and de- 
 nounced." Trench. 
 
 attop] 'a limited space of time,' hence 'that which is tran- 
 sitory, as opposed to that which is permanent ; ' the present 
 world, as the seat of moral and physical evil, the universal 
 course and tenor of human proceedings, the dispensation of 
 fallen humanity. The term al&Pfv, H. 1. 2; 11. 3, denotes 
 'the ages,' the temporal periods whose sum and aggregation 
 adumbrate the conception of eternity. ^aaiKein t&p ala>ptop, 
 the sovereign dispenser and disposer of the ages of the world, 
 1 T. 1. 17. Koapxit, the present actual state, system, and con- 
 stitution of things, frequently put for the inhabitants of the 
 earth, ' toute le mondo.' /rocr/iof, the world, or universe, from 
 its perfect arrangement ; mundua, opposed to the indigeata molea 
 of Chaos. " Koapoi est quiddam exterius, auop subtilius ; secu- 
 lum, prseseus mundus in sua indole cursu et censu." Bengel. 
 In Homer auui/ is 'short period of time,' lifetime; in Plato, 
 ' long space,' ' eternity.' 
 
 Koapxxi has practically three meanings : physical, M. 25. 34 ; 
 collective, J. 3. 16 : 1 T. 1. 15 ; ethical, 1 C. 2. 12. aroixeiop is 
 used both in a physical, 2 P. 3. 10. 12, and in an ethical sense, 
 H. 6. 12. Hence a great variety of interpretations has been 
 given to Gt. 4. 3, rd, aroixeia tou Koap^v, which are separable 
 into two general classes : (1) the physical, ekmenta mundi, such 
 as the festivals of Judaism, Zabianism, and abstractedly religion 
 in sensible forms ; (2) the ethical, rudimenta mundi, the first 
 principles of religious knowledge among men, whether Jews or 
 heathens. Grammatical considerations are in favour of the 
 
192 
 
 SYNONYMS — oKepauKt a\r)0iv6i, a\\o<;. 
 
 physical sense, but exegetical may lead us to prefer the ethical. 
 (Ellicott, G. 4. 3.) 
 
 Koafio^t, G. 6. 14, tA fiuoTiK^ irpar/fiara, Chrys. "Mundus 
 procul dubio opponitur novse creaturas; quicquid ergo con- 
 trarium est spiritual! Christi regno mundus est, quia ad 
 Teterem hominem pertinet. Mundus est quasi objectum et 
 Scopus voteris hominis." Calvin. 
 
 aKipaioi, unmixed, pure, guHeless, 'integer;' afiefiTrroi, 
 unblamed, 'is in quo nihil desiderari potest;' afiafia, with no 
 stain on the conscience ; a/Mu/^jrof, not open to censure ; di'e7- 
 KkffTO^, not accused, with nothing laid to one's charge ; aftonot, 
 without blemish of sin in himself; SxnrCKo^, without contract- 
 ing any spot or. stain of sin in the world ; akai^v, boastful in 
 words, vaunting; v/3purTi]<i, outrageous in personal insults; 
 inrepjj^avo<i, proud in thoughts, overbearing, highminded : 1 J. 
 2. 16, ^ dXa^oveia roS fiiov, the braggadocio of life, wanton 
 ostentation. — 
 
 akrjdivo^, very, real, genuine ; opposed to ' apparent ' or * fic- 
 titious;' that which has truth for its substance, and is all 
 which it pretends to be. a\:^deia, that which is true ; '^eSSof, 
 that which is false : K. 1. 25, fier'ijWa^av ttjv ciXrfBeuiv tov 6eov. 
 iv Tb> ■^evSet, parted with the reality of God, resting in that 
 which is a lie : K. 1. 18, t&v Tr)v oKi^deiav iv aSiKla KaTejfpvriuv, 
 those who might know God's true character, and yet live in 
 unrighteousness. dXijfliJ?, credible, truth-loving, upright, re- 
 lates to the essential diiference between right and wrong ; 
 aifivoi expresses the moral sense men have of this difference, 
 honourable in action, grave in demeanour. 
 
 d\Xof , another in number ; one besides that which has been 
 mentioned, alius. Srepoi, the other; one of two, alter, 1 C. 
 4. 6, implying therefore a stronger expression of difference 
 than aWoi, and equivalent to dXKoun, of other sort, diverse 
 in kind. G. 1. 6, 7, eh Irepov evarf^iXiov o ovk eariv a\\o, 
 to a gospel of different character, which is not another, i. e., 
 no gospel at all; has no claim to be called a gospel. 2 C. 
 11. 4, aWov 'iTjaovv . . . irvevfia h-epov, where Irepoi refers to 
 distinction of kind ; dWof, of individuality: M. 11. 3, Sv el 6 
 ipj(Pfiei'o<:, fj erepov vpoaSoK&fiev ; another of different kind ; 
 Plato, irepop re xal dvofioiov: Ja. 4. 12, rov erepov, the other 
 who is brought into opposition with thee: E. 2. i, the other 
 to whom thou art imited in the fellowship of the faith : A. 
 
 SYNONYMS — uWtryei/ij?, dfUtpTia. 
 
 193 
 
 7. 18, aviari] fiaaiKevt &riepo<i, a king of a different line ; where 
 a\\o<i would not exclude the meaning of a king of the same 
 line: 17. 7, Srepov ^aaiKea, a different kind of king: 27. l, 
 Kal Tiva<i krepovi Seafuorai, certain prisoners also of a different 
 class: H. 7. ll, xarii t^i» rd^tv MeXxweS^ Irepov dviaraaOai, 
 tepea, that one .of a different line, according to the order of 
 Melchizedek, should arise up as priest : R. 7. '23, erepov vo/iov, 
 another and an opposite rule. The charge against Socrates 
 was, Irepa Kaivk Saifiovia el<T<f>epuv, Xen. Mem. i. 1. To aXXa 
 Koivit Saifiovia, other deities of the same kind, there would 
 perhaps have been no objection. This distinction between 
 a\Xo<; and irepoi is very generally observed; as Theodoret 
 explains 8/X070?, Irepa fiev rointp, erepa Si eKeiv(p Xe^ovre^. 
 Sometimes Ixf/jof means ' the second,' where more than two 
 are meant: Demosth. de Corond 219, (rpia eymiofua) tv fiev 
 dvSplav, Srepov Se SiKaioauvri^, rplrov hi ata^poavvri'i. 
 
 dX.\o7et/i77, alien, of a different race: pdpfiapot, foreigner, 
 speaking a different language : B. 1. 14, "EWtftrlv re Kal 
 ^ap^dpoi% ffo<f>oiii re koI dvarfrovi, civilized and uncivilized, 
 intellectual and unintellectual men, (1) of all races, and (2) 
 of all capacities ; where dvoi^rot; is used as a parallel expression 
 for fiapfidpoK!. The same is the case with tdvei davverta, 
 R. 10. 19, all other nations being as inferior to the Jews in 
 religious knowledge, as all other nations were to the Greeks 
 in human culture. (Yaughan.) 
 
 dfiapria, aberration from prescribed . law, or the voice of 
 conscience, evil propensity. The general term for sin, J. 1. 29 ; 
 9. 34, all forms, phases, and movements of sin, whether enter- 
 tained in thought or consummated in act : . irapdrrrw/ia, the 
 particular special act of sin, falling aside from ignorance, in- 
 advertence, negligence, Ja. 5. 16 : G. 6. 1 . dfiapria has more 
 of sinfulness and presumption in it. Hence the continual 
 expression, a<f>eai<i dpMpri&v. The difference is marked in 
 Ps. 19. 12, 13, rrapairruftara rii ax/v^aei; , . . KaOapiadjjaofiai 
 diro dfiaprlat fieyd\ri<i. The law came in incidentally, in order 
 that the transgression might abound, vofio^ irapeiaijXOev Xva 
 irXeovdarr) to rrapdirrtap.a, not rj dfiapria, R. 5. 20. The same 
 act of sin became more clearly an act of transgression, as the 
 standard of right was more clearly exhibited : dfiaprtoXo^, the 
 evident transgressor : do-f/^ijv, one who has no reverence for 
 God: dai^eia, sin against God, ungodliness, practical im- 
 
 o 
 
194 
 
 SYNONYMS — avofioi, avwiravav;. 
 
 piety, the exact antithesis to evai^eia: aSiicla, violation of 
 right, sin against our neighbour, ' unrighteousness,' the oppo- 
 site of Sucaioarvin), joined by Plato with av/iiraaa '^i^s wovr)- 
 pia. In its Christian usage and application it is similar in 
 meaning to, but of wider reference than, avo/iCa, of 1 J. 5. I7. 
 " dSiKia de qu&cumque improbitate dicitur, qu& tonus t^ SikoI^ 
 repugnat." (Tittmann.) As BiKaioavpt) is awayayii koI epwaK 
 irammv t&v' KoKStv K€lL ar/aO&v, so aBixia is the union and 
 accumulation of all that is the reyerse. avo/ila, lawlessness, 
 the state of moral licence, which either knows not or regards 
 not law, 1 J. 3. 4. irovrfpla implies delight in evil, frequently 
 joined with kukui, 'malice.' The wicked act of the mind is 
 implied by trovripla: the evil habit by Kaxla, which meant 
 vice generally, and was not restricted to malevolence, kuko- 
 ijdeia, spitefulness. 
 
 In 1 T. 1. 9, dvofioi, dvtnrSra/cToi, imply overt opposition 
 to law ; avofuxs, a passive disregard of its enactments ; avvTro- 
 ratcTOv, a more active violation arising from a refractory will. 
 In Tit. 1. 10, avwroraKTOt stands in near connexion with 
 avriKeyovre^ {inrordaaeadai, ' sponte submittere '). dae^eii and 
 dftapTtoKoi denote want of reverence toward God ; avotnoi and 
 fie0rj\ot, want of inner purity and holiness. In classical 
 authors dv6<no<i is frequently combined with aSiKOi, and marks 
 the violation ot/aa, in contradistinction io jus. 
 
 apMytfi, the man who is not aggressive or pugnacious, who 
 does not contend; the i.muic^<i goes further, and is not only 
 passively non-contentious, but actively considerate and forbear- 
 ing, waiving even just, legal redress : iXamaTt/cos Kahrep ^q>v 
 TOP vofjtdv fiorjdov. (Ellicott, 1 T. 3. 3.) 
 
 dvdffrjfui, votive offerings, as tripods, statues in honour of 
 a deity (Sr/aX/ia) ; dpdde/ui, curse, execration : dvddt)fi,a ex- 
 presses the ' sacrum ' in a better sense ; dvddefta, in a worse ; 
 separation /rom Qod is the central idea of dvdde/ui; separation 
 to God is the central idea of dvddiifui. Clemens Alex, dvddrjfui 
 yeyovafiev Tm Qe& inrep Xpurrov. 
 
 dvdiravarii, pause, cessation from labour, the rest of the 
 Sabbath, LXX dveaii, loosing, relaxation of imprisonment, 
 mitigation of trouble, anxiety, freedom from obligation : trdp- 
 e<r(f , temporary pretermission, suspension of punishment, pass- 
 ing over, tolerating without special intervention : &f>e<ri<i, total 
 remission, forgiveness, excluding the idea of punishment. God 
 
 
 1 
 
 SYNONYMS — dvTtXafi^dpeadai,, dir\ov<s. 
 
 195 
 
 irapfJKep d/utpriai before Christ's passion, but He d<f>iriaip 
 diiapriai in, by, and after it. The former was a work of 
 dpoj(^, or forbearance ; the latter, a work of X"/'*?' or grace. 
 
 dpTiXafi^dpeaffai, lay hold of with a view to help, L. 1. 54 : 
 A. 20. 35 : claim, take part in, 1 T. 6. 2. So eirtXa/i^dpeaffai, 
 1 T. 6. 13. ig: H. 2. 16: avvapriTM/ifidpeaOat, lay hold of a 
 thing, together with a person, and so to assist that person : 
 fiorjffeip, run to help, ' opitulari.' 
 
 In classical Greek dpriXa/ifi is ' take a part in,' ' engage in : ' 
 Thuc. ii. 8, dpTiXafi^dveaffai rov TroKifiov, cling to, secure, get 
 possession of: iii. 22, dpriXafifi. tov da<f>aXov<i, with a sub- 
 dued, intensive force, ' percipere,' ' frui : ' Euseb. IT. E. v. 15, 
 eiuthuv: ToaavTtjv dpr€\afifiap6p,e0a. 
 
 dpacrrpo^'^, mode of life, behaviour, deportment, i. q., fiitoaii. 
 iroKirevfia, citizenship, commonwealth^ life of common interest, 
 duty, privilege. 
 
 dtnaria, unbelief, the general term applicable to persons of 
 all conditions, without regard to their circumstances or oppor- 
 tunities of knowing the truth : direlffeia, disobedience, restricted 
 to those who know the path of duty. direiO^ is uniformly, dis- 
 obedient : airurrtKi, faithless, disbelieving, incredible, direidetv, 
 direiBeia, may be rendered ' disobey,' * disobedience,' as denoting 
 tlv overt and palpable manifestations of dirtaria. d-neldeia is 
 well translated by Dr. Wordsworth, E. 2. 2, as unbelief in 
 action ; eV diriarta, 1 T. 1. 13, in a state of unbelief, before I 
 had been received into the Church by a profession of faith in 
 Christ. 
 
 an-Xoi)v, single, clear, as the eye, which presents a well- 
 defined and single image to the brain; opposed to tropripoi, 
 perverse, as the eye which dims and distorts the visual images. 
 (Alford on M. 6. 23.) dirKorti^, singleness of purpose, in- 
 tegrity, disinterestedness, generosity, impartiality. airXori;? 
 marks " that openness and sincerity of heart which repudiates 
 duplicity in thought (2 C. 11. 3) or action (R. 12. 8). It is 
 joined with dr/aOonji (Wisd. 1. 1), dxaKia (Philo), and is 
 opposed to iroiKiXla, iroKvrpoirla (Plato), KaKOVprjia, KUKoriOeia'' 
 Ellicott. elXiKpipeia, transparent sincerity, the opposite of 
 Ka/cla: iropr^pCa, craftiness, dishonesty: etkitcpipri'i, tested by 
 the sun : t^ eXXy Kpipofiepoi, tried by a full light, and shown 
 to be perfect, clear, free from stain or mixture; dpuiroKpiTOi, 
 not acting a part, genuine, in real character. 
 
 o 2 
 
196 
 
 SYNONYMS — a7ro&}/tea>, avOdSri^. 
 
 cnroSi)/iiu, go from home : diroSij/uof, quitting home : evit)fiiu, 
 keep at home : ixSTifiia, am away from home. 
 
 a^pa^dtv, eameBt-money to ratify a contract: irpoiofia, as 
 present and part payment, and as a pledge for future and full 
 payment : a^parfk, seal, authentication, proof of ownership. 
 
 aa&\rfeM, excess in any thing, insolence, lewdness, unre- 
 strained lust, amounting to fuivla: aauria, self-abandonment, 
 wretchlessness, the conduct of one ' qui nihil sibi servat,' ' qui 
 servari non potest,' * wastefulness.' avdyyvK has the idea of 
 letting the reins loose, giving oneself up: IP. 4. 4, el<i rijp 
 avrifv lij^ aawrla^ ava-)(yaw, to the same slough of profligacy. 
 aauTia is joined with Kutfun, 2 Maco. 6. 4. Some derive 
 aaiKr/eia from Selge, a city of Pisidia, where the inhabitants 
 were infamous for their vices; others derive it from OeXr/eip, 
 probably the same word as the German ' schwellen.' The 
 fundamental notion of datoria is 'wastefulness' and 'riotous 
 excess ; ' that of daiXiyeia, * lawless insolence ' and ' wanton 
 caprice.' 
 
 dtrvvderoi, without regard to covenants or agreements in 
 private life : a<nrot>So<;, without regard to public treaties : 
 aaropyoi, without the ties of natural affection : dveXeiJuav, 
 merciless in the treatment of enemies. 
 
 a^OapTiK, not liable to corruption, immaterial, as opposedi^ 
 matter which decays. In 1 P. 1. 4 dif>6apro<i denotes the inner 
 being of the inheritance : dp-Unrrot, its unalloyed condition : 
 dfidpavTO^, the continuance of its beauty : d<f>6ap<rla, the main- 
 tei^ance of personal identity, from the imperishable and in- 
 corruptible nature of the life to come, and its complete exemp- 
 tion from death : Bta<t>$opd, corruption, turning to decay. 
 
 &f>p<ov, without mind, senseless, destitute of any soimd or 
 intelligible principle. In E. 6. I7 a^pov€<{ is opposed to 
 awikine<; ri to OiKijpM tov Kvplov. dawero?, irrational in con- 
 duct, stupid, silly: dvoijTov, unreflecting, never applying their 
 mind to moral and religious truth, opposed to ao<}>6<i, R. 1. I4 ; 
 but it may mark the especial folly of those who own the right 
 but do the wrong ; hence direi6eK, TrXavatpsvoi, Tit. 3. 3. 
 d^poawfi, senselessness, ' dementia,' stupidity, folly : avoia, 
 passion, rashness, ' amentia,' milder than p.apia, madness : 
 KaKori6ri<i, maliciously cunning : ew}&i)s, foolishly simple. 
 
 avBdBri<i, a self-loving spirit, which in the gratification of self 
 is regardless of others, and is hence commonly tnrepi^^voi. 
 
 \ ^ 
 
 SYHOMYMS— ^aTTTta, /3ov\ofiai. 
 
 197 
 
 OvpM&ff^t irapdvofuxi, rightly defined aa " qui se non accommodat 
 aliis, ideoque omnibus incommodus est, morosus." Tittmann. 
 T^v aiddSeiav avrapivKeiav'-'Keyo), Greg. Naz. Tit. 1. 7: 2 P. 
 2. 10. 
 
 fidtrrat, /3airr/(fo), differ chiefly in intensity, like ' to black,' 
 and ' to blacken.' /SdrrTO), dip or dye : fiairrl^co, make a thing 
 dipped or dyed : pavri^tt, make a thing ippaapAvov. Yerbs in 
 -t'fo* are always factitive, as 'civilize,' or frequentative, as 
 ' Hellenize,' ' philosophize,' until by the decay of language they 
 lost their factitive or frequentative meaning, pavrl^m and 
 pairrL^m are largely used as. religious words, the former refer- 
 ring to the sprinkling of the atonement, and the latter to the 
 dipping, and consequent washing of personal purification. 
 Neither dyeing nor washing is strictly in /SaTrrt'^u, though 
 dipping may be used for either purpose; and then dye or 
 cleanse comes to be the secondary or even the common mean- 
 ing. Compare our word 'joiner,' one who joins any thing, as 
 equivalent to 'house-carpenter.' Hence the question started 
 on the part of John's disciples, J. 3. 25, was, we may suppose, 
 irepi fiairrurfiov, though the language is iyevero ^ijrritTn iic t&v 
 futffijT&p 'ladwov 'fierd 'lovBaiav irepX Kadapia/jiov, and in 
 A. 22. 16 Paul is commanded dvaardv fidirrtaai koI diroXovaat 
 T09 d/iaprltK <Tov, iinKa\eadp,ev<K to SvopM rov Kvplov. The 
 difference between jtavri^m and fiairri^a is best arrived at 
 by treating both as theological terms, bringing up to the 
 mind of the Jews temple-rites rather than common trades. 
 (Angus.) 
 
 fidpoi, heavy weight, of trial or temptation, internal or ex- 
 ternal, some portion of which is transferable, and can be borne 
 by others, ' onus : ' ^oprlov, a burden which we bring upon 
 ourselves, and must bear ourselves, as the burden . of sin ; 
 'sarcina,' G. 6. 2. 5. Bishop Ellicott considers Pdpif to be 
 used in a general way, with reference to the community at 
 large; (ftoprlov, with reference to the burden of sins and in- 
 firmities, which each one, like a wayfarer, has to carry. Wisd. 
 21. 6. Xen. Mem. iii. 13. 6. 
 
 fiovXofuu expresses a wish, intention, purpose, formed after 
 deliberation and upon considering aU the circumstances of the 
 case. di\m denotes a natural impulse or desire, the ground 
 of which is generally obvious, or for which it is unnecessary to 
 assign a reason : M. 1. ig, /t^ BiKuv, being reluctant, as was 
 
198 
 
 SYNONYMS — fi\aa<lni/ieio. 
 
 naturally the case : ifiovKijdi), ' was minded,' deliberately pur- 
 posed, intended after careful consideration. Dr. Wordsworth 
 says (1 Th. 2. is) that 6e\oi> expresses a stronger desire than 
 ^ovXoftai. But natural impulses are generally more violent 
 than reasonable resolves. 6e\eiv has been explained of active 
 volition and purpose ; fiovXeaOat, of mere inclination, passive 
 desire, or propensity ; but the idea of deliberate intent is im- 
 plied in Ja. 4. 4, 89 &v fiovK-qfffj <^/\o; elpai rod Koa/tov i^Opoi 
 ToC 660& KaOlaTarat : 1 T. 6. 9, ot jSovXo/tei/ot TrXoirreti' ifiiriw- 
 rovaw eh ireipaaixhv koL irar/iha. In both these cases OeXeiv 
 would be altogether inappropriate. Compare M. 1. 19; 11. 27. 
 So also fiovKofiai would be very unsuitable in 1 T. 5. 11, diXovai. 
 yafieip, where the Apostle remarks on the natural impulse of 
 the desire, and not on the /3ovXij formed in the fear of God. 
 Both words occur Philem. 13, hp iyit ifiovX6/ii]P irpb<i ifiavrov 
 Kare^ew k.t.X., my intention was, considering the service he 
 could render me, to keep him with myself, but apart from 
 your expressed opinion, I repress, put aside my natural desire 
 (ij^eXijo-a), and will do nothing of this kind, i. e., I have no 
 wish in the matter. While fiovXofuu implies the exercise of 
 some deliberation, which is almost excluded from BiXto, it seems 
 to indicate a less formal resolve than ^ovXevofiai. Hence while 
 PoiXiffia indicates deliberate intention, fiovXev/ia implies detA- 
 mined resolve ; irpoOeai^, purpose, deliberate resolution, or 
 plan. 
 
 pKaa^fikw, to injure a person's character, to hurt his good 
 name, speak to his prejudice : 1 G. 4. 13, ^Xaa<fyi}fiov/i€voi -irapa- 
 KoXovfiep, i. e. being slandered we implore the slanderers ; 
 mildly and humbly deprecating their slander. Xo(£opea>, abuse 
 a man to his face, revile him personally ; " maledicto tanquam 
 aculeo vulnerare hominem," by the use of language which is 
 likely to sting a man, and pierce him ta the quick. The oppo- 
 site to it is evXoyeiv : 1 0. 4. 12, XoiSopovfiepoi eiiXftyovftep. So 1 
 P. 3. 9, fiXaa<f)r)/iia, defamation, the speaking to a man's preju- 
 dice, the invasion of his prerogative; in connexion with the 
 name of God it naturally has the more special and terrible 
 meaning of ' blasphemy,' ^ et? 6e6v v^pii. (See ala^oXoyla.) 
 eirrjpeia, spitefulness, the satisfaction which is felt in injuring 
 another, like the dog in the manger : ovj^ ha rt avrm, dXX' Xpa 
 fii) Uelv^, Demostb. de Corond. iriKpia, bitterness of feeling 
 and disposition, A. 8. 23; H. 12. 25; the prevailing tempera- 
 
 ,.: 
 
 SYNONYMS— 7€i'eo, yipeaffai. 
 
 199 
 
 ment and frame of mind, opposed to p^oron;?. kukIu, evil 
 habit, baseness, uncharitableness in oil its forms; the genus 
 of which fiXaa^/iia, irrijpeia, -irixpia, k.t.X. are species. 
 QMrxpoKoyia has nearly the same relation to xpavyij that opyij 
 has to dufioi. irovnpia, the active manifestation of kukIu. So 
 iroptjpoi, one who is actively wicked, irapit rov ttovos ytvofievof, 
 Suidas. 
 
 7«i'ea, progeny, offspring, generation; 7ei'os, race, people 
 having a common descent ; yivvjifia, produce of the ground, of 
 trees, of animals ; edpo<i, a people living under common institu- 
 tions; Srifioi, free citizens, enjoying a popular constitution; 
 Xa6<s, the people at large, as a ruling power. 
 
 ylpeadai, become, be made, come to pass, turn out : inrdpxew, 
 to be originally, by birth, by primary ond essential condition. 
 It may be doubted whether flveadai, virdpy(etp are ever used for 
 the simple elvai, : for ylpeadai implies change of state, character, 
 or condition ; whereas inrdpj(ei,v calls attention to the original 
 condition of the subject, that he is as he always was. H. 1. 4, n. ; 
 Ph. 2. 6, n. The distinction between the words will be apparent 
 in the following : 2 C. 3. y, 8, eyei/^^ij ip Bofy, was made to be in 
 glory for a time ; earai ip Bofy, shall be in glory permanently : 
 H. 11. 6, OTi iarl Koi tok iK^jjTovaiP axnov fuaOairoSoniii yiperai, 
 that he exists, and to those who earnestly seek him, becomes a 
 giver of reward : A. 7. 56, virdpj(mv Bk TrX'^prys TIpevfiaTov ar/Cov, 
 not yepo/ievof, and more than &v, as it shows his antecedent 
 spiritual condition: A. 17. 24, o&ros ovpavov koX 7^ Kvpto^ 
 inrdpjftop : here yepofiepoi would have been quite out of place 
 (contrast Ph. 2. 6. 8, ei» /lop^ Oeov tnrdpxav .... fyepoftepov 
 UTTJj/coos fitXP'' Bo-vd-Tov) : A. 22. 3, fijXoyr^s vrrapxav tov 0eov : 
 Ja. 1. 22,rfCpe<T6e, 'become ye:' H. 6. 12, Xva /it) ptoOpol fyeptjaffe, 
 that ye become not dull: 1 Th. 2. 5, ovre ydp irove iv Xoy^ 
 KoXaKe^ai eyeprjOij/iev, ' did we take part in,' ' came we to share 
 in :' rytypo/uu iv implies the entrance into, and existence in the 
 given thing or condition: 1 Th. 2. 14, ip irapa^daet yeyovep, 
 became involved in transgression : L. 22. 44. ^i* dr^fopCq : A. 22. 
 17, iv iKardaei : 2 T. 1. 17, fyevofiepo^ iv 'Piofir), when he arrived 
 in Home and was there : Xen. Anab. iv. 3. 29, S? &v TrpSnoi iv 
 T^ irepav r^ivrirai : Cyrop. viii. 6. 13, airwsv iyivero iv MijSoi? : 
 Demosth. de CoronA 96, tovto y&p \mdpf)(ew v/ua$ etSoras 
 fffoviMi, for I consider that you know this from the begiiming. 
 
200 
 
 SYNONYMS —yvatnTj, yv&aK, irpo^ryreia. 
 
 ryeatfrfo^, tiller of the boU, husbandman : dfiveXovpyot, vine- 
 dresser. 
 
 'yvuifiTi, the decision formed, mind made up, resolution, senten- 
 tia; vov<!, perception, apprehension, way of thinking, sensus. 
 Twu/ii; is also personal opinion, uttered upon reflection and 
 deliberation, in opposition to hrnarfq, express injunction. " j/ou? 
 intuB in credendis, fyvtofitj sententia prolata in agendis." voetv, 
 perceive, 'merken;' avvUpai., understand, ' veratefien.' "Plus 
 est avvievai quam yivwa-Keiv. ytvtaaKeiv est nosse, a-vviivai, 
 attcnte expendere." E. 5. 17 : L. 18. 34 : M. 13. 13. 
 
 Vcwffw, faculty of knowing, intelligence, comprehension, 
 insight into divine truth : hrOpxoaK, the act of coming to full 
 knowledge, perfect knowledge. hriyvutaKt is the additional 
 advanced instruction given subsequent to the rudimental cate- 
 chetical teaching: R. 1. 28, koL Kadm ovk eioKifiaaav top Qeop 
 exeip ep eirvypcoaei, and in proportion as after trial and testing 
 of the truth they had received, they rejected the retention of 
 God in their mind by expanding and developing that funda- 
 mental knowledge. When \070s and yp&an are distinguished 
 from each other, \oyov means speech, utterance, power of ex- 
 pression: fp&ai<i, spiritual intelligence and insight, doctrinal 
 knowledge: Xoyoi lypcaaewi, the faculty of unfolding and ex- 
 pounding Gospel truth. In Trpo^reta there is prominent the 
 notion of inspired utterance, public declaration to all classes of 
 hearers, oracular declaration of the Divine will, but not necessa- 
 rily with regard to things to come. Dr. Vaughan remarks 
 (R. 12. 6), " irpo^Te/a was the most desirable of all the spi- 
 ritual gifts of the early Church, (1) because unlike the gift of 
 tongues it conveyed oIkoSo/itip koI irapdKkT)atp ^koI vapa/iv6iap, 
 1 0. 14. I — 5 ; (2) it was etV tnjfieiop ov roii airlaroK (like ai 
 fyX&aaai), dWd rots irtarevovaiv : (3) it was the means of dis- 
 closing to a hearer rh Kpvma t^? KapSiat avrov, and thus of 
 bringing him to worship God; (4) it was exercised under 
 direct and special revelation (i^p Sk dXXa dvoKa\v<f>0iJ k.t.X., v. 
 30) ; but (5) it was capable of control by the possessor, for the 
 avoidance of confusion and disorder, w. 31, 32. It was a gift 
 therefore (according to the proper meaning of the term irpo^^ 
 TTj?), not of prediction, but of inspired preaching ; of forth-telling, 
 not of foretelling; prtedicandi, not pradicendi." In Ph. 1. 9, 
 iirlrivioaK is accurate knowledge of moral and practical truth ; 
 
 ■ 
 
 SYNONYMS— 7M'w<r/c(«), eiTUTTaiiai,. 
 
 201 
 
 '■^ 
 
 atadfioK, the power of apprehension, moral tact, perceptivity, 
 the contrary of that dulness and inactivity of the mental sense 
 which induces moral want of judgment and indifference. tro(}>la 
 implies a divine affection of the heart, which produces a right 
 application of the vi/wat?. (Compare Cowper, Task, on the con- 
 trast between Wisdom and Knowledge. See also the first 
 poem in Tennyson's In Memoriam.) ao<pia may be regarded as 
 wisdom residing in the mind, while ^povijaii is wisdom in 
 action, the faculty which applies the principles of wisdom. 
 Thus tf>p6vriai<i is said to be a fruit of ao<ftla : LXX, Prov. 8. 1, 
 aif Tijp ao^iap xripv^eii, '{pa ^popr/ak coi inraKovar) : Prov. 8. 1 2, 
 iyat ]} ao(f>la KareaKijputTa rifp ^ov\i)P /col yp&aip, koI eppotap iy(o 
 iTreKokea-dfiTip : Jer. 10. 12, xvpioi 6 dpop0d>aa<i ttjp olKovfieprjp 
 ep T§ ao^ia ainov, Kal t§ ^pop^aei avrov i^ereipe top ovpapov. 
 See Prov. 3. 19. Comp. the use of <j)p6pifiot, M. 10. 16; 25. 2: 
 ^popifioxi iirolriaep, L. 16. 8. The seven wise men of Greece 
 were practical men, trvperoi, rather than the ao^ol of a later 
 age. Dicsearchus remarks (Laert. i. 40), oike o-o^oif ovre ^tXo- 
 a6<f>oyv avTOVi yeyopivai, trvperov^ Si rti/a? xal po/iodeTiicovv. In 
 1 T. 6. 20, dpTi0e<reK rrj^ ■f^evStopv/iov yptiirea)^, oppositions of the 
 knowledge which falsely arrogates to itself that name : " non 
 enim vera scientia esse potest, quae veritati contraria est." 
 
 ryipdtaKio implies knowledge which produces some emotion 
 and affection of the mind; it occurs repeatedly in St. John's 
 first Epistle. Christian irpa^K is the test of Christian jpSiok. 
 We may infer our knowledge of Christ from our obedience to 
 Ilim, J. 7. 17. To know the Lord in the language of Scripture 
 is to believe in Him, to fear, to love, to obey. iiriaTafiai^ rest 
 upon, implies knowledge of a lower degree, apprehend as a fact, 
 without reflection, and sometimes only as an instinct, Jude 10. 
 olSa, know as a doctrine of the Christian faith ; yivdtaKa, know 
 from personal experience : 1 J. 2. 29, ^ai» elSfJTe Sri BiKaioi iari, 
 jivioaKeTe ori irai 6 ttomp ttjp Siicaioavprjp ef avroD yeyipprirai : 
 1 J. 4. 16, Kal ■^fieii iypMKafiep xai ireviaTevKafiep r^p dr/din)P 
 ^1; exet o Oebi ep ^(iIp, and we by our own personal experience 
 know, reflect upon with acquiescence and satisfaction, ap- 
 prove : o <yhp KaTepyd^ofiai ov yiPU><TKU> : Ps. 1. 6, yipwTKei, 
 KvpMi 6S0P SiKaiiav. rjSeiP, elSorei may often be rendered 
 •consider,' A. 7. is; 23. 5: R. 7. 7 : E. 6. a: C. 3. 24. In 1 
 Th. 5. 12 eiZepai means ' reoognize fully,' " ut rationem et respec- 
 tum habentis," analogous to VT, and approximating in meaning 
 
202 
 
 SYNONYMS — 7077i;<r/to?, Seo-TroTij?. 
 
 to hrvyivaxTKeiv, 1 C. 16. 18. This use of elSevai does not occur 
 in classical Greek. Cf. G. 4. 9 : 1 C. 8. 3 : J. 10, u. 
 
 yoyyvtrfiov, the outward expression of sullen discontent, ill- 
 concealed dissatisfaction : BiaXoyiaiiov, the inward disposition 
 to murmur and object, evil thoughts, unreasonable reasoning. 
 
 SeiKia, moral cowardice, 'timer' (the contrary extreme to 
 physical cowardice is dpaavrq^, foolhardrness). (ftofitxi is a 
 middle term, ' metus,' used both in a good and bad sense. In 
 a bad sense it is the effect of the nvevfui Bov\e[a<i, B. 8. 15, the 
 being afraid of God ; in 1 P. 3. 14, intimidation. In a good 
 sense, ' the fear of God,' passim : evKdfieia, roYcrence, object of 
 fear, cautious obserYance resulting from salutary fear : evXafi^f, 
 cautious and careful in conduct, one who takes heed to the 
 thing which is right, especially applied to pious Jews, ' devout ' 
 in A. y., which is also used as the English equivalent for 
 eixre^eiii and ae/So/ievoi, proselytes to the Jewish faith : €iae^i]<i, 
 evaefieia, denote practical piety of every kind in the sense of 
 the Latin 'pius,' 'pietas,' reverence (o-e/Sa?) well and rightly 
 directed ; Angl. ' worship,' i. e. worthship : ffeoaefi^i, deoaifieia, 
 necessarily refer to piety toward God, which is not always the 
 case with evaePryi, evae^eia, but in the Kew Testament evtreffeui 
 is practically the same as deoae^eia, " vis pietatis in ipsa vita 
 vel extern^ vel intern^ " (Tittmann) : 17 vpbt rbv Sva koI fiovop 
 a>f d\i}da><; onoXoyovfievop re xal ovra Qeov avdvevaiM, Koi, f) Kark 
 rovTov ^mij (Eusebius) : ffprjaKeia, the ceremonial service of 
 religion, the external form, of which Beoae^eia is the animating 
 spirit : 0pr}(Tico<i, ' religiosus,' the zealous and diligent performer 
 of the outward service of God : SeuriSalfuov, SeiaiSai/xopia were 
 originally neutral terms, expressing respect for dead men, awe 
 of invisible beings : irroijaK, alarm, trepidation, from the appre- 
 hension of real or imaginary dangers. 
 
 SeffiroTTf} is applied to one who has absolute and unlimited 
 power, as a master over slaves : Kvpu><! implies a power subject 
 to limitation, as a husband over his wife, as a father over his 
 children : Kvpioi yvvaiKW koI vimv avr)p koX iraT^p, SeawoTrji 
 Be dpyvpotpijTav (Ammonius) : Kvpuy; is a title of honour. The 
 application of Biairora implies g^reater submission : xvpie, 
 greater respect. Hence the Greeks refused to apply the title 
 of SeairoTrji to any but the gods. As however the BeoriroTfii 
 affected the character of eiepyerrjii (L. 22. 25), the slave-owner 
 would often be gratified, if they acknowledged him as Kvpioi. 
 
 SYNONYMS — Stai3o\o?, BlBlUTKaXot. 
 
 203 
 
 St Paul appUes the terms Kvpioi. Se<nr6rai, to masters without 
 distinction. Both terms are applied to the Father and to 
 the Son (2 P. 2. 1 : Jude s). But BeairSrvi expresses more 
 decidedly thai Kipm the absolute dominion of God over His 
 
 creatures. o t q «. ^f 
 
 BidpoXm, slanderer, traducer, spoken of men, J l. a- 3, 01 
 women, 1 T. 3. 11 ; Tit. 2. 3 : KardkaXo^, Theoph. ^arava? is 
 appUed to any tempter or adversary of the truth, M. 16. 23. 
 The noun in Hebrew denotes an adversary or opposer. Ihe 
 verb means ' to lie in wait,' ' oppose,' • resist.' Both words are 
 applied to the prince of the faUen angels: Rev. 12. 9, o5^« o 
 dpyaloi, & KoKoiliepo^ 8*a/9o\o? koI 6 aarapa,. The Hebrew 
 Jarapa, is more generic than the Greek Bidfiol^. The former 
 expresses his character as an opposer of aU good; the latter 
 denotes his relation to the saints as their accuser, calumniator, 
 traducer, Job 1. 7-12 ; Zech. 3. 1, 2. The sacred writers adopt 
 all the forms of personal agency in setting forth the conduct 
 and character of Satan. (M. 12. 26, n.) 
 
 SidKOPixi, attendant, one in subordinate station, a word oi very 
 extensive signification, formed perhaps from St»}«a,. run to serve. 
 AppUed to our Lord, L. 22. 27; to St. Paul, 2 C. 6. 4; to 
 magistrates, R. 13. 4. {rrrripirvt, subordinate agent, implying 
 a superior, attendant in the synagogue, or in the council, bo 
 {nrvperiu, 'act for,' serve under any one. 0epd7rtop, one who 
 holds a confidential position, as mini&ters of state are servants 
 of the crown. olKOPojiot, home-manager, steward, chamberlain, 
 owenj?, domestic servant. 5oOXos. a skve, in the lowest grade. 
 BulkopU, especially used of ministering to the poor, A. 6 l ; 
 12. 25 ; 2 C. 8. 4 ; but means any kind of service ; a word of 
 wider meaning than XaTpela. , • 1, .1 
 
 hrlTpoiro<:, overlooker, guardian, one entrusted with the 
 charge of any thing: Aristoph. EccL 212, iinTp67roK koI 
 rafilaiai: Xen. CEcum. xii. 2, o ep roll dfypolt iiriTpovot 
 ivillicus). In G. 4. 2, iiriTpoiroi, and oUopofwi are the guardians 
 and stewards (slaves perhaps) who superintended the education 
 and provided for the support of the *;\ijpoi/6/*os (herus). MMan, 
 Var. Hist. iii. 26, iirlTpo-n-oi koI tow ttoiSo? «ol t&v XRVf^-rmp- 
 
 SiStiffKaXo?, master, as teacher of scholars, disciples: em- 
 ardrni. master, as the head of a company, or as the employer 
 of workmen : Kvpio-;, master, with reference to wife, children, 
 servants, or as Lord of subjects. The term BiSdaKoXxxi does not 
 
204 
 
 SYNOHYMa—StSdaKW, <ro<f>l^u>. 
 
 describe any separate order in the Church, but denotes a special 
 gift and quaUty distinguishing some persons in the Church. 
 St. Paul calls himself SiSdaKoKiyi idv&v, 1 T. 2. 7 : 2 T. 1. 17 
 where we find the words iiriaroKo^ and vijpvf "a^sociat^i with 
 SiBa<TKa)^<t. He was sent to be a herald {K^pv^) in the degree 
 of an Apostle (a7r6ffTo\o9), with the endowment of supernatural 
 gifts to be a Z,UaKa>^<i. In A. 13. 1, hiUaKoKoi. are joined 
 with irpo<f>f)Tai. In E. 4. 11, roi^ Bi 7roi/iii,a<t «ol SiSaaKaXov^, 
 different names of the same class, stationary rather than mis- 
 sionary. TToinivei, iirlaKoiroi, irpea^irepoi. ot fiyoifievot were 
 SiSaaKaXoi possessing the x«P*<r/*a tcvfieputjaeon. The SiSda- 
 KaXoi had the gift of SiSaxv. but were not invested as a body 
 with any administrative powers and authority. 
 
 StSdamo, SiaXiyofiai, are especiaUy applied to the instruction 
 of believers, A. 6. 43 ; 20. 7. The latter is used of con- 
 versational teaching; Kr/pvaaa,. proclaim as a herald, reiterate 
 a solemn message or startling fact, to excite the attention of 
 unbelievers, M. 3. l. eiarreXl^ofiai is a more general term 
 applied to private members of the Church, as well as public 
 teachers, denoting ordinary conversation as well as public 
 addresses, i. q., XaXowrev rbv \6yop, A. 11, 19: Kanixiw 
 instruct oraUy, 1 C. 14. 19 : G. 6. 6 : Sia^uiprvpeadai. to deUver 
 their testimony thoroughly and completely. 
 
 StSaxn, SiSaaKoKla, the instruction of the young and ignorant, 
 sometimes mission, ministry: irapdKKriat'i, the exhortation of 
 more advanced Christians, used very much as X070S, but with 
 especial reference to invitations, encouragements, entreaties, 
 cheering on to Christian action : -irapanvdia, persuasive power] 
 expressive of more tenderness than irapaKXr/aii. StSaxv (teach- 
 ing) may point more to the aci, SiSaffKuXia (doctrine), more to 
 the substance or result of teaching. This sense of BiSavv is 
 supported by Thucyd. iv. 126, oi>c &v otioim^ SiSaxvP &fia ry 
 irapaKeXevtrei iiroioufi'nv. irpo(fn,Telat. varied declarations of the 
 diyme counsels, expositions of God's oracles immediately in- 
 spired, by and emanating from the Holy Spirit. 
 
 ao<j>l^io marks the true wisdom which the Holy Scriptures 
 impart: 2 T. 3. 15: Ps. 19. 7, ao,l>i^ovaa w,V«a: 105. 22, roi? 
 irpeafivripow ao^iaat: 119. gs, ia6i>iad<i p.e ri,p ivroX^v aov 
 Theoph. ij ^fw jv&ais: cn^l^ei top &p0p,oirop ek dirdrriP koX 
 ao<l>ianara Koi Xorfo/xaxlai . . . dXX^ ^ Beta ypwavt aod>l^et c« 
 <roT7}plap, 
 
 
 SYNONYMS — SlKMOa, So^d^d). 
 
 205 
 
 SiKaiow, make Sixaiop, 'make out to be just,' applied to 
 things, deem just, claim as one's right or due, desire to be 
 done, like d^wa. When spoken of persons, put in the position 
 of SlKcuoi, * account righteous,' do a man justice, give him his 
 due by acquitting him of the charge, or by inflicting the 
 penalty, and thus cancelling the crime. It is in the latter 
 sense that the Scotch used the word 'justify,' as equivalent to, 
 execute. BiKaioffvpij, the state, habit, and quality of him who 
 is Blxaioi}, the virtue which is opposed to dZiKia, dpoftia, 
 B. 6. 13 : 2 C. 6. 14, and to the corrupt bias of human nature, 
 2 C. 11. IS: right conduct conformable to the laws of God, 
 2 T. 2. 22; 3. 16: Tit. 2. 12. In 1 T. 6. 11, BiKatoawrj is 
 joined with evaifieui, of which the latter denotes practical piety, 
 as the result of general conformity to God's law. wicrriv and 
 drfdmi are mentioned as the fundamental principles of Chris- 
 tianity : vrro/iop^, irpdwdffeia, as the principles on which a 
 Christian ought to act towards gainsayers and opponents. 
 BiKaioavvf) &eov, B. 1. 17, refers to the plan devised by God 
 for man to be just before Him, where the addition of Geov 
 points to God Himself as the Author, the origin, the source. 
 B. 3. 26, BUoMP Koi BiKuiovPTa, righteous, and imparting 
 righteousness. "There is a broad distinction between the 
 absolute and the relative use of BMoiovaOai. It is used ab- 
 solutely in regard to God, L. 7. 29 ; Christ, 1 T. 3. 16 ; men, 
 B. 4. 2: Ja. 2. 21. In the relative use we must distinguish 
 between the purely judicial meaning, M. 12. 37, and the com- 
 prehensive dogmatical meaning, which includes the idea not 
 only of forgiveness of past sins (B. 6. 7), but also of a spiritual 
 change of heart through the inworking power of faith." 
 Ellicott. BiKai(o/ia, what is ordained as just, statute, decree 
 (Latin, ' jubeo,' ' jussum,' 'jus,' ' justum ') : ordinance, L. 1. 6 : H. 
 9. 1. 10 : requirement, B. 2. 26 ; 8. 4 : sentence of condemnation, 
 1. 32: of acquittal, 5. 16: righteous act, is; Bev. 19. s: 
 SiKalonn<!, the action of the legislator or judge in promulgating 
 a decree, in declaring a person righteous, in recognizing him as 
 such, B. 4. 25; 5. is. 
 
 So^a, manifestation of excellence, J. 2. 11, the future state of 
 acknowledged perfection which God designs for man, B. 8. 
 18. 21 ; 9. 23, the sum of the true attributes or characteristics of 
 God, J. 1. 14. 
 
 Bo^d^, recognize in true character, B. 1. 21 : J. 7. 39 : 
 
206 
 
 SYNONYMS — Swa/iii, 'E^paio<!. 
 
 2 Th. 3. I : R. 11. I3. Thus L. 17. is, SiBovai, So^av ry 
 0€y, to ascribe to God His true character (J. 9. 24 : A. 12. 23) : 
 J. 11. 40, S'^ffji ri}v ho^av tov Qeov, His power manifested: 
 R. 9. 23 : E. 3. 16, roi> ttKovtop t^? S6f»j?, the fulness of his 
 perfections : Svofia, revelation of character and will, that which 
 brings before the mind all that a person is : M. 1. 23, ets opo/ia 
 •>rpo<fnJTov, to acknowledge one in the character of prophet, 
 M. 10. 41 ; ndrep, Bo^aaov aov ro ovofia, manifest Thyself 
 according to that which Thou art, J. 12. 28 ; a summary of 
 the divine character or qualities, Ex. 33. 19; 34. 6—7. So 
 ' hallowed be Thy name.' 
 
 Bvpafiii, inherent power, natural capacity, moral as well as 
 physical ability, miraculous energy, divine power of speech and 
 persuasion : i^ovtria, delegated authority, social claim, right, 
 privilege : t<»^w?, physical strength, vires, power naturally 
 resident in the subject : ivifyyeia, power in action, energetic 
 exercise, efiectual operation : Kpa-rot;, power in effect, force, 
 superiority : evipyr)fia, a work wrought by us, and in us, com- 
 bining ivipyeia and avvipyeia, natural works from an internal 
 principle. 
 
 Svva/Jiai denotes moral power, to-^i^iu, physical ability, Bvvaftai, 
 from Swo9, equivalent to * divinus,' ' bonus,' I make myself 
 good, am strong enough, equal, able. The association of willing- 
 ness with power, of power tempered by mercy, may be traced 
 in R. 11. 23; 14. 4; 16. 25: 2 C. 9. 8: E. 3. 20: 1 T. 1. 12 : 
 Judo 24: H. 7. 25; 11. 19: laxva, strong in physical health 
 and mental power, have efficacy, prevail; used of physical 
 strength or mental validity. In the ascription, Rev. 5. 12, 
 BwafiK, ability to effect all the purposes of rectitude and wis- 
 dom : urxyt, ability brought into action : "rrXovToii, the fulness 
 of all good : rifi^, intrinsic excellence, supreme perfection : 
 eiXoyia, the utterance of gratitude from the universe of holy 
 and happy beings. (See ao<f>la, So^a.) 
 
 i^ovtriat, authorities, used for human magistrates : oi iv rekei, 
 L. 12. 11 : Tit. 3. 1 : for angelic powers, both good and evil, 
 E. 3. 10; 6. 12: 0. 1. 16 ; 2. is: 1 P. 3. 22. The association 
 of willingness with power in Bvva/iai may be traced in the 
 German ' miigen,' the meanings of which, according to Fliigel, 
 are, ' to be able,' ' to be allowed,' ' like,' * wish,' • desire,' ' have 
 a mind to.' 
 
 'E^pauKi, a Hebrew in language, denoting superiority in 
 
 SYNONYMS— ey7i'0?, eyKpareia. 
 
 207 
 
 lineage and education over the Hellenists, Ph. 3. 5 : 'lovSaioi. a 
 Jew in his nationaUty, as distinguished from the Gentiles : 
 'lapaiiKkni. the most honourable title, as a member of the 
 theocracy and heir of the promises, R. 9. 4; 11. 1 : A. 2. 22 : 
 2 0. 11. 22. In A. 14. 1 ; 18. 4, we have 'lovZaloi immedia,tely 
 coupled with "EXX*?^?, where the former denotes Jews by birth, 
 as well as by faith; the latter is appUed to Gentile proselytes, 
 who had joined themselves to the Lord to serve Him, Isa. 56. 6. 
 In A. 19. 10. 17, at a more advanced stage of the spread of the 
 Gospel, "EWvvev seems to have been applied to all Gentile 
 converts, whether they had been proselytes previously or not. 
 So in R. 2. 9, 10. 'EWtiviarai occurs properly only in A. 6. J : 
 9. 29, Jews residing at a distance from Palestine who usually 
 did not speak Hebrew. In A. 11. 20, it is doubtful whether • 
 we should read "EXKrivtK or 'EXXijwora?. 
 
 eyyvoi, i.q. 677w?t»j9, one who gives security for the due 
 performance of the conditions of the covenant {iv, ifvtop, hollow 
 of the hand), sponsor, surety, spokesman: Ecclus. 29.^ 15, 
 Xdpi,ra<: efivov fii) iirCKoSr,- eSaKev yttp ri,v yjruxriv avrov xnrep 
 aov: tie<rlTn<s, mediator (fiearov. elfu; go), one who intervenes 
 between two parties, ' the daysman who lays hand upon both,' 
 Job 9. 33 : intercessor, peace-maker, H. 7. 22 ; 8. 6 : 1 T. 2. 6, 
 TOV dtroaroXov koI apxiepea t^? ofioXoylai r)H&v: H. 3. 1, rov 
 dirooToXov. " eum qui Dei causam apud nos agit ; rov dpxi^pea, 
 qui causam nostram apud Deum agit. Hie Apostolatus et 
 Pontificatus imo mediatoria vocabulo continentur." Bengel. 
 
 iyxaTJa), bring a formal charge, arraign, indict, the forensic 
 term: akiaop.ai, aUege as ground of inquiry: eX%«., convict, 
 show to be wrong, prove guilty. 
 
 iyKpdreia, self-command, self-control, opposed to self-in- 
 dulgence, the grace by which the Spirit controls the flesh, the 
 restraining the passions which cause injury to one's neighbour ; 
 A. 24. 25 : 10. 7. 9, el ovk eyKparevovrai, if they have no 
 self-control: 1 C. 9. 25, 6 affa>vi^6fievo<s irdvra lytcpareverai, 
 exercises self-restraint in all indulgences : trpaoriji, a natural 
 mildness of disposition, an attribute of Christ, M. 11. 29: 
 2'0. 10. 1. The philosophers applied it to that quality by 
 which a man retained his own equanimity, irpaorni is opposed 
 to a contentious spirit, Tit. 3. 2 ; to severity in dealing with 
 culprits or opponents, G. 6. l : 1 C. 4. 21 : 2 T. 2. 2«, 85 : 
 irpaihrdeeia, 1 T. 6. 11, meekness of heart and feelings: cTrt- 
 
208 
 
 SYNONYMS— 6t/<(UI', iKK\t)<ria. 
 
 elKeia, a habit of mildness, from considering what is due to 
 others, reasonableness, fairness. From irfxpareia will proceed 
 inroftomj, endurance, submissiveness, the patience of himiility, 
 2 P. 1. 6. Opposed to vp^Tffi we have 0^71X07^9, irascibility : 
 dypi6T7if, rusticity: ;^aXeiroTi;9, severity, ^(ctxijf, making 
 allowance, forbearing, not insisting on just rights, in distinc- 
 tion from SUaioi. A little less than einretdijq /iear)) eXeoi/v, 
 Ja. 3. 17, but more than dftajfoi, not aggressive, nrpaorf)^ is 
 the outward expression of humility, having for its founda- 
 tion the inward feeling, Ta'ireivo<f>po<rvvr), modesty of mind. 
 Theophylact (quoted by Trench, Synonyms, p. 207) compares 
 vrpaoTfji with fiaKpodv/ila. The irp^of remits the pimishment 
 due to the offender: the iMKp6dvpM<i, after long deliberation, 
 inflicts it. Compare L. 18. 7 : Ecclus. 36. 22, 23. The Scrip- 
 tural irpaoTqt is an inwrought grace of the soul, under the 
 influence of which we submit to the divine dispensations with- 
 out resistance or dispute, acquiescing in the thought that the 
 insults and injuries inflicted by men are permitted by God 
 for the chastening and purifying of His people, 2 Sam. 16. 11. 
 ftuKpoOvfiUt is joined, R. 2. 4, with p^oronjv, and avay^j, 
 forhearance : M. 17. 17, &»? irore avi^o/mi vfi&v ; " Deo tribuitur 
 (uiKpoOvfiia, quia poonas peccatis debitas differt propter gloriam 
 suam, et ut dctur peccatoribus resipiscendi locus." Suicer. to 
 aXoKy eirvriOevai rr)v rrpoaijKovffav Bixriu, Theophylact. 
 
 elKotv, actual likeness, designed representation, vivid resem- 
 blance, effigies, picture, statue. aKid, shadowy resemblance, 
 umbra, sketch, outline. The axtd is the shadow which may be 
 cast by the statue, eiKmv. j^apaxri^p, exact correspondence, as 
 of an impression with the seal, or of a coin with the die. a&/ia. 
 as opposed to aKid, substantial reality. inroTvnaiaK, primary 
 draught, or sketch, to be afterwards filled in, a cartoon or 
 subtracery to be afterwards painted over. et&aXov, a mere etSo? : 
 i^a, an ideal phantom, simulacrum, a nonentity: 1 0. 8. 4, 
 olSa/iep oTt oiiSep elSaXov iv Koafiat, as far as it is an object of 
 worship, it is a stone or block of wood and nothing more. 
 
 iKKkfjaia, a body of men, called out of the rest of mankind to 
 form a society, and knit together by the closest spiritual bonds, 
 originally an assembly of the people lawfully convened at 
 Athens, avpar/urfri, any gathering or drawing together of 
 persons, presenting solely the ideas of collection, association. 
 The Christians dropped the use of avvar/to^i^, which was per- 
 
 i- 
 
 i 
 
 SYNONYMS — iK\veadai, ^Katov. 
 
 209 
 
 manently associated with Jewish worship, and appropriated 
 iKKKtjala as a title of honourable significance, with implied 
 reference to those who remained in the state, out of which the 
 members of the €KK\i)aia had been called. The avvofytoy^ was 
 congregative, bringing together the members of an existing 
 society, but excluding all others. The ixKKriaia is aggrega- 
 tive, as it calls, invites, and summons men from the whole 
 world to become its members. In Rev. 3. 9, awarfoifj/ij ex- 
 presses those who were united only in opposition to the truth. 
 In 2 Tim. 2. 19 the Church is called o <rrep«os OefiiXuK; roO 
 OeoS, the firm foundation of God, where Oefiikioi marks the 
 Church of Christ and His Apostles as a foundation placed in 
 the world, on which the whole ftiture oUoSofiij rests (E. 2. 20), 
 and conveys the idea of its firmness, strength^ and solidity; 
 E. 3. 17 : 0. 1. 23 : H. 11. 10: Rev. 21. u. 19. 0e/jii\to<iis pro- 
 perly an adjective, but is used in later writers as a substantive. 
 Aristoph. Aves 1137, defiekiovi XiBovt. 
 
 iK\vea0M, giving way altogether, from failure of power; 
 iKKUKelv, failure, from moral weakness, out and out faint- 
 hearted. iyKaxetv, cowardly in action, not so strong as ex/eo- 
 
 iceip. 
 
 iKtrraavt, surprise, astonishment, when' the mind is carried 
 out of or beyond itself, a trance, distraction of the mind from 
 terror, Mk. 16. 8. In 2 C. 5. 13, i^earijp^v, '■ we are beside our- 
 selves,' is opposed to aeoiPpovovfiep, ' in sound mind.' The long- 
 continued and permanent state of eKoraaK is fiapia. In J. 10. 
 20, the possession of a devil is associated with madness, most 
 probably what we call fanaticism. Bd/xfioi, awe, surprise, at a 
 strange or unusual deed or expression, frequently the com- 
 mencement of eKtxTaai<!, the effect produced by a preternatural 
 or singfular occurrence, dafi^eo/tai, Mk. 10. 32, amazement at 
 our Lord's majestic bearing, solemn manner, and awful aspect. 
 
 ikey^K, conviction, mode of proof. eXeyxoi, reproof, proving 
 the contrary, proof for the refutation of error, the mental state 
 of being convinced. 
 
 eXaiop, oil in its simple natural state, as generally used by 
 wrestlers ; fivpou, ointment, ' unguentum,' the base of which is 
 oil, with the addition of aromatic ingredients, generally used 
 by women. Hence the point of our Lord's rebuke, L. 7. 4fl, 
 eXai^ 7^p xe^aXi}i> fiov ovk ^Xet^af, avrri Se /ivp^ ^Xec^j 
 fiou roim iroSaf. "Ilia pretioso unguento non caput tantum, 
 
 p 
 
210 
 
 SYNONYMS— eXeo?, cWoXj;. 
 
 Bed et pedes perfimdit ; ille ne caput quidem mero oleo ; quod 
 perfunctorisa amioitiao fuerat." Grotius. aket4>eiv is used of all 
 anointings, whether with fivpop or SXaiov: but j(pUiv is the 
 sacred heavenly word restricted to the anointing of the Son by 
 the Father with the Holy Ghost, used in a mystical or spiritual 
 
 sense. 
 
 e\£Of, love of pity to man, as a sufferer ; p^a/otf, the freeness 
 of divine love to man, as a sinner. In the divine mind iXeoi 
 precedes x"/"'* ^^^ i^ tlio reception of the divine blessing X'^P'^i 
 (pardon) must precede e\eo<: (mercy). The sense of unpardoned 
 sin must be removed before the misery of sin can be mitigated. 
 Hence the order in 1 T. 1. 3, %a/!Mf, SXeo^, elpijvr), as IXeov is the 
 effect of x^pi^y ^^^ ttp^vt) the joint result from %a/)(« and S\eo9. 
 When etprivri is joined with aa^oKeia, etp^vr) denotes an inward 
 repose and security, da-<f)dXeia, a sureness and -safety that is 
 not interfered with, or compromised by outward obstacles. The 
 idea of compassion for misfortune and suffering is prominent in 
 i\€ij/iwv, and in the cry for mercy, iKer)aov. But where the 
 sufferer is deeply impressed with a sense of his guilt, iXdaKOfiai, 
 'C\£U)9 are used in order to express the necessity of expiation, or 
 divine interposition. Hence the prayer of the publican (L, 18. 
 13) was not iKirjirov, but iXdadijTi fioi. t^ ufiaprtoX^. The idea 
 of guilt is not necessarily connected with eXeoi. TKeai is 
 applied to the Creator only (see Alford, H. 8. 12), ^Xeof is 
 ascribed to the creature as well. The root of eKea and i\ao<! is 
 the same, but two words are used to express the essential 
 difference between the feeling of pity in God and in. man. 
 olicripfioi (connected with 61, oIktov) expresses subjective sym- 
 pathy and distress on witnessing misfortune and calamity. 0. 
 3. 12, airXarfxya oucrtpfi&v. 
 
 epSei^Ki, showing forth, process of discovering, method of 
 demonstrating, indication ; Ph. 1. 38 : B.. 3. 25. evBeirffia, the 
 substance of the matter demonstrated, palpable evidence, recog- 
 nized token, 2 Tb. 1. s. 
 
 ivOvfirjaii, imagination, secret desire or motive, passing 
 thought. epvoM, serious intent, though never executed. 
 
 eWoXij, a single precept, i/o/i09, a code of precepts ; R. 13. 9, 
 10 ; evroXai, moral injunctions, prohibitions ; htKauanara, posi- 
 tive ordinances, rites and ceremonies, L. 1. 6 ; Sucaltofia, judicial 
 sentence of acquittal or condemnation ; B. 5. 6 ; Rev. 15. 4. 
 Soyfia, placilum, * id quod placet,' 8 ieiomai : a decre^. which 
 
 SYNONYMS —iirianj/ir), f^Xo?. 
 
 211 
 
 derives its force not from any conform^^y to the foundation of 
 words, but from the authority by which it is promulgated. 
 Soyfiara, positive edicts, accidental, circumstantial, local and 
 temporary. 
 
 iTTKrrqfiri, knowledge of facts, natural or acquired; aoipia, 
 the higher faculty of making a right use of knowledge. (See 
 on r/v&aiii.) ao(f>la, the general gift of illumination ; airoKa- 
 \ir>JrK, the more special gift of insight into the divine mysteries, 
 E. 1. 17. 4>^<rK, that which is inherent, innate, fixed and 
 implanted from the first, in opposition to that which is acces- 
 sional, superinduced, accidental. 
 
 ipyd^ofiai, work, labour, especially for livelihood. Applied 
 to agriculture and general business, foUow^any pursuit. The 
 exhortation of the Apostle, 1 Th. 4. 11, derives additional force 
 from the consideration that the inhabitants of Thessalonica were 
 engaged in mercantile and industrial callings, as handicrafts- 
 men and artificers. These too he exhorts '^avxd^eiv, which 
 marks a sedate and tranquil spirit (1 Tim. 2. 2), in contrast to 
 the excited and unquiet bustle: trepiep^aX.eadai, 2 Th. 3. 11, 
 that attends ill-defined or mistaken religious expectations, 2 Th. 
 3. 11, 13. ip^aala, effort, occupation, gain. dr/mvl^o/jLai, exert 
 oneself as a combatant in the public games, strive, contend. 
 dywvia, contest, conflict of mind. 
 
 £v7£i/^9, well-bom, noble-minded, ingenuus, implying good 
 qualities of disposition, as well as nobility of birth. evayriP^v^ 
 one of good condition, of reputable position, eutr^ij/xoi/ci)?, with 
 propriety of outward conduct, with decent gravity and seemly 
 deportment (eiiKa^&i, aefiv&^), associated with Kara tu^iv, 1 0. 
 14. 40 ; contrasted with dTaKTCi>9, 2 Th. 3. 6. 
 
 evKoytfTOf!, blessed, applied to God only; iMKapufi, happy, 
 applied to men ; /taKapl^eo, call happy ; fiaieapia-fioi, the pro- 
 nouncing of blessing; eiikoyrjftivoii is applied to man, and in 
 LXX occasionally to God, but £v\oyriT6<i never to man. In 
 1 T. 1. 11 ; 6. 15, fiuKapioi is applied to God, to exalt the glory 
 of the Gospel, expressing not only His own immutable and 
 essential perfections, but the riches of His mercy in this dispen- 
 sation to man. , 
 
 ^fj\o<i, in a good sense, ardour, zeal for the cause of another, 
 emulation to imitate superior worth; in a bad sense, heart- 
 burning, envy, jealousy. trp&Tov /liv (^Xof, drro {lifXov Bi ^6- 
 voi!, Plato. <f>B6vo<i is always used in a bad senfie, jealousy of 
 
 p 2 
 
212 
 
 SYNONYMS — fowj, ^e/UOV. 
 
 another's success, depreciation of his worth, envy of his ex- 
 cellence ; called 6^0a\fi6<; iropvpoi, Mk. 7. 22. In G. 5. 21, 
 ^dopoi, <j>6poi are associated hy sound and sense, as envy led to 
 tho first murder. Aristotle uses fijXo? as equivalent to rrap- 
 o^vaftflt dydiTT)^, the emulation by which a man laments and 
 endeavours to repair his own deficiencies. "Malitia (KaKla) 
 malo dclectatur alieno ; invidia (<f)06vo<i) bono cruciatur alieno ; 
 dolus (86X05) duplicat cor; adulatio {inroKpiaKi) duplicat lin- 
 guami; dotraotio (/caraXaXia) vulnerat famiam." (Augustine 
 ad 1 P. 2. 1.) 
 
 ^(orj, vital principle, physical life, opposed to ffaparoi, welfare, 
 happiness, eternal life. /S/07, the period of life, the means of 
 living, the manner in which life is spent, (feo?) expresses the 
 existence of plants and animals as well as men. /3(of denotes 
 properly the existence of men only, and the life they lead. But 
 /3(bf is restricted to the life of men on earth, and is conse- 
 quently inferior to ^att;, as descriptive of their highest blessed- 
 ness as heirs of salvation. ^uuriKa is used in contrast to 0776- 
 \ov<t, 1 C. 6. 3 ; TOP ^lov 70V Koafiov, the world's good things : 
 1 J. 3. 17, ^o>r) auopiov. 1 J. 3. 15. He who is not ready to 
 bestow some portion of the ^t'o? tow Koafiov in love to his 
 brethren, has no reasonable hope of the ija^ auopioi. "^vx^, 
 animal life in this world, is opposed to f<a»j, life in the world to 
 come : L. 17. 33, 8? iap fijTJjo-j; ttji/ '^i^iji' airov a&aai airoKeaei 
 ainriP' koX S? ehp arrroKlari avrrp), ^acr/opija-ei ain-^v: J. 12. 25, 
 6 fiia&v T^i/ "^^v^ifP avTOV ip rw Koafup Towry ets ^anjv altopiop 
 ^vXd^ei avT'qp : Hev. 8. 9, direOape . . , rh exopra -^uxdi, those 
 who held fast animal life died in body and soul, ddparoi is 
 used in three general senses. Objectively, as a personal adver- 
 sary and enemy of Ohrist and his kingdom, 1 C. 15. 26; a 
 spiritual state or condition, including the notions of evil and 
 corruption, I^J. 3. 14; a power and principle pervading and 
 overshadowing the world, H. 2. u ; 1 T. 1. 10. 0dpaTo<i, as a 
 known and ruling power, has generally the article; (i&>>; and 
 d^dapala, as recently revealed, are anarthrous : d^Oapaia ex- 
 plains and characterizes fytr) with reference to its imperishable 
 and incorruptible nature, 1 P. 1. 4, and its complete exemption 
 from death. Rev. 21. 4. Compare R. 2. 7. 
 
 ffiepMP, the title given to the proconsular governors of tho 
 Roman provinces, under whom the iirirpoirois, or procurator, 
 was appointed for separate districts. The CTrtV/joiro? had charge 
 
 SYNONYMS— IJO-WX*"?, 6vfl6^. 
 
 213 
 
 ^ 
 
 of the revenue, and a judicial power in matters relating to 
 finance ; but in a portion of a large province, where the ^e/uov 
 could not reside, he had the power of inflicting capital punish- 
 ment, ff/enopia is properly any delegated authority, but is 
 used to express the Roman imperial authority. ^efKop is tho 
 general word for all governors, whether proconsul, legate, or 
 procurator. 
 
 ^ffvxuxi, meek and gentle, in a passive sense, who bears 
 calmly the annoyances and vexations caused by others : irpa^t, 
 meek and gentle, in an active sense, who does nothing to try 
 the patience of others. Bengel, ad 1 P. 3. 4. See on iyKpuTeia. 
 ri<Tir)(i.o4, contrasted with fipefun, is tranquillity arising from 
 within: Plato, ^a-vxtov o adt^patv pio<i. ^pefuxi denotes tran- 
 quillity arising from without, "qui ab aliis non pertinebatur :" 
 Plato, ■^pep.ia ■^ir)^<: trepX rd Seipd : 1 T. 2. 2. ^avxa^eiv (1 Th. 
 4. 11) marks the sedate and tranquil spirit which stands in 
 contrast to the excited bustle (irepiepyd^eaffai, 2 Th. 3. ii) that 
 often marks ill-defined or mistaken religious expectation. 
 
 0£i6rr)<s, divinity, the property of 0eorr}<i, 0e6rr]<}, deity, the 
 being in whom 0ei6rTfi of the highest order resides. Different 
 ways of spelling the same word settle themselves into words 
 of difibrent meanings. Compare dpdOefia, dpaOijua. Opdaot^ 
 boldness : 0dpatn, foolhardiness : 0pdao<i hk 0dpa(K irpo<s rd /tij 
 ToXfiTirea, Oregory Naz. Hospes and hostia were originally the 
 same word, a stranger, one who might prove a friend or a 
 foe. 
 
 0e<opea>, behold an object present, contemplate a thing as 
 actually done, L. 10. is : I regard you, A. 17. 22 : oirrofuu, see 
 an object appearing, J. 16. 16 : &(f)0r]p, 6<f>0j^(rofun, show myself, 
 A. 26. 16. Dr. Wordsworth remarks that Sirrofuii, is the more 
 modest word. St. Paul uses SyJre<T0e, A. 20. 25; but the dis- 
 ciples use 0eo>peip, A. 20. 38. St. Paul would not say that his 
 own nrpoawwop was af toi» 0eapia<i. Compare opaw. 
 I 0i'yydpo>, touch slightly, finger: airrofiai, cling to, fasten 
 oneself on, handle closely : •^Xo^ttw, feel after, even without 
 touching, touch the surface of any material object, capable of 
 being felt. 
 
 0priT6<!, mortal, subject to death, the universal condition of 
 living creatures : psKpoi, dead, either physically or spiritually. 
 
 0vfi6<f, the mind as regards tho passions : vow?, the mind as 
 regards the intelligence: 0v/x6f, tho turbulent commotion of 
 
214 
 
 SYNONYMS - dupeop, dvai'a. 
 
 the mind (0v<o, rage) : excandeacentia ; " Ira nascens et modo 
 desistons," Cicero. Passion at its commencement : ' iracundia,' 
 irritation, fretfulness, the mental excitement produced by 
 TTiKpia. opyr), an abiding, settled habit of mind, with the pur- 
 pose of revenge in man : ira inveterata, i. q. fiiivK, God's holy- 
 hatred of sin, which reveals itself in His punitive justice, 
 R. 1. 18 : 0/371}, the heat of the fire: 6vfu>%, the bursting forth 
 of the flame : Rev. 16. 19 ; 19. is, OvfM^ opyrft, tree excandesceniia. 
 AmmoniuB, dvfi6% fiiv itrri irpoaKuipof opr^ Sk •ir6Kv)(p6vio<! 
 fivrjaiKaKla. dvpLOi differs from opyi^ both in its rise, as more 
 sudden (L. 4. aS : A. 19. as), and its nature, as less lasting : 
 Wisd. 48. 10, xoTraaat opyiiv irpb dvfiov, to appease anger before 
 it blazed forth. So vapopyl^to, chafe, work into a passion : 
 $X2-^i,9, the act by which a man is cast down and dashed to 
 the ground, pressure from affliction, tribulation, as of a heavy 
 weight rolling over one : <rT6voj(wpla, the effect on the object, 
 the straitncss to which a man is reduced by continual pressure 
 and restraint: R. 2. 8, 9: Ja. 1. 19: E. 4. 3i, a stronger word 
 than 0\Ay^K : 2 C. 4. 8, 0Xi^6/jtevoi aW' oi arevoyapoviievoi,. 
 The opposite of evpv)(apla : Ps. 31. 8, ov (nn>iK\ei<rd<} fie eh 
 ^etpas i'^dpov' «7Tij<ras ev evpoj(mptp roi? troZw; fiov. With 
 dXiy^K is connected 8M17/X09, 2 Th. 1. 4. ffXiy^it is the more 
 general and comprehensive term; Bui)yfi6<i, the more special. 
 " ©Xii^ts injurias complectitur quas Judsei et ethnici Christia- 
 nis propter doctrinal Christiana) professionem imposuerunt, ut 
 verbera delationes vincula relegationem. Notione sua 6 Suoy/ioi 
 a tf ffKC't^ei differt, ita ut hoc vocabulum latius quam illud 
 pateat A. 8. I : M. 13. ai." Fritz. 
 
 6vpe6v, the large oblong or oval shield, 'scutum,' properly 
 like a dvpa, door : aairk, a lighter shield, ' clypeus.' 
 
 0vaia, a sacrifice which requires the intervention of a priest : 
 irpo<r<f>opd, an offering which can be presented without a priest. 
 Hence R. 15. 16, 1} irpoar<f>opii r&v eOvStv, the offering presented 
 by the nations. With reference to our Lord, dvcria marks His 
 atoning death : irpoa^opa marks the life of obedience, which 
 was an antecedent qualification for the ffvala, E. 5. a. Be- 
 lievers are exhorted to present their bodies, dwiav ^Staav, 
 R. 12. I : aveveyKM •nvevfiaTiKa<i 0uaia^, 1 P. 2. 5, where the 
 adjective marks the figurative ' character of the sacrifice in 
 contrast to the dead victims offered under the law, which 
 required the intervention of human priests. In H. 6. I ; 9. 9, 
 
 ':;V 
 
 ■ 
 
 SYNONYMS -tSMOTIJS, KUtpOV. 
 
 215 
 
 h&pa is joined with 0vaUu. where the latter denotes trespass 
 offerings. aU those in which an animal was Blainin sacnfice: 
 S&pa. aU other offerings. The notion conveyed by So>pa is that 
 of appeasing: by 0valai, that of making expiation. iX^rrjpiov, 
 the mercy-seat in the tabernacle (compare .\«cr/*o?, 1 J. ^. 2 ; 
 4 10), a propifiation, that which propitiates by expiation ol 
 sin, that which makes it consistent for God to pardon. (Com- 
 pare iriop&K'o, IXeov.) Dr- Vaughan remarks on Ovauiv, K. 
 12. I, a sacrifice not of expiation (in which sense it is applied 
 only to Christ, as E. 6. a : H. 9. 26 ; 10. la &e.). but of thank- 
 fulness, used with reference to almsgiving, Ph. 4. 18 : H. Id. 16 • 
 to thanksgiving, H. 13. 16 : and to a Christian hfe generally, 
 here and 1 P 2. 6. The service of the living body implies 
 that' of the soul also; and the choice of the word «ravt«Ta 
 indicates the importance attached in the Gospel to the body 
 and precludes the notion of a merely imaginative or sentimental 
 reUgion, as distinguished from one of self-denying and rigorous 
 
 obedience. • . i 
 
 iSuHyrvi. a private person, as opposed to a pubhc magistrate, 
 or a professor of art or science : iypafifuiroi, one who has 
 received no regukr education in a recognized school of learn- 
 
 in fir* 
 
 Upov, the whole edifice, with all the land attached {Tep-evm), 
 and the dweUings of the priests, ' templum :' vaoi, the sanctuary, 
 'sedes,' i.e., the holy pkce and the Holy of hoUes: Bvaiaa- 
 ri^piov, altar of the true God : fia/wi, heathen altar. In the 
 Epistles and Apocalypse va6<i designates the Church of God, 
 not the literal Temple at Jerusalem. lepaTela denotes the 
 service of the priest: lepioaxnn,, the office and power : Aristoph. 
 Pol. vii. 8, T^v irepX rovt Beovi ivifiiKeiav ijv KaXovaiv ieparelav : 
 Hdt iii. 142, iepwainniv . . . aipevfiai, air^ re ifiol km roiai 
 M iiiev ale\ f^ivofiivoiffi. (Alford, H. 7. 5.) Iep6<: is never 
 appUed to persons, but only to things, and does not express 
 moral qualities. . 
 
 ifidr lov, the outer garment, 'pallium:' x''^'"''' ^'^^ ^^^^ ^®^*' 
 
 ' tunica.' 
 
 KMpoi. appointed season, occasion, time of occurrence, tune 
 characterized by events : xpom, duration, time in general, the 
 time for which any thing lasts : j(p6voi, years : xoipo? is lucfiri 
 Xpoi/ou, 'punctum temporis,' point of time : 1 P. 4. 17, Kaiph 
 Tov ap^atrOai to KptpM dinro toO oUov rov Oeou : season, #cotp6s. 
 
216 
 
 SYNONYMS — KOTar^uiwoKew, Karafni^ud. 
 
 .feil 
 
 SYNONYMS— KOpSta, KIJpvyfM. 
 
 217 
 
 not xP^vov* suggesting the comfortable reflection that the 
 tjrranny of the enemy will soon be overpast, Ps. 57. l. ictupot 
 differs from time in the two points of (1), limited duration ; and 
 (2), a definite object, B. 13. ii. ITsed by LXX to express 
 seasons of the festivals : Lev. 23. 4 : 2 Chron. 8. 13, roS 
 dva<l>epeiv kut^ t^« ^vtoXA; Mtovafj . . . rpei<s Katpov^ rov 
 iviavTov. So Or. 4. )0. In a few passages xaipoi is nearly 
 synonymous with jfpovov. In 1 T. 4. I, voripoK KaipoU points 
 only to a period future to the speaker : oi axoKovOoi j(p6voi, 
 in the apostasy of the present the Apostle sees the commence- 
 ment of the fuller apostasy of the future, ia^drmv ^fiipaiv, 
 2 T. 3. 1 : 2 P. 3. 3 : Ja. 5. 3, points more specifically to the 
 period immediately preceding the completion of the kingdom 
 of Christ. " The exact meaning of the term 'xpovoi aUivioi, in 
 2 T. 1. 9 is, 'from all eternity,' stronger perhaps than irpo 
 Kara^oK^ KooyMv, E. 1. 4, before times marked by the lapse 
 of unnumbered ages, times which reached from eternity {air 
 al&vot) to the coming of Christ, in and during which the 
 fivtrrripiov lay aeatyt/fiivov, R. 16. 25." (Ellicott.) 
 
 KaTayivdxTK€a> is a middle term, lying between KaTTjyopeiv, 
 to accuse, and KaraKpiveiv, to pronounce a formal, judicial con- 
 demnation. Karar/ivauTKeiv is to be explained from yivaHTKeiv, 
 to know and take cognizance of, and from its opposite, airfyiima- 
 Keiv, to pardon. In G. 2. 11 : Deut. 25. 1, it is opposed to 
 hiKaiovv, to pronounce just, acquit :' Ecclus. 14. 2, fiaKapioi oi 
 ov KaTtrfva 'q '^I'X^ avTOv. 
 
 KUTaprl^at involves the* notion of positive defect, which re- 
 quires to be repaired, as the mending a net, refitting a ship, 
 setting a limb. L. 6. 40, KartipTia/iivov. one who is thoroughly 
 taught, ' eruditus,' removed from his state of ignorance : E. 
 4. 12, irpov Tov KurapTur/iov, looking to the thorough instruction 
 of the saints : 1 C. 1. 10, Kan^priafiivoiy fitted in one to another, 
 well adjusted, so that there be no a-)(UTfjiaTa : G. 6. l, help 
 to amend : 1 Th. 3. 10, to repair the defects of your faith : 
 1 P. 6. 10, will rectify your defects. reXetow, reXo?, reXeiov, 2^ ^ 
 involve the negative imperfection of those who have still an 
 object in view, a purpose not fully realized. B. 10. 4, reXof 
 vofjuiv, the designed termination to which po/iov points, and in 
 which it is fulfilled. Thus the Gospel is ri\eio<i, Ja. 1. 25, as 
 it is the consummation of Judaism, the end proposed by the 
 rites and ceremonies of the Levitical dispensation, R, 10. 4. 
 
 
 
 The kw wrought no completion, i. e. could not ^^"^f^^^^ 
 own TiX^v. H. 7. 19: gifte and sacrifices could not effect the 
 worshippers' object as regards the conscience, H. 9 9. out ol 
 Irks Mth attained maturity. Ja. 2 22: on the tbird ^7 I 
 finish my course, I accomplish my end, L. 13. 32 So H. 2 10. 
 to make the Author of their salvation accomplish Hib end, 
 consummate His design by means of suffering : H 5. 9, having 
 accomplished the proposed end. (See AX6«Xw«?-) The technical 
 meaning of «aTapTt'?a. is, 'reponere in artu luxata membra 
 •e.g. to reduce a dislocated shoulder. In the 8«npl« «t^«»l 
 sefse. we have, Hdt. v. 28, *aTapW?«? M^i,-. : StobiBus, 
 KarafniK^i-v <^/Xow Z^poph>ov, : Greg. Naz., irodev ovu ap^o- 
 fiM Karaprl^eiv v/iav, dSe\<t>ol : t> 1 „, . 
 
 o . «» KapSla, the seat of the desires^cdjngS^ afectaons, B. 1. 21 , 
 ^"■^the mental, perceptive faculty, 2 C. 3. 16; the conscience or 
 mind, exercised as matters of moral obhgation, M. W. i.-*. 
 J 12 40 "In Hebrew there is no appropriate word tor con- 
 science. nS, mi, are both used, Prov. 4. 23; 18. 15: Eccl. 
 7. 22, conscience ftcts between God and man; as a servant, to 
 obey God; as His minister, to issue His commands to man: 
 Sidtoia, the thinking, sentient faculty, the inward disposition, 
 the spiritual man,_a8ji8tin^yxed.froinJhejnerfi_a^i:ium, 
 wMch recei;^! impressions Jrom^mthout." (Alford, H. 8. 10.) 
 aipeaK. putting to^ith^r in the mind, comprehension, discern- 
 ment; the faculty by which we mentally apprehend, and are 
 enabled to pass judgment upon whatis presented to us : awet- 
 Sij«7«, consciousness, conscience, A. 23. i ; 24. 16 : 1 P. 2. 19 ; 
 
 3. IG. 21. 
 
 "Keipeiv BimpUciter notat partes capdlorum nummorum 
 demere ; ^vpeiv vel ^vpav ad cutom usque novacula detondere. 
 Kelpeadai, to poll the hair, to cut it short by scissors or shears : 
 ^vp^aaaOai. to shave the hair off with a ^vp6v, or razor, so that 
 
 the skull appears. ... , 
 
 Kevoi refers to contents, 'das Gehaltlose,' 'inanis. /uiTOto? 
 
 refers to results, ' das Erfolglose,' • vanus.' . , , , 
 
 Kripvyfia, the matter preached, the thing proclaimed :^ aicot}. 
 
 the spiritual faculty and function of hearing: aKoii iriarem. 
 
 the hearing ear of faith. The Gospel preached (ri K^pvyfia) is 
 
 caUed the word of hearing, \670s t^? i/eo^?, in order to bring 
 
 out more clearly the duty of aU men to hearken to it ; tho word 
 
 which was uttered in order to bo heard. 
 
218 
 
 SYNONYMS — kKmiW, KpifM. 
 
 kXoIm, wail, not only with the expression of tears (SaKpva, 
 J. 11. 35), but also with every external expression of grief. 
 Hence Kkaieiv is joined with oKdXA^eLv, Mk. 5. 38 : oXoXv^ew, 
 Ja. 5. 1 : dopvpeiv, Mk. 5. 39 : irevdeiv, 16. 10. Oprfveiv, Bpiofuu, 
 shriek generally, of women : Bpfjvoii, dirge, like the Qaelio 
 ' coronach,' or the Irish ' wake,' used of hired mourners wail- 
 ing for the dead : kottto/uu, strike the breast in loud ex- 
 pressions of grief: Koireros, wailing, attended with beating the 
 breast. 
 
 K\lin], couch, sofa, for the rich : Kpd^^aroi, litter, mattress, 
 for the poor ; Latin, ' grabatus.' 
 
 K\eimi<!, the thief who steals by fraud and in secret ; Latin, 
 'fur:' XjjffTij?, the robber who plunders by violence and open 
 force: \i;fr, \ela, booty, 'latro.' This meaning of Xj/otiJ? 
 should be preserved in M. 21. 13 ; 26. 55 : L. 10. 30 ; 23. 
 39 — 43. 
 
 KoXaaii, ' castigatio,' has naturally a milder use than n/uopla, 
 ' ultio : ' Sia^pet ik rifuopia xal KoXaai^' f) fih> 7^p KoXaaK rov 
 wao^oin-o? Ivexd e<mv ij Zi Tifuopla, rov iroiovmo^ Xva arroifki}- 
 pto0T}, Aristotle, Met. i. 10. Thus rificopta is aid in satisfying 
 vengeance, the guardianship and protectorate of honour (rt^tj;, 
 aipa>) : KoXaaK has reference to the correction and improvement 
 of the offender ; but i^s KoXaaii: almviof is no temporary disci- 
 pline, it is clear that KoXaaK in Hellenistic Greek had acquired 
 the severer sense of punishment, without implying the idea of 
 effecting a reformation. But Aristotle's definition stiU. holds 
 good, as in KoKaai,<{ there is predominant the relation of the 
 punishment to the offender : in rt/uopCa, its relation to the party 
 ofiended. 
 
 " Kpifia of itself is never any thing else than judicium, yet it 
 still will admit of some modification in meaning from the con- 
 text." Fritz., Rom. i. 94. " Kplfia StafioXov may be either 
 gen. aubjecti, ' the accusing judgment of the devil,' or gen. ohjecti, 
 ' the judgment passed upon the devil.' In the former case 
 Kpi/ia has more the meaning of ' criminatio : ' in the latter, of 
 ' condemnatio.' But there is no satisfactory instance in which 
 Kplfuk has the former moaning in the New Testament, and as 
 Kpifia is elsewhere found only with a gen. objecti, E. 3. 8 : 
 Ilev. 17. 1, we decide in favour of the latter interpretation. 
 The force of the allusion must be looked for, not in the extent 
 of the fall, but in the similarity of the circumstances ; the devil 
 
 
 i 
 
 SYNONYMS -AOTTO?, ICpVirrfO, flV<TT1^pU)V. 
 
 219 
 
 was once a ministering spirit of God, but by insensate pride fell 
 from his hierarchy." (ElUcott, 1 T. 3. 6.) ^ , . , n 
 
 ainoKorruKp^TK. 'self-condemned,' the reason why he is lett 
 to himself; he has been warned twice, and now sms against 
 light: oh <yhp ?x« "'T"'' »" ""^'^'^ ^"^"^^^ *'*^^"' epovdeTvaev. 
 Chrysost. The aggravating circumstance is not that the man 
 condemns himself directly and expHcitly, as this might be a 
 step to recovery, but that he condemns himself indirectly and 
 impUcitly, as acting against the law of his mind, and doing in 
 his own particular case what in the general he condemns. Tit. 
 
 K6Tro<: is joined together with noxOov. 2 C. 11. 27 : 1 Th. 2. 9 : 
 2 Th. 3. 8. " Kovoi represents the act of hewing wood : /iox^<»« 
 is the act of carrying logs after they have been hewn (^xM- , 
 KOTTOi expresses energy of action: /wx^o? indicates patience in 
 bearing" (Wordsworth, 1 Th. 2. 9). K6vm marks the toil on 
 the part of the suffering it involves : /wx^o?, on the side of the 
 magnitude of the obstacles it has to overcome. 
 
 Ko^ivov, wicker basket, the Jewish travelling basket, ' pan- 
 nier:' airvpk, orie of a larger kind, for storing grain, pro- 
 visions, capacious enough to contain a man, A. 9. -25. 
 
 KpvTrrco is applied to that which is abeady out of sight, hide 
 passively, keep concealed : KoXimra, cover over, as with a veil, 
 hide, actively and intentionally, appUed to the hiding of sin, 
 the putting it out of sight by Him who has power {a^ikvaC) to 
 dismiss or remit it : Ps. 85. 2, d^^/co? ra? avop.icK t^ Xom aov, 
 eicdXvfa<! irdaa<{ Ta9 afiaprlav avr&vi M. 11. 25, aiTiKpvyjra<i, 
 thou keepest hidden ; aireKaXv^m, thou removest the veil. 
 
 fivar^piop, a truth formerly hidden, but now revealed, or a 
 secret capable of being told, the very reverse of what we now 
 understand by mystery {KeKpv/tftevov, M. 13. 35) : iiv<rrt}<!, one 
 initiated, one who is acquainted with things which are unknown 
 to others ; truths which cannot be known tiU they are revealed, 
 not truths which must always be. unintelligible. Dr. Vaughan, 
 on R. 11. 25, thus classifies its references : (1) to the Gospel 
 itself, Mk. 4. 11 : R. 16. 25 : 1 C. 2. i. 7 : E. 1. 9 ; 6. 19 : 0. 1. 
 26, 27 ; 2. 2 ; 4. 3 : 1 T. 3. 9. 16 : Rev. 10. 7 ; (2) to the various 
 parts and truths of the Gospel, M. 13. 11 : L. 8. 10 : 1 0. 4. 1 ; 
 13. 2 ; (3) to the admission of the Gentiles, E. 3. 3 : the con- 
 nexion between Christ and His Church, E. 5. 32 : the change 
 (without death) of the living at the time of the resurrection, 
 
220 
 
 SYNONYMS— XaXto, Xarpeveiv. 
 
 1 C. 15. SI : the future conversion of Israel, R. 11. 25 : the 
 predicted embodiment and revelation of evil, 2 Th. 2. 7 ; certain 
 symbols in the Apocalypse, Rev. 1. 20 ; 17. 5. 7. Bishop EUicott 
 remarks on 1 T. 3. {r6 ^Lvrr^piov t% TrtWew?), that irlajea,^ 
 IS apparently a pure possessive genitive, that to which the 
 /ivoT^piov appertained; the truth hitherto not comprehensible, 
 but novY revealed to man, was the property, object, of faith, that 
 on which faith exercised itself. So very similarly, to fiv<rT^piov 
 •rijs evae^elai, the mystery which belonged to, was the object 
 contemplated by, godliness, the hidden truth which was the 
 basis of all practical piety. irlcrrKi is faith considered sub- 
 jectively, not objective faith, a very doubtful meaning in the 
 New Testament. 
 
 \a\id, utterance, talk, present discourse: X070?, subject- 
 matter of discourse, the thing taught. J. 8. 43, XaXeiv (Jlesy- 
 chiufl, ^0iyyea0ai) points merely to sound and utterance ; Xeyew, 
 to purport. XaXeiv is sometimes used where Xeyecv would appear 
 more natural, but Xeyeiv is never used for XaXeiv. XaXeiv ex- 
 presses the general idea of talking, whether reasonably or 
 otherwise, loose, indefinite, unconnected utterance, and may bo 
 said either of a sane or insane person, the prattling of a child, 
 or the speech of an adult. Xeyeiv implies speaking in a rational 
 intelligent manner. In R. 3. 19, Xiyei denotes the language or 
 statement of the Scriptures : XaXei, the utterance of that lan- 
 guage to any particular age, body of men, or individual: 
 ■n-a^pijaia, openness or boldness of speech, Mk. 8. 32 : A, 4. 13, 
 that confidence and boldness of spirit with which the believer 
 is permitted to approach his heavenly Father, II. 4. 16 : 1 J. 2. 
 28 ; 3, 21 (aSeia) : assured expectation of final reward, 1 J. 4. 17. 
 
 Xarpevetv, serve for hire : XoT/>ts, hired servant, transferred, 
 in classical Greek, from the service of men to the service of 
 their gods. In LXX Xarpevetv expresses the service of the 
 true God, as of heathen divinities. " Xarpela ea dicitur servitus 
 qua) pertinet ad colendum Deum," August. Xenovpyeiv, to 
 serve the state in a public oifice or function : XeiTo<i (Xoov) 
 f/yyoi/, transferred also to the ministry of the gods. The 
 Christian Church preferred Xeirovpyeiv and its derivatives to 
 Xarpeveiv, Xarpeia, as the words connected with Xeirovpyeiv 
 were less haunted with the clinging associations of heathenism. 
 Xarpevetv, Xarpeia, express the duty of all men, and are de- 
 manded of the whole people. Xeirovpyeiv. Xeirovpyoi, Xeirovpyia, 
 
 f 
 
 SYNONYMS — Xovat, fi£raneXop,ai. 
 
 221 
 
 denote the special offices and ministries of those who are solemnly 
 set apart as the priests and Levites, as the Apostles, prophets, 
 and pastors in the Christian Church, as well as the great High 
 Priest : r&v ar/Ctov Xeirovpyin, H. 8. 2. Xarpeveiv and Xarpeia 
 are also applied to ofiicial ministries (H. 9. l. 6), for every 
 Xeirovpyia is a Xarpeia, though every Xarpeia is not a Xetrou/j- 
 7ta. Xeirovpyof, a public functionary, one who acts in behalf 
 of a community as a public character. R. 1. 9, ^ Xarpeva iv 
 rw irvev/jiari p^v ev r& evarfyeXi^ rov vlov avrov, to whom 
 the sacrificial worship which I offer is inward and spiritual, 
 namely, the devotion of myself to the preaching of the Gospel 
 of His Son. Vaughan. 
 
 Xovat, bathe, wash the whole body : viirreiv, wash a part of 
 the body, as the extremities, hands, or feet: -irXvveiv, wash 
 inanimate things, as garments. Lev. 14. 9 : Num. 19. r. 10 : nets, 
 L. 5. 2. These distinctions may be observed in Lev. 16. 11, 
 oaiov eav ayfnjrai 6 yovoppw/jt kcu, ra<s xetpa? oii viviirrai USari, 
 irXvveZ ra Ifidria Koi Xovcrerai ro a&pM {jSari : J. 13. 10, o 
 XeXovpivoi} OX) j(pelav &)(ei ^ roiit TroSa; vv^aaOai. So Xavrpov, 
 laver, bath: wtttjJ/j, basin. 
 
 Xvxyo^, lamp:" ^w?,. the light proceeding therefrom. So 
 prophecy is compared to Xvyyo^, 2 P. 1. 19 : ^ws Xvj(yov, Rev. 
 18. 23. ^(oon^p, a means of giving light, as a window or door 
 {6vpi<{), the heavenly luminaries, applied to Christians, Ph. 
 2. 15. <j)(o<r<}>6poii, light-bringing, lucifer, the star that precedes 
 the rising of the sun, emblematic of the dawn of spiritual light 
 and happiness : (pareivov, full of light : <f>a>ri^(o, give light to, 
 enlighten, bring to light, impart moral and spiritual light. 
 John the Baptist was the lamp that was lit, and giving light, 
 eKeivoi ^v 6 Xv^yoi o Kaiofievoi koI ^aivav : our Lord the </>b>9 
 aXtjB ivov, J. 1. 9. Xap.ird<i ought uniformly to be translated 
 ' torch.' 
 
 futXaKia, incipient complaint, lit. softness, opposed to Kaprepia, 
 endurance: aadeveia, want of strength or energy, infirmity, 
 feebleness : v6ao<;, confirmed disease. 
 
 pepiarri<i, arbitrator, umpire, like the Buurryrai at Athens, a 
 kind of jury selected by the disputants to try petty causes : 
 SiKatrr^i, juryman, like Lat. 'judex:' icpt-nj?, presiding judge, 
 Lat. 'praetor.' 
 
 p^rap,eXoftai, alter one's purpose, denoting change of feeling, 
 the anxiety consequent on a past transaction, remorse, some- 
 
222 
 
 SYNONYMS— /*0XW6), I»e09. 
 
 tunes implying a return to a right state of mind, 'poonitet,' 
 piget: fieravoiw, change one's views for the better, implying 
 the sorrow by which sin is forsaken; Lat: -resipisco,' -recover 
 ones senses,' come to a right understanding: fierdvoia, con- 
 version Ctransmentation/ Coleridge), the sanctified effect of 
 /*«T«/i6'X«a or X{hn, Karh ee6p, 2 C. 7. 8, 9; • resipiscentia,' the 
 growing wise. Dr. Wordsworth thus expresses the difference : 
 M^avoia, change of mind, belongs only to the good; ^erd^ie. 
 Xem, pam of mind, belongs to evil men, as well as good. Peter 
 /*eTaVoe» as weU as ^era/x^Xerat. Meravoito begins with uera- 
 MeXeta, but at length deUvers from ^LerafUXeia, whereas ^^ra^^i- 
 X«o without nerdvoia continues to eternity:" R. 11, 29, dfieror- 
 IxeKnra rh. xapUxfiara, incapable of being revoked or changed- 
 in 1^' f^rZ^""" "» <^^rvpiau d,iera^i\r,rov. fieravoetu is 
 followed by i>c. Rev. 2. 21. 22 ; 9. 20, 21 ; 16. 11, showing a com- 
 plete change of mind, displaying itself in turning from previous 
 acts, and out of a former mode of life to a new and different 
 practice and habit of existence. 
 
 ^oXvvto, besmear as with mud and filth. Aristotle speaks of 
 swme, T^ WT?X^ ficiKwoviei eavrovv. Lat. 'inquinare,' 'spur- 
 care.' fiialveip, stain with colour, as the staining of glass or 
 ivory J II. iv. 141, ^ 8' Sre rk r e\i<f>avTa r^vvi, <f>oiviKt /.uilpy, 
 Lat. 'maculare.' /luiiveiv is not necessarily taken in a dis- 
 honourable signification, though it is frequently used to express 
 the profane or unhallowed use of any thing. There is the 
 same difference between fuaivew and fiok^peiv as between 'ma- 
 cula.' 'labes,' -spot,' 'blot.' But in the figurative sense the 
 expression ^t^^ara tov Kiafiov, 2 P. 2. 20, becomes equivalent 
 to /ioXvafi,o<i a-apKOi, 2 0. 7. 1. 
 
 /iop<M, form, abstractedly, without reference to any other 
 object, applied to OeoC, as well as SovXov, Ph. 2. 6, 7 : 6,ioUoua 
 shajie, implying resemblance to other objects of the same kind • 
 «^3CT/«», outward figure, shape, mien: fi6p4>wan, embodiment^ 
 lorm without substance : /loptfuaaip eiae^eiai, 2 T. 3. 5. 
 
 pioi is a person or thing in a new or youthful condition, as 
 contrasted with the same person or thing in a state of old age 
 or decay. KmvS^ is a person or thing in a new state, as distin- 
 guished from another person or thing in an old condition 
 xaipov refers to the operation of an external agent; w'o? do- 
 smbes rather the inner growth or change of a natural object, 
 llms the olpoi is kIo?, but the daKoi are kmpoI, Mk. 2. 22. The 
 
 St' 
 
 I: 
 
 i. 
 
 ^> 
 
 J. 
 
 SYNONYMS — vijirun;, POO<S. 
 
 223 
 
 work of dpattalpuKTi^ is perfom/Sd by the external operation of 
 the Holy Ghost on the inner life. The Kaa>o<i ap0payir(n is said 
 to bo KTtadek, and the peo<i apffpairov is said to be dpuKaipov- 
 fiepof, 0. 3. 10. The Kaip6<; apdpoyiro<i is KMpif KriaK, Or. 6. IS. 
 But dpapeovffOai is a duty which we owe to our own moral and 
 spiritual being, E. 4. 23. The heavens which vrill be made new 
 are kmpoI, and Christ by His mediatorial power and grace 
 makes all things Katpd. (From Wordsworth, on E. 4. 23.) In 
 cases, however, where the old is better than the new, xaipot 
 may express the novel and strange, as contrasted with the 
 known and familiar. In Mk. 1. 27, kcupti ^i8ax^ meant any 
 thing but praise. Socrates was charged with introducing into 
 Athens xaip^ Saifiopta, elsewhere called erepa B. : in A. 17. I8, 
 ^epa Baifiopia. " The covenant of which Christ is the Mediator 
 is a SiaffqKt) pea, as compared with the Mosaic covenant given 
 nearly two thousand years before ; it is a Siaffijieq icaipr) as com- 
 pared with the same effete with age, from which all vigour, 
 energy, and strength had departed. There is the same distinc- 
 tion between i/io; and Katpot as between ' recens ' and ' novus.' 
 peo<;, like ' recens,' refers to time ; kUi,p6<!, like ' novus,' to state 
 or condition. The same distinction is claimed for 'nouveau' 
 (vios) and ' neuf ' («raii/df). ' Ce qui est nouveau vient de paraitre 
 pour la premiere fois ; ce qui est neuf vient d'etre fait et n'a 
 pas encore servi. Une invention est nouvelle, uno expression 
 neuve.' " (Archbishop Trench, Synonyms, Second Series.) 
 
 prpno<;, a babe, without the power of speech, an infant, a 
 minor. yS/se^o?, a child, while yet in the womb {sft^pvop), the 
 new-bom babe, dvo fipe<l>ov<}, 2 T. 3. 15, from the cradle, 
 where v^iot would have been inappropriate, as vifirioi means 
 'one not yet of* full age,' G. 4. 1. Both words express the 
 young convert, the disciple in an undeveloped immature state. 
 In 1 P. 2. 2, o>« dprv^kppriTa fipi<}ni : L. 18. 15, •rrpoae<j>epov airr^ 
 Kai rh fipitfnj, their very babes. In H. 5. 13, vi]irioi is especially 
 opposed to o( riXeioi, i. e. mature Christians. 
 
 1/009 (1/01)9) embraces the TT ndCTstandin g, the "Rjjnanni^ the 
 Will, and the Affections . The pow takes cognizance of external 
 objects, and danntgiH tbft fnniioning fni\nM.y^ exercised.JQQ.-the 
 works or word_j a£_Qod. The conscience, ij avpeiptiaii, is a 
 spiritual instinct, which operates without a ny active^Boergy o; 
 t he intellectual faculty^L ayaOi) avP€CSij<ri<i is one which governs 
 itself by sound reason, and adopts for its own regulation the 
 
 '2 
 
224 
 
 SYNONYMS — POV 
 
 opam. 
 
 rule of Qod'a will, especially as revealed in Ilis word. This is 
 the conscience which produces koXtjv avaarpo^tjv. Wordsworth 
 on 1 P. 3. 16. St. Paul even while persecuting the Church 
 acted €P icaffapa avpeiStja-ei, with a view to no personal advan- 
 tage, but in mistaken zeal for the law of God. See KapBia. Dr. 
 Yaughan remarks that the understanding {vov<:)fno less than 
 the heart, requires God's teaching. II. 12. 2 : E. 4. 23 : L. 24. 
 45 : 10. 2. 14. 
 
 povBereat, put in mind, admonish, povdeala, verbal admoni- 
 tion, but admitting the idea of correction, Christian discipline 
 and teaching, •tttuiewo, bring up as son, instruct, chastise. 
 iraiZeia, discipline, implying the idea of correction, iraiteia 
 primarily applies to the body: povOearia, to the mind, o fiii 
 Sapel^ apffpairov ov TratSevErat, Menander. "iraiBeia significare 
 videtur institutionem per panaa ; povdeaia autem est ea insti- 
 tutio quffi fit verbis." Grotius, E. 6. 4. In Tit. 2. I2, iraiheiovaa 
 riimi, the proper force of the word, 'per molestias erudiro,' 
 disciplining us, is to be retained. " Grace exercises its discipline 
 on us (1 0. 11. 32: H. 12. 6), before its benefits can be fully 
 felt or thankfully acknowledged; the heart must bo rectified, 
 and the affections chastened before sanctifying grace can have 
 its full issues." 
 
 opdta applies to bodily sight; fiKiirm, to mental vision or 
 consideration, 1 C. 1. 26 : 2 0. 4. 18 : R. 7. 23. Mk. 8. 24, fiXhra 
 Touf apOpanrovi, on <io$ SipBpa 6p& TrepiirarovPTaii, I perceive they 
 are men, inasmuch as I see them as trees, but I see them walk- 
 ing. /3\€7ra>, consider, take heart, employed to express a more 
 intent, earnest, spiritual contemplation than 6pd(o. II. 2. 8, g, 
 PUP Sk ovjrat bpStfiep avrS rii irdpra inroTSTtpyftipa, we do not yet 
 see this with our bodily eyes : top Se ^pa^v ti irap ayyeXov<i 
 ■^Xarraftipop ^XAirofiep 'Iijvovp, but with the eye of faith wo 
 contemplate Jesus : H. 10. 25, roaovrtp fiaXXop oata /SXeircre 
 eyyi^ovaap rijp rfpipav, as ye contemplate the day drawing nigh : 
 1 C. 10. 18, pKhrere top 'IvparfK. Kord. adpKa, consider the 
 example of the carnal Israel : 2 C. 7. 8, pKeirat yip on iiriaroXri 
 eKelpTi . . . iKvwqaev v/ia^, I perceive, I am aware. ^Xevto is 
 thus akin to dectpiw, though dempeu, when it is used of bodily 
 vision, assumes that the object is actually present : L. 24. 39, 
 (Sere T^f X^^P^^ ^"^ * * ' '"'"^^f^ cdpKa icaX 6<rrea ovk ex^i Ka6u)<i 
 epA deotpelre txppra. Phavorinus remarks, " opSt p,ep iirl ao)p,a- 
 T09, 0eapS> Si hrl '^vx'h • ^^- J- ^' '9, Kvpie, dewpu on vpo<f>r)Trii 
 
 ! 
 
 >.' 
 
 ■:4 ■ 
 
 SYNONYMS — 6\oK\rjpo9, TTapd^aaK. 
 
 225 
 
 el <rv: 12. 19, Oeapevre 8n ovk uxpeXeiTe. ovSip ; A. 17. 22, Karh 
 irdpTU «»? ieiaiZaiiMpearkpoiK u/ifi? deapm : L. 10. 18, iOeaipow 
 TOP SaTupap «.T.X., q. d., this I was contemplating. In L. 8. 
 20 we have t'Seti/ ae OeKovrei : but in M. 12. 46, fi/roOvre? avr^ 
 \a\^<rai. Thuc. (iv. 125) has tw BpaalSav iSetp, which the 
 Scholiast explains as an Atticism, for cum Brasidd colhqui. 
 Lucian has tSetv top Ala for iprvxeiv rp Ait. But all these 
 passages may be explained by considering that the antecedent 
 idea iZelp is put for the consequent Xa\^«rot or hnvx^^v. 
 
 oKoKk'qpws, that which retains aU originally allotted to it, 
 whole and entire in all its parts, wanting .in nothing which 
 is necessary for its completeness, iv /tijSevl XetTTO/tevot, Ja. 1. 4. 
 TeXeto?, one who has reached the full limit of stature, strength, 
 and mental power allotted to him, used like the English word 
 •perfect,' sometimes in a relative sense, at other times in an 
 absolute, M. 5. 48; 19. 21. Compare the expression used by 
 ignorant people in speaking of one who has^wisAcrfhis educa- 
 tion, when they mean that he has completed a certain course 
 of instruction. The okoKktipot is one who has preserved or 
 who has regained his completeness, the reXEto? has attained 
 his moral end, that for which he was intended. In the oXa- 
 K\r]po<! no grace which ought to be in a Christian is wanting ; 
 in the TiXeto^ no grace is in its weak, imperfect commencement, 
 but aU have reached a certain ripeness and maturity. oKmeKiji, 
 1 Th. 5. 23, is a connecting link between the two, " in your 
 collective powers and parts." oXoreXcif marks more emphati- 
 cally than oXot/f the thoroughness and pervasive nature of true 
 holiness. dpno<t, in 2 T. 3. 17, is explained by i^prurfiipoi 
 (see on KaTapri^at), complete in all parts and proportion^ ; " in 
 quo nihil mutilum" (Calvin), perfect as a square. Cf. Arist. 
 JElh. If. i. 10, 11, xepffl xal iroal xal v6^ Terpdfytopoi TeTvyfUPoi, 
 Simon, ap. Plato, Protag. 344, h, reXetos and apno<i very much 
 interchange their meanings, but aprux! points to the adaptation 
 of parts and special aptitude for any given uses. 
 
 irapdfftuTK, the outward act of transgressing the law, the 
 overstepping the line which divides right from vrrong, sin of 
 commission: irapaKori, hearing amiss, when we fulfil not and 
 have no mind to fulfil the precepts of the law, carelessness in 
 nscortaining or in regarding the rule of duty, the sin of omis- 
 sion. But every irapdfiaon implies a irapaico^, and every 
 irapaKorf includes or induces irapd^aai^. Hence the use of 
 
220 
 
 SKNONYMS — vaiS(vya>^6<s, Traorj^w. 
 
 irapaKoij for irapdfiaffi^ in B. 5. 19, though irapaKor} may bo 
 moro appropriate as referring to an oral precept, inraicori, sub- 
 ordination to the word, joyful acceptance of the Gospel message, 
 hearing and doing, irapdirrafia, falling aside from right, truth, 
 and duty. 
 
 iraiSar/crfot, the slave or attendant who conducted the pupil 
 to his teacher, ayap ew BiSaaKoKov (oIkov), used to denote 
 persons ministering in all kinds of spiritual offices ; opposed to 
 iraT'np, i.e. to St. Paul as their spiritual father, 1 0. 4. 15. In 
 Q. 3. 24 the law became our slave- tutor to lead us to the true 
 teacher, Christ. 
 
 •n-apafioKij, placing side by side for the purpose of comparison, 
 representation, similitude : Trapoi/iia, used by St. John, means 
 ' way-side illustrations ;' lessons drawn from actions of ordinary 
 life, from objects and processes in nature : aWriyopia, speak 
 in an allegory ; in symbolical language : " aliud verbis, aliud 
 sensu ostondo." Quintilian : iv irapoi/iiaK, in figurative or 
 obscure language, opposed to ■irapprjffia, J. 16. 25. 29. 
 
 irapaXafifidvco has the idea of receiving from another : Sij(p- 
 fiai, of taking to oneself: 1 Th. 2. 13, nrapaKafiovre's T^yop 
 uKotfi Trap rifi&p tov Oeov iBe^aaOe, having received God's word 
 of hearing, from our hands ye accepted it: A. 3. 21, hp Set 
 oipapop Se^aadat, take to itself, contain, A. 7. 38. 59 : Ja. 1. 21, 
 Si^aaOe top €fi(f>VT0P Xoyop. Hence TrapaXa/i^dpo) points to an 
 objective reception, G. 1. 12 : Sij(pfiai, to a subjective, 2 0.8. 17. 
 The old grammarians applied iej(ea0ai to to BeSop,epop e/e xetpo?, 
 while 'Kafi^dpeiv denotes to Kclfievop dpeXiadai. With these we 
 may contrast dprrd^etp. " Non tantum significat alienum vi 
 auferre, sed etiam quod nobis ofTertur gratumque accidit, id 
 expetendum atque optabilo existimaro, cupidcque et ambabus 
 quod aiunt manibus amplecti, eoquo cum gaudio uti." Raphel 
 ad Phil. 3. 6. So 'rapio' is used for 'avido ct festinanter 
 simio.' 
 
 irapfyrfaia, plainness of speech, freedom of utterance, the 
 especial privilege of freemen, coujJcd with irpoaanitayri, freedom 
 of access ; frequently used for openness of action, publicity. 
 
 7raff%<u, receive, experience good, as well as evil : Mk. 5. 26, 
 iroXKa iraOovaa, subject to much medical treatment, not neces- 
 sarily an acute sufferer. Applied in an euphemistic sense to 
 the death of our Lord, comprehending his agony, his bloody 
 sweat, and the contradiction of sinners. So irdOrj/ia generally 
 
 
 •1 
 
 ; 
 
 ■ '■■^ -. 
 
 ■):'. 
 
 SYNONYMS— TraTpt'a, irevrffi, TreiOo/iai. 227 
 
 denotes suffering, R. 8. 18 ; but is sometimes used for sensual 
 desire, like irdOoi (ip 7rd0ei iTnOvfitai, 1 Th. 4. 5), representing 
 states of mind in which it is the thing acted on, rather than the 
 agent, R. 7. 6 : G. 6. 24, oBvp&fiai. oSvvi], pain, distress of body 
 or mind : aSri/wviw, have more than enough, experience loathing 
 more than we can bear : diropov/iai, am without resource, know 
 not what to do, am perplexed : rapdaau, agitate, put in trepida- 
 tion, disquiet. 
 
 irarpla, paternal descent, tribe, whict contained several otA:ot, 
 households: ol/co? refers to the members, inmates, servants: 
 oUla, to the building, and the property therein contained. 
 
 iripiK, derived from irepo/iai, connected with ttoi/o?, -rropio/jiai, 
 and the Latin • penuria,' is one who earns his bread by daily 
 toil. The word, like 'pauper,' 'paupertas,' does not indicate 
 extreme want, but simply ' res angusta domi.' See Virg. ^«. ii. 
 87. Xen. Mem. iv. 2. 37, tow? fikp olfiai fifj Uapa expprafs eU a 
 Set reXetp ireptrrar tou? Si irXeiio t&p Ikupuv ifkovirlovs. The 
 irepiarai inThessaly retained partial rights as cultivators of the 
 soil. irTa>x6<i is 'mendicus,' the beggar, who lived on the alms 
 of other men ; i. q. irpoaairni, or eiralnji. A far lower depth 
 of destitution is implied in trrta-xeia than in -rrepia. The ttcVj/s 
 has nothing superfluous, but the -irrrnxoi has nothing at all. The 
 distinction is preserved in Plato, who describes tyrannies as 
 running their course, etV wei/Za? re koI <f>vya<i koX el<i irrioxeias, 
 and in Aristophanes, Plutus 549—654, whore Chremylus says, ' 
 
 oiiKovp SjjVou t^9 irratxelai vepiap ^anh> ehat aBe\(j>^p, 
 
 to which irepla replies, 
 
 tttw^ow fih yhp Ploi 81/ ai, TjyeK ^p iarip fitjBep exopra, 
 TOV Se irepriTOti ^p (f>eiS6fiepop koI toi<s epyoii irpoae-xppra, 
 irepi/ylyveaeai B' axn^ fi/rjBep, fir) fiiproi firjB" eirCKeOireiP. 
 
 This distinction between irToyx/x: and 7r4wjs gives greater vivid- 
 ness to the contrast : 2 C. 6. 10, w? -irTtoxot iroXKoixi Bk irKovri- 
 foirres : 2 C. 8. 9, BC vfia<s hrTw^evae nrXjoixnot &p- ipa v/ieii if 
 SKeipov TTTrnxeia TrXouT^o-jjTe. 
 
 ■irel0o/j,ai, obedire, obey from a conviction that the thing 
 required is lawful and right, or from a sense of the just autho- 
 rity of the person to whom obedience is rendered. {meUw, 
 ohteinperare, yield to, comply with, accommodate yourself to the 
 feelings and wishes of another; ireWeadai, direct personal 
 
 Q 2 
 
228 
 
 8YNONYM9 — iriffTii, irXeove^ia. 
 
 obedience ; {nreUeiv, such compliance as forbida opposition to 
 the plans of another ; ireiOapryelv, ' coactus obsequi ; ' inrorda-- 
 aeaOai, 'lubens et sponte subraittere,' Tit. 3. l ; L. 2. 51. Com- 
 pare Ilom. II. i. 293 — 6 : ''H rydp xev SeiXoi re koX ovriSavbi 
 KoKeoifirjv, El Sij aoi irav epyov ivel^ofiai o m xev etTrotf. 
 AWoiaip Of) ravT eTTtreWeo' fii) r^hp efioir^e Xrifuiiv' ov yetp 
 erf toy en <rol ireLveadai, 6ta>. 
 
 iriarii has reference to things past, present, or future, 
 receives the declaration of blessing, or the denunciation of 
 wrath, and may be applied to angels as well as men; eKirli 
 applies to blessings only, to be enjoyed in future, by the person 
 who entertains the hope. Faith and hope alike are the evidence 
 of things not seen. In some cases inrofwvi] occupies the place 
 of e'XTTtV, 2 Th. 1. 4 : 1 T. 6. II : Tit. 2. 2 : it marks the manly 
 valour (dpSpela) with which the Christian contends, against the 
 various hindrances, persecutions, and temptations that befall 
 him in -his conflict with the inward and outward world: Rov. 
 2. 3, Kal inrofiovijp l;^ets koI efidaTaaai Sia to ovofid fiov Kal ovk 
 ixoTriaaaii. So inro/jiepo) means a brave bearing up against 
 sufferings ; " animum in perferendo sustinet," in contrast with 
 dpexe<T0ai, a more tame and passive sufferance of them, 2 T. 
 2. 12 : R. 12. 12 : Ja. 1. 12 : 1 C. 4. 12. 
 
 -irepiTo/i'^, circumcision. The Jews derived a distinctive title 
 from the observance of the outward rite, but the thing signified, 
 or substance, is attributed to believers in Christ, as the seed of 
 Abraham : KaTaro/ii^, mangling, mutilation, a term of contempt 
 for those who relied on their outward circumcision, or adopted 
 a spurious Christianity ; Ph. 3, 2, 3. 
 
 irXapdto, make to wander, cause to err, lead astray, used for 
 doctrinal error, or for religious deceit : irXdvoi, teacher of error, 
 religious impostor: dirardat, deceive, delude with false state- 
 ments, self-deception : irXdpr], seduction from the truth : S6\(k, 
 the adulteration of the truth with false admixtures : So\oi5i»t€s 
 TOP Xoyop Tov Qeov, 2 C. 4. 2. BoXoi is connected with 8e\«a, 
 SiXeap, ' osca,' a lure to hunt souls, dirara eavrop may imply 
 a deception which had something objective to rest upon : ^pei/- 
 airara iavrop, G. 6. 3 : dtrar&p xapSiap avrov, Ja. 1. 26, impUes 
 a purely self-originated and subjective deception. 
 
 nrXeope^ia, covotousness, the grasping after more, hankering 
 after what one has not, 'amor sceleratus habendi,' the active 
 sin: tj>iKap^vpia, the passive sin, avarice, tlio accumulating 
 
 SYNONYMS — 'ir\'t]po<f>ope(o, iropevoftai. 
 
 229 
 
 ■i 
 
 what one already has. The TrXeoj/^/m;? may bo free in squan- 
 dering, as he is unscrupulous in getting. ' Rapti largitor,' like 
 Catiline : wXeove/cri;? is joined with dpnra^, 1 C. 6. 10 : irXeope- 
 ^iai is joined with xXoiral, Mk. 7. 22, and with sins of impurity, 
 the insatiable longing of the creature which has turned from 
 God to fill itself with objects of sense. The monsters of lust 
 among the Roman emperors were monstci's of covotousness. 
 The same is the case with eastern rajahs. In contrast with 
 this the <l>iXdp'yvpo<i is cautious and timid, retaining the garb 
 of righteousness. Hence the Pharisees are called ^iXdpyvpoi. 
 They could foster avaricious desires, and yet justify themselves 
 before men. Jer. 8. 10, iravre^ (f>iXapyvpiap dtroSuiiKovat. The 
 irX€opiicTf)<i is the bold unscrupulous trader, while he is making 
 a fortune ; the (piXdpyvpo^ is the retired trader who lives quietly 
 that he may increase his property. "The ^iXapyvpCa of the 
 Pharisees did not disqualify them for exercising a commanding 
 influence, and for being in the popular mind patterns o£ stactity 
 and objects of general admiration. Ruilding on the temporal 
 promises of the ancient law they made it an article of faitli 
 that riches are a proof of divine approbation. Wealth was 
 another name of piety. Love of wealth was a love of God's 
 favour. Thus they sanctified avarice." (Wordsworth, 1 T. 
 6. 10.) 
 
 nrXrjpo^opia, bring in fuU measure, complete an act, applied 
 to Siaxopia, 2 T. 4. 5 ; to K'^pvyfia, 2 T. 4. 17 ; hence passive of 
 persons who have fully attained the proposed end: C. 4. 12, 
 T6X.£(ot Koi ireirXrfpo^ofyqiiepoi,, fully satisfied or convinced in 
 mind, R. 4. 21 ; 14. 5 : of things received on the fullest evi- 
 dence, L. 1. I. Uesychius explains irXrjpo^opia by jSejSaton;?, 
 steadiness. The word gives the idea of a ship laden with 
 freight, if)opd, pursuing a steady course : irXrjpofftopia avpeaeayi, 
 perfect certainty, residing in the intellect, clearness and sta- 
 bility of comprehension : irXijpoi^opia TrtWew?, faith fully 
 grounded ; a realizing view of the great Object of Faith. irXr)- 
 po<f)opia iXTriSo<i, hope fully established, the sense of a personal 
 interest in the blessings of redemption, so as to impart uniform 
 steadiness and consistency : irXrfpoipopia is not an cfiTect of the 
 logical faculty, but is produced by the inner working {epepyeia) 
 of the Uoly Ghost. 
 
 TTopevofiai has prominent the idea of removing to another 
 place, and is often prefixed in the participle to verbs which 
 
230 
 
 SYNONYMS — rrpaffaeiv, irpoaevxv- 
 
 convey the idea of going, in order to render the expression 
 more complete. In inrdytt the prominent idea is departure, 
 withdrawing from others so as to be out of sight : airkp^oiiai 
 has tho simple idea of absence. 
 
 irpdaaeiv denotes what we do naturally, easily ; practice, cus- 
 tomary action : iroielv, ' make,' ' produce,' describes what we do 
 with difficulty and effort, action with an object in view : J. 5, 
 29, o( T^ arfad^ 7ro(i)<rainr£f, o( ra <j)av\a irpd^avrei. iroUa indi- 
 cates habitual design and actual habit of life, frequently applied 
 to good, while irpdaareiv is applied to evil. Good made and 
 done has permanence for ever. Evil is practical, but produces 
 no good fruit for eternity, irpdacra is connected with irepdca, 
 irepaivta, involving the idea of continuance and habitual prose- 
 cution, used in the sense of intrigue, contrivance, scheming, as 
 to practise upon a man : Thuc. i. 99, dKpi^Sxs errpaaaov, wore 
 exacting the payment rigidly. Such is the sense of vpdicTwp, 
 L. 12. 58. 
 
 irpoKoirretv, originally, to cut forward, to forward by cutting 
 (as by foiling trees, &c., before an advancing army), to forward ; 
 but in the New Testament always, and in classical Greek 
 generally, it is used intransitively, to advance or make progress : 
 L. 2. 52 : G. 1. 14 : 2 T. 2. 16 ; 3. g. 13 : iyKmrretv, to cut in, 
 enclose or intercept by cutting (from an enemy impeding tho 
 progress of an army, by cutting trenches in its way), impede, 
 obstruct; G. 5. 7; 1 Th. 2. 18. Vaughan. 
 
 irpoaevxrjt supplication addressed to God only, significant of 
 tho power of Him whom we invoke : wgoo-rgom}, turning one- 
 self to any quarter for help, the turning of a su{)pliaut ((xein;?) 
 to God or man, to implore protection or purifipation. Henco 
 irpooTpoTrf} iv^eaffai, the guilt or pollution of the manslayer. 
 \PJ3!^ expresses our need (epSeiav), entreaties for deliverance 
 from evil, for aid in special necessity, eprev^m, intercession, 
 requests concerning others, and in their behalf, urgent personal 
 address, interpellatio, said of appeals to man as well as to God. 
 So ipTvyxdva. iicernpia, application to another person for the 
 supply of tvieia {iKerela, iKpeofiai), Beijan seems a special 
 form (rogatio) of tho more general irjisasvxo (prccatio). ejjiat 
 ft?, prayer in its most individual alid urgent form, prayer in 
 winch God is, as it were, sought in audience, and personally 
 drawn nigh to. 'Evrev^ens to? wrb tov irapprfaiav rivd, irkelova 
 Ij^orros, Origen. hii\<Ti<i marks tho idea of our inauiEciency : 
 
 ;; I 
 
 '•> !-. 
 
 K 
 
 SYNONYMS— 7rf)0^lJTlJ?. 
 
 231 
 
 ■^poaevx^. that of devotion: hnev^^, that of childlike confi- 
 
 dence. . ,. . , „„„„q 
 
 nvpod^TT,^, "Sacrorum interpres; qui alius cujusdam sensus 
 profert ;" prophet or seer, the interpreter of the inspired ^vr,^. 
 Tho nrpod^ is rapt out of^himself, Ufted above, but not set 
 beside his everyday self, the p^dvr,^ is one whose reason is 
 suspended, his declarations are received only after they have had 
 the approbation of the ,rpo<^^T,9. The word /*a,n-« {jmlvo,ut^, 
 rave) does not occur in tho New Testament : ^mue^r^at occurs 
 A. 16. 16, only when the lying art of heathen dmnation is 
 referred to. Such too is its «se in Deut. 18. lo : 1 bara^ 28. 8. 
 In other instances Trpo^xewa) is repeatedly used. Trpo^ijri?? is 
 generally a pubUo t'jacher {irpi embracing time, place, persons), 
 one endowed with the faculty of interpreting {epp-tiveui). bo 
 irpodrnreia is the exposition or interpretation of Scripture. In 
 the middle, Hebrew, NU3, ^/.o^i^t^?. two ideas were oombincd, 
 which we ought carefully to distinguish; tho one, a divinely 
 inspired seer (^^*^, 1 Sam.*9. 9) ; the other, an interpreter ot 
 the Divine will. The Greeks, and after them, the Romans, 
 had two different words to express these ideas; the first was 
 expressed by /tarn?, vates, the second by €fv7»;T^?, int<^pres. 
 The distinction between the two may be clearly seen m tho 
 description given of the Church at Corinth. Tho Connthians, 
 iKioaauK \a\oOvTe<!, were in the state of a fidvTK, but they 
 were not all e^yvrai: they had not the epfivveia iKa>aa(ov, for 
 frequently they did not comprehend the sense, and, conse- 
 quently, could not unfold the meaning of their own inspiration, 
 1 C 12. 10. 30 ; 14. 5. (Gr. Test., Vol. i.. Introd., p. 32.) Tho 
 distinction between T}p and N03 is preserved by Greg. Naz., 
 when he calls Ezekiel 6 r&v ^eydXxav eiroirri)<t koX e|inr»rr^s 
 ^LvoTvpitov. Tho SutKovla was instituted that others might have 
 leisure to give themselves to prayer, and the ministry of tho 
 word The sacred writers were led by Divine supermtendenco 
 to avoid words, tho employment of which tended to efface tho 
 distinction between heathenism and Christianity. Archbishop 
 Trench remarks, that "the Christian Church assumed tho irpo- 
 dnrrevuv to itself, but ascribed the fuivTeCeadai to tho heathen- 
 ism which it was about to displace and overthrow." Wo may 
 trace this caution in tho neglect of ^w/xo?, which occurs only in 
 A. 17. 33 ; in-tho sparing use of tho word dperij, Phil. 4. 8, 
 
232 
 
 SYNONYMS — prjfia, aapiuvo<s. 
 
 and 2 P. 1. 3. 6, though this was in heathen ethics the standing 
 word for 'virtue;' in the single use of fidi), 1 C. 16. 33. To 
 preserve the spirit of Christianity distinct from Judaism, the 
 sacred writers never employ iepeli to express any of the different 
 orders in the ministry of the Christian Church. In irpoifn^Tti^ 
 the wpo is especially local. The Latin ' vates ' (from ' fari ') 
 has a similar breadth of meaning, irpo^yiyrela was a gift of 
 • praedicandi ' rather than of ' prsodicendi.' The contrast be- 
 tween the soothsayer, pAvri^, and the forth-teUer, 7rpo</>7}Tij?, is 
 thus drawn out by Chrysostom : Toflro 7a/) /tai^ew? thuiv, to 
 e^earriKivat,, to ava/^KTjv virofikveiv, to wdeiadai, to eXxeaOai^ to 
 avpeadai &<mep /laivofjtevov. 'O Sk irpo^i^rTii ov^ ovTa><i, aXXd 
 Hera huivola<s vij<f>ov<rri^ Ka\ aa^povoicrqf; KaTaardaeav, Kal et'Scof 
 & tpOeyyerai, <f>ij(nv dvavra' &<Tre koI irpo t^$ eKfidcrea^ Kavrev- 
 6ev yvtopi^e rov ftavrw Kal rov irpoffufnjv. 
 
 prj/JM is more than \o707, the matter, the whole transaction, 
 " non vorbum, sed rem quao i^ccidit." Valckner. 
 
 pofi^aia, barbarian scimitar, broad falchion: fidxaipa, the 
 symbol of civil power, the right of punishment. 
 
 pvTK, wrinkle, contraction of the sldn from old age: pvco, 
 ipvco, draw together : atriXo';, stain, mark, freckle, mole : 
 d<nriXoi joined with a/«o/*ijTot, 1 P. 1. 19: 2 P. 3. 14 (see 
 aKepaioi;) : o-irTKoi, spots, in a moral sense : fi&fioi, used of 
 bodily defects. 
 
 adpicivo<{, made of the material substance, adp^, as oa-Tpaxivois, 
 SeppATivo<s, TTJjXti'OS : aapiciKot, ' flcshen,' subject to fleshly lusts 
 and appetites. Our Lord was adpKi,vo<:, of human flesh sub- 
 sisting ; but though adpKt,vo<;, He was not like all other men, 
 aapKiKOf : 2 C. 3. 3, ev ttKu^I icapSia^ capKivaK : 10. 4, ra yap 
 oirXa T^? {rTpaT€ia<s ^fi&v ov aapKiicd. <rdp^, the opposite of 
 irvevfia, includes the "^vxfl Bt& well as the aS>fia. The desires 
 of the mind, as well as the lusts of the flesh, are enumerated 
 amongst tA tprfa t^5 erapKois, in G. 5. 19 — 21, the life and move- 
 ment of man in the things of the phenomenal world. <rap^ kuI 
 alfui, a Hebrew circumlocution for man, generally with the 
 accessory idea of weakness and frailty. It has the following 
 modifications of meaning: man in his mere corporeal nature, 
 1 C. 15. 50: H. 2. 14 : man in his weak, intellectual nature, 
 contrasted with God, M. 16. 17: G. 1. 16: man in his feeble 
 human powers, contrasted with spiritual natures and agencies, 
 15. a. 12. (EUicott, G. 1. 16.) adp^ moans the regular course 
 
 SYNONYMS — ore'^ovo?, reKfiripM. 
 
 233 
 
 of nature, the worldly tendency of human Ufe, when there is an 
 expressed or latent opposition to irwO/ta, as the governing a^ 
 directing principle in the spiritual man, G. 3. 3 ; 4. 23. In G. 
 4. 29, adpKa, the natural laws, atfcording to which Ishmael was 
 born : iri/eO/xo, the supernatural laws, according to which Isaac 
 was conceived and bom. In Tit. 2. 12, we have Koaii.i,ich<s 
 iiridviiia^, all the inordinate desires of the things of the world. 
 KO(rfUKd<i is- used in preference to aapKiKd<i, as more general 
 and inclusive, and as enhancing the extent of the abnegation. 
 
 frre^avo<!, the wreath of victory in the games, ' corona,' the 
 mark of distinction and joy, the reward of those who fight the 
 good fight of faith, but not th'e emblem or characteristic of 
 royalty. The Bidhipa was the ' insigne regium,' originally a 
 linen band or fillet, encircling the brow, 'taenia,' 'fascia,' 
 applied to the Captain of our salvation, SiaSrjpMra iroKkd, Eev. 
 19. 12. The ffT€^ai»os was a garland formed of leaves and 
 flowers, or an imitation of a garland, worked in gold : aTe^avoi 
 aKdv0ivo9. the crown of thorns, where the word is appropriate 
 to the materials of which the wreath was composed. To such 
 a substance SidSr]p,a could not be applied. 
 
 ffiraraXdv might properly be laid to the charge of the pro- 
 digal, scattering his substance in riotous living {^&v dadnw, 
 L. 15. 13) : Tpv^dv, to the rich man faring sumptuously every 
 day {ei^paivofievoi Kaff i)pMpav Xafiirpm, L. 16. 19) : trrprividv, 
 to Jeshurun, when waxing fat, he kicked, Deut. 32. 15. From 
 Archbishop Trench, who quotes Hottinger : " Tpv<j>dv deliciarum 
 est, et exquisitaj voluptatis, tnraTaXav, luxurise atque prodigali- 
 tatis." Tittmann, "rpv(pdv potius mollitiam Vita) luxuriosa), 
 airajoKav petulantiam et prodigaUtatem denotat." 
 , oTTeuSw, make haste, festino, ' de tempore :' ffirovSd^a, do the 
 utmost, ' festinanter et sedulo aliquid facie.' 
 
 TeKfiTipia, as distinguished from <rr]p,eia, are evidences derived 
 from logical induction. "Differt repai a <rr)p.el^. Hoc enim 
 sumitur etiam pro quolibet signo extra miraculum; at repui 
 semper sumitur pro portento vel prodigio." Mintert. "A 
 miracle is a Swa/it9, as wrought by divine power : a Tcpas, as 
 a supernatural prodigy : a aijfieiov, as a sign or credential of a 
 mission from God." (Wordsworth.) " The fathers apply repara 
 to the signs at the Crucifixion, the supernatural darkness, the 
 rending the rocks ; the earthquake at the Eesurrection ; to the 
 phenomena before the siege and fall of Jerusalem, ffij/telo and 
 
234 
 
 SYNONYMS — TWTO?, xdpK;. 
 
 repara are both applied to Ohristian miracles: ripara, with 
 especial reference to their supernatural character : and <rr}fieia, 
 to their object, as signals of Christ." (Vaughan.) ar]/ieiov, a 
 sign, with reference to its demonstration: ripavj a wonder, 
 with reference to the excitement of surprise : Suvafiii, a work, 
 with reference to the power required for its performance. 
 
 TWO?, (1) mark or impress made by a hard substance on one 
 of softer material ; (2) model, pattern, exemplar, in the widest 
 sense; a material object of worship, or idol, A. 7. 43: an 
 external framework for divine service, A. 7. 44 : H. 8. s : the 
 form of an epistle, A. 23. as : system of doctrinal instruction, 
 R. 6. ij : representative charadter, normal example, R. 5. 14 : 
 1 0. 10. II : Ph. 3. 17 : 1 Th. 1. 7 : 1 P. 5. 3. " two? est res 
 priBfigurans. avrlruirov est res prrofigurata." inroTinraaii, de- 
 lineation, outline, 2 T. 1. i3. 
 
 (f)avko<i, in its primary meaning, 'light,' 'blown about with 
 every wind;' with a moral reference, opposed to aryadof, i. q. 
 KUKoi or TTovripoi." Fritzsche, Rom. ii. p. 297. 
 
 ^oi/evf, a general term for murderer (M. 22. 7 : 1 P. 4. is : 
 Rev. 21. s), used, however, vaguely, as a traitor is called by 
 Plutarch, ^vev^ ttji irarplStK. ^ovevi is the genus, of which 
 a-iKcipioi, A. 21. 38, is the species, an assassin, formed from the 
 ' sica,' poniard. Thus ' sicarii ' mingled with the multitude at 
 the chief feastsj and secretly stabbed their adversaries. (Jose- 
 phus, B. J. ii. 3, 3 : Ant. xx. 8. 6.) 'AvOptoiroKTovoi, man- 
 slayer, J. 8. 44 : 1 J. 3. 15, appropriately applied to Satan, as 
 he would have fain murdered the whole race of mankind. 
 
 <f>6po<} is especially the tribute paid to a foreign power, L. 
 20. 22 ; 23. 3, levied by direct taxation on property and persons, 
 for which purpose the diroypa^ij, or Ktjvaoi;, was taken, which 
 contained an enumeration of the people and valuation of 
 property, leijvaoi, poll-tax, i. q. eiriKe^oKaiov: reKot, tolls, 
 customs, duties, levied on travellers and merchandise, received 
 by T€Xwi»at, Latin ' portitores,' or eicXeyoin-es, collectors. From 
 reKKeiv, put, settle: TeXew, complete, perfect, connected with 
 our verb 'to tell,' and with the German 'steUen,' 'zahlen,' 
 * Ziel.' riXot, ' the settlement,' or perfecting of a thing. Hence 
 the expressions, yd/ioio t^Xo?, and davdroio reXo?, the settle- 
 ment and crown of life. Arnold, Thuc. i. 78. 
 
 ^aptf signifies free gift, favour, mercy, indulgence, bounty, 
 more especially a spiritual gift, and in a sense yet more re- 
 
 ■vl- 
 
 'i: i 
 
 ■I 
 
 ■' > 
 
 SYNONYMS — y^a\/J,6<}. 
 
 235 
 
 strained, the gift of sanctification, or, of such spiritual aids as 
 may enable a man both to will and to do according to what 
 God has commanded ; grace generally, the result of the divine 
 favour, imparted for personal edification : x«/»«<'/*<»> special gift 
 for the edification of others. x«/»' "" S"^^ given, that xa/)/<r- 
 fiara may be rightly exercised, X"P*« ^^ ^^° applied to human 
 benevolence, i. e. the collection made for the Christians at Jeru- 
 salem, 2 0. 8. 19 ; joined with Koiveavia, to denote Christian 
 beneficence, 2 0. 8. 4 ; where Koivavla implies the communica- 
 tion of what is given for the service of many, and not for the 
 exclusive benefit of the possessor. X'^P*'' ^^"^* ^ freely be- 
 stowed by God in order to be freely and thankfully dispensed. 
 In 1 0. 10. 16 {Koivavia rov oJ/taros) the word Koivavia, com- 
 munion, is used rather than (leToxn, participation, to mark 
 more strongly the fact of our being united to Christ (t^ 
 evovadat). x^'Pts is favour, as opposed to opyij: gratuitous 
 favour, as opposed to o^elXri/ia. icoivwyla has the two senses ; 
 
 (1) of participation or communion. Ph. 2. i : 1 J. 1. 3 ; and 
 
 (2) of imparting or communication, R. 15. 26: H. 13. 16. So 
 Koivuveiv, partake in, 1 T. 6. 22 : 1 P. 4. 13 : impart to, G. 6. 6 : 
 Ph. 4. 15. In the salutation, G. 1. 3, x«/"« vfiip koI elpfivt), we 
 have the fuU spiritual significance of the Hebrew 1^ Di^tt>, and 
 the Greek xa^P"!/. ^a/jw, the divine love manifesting itself to 
 man, and elp^vrj, the state that results from a reception of it. 
 "The oriental and occidental forms of salutation are thus 
 blended and spiritualized in the Christian greeting." EUicott. 
 " xO'Pti, qu8B est principium omnis boni ; elpijinj, quae est finale 
 bonorum omnium." Thom. Aquinas. 
 
 ■>^a\fi6<:, properly, a touching, then a touching of the harp or 
 other stringed instrument with the finger, or * plectrum ' {ylrda, 
 sweep the strings); next the instrument; then the song sung 
 with this musical accompaniment. The y^oKfiol of E. 5. 19 : 
 C. 3. 16, are probably the inspired Psalms of the Hebrew Canon. 
 The vfivo<; was a song in praise of a god, or hero after death ; 
 in the Christian use of the word, this original application of the 
 word was still retained, as the v/tj/os was a direct address of 
 praise and glory to God, while the -(/roX/tos might be a com- 
 memoration of mercies received. The word was not freely 
 adopted till the fourth century. Archbishop Trench says, "It 
 is a plausible explanation of this, that the word was so steeped 
 in heathenism, so linked with profane associations, there were 
 
236 
 
 SYNONYMS — ■^I^ . 
 
 BO many hymns to Zeus, Hermes, Aphrodite, that the elEirly 
 Christians would not willingly employ it." The word p8»; 
 (i. q. 00(817) occurs in the Apocalypse, 5. 9 ; 14. 3 ; 15. 3. St. 
 Paul uses it twice with the adjective irpev/iariKij, implying that 
 they were songs composed by spiritual men, and had to do with 
 spiritual things, ^rj, by itself, might mean any kind of song, 
 of battle, of harvest, festal, or hymeneal. 
 
 ■>p-vx,^, animal life, the lower faculty, which man has in 
 common with all living creatures : irpevfia, the higher principle 
 or attribute, the spirit which evinces man's original state, as 
 made in the image of God. " Anim& i'^^'XV) "vivimus, spiritu 
 (irvevfiaTt) intelligimus, vita nobis camalis cum bestiis com- 
 munis est ; ratio spiritalis cum Angelis." Primasius. ^vxVt 
 the living principle which animates the a&fui, or corporeal 
 frame : irvev/ui, the highest faculty, the proper recipient of the 
 Holy Spirit : ^vp^cxos, animal, distinguished from irveviuiTiKoi, 
 spiritual: Jude (19), ■^^ux^'^o'^ irpevfia fif/ ly(ppTe<i: Rev. 8. 9, rk 
 expvra '■^v)(ai, those which held fast animal existence: 12. 11 ; 
 16. 3 ; 18. 13. " It is not to be supposed that •^u^'} and irvev/Mi 
 are different parts of the human constitution, for the sentient 
 faculty is indiscerptible, and cannot be anatomized like . the 
 body ; but they are different faculties of the invisible part of 
 ^man, so that '^vxv refers to that lower faculty of life which 
 man has in common with other animals ; and irvevfia represents 
 the higher attribute, which they do not possess, and which 
 makes him nearest to God." (Wordsworth on 1 Th. 6. 23.) 
 In E. 8. 4, adp^ includes both a&fia and -^vxVi the natural 
 mind, and irvevfia is the renewed soul of the Christian, made so 
 by the presence and agency of a Divine IJpev/ia. In other 
 /^passages, 1 0. 2. H : Eev. 8. 9, "^^vxv includes aufia. The 
 threefold division, rrvev/jM, ■^w^'J. cr&;ia, occurs 1 Th. 5. 23, 
 where irvevfui is the soul as quickened and inhabited by the 
 Holy Spirit. " We have here," says Bishop Ellicott, " a dis- 
 tinct enunciation of the three component parts of the nature 
 of man ; the irvevfta, the higher of the two united, immaterial 
 parts, being the * vis superior agens, imperans in homine ; ' the 
 ■i^vxVy ' <iuse agitur, movetur, in imperio tenetur ;' the sphere 
 of the will and affections, and the true centre of the person- 
 ality. We frequently find instances of an apparent dichotomy, 
 ' body and soul,' M. 6. 25 ; 10. 28, or ' body and spirit ' (1 0. 
 5. 3 ; 7. 34) ; but such passages will only be found accommoda- 
 
 ■.:. 
 
 '# 
 
 SYNONYMS. 
 
 237 
 
 tions to the popular division into a material and immaterial 
 part ; the •^w^') in some cases including thej&fia ; the irvev/M 
 in other cases comprehending the tw- To refer these dis- 
 tinctions to Platonism is calculated to throw doubt on the truth 
 of the teaching. If St. Paul's words imply this trichotomy, 
 then such a trichotomy is infaUibly real and true. If I'lato oj 
 Philo have maintained substantially the same views, then God 
 has permitted a heathen and a Jewish philosopher to advance 
 conjectural opinions, which have been since confirmed by the 
 independent teaching of an inspired Apostle." ^ 
 
CHAPTER XL 
 
 HINTS ON THE AUTHORIZED VERSION. 
 
 The idea of this chapter is taken from the Hints for an Im- 
 proved Translation of the New Testament, by the late Professor 
 Scholefield. The design, however, is different, as my object is 
 not so much to suggest hints for a revision, as to point out the 
 most effectual way of using the Authorized Version. 
 
 Occasionally I have presented a paraphrastic rendering, where 
 a close and literal translation would be an inadequate expression 
 of the force of the original. In the selection of passages I have 
 called attention to those not already adduced in the Syntax, in 
 which some amendment would probably be attempted, whenever 
 the revision of the Authorized Version is deemed advisable. 
 These may generally be arranged under four classes, in which 
 our Version is incorrect, inexact, insufficient, or obscure. 
 
 Matthew 7. 15, Beware, accordingly {Bi), of false prophets. 
 
 12. 43, But whenever the imclean spirit goes out of the man 
 (orav Si). [The conjunction marks the connexion with the pre- 
 ceding, and explains the process by which the Jews had become 
 so hardened in sin as to reject our Lord.] 
 
 15. 3, Why do ye also transgress the precept of God owing 
 to (Sid) yotir tradition ? 27, Yea, Lord, help me ; for even the 
 dogs {Nal, Kvpie, ical ykp rd, Kvvdpia). 
 
 20. 23, is not mine to give, otherwise than to those for whom 
 it has been prepared by my Father (dXKd). 31, charged them 
 that they shoidd be silent {"pa auoirrfawaiv). 
 
 23. 6, They love the highest couch at feasts {ri]v irpunoKki- 
 aiav). 
 
 24. 32, When already its branch has become tender, and its, 
 leaves sprout forth {'^hnjrat diraXo^ kuI rh, <f>vXKa iK^inj), 
 
 26. 5G, But this altogether has taken place that the Scrip- 
 
 HINTS ON THB AUTHORIZED VERSION. 
 
 239 
 
 ' ;*? y 
 
 .. (■ 
 
 tures of the prophets may be fulfilled (rovro Zk iXov '.hovev 
 
 '"Mark 2. .8, And the disciples of John and-the disciples of 
 the Pharisees were keeping a fast {^aav ... . '^7*''"7*'^; - 
 10. 14, for to such belongeth the kingdom of heaven {r<ov 
 
 ^"itZtuA" tal^- place that the Scriptures may be fulfilled 
 
 ^"^ 14 to them, the eleven, at table {dvaKevfiivoK). 
 
 Luke 2 2, Thi^ was the first census that took pkco, whde 
 Oyr^L wa^ governor of Syria. [PubUus Sulpicms Qumnus 
 was S goveLr of Syria. A second census was made after 
 fliA hnnishment of Archelaus.] 
 
 9. 55, YrLw not to what spirit ye belong; or, know ye 
 not? (ohv -irvevpMTOi i<TTe v/ieii.) •^^^p,-^ 
 
 12. 58, For instance, when thou art gomg (a,, V^P -^«7««). 
 [lit is brought forward by our Lord as an exemphfication of 
 his anneal 1 (ri Sk xal af kaxrr&v oi> Kplvere to S^kmov;) _ 
 
 18 u 12, The PharLe standing by himself was offering 
 
 this p^;erVa0«* -PO' ---) ^ ^ ^^ ^ *^« ^^^-^ '^ ^'"^ 
 the tenth of whatever I am from time te tune acqmnng 
 
 22. 29. And accordingly as my Father «7"^^*«^,!?"^^ 
 
 kingdom, I covenant with you, that ye eat, &c. (Start^e^* vp..v 
 
 ^ X eV^t'JTc). 36, And let him who hath no sword. seU 
 
 'ijf TNoiVdLTlg of ^eath has been committed by 
 'iSlTTh: t^l^e true light wHchenlighteneth every 
 Jn by co-iBg inte the world. 62. Henceforward {a.ajrC) ye 
 25 see the heaven set open. [The Gospel dispensation was 
 now commenced; from this time they stould^/^««« '"^ ^}^ 
 Salur the fulfilment of the blessings which had been repre- 
 aented in Jacob's vision.] „ 
 
 3 Is^There arose accordingly a discussion on the part of 
 John's disciples, with the Jews, concermng purifying {^ev^ro 
 oL?/t,.« I tL p^en-r&v 'I^dwov). [The o5. resumes the nar- 
 JativHf .. 23, which is interrupted by the parenthesis in .. 24.] 
 
 4 29, What! isthistheChrist? (;.^n o5r6, W o Xp,^o. 
 [The ;^ with an indicative impUes a mixture of behef, douH 
 Lnd wolder.] /.^*. What! is it possible? 33, What has 
 any one brought him food P {M^ m fp>ey.eu a^n^ 4>a'yuv ;) 
 
240 
 
 HINTS ON THE AUTHORIZED VERSION. 
 
 John 7. 41, Others however kept saying, The Christ does not 
 come out of Galilee, does Ho ? (aXXoi Se iXeyov Mi) yap ex t^? 
 TaXiXaiaf 6 Xpiarb^ epj(€Tai, ;) 
 
 8. 56, Abraham, your father, exulted in the thought that he 
 should see My day ; and he saw, and was glad {riyaWicuTaTo 
 Xva). 
 
 9. 40, And those from among the Pharisees who were with 
 Him heard this, and said to Him, Is it possible that we also 
 are blind ? (e« twi/ ^aptaaitov , . . ol ovrei pxr avrov. Mi) koI 
 VH-ek ;) 
 
 11. 6, When then.he heard, [o^, continuative only.] 
 
 13. 7, But thou shalt know after these things (/xer^ ravra), 
 [when I have finished what I am now doing.] 
 
 15. 6, Separate from me, ye are not able to produce any 
 fruit (x(ii>/>(( ifiov ov SvvaaSe iroieip oiiSiv). 
 
 18. 17, What ! art^hou also belonging to the disciples of this 
 man ? (M^ koI aii e/c r&v fia0Tp-&p el . . . ;) So 18. 25. 
 
 Acts 2. 40, Save yourselves, separating from this crooked 
 generation {avo). 
 
 7. 36, This one brought them out by working (oCto? i^tvyev 
 avTovs TTOtJjCTas). 
 
 8. 11, owing to the fact (Sul), that for a long time by his 
 sorceries they had been bewitched {e^eaTaKevat intrans.). 33, 
 His origin, however, who shall unfold? (t^i; hk yeveap ainov 
 rk SwjTJjcreTat ;) 
 
 9. 31, The churches however (oSv) had rest, building them- 
 selves up, and walking in the fear of the Lord, and by the 
 instruction of the Holy Spirit were continually replenished. 
 
 10. 39, whom they slow by hanging on the tree (Si/ aveiXop 
 Kpe(ida-apre<i iirl ^vXov). 
 
 11. 17, Seeing then God gave the equal gift to them, as to 
 us also, upon the mere fact of their believing on the Lord Jesus, 
 — why, who was I, to be able to restrain God ? (eyco Si rt? ij/iTju 
 SvpaToi KtaXvaai, top Qeov ; ' ego vero.') 
 
 13. 27, Not understanding this word of salvation, even the 
 statements of the prophets, which are read every sabbath-day, 
 these they fulfilled by condemning Him (koI, ra? <^pd<{). 
 
 14. 6, when they had considered the matter they fled (avp- 
 i86vre<{ Kori^vrfop). 
 
 15. 22, to choose men out of their own body and send 
 (eKKe^afUpovi apSpav i^ air&p irifiip'ai). 
 
 HINTS ON THE AUTHORIZED VERSION. 
 
 241 
 
 s ;■ 
 
 
 Acts 17. 7, saying that there is a king of a different cha- 
 racter, {hepoi, p. 192.) 
 
 19. 13, Some from the Jewish exorcists who went about (dirb 
 r&p Trepi€pj(pfieva>p ^lovhaitop i^opiuar&p). 24, models of Diana's 
 temple in silver (paoii<i apyvpovi 'AprifjiiSoi). 
 
 22. 23, tossing up their garments (piirrowTap ra IfidTia). 85, 
 when they stretched him forward with the thongs (irpoireipap 
 ainop Tot? t/iaaip). 
 
 23. 5, I did not consider that he is High Priest (ow« jjSew; ori 
 icrrlp apxtepew). 27, This man apprehended by the Jews, and 
 on the point of being killed by them, being present with my 
 force I rescued, on learning that he is a [Roman. 
 
 26. 28, 29, In short compass, i e. in a brief narrative of facts, 
 thou art trying to persuade me to become a Christian. I would 
 pray to God, whether in short compass or long, i. e. in brief 
 narrative or elaborate argument, that not only thou, but that 
 all who hear me to-day, became such as even I am (ip 6\lyq>, 
 ep TToXXft), yepeaOai), [eV oXiyai is foimd in E. 3. 3, where it is 
 well rendered, ' in few words.*] 
 
 Eom. 1. 3, concerning His Son Jesus Christ, who was made 
 to arise from the seed of David according to the flesh (tow 
 yepo/iipov iic). 32, such as (olVti'e?) being well aware of the 
 ordinance of God, that they who practise {irpdaarovai) such 
 things are worthy of death, not only commit them (Trotouat), 
 but actually delight in those who practise them {km avpev- 
 SoKovai TOi<s Trpdaaovari). 
 
 2. I, for in the fact that thou judgest thy neighbour (top 
 erepop), thou condemnest thyself; for thou the judge practisest 
 the same things {irpdffffei<i). 
 
 3. 3, 4, Shall unfaithfulness on their part nullify the faith- 
 fulness of God ? Far be the thought. Let God be accounted 
 true (let our conviction be that God is true), though, on the 
 other nand, it should follow (Se) that every man must be 
 accounted a liar; as it is written. In order that thou mayest 
 be proved righteous in thy words, and prevail judicially in thy 
 cause (and mayest gain thy cause when thou standest in judg- 
 ment). 8, 9, And why do we not rather say. As we are 
 slanderously reported, and as some afiirm that we say. Let us 
 do the things which are evil, in order that the" things which 
 are good may come ? («al p,ii Kadm^ fi\a<T<jn)iiovfi€da.) What 
 
 R 
 
242 
 
 HINTS ON THE AUTHORIZED VERSION. 
 
 then? Do we (Jews) occupy a higher position than they 
 (the Gentiles)? (Tl oZv ; irpoexpii.eda ;) 19, That all the world 
 may become convicted of guilt in relation to God (wroSwo? 
 yevr)Tai . . . r^ &e^). 21, But now, apart from law, God's 
 mode of justifying has been manifested (x^pi? vofiov) [in- 
 dependently of the requirements and conditions of any law]. 
 
 Horn. 5. 6, 7, For while we wore stUl powerless (to obey or 
 please God), at the appointed season Christ died for ungodly 
 characters. For scarcely in behalf of a righteous man wiU one 
 die ; scarcely, I say, for it is a fact, that in behalf of the pre- 
 eminently good man, some one really has the heart to die. 
 12, For this cause, as through one man sin came into the 
 world, and death through sin, and thus death came abroad 
 unto all men, on the ground that all sinned. 16, But not 
 as was the transgression, so the gift of grace; for if in the 
 transgression of the one man, mankind died, much more the 
 grace of God, and the free gift, centering in the grace of the 
 one man, Christ Jesus, abounded to mankind. 20, Now law 
 came in by the way, that there might be more strongly dis- 
 played the transgression ; yet where sin was thus aggravated, 
 gratuitous mercy had a more signal victory (Vaughan). 
 
 6. e, the body, the seat and instrument of sin {to <r&iia t^? 
 afiapTiai). 7, He who has died stands acquitted from his 
 sin. [In the Levitical sin and trespass offerings, the offerer 
 suffered a symbolical death in respect of his fault. We have 
 suffered a symbolical death in Christ, and are therefore formally 
 released from our slavery to sin, and have properly nothing 
 more to do with it (Wratislaw).] 11, Thus do ye also regard 
 yourselves as dead men (insensible, immoveable) in relation 
 to sin, as living men (full of energy and vigour) in relation 
 to God. 10, I use a human illustration, owing to the infirmity 
 of your flesh. 20, When ye were slaves of sin, ye were free- 
 men in relation to righteousness. 
 
 7. 8, The fact being, that apart from law, sin is dormant 
 (vwpj.? yap vofiov dfiapria veKpd). 15, For that which I perform, 
 I do not sanction; for I do not practise this which I wish; 
 but what I hate, this I do ; but if I do this which I loathe, 
 I assent to the law, that it is good. [Compare Eurip. Med. 
 1076, 7, Kal futpOdva fiev aita Spav /jiiWa koku, Qvfwf Sk Kpeia- 
 atov T&u e/Ji&v ^ovKevfidruv.] 23, But I see a different (erepov), 
 
 HINTS ON THE AUTHORIZEU VERSION. 
 
 243 
 
 i. e. an opposing principle in my members warring against 
 the principle of my mind, and leading me captive by the 
 principle of sin, which is in my members. 
 
 Bom. 8. 3, For the point which law could not effect, the point 
 in which it was weak by means of the flesh, God effected 
 by sending His own Son, in the likeness of the flesh, liable 
 to sin, and as a sia-offcring. He passed sentence of death upon 
 the dominion of sin in the flesh, in order that the law's require- 
 ment might be satisfied in us, who live, jiot by the rule of the 
 flesh, but by the rule of the spirit. 6, For the bent of the flesh 
 is death, but the bent of the spirit is life and peace, because the 
 bent of the flesh is enmity towards God, for it does not submit 
 itself to the law of God ; the fact is, this submission is not 
 even possible ; accordingly, they which are after the flesh have 
 not the ability to please God. 10, u. But if Christ is in you 
 while the body is dead (inevitably subject to death), owing 
 to sin, the spirit is life (a living principle of action), owing to 
 righteousness; if, however, the Spirit of Him who raised up 
 Jesus from the dead, dwell in you, He who raised up Christ 
 from the dead, shall make alive, shall reanimate your mortal 
 bodies, owing to His Spirit which dwelleth in you. 23, waiting 
 to receive as realization of sonship the redemption of our body 
 (ylodeaiav dveKBe')(Ofi£voi,). 
 
 9. 2, that my sorrow is great, yea, unceasing distress in 
 my heart, u, For when they were not yet bom, much less 
 practised any good or evil, in order that God's purpose, accord- 
 ing to election, may abide not from and after works, but from 
 and by Him tliat calleth. 21, Or hath not the potter power 
 over the clay, out of the same lump to make one portion a 
 vessel for honour, and another portion a vessel for dishonour? 
 [" The position of <r/ceOo? shows that it must bo a predicate of 
 o fiiv" (Wratislaw).] 22, If, however, God, willing to manifest 
 His anger. 27, 28, The remnant shall be saved, for God will 
 be consummating and cutting- short His account in righteous- 
 ness. 
 
 10. 19, But, I say, is it possible Israel did not know? 
 Moses is the first to say (Mi) ovk eyvat 'Ivparjk; trpSnot 
 Mftiff^s Xeyet). [So early as the days of Moses, they were 
 distinctly warned of this purpose. Vaughan.] 
 
 11. 2, How he expostulates with God against Israel. 
 
 12. 1, the rational service of yourselves [not opyavixij, 
 
 • R 2 
 
244 
 
 HINTS ON THE AUTHORIZED VERSION. 
 
 mechanical]. 3, not to be minded above what he ought to be 
 minded, but to be minded so as to be sober-minded. 
 
 Rom. 13. 1, Let every one submit himself to authorities over 
 him, for no authority exists except from God ; but the existing 
 authorities have been commissioned by God (and are subor- 
 dinate to Him). 9, For the commandment, Thou shalt not 
 commit adultery, thou shalt not steal . . ., and whatever pre- 
 cept there is besides is brought under one head in this saying, 
 in the expression, ii, And this do ye, as knowing the season. 
 
 14. 4, In relation to his own master he stands or falls, i. e. 
 is right or wrong. 13, No longer then let us pass judgment 
 on each other, but adopt this judgment rather. 17, For the 
 kingdom of God is not eating and drinking (fipAaii koI troffist). 
 
 15. 20, 21, yet 80 aspiring to preach the Gospel, not where 
 Christ is received, that I may not build on a foundation laid 
 by others, but in conformity with what is wiitten. Men shall 
 see to whom no tidings have been told concerning Him, and 
 those who have not heard shall understand. 31, in order that 
 I may be delivered from those who continue disobedient in 
 Judsca {t&v aireidoinnav). See p. 195. 
 
 1 Cor. 4. 9, Seeing that we are rendered a spectacle to the 
 world, both to angels and men (fin diarpov eyevi]dr)ftev). 
 
 5. 6, The matter of your boasting is dishonourable (ov koKjov 
 
 TO KaV^jJM vfi&v). 
 
 6. 3, Know ye not that we shall judge angels, to say nothing 
 of matters of common life (/i»?Tt 76 ^hotiko) ? If, however, ye 
 hold courts of common life, those who are least esteemed in 
 
 , the Church, these set ye up to judge (fiuoriKci Kpw^pia, secular 
 courts). 
 
 7. 10, 11, that the wife separate not herself from her husband, 
 but if ever she be actually (/cat) separated, let her remain un- 
 married, or 'let her get reconciled to her husband, and that 
 the husband dismiss not the wife. 15, The brother or the 
 sister is released from bondage in such circumstances (ov SeSov- 
 \o>Ta(). 23, Become not servants of men (fii) ylveade). 34, 
 The wife has her condition assigned her, and the virgin has 
 her condition (jiefiepurTai ^ lyvvij xal 17 trapBevoi). 
 
 8. 7, But some with the consciousness of the idol remain- 
 ing till now, cat it as an idol-sacrifice. 10, For if ever any 
 one see thee, the man who hast knowledge, at table in the 
 idol's temple, will not his conscience, as he is weak, be im- 
 
 ■^1 
 
 
 ::! ; 
 
 k 
 
 HINTS ON THE AUTHORIZED VERSION. 
 
 245 
 
 paired, so as actually to eat' the things offered in sacrifice to 
 idols P 12, But when by this practice ye sin against the bre- 
 thren, ofliBring violence to their conscience in a weakly state, 
 ye sin against Christ. 
 
 1 Cor. 9. 4, Is it so that we have not right to eat and to drink ? 
 Is it so that we have not right to consort with a Christian 
 woman? 6, Have I only and Barnabas not the right of de- 
 clining to labour for our support? 9, Thou shalt not muzzle 
 the ox while treading out the com. Are oxen the special 
 objects of God's care? 15, than that any one make void my 
 object of glorifying {icavxniia). 
 
 10. 5, In these things, however, they became figures of us 
 {ravra Zk Tinroi tfiiiav ey€v^0r}aav), 
 
 11. 14, Doth not even nature of her own accord teach you? 
 {oiiBk avri) ij <f>v<TK). 26, ye declare the death of the Lord until 
 such time as He shall have come {Kara/r^iWere, a^K o5 av 
 eXet)). 
 
 12. 15, It is not for this reason no part of the body {ov iraph 
 roino ovk eariv iic tov ffw/taros). [The course of the Apostle's 
 argument requires that this should be rendered aifirmatively. 
 J 5, 16 are an illustration of 14. When the Apostle appeals to 
 the reader, as in 17. 19, he introduces irov. But besides this, 
 only one passage has been adduced in which ov interrogatively 
 has been foUowed by a negative. Soph. Track. 1013, oinc 
 eyxoi Ti<s ov^aifiov ovk airorph^ei. But here ovk is used in 
 a privative sense, and asserts the direct contrary idea of the 
 verb, "Will not some one hand a spear to help?"] 
 
 15. 12, resurrection of dead bodies is a nonentity (ovk ecrnv). 
 14, vain, then, is all that we preach ; vain, too, is all that you 
 believe. 1 9, if in this life onlj' we have reposed our hope in 
 Christ ; have hoped and still hope {r{KtriK6re<t ia/iep). 31, by my 
 glorifying in you (vfi t^i» vfierepav Kav^aiv). 
 
 2 Cor. 1. 19, did not become yea and nay, but has become 
 yea, and remains yea in Him (yejovev). 
 
 3. 5, Not that we are qualified of ourselves to form any such 
 estimate as from ourselves, but our qualification is from God 
 (IkuvqI, a<f>' eavT&v, ef eavr&v). 16, But whenever Israel shall 
 have turned to the Lord (Christ- ward), the veil is gradually 
 removed, is taken quite off (wepiaipeiTai). 
 
 4. 11, For continually we who live are being handed over 
 to death on account of Jesus {irapaSi^fuBa), 16, even though 
 
246 
 
 HINTS ON THE AUTHORIZED VERSION. 
 
 our outward man is in process of decay [hic^eeiperai), yet the 
 inward man is in process of renewal {waKawovrai). 
 
 2 Cor. 5. 10, looking to what He practised {-irph^ h iirpa^ep). 
 LI ho whole of life is summed up into one act. Life on earth is 
 but a moment compared vith eternity.] u, The love which 
 Christ showed constraineth us, having formed this judgment ; 
 seeing that One died in the stead of all mankind, our inference 
 IS {apa) aU mankind died in Him. 17, The original state is 
 passed away ; tlie whole state is rendered new (iraprixee, yeyope). 
 
 8. 2, their deep-sunk poverty abounded to the wealth of 
 their opcn-heartedness. 4, requesting of us to allow them the 
 favour of participating in the ministry to the saints (Seo^evot 
 ■nti&v, rrjv xdpiv km. rrji SiaKoviai Tfjg et? tous 07/01/?). ISe^aadai 
 V/iai is considered to bo a gloss.] 10, being such as spon- 
 taneously took the lead long ago, not only in the act, but 
 also in the desire (oZrivei oi ^6vov r6 -n-oirjaat, dWA Kal to 
 OeKeiv irpoevijp^aaffe diro -irSpvcn). He that soweth with bless- 
 ings (from himself), shall reap with blessings (from God)— eV 
 evXoyiaii;. 
 
 10. 12, For wo do not venture to reckon ourselves among, or 
 to compare ourselves with, any of those who commend them- 
 selves (eyxpivai, avyicpipai, avviaTavoprav). n, For wo arc 
 not (ov) stretching beyond our line, as if wo did not (fiij) 
 reach to you ; for as far as to you also we anticipated others 
 (i^edaafiev) in preaching the Gospel of Christ. 
 
 11. 3, Thus your understandings should bo corrupted from 
 the singleness of devotion duo to Christ. 9, And when I was 
 present with you and reduced to want, I did not prey upon 
 any one {vaTep7,eei<i ov KarevdpKi)<Ta). 12, that I may cut off 
 
 *ho means of attack from those who wish to make an attack 
 {Ti}p d(f>opp.7jp). J6, But if it be otherwise, receive me even 
 
 though ye receive me as a fool. 20, If a man takes wages (ei 
 
 Tt9 Xufi^dpei). 
 
 11. 30, if I must boast, I will boast the circumstances of 
 my infirmity. 
 
 G. 1. 4, That he might deliver us from the midst of (e«) 
 the present evil world. 20, behold, in tho presence of God 
 I declare that I lie not. ' 
 
 2. 5, To whom not even for an hour we yielded in tho 
 subjection demanded. 10, Only they wished us to be mindful 
 of the poor; wliich I was anxious also w/wn among you for 
 
 HINTS ON THE AUTHORIZED VERSION. 
 
 247 
 
 this very reason to do [i. o. because of the request of James, 
 Peter, and John], airo tovto, 2 P. 1. 5. [The aor. iairovSaaa 
 shows that the Apostle speaks of his conduct at that time. If 
 he referred to his habitual action, the word would have been 
 icTwovSa^op (Wratislaw).] 11, because he was convicted of 
 error (otl KaTeyp<oafiepo<s ^p). 
 
 G. 3. 1, in front of whose eyes Jesus Christ was inscribed in 
 the midst of you as crucified. 17, This then is what I mean, 
 — the covenant previously confirmed by God to Christ-ward, 
 the law which was made three hundred and thirty years after- 
 wards does not disannul, so as to invalidate the promise. 
 
 4. 4, bom of woman, born under law (yepop.epop). 12, Be- 
 come (free from Judaism) as I am, for even I (though a 
 native Jew) have become a Gentile, as yo are. [^Now, rot? dpo- 
 fioi<i <o? avofws, 1 C. 9. 21. Then, irepia-aoripon JijXwT^s (nr- 
 dpr)(0)p TMv iraTpiK&p /MOV irapaZovewp, G. 1. 14.] 16, 17, And so 
 I have become your enemy by being true to you. They pay 
 court to you with no honourable intentions, but they wish to 
 shut you out (from the Christian covenant), in order that you 
 may pay court to them (as Jews). 25, For Hagar represents 
 Mount Sinai in Arabia, and corresponds to the Jerusalem that 
 now is, for she is in bondage with her children p^d hovXevei 
 7ap]. 27, for many are the children of the desolate, rather than 
 of her who hath the husband. 
 
 5. 5, Ye have been made void, i. e. ye have disfranchised 
 yourselves from Christ, as many of you as are getting justified, 
 continuing in tho element of law (/carij/yyjJ^jjTe diro rov Xpiarou 
 oiTipet eV pop,^ SiKaiovaOe). 14, I would that they who subvert 
 you would really cut themselves off from your body. 
 
 6. 4, he shall have his ground of rejoicing only in regard to 
 himself, and not in regard to the other. 
 
 E. 1. 13, In whom ye also obtained a heritage upon hearing 
 the word of truth, the good news of our salvation ; in whom 
 when ye really believed, yo were sealed with the Holy Spirit, 
 the substance of promise. 
 
 2. 12, that ye were at that period separate from Christ. 14, 
 who made the interests of both to bo one, and broke down the 
 intervening wall of separation, having in his flesh abolished the 
 antipathy, resulting from the law of positive commandments 
 consisting in ritual ordinances. 
 
 3. 9, tlie nature of the secret dispensation, kept hidden ages 
 
248 
 
 HINTS ON THE AUTHORIZED VERSION. 
 
 long ago in the God who created the universe (iv t^ Qem t^ tA 
 •irdvTa KriaavTi). [It was God's dispensation, though it was 
 liidden in the Godhead, and was not revealed to the world in 
 former ages. The conception of this secret plan, the partial 
 and gradual mode of its revelation, were all ordered by Him.] 
 
 E. 4. \i, in imposture devised for the systematic plan of deceit 
 {iv iravovpyia Trpo? t^v fieOoBeiav rfj^ irXavrji:). 21, as is truth in 
 Jesus ; embodied in a personal Saviour. 26, Let not the sim go 
 down on your irritation {irapopyur/jLa). 28, Let the stealer 
 no longer steal (o KKitrrcav firjKeri KXeTrTerm). 
 
 5. 6, This point however yo know, since ye are aware (toCto 
 7^p to-re, 'yivaxTKOprei). 16, Consider then with what degree of 
 accuracy yo walk. 26, that ho may consecrate the Church by 
 purging it with the washing of the water in (the ministry of) 
 the Word. 
 
 Ph. 1. 24, But to abido in the flesh is more necessary on your 
 account. 
 
 2. 6, 7, He did not consider the being on an equality with 
 God a matter to be deprived of, but He emptied Himself. 
 [This rendering brings out the antithesis between the two 
 clauses more strongly, {ovx apirar/fwv jjyjjo-oto to eivai laa 
 6eu>, dX.X.* eavTov exevwae.) The insertion of the article shows 
 that elvai is naturally the subject of the proposition. Our Lord 
 regarded His divine nature to be entirely and absolutely in His 
 own power. No one could deprive Him either of His Godhead 
 or His Manhood.] 12, that in the name of Jesus — [as the 
 groundwork and element of the action described, ' To bow the 
 knee' is a synonym of prayer. L. 22. 41 : A. 7. 60; 9. 40; 21. 
 5 : R. 14. u : E. 3. 14.]— Ph. 2. 16, Holding fast the word of life, 
 to serve for my ground of glorying against the day of Christ, 
 that I did not ran for nothing, or labour for nothing. 
 , 3. 4, Yet I myself have ground of confidence, as much as 
 you please, even in the flesh ; if any one else deems to confide 
 in the flesh, I have more ground than they — at circumcision 
 eiglit days old, sprung from {ex) the stock of Israel. 15, in 
 whatever matter ye are diversely minded (/cat et ri erepw? 
 </)poi/€tTe). 21, the body, the seat and sphere, of our humiliation. 
 
 Col. 1. 12, giving thanks to the Father, who qualified us for 
 the portion of the inheritance of the saints in light. 15, born 
 before all the creation (w/owtotoko? ttoo-i;? «ct(o-6<u;). 18, raised 
 before all from the dead {irpanoTOKOi ex r&v veKp&p). 
 
 HINTS ON THE AUTHORIZED VERSION. 
 
 249 
 
 Col 2 8, Take heed that there shall be no one to capture you 
 as spoil by means of his phUosophy; or, rather (««0. empty 
 deceit. 9, because in Him permanently abideth aU the fulness 
 of the Deity in bodily substance. 
 
 3. 25, For the Avrong doer shaU receive to himself the wrong 
 
 he has done. ,.!_/.* j.» 
 
 1 Th. 2. 7, as we may conceive a nurse cherishes (w? &p ^P"?"? 
 edXim). 16, Forbidding us to speak to the Gentiles, so as to fill 
 up their sins continuaUy ; but the wrath of God came suddenly 
 upon them to the uttermost. 
 
 5 23 and may your spirit and soul and body bo preserved 
 entire, in every part without blame {6\6k\vpov) [a secondary 
 
 predicate]. 1 •/• j • u- 
 
 2 Th 1. 10, When he shall have come to be glorified in his 
 saints, and to be admired in that very day in all beUevers, 
 because the testimony we delivered to you was believed. 
 
 2 4 He who opposeth and exalteth himself exceedingly, 
 against every one that is caUed God, or is an object of reverence. 
 
 3 2, for faith is not the property of all men. 10, If any one 
 refuses to earn his living, in that case, let him not eat (e? t« ov 
 6i\ei, ipyd^eadai, ^»jSe iadiera). 
 
 1 Tim 1. 9, Law is not enacted for a righfli^ man. 15, 
 16, chief of whom am I, but on this account I had mercy shown 
 me, that in my case as chief, Christ Jesus might show forth 
 the extent of His long-su£fermg. 
 
 6. 4, But if any widow have children or grandchildren. [Ihe 
 term ''nephews ' was adopted from the Vulgate, ' nepotes,' which 
 really means distant relatives.] 1 1, For whenever they are cold 
 in their feehngs towards Christ, they desire to marry {orav r^/ap 
 KaTaaTpvvMatoffL rov Xpiarov yaixelv dikovaiv) (or whenever 
 they recover their natural spirits), being liable to judgment aa 
 they make void their original pledge [i. e. the pledge or promise 
 not to marry, which they gave when they were placed on tho 
 
 list of widows]. . ., . J 
 
 6. 2, because the masters who mutually receive their good 
 
 oflices'are believing and beloved. 5, supposing that godliness 
 
 is traflic for gain. 
 
 2 ^. 2. 5, unless he have striven lawfully. 21 , Whosoever shaU 
 have cleansed himself from these, will be a vessel to honour. 
 
 3. 5, having a make-up (jiop^ptoaiv) of godliness. 
 
 Heb. 1. 1—4, In mimy portions and in many modes, of old to 
 
250 
 
 HINTS ON THE AUTHORIZED VERSION. 
 
 tho fathers spako God in tho prophets, in these last days to us 
 He speaks in a Son, whom lie constituted possessor of all 
 things, through whom He made indeed the worlds, who, seeing 
 that He is the radiation of His glory, and tho impress of His 
 csscnco, directing too the universe by His word, the expression 
 of His power, having by Himself effected the purging of our 
 sins, took His scat on the right hand of tho Majesty in the 
 highest ; having been proved to be so much nobler than tho 
 angels, as tho real character Ho inherits is so much more dis- 
 tinguished than theirs. 
 
 Heb. 2. 3, which having received the beginning of its utter- 
 ance through the Lord, was convoyed stedfastly to us by those 
 who hoard liim. 7, For if the word spoken by angels proved 
 stcdfast. 10, For it was fitting in his sight . ; . that in bringing 
 many sons to glory, he should make the author of salvation 
 accomplish his end by means of sufferings. 10, For not, I 
 ween, is it -angels ho succours. 
 
 3. 13, So long as the 'to-day' is named. 16, For who upon 
 hearing provoked ? Yta, verily, was it not even all who came 
 out of Egypt with Moses ? 
 
 9. 22, Apart from shedding of blood remission is not effected. 
 -11. J, Now faith is confidence in blessings hoped for; con- 
 vincing testimony of transactions unseen. 5, By faith Enoch 
 was translated in order that he might not see death (tov fii] iSeiv 
 expressing purpose). 6, that Ho exists, and becomes a rewardor 
 to those who diligently seek Him (6'ti co-tI, koI . , . /xiaOairoSoT'i)'! 
 yiverai). 
 
 Ja. 2. 4, have ye not then divisions among yourselves, and 
 are become judges, deciding from evil surmises ? 0, Ye, for your 
 part, dishonour tho jjoor {■fjTifi'qaaTe), degrade him to a state of 
 arifita, disfranchise him of his legitimate privileges of Christian 
 citizcnsliip. 20, Art thou willing, however, to know, O vain 
 man, that faith apart from its works is dead ? 
 
 3. G, Thus tho tongue has a settled character in our members, 
 as that which pollutes the whole body. 
 
 4. 4, AVhosoever, therefore, is minded to be the friend of tho 
 world, takes the character of enemy to God. [In M. 1. 19 
 i^opXTjOr) is translated ' was minded,' a rendering which might 
 with great advantage be introduced into many passages.] 12, 
 Who art thou that art judging thy neighbour ? (erepov.) See 
 p. 192. 
 
 HINTS ON THE AUTHORIZED VERSION. 
 
 251 
 
 Ja 5 4 The hire, which is kept back by violence on your part. 
 16, V;ry powerful il the supplication of a righteous man m its 
 i,.vard working^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^^,^ ^^^^^ ^-"^rto't 
 through f^th unto salvation. 8. whom though ye saw Him not 
 t^:t!:t y^ love, in whom beHeving. though now ye see 
 
 "Tpl^T^F^^tCtings. being your essential qualities 
 
 2 , But there arose false prophets also among the people 
 
 12 These however, as irrational animals following their na ural 
 luLt Wg^^^^^^^^ being for the purpose of capture and slaughter^ 
 
 13 considering as pleasure noon-day riot, [^edv^ep^val rpv^at a 
 W of great voluptuousness. « Partem solido demei. de die ] 
 
 ^ 6 For as they wish this, it escapes their notice fjiat the 
 he™s were of old, and the earth was composed out of water 
 aiTly means of w'ater : 11, Since then all tl-e things tend 
 todissolution, in what state ought we to be subsisting ? What 
 ought to be our essential principle ? (inrapx"''-) . j 
 
 1 J. 2. 28, in order that we may not by shame shrii|^ from 
 
 °T'4 Every one who worketh sin, worketh also lawlessness, 
 
 ^^'li^t'doT^ot exist in love ; love that is perfect cast^h 
 out 'fear, seeing that fear hath punishment; but he who 
 habituaUy fears, hath not been perfected in love. 
 
 5 i8,isnotasinner;sinsnothabituaUy(ovxaM«PTa.«). 19, 
 The whole world Ueth in the dominion of- the wicked one. 
 
CHAPTER Xn. 
 GIlA]\IMATIOAL AND RHETORICAL TERMS. 
 
 toriclT te^?''*'*"" f ^r?"'" "^''"y grammatical and rhe- 
 carofu l!^r "° '^"^PYV^" "^^'^"^"^3 of which should be 
 carefully borne in mind. A knowledge of the names is not 
 
 are founded is peculiar y important. Many errors in theology 
 have sprung from mismterpreting the figurative language of 
 Scripture by substituting the symbolical for the literd, or bv 
 
 the II ^ T-'"^^ "^''"^^ underlying the sui-face where 
 the pla m and obvious meaning is all that is meant. The un- 
 eertamties which abornid in the whole range of prophetical 
 interpretation may be traced entirely to this source; and in 
 every branch of scriptural exegesis differences of opinion pre- 
 vail, and controversies are hopelessly carried on. in which the 
 disputants use the san.o words in very different senses. The 
 perplexity is the greater, as writers on grammar and rhetoric 
 are not uniformly consistent with one another, or even with 
 themselves m the terms they adopt. Until there is a distinct 
 understandmg of the meaning of the words, and of the nature 
 of the writing whether it be history or prophecy, aUegory or 
 parable sjonbol or type, and of the senses in which the terms 
 are to be understood we can never arrive at the satisfactory 
 and sound interpretation of any disputed passage, and we shaU 
 
 Iwln 9 ;T ^*^° T*^ -^^ Bcasonable caution of the 
 Apostle: 2 T. 2. 23, rA, f.o>p^, ««i d^acSeiirov, ^ryrwe., ^apa.. 
 
 The use of figurative language in Scripture is the same as in 
 
 TKOPE, METAPHOR, SYNECDOCHE. 
 
 253 
 
 all other writings. Its object is to stimulate attention, to excite 
 the imagination, to arouse the feelings, to impress strongly on 
 the mind the arguments adduced. One striking characteristic of 
 its style is the substitution of specific terms for general, a 
 characteristic which is perfectly retained in translation, though 
 every other excellence of expression is liable to be lost. Arch- 
 bishop Whately remarks (Rhetoric, chap. iii. § 2) : " The pre- 
 valence of this kind of language in the sacred writers may bo 
 regarded as something providential. It may be said with truth, 
 that the book which it is the most necessary to translate into 
 every language, is chiefly characterized by that kind of excel- 
 lence in diction which is least impaired by translation." 
 
 TROPE, METAPHOR, SYNECDOCHE. 
 
 In considering the figures of speech the most general term Is 
 trope (rpeiro), turn), when a word, which usage has appropriated 
 to one thing, is turned from its primary signification, and is 
 transferred to another. The expression is then termed tropical 
 or figurative. If, however, the word never or rarely occurs in 
 its primary signification, the tropical sense becomes the proper 
 one. The original meaning of ^13 is * to bend the knee,' but 
 
 as it occurs very rarely in this sense, the derivative meaning, 
 ' to bless,' is said to be the proper, and not a figurative nean- 
 ing. The original meaning of vpoa/cvviot may be ' to lawn,* 
 like a dog, but as it nowhere is used in the New Testament in 
 this sense, and as the nearest approach is irpoaKwef;, spaniel- 
 like flatterers, fawners, the derivative meaning, to do homage, 
 show outward respect, worship, is the proper meaning. This 
 use of irpoaKvpia may be ascribed to the Christian element, as 
 ivixop^ia, p. 7. 
 
 When there is some resemblance between the two things, to 
 which the word is applied, the figure is called a metaphor ; the 
 context shows that something is attributed to the term in its 
 transferred sense, which does not belong to it in the literal 
 sense; or that thpre is subtracted from it, in its transferred 
 sense, something which does belong to it in its literal" sense. 
 The character of our Blessed Lord, and the relations in which 
 He stands to us, are thus made known by a combination of 
 various metaphors. Thus He is called 6 iroifiijv o KoXot, ij 
 ainreKoi ^ aXijdivii, 6 aproi toO &eov, 6 ^uv aprof, 6 aiivoi rov 
 
254 
 
 METONYMY, IllONY, IIYPEIIIIOLE. 
 
 &€ov, 1) pi^a rov 'leatraC, fj pi^a Aa^lZ, \ido<} irpoa-KO/ifiaTo^, 
 aKpoywviaioi;. Wo may horo adduce L. 13. 32, iropevdevTet 
 ecTrare t^ oKunreKi ravTr} : M. 3. 7, lyevmjfiara ij^^iBv&v : 23. 33, 
 o(f>ei<!: 10. 16, XuKoi: Ph. 3. 2, /ewe?. 
 
 When there ia no resemblance between the two objects, but 
 only a connexion between them, the figure is called sjTiecdoche ; 
 trui'eKSo'xrj, literally, means the embracing or comprehension of 
 one thing with another ; an indirect mode of expression, where 
 the whole is put for a part, the part for a whole, genus for 
 species, species for genus, abstract for concrete. Thus ' my 
 flesh ' is put for • my body,' Ps. 16. 9 : A. 2. 26. to irorqpiov, 
 for the contents of tho cup : •^f^'? ^^ P^** ^^"^ person, as we 
 speak of a thousand, souls : r) oiKov/ievrj refers to the Homan 
 empire in A. 17. 6, and Judaea, in A. 11. 28. In Mk. 16. 16 
 the general term, KTian, means all mankind; in 2 C. 5. 17, 
 xaiv^ KTicTK ia rendered, a new creature, abstract for concrete, 
 though wo may render the passage, * he is a new creation.' In 
 JI. 6. 11 tho specific term apTo<! includes all the necessariea of 
 life. 
 
 By the same figure a round number is put for a larger or 
 smaller number, aa 1 C. 1-4. 19, ireme Xo'^ovt : a certain and 
 definite number, for an uncertain and indefinite, as eirrd, M. 
 12. 14 : e^hofir]icovTdKi<s eind, M. 18. 22. 
 
 METONYMY, IRONY, IIYPEKBOLE. 
 
 Metonymy (fierayvvfila, traduclio, inwmtaUo) is the substitu- 
 tion of one name or appellation for another, as the cause for tho 
 cft'oct, or the cflect for the cavise, the author for his work : 
 L. 16. 29, s'xpvat Moxret* Kal rovt irpo^ra';. So in A. 15. 21 ; 
 21. 21. Other instances are yK&a-aa, Mk. 16. 17 : 10. 14. 39: 
 fiu-xaipa, M. 10. 34 : II. 8. 35 : 'lepoaoKviia, M. 3. 5 : Sidiv, 
 referring to tho Ohurch of God, R. 9. 33 ; 11. 26 : ryovv, E. 3. 14 : 
 Se^ul, G. 2. 9. To this also we may refer A. 10. 15, firj aii 
 Koivov, call not thou defiled: M. 16. 19, o iav Bijcryi; /cat \ucrj7?, 
 whatever you declai'c bound, or loosed. 
 
 To some instances of synecdoche and metonjTny there is 
 applied the term KaTci'XprjaK, which strictly means, full use 
 (abuti), but more generally, misuse, misapplication (male uti) ; 
 when an idea ia attached to an object with which it is not 
 compatible, e. g. ' take arms against a sea of troubles :' L. 8. 23, 
 «aTe/Sij \ai\a^ uvefiov ets rijv \ifivrii>, koI avveirKrfpovvTO koX 
 
 METONYMY, IRONY, IIYPERBOLE. 
 
 255 
 
 i^Mvevov, they were in process of being ^^^ -^^71^1 
 persons are put for the vessels : M. 3. 12, Z,.aKa0ap,e. -ajv aX^va 
 S i e. L corn on the floor. Under this -may reckon 
 ^e^,X6«. desecrate, M. 12. 5 : irepo, vop.,, smful bias. K 7^ 23 . 
 i^ovaia. veil, 1 0. 11. 10 : ct&^ r<op aH,aprmp, C. 2. 11 . fi^V, 
 I 5: 6<}>eaXp^^ -.ovvpo,. Mk. 7. 22: ^^etv r,. <I>-^2^1 
 1. 12, where the term, appropriate to the sense of sight, is 
 transferred to the sense of hearing : xim'^ToXoyca plausibili^. 
 eiX^ia. complimentary language. R. 16. is ; eurpa^eXut. wat 
 and elegance enUsted in the service of sin, E 5 4. Sometime 
 this figure has a touch of pleasantry: 2 0. 12. 13, x«/»<^«'^^« 
 
 Several expressions have a touch of irony («pa,mfl, dissimula- 
 tion, an ignorance purposely afi^ected, any assumed appearance, 
 pretext, Lguise), as the answer of the man, blmd from hia 
 birth, to the Phariaees: J. 9. 27. M f ^>i"'/tr26 45 
 aadrrral ryeviaOa^ : In the language of our Lord. M.^ 26. 45. 
 .aeevSe-re to Xot7r6v Kal dvanaveade (Chrysostom, o. '^poa- 
 TdrrovrS, ^ariv, oiU ^yvti^ovUioino^. aXX oi^etStfovTO?) : Mk. 
 7. 9, KaXA, <i^eT«T6 tV iproXi,v rod Oeov, iva t^v japaSo^cv 
 i^&v rvpv-vre. The use of 8.«a.W, L. 15 7, if it refers to the 
 PKariseTs So in J. 13. 38 ; 16. 31. 10. 4. 8 '^Sr-.ope^- 
 iarkKTX ■ 4. 10, with an additional force of antithesis ^^/teK 
 
 U, Be laxvpoi- i^"' -So^o^, W^. Be &r.^^.: 2 0. 10. 6, .. 
 ^To^uo, ^yovre, iKBiK^<rai iraaav -rrapaKoi^v, orav nrX-np^dv vp^y 
 i, {maKo^. The Apostle's most obvious meamng is, that he w 
 ouite ready to chastise every disobedience existing in the Ohurch 
 of Christ, but that he will wait until the Church has become 
 perfectly obedient (Willdnson) : 11. 19, fi^<: 7«P "J'^X^^^^^ 
 r&v d<bp6va,v, <t>p6ptpoL Spre,. Compare Eccl. 11. 9, "Rejoice O 
 young man, in thy youth, and let thy heart cheer thee m tho 
 
 days of thy youth." ^- e • 
 
 Hyperbole {virep^oX^, ai^ai,), the exaggeration of a cir- 
 cumstonce beyond its real magnitude, in order to fix the atten- 
 tion more closely on Hs real import : J. 21. 25: Aj2 5 a.Spe, 
 e{>XaBel<: dirb -rravrb^ idvovs r&v ivro toi/ ovpavov. With this wo 
 may compare Gen. 41. 57, AH countries came into Egypt to 
 Joseph for to buy corn; because that the famine was so sore 
 in all lands: G. 4. 14, 15: II. 11. 12. KaOio, rh aarpajov 
 oipavov TcS irXi'idei, Kal wcrel i/^/^o? ij -rraph to xetXos t,,? 0aXaa- 
 
256 
 
 LITOTES, IIENniADYS, ELLIPSIS. 
 
 ar]<{ fi dvapi0fi7iro<! : L. 19. 40, iav ovtoi ai(oir^cr<oaiv ol "Kldoi 
 KeKpd^ovTM. This last instance illustrates Whately's remark 
 (Rhetoric) : " The highest degree of energy is, produced by 
 such metaphors as attribute life and action to things inani- 
 mate." 
 
 LITOTES, HENDIADYS, ELLIPSIS. 
 
 In contrast with hyperbole is litotes, ixeiaiai<s, oxtenuatio, 
 where less is expressed than is really meant, e. g. The Lord will 
 not hold him guiltless : G. 5. 21, ol to, Totavra "irpdaaomet ^aai- 
 \eiav Qeov ov KXripopofjL'qaovaiv : M. 18. 14: II. 13. 17, aXvari- 
 re\e<s yhp vfiiv tovto, i. q. d(7v/M})opov, avio(f>6Xi<i, disastrous, 
 ruinous. To these we may add the examples of the privative 
 power of oil, p. 139 ; and the use of tk, to denote importance, 
 p. 49. 
 
 Ilendiadys {^v Sih Svoiv) is a mode of expression, where two 
 substantives are connected by a copula, of which one denotes 
 some quality or accessory of the other, as Virg. JEn. ii. 192, 
 " Pateris libamus et auro." There are several expressions 
 analogous to this figure, but it may be doubted whether any 
 clear and decided instance occurs in the New Testament. In 
 A. 14. 13, Tavpov<; xal arififiaTa may mean ravpovi iaTe/jL/iepovi, 
 but this is forced and unnatural compared with the idea of 
 garlands as well as bulls. L. 21. 15, arofia koi ao^lav may 
 mean 'wise utterance,* but is more forcibly translated 'utter- 
 ance, yea, wisdom.' This rendering is confirmed by considering 
 the relative (^) which follows. A. 1. 25, \afielv tov KXrjpov t^? 
 SiaKovia<s raimji leal avroffToX^?, this service of the apostlcship : 
 or taking Kai as exegetical, this service, to wit, the apostlcship. 
 1 Th. 4. 1, TTw? Sei •jrepiiraTetv Kal apea-Keiv QeS, how to please 
 God in your walk : E. 6. 7, eh aiiro tovto wypv7rvovine<i eV Tracrjj 
 irpoaKapTepriaei Kal her/aei,, watching for this very purpose, in 
 ever}' kind of persevering supplication. 
 
 Some of the falsely assumed instances of hendiadys must be 
 rejected as contrary to the principles of sound interpretation : 
 Tit. 2. 13, iTpoirZeypfievoi Ttp) puKapiav iKrriSa km, iin<f>dveiav t^s 
 So^T)? ToO ixe^dXov Qeov, k.t.\., waiting to receive the blessed 
 hope and manifestation of the glory. (See p. 36.) So 1 Th. 
 2. 12, ToO KciKovvTOt vfia<s el<s t^w eavTov fiaariKeiav /cat Bo^av. 
 Here ^aaCKela marks the kingdom of His Son, of wliich the 
 true Christian is a subject while on earth, though the full 
 
 - 
 
 ELLIPSIS. 
 
 257 
 
 privileges and blessings are to be enjoyed hereafter ; 8ofo, His 
 own eternal glory, of which all the true members of the 
 Messianic kingdom shall be partakers. 2 Tim. 4. l, Bia/j,ap- 
 TVpo/iM . . . Kal Ti)v iiTi^dveiav axnov koI ttjv paffiKeiav avTov, 
 I solemnly charge thee, by His manifestation and by His king- 
 dom; the kingdom which is to commence at His iiri^dveia, 
 to continue without end, or modification ; the kingdom of glory, 
 which succeeds the modified eternity of His mediatorial 
 kingdom of grace. 
 
 ELLIPSIS. 
 
 Several instances have already been given of the omission of 
 words and sentences, especially of the use of the Article without 
 the Noun, pp. 38, 39, and of Adjectives without Substantives, 
 p. 57. In addition to these, of which no further examples need 
 be given, there are various concise modes of expression closely 
 allied to the Ellipsis, to which the terms Brachylogy {^payy- 
 \oyia), Zeugma, Aposiopesis, ha, ye been applied. 
 
 Instances of Brachylogy, brevity of expression, may be seen 
 in E. 2. 28 ; 5. 16. 18 ; 13. 7 : IT. 2. 12, <^vvaiKl he SiSdaKeiv 
 ovK eTnTpkirto . . . oW' elvai ev rja-v^ia, where elvat ^ponds on 
 ^ovXofiai, or on irapayyeWco, implied in ovk iiriTpeji^. ^ C. 14. 
 34, ai •yvvaiKe'; vfji&v ev rat? eKK\i]aiaii; airfdToyaav, ov yap eiri- 
 TCTpaTTTai aiiTaii XaXetv, dWa (/lavdaveTioaav) vTroToaaeadai. 
 This form of brachylogy occurs most commonly in the case of 
 an antithesis introduced by an adversative conjunction (Jelf, 
 § 895, h). Compare //. 5. 819 : Soph. (Ed. JR. 236 : HI. 71,— 
 
 Kal /it} fi aTifiov TtjaB' dtrotiTelX'qTe 7^?, 
 dXK' dpj(etrXovTov Kal KaToaTdTijv Soficov, 
 
 where after dXXd we may understand iroieiTe. Plato, Apol., 
 p. 36, 11, dfieX'^cra'} &p ol iroXXol (ivi/JLeXovvrai). Latin, Cic. 
 N. J), i. 7. 17, " tu autem.nolo existimes me adjutorem huic 
 yenisse, sod auditorem ;" where after ' sed' we must understand 
 ' volo existimes me venissc.' 1 Tim. 4. 3, k(oXv6vt(ov yufieiv, 
 dire-xeadai ^prnfidTcav. This is generally considered a Zeugma, 
 but it may bo classed under the head of Brachylogy ; as kcoXvov- 
 Tcov may be resolved into -rrapar/yeXKovTfov p,r), and after f^a/ielv 
 wo may understand dXXa vaparfyeXXovrcov. 
 
 The Zeugma (^e&y/ta) is one of the most important kinds of 
 
258 
 
 PLEONASM, ANTANACLASIS. 
 
 Brachylogy, when a particular verb which is properly applicable 
 only to one part of the sentence, is made generally applicable to 
 the whole context. Pind. 01. i. 88, eKev 8' Olvofidov ^iav irapOe- 
 vov re (Tvvevvov, he conquered the mighty ORnomaus, and obtained 
 the virgin as his bride ; where eo-j^ei; must be supplied for the 
 second clause. L. 1. 64, aveay^dr) Se ro aTo/ju aiirov •7rapaj(pfifia 
 Kai f} yK&aaa ainov {e\v0r)) : A. 4. 28, iroirjaai oaa ri %et/> cov 
 KOL 17 ^ouXij aov irpoapiffe yeveaOai, where irpompiae is appro- 
 priate only to fiovKri : 1 C 3. 2, cya\o vpM,<; iiroriaa ov fip&fia, 
 where eiroTiaa is strictly applicable only to f^oKa. Thus Horn., 
 eSoval re rrlova firjXa olvdv re : Ph. 3. 10, rov •^v&vai avrbv 
 Koi rijv Bwafiiv rrj<i avaardaew^ avrov, /cat rrjv Koivaviav rS)v 
 ■traOfffinrwv avrov. Here yvmvai is strictly applicable only to 
 avTou I before Svva/uv, Koivavlav, we must render yvStvai by 
 * experience.' 
 
 Aposiopesis is a kind of ellipse. Thus we omit the imperative 
 in Soph. Antig. 577, fir) T/st^Sa? eri, and in the corresponding 
 English, 'no more loitering' (Donaldson). Instances of this 
 have already been adduced, L. 19. 42 ; 22. 42 ; 13. 9 : Mk. 
 7. 11 : J. 6. 62: A. 23. 9, where a sentence or part of a sen- 
 tence is suppressed through emotion ; and the suppressed lan- 
 guage is -intimated by the action or tone of the speaker. There 
 is a species of diroa-idovTja-K in R. 7. 25, t/s /j,e pvaerat e/c rov 
 awfiarof rov Oavdrov rovrov ; which is supplied by the outbreak 
 of thankfulness, eirxapiarat rm 0e£ Sia 'Irjaov Xptcrrov rov 
 Kvpiov rifi,Stv. We may compare Spa fir), Ilcv. 19. 10 ; 22. 9, with 
 the forms of dehortation or deprecation frequent in the trage- 
 dians, fii] ravra, firj av ye. 
 
 TLEONASM, ANTANACLASIS. 
 
 Pleonasm (Tr\eovaa-fi6<i), or redundance of phraseology, which 
 is the converse of brachylogy, can hardly be considered as a 
 grammatical irregularitj^ Omissions may produce an ungram- 
 matical structure, but superfluities leave the syntax as it was. 
 Repetitions of synonyms, such as rrdXtv avdii, rd'xa tcrto?,, 
 secondary predications of the main predicate, such as €<f>r) Xe7<Bj/, 
 and repetitions in a negative form, such as ovx rjtciara dWa 
 fidXurra, yvtora KoiiK ayv<ora, firj ri fiaKcarrjpa fiiidov dXKa 
 (rvvro/iov Xer/tav, all belong to this class. (Donaldson.) 
 
 J. 1. 20, Kcii wfidkoyrfae kcli ovk fipvriaaro: E. 5. IS, fii] to; 
 a(To<poi dW* fc>9 ao^ol: R. 8. 22, iraa-a 17 ^vcri? avcrrevdfyi koI 
 
 PARONOMASIA, PKOLEPSIS. 
 
 259 
 
 crvfaSlvei : Mk. 1. 25, irpai evpvxop \lav dvaarat f^fjXOe. But 
 there are very few expressions in which the words said to be 
 pleonastic do not add circumstantiality, vividness, and force to 
 the narrative. From the bad scholarship, and worse theology 
 of an earlier day, some of the most instructive and powerful 
 combinations, like ^a/ot?, eXeo?, eiprjvq, have been pronounced 
 very insipid. 
 
 .Among ordinary pleonasms we may reckon M. 26. 42, rrdXiv 
 eKSevrepov: Mk. 1. 7, eicrjpvaae Xeyav: J. 4. 54, rovro rrdXiv 
 Sevrepov trrffielov. Compare our English expression, * This was 
 repeated a second time.' Sometimes Xa^eiv is redundant : A. 3. 
 3, rjpana iXeTjfioa-vvrjv Xa^eiv. Compare Aristoph. Plut. 240, 
 alr&v Xapeiv ti : Soph. Ag. 825, alr^vofiai Si a ov fiaxpov yepai 
 Xaj(eiv : A. 27. 10, 'AvSpei;, 6e<opSt on fierd v^peav koI ttoWjjs 
 ^'qiiCat, oil fiovov rov (jjoprov Kal rov vXoiov, dXXa /cat twv yjrvj(&p 
 f)(iS)v fieXXei ecxeadai, rov rrXovv. Here on is pleonastic. There 
 is a mixture of the two constructions, deapSt on /leXXei 6 ttXoO? 
 and 0ea>pS) fieXXeiv rov trXovv. This is here occasioned by the 
 words which intervene between on and fieXXew. The redundant 
 use of avroi is noticed in p. 65 ; to which may be added Rev. 
 17. 9, OTTOU ^ yvvij KaBiyrai eir avr&v, 
 
 G. 4. 9, vvv Sk yv6vre<; Qeov, /uiXXov Be yvaxrOivrev viro 6eov, 
 WW? iinarpe^ere irdXiv iirl ra dadevfj Kal rrratyh, aroiye ia, o lg 
 irdXiv dviodev BovXjeveiv BeXere; Here nrdXiv apcoBev isHKot a 
 pleonasm. Cf. 'rursum denuo.' Two ideas are conveyed, — 
 relapse to bondage and recommencement of its principles. The 
 Galatians had been slaves to the aroixela, in the form of 
 heathenism ; now they were on the point of enslaving them- 
 selves again to the ffroiyela, and of commencing them anew in 
 the form of Judaism. (EUicott.) 
 
 The term Antanaclasis {avravuKXaaiM, originally the reflexion 
 of light or sound) is applied to the use of a word in two difibrent 
 senses or modifications of its sense in the same sentence : M. 8. 
 22, a^69 Toil? veKpoixi dd'yp-ai, tous eavr&v veKpovq : 1 C. 3. 17, 
 et rit rov vaov rov Qeov <j>6eipei,, ^depel rovrov 6 ©eo? : Ja. 1. 
 9, 10, Kav^daOco Sk 6 dBeX^bi 6 raireivbi iv rut ir^ei avrov, 6 Bk 
 TrXoi/ffto? iv Tj) raireivcMTei avrov. 
 
 PARONOMASIA, PROLEPSIS. 
 
 irapovo/iaala, a slight change in a name or word, so as to give 
 it a new shade of meaning. " Farva verbi immutatio in Uteris 
 
 82 
 
260 
 
 PARONOirASIA, PKOLErSIR. 
 
 posita," also a play upon words which have a similar sound, hut 
 dillbrcnt significations (annominatio). The comhination of 
 words of similar sound was a favourite usage of Oriental 
 writers, and is peculiarly frequent in the Epistles of St. Paul, 
 partly from accident and partly with the view of imparting 
 genial kindness to the expression, or greater emphasis to the 
 thought: M. 24. 7 : L. 21. ll, Xifiol kuI Xoifiol: II. 5. 8, ifxaOev 
 d(f)' &v eiradev: A. 17. 25, ^iotjv koI ttvo^v: 2 C. 10. 13. 15, rjixeK 
 Bk ovj^t, ets TO, a/ierpa Kavyriao^ieda, aXKa KaTa rb fierpov tov 
 Kav6vo<;, /C.T.X., where there seems to bo a play on afj,erpa and 
 fierpov, similar to the use of ' unlimited,' in the two 'senses of 
 'immoderate' and 'without duo limitations:' 2 0. 1. 13, ou yhp 
 aWa 'ypd(f>o/j,ev vfttv, aXX' rj a avayivmcrKere, ^ kol iiriyivwaKeTe' 
 eXTTtfo) Be on Kal eVl reXoy? eirtr/vmareaOe : R. 1. 29. 31, fiearoin 
 <f)0ovov, ^ovov . . . da-vveTovi affwOerovs : 12. 3, fj.r} vvep^povelv 
 Trap Set <f>poveiv, dXXd ^povelv ets to atO(f>poveiv : Ph. 3. 2, 3, 
 /SXeTrere rrjv KaTarojjLriv. 'H/iei<s ydp icrfiev r) ireptrop.'q : where the 
 Apostle employs the word KaraTOfii] to express more clearly the 
 antithesis to irepirofi'^. The LXX use KaTarefiveiv to express 
 the idolatrous mangling of the flesh, practised by the heathen. 
 Lev. 21. 5: 1 Kings 18. 28. G. 5. 7, 8, rk vfid<i dveKo^e rjj 
 oKrjdeia fir) ireiBeadai ; rj ireiafiovi) ovk ex tov Ka\ovvTo<; vfid<;, 
 Ilero the fiif ireiOeaOai indicates a negative persuasion, disobe- 
 dience to the truth, which is now represented aa a positive 
 persuasion ; rj veia-fjiovq, such a persuasion, or rather such a 
 conviction (see p. 18). There is a 'similar transference of 
 thought from obedience to disobedience in 2 C. 10. 6. Compare 
 2 Th. 3. 2, 3. 
 
 From the term irpoXriyfrK (' occupatio '), an anticipating, and 
 in rcsjicct of time, anachronism, there arises the prolcptic sense, 
 a previous assumption, where what will be the result is attri- 
 buted to the object as already the existing state or condition. 
 Donaldson adduces Pind. 01. v. 4, rdv adv iroKiv av^uv \aoTp6- 
 <\)ov, i. e. wffTe XaoTpo^ov elvai, " increasing thy city so as to 
 make it a nurser of population:" Thucyd. iv. 17, tov<s \6yov<i 
 fiaKporepovv irapa ro €i<o66<s ov firjKuvovfiev, i. e., ware fiaKpore- 
 povt elvai, " we will not spin out our speech so as to make it 
 more prolix, contrary to our usual practice." This idiom is 
 found in Latin, Jui'. i. 83, " paullatimcpie anima calucrunt mollia 
 sttxa," i. e., 'ita ut mollia fierent.' 
 
 Of this prolcptic use we have instances in 1 C. 1. 8, os kuI 
 
 SOLECISMS. 
 
 2G1 
 
 /8e/3at&)o-et vfid^ ea)<i reXow? dveyKXijTov<;, iv Tr} rffiepa tov Kvpiov 
 rjfiSiv "Irjaov Xpicrrov : 1 Th. 3. 13, ek to arrfpi^ai vfiiov to.? 
 KapBiat dfiefiTTTOVi iv dyioiavvy: 2 C. 4. 4, 6 0eo? tov aimvot 
 TovTov ervcfikaxre ra vorffiaTU t&v dirivTmv, so that they continue 
 unbelieving. Compare Soph. Antig. 856, tov B' ifiov trorfiov 
 dBuKpvTov ovBeh (piXwv ffTevd^et, no friend bewails my fate, 
 so that it continues unwept: R. 1. 21, icrKOTiadi} 17 davveTOi 
 avTutv KapBia : 8. 29, irpodpiae avfifiop^ovi Trji eiKOva tov viov 
 avTov. 
 
 The placing of words or sentences out of their usual order is 
 termed trajeclion. Frequently this occurs from a regard to 
 simplicity of expression, from the arrangement of the words 
 being suggested by the nature of the ideas, or from a conven- 
 tional grouping and order. This is termed virep^arov, inver- 
 sion. Some see a transposition of words in 2 T. 2. 6, tov 
 KoiriavTa yecopyov Bel irpSnov t&v Kaptrojv fieraTuifi^dvew, the 
 husbandman must first labour before he bo partaker of the 
 fruits. Others, however, consider that Korrt&vra is emphatic 
 from position. The labouring husbandman has the first right 
 to partake of the fruits: Mk. 11. 13, IBmv avKrjv fiaicpodev exov- 
 aav ipvKXa, ^Xdev el apa evprfaei tX iv ainy' koX eKOibv iir avvrfv, 
 ovBev evpev el fir) (f>uWa' ov yap ^v Katp6<! avKoav. Here the 
 natural position of the last clause would be after eV ain^, — seeing 
 leaves lie expected to find fruit, for the time of gathering figs 
 was not over : Mk. 16. 3, 4, Ti<s diroKvKiaei r)filv tov \i0ov iic tms 
 Ovpai TOV fivrjfieiov ; Kol dvapXki^acrai deatpovaw oti ditoicmv- 
 Xia-rat 6 Xt'^o?' ^v yap fieyai a^oBpa. Here the last clause 
 accounts for their inquiring, ti's diroKvXiaei ; J. 20. 9, ovBeirat 
 yap fjSeiaav Trjv ypa^ijv. This explains the reason of elarjXde 
 
 (8). ' 
 
 SOLECISMS. 
 
 The origin of the term So\oiKi<Tfi6<; is not clearly known, but 
 it is said to have been applied to the corruption of the Attic 
 dialect among the Athenian colonists of SoXoc in Cilicia. The 
 word is generally applied to provincialisms, or incorrectness in 
 the use of language. The occurrence of solecisms has been very 
 freely and unreasonably imputed to the whole of the writers of 
 the New Testament, but the charge cannot be sustained : in the 
 Apocalypse there are indeed many expressions for which we 
 
262 
 
 SOLECISMS. 
 
 cannot account by ordinary rules. But the remark of Dr 
 Wordsworth is very just: "Wherever the reader meets in the 
 Apocalypse ^th a phrase which seems a solecism, let him tako 
 LdfZ"^^ that It contains some great and solemn truths. 
 utnSLn to':h:m5^^"*^ "' *'^ ^'^^^^ ^ '^'^^^ *« -" ^^ 
 
 INDEX I. 
 
 AUTHORS QUOTED, AND PRINCIPAL SUBJECTS. 
 
 Absolute cases, 116 ; genitive, 97. 
 
 Accent, influence of, 24, 25. 122. 136. 
 
 Accusative, remote object, 64 ; cognnte 
 'Signification, 65 ; in apposition, 66 ; 
 subject of infinitive, 66. 
 
 Adjectives derived from verbs, 20; com- 
 parative, 58; Bupcrlutive, 59; nume- 
 rals, 61 ; in rational concord, 53 ; 
 witliout substuutive, 53. 
 
 Adverbs, supanible, forming compounds, 
 24; inseparable, 24; used us preposi- 
 tions, 185. See Particles. 
 
 Alexandrine clement, 14. 
 
 Alford, Dean, 117. 124. 138. 195. 210. 
 215. 217. 
 
 Anucolutliun, 116. 
 
 Angus, Dr., 67. 197. 
 
 Antnnncliisis, 258. 
 
 Antecedent (relative), 55. 
 
 Aorist, 89; epistolary, 90; combined 
 witb i)crfcct, 90 — 92 ; imperfect, 93 ; 
 infinitive, 94; difference between im- 
 perfect and aorist, 89 ; denoting single 
 acts, 90. 92. 
 
 AiMsiopcsis, 258. 
 
 Ap|)osition, 56 ; genitive of, 56 ; accusa- 
 tive, 66. 
 
 Arnold, Dr., 79. 125. 129. 132, 133. 167. 
 170. 188. 234. 
 
 Arrangement (trajection), 261. 
 
 Article, 26; peculiar omissions, 27; 
 Homeric use, 28 ; demonstrative, 30 ; 
 Itossessive, prepositive, 31 ; antici]>a- 
 tive, retrospective, 32 ; rhetorical, 33 ; 
 generic, 34; witli attributives, 35; in 
 rcgimvii, 37 ; with the defining clause, 
 37; witliout the noun, 38; in form- 
 ing the subject, 40; with verbs of 
 existence and calling, 40 ; with various 
 adjectives and pronouns, 42 — 15. 
 
 Attraction, 51. 
 
 Basis of New Testament Greek, 1, 2 ; 
 
 four distinctive elements, 5. 
 Blackwall, 9. 16. 
 Btachylogy, 257. 
 
 Cases, nominative, 50; oblique, 62, 63. 
 
 Cause, dative of, 78; coincidence, 76; 
 circumstance, 77. 
 
 Christian clement in New Testament 
 Greek, 6. 
 
 Cilicisms, 14. 
 
 Classes of substantives, 18 ; of adjectives, 
 19 ; of verbs, 21, 22. 
 
 Comparative, tacit, 58. 
 
 Compounds, paratlietic, 22; synthetic, 
 23; influence of accent, 24, 25. 
 
 Conjunctions, copulative, 131, 132 ; ad- 
 versative, 118. 133, 134 ; disjunctive, 
 143. 
 
 Copula, 26. 
 
 Dative, 76 ; coincidence, 76 ; qualify i^f 
 circumstance, 77 ; proximate ca/R, 
 78; ethical relation. 79; absolute, 
 116; with prepositions, 156 — 160. 
 173—185. 
 
 Demonstratives, 30. 47. 
 
 Deponents, 99. 
 
 Derivatites, 17 — 22. 
 
 Distributives, 61. 
 
 Donaldson, Dr., 23. 38, 39. 63. 66. 72. 
 75. 87. 93. 95. 99. 118. 257. 
 
 Dynamic middle, 98. 
 
 Elements of New Testament Greek, 5 ; 
 
 of tt sentence, 26. 
 Ellicott, Uisliop, 5. 19. 34—36. 72. 77. 
 
 83. 93. 109. 129. 134. 138. 143. 155. 
 
 158. 163. 166. 176. 185. 189. 192. 
 
 194. 197. 205. 216. 219. 236. 258. 
 Mipsis, 237. 
 
264 
 
 AUTHORS QUOTED, AND PKINCIPAL SUBJECTS. 
 
 Kpcxegetical use of copulatives, 123. 
 Expressions for eternity, 13. 
 
 Fiiirhnirn, Dr., 130. 
 
 Foreign words, 15, 16. 
 
 ForniH of conditional propositions, 104 
 
 —106. 
 Fritzsche, 8t. 214. 234. 
 Future, 83 ; for the imperative, 84 ; 
 
 denoting possibility, 84. 
 
 Genitive, primary meaning, 63 ; abla- 
 tive origin, 67 ; fulness, deficiency, 
 68 ; perception, partition, 69 ; rela- 
 tion, 70; idiomatic usages, 72, 73; 
 predominating quality, 73 ; contact, 
 75 ; tentative use, 75 ; absolute, 76. 
 
 Qreek in Palestine compared with Colo- 
 nial English, 2. 4. 
 
 Green, Kev. T. S., 80. 
 
 Hebraisms, spurious, 11 ; genuine, 13. 
 
 Hebrew element, 8. 
 
 Hellenistic, 1. 
 
 Hcndiadys, 256. 
 
 Hcnnann, 10. 87. 101. 107. 131. 
 
 Hutchinson, 151. 
 
 Hyperbole, 254. 
 
 Uy]H>thetical propositions, 104 — 106. 
 
 Imperative mood, use of, 106; in pro- 
 hibitions, 107; omitted, 52. 
 
 luijiorfect, 87 — 89 ; incompleteness, 
 reiHitition, 88 ; witli aorist, 89. 
 
 Indolinito, interrogative pronoun, 48, 
 49. 
 
 Indicative moo<1, 81 ; present, 82; future, 
 83 ; perfect, 85 ; imperfect, Q7 ; oorist, 
 89 ; pluperfect, 94 ; conjoined with 
 the optative, 103. 
 
 Infinitive moral, 108 ; as a verbal noun, 
 109 ; participle, 108. 111. 
 
 Intransitive verbs, 95, 96. 
 
 Jacob, Dr., 63. 108. 118. 
 
 Klotz, 144. 148. 
 
 Latinisms, 15. , 
 
 Litotes, 256. 
 
 Mnsson, Professor, 5. 
 
 Metaphor, 252 ; hunger and thirst, 12. 
 
 Met<«iymy, 293. 
 
 Jl iddle voice, four usages, 97 ; causative, 
 dynamic, 98 ; supplied by the active, 
 99 ; dciMments, 99. 
 
 Moods, 100 ; subjunctive, 101 ; optative, 
 102; indicative conjoined with opta- 
 tive, 103; imperative, 106, 107 j in- 
 finitive, 108—110. 
 
 Multitude, nouns of, 51. 
 
 Negative particles, 138 — 144. 
 
 Neuter plur.il, 50. 
 
 Nouns, classes of, 18, 19; derived from 
 
 verbs, 19. ' 
 
 Numerals, 61. 
 
 Object, immediate, 63 ; remote, 64. 
 Objective genitive, 72, 73. 
 ObUque ca.ses, 62. 
 
 Optative mood, 100. 105 j with the in- 
 dicative, 103. 
 Oral element, 5. 
 Ordinals, peculiar use of, 61. 
 
 I'arathetic compounds, 22. 
 
 Paronomasia, 259. 
 
 Participles, 110—117 ; supplementary 
 idea. 111; indejiendent proiMsitions, 
 112; temporal, causal, 113; condi- 
 tional, final sentence, 114 ; in peri- 
 phrastic senses, 115; absolute, 76. 
 116 ; equivalent to imperatives, 116. 
 
 Particles, 118—148; adversative, 118. 
 133, 134; illative, 121. 144. 148; 
 causal, 133. 137; final, 128—131; 
 co])ulative, 131, 132; temjwral, 136. 
 145; negative, 138 — 143; conditional, 
 125. 
 
 Passive voice, 96, 97 ; deponents, 99. 
 
 Paulo-post future, 95. 
 
 Perfect, 85—87 ; rendered by English 
 present, 85 ; an immediate conse- 
 quence, 86 ; distinguished from aorist, 
 87 ; combined with aorist, 90. 
 
 Pleonasm, 258. 
 
 Pluperfect, 94. 
 
 Predicate, 26. 50. 
 
 Prepositions, general view of, 149 ; geni-, 
 tive, 150—156; dative, 156—160; 
 accusative, 161 — 165 ; genitive and 
 accusative, 165. 173 ; genitive, dative, 
 accusative, 173 — 185. 
 
 Present tense, 82, 83 ; peculiar uses of, 
 81. 
 
 Prohibitions, modes of expressing, 93. 
 
 IVolepsis, 260. 
 
 Pronouns, personal, 45 — 48 ; interroga- 
 tive, 48 ; indefinite, 49. 
 
 Pusey, Dr., 10. 52. 
 
 Quality, genitive of, 73. 
 Quarterly Iloviewer, 29. 76. 80. 100. 
 129. 149. 
 
 Iteciprocity, modes of expressing, 60. 
 Itedundancy, 45. 110. 
 lielativc and antecedent, 55. 
 Ucmotc consequences, 142. 
 Kcversive power of negatives, 139. 
 
 Solecisms, 261. 
 
 Subject, the, formed by the article, 27. 
 40; plural neuter verb shigulur, 50; 
 
 AUTHORS QUOTED, AND PRINCIPAL SUKJECTS. 
 
 2C5 
 
 *; 
 
 in what cases omitted, 52 ; omission 
 of simple copula with prciUcatc, 52; 
 before the infinitive, 66. 
 
 Subjective genitive, 72. , . i 
 
 Substantives, classes of, 17 ; derived 
 from adjectives, 18. 
 
 Superlatives, unusual forms, 59; He- 
 braistic, 13. 
 
 Synecdoche, 253. 
 
 Tenses, 80, 81; present, 82; imperfect, 
 87; future, 83; aorist, 89; perfect 
 and aorist, 90; perfect, 85; pluper- 
 fect, 94 J paulo-post future, 96 ; priJi- 
 ciiMil used for subordinate, 83; pre- 
 sent for peri'cct, 83. 
 
 Traiection, transposition, 261. 
 
 Trench, Archbishop, 187. 191. 223. 231. 
 235. 
 
 Valcknor, 5. 38. 44. 171. 232. 
 
 Vauchan, Dr. (on the Romans), 28. 42. 
 83. 89. 92. 127. 155. 161. 189. 193. 
 200. 215. 219. 221. 224. 230. 234. 
 242, 243. 
 
 Verb, tenses of, 81 ; voices of, 95 ; com- 
 pounded, 151. 153. 156. 161. 16t. 
 168. 170. 173. 177. 179. 181, 182. 
 185. 
 
 Verbal nouns, 17. 20. 
 
 Voices, 95 ; passive, 96 ; middle, 97. 
 
 Winer, 33. 47. 128. 156. 179. 
 
 Wordsworth, Dr., 27. 33. 73. 87. 91. 
 155. 213. 219. 221, 222, 223. 229. 
 236. 
 
 Wratislaw, Rev. A. H. (Notes and Dis- 
 sertations), 20. 65. 75. 115. 125. 242, 
 243. 246. 
 
 Zeugma, 257- 
 
INDEX II. 
 
 GREEK WORDS EXPLAINIH) AND ILLUSTRATED. 
 
 iyaeis, 186. 
 
 iyaeSTTis, iyoBuiriin], 187. 
 
 iyawda, iydmi, 187. 
 
 £7101, ayi/is, 188. 
 
 ayviCui, 188. 
 
 ieyopiiu, 188. 
 
 fi^oj, 188. 
 
 iypifi/iaros, 215. 
 
 iyptdrris, 208. 
 
 i^caivCa, iyaiW^o/tai, 211. 
 
 iSixItt, 194. 
 
 dSii/ci/iot, 189. 
 
 alSiis, iyaiSiltt, 189. 
 
 a^pttriSi 190. 
 
 aiVxpa\o7(a, alffxpinis, 190, 191. 
 
 tti<rxiinif 189. 
 
 aiV^w, 190. 
 
 oiTi'a, 190 
 
 aiTf({ojuai, 207* 
 
 aii^K, 191. 
 
 hxipatot, 192. 
 
 &\aCii>i>, 192. 
 
 i.\el(pa, 210. 
 
 iKvOiyis, oKneiis, 192. 
 
 A\A.<i, 118—120. 
 
 li\\riyop4u, 22G. 
 
 iAAo7€i/<i, 193. 
 
 &AAaf, 192. 
 
 «AAws, 120. 
 
 akwv, 255. 
 
 fi/ia, 21.. 121. 
 
 a/iaprla, 193. 
 
 &fiaxos, 194. 
 
 i^(>>irT0t, 192. 
 
 &.p.TrtKovpy6si 200. 
 
 ifiufiOSf StfittiixryroSf 192. 
 
 &•><{, 1G4. 
 
 A*'ci7ifij, 12. 
 
 avdOffia, i^ydOjifla, IM. 
 
 dj/fdrautris, 194. 
 
 Ai^atrrpo^^, 195. 
 
 avcyicXiiTos, 192. 
 
 ifcXc^^iui', 196. 
 &vfais, 194. 
 i.v6puvoKT6vas, 234. 
 ^irifilTos, 196. 
 tivoia, 196. 
 ii'iiiriat, 194. 
 ^"oxht 195. 
 i^T/, 150, 151. 
 ixTiAa/i/3<ii'cir0ai, 195. 
 livimiKpiros, 195. 
 iLyw6TaKTOs, &y0/jios, 194. 
 AiraTiiai, 228. 
 iirciS^;, &irci6cia, 195. 
 airAoSi, a7rA((Ti)t, 195. 
 an6, 152, 153. 
 iLiroSTifi4uf 196. 
 diroAAu^cfOf, 35. 
 AiroAi^Tpaxrif, 188. 
 inrapovp,at, 227. 
 iirairiuiriKris, 258. 
 AirutTToAos, 204. 
 HirTOiiai, 213. 
 &pa, 121, 122. 
 apvdCtiv, 226. 
 i/lfiafiiiy, 196. 
 iprios, 225. 
 &pXofiat, 111. 
 i<rf0iis, iaeBeia, 193. 
 iur(\yeia, 196. 
 ia-Ofveia, 221. 
 KirinAoi, 192. 
 Jia-irafSut, iaropyof, 196. 
 
 Ao'VI'eTOf, &(7l/»'ffcT0S, 196. 
 
 dfrwrfa, 196. 
 
 auSi{Si)s, 196. 
 
 ai/TOKaToiKptTos, 219. 
 
 ouTifi, 4'!', 45. 05. 
 
 i^tirij, 194. 
 
 &(peapTos, i^Oapala, 196. 212. 
 
 i^poavvr), &(j>puii, 196. 
 
 fiiirru, PawTur/xis, 197. 
 Pipffapoi, 193. 
 
 GKEEK WORDS EXPLAINED AND ILLUSTRATED. 
 
 267 
 
 /3i£f>os, 197. 
 
 ^ao-avfCw. 189. 
 
 fiaaiKfla, 256. • 
 
 PefiaiixTis, 229. 
 
 Pi0TI\os, 188. 194. 
 
 /3ej3i)A(ia>, 255. 
 
 J9fat, 212. 
 
 PKav^niniu, fi\<ur^nia, 198. 
 
 flA^irw, 22i. ; 
 
 fioneuf, 195. 
 
 jSot/Ao/iai, 197. 
 
 Ppaxu^oyla, 257. 
 
 /3pc4>o;, 223. 
 
 jSu^ili, 8. 215. 231. • 
 
 Yd/), 123. 
 7., 122. 
 
 ^cfcd, ytvot, 199. 
 ytapy6s, 200. 
 yiyviiMtKU, 32. 201. 
 ,yiviaeat, 199. 
 yvJttiTi, 200. ' 
 ynuttts, 200. 
 yoyyvapiis, 202, 
 
 S^qtrit, 230. 
 
 S«A(a, 202. 
 
 ScTva, 49. 
 
 Sci(riSai/ioi>(a, 202. * 
 
 SeffirdTiit, 202. 
 
 :^X<>M<><i 226. 
 
 54, S^irau, 124. 
 
 Ji(£, 165—168. 
 
 SidPo\os, 203. 
 
 SiaSi)/ia, 233. 
 
 Sia/cocfo, SufKorot, 203. 231. 
 
 5iaAc70/iai, 204. 
 
 Sia/iapTvpea6at, 204. 
 
 Sitd'oia, 217. 
 
 tiSttcrKoAoi, 203. • 
 
 Sififia'Kcii, SfSaaKaXfa, 201. 
 
 SiSax^, 201'. 
 
 8f«a.oj, 1S6, 187. 
 
 SiKCu6u, StKouoffiviif 205. 
 
 8fKafci>/ia, 8iicafw<rts, 205. 
 
 SifcaiTT^s, 221. 
 
 tiuyiUs, 214. 
 
 5oKl/ic(^Ctf, 189. 
 
 S(iAoi, 228. 
 5ii{a, ioid^u, 205. 
 S^ca^ai, 206. 
 Swa^it, 206. 231. 
 Supf, 215. 
 
 ^ai/, ({, 125. 
 'E/^a7ot, 206. ♦ 
 ?77i;oj, 207. 
 tyKOKtiv, 209. 
 iyKakiai, WfJ. 
 tynXijlM, 190. 
 
 lyKiirrftv, 230. 
 
 iyKpdraa, 207. 
 
 Mcoj, 199. 
 
 «}, with 06, 139. 
 
 cfSuAai', ciKii>i<, 208. 
 
 fi\iKptyiis, 195. 
 
 crircp, 125. 
 
 cifi^i^, 210. 235. 
 
 elpaffta, 254. 
 
 «<i, 161—164. 
 
 eU for ^;>, 161. 
 
 els, M, 176. 
 
 CIS, irpiic, Kurd, 169. 
 
 tli, 60. 
 
 ^K, 153—156. 
 
 iKfTyos, 47. 
 
 iKKaxelv, iKKitadai, 209. 
 
 iKK\7i<rla, 20& v 
 
 iKITTafflS, 209. 
 
 ^Aaiof, 209. 
 
 rAe7{ii, ?A€7X»Ii 190. 209. 
 
 Me'7X<«, 207. 
 
 rAf at, 210. 
 
 'E\\vyl(tiy, 'EAAijvKTT^i, 1. 207. 
 
 i\.iri(eiy ty, (U, M, 177. 
 
 iK-rls, 220. 228. 
 
 iK, 156—160. 
 
 iy for c<t, 162. 
 
 iv Si^ Suaii', 255. 
 
 rvSci{is, 210. 
 
 iyeKa. 185. 
 
 iyipytM, 206. 
 
 iyBi/iriais, Syyota, 210. 
 
 ^i^rtu^ii, 230. 
 
 iyroKii, 210. 
 
 ^JjjTijT^t, 231. 
 
 4ov<r(a, 206. 
 
 iirdyu, 61. 
 
 ^irc(, cV<iS4 126. 
 
 ^irf, 173—177. 
 
 Myyuats, 200. 
 
 imeiKits, 186. 194. 208. • 
 
 iirlirraiim, 201. « 
 
 iirurTiiiiri, 211. 
 
 iiriTayii, 200. 
 
 iirhpoitos, 203. 212. 
 
 ^n-i^circia, 36. 
 
 iirtxopriyla, 7. 71. 
 
 j/i/u, 187. 
 
 ipyd(oiiai, ipyaata, 211. 
 
 ipfjLijyflaf 224. 
 
 ^WT<£u, 190. 
 
 CTCpOS, 192. 
 
 cvd77eA(^a/(ai, 204. 
 
 cu7ci'^$, 211. 
 
 ci^0i|Si 196. 
 
 eihdkfia, fvKafiiis, 202. « 
 
 CvA077)Tlit, 211. 
 
 cuA07(a, 206. 
 cvrx^M'"'! 211. • 
 cvTpaircA(a, 191. 
 fx", 115. 
 
268 GREEK WORDS EXPLAINED AND ILLUSTRATED. 
 
 (fvyiia, 257. Kfipvyfia, 217. 
 
 C^Xos, 211. Ktipiairu, K-fipv^, 204. 
 
 M, 212. KAalciK, 218. 
 
 jtXt'irrijs, 218. 
 
 K\iy^, 218. 
 
 KotfiOffiai, 12. 
 
 Koiv6ofuii, 254. 
 
 Koifeovfa, 235. 
 
 Ki\aais, 218. 
 
 KdTTOS, 219. 
 
 K^ITTO/tai, KOirCTlff^ 218. 
 
 K6<rnos. 191. 192. 
 KiJ^ivos, 219. 
 KpiTos, 206. 
 upavyl), 199. 
 KpiT^t, 221. 
 Kpinrra, 219. 
 KTlffis, 253. 
 Kiipiof, 203. 
 
 «. ^ ^iiy, 127. 
 
 ^yc/iiiii', 212. 
 
 «Sri, 127. 
 
 riaixios, 4<rvx<iC«<'i 211. 213. 
 
 Banpfoiiai, ed/ifios, 209. 
 
 eii/aros, 212. 
 ^ eene\,os, 209. 
 
 e<i<<Ti)t, 213. 
 
 ««'a.m, 197. 
 
 ec/i^Xia$, 209. 
 
 Ococrc/S^s, Scoir^jScia, 202. 
 
 $€pdvuVf 203. 
 
 dfoipia, 213. 224. 
 
 0iyyav(>i, 213. 
 
 fl\T^ii, 214. 
 
 0n)TiJ;, 213. 
 
 Bpiaos, Sipaos, 213. 
 
 BpairvTjit, 202. 
 
 flp^yo;, 218. 
 » BpilCTKos, Bpi)<rKfla, 202. 
 
 0u^<(s, 213. 
 
 0vpc<ii', 214. ^ 
 
 0uir(a, 214. 
 ^ dufTiatrriipiov, 215. 
 
 • ;S(7i', 225. 
 
 ^ lSl(iiT1)S, 215. 
 
 hparda, Upaairri, 215. 
 {(pilK, 215. 
 'lfpovtra\-iin, 40. 
 IXao-KO/iai, 210. 
 tXair/iifs, 188. 
 iKaariipiov, 19. 215. 
 luiTiov, 215. 
 ^ *lov5a7or, *l<rpai)X(Ti)S, 207. 
 Xva, 128—131. 
 iVx^i, 200. 
 
 Ka9iii, 147. 
 Kol, 131—133. 
 KMv6t, 223. 
 KttipSs, 215. 
 KOHia, 194. 
 KaKirhBr,!, 194. 196. 
 KoXftr. 187. 
 xaXuiTTW, 219. 
 Kapilof 217. 
 KaT<£, 168—171. 
 Kara^iffiJfrKco, 216. 
 KaTcffu^ifi 74. 
 
 KOTOpTlfw, 216. 
 KaraTO/i^, 228. 259. 
 « KaTT|x«'«. 20 1. 
 KarixPI"''*! 253. 
 K«lp(i>'> 217. 
 KcVos, 217. 
 Kqro'os, 234. 
 
 GREEK WORDS EXPLAINED AND ILLUSTRATED. 
 
 269 
 
 XoAid, \iyos, 220. 
 Aa/tir((t, \ixyos, 221. 
 Xaiti, 199. 
 Karpeieiy, 220. 
 AciTavp7c7v, 220. * 
 XpffT^i, 218. 
 \otBop4ut 198. 
 Aouoi, 221. 
 Kirpov, KvTp6iD, 188. 
 
 fiaxiptos, iiaKapurit6s, 210. 
 
 /ioXoxfa, 221. 
 
 ^aWa, 209. 
 
 UttvriitaBai, 231. 
 
 fidxcupUf 232. 
 
 ixctuftrif. 255. 
 
 M^», 133. 
 
 ffLfptar4is, 221. 
 
 pLtahns, 207. 
 
 /itra, 177—179. 
 
 fieTa^4\onatj fierdvotUf 221. 
 
 /jLtravvfila, 253. 
 
 M<, 114. 138—141. 
 
 /ii)S^, /t^Tc. 148. 
 
 firiSets, 60. 
 
 /i^iroTc, 141. 
 
 fiitttviD, lioXiva, 222. 
 
 Hopipii, liiptpaats, 222. 
 
 Iivpov, 209. 
 
 fivar^ipiov, fAitTTTiSt 219. 
 
 Iiopo\oyla, 191. 
 
 yaf, 135. 
 
 radi, 215. • 
 
 i/CKf>((;, 213. 
 
 v^ot, 222. 
 
 v^irios, 223. • 
 
 v1tt<ii', 221. 
 
 vocii', vaus, 200. 223. 
 
 fint, 221. 
 
 yovBtrio), vovBeirla, 224. 
 
 {^Xof, 12. 
 {ufxiy, 217. 
 
 8St, oStoi, 47, 48. 
 oSun), ^SvCbi/iai, 227. 
 ol5o, 201. _ 
 
 OIKCTI)!, OlKOI'd/iOJ, 203. 
 
 OIK (a, oTkoj, 227.. 
 
 olKTipfliSt 210. 
 
 i\iK\Vpos, 4\oTe\'4si 225. 
 
 6ftolu/ia, 222. 
 
 Zfiwst ifi&St 136. 
 
 IJva^a, 206. 
 
 UirKre*!-, 149. 185. 
 
 Sirov, 13. 
 
 SiTTO/iai, 213. 
 
 Sirat, 128—131. 136. 
 
 ipdu, 224. 
 
 ip7«, 214. 
 
 ipyiXirris, 208. 
 
 is, KcTTit, 44, 45. 
 
 iliriai, 187. 
 
 ire, irav, 136. 
 
 «T., 137. 
 
 ob, 138, 139. 141, 142. 
 
 oiS4, odrt, 143. 
 
 ou5((s, 60. 
 
 OVK^TI, OUKoDi', 143. 
 
 olv, 144. 
 
 oStoi, 47, 48. 65. 
 
 ovx ^Ti, 138. 
 
 iraiSa7<DY<li, 226. • 
 
 irniScfa, iroiStiw, 224. 
 
 ■xavoupyla, 190. 
 
 »op(£, 179—181. 
 
 TcapdPatris, 225. 
 
 ■KctpafioKt), ■wapoiiidt, 226. 
 
 irapiiKXi)irii, 204. 
 
 TapaKO^, irop(£irT«/io, 193. 225. 
 
 itapa\aiiPdva, 226. 
 
 irapa/uu6ia, 204. 
 
 vdptan, 194. 
 
 Tapofo/iair(a, 259. 
 
 irapop7lC"r 214. 
 
 ira^^i)<rla, 226. 
 
 irat, 42, 43. 
 
 ndax". 226. 
 
 ■iraTptd, 227. 
 
 Tcteoftai, 227. 
 
 vcio-fioi'^, 18. 259. 
 
 ir/vi)t, ■TTiBX'i»> 227. 
 
 ir(p(, 170. 172. 
 
 ir«pKp7iif«i>'*«i, 211. 
 
 ircpiirou'a/io'i ir«P"">'1<''"i 1°"- 
 
 ir<piTO/x^, 228. 
 
 5rjicpIo,-214. 
 
 iriffTiueii', ^f, *'«. ^''i 1' '• 
 ifffTit, 228. 
 ■K\avda, 228. 
 irAcuraiTftilt, 257. 
 nKtovfiia, 228. 
 
 irX^y, 145. 
 it\ripo<pop4u, 229. 
 irXiipai/ia, 18. 
 vA>)ir/iai/4, 18. 
 tAoDtos, 206. 
 irXvvcii', 221. 
 irycv^a, 236. 
 rl/tvpiaTllcd, 57. 
 iroieTf, irpci<r<r«ii', 230. 
 Trohtrfv/ia, 195. % 
 iroKT)pta, 194. 
 voptitofxcUf 229. 
 irp^ot, vpifiTiis, 207, 208. 
 Tpauiraetia, 205. 207. 
 uply, 145, 146. 
 
 jrpd, 160, 151. 
 
 irpiJSa/ia, 196. 
 
 Tp<j«c<ris, 198. 
 
 irpoKdiTTCii', 230. 
 
 xpiiXinl'ii, 260. 
 
 Tpdi, 182-185. 
 
 vpoaayuyfi, 226. 
 
 upoaKwia, 252. 
 
 vpoff^opd, 214. 
 
 irpo<(>DTeIo, 200. 224. 
 
 irpo^ilTeiitK', irpo0^T))j, 8. 231. 
 
 irpcvrdroKos, 23. 
 
 irr<(7)<rii, 202. 
 
 ^tfiiodprpiptai, ^iftiovpyia, 190. * 
 pavTUTftds, 197. 
 ^^/la, 232. 
 ^o^ifiafa, 232. 
 ^utIi, 232. 
 
 trdpKivos, aapKinSs, 232. 
 (raTavSi, 203. 
 ffiiiif'iov, 234. r 
 (rKoi'5<iAii9p<»i', 8. 
 aKid, 208. 
 (ro\oiKiait6s, 261. 
 ao^fa, 201. 
 (ro<}>(Cw, 204. 
 0'7raTaAG£&), 233. 
 (TTreiSu, <nrovSd(a, 233. 
 (TiriXos, 232. 
 irirupfs, 219. 
 
 ff'TCVOXA'pft^, 214. 
 
 (TT^^ayos, 233. 
 
 ffToiX"*", 191 • 
 iru77ii'fi&(rK6i, 216. 
 aiv, 160. 
 (ruvaYUY^, 208. • 
 <rwtlSi,ais, 217. 223. • 
 ffuy^KSox^f 253. 
 aiyfffis, 217. 
 auviivai, 200. 
 (T^payli, 196. 
 irxi)>">, 222. 
 
 O'x'o'f"*' ^^• 
 au(6ii,fvoi, 35. 
 
270 
 
 GREEK WORDS EXPLAINED AND ILLUSTRATED. 
 
 irana, 208. 236. 
 au^poaini, 190. 
 
 "riiirtit'oippoirivri, 208. 
 
 rapda-aa, 227. 
 
 Tf, 131—133. 
 
 TfK/i^pioy, 233. 
 
 t4\(ios, TtKfiiu, r4\os. 216. 234. 
 
 Tcpas, 233. 
 
 rtfiii, 206. 
 
 Tifiapla, 218. 
 
 Th, 48, 49. 65. 
 
 to/, rofpuK, 146. 
 
 Tpufif v, 233. 
 
 Tusrot, 234. 
 
 iBpinTis, 102. 
 B/tvor, 235. 
 iTrdyu, 230. 
 
 • ""■""PX". 199. 
 
 vitc/koi, 227. 
 
 iirfp, 171, 172. 
 
 inrtpParSv, 260. 
 
 inttpBoK-li, 254. 
 
 inrfpti^ai/ot, 192. 
 . vTrnpirns, 203. 
 *»<(, 181. 
 i»ir(J, irap({, 179. 
 iiiro/ioi'^, 208. 220. 228. 
 viroriiracris, 208. 234. 
 
 I ^oBAoi, 234. 
 ^SiJfor, 212. 
 (piKarBpuiria, 187. • 
 ^iKipyvpos, 229. 
 ^lAf'w, 187. 
 0rf;3oi, 202. 
 ^ords, 234. 
 fufpoi, 234. 
 ipoprtov, 197. 
 i>piiriiins, 201. 
 ^liirir, 211. 
 ^OMTT'lip, (puir^ipot, (puri(a, 221. 
 
 XVnwriip, 208. 
 
 X<ip"', 185. 
 
 Xfi/Mi. X''p'ff/»o, 195. 231. 
 
 X'TcSi/, 215. 
 
 XPV<rT6s, xt»l<rriTris, 186. 
 
 X/"'<a, 210. 
 
 X/"*"""*, 215. 
 
 ^a^liis, 235. 
 V'cvSof, 192. 
 ^ri\a(j>du, 213. « 
 ^"X<. ^MX""**. 236. 
 
 <fH. 236. 
 uf, 146. 
 &<rxfp, US. 
 Start, 148. 
 
 INDEX III. 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FROM THE NEW TESTAMENT. 
 
 MATTHEW. 
 
 HAP. VER. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 I. 6 . 
 
 . . . 
 
 33 
 
 16 . 
 
 • 
 
 154 
 
 li . 
 
 - .7« 
 
 173 
 
 18 . 
 
 
 110 
 
 19 . 
 
 ! Il4 
 
 197 
 
 20 . 
 
 . 154 
 
 170 
 
 22 . 
 
 . 165 
 
 181 
 
 23 . 
 
 33.52 
 
 2(16 
 
 24 . 
 
 • ■ ■ 
 
 32 
 
 25 . 
 
 . . . 
 
 105 
 
 n. I . 
 
 . 152. 
 
 ICO 
 
 2 . 
 
 * 
 
 109 
 
 4 . 
 
 > ■ • 
 
 179 
 
 8 . 
 
 . . . 
 
 170 
 
 10 . 
 
 . 11.G4, 65 
 
 11'. 
 
 . .32. 
 
 161 
 
 12 . 
 
 r • • 
 
 183 
 
 13 . 
 
 . 84. 
 
 109 
 
 20 . 
 
 . 
 
 52 
 
 22 . 
 
 151. 
 
 173 
 
 23 . 
 
 • • 
 
 161 
 
 III. 1 .- . 
 
 .56. 
 
 204 
 
 2 . 
 
 
 37 
 
 5 . 
 
 [ ". 
 
 "I 
 254 
 
 7 . 
 
 . 70. 254 
 
 » . 
 
 , , 
 
 92 
 
 9 . 
 
 , 
 
 154 
 
 10 . 4 
 
 3. 127. 
 
 1)13 
 
 11 . . 
 
 , 
 
 161 
 
 12 . . 
 
 , , 
 
 255 
 
 14 . . 
 
 , , 
 
 »8 
 
 16 . 7 
 
 9. 148. 
 
 152 
 
 17. . 
 
 • • 
 
 91 
 
 IV. 3 . . 
 
 . 34 
 
 .41 
 
 4 . . 
 
 , , 
 
 174 
 
 6 . . 
 
 ,33. 
 
 176 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 CHAP 
 
 • TER. 
 
 PAGP. 
 
 6 . . 
 
 . . 28 
 
 VIII 
 
 I . 
 
 45.78. 116 
 
 21 . . 
 
 . 38.42 
 
 
 5 . 
 
 . . . 45. 
 
 23 . . 
 
 . 43.46 
 
 
 6 . 
 
 8,9 
 
 . . . 156 
 
 . . . 182 
 
 V. 6 . . 
 
 . . 12 
 
 
 12 . 
 
 . . . 33 
 
 11 . . 
 
 . . 52 
 
 
 19 . 
 
 . . . 60 
 
 12 . . 
 
 . . ISO 
 
 
 22 ; 
 
 . . .259 
 
 15 . . 
 
 . . 33 
 
 
 28 . 
 
 . . . 153 
 
 17 . . 
 
 . . 119 
 
 
 30 . 
 
 . . . 68 
 
 19 . . 
 
 . . 105 
 
 
 32 . 
 
 . 106. 168 
 
 20 . . 
 
 . . 59 
 
 
 
 
 21 . . 
 
 22 . . 
 
 . 79.84 
 . 43.78 
 
 IX 
 
 2 . 
 
 . . . 173 
 
 24 . . 
 
 . .185 
 
 
 4 . 
 
 . . . 49 
 
 25 . . 
 
 . . 32 
 
 
 5 . 
 
 . . . 124 
 
 28 . 46 
 38 . . 
 
 75. 225 
 . 151 
 
 
 10 . 
 
 11 . 
 
 . . 78 
 . . 28 
 
 39 . . 
 
 . 42 
 
 
 13 . 
 
 . . 27 
 
 40 . 
 
 • 78 
 
 
 15 . 
 
 . . 178 
 
 42 . . 
 
 . 98 
 
 
 18 . 
 
 119. 176 
 
 44 . . 
 
 . 172 
 
 
 27 . 
 
 . . 63 
 
 45 . . 
 
 27.96 
 
 
 34 . 
 
 . . 157 
 
 48 . 84. 
 
 106. 225 
 
 
 36 . 
 
 37 . 
 
 . . 148 
 . . 31 
 
 VI. 1 . . 180. 185 
 
 
 
 
 5 . . 
 
 84. 106 
 
 X. 
 
 1 . 
 
 . . 72 
 
 6 . . . 
 
 . 45 
 
 
 2 . . 
 
 . . 48 
 
 7 . . 
 
 . 158 
 
 
 4 . 
 
 . . 113 
 
 11 . . . 
 
 . 254 
 
 
 5 . . 
 
 . . 72 
 
 13 . . . 
 
 . 70 
 
 
 8 . . 
 
 . . 65 
 
 16 . . 1 
 
 12. 128 
 
 
 16 .166.201.254 
 
 19 . . . 
 
 . 107 
 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . . 53 
 
 22 . . . 
 
 . 31 
 
 
 21 . . 
 
 .27.176 
 
 25 . 59. 102. 2:<6 | 
 
 
 23 . . 
 
 . . 65 
 
 31 . . . 
 
 . 102 
 
 
 24 . . 
 
 . . 172 
 
 34 . . . 
 
 . 39 
 
 
 27 . . 
 
 28 . . 
 
 . . 173 
 . . 236 
 
 VII. 13.14. . 
 
 . 31 
 
 
 29 . 
 
 SO. 71. 155 
 
 15 . . . 
 
 . 2:t8 
 
 
 31 . . 
 
 . 46.71 
 
 22 . . . 
 
 . 42 
 
 
 34 . . 
 
 . . 254 
 
 24 . . . 
 
 78.116 
 
 
 35 . . 
 
 . . 168 
 
 29 . . . 
 
 . 116 
 
 
 41 . . 
 
 161. 206 
 
272 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FKOM THE NEW TESTAMENT. 
 
 XIII. 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 XI. 1 . 
 
 3 . 
 
 )l . 
 
 11 . 
 
 25 . 
 
 27 . 
 29 . 
 
 XII. 1 . 
 6 . 
 
 12 . 
 14 . 
 21 . 
 
 25 . 
 
 26 . 
 
 27 . 
 
 28 . 
 
 29 . 
 
 30 . 
 35 . 
 3G . 
 37 . 
 41 . 
 
 43 . 
 46 . 
 50 . 
 
 1 . 
 
 2 . 
 
 3 . 
 11 . 
 
 14 . 
 
 15 . 
 
 16 . 
 21 . 
 23 . 
 26 . 
 
 29 . 
 
 30 . 
 
 31 . 
 
 34 . 
 
 35 . 
 3U . 
 39 . 
 
 44 . 
 
 XIV. 1 . 
 
 2 . 
 8 . 
 
 19 . 
 
 26 . 
 
 XV. 1 . 
 
 3 . 
 
 4 . 
 16 . 
 
 27 . 
 29 . 
 
 32 . 
 37 . 
 
 XVI. 13 . 
 
 30. 
 
 78 
 
 PAGE 
 . 11 
 
 33. 192 
 
 109. 119 
 
 . 58 
 
 . 219 
 
 . 198 
 
 77. 2U7 
 
 . 169 
 . 255 
 . 109 
 . 254 
 . 51 
 . 60 
 . 203 
 . 104 
 . 121 
 . 34 
 . 178 
 . 34 
 
 .16. 191 
 . 205 
 . 162 
 . 238 
 
 95. 225 
 . 54 
 
 . 180 
 . 176 
 . 34 
 12. 219 
 . 11 
 . 217 
 . 65 
 . 214 
 30. 124 
 .10. 164 
 . 121 
 . 185 
 . 56 
 . 88 
 . 219 
 . 31 
 . 41 
 . 42 
 
 . 56 
 . 156 
 . 174 
 . 176 
 . 153 
 
 . 152 
 . 2Mi 
 . 123 
 . 65 
 - 23K 
 . 180 
 49. 1 16 
 . 70 
 
 . 66 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 16 . 
 
 17 . 
 
 19 . 
 
 21 . 
 23 . 
 
 26 . 
 
 27 . 
 
 XVII. I . 
 
 4 . 
 
 7 . 
 12 . 
 17 . 
 
 20 . 
 
 22 . 
 25 . 
 27 . 
 
 XVIII. 1 . 
 6 . 
 
 8 . 
 
 12 . 
 
 13 . 
 
 14 . 
 
 15 . 
 17 . 
 19 . 
 
 22 . 
 
 23 . 
 32 . 
 
 XIX. 
 
 XX. 
 
 4 
 
 9 
 10 
 13 
 16 
 17 
 20 
 21 
 22 
 26 
 28 
 
 1 
 
 2 . 
 
 3 , 
 
 7 . 
 
 9 . 
 12 . 
 16 . 
 
 21 . 
 
 22 , 
 
 23 , 
 
 24 . 
 28 . 
 31 . 
 
 XXI. 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 PAGE 
 . 41 
 
 . 232 
 . 254 
 . 76 
 . 203 
 43.71 
 . 169 
 
 . 179 
 
 . 102 
 
 . 90 
 
 . 181 
 
 . 208 
 
 . 105 
 
 . 1S6 
 
 . 112 
 
 . 151 
 
 68. 121 
 . 177 
 . 127 
 . 176 
 . 174 
 . 256 
 . 161 
 
 33. 148 
 . 54 
 . 254 
 . 17« 
 . 126 
 
 . 152 
 . 175 
 . 109 
 . 53 
 . 60 
 . 29 
 . 154 
 - 225 
 
 . lis 
 
 . IHO 
 . 176 
 
 . 98 
 . 33 
 
 . 171 
 . 98 
 . 144 
 . 7« 
 . 32 
 . 154 
 . 12 
 
 19. 2.m 
 
 . 170 
 
 151. 189 
 238 
 
 185 
 51 
 36 
 42 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 11 . . 
 
 . 39. 162 
 
 12 . . 
 
 . 33. 36 
 
 13 . . 
 
 . . 218 
 
 21 . . 
 
 . . 40 
 
 24 . . 
 
 . . 64 
 
 31 . . 
 
 . . 49 
 
 32 . . 
 
 . . 10!l 
 
 34 . . 
 
 . . 1«3 
 
 37 . . 
 
 . . 63 
 
 40 . . 
 
 . . 101 
 
 42 . 13 
 
 54. 179 
 
 46 . . 
 
 . . 126 
 
 XXII. 7 . . 
 
 . . 234 
 
 10 . . 
 
 . . 6/i 
 
 11 . . 
 
 . . 73 
 
 16 . . 
 
 . 178 
 
 25 . . 
 
 . 180 
 
 29 . . 
 
 . 114 
 
 40 . . 
 
 . 47 
 
 XXIII. 3 . . 
 
 . 169 
 
 6 . . 
 
 . 238 
 
 28 . . 
 
 . 68 
 
 31 . . 
 
 . 1411 
 
 32 . . 
 
 . 106 
 
 33 . . 
 
 102. 254 
 
 35 . . 
 
 . 176 
 
 37 . . 
 
 . 65 
 
 XXIV. 7 . . 
 
 123. 260 
 
 15 . . 
 
 . 73 
 
 21 . . 
 
 . 40 
 
 32 - . 
 
 . 238 
 
 33 . . 
 
 . 174 
 
 43 . . 
 
 . 106 
 
 48 . . 
 
 . 42 
 
 XXV. 2 . . 
 
 . 201 
 
 6 . . 
 
 . 69 
 
 8 . . 
 
 . 155 
 
 16 . . 
 
 . 169 
 
 20 . . 
 
 . 174 
 
 21 . . 
 
 . 176 
 
 27 . . 
 
 . 160 
 
 34 . . 
 
 . 191 
 
 46 . . 
 
 . 40 
 
 XXVI. 2 . . . 
 
 . 82 
 
 6 . . . 
 
 . 27 
 
 9 . . 
 
 71.89 
 
 10 . . 
 
 . 161 
 
 18 . . . 
 
 49. 183 
 
 23. 26 . 
 
 . 92 
 
 27 . . 
 
 . 33 
 
 28 . . 
 
 . 37 
 
 32 . . 
 
 . 179 
 
 34 . . 
 
 . 126 
 
 42 . . 
 
 . 259 
 
 46 . . 
 
 107. 265 
 
 50 . . 
 
 . 49 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FROM MARK. 
 
 27;] 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 CHAP. VEP. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 61 . . 
 
 . . 98 
 
 21 . . 
 
 . 39. 179 
 
 25 . . 
 
 . . 30 
 
 54 . . 
 
 . . 102 
 
 26 . . 
 
 . . 104 
 
 34 . . 
 
 . . 121 
 
 56 . 1 83, 
 
 184. 218 
 
 
 
 37 . . 
 
 .42. 118 
 
 66 . . 
 
 . . 238 
 
 IV. 1 . . 
 
 2.42.111 
 
 39 . . 
 
 . . 107 
 
 57 . . 
 
 . . 183 
 
 16 . . 
 
 . . 180 
 
 40 . . 
 
 . . 16.S 
 
 61 . . 
 
 . . 165 
 
 23 . . 
 
 . . 126 
 
 41 . . 
 
 . . 64 
 
 63 . . 
 
 . . 168 
 
 24 . • 
 29 . . 
 
 . . 49 
 . 37.96 
 
 42 - . 
 
 .68.171 
 
 XXVII. 1 . . 
 
 . . 148 
 
 30 . . 
 
 . . 102 
 
 X. 5 . . 
 
 . . 184 
 
 4 . ■ 
 
 . . 184 
 
 32 . . 
 
 .71. 182 
 
 13 . . 
 
 . . 53 
 
 5 . . 
 
 . . 97 
 
 37 . . 
 
 . . 96 
 
 14 . . 
 
 . 70. 239 
 
 7 ■ • 
 
 . . 162 
 
 
 
 16 . . 
 
 . . 45 
 
 14 . ■ 
 
 . . 184 
 
 V. 1,2 . 
 
 . . 46 
 
 17 . • 
 
 . . 76 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . . 167 
 
 7 . . 
 
 . . 64 
 
 19 . . 
 
 . . 107 
 
 23 . . 
 
 . ■ . 124 
 
 9 . . 
 
 . . 48 
 
 20 . . 
 
 . . 98 
 
 24 . . 
 
 . . 118 
 
 14 . . 
 
 . . 83 
 
 23 . . 
 
 . . 42 
 
 29 . . 
 
 . . 67 
 
 15 . . 
 
 . . 83 
 
 24 . . 
 
 . . 174 
 
 31 . . 
 
 . . 64 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . . 130 
 
 26 . . 
 
 . . 46 
 
 40 . . 
 
 . . 38 
 
 21 . . 
 
 . . 176 
 
 34 . . 
 
 . . 45 
 
 43. 45 . 
 
 . . 176 
 
 , 22 . . 
 
 . . 1H3 
 
 40 . . 
 
 . . 120 
 
 47 • • 
 
 . . 70 
 
 24 . . 
 
 . . 51 
 
 45 . . 
 
 . . 189 
 
 52 . . 
 
 . . 12 
 
 26 . . 
 
 . . 179 
 
 49 . . 
 
 . . 99 
 
 57 . . 
 
 . 21.44 
 
 30 . . 
 
 . . 48 
 
 
 
 63 . . 
 
 . 42. 82 
 
 41 . . 
 
 . 75.99 
 
 XI. 4 . . 
 
 . . 183 
 
 
 
 42 . . 
 
 . . 123 
 
 13 . 
 
 122. 261 
 
 XXVIII. 1 . . 
 
 . . 60 
 
 
 
 14 . 
 
 102. 142 
 
 14 . . 
 
 105. 173 
 
 VI. 7 . 
 
 . . 60 
 
 16 . 
 
 . . 166 
 
 19 . 22. 63. 161 
 
 21 . 
 
 . . 7C 
 
 22 . . 
 
 . .115 
 
 31 . . 
 
 . . 64 
 
 37 . 
 
 . . 102 
 
 27 . 
 
 . . 7C 
 
 .34 . . 
 
 . . 148 
 
 39,40 
 
 .61. 174 
 
 28 . 
 
 . . 130 
 
 58 . . 
 
 . . 178 
 
 50 . 
 56 . 
 
 . . 198 
 . . 30 
 
 33 . . 
 XII. 12 . . 
 
 . . 122 
 . . 184 
 
 MARK 
 
 
 VII. 3,4 
 
 97. 152 
 
 13 . 
 
 . . 42 
 
 
 
 9 . 
 
 . . 255 
 
 20 . 
 
 . . 173 
 
 I. 4 . 73 
 
 .115. 162 
 
 15 . 
 
 . . 31 
 
 28 . 
 
 . . 59 
 
 7 • ■ 
 
 . . 259 
 
 22 . 
 
 . . 255 
 
 32 . 
 
 . . 145 
 
 9 . . 
 
 . . 162 
 
 25 . 
 
 . . 55 
 
 
 
 10 . . 
 
 . . 170 
 
 26 . 
 
 . . 130 
 
 XIII. 9 . 
 
 . . 173 
 
 13 . . 
 
 . . 178 
 
 31 . 
 
 . . 164 
 
 19 . 
 
 . . 66 
 
 22 . . 
 
 . . 147 
 
 36 _ 
 
 . . . 59 
 
 20 . 
 
 . . 60 
 
 • 35 . . 
 
 , . 259 
 
 
 
 , 25 . 
 
 . . 115 
 
 40 . . 
 
 . . 63 
 
 VIII. 1 . 
 2 . 
 
 . . 53 
 . 127. 128 
 
 35 . 
 
 . . 69 
 
 II. 1 . . 
 
 . . 165 
 
 4 . 
 
 . . 173 
 
 XIV. 3 . 
 
 68. 168 
 
 2 . . 
 
 . . 143 
 
 11 . 
 
 . . . 179 
 
 5 . 
 
 . . 61 
 
 4 . . 
 
 . . 82 
 
 12 . 
 
 . . .126 
 
 6 . 
 
 . . 186 
 
 9 . . 
 
 . 93.99 
 
 16 . 
 
 . . . 137 
 
 7 . 
 
 . . 178 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . . 239 
 
 20 . 
 
 . . . 18 
 
 12 . 
 
 . . 88 
 
 21 . . 
 
 . . 67 
 
 23 . 
 
 . . . S3 
 
 13 . 
 
 . . 68 
 
 22 . . 
 
 . . 21 
 
 28 . 
 
 . . . 31 
 
 29 . 
 
 . . .120 
 
 26 . . 
 
 . . 173 
 
 31 . 
 
 . . .152 
 
 35 . 
 
 . . 69. 130 
 
 27 . . 
 
 . . 167 
 
 34 . 
 
 . . . 160 
 
 36 . 
 
 . . . 49 
 
 
 
 38 . 
 
 . 102. 177 
 
 43 . 
 
 . . . 179 
 
 III. 3 . . 
 
 . . 99 
 
 
 
 47 . 
 
 . . . 98 
 
 5 . 90 
 
 . 174. 178 
 
 IX. I . 
 
 . . . 52 
 
 49 . 
 
 . 120. 239 
 
 7 . . 
 
 . . 51 
 
 5 . 
 
 . . . 79 
 
 54 . 
 
 . . .183 
 
 9 . . 
 
 . . 32 
 
 7 . 
 
 . . . 153 
 
 64 . 
 
 . . 09, 70 
 
 10 . . 
 
 . . 82 
 
 8 . 
 
 . 120. 142 
 
 
 
 11 . . 
 
 .41. 137 
 
 23 . 
 
 . . 39,40 
 
 XV. 1 . 
 
 . . . 36 
 
 14 . . 
 
 . . 128 
 
 24 . 
 
 . . . 179 
 
 . 
 
 . . . 88 
 
274 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 9 . 
 
 11 . 
 
 12 . 
 
 16 . 
 
 24 . 
 
 25 . 
 27 . 
 37 . 
 
 43 . 
 
 44 . 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FROM LUKE. 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FROM LUKE, JOHN. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 1 . 
 
 2 . 
 
 3 . 
 
 4 . 
 
 5 . 
 
 14 . 
 
 15 . 
 
 16 . 
 
 LUKE. 
 
 PAGE 
 . 160 
 
 . 59 
 . 54 
 . 55 
 
 48. 102 
 . 132 
 . 160 
 . 1)3 
 
 13.115 
 . 125 
 
 . 38 
 . 60 
 . 164 
 . 261 
 . 97 
 . 239 
 . 254 
 . 36 
 
 I. 2 . . . 
 
 . 32 
 
 6 . . . 
 
 . 205 
 
 8 . . . 
 
 . 119 
 
 . . . 
 
 • 70 
 
 10 . . . 
 
 . 68 
 
 20 . . . 
 
 . 151 
 
 29 . . . 
 
 . 103 
 
 30 . . . 
 
 . 180 
 
 34 . . . 
 
 • 83 
 
 37 . . . 
 
 60. 180 
 
 3!) . . . 
 
 . 178 
 
 42 . . . 
 
 . 59 
 
 43 . . . 
 
 . 131 
 
 45 . . . 
 
 ■ 92 
 
 47 . . . 
 
 . 174 
 
 61 . . . 
 
 • 77 
 
 53 . . . 
 
 . 68 
 
 54 . . . 
 
 . 195 
 
 56 . . . 
 
 . 160 
 
 59 . . . 
 
 . 88 
 
 60 . . . 
 
 . 119 
 
 62 . . . 
 
 40. 103 
 
 64 . . 
 
 . 258 
 
 72 . . 
 
 69.178 
 
 II. 1 . 39. 
 
 42. 179 
 
 2 . . 
 
 . 239 
 
 5 . . 
 
 • 97 
 
 13 . . 
 
 . 52. IBO 
 
 14 . . 
 
 . . 34 
 
 15 . . 
 
 . . 124 
 
 20 . . 
 
 . . 54 
 
 22 . . 
 
 . . 169 
 
 25 . . 
 
 . . 42 
 
 26 . . 
 
 . . 140 
 
 41 . . 
 
 . . 76 
 
 43 . . 
 
 . . 51 
 
 44 . . 
 
 . . 68 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 48 . 
 
 50 . 
 52 . 
 
 III. 5 . 
 
 13 . 
 
 14 . 
 16 . 
 20 . 
 23 . 
 
 IV. 
 
 VI. 
 
 6,7 
 
 14 . 
 
 15 . 
 20 . 
 23 . 
 
 25 . 
 
 26 . 
 28 . 
 41 . 
 
 4 . 
 
 5 . 
 
 6 . 
 
 7 . 
 9 . 
 
 16 . 
 
 17 . 
 32 . 
 
 34 . 
 38 . 
 
 9 . 
 11 . 
 19 . 
 
 35 . 
 
 37 . 
 
 38 . 
 
 39 . 
 42. 47 
 
 VII. 12 . 
 
 24 . 
 
 25 . 
 29 . 
 32 . 
 3ft . 
 40 . 
 42 . 
 
 44 . 
 
 45 . 
 
 VIII. 1 . 
 
 8 . 
 
 9 . 
 14 . 
 19 . 
 23 . 
 31 . 
 39 . 
 43 . 
 
 PAOE 
 . 61 
 
 . 44 
 
 . 77 
 
 39.43 
 . 181 
 . 99 
 . 141 
 132. 174 
 . 67 
 
 85. 105 
 . 168 
 . 88 
 . 32 
 . 110 
 . 176 
 . 126 
 . 68 
 41.51 
 
 . 11 
 65. 174 
 . 88 
 . 109 
 . 54 
 . 156 
 . 45 
 . 86 
 . 153 
 21. 52 
 
 . 144 
 
 48. 103 
 
 . 179 
 
 . 186 
 
 . 132 
 
 . 52 
 
 . 140 
 
 . 14 
 
 . 132 
 . 181 
 . 159 
 . 206 
 . 79 
 . 180 
 . 30 
 . 49 
 . 183 
 . Ill 
 
 . 169 
 . 161 
 . 103 
 . 181 
 . 51 
 89. 254 
 . l.SO 
 . 169 
 . 179 
 
 CHAP. VEa. 
 
 44 . 
 46 . 
 
 48 . 
 52 . 
 
 IX. 3 . 
 
 6 . 
 
 7 . 
 12 . 
 16 . 
 26 . 
 28 . 
 33 . 
 
 36 . 
 46 . 
 
 49 . 
 55 . 
 
 X. 11 . 
 20 . 
 24 . 
 28 . 
 31 . 
 33 . 
 .SS . 
 
 37 • 
 
 39 . 
 
 40 . 
 
 XI. 1 . 
 
 4 . 
 
 7 • 
 
 8 . 
 11 . 
 
 19 . 
 39 . 
 
 46 . 
 
 XII. 1 . 
 3 . 
 
 5 . 
 7 • 
 
 11 . 
 15 . 
 18 . 
 
 20 . 
 37 . 
 39 . 
 42 . 
 
 47 . 
 48 
 49 
 61 . 
 57 . 
 68 , 
 
 XIII. 2 
 8 
 
 10 
 19 
 23 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 35 . . 
 
 44. 79 
 
 38 ■ . 
 
 . 162 
 
 39 . . 
 
 44.91 
 
 41 . . 
 
 . 152 
 
 42 . • 
 
 . 70 
 
 46 . . 
 
 . 110 
 
 62 . . 
 
 . 63 
 
 31. 41. 184 
 65 
 179. 199 
 . . 120 
 221. 2,39 
 . . 205 
 
 39, 97 
 
 . . 181 
 . . 171 
 . .115 
 . . 163 
 . 35. 125 
 
276 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FROM JOHN, ACTS. 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FROM THE ACTS. 
 
 277 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 CHAP 
 
 . VEB. 
 
 24 . . 
 
 . . 31 
 
 
 56 . . 
 
 26 . . 
 
 . . 101 
 
 
 58 . . 
 
 29 . . 
 
 . 64. 239 
 
 
 69 . . 
 
 33 . . 
 
 109. 239 
 
 
 
 44 . . 
 
 . . 123 
 
 IX 
 
 :i ■ ■ 
 
 62 . . 
 
 . . 66 
 
 
 13. 18. 
 
 54 . . 
 
 . . 289 
 
 
 19 . . 
 24 . . 
 
 V. 2 . . 
 
 . . 39 
 
 
 27 . . 
 
 3 . . 
 
 . . 68 
 
 
 30 . . 
 
 5 . . 
 
 . . 160 
 
 
 31 . . 
 
 12 . . 
 
 . . 143 
 
 
 34 . . 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . . 120 
 
 
 38 . . 
 
 20 . . 
 
 . . 130 
 
 
 40 . 
 
 25 . . 
 
 ■ o 189 
 
 
 41 . . 
 
 28 . . 
 
 107. 189 
 
 
 
 29 . . 
 
 189. 230 
 
 X 
 
 3 . . 
 
 34 . . 
 
 . . 128 
 
 
 11 . . 
 
 36 . . 
 
 . 31. 59 
 
 
 14 . . 
 
 44 . . 
 
 . . 46 
 
 
 20 . . 
 
 46 . . 
 
 • . 177 
 
 
 25 . . 
 
 46 . . 
 
 . . 106 
 
 
 27 . . 
 
 47 . . 
 
 . . 139 
 
 
 36 . . 
 
 VI. 2 . . 
 
 173, 174 
 
 XI 
 
 4 . . 
 
 6 . . 
 10 . . 
 11, 12. 
 
 5 . . 
 9 . . 
 
 10 - . 
 
 . 64.83 
 ■ . 60 
 • . 65 
 
 
 14 . . 
 
 ■ . 144 
 
 
 18 . . 
 
 18 . . 
 
 ■ ■ 64 
 
 
 21 . . 
 
 19 . . 
 
 • . 185 
 
 
 22 . . 
 
 21 . . 
 
 . . 173 
 
 
 31 . . 
 
 27 . . 
 29 . . 
 
 . . 119 
 . . 54 
 
 
 35 . 
 40 . . 
 
 35 . . 
 
 . . 164 
 
 
 49 . . 
 
 45 . . 
 
 . . 67 
 
 
 50 . . 
 
 61 . . 
 
 .31. 134 
 
 XII. 
 
 1 . . 
 
 57 . . 
 
 . . 168 
 
 
 9 . . 
 
 62 . . 
 
 . . 257 
 
 
 10 . . 
 
 63 . . 
 
 . . 31 
 
 
 19 . 
 
 64—66 
 
 154, 156 
 
 
 23 . 
 
 70, 71 . 
 
 . . 33 
 
 
 24 . 
 
 VII. 23 . . 
 
 . . 43 
 
 
 26 . . 
 28 . . 
 
 24 . . 
 
 . . 66 
 
 
 31 . . 
 
 26 . . 
 
 . . 90 
 
 
 32 . . 
 
 29 . . 
 
 . - 179 
 
 
 34 . . 
 
 37 . . 
 
 . . 106 
 
 
 37 . . 
 40 . . 
 
 39 . . 
 
 . . 179 
 
 
 41 . . 
 
 124. 240 
 
 
 42 . . 
 
 VIII. 7 • . 
 
 . . 174 
 
 XIII. 
 
 4 . . 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . . 31 
 
 
 5 . . 
 
 23 . . 
 
 . 8. 40 
 
 
 6 . . 
 
 28 . . 
 
 . . 65 
 
 
 7 . . 
 
 29 
 
 . . 178 
 
 
 8 . . 
 
 39 . . 
 
 . . 106 
 
 
 9 . . 
 
 43 . . 
 
 . . 220 
 
 
 10 . . 
 
 44 . 53 
 
 154. 234 
 
 
 24 . . 
 
 48 . . 
 
 . . 46 
 
 
 27 . . 
 
 86 . . 
 
 . . 71 
 
 
 38 . . 
 
 
 PAGE 
 
 
 240 
 
 .'82 
 
 146 
 
 
 176 
 
 
 144 
 
 
 45 
 
 
 144 
 
 
 206 
 
 
 268 
 
 
 123 
 
 .46 
 
 106 
 
 43 
 
 193 
 
 
 46 
 
 
 240 
 
 
 106 
 
 
 170 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 202 
 
 
 209 
 
 
 46 
 
 
 51 
 
 
 46 
 
 172. 184 
 . 240 
 . 160 
 . 12 
 69. 162 
 . 33 
 . 190 
 . 178 
 . 218 
 . 206 
 . 49 
 . 171 
 
 . 150 
 . 167 
 . 98 
 . 216 
 . 131 
 56. 161 
 . 212 
 . 206 
 . 136 
 . 108 
 . 46 
 . 114 
 . 217 
 . 136 
 
 . 184 
 . 33 
 . 46 
 179. 240 
 178 
 120 
 221 
 103. 108 
 68.92 
 . 266 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 XIV. 1 . 
 
 4 . 
 6 . 
 
 17 . 
 
 26 . 
 31 . 
 
 XV. I . 
 2 . 
 
 5 . 
 
 6 . 
 8 . 
 
 22 . 
 
 25 . 
 
 XVI. 2 . 
 
 23 . 
 
 26 . 
 31 . 
 
 XVII. 3 . 
 
 10 . 
 
 18 . 
 
 24 . 
 
 XVIII. 14 . 
 
 16 . 
 
 17 . 
 
 25 . 
 29 . 
 
 36 . 
 
 37 . 
 
 XIX. 2 . 
 
 11 . 
 
 26 . 
 
 29 . 
 
 30 . 
 
 XX. 2 . 
 
 9 . 
 
 12 . 
 17 . 
 28 . 
 
 XXI. 8 . 
 
 19 . 
 23 . 
 28 . 
 
 .96 
 
 PAGE 
 
 177 
 67 
 81 
 74 
 44 
 
 102 
 
 . . 8 
 8. 46. 157 
 157. 240 
 62. 90. 91 
 . . 142 
 . . 106 
 . . 120 
 
 119.131 
 . 64 
 . 229 
 . 265 
 
 . 131 
 . 31 
 . 92 
 . 150 
 
 • 171 
 
 . 183 
 
 . 240 
 
 . 240 
 
 . 168 
 
 . 106 
 
 . 143 
 
 . 64 
 . 106 
 
 38. 180 
 . 144 
 . 190 
 
 . 62 
 95. 261 
 
 39. 183 
 78.93 
 
 . 42 
 
 . 77 
 
 . 77 
 
 . 82 
 
 106. 256 
 
 
 ACTS. 
 
 1 . . 
 
 4 . . 
 
 12 . . 
 
 16 . . 
 
 26 . . 
 
 .98. 
 
 Ill ji 
 
 ^^ i 
 68 ) 
 
 68 ' 
 
 266 : 
 
 CHAP. VER, 
 
 20 . 
 
 25 . 
 
 26 . 
 28 . 
 33 . 
 
 37 . 
 
 38 . 
 40 . 
 43 . 
 
 46 . 
 
 47 . 
 
 III. 1 . 
 
 2 . 
 
 3 . 
 
 7 . 
 
 10 . 
 
 11 . 
 
 12 . 
 
 13 . 
 
 14 . 
 16 . 
 19 . 
 
 21 . 
 22.24 
 26 . 
 
 IV. 11 . 
 
 12 . 
 
 13 . 
 
 17 . 
 
 18 . 
 
 21 . 
 
 22 . 
 28 . 
 36 . 
 
 V. 4 . 
 6 . 
 10 . 
 15 . 
 
 21 . 
 
 22 . 
 
 23 . 
 
 24 . 
 28 . 
 30 . 
 38 . 
 36 . 
 
 38 . 
 
 39 . 
 
 41 . 
 
 42 . 
 
 VI. 1 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 11 
 
 PAGE 
 
 . 146 
 39. 162 
 . 283 
 68. 178 
 . 39 
 . 74 
 . 161 
 . 240 
 . 92 
 . 64 
 . 35 
 
 . 176 
 . 190 
 . 269 
 . 76 
 . 184 
 36.63 
 
 75. 147 
 . 47 
 . 36 
 
 37. 165 
 . 130 
 . 226 
 . 131 
 . 110 
 
 31.47 
 . 186 
 160. 220 
 , 11 
 . 174 
 . 113 
 . 56 
 , 258 
 , 113 
 
 113.118 
 . 113 
 . 183 
 . 169 
 . 182 
 . 99 
 47. 150 
 . 103 
 11.68 
 . 113 
 . 51 
 . 49 
 . 108 
 . 106 
 . 146 
 . 204 
 
 183.203.207 
 . . .173 
 ... 68 
 
 . . .207 
 
 11. 6 
 12 
 
 . . 266 
 . 60. 103 
 
 VII. 1 
 2 
 
 . 122 
 11.74 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 12 . 
 
 18 . 
 
 19 . 
 26 . 
 34 . 
 36 . 
 38 . 
 
 41 . 
 
 42 . 
 43,44 
 61 . 
 82 . 
 86 . 
 68 . 
 
 59 . 
 
 60 . 
 
 VIII. 1 . 
 
 2 . 
 
 4 . 
 
 6 . 
 
 6 . 
 
 9 . 
 11 . 
 16 . 
 
 20 . 
 
 22 . 
 
 23 . 
 
 26 . 
 
 27 . 
 
 30 . 
 33 . 
 
 IX. 1 . 
 4.7 
 9 . 
 
 16 . 
 
 28 . 
 26 . 
 
 29 . 
 
 31 . 
 33 . 
 40 . 
 
 43 . 
 
 X. 9 . 
 15 . 
 
 17 . 
 20 . 
 23 . 
 28 . 
 33 . 
 
 38 . 
 
 39 . 
 42 . 
 45 . 
 
 XI. 8 . 
 
 17 . 
 
 18 . 
 
 PAGE 
 . . 79 
 
 201. 193 
 
 76. 109 
 
 . 98 
 
 11. 136 
 
 113.240 
 
 . 226 
 
 . 160 
 
 . 96 
 
 . 234 
 
 . 77 
 
 . 136 
 
 . 199 
 
 . 88 
 
 92. 226 
 
 12.247 
 
 145.214 
 . 98 
 . 145 
 . 63 
 . 110 
 . 49 
 77. 240 
 . 161 
 . 103 
 . 122 
 . 198 
 47. 169 
 
 114. 173 
 . 122 
 . 240 
 
 . 69 
 . 63 
 . 138 
 . 73 
 . 219 
 . 140 
 . 207 
 148. 240 
 . 184 
 , 247 
 . 180 
 
 , 176 
 , 284 
 , 182 
 . 119 
 . 152 
 147 
 . 112 
 , 113 
 113.240 
 . 138 
 . 115 
 
 . 186 
 . 240 
 8. 121 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 19 . 146. 162. 174. 
 
 
 204 
 
 20 . 
 
 . . 207 
 
 28 . 
 
 . . 283 
 
 XII. 5 . 
 
 . . 115 
 
 6 . 
 
 . . 180 
 
 10 . 
 
 . . 96 
 
 11 . 
 
 . . 136 
 
 14 . 
 
 160. 182 
 
 16 . 
 
 . . Ill 
 
 20 . 
 
 . . 173 
 
 23 . 
 
 151. 206 
 
 26 . 
 
 . . 203 
 
 XIII. I . . 
 
 . . 204 
 
 2 . 
 
 . . 124 
 
 4 . 
 
 . . 134 
 
 10 . 
 
 .84.106 
 
 11 . 
 
 . . 88 
 
 13 . 
 
 . . 39 
 
 16 . 
 
 . . 36 
 
 25 . 
 
 . . 48 
 
 27 . 
 
 . . 240 
 
 46 . 
 
 . . 88 
 
 XIV. 1 . 
 
 . . 207 
 
 4 . 
 
 . 30. 160 
 
 5 . 
 
 . . IfiO 
 
 6 . 
 
 . . 240 
 
 7 . 
 
 . . 146 
 
 9 . 
 
 .- . 110 
 
 10 . 
 
 . . 30 
 
 13 . 
 
 160. 255 
 
 22 . 
 
 . . 163 
 
 26'. 
 
 . . 64 
 
 28 . 
 
 . . 160 
 
 XV. 1 . 
 
 . 77.97 
 
 3 . 
 
 . . 145 
 
 7 . 
 
 . . 32 
 
 17 . 
 
 . . 53 
 
 20 . 
 
 . . 76 
 
 21 . 
 
 . . 253 
 
 22 . 89. 1 13. 240 
 
 23 . 
 
 . . 116 
 
 24 . 
 
 . . 108 
 
 29 . 
 
 . . 67 
 
 36 . 
 
 . 53. 124 
 
 38 . 
 
 . . 152 
 
 XVI. 5 . 
 
 . . 146 
 
 9 . 
 
 . . 79 
 
 11 . 
 
 . . 39 
 
 15 . 
 
 . . 66 
 
 16 . 
 
 . . 231 
 
 22 . 
 
 .• . . 89 
 
 23 . 
 
 . . 64 
 
 34 . 
 
 . 110. 113 
 
 37 . 77. 1 13. 123 
 
 40 . 
 
 . . .161 
 
 I, 
 
278 
 
 CHAP. TKK. 
 XVII. 1 . 
 
 2 
 
 6 ! 
 
 7 . 
 11 . 
 
 13 . 
 
 14 . 
 
 15 . 
 18 . 
 
 21 . 
 
 22 . 
 
 23 . 
 
 24 . 
 
 25 . 
 
 27 . 
 
 28 . 
 
 29 . 
 
 XVIII. 4 . 
 5 . 
 9 . 
 
 13 . 
 
 14 . 
 
 18 . 
 
 19 . 
 2'> . 
 
 26 . 
 
 XIX. 2 . 
 
 4 . 
 
 5 . 
 
 6 . 
 
 7 . 
 
 10 . 
 13 . 
 
 17 . 
 
 24 . 
 
 25 . 
 
 26 . 
 
 27 . 
 
 28 . 
 35 . 
 38 . 
 
 XX. 7 . 
 
 16 . 
 
 18 . 
 21 . 
 
 24 . 
 
 25 . 
 28 . 
 
 30 . 
 33 . 
 35 . 
 38 . 
 
 XXI. 6 . 
 
 8 . 
 
 11 . 
 
 16 . 
 
 20 . 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FROM THE ACTS, ROMANS. 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FROM THE ROMANS. 
 
 279 
 
 PAGE 
 . 36 
 
 . 152 
 
 . 253 
 193.241 
 
 . 103 
 
 . 153 
 36. 147 
 
 . 36 
 
 103. 223 
 
 58. 127 
 
 213. 225 
 
 232. 63 
 
 . 199 
 
 68. 260 
 
 122. 146 
 
 30. 170 
 
 . 144 
 
 . 207 
 . 77 
 . 107 
 . 180 
 . 170 
 . 97 
 . 78 
 . 97 
 . 68 
 
 64. 119 
 56. 133 
 . 161 
 . 176 
 . 43 
 . 207 
 64.241 
 . 207 
 . 240 
 . 171 
 . 41 
 . 162 
 . 214 
 . 124 
 . 39 
 
 . 204 
 109. 128 
 . 43 
 . 37 
 . 147 
 . 213 
 . 97 
 . 75 
 . 69 
 65. 195 
 . 213 
 
 . 247 
 . 39 
 . 47 
 . 55 
 . 71 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 21 . 
 
 23 . 
 
 24 . 
 
 25 . 
 
 26 . 
 28 . 
 33 . 
 38 . 
 
 XXII. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 . 253 
 . 173 
 . 98 
 . 98 
 . 76 
 . 86 
 . 103 
 121.234.160 
 
 3 . 
 
 . . 199 
 
 6 . 
 
 136. 171 
 
 16 . 
 
 . . 197 
 
 17 . 
 
 . . 199 
 
 19 . 
 
 . . 177 
 
 22 . 
 
 .89. 132 
 
 23.26 
 
 . . 241 
 
 29 . 
 
 . . . 86 
 
 30 . 
 
 . . 179 
 
 XXIII. 1 . 
 5 . 
 
 7 • 
 9 . 
 
 11 . 
 14 . 
 20 . 
 25 . 
 
 30 . 
 35 . 
 
 XXIV. 10 . 
 16 
 
 22 . 
 
 23 . 
 
 25 . 
 
 26 . 
 
 XXV. 3 . 
 4 . 
 
 10 . 
 
 11 . 
 
 10 . 
 20 . 
 22 - 
 
 27 . 
 
 XXVI. 1 . 
 
 2 . 
 
 3 . 
 
 8 . 
 
 11 . 
 12 
 16 . 
 
 22 . 
 
 23 . 
 23 . 
 26 . 
 
 28 . 
 
 31 . 
 
 90 
 
 168. 
 
 99.217 
 201.241 
 . 240 
 98. 257 
 . 161 
 . 69 
 . 147 
 . 234 
 184 
 102 
 
 181 
 
 83. 
 
 76 
 
 217. 184 
 
 . 58 
 
 . 115 
 
 . 207 
 
 78. 121 
 
 . 130 
 . 78 
 . 68 
 83.86 
 . 146 
 . 162 
 . 89 
 . 168 
 
 . 172 
 
 . 116 
 
 . 71 
 
 25. 180 
 
 . 88 
 
 . 179 
 
 . 213 
 
 . 54 
 
 . 125 
 
 . 190 
 
 . 66 
 
 160.241 
 
 . . 83 
 
 CHAP. VER 
 
 
 
 PAGE 
 
 XXVII. 1 
 
 . . . 193 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 . 64 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 . 2S9 
 
 14 
 
 
 J«. 
 
 99. 168 
 
 18 
 
 
 
 . 98 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 . . 72 
 
 25 
 
 
 
 . 86 
 
 34 
 
 
 
 . . 182 
 
 36 
 
 
 
 . . 70 
 
 37 
 
 
 
 . . 43 
 
 38 
 
 
 
 . . 68 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 . . 121 
 
 43 
 
 
 
 . . 99 
 
 XXV1II.3 
 
 
 
 . 68. 153 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 . . 171 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 . . 30 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 . . 88 
 
 - 10 
 
 
 
 . 39. 185 
 
 19 
 
 
 
 . 147 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 . . 97 
 
 25 
 
 
 
 . . 183 
 
 ROMANS. 
 
 I. 1 
 
 ... 72 
 
 3 
 
 . . .241 
 
 4 
 
 74. 155. 169 
 
 5 
 
 . . .166 
 
 6 
 
 ... 67 
 
 8 
 
 . 133. 156 
 
 9 
 
 . . .221 
 
 10 
 
 . 127. 174 
 
 13 
 
 . 115. 132 
 
 14 
 
 . 193. 196 
 
 13 
 
 ... 57 
 
 16 
 
 . .67.177 
 
 17 
 
 164, 156. 205 
 
 18 
 
 . 192. 214 
 
 19 
 
 ... 67 
 
 20 
 
 18. 67. 163 
 
 21 
 
 . 166. 205. 
 
 
 217. 261 
 
 26 
 
 65. 180. 192 
 
 26 
 
 . . 72. 180 
 
 28 
 
 . . .200 
 
 29. 
 
 31 . . . 260 
 
 32 
 
 55. 206. 241 
 
 II. 1 
 
 38. 192. 241. 
 
 
 260 
 
 3 
 
 ... 46 
 
 4 
 
 57. 81. 208 
 
 5 
 
 . . 23. 160 
 
 6 
 
 
 . . 153 
 
 8 
 
 
 165.214 
 
 9 
 
 
 207.214 
 
 10 
 
 
 . 34. 207 
 
 11 
 
 
 . . 180 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 . 123 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 13 . . 
 
 14 . . 
 
 15 . . 
 
 16 . . 
 , 17 . • 
 * 18 . . 
 
 21 . . 
 23 . . 
 
 PAGE 
 
 . 35. 180 
 .37. 140 
 . . 65 
 . . 03 
 . . 207 
 . . 180 
 . . 109 
 .68. 169 
 
 CHAP. VEB. PAGE 
 
 6 . . . .120 
 6 . . . 93. 242 
 7.11. 203.242 
 
 13 . 89. 93. 205 
 
 14 . . . .182 
 
 15 . . . .103 
 
 16 . 127. 146. 163 
 
 17 . 55. 134. 234 
 
 CHAP. VER. PAGE 
 
 21 ... ■ 243 
 
 22 . . . 73. 243 
 23, 24 . . 06. 205 
 
 26 ... . 139 
 
 27 . 73. 172. 243 
 
 28 ... . 243 
 31 .... 73 
 33 . . 174. 253 
 
 25 . . 
 
 . 28. 105 
 
 19, 20. 168. 242 
 
 X 1 .... 162 
 
 26 . 162 
 
 . 205. 63 
 
 21 . . 1 16. 174 
 
 3 . . . .114 
 
 27 . . 
 
 . . 160 
 
 , 
 
 4 . . . 63. 216 
 
 29 . . 
 
 . . 165 
 
 VII. 2 .... 86 
 
 5 . . . . l.''>5 
 
 
 
 6 . . 167. 227 
 
 9.11. 174.177 
 
 III. 2 . . 
 
 . . 89 
 
 6 . . . . 8 
 
 14 .... 84 
 
 3.4 . 
 
 124. 241 
 
 7 . 40. 84. 103. 
 
 16.18. 92.119. 
 
 6 . . 
 
 . . 83 
 
 201 
 
 141 
 
 6 . . 
 
 .84. 127 
 
 8 . . .43. 242 
 
 19 . 139. 193. 243 
 
 7 . ■ 
 
 . 83. 156 
 
 12 . . . .148 
 
 
 8 . . 
 
 218. 241 
 
 13 .... 41 
 
 XI. 2 . 78. 166. 243 
 
 9 . . 
 
 182. 241 
 
 14 . . . .182 
 
 4 .... 31 
 
 11 . . 
 
 . . 41) 
 
 10 . . . .242 
 
 5 .... 72 
 
 12 . 24 
 
 121. 161 
 
 18 .... 56 
 
 6. . .41.143 
 
 19.21. 
 
 22U. 24 1 
 
 20 ... . 143 
 
 8 . . . 40. 74 
 
 22 . . 
 
 . . 170 
 
 21 .... 46 
 
 13 ... . 206 
 
 23 . . 
 
 . . 92 
 
 22 ... . 8 
 
 20 .... 78 
 
 24 . . 
 
 . . 189 
 
 23 . 224. 242. 255 
 
 21 . . . .170 
 
 25 . . 
 
 164. 205 
 
 24,25. .72.258 
 
 23 . . 134. 200 
 
 26 . . 
 
 . . 210 
 
 
 25 . . 163. 219 
 
 28 . . 
 
 . . 2.'>6 
 
 VIII. 1 . . . .157 
 
 20 . . . 253 
 
 31 . . 
 
 . . 119 
 
 3 . . .66. 242 
 
 • 27 . . . .102 
 
 
 
 4 . . 205. 236 
 
 28 ... ■ 179 
 
 IV. 2 . . 
 
 . . 205 
 
 6 . . 163. 242 
 
 30 .... 7« 
 
 II . . 
 
 . . 06 
 
 8 . . . .113 
 
 31 ... 42 
 
 12 - . 
 
 . . 155 
 
 9 . . . .133 
 
 32 . . .43. 163 
 
 13 . . 
 
 . . 6» 
 
 10,11. 168.242 
 13 .... 93 
 
 36 . . . .156 
 
 14 . . 
 
 . . 155 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . . 1111 
 
 15 . . .74.202 
 
 XII. 1 . 66. 107. 214. 
 
 19 . . 
 
 .114.77 
 
 16 .... 78 
 
 215. 213 
 
 -21 . . 
 
 . . 229 
 
 17 . . . .163 
 
 2 . . . 8. 224 
 
 22. . 
 
 . . 162 
 
 18 .162.205.227 
 
 3 . 181. 243. 26U 
 
 23 . . 
 
 . . 167 
 
 19 .... 18 
 
 5 .... 42 
 
 25 . . 
 
 168. 205 
 
 21 . . . .206 
 
 6 . . 152. 200 
 
 
 
 22 . . . .268 
 
 8 . . . .195 
 
 V. 1 . . 
 
 . . 144 
 
 23 . . .46. 109 
 
 9 .... 62 
 
 6 . . 
 
 113.171. 
 
 25 . . . .166 
 
 12. . .78.228 
 
 
 210. 241 
 
 29 . . 137. 261 
 
 15 . . . .107 
 
 7 . . 
 
 123. 241 
 
 30 .... 73 
 
 18 . . . .178 
 
 8. . 
 12 . . 
 
 . . 151 
 
 32 . . . .122 
 
 19 .... 23 
 
 . . 241 
 
 36 . . . .253 
 
 20 . . . .105 
 
 13 
 
 . . 185 
 
 36 .... 82 
 38 .... 85 
 
 IX. 1 . . 158. 157 
 
 
 14 . . 
 
 15 . . 
 16. 18 
 
 . . 234 
 
 . . 42 
 
 . 205. 242. 
 
 XIII. 1 . . . .244 
 4 . . 106.203 
 6 . . . .168 
 
 
 256 
 
 2 . . . .243 
 
 7 . . . . 256 
 
 19 . 
 
 . . 226 
 
 3 . .38. 88, 89. 
 
 8 . . . .250 
 
 20 . 
 
 234. 242 
 
 152 
 
 9 . 46. 84. 126. 
 
 21 . 
 
 . . 167 
 
 4 . . . .207 
 
 210 
 
 1 
 
 
 9 . . . .173 
 
 10 . . 139. 210 
 
 ' VI. 2 . 
 
 . 55. 103 
 
 11 . . 114.243 
 
 11 . 48. 59. 216. 
 
 fl a . 
 
 . . . 161 
 
 18 ... . 127 
 
 243 
 
 i 4. 
 
 . . . 168 
 
 19 .... 8 
 
 14 .... 12 
 
280 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FROM 1 COKTNTIIIANS. 
 
 CHAP. VKB. 
 
 PAOE 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 PAOB 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 XIV. 4 . . 
 
 208. 244 
 
 III. 2 64. 
 
 1)9.258 
 
 19 . 
 
 . 114. 124 
 
 6 . . 
 
 . . 229 
 . . 70 
 
 3 . . 
 
 . . 136 
 
 21 . 
 
 25 . 
 
 . . .139 
 
 . . 
 
 5 . . 
 
 . . 120 
 
 65. 98. 207 
 
 10 . . 
 
 . . 97 
 
 6 . . 
 
 .89.132 
 
 26 . 
 
 . . .146 
 
 11 . . 
 
 137. 248 
 
 7 . - 
 
 . . 49 
 
 
 
 13 . . 
 
 .30.244 
 
 11 . . 
 
 . . 180 
 
 X. 2 . 
 
 . . 161 " 
 
 14 . . 
 
 167.167 
 
 14 . . 
 
 . . 120 
 
 4 . 
 
 . . 40. 88 
 
 15 . 18 
 
 143. 188 
 
 15 . . 
 
 147. 165 
 
 6 . 
 
 . . . 245 
 
 17 . . 
 
 . . 243 
 
 17 . . 
 
 . 52. 259 
 
 6 . 
 
 . . 65. 244 
 
 20 . . 
 
 . . lOG 
 
 19 . 31. 
 
 116. 180 
 
 11 . 
 13 . 
 
 . . . 234 
 . .86. 177 
 
 XV. 2 . . 
 
 . . CO 
 
 IV. 1 . . 
 
 . . 219 
 
 16 . 
 
 54. 70. 234 
 
 5 . . 
 
 .74. 103 
 
 6 . 60 
 
 173. 192 
 
 17 . 
 
 ... 42 
 
 7 . . 
 
 . . 185 
 
 8 . 88 
 
 122. 255 
 
 18 . 
 
 38. 70. 224 
 
 « . . 
 
 .60. 172 
 
 9 . . 
 
 . . 244 
 
 19 . 
 
 ... 49 
 
 12 . . 
 
 174. 177 
 
 10 . . 
 
 . . 255 
 
 21 . 
 
 ... 70 
 
 13 . . 
 
 . . 68 
 
 12,13. 
 15 . . 
 
 IQ8 2Sfl 
 
 
 14 . . 
 
 . . 187 
 
 1 uCI* A^U 
 
 120. 226 
 
 26 . 
 31 . 
 
 . . . 18 
 . . .145 
 
 15 . . 
 
 . . 147 
 
 17 . . 
 
 . . 65 
 
 
 
 KJ . . 
 
 . . 214 
 
 21 . . 
 
 157. 207 
 
 
 
 19 . . 
 
 . . 185 
 
 
 
 XI. 4 . 
 
 ... 44 
 
 20, 21 . 
 
 . . 244 
 
 V. 3 . . 
 
 236. 244 
 
 6 . 
 
 . 30. 44. 77 
 
 22 . . 
 
 . . 88 
 
 4 . . 
 
 . . 160 
 
 6 . 
 
 ... 97 
 
 23 . . 
 
 . . 152 
 
 6 . . 
 
 . . 244 
 
 9 . 
 
 . . .165 
 
 24 . . 
 
 .69. 109 
 
 9 . . 
 
 . . 30 
 
 10 . 
 
 . . .255 
 
 25 . . 
 
 . . 114 
 
 10 . '. 
 
 . . 229 
 
 11 . 
 
 . . . 145 
 
 2C . . 
 
 . 98. 235 
 
 
 
 12 . 
 
 . . .165 
 
 27 . . 
 
 30 . . 
 
 31 . . 
 3-2 . . 
 
 . . 123 
 . . 167 
 162. .243 
 . . 160 
 
 VI. 1 . . 
 3 . . 
 
 5 . . 
 
 6 . . 
 
 250. 170 
 212. 244 
 184. 164 
 . . 48 
 
 14.! 
 
 16 . 
 
 17 . 
 22 . 
 
 32 . 
 
 26 . . . 245 
 ... 86 
 . . .135 
 . 139. 141 
 
 
 
 . . .224 
 
 
 
 7 • . 
 
 . . 97 
 
 
 
 XVI. C . . 
 
 . . 142 
 
 8 . . 
 
 . . 48 
 
 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . . 255 
 . . 182 
 
 19 . . 
 
 . . 4C 
 
 XII. 1 
 8 
 
 ... 171 
 
 20 . . 
 
 20 . . 
 
 .71. 124 
 
 . . .169 
 
 25 . 77 
 
 . 206. 216. 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 . . .231 
 
 
 219 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 . . .161 
 
 27 . . 
 
 . . 34 
 
 VII. 5 . . 
 
 . . 167 
 
 15 
 
 155. 180. 245 
 
 
 
 8,9 . 
 
 139. 207 
 
 30 
 
 . . . 231 
 
 
 
 10, 11. 
 
 . . 244 
 
 
 
 
 
 15 . . 
 
 104. 244 
 
 XIII. 2 
 
 . . .219 
 
 1 CORINTHIANS. 
 
 16 . . 
 
 . . 30 
 
 4 
 
 ... 21 
 
 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . . 48 
 
 13 
 
 . . 61.58 
 
 I. 8 . . 
 
 1S8. 260 
 
 23 . . 
 
 . . 24 
 
 
 
 )0 . . 
 
 130. 216 
 
 24 . . 
 
 . . 180 
 
 XIV. 1- 
 
 -5 . . . 200 
 
 12 . . 
 
 . . 70 
 . . 128 
 
 26 . . 
 
 . 12. 66 
 
 9 
 
 . 204. 253 
 
 15 . . 
 
 34 . . 
 
 236. 244 
 
 18 
 
 ... 110 
 
 17 . . 
 
 . 109 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 . ... 204 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . 35. 67 
 
 VITI. 3 . . 
 
 . . 202 
 
 27 
 
 . . . . 164 
 
 10 . 
 
 . . 40 
 
 4 . . 
 
 . . 208 
 
 29 
 
 . ... 42 
 
 23 . 
 
 . . 85 
 
 5 . . 
 7. 10. 
 
 139. 148 
 
 . . 244 
 
 30- 
 34 
 
 -32 . . 20O 
 
 25 . 
 
 . . 69 
 
 . ... 257 
 
 2(; . 
 
 . . 224 
 
 12 . . 
 
 132. 144 
 
 38 
 
 . ... 105 
 
 27 • 
 
 . . 57 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . . 184 
 
 39 
 40 
 
 . . . . 253 
 . ... 211 
 
 11. 1 . 
 
 . . 219 
 
 IX. 2 . . 
 
 120. 1.3» 
 
 
 
 2 . 
 
 . . log 
 
 4.0 . 
 
 141. 245 
 
 XV. 3 
 
 . . 123. 172 
 
 4 . 
 
 . . .157 
 
 5 . . 
 
 . . 56 
 
 6 
 
 . ... 61 
 
 7 • 
 
 . . .219 
 
 9. 15. 
 
 . . 245 
 
 8 
 
 . . .23. 148 
 
 li . 
 
 . . . 190 
 
 10 . . 
 
 123. 176 
 
 y 
 
 . ... 70 
 
 U .1! 
 
 19. 224. 236 
 
 13 . . 
 
 . . 34 
 
 10 
 
 . ... 160 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FROM 2 CORINTHIANS, GALATIANS. 
 
 281 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 PAOK 
 . . 88 
 
 246. 195 
 . 40. 192 
 
 . . 235 
 . . 240 
 . 82. 192 
 . 126. 192 
 . 105. 180 
 . . 104 
 . . .106 
 . 119. 226 
 . . . 8« 
 89. 230. 240 
 . 158. 233 
 . . 184 
 . . 138 
 ... 77 
 ... 40 
 
 . . .165 
 
 . 162. 170 
 
 21. 65. 129 
 
 77. 184. 240 
 
 ... 49 
 
 . . 90.97 
 
 . . .253 
 
 65. go. 246 
 
 , 86. 216. 246 
 
 . . . . «9 
 
 . ... 148 
 
 . ... 184 
 . ... 77 
 . 84. 126. 166 
 . . .71.122 
 . . 132. 143 
 
 . . .85. 247 
 
282 
 
 VASSAGES CITED FllOM KVHESIANS, PHILII'PIANS. 
 
 CHAP. VEB 
 
 PAGE 
 
 CHAP. VKR 
 
 PA03B 
 
 CHAP. VER. PAGE 
 
 3 
 
 . . .77.233 
 
 (i 
 
 .'42. 204. 235 
 
 10 . . . 71.08 
 
 9 
 
 . . 155. IfiO 
 
 7 
 
 ... 97 
 
 17 . . . 53. 158 
 
 15 
 
 . . . . 130 
 
 9 
 
 ... 187 
 
 18 . 07. 08. 131 
 
 Hi 
 
 . . .62.173 
 
 10 
 
 . 121. 1U3 
 
 19 . . . .168 
 
 17 
 
 . 1-29. I'i3. 247 
 
 11 
 
 ... 90 
 
 20 . . . .200 
 
 1« 
 
 . 143.154. ICti 
 
 12 
 
 ... 78 
 
 21. 20. 28. . 218 
 
 19 
 
 . «5. 101. 185 
 
 13 
 
 ... 44 
 
 23 . 73. 223. 224 
 
 20 
 
 ... 35 
 
 14 
 
 . .79.192 
 
 24 .... 12 
 
 21 
 
 37. IOC. 154 
 
 15 
 
 18. 123. 222 
 
 27 . . . .143 
 
 22 
 
 43. 92. 154 
 
 10 
 
 . .77.170 
 
 29. . .71.191 
 
 23. 
 
 29. . . 233 
 
 
 
 30 . . 102. 189 
 
 24 
 
 . 148. 103. 
 
 
 
 31 . 43. 177. 214 
 
 
 22li. 154 
 
 EPHESIANS. 
 
 32 - . . .158 
 
 27 
 
 . . 1«1. 157 
 
 
 
 
 2U 
 
 . 52. 143. 157 
 
 I. 1 
 
 . ... 72 
 
 V. 2 . 73. 214. 215 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 . ... 210 
 
 4 . . . .265 
 
 IV. 1 
 
 . 35. C5. 223 
 
 7 
 
 . . .60.189 
 
 8 . , . . 248 
 
 2 
 
 . . . . 203 
 
 9, 
 
 10. .72.219 
 
 0, 7 . . . 155 
 
 3 
 
 . ... 191 
 
 12 
 
 . ... 114 
 
 9 . . . .187 
 
 4 
 
 . 10. 154. 247 
 
 13 
 
 . 08. 72. 74. 
 
 12 .... 45 
 
 6 
 
 . . . 32. 73 
 
 
 247 
 
 14 . . . .107 
 
 7 
 
 . . . . 148 
 
 14 
 
 . .71.189 
 
 15 . . 218.258 
 
 a 
 
 . ... 140 
 
 15 
 
 . 158. 170 
 
 16. . .97.137 
 
 9 
 
 . 202.259 
 
 10 
 
 . . .174 
 
 17 . . 100.200 
 
 10 
 
 . ... 210 
 
 J7 
 
 74. 167.211 
 
 19 ... . 235 
 
 11 
 
 . ... 141 
 
 18 
 
 . .08.117 
 
 20,21 . . I.i0 
 
 12. 
 
 IC. . . 247 
 
 20 
 
 . . 157. 104 
 
 23 .... 44 
 
 14 
 
 . ... 255 
 
 21 
 
 . . .132 
 
 20 . . . .248 
 
 15 
 
 . . 113. 255 
 
 22, 
 
 23. . . 55 
 
 31 . . . .151 
 
 17 
 
 .119.129.247 
 
 
 
 32 ... . 219 
 
 18 
 
 . 40. 1 10. 184 
 
 11. 2 
 
 72. 157. 1C9. 
 
 33 . . 131. 145 
 
 20. 
 
 29. . . 88 
 
 
 195 
 
 
 23 
 
 . ... 233 
 
 4 
 
 . . .114 
 
 VI. 1 ... . 158 
 
 24. 
 
 2C. . . 55 
 
 8 
 
 . . 48. 78 
 
 2 . . . .157 
 
 25 
 
 30. 40. 247 
 
 10 
 
 . I5fi. 175 
 
 3 . . . .142 
 
 27 
 
 . ... 247 
 
 11 
 
 ... 38 
 
 4 . . .68.221 
 
 29 
 
 . ... 233 
 
 12 
 
 71. 157. 247 
 
 6 .... 38 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 . .07.247 
 
 0, 7 • 23. 165. 
 
 V. 1 
 
 . ... 73 
 
 21 
 
 . ... 43 
 
 260 
 
 2 
 
 . ... 105 
 
 
 
 8 . . . .201 
 
 3 
 
 . ... 44 
 
 III. 1 
 
 . ... 66 
 
 11. . . 32. C7 
 
 5 
 
 . ... 247 
 
 3 
 
 . . ICO. 219 
 
 12 . 32. 57. 7.3. 
 
 7 
 
 . . 230. 2C0 
 
 4 
 
 . ... 38 
 
 20c. 233 
 
 8 
 
 . . .18. 200 
 
 9 
 
 . . .247 
 
 14,15. . . 92 
 
 10 
 
 . ... 33 
 
 11 
 
 . . 74. 204 
 
 10, 17. 50.67.92 
 
 11 
 
 . ... 121 
 
 12 
 
 . . . 157 
 
 18 . . . .255 
 
 13 
 
 . ... 175 
 
 13 
 
 38. 55. 100 
 
 19 . . .72.219 
 
 14 
 
 43. 84. 247 
 
 14 
 
 06. 183. 247. 
 
 21 . . . .157 
 
 17 
 
 . ... 128 
 
 
 253 
 
 22 . . . .170 
 
 19 
 
 . ... 232 
 
 IG 
 
 . . .200 
 
 23 . . 177. 179 
 
 21 
 
 . 212. 232. 25(> 
 
 18 
 
 ... 167 
 
 
 22 
 
 . ... 187 
 
 21 
 
 ... 34 
 
 
 24 
 
 . 91. 93. 227 
 
 
 
 PHILIPPIANS. 
 
 25 
 
 . ... 78 
 
 IV. 1 
 
 . . .157 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 . ... 50 
 
 I 3 .... 43 
 
 VI. 1 
 
 . 74. 132. 193. 
 
 4 
 
 . ... 08 
 
 9 . 65. 130.200 
 
 
 207. 210 
 
 10 
 
 . ... 200 
 
 10 ... . 189 
 
 2 
 
 . ... 197 
 
 11 
 
 . 30. 44. 184 
 
 11 .... 56 
 
 3 
 
 . . . 49. 22U 
 
 12 
 
 .104.109.184. 
 
 13 ... . 43 
 
 4 
 
 . . 247. 250 
 
 
 210 
 
 16,17. . . 30 
 
 5 
 
 . ... 84 
 
 14 
 
 . ... 248 
 
 21 ... . 109 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FROM COLOSS., 1 THESS., 2 THESS. 
 
 283 
 
 CHAP. VEB. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 22 . 
 
 ... 49 
 
 23 . 
 
 ... 89 
 
 24 . 
 
 . . .248 
 
 25 . 
 
 . .05.112 
 
 26 . 
 
 ... 38 
 
 27 . 
 
 ... 99 
 
 28 . 
 
 . . 68. 210 
 
 29 . 
 
 ... 177 
 
 11. 1 . 
 
 . . .235 
 
 3 . 
 
 . . 78. 109 
 
 6 . 
 
 199. 222. 248 
 
 7 . 
 
 . 222. 248 
 
 8 . 
 
 . . .199 
 
 9 
 
 . . . 172 
 
 12 
 
 . . .248 
 
 13 
 
 . .31.178 
 
 15 
 
 . . . 221 
 
 10 
 
 . 162.248 
 
 18 
 
 ... 66 
 
 27 
 
 . . .78. 174 
 
 30 
 
 . ... 21 
 
 CHAP. VEB. 
 
 18 . . 
 20 . . 
 
 24 . . 
 
 20,27. 
 
 III. 2 . 33. 228. 253 
 
 3 . . 228. 200 
 
 4 .114. 135.248 
 5x. . . . 207 
 7 . •. . . 64 
 . 57. 65. 146 
 
 9 . . . .157 
 
 10 . . . .258 
 
 11 . . . .150 
 14 . . . .109 
 16 . . . .248 
 
 16 . . 77. 107 
 
 17 ... . 234 
 
 19 .... 30 
 
 20 . . . .159 
 
 21 . . . .248 
 23 . . . .259 
 
 IV. 3 ... . 190 
 4 . . . .248 
 8 . . 126. 232 
 
 10 .... 90 
 15 ... . 236 
 
 17 .... 32 
 
 18 . 39. 179. 215 
 20 .... 34 
 
 COLOSSIANS. 
 
 3 . . . .114 
 
 5 .... 50 
 
 9 . .97.111 
 
 12 . . . .248 
 
 14 . . . .189 
 
 15 . . .23.248 
 10 . 43. 91. 200 
 17 . . . .150 
 
 PAGE 
 . 23. 240 
 . . 71 
 . 55. 72 
 . . 219 
 
 II. 
 
 III. 
 
 2 . 
 
 8,9 
 
 11 . 
 
 14 . 
 
 15 . 
 21 . 
 23 .' 
 
 1 I. 
 
 2 . 
 
 3 . 
 5 . 
 
 10 . 
 
 11 . 
 
 12 . 
 
 16 . 
 
 17 . 
 22 . 
 
 24 . 
 
 25 . 
 
 , . 219 
 
 . . 249 
 
 . . 255 
 
 . . 70 
 . 98. 200 
 
 . . 93 
 
 . 18.55 
 
 . . 164 
 
 . . 170 
 
 . . 177 
 
 . . 255 
 
 . . 223 
 
 . . 62 
 
 . . 209 
 
 . . 235 
 
 . . 158 
 
 . . 23 
 
 . . 201 
 
 . . 249 
 
 CHAP. VEB. PAGE 
 
 6 .... 97 
 
 7 . . . .174 
 9 . 23. 64. 174 
 
 12 .... 78 
 
 13 109. 16U. 177. 
 
 261 
 
 IV. 2 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 12 
 
 18 
 
 . . 158 
 . 85. 219 
 . . 90 
 . . 229 
 . . 73 
 
 IV. 1 . 
 
 158. 
 
 190. 256 
 
 2 . 
 
 , 
 
 . . 167 
 
 3,4.6 
 
 . 19. 48. 
 
 
 
 109 
 
 6 . 
 
 
 140. 227 
 
 8 . 
 
 
 . . 146 
 
 11 
 
 
 211.213 
 
 12 
 
 
 . . 256 
 
 13 
 
 
 . . 129 
 
 14 
 
 
 . . 167 
 
 15 
 
 
 . . 140 
 
 17 
 
 24 
 
 121. 160 
 
 18 
 
 
 148. 159 
 
 20 
 
 
 . . 159 
 
 V. 4 
 
 
 . . 131 
 
 6 
 
 
 . . 102 
 
 7 
 
 
 . . 34 
 
 10 
 
 
 . . 161 
 
 11 
 
 
 . . 00 
 
 12 
 
 
 . . 156 
 
 15 
 
 90= 
 
 . . 103 
 
 1 THESSALONIANS. 
 
 5 . 
 
 . . . 137 
 
 6 . 
 
 . . . 08 
 
 7 . 
 
 . . .231 
 
 8 . 
 
 . 120. 183 
 
 9 . 
 
 . . .108 
 
 10 . 
 
 . . . 83 
 
 II. 3 . . . . 158 
 
 4 . . .82. 147 
 
 5 . . . 88. 199 
 
 2 THESSALONIANS. 
 
 I. 3 ... . 138 
 
 4 . 214. 228. 249 
 
 5 . . 103.210 
 
 6 . . .23. 135 
 
 7 . . . .178 
 
 8 . . . .140 
 10 . 101. 135. 249 
 11,12. 129,130 
 13 . . . .226 
 
 . 
 
 . . 72. 183 
 
 II. 
 
 1 . 172. 170. 190 
 
 7 . 
 
 . . .243 
 
 
 2 . . . .144 
 
 9 . 
 
 . . .184 
 
 
 3 . 36. 120. 132. 
 
 10 . 
 
 ... 187 
 
 
 140 
 
 II 
 
 . . 83. 135 
 
 
 4 . . 176.249 
 
 12 . 
 
 . 163. 256 
 
 
 6 . . . 88. 1U4 
 
 13 . 
 
 ... 137 
 
 
 9 . 73. 82. 219 
 
 14 . 
 
 . . .199 
 
 
 10 . . . .151 
 
 15 . 
 
 ... 97 
 
 
 11 . . . 71.83 
 
 10'. 
 
 . 103. 249 
 
 
 13. 17 . C8. 137. 
 
 18 . 
 
 62. 132. 230 
 
 
 189 
 20 . . . .123 
 
 . 1 . 
 
 ... 52 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 . . .110 
 
 Ill 
 
 1 . . . .206 
 
 4 
 
 . . . 181 
 
 
 2, 3 . 240. 200 
 
 5 
 
 . 142. 162 
 
 
 6 . . 109.211 
 
PASSAGES CITED FROM 1 TIM., 2 TIM., TITUS, PHIL. 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FROM HEBREWS, JAMES. 
 
 285 
 
 CHAP. VER. PAUB 
 
 9 . . . .138 
 
 10 . . 143. 249 
 
 11,12. 211.213 
 
 14, 15. .38. 1»2 
 
 1 TIMOTHY. 
 
 4 
 5 
 7 
 8 
 9 
 
 10 
 11 
 12 
 13 
 14 
 15 
 10 
 
 17 
 18 
 19 
 
 II. 
 
 III. 
 
 IV. 
 
 . . .210 
 . . 55. 209 
 . . .164 
 
 49. 114. 143 
 ... 98 
 
 27- 114. 194. 
 
 249 
 
 ... 212 
 
 ... 211 
 
 114. 137.200 
 
 ... 195 
 
 . . .37. 179 
 
 43. 191. 248 
 
 42, 43. 71. 
 
 174. 177. 248 
 . .34.191 
 ... 98 
 ... 171 
 
 1 . 
 
 2 . 
 
 4 . 
 
 5 . 
 C . 
 7 . 
 u . 
 
 9 . 
 
 11 . 
 
 12 . 
 
 14 . 
 
 15 . 
 
 1 . 
 
 2 . 
 
 4 . 
 
 5 . 
 
 7 . 
 9 . 
 
 10 . 
 
 11 . 
 
 13 . 
 
 14 . 
 IG 
 
 ... 172 
 172.211.213 
 54. 132. 187 
 
 ... 27 
 
 77. 171. 109 
 
 . 159. 204 
 . . 32. 187 
 . 141. 169 
 ... 43 
 . . . 257 
 ... 166 
 51. 1C6. 190 
 
 . . 09. 76 
 27. 34. 144 
 . 157. 169 
 ... 85 
 . . .132 
 
 108. 219. 220 
 . . .114 
 . . . 203 
 . . 37.97 
 ... 68 
 
 79. 162. 205. 
 219 
 
 I . 
 
 3 . 
 
 4. 8 
 
 . 
 10 . 
 15 . 
 
 30, 
 
 67.216 
 
 77. 
 
 V. 4 
 
 :57 
 
 114 
 98 
 133 
 157 
 
 249 
 
 CHAP. VEB. 
 
 5 . . 
 
 8 . . 
 
 9 . . 
 II .101. 
 22 . . 
 24 . . 
 26 . . 
 
 PAGE 
 
 . . 177 
 . . 90 
 . . 69 
 198. 249 
 . . 235 
 . . 161 
 . 61. 120 
 
 VI. 
 
 1 . 
 
 2 . 
 
 3 . 
 
 4 . 
 5 
 8 
 9 
 
 II 
 12 
 
 15 
 
 17 
 19 
 
 . . 182. 43 
 . 195. 249 
 ... 109 
 114. 171. 182 
 31. 67. 249 
 . .84.134 
 . .65. 198 
 205. 207. 228 
 65. 93. 107. 
 
 195 
 . .69.211 
 38. 72. 163. 
 
 177 
 . 163. 195 
 
 2 TIMOTHY. 
 
 I. 1 , 
 3 . 
 
 8 . 
 
 9 . 
 
 10 . 
 12 
 
 13 . 
 
 15 . 
 
 17 . 
 
 18 . 
 
 II. 2 
 
 4 
 6 
 6 
 
 8 , 
 
 9 . 
 
 11 . 
 
 12 . 
 
 14 . 
 
 16 . 
 
 18 . 
 
 19 , 
 
 21 , 
 
 22 , 
 
 23 , 
 24 
 25 
 20 
 
 III. 1 
 3 
 
 4 
 6 
 
 37. 
 
 68. 
 
 70, 
 
 54 
 
 . 169 
 
 . 152 
 
 68.73 
 
 . 216 
 
 . 40 
 
 86. 162 
 
 15. 234 
 
 . 96 
 
 199. 204 
 
 68. 109 
 
 65. 167 
 
 99 
 
 135. 249 
 
 70. 261 
 . 80 
 . 119 
 
 94. 104 
 
 104. 228 
 
 . 175 
 
 96. 230 
 . 171 
 
 70. 209 
 . 249 
 . 205 
 . 252 
 . 207 
 
 41.207 
 . 47 
 
 . 216 
 
 . 203 
 
 . 68 
 
 222. 249 
 
 AP. VER. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 9. 13 . . . 230 
 
 12 . . . .134 
 
 15 . 37. 83. 204. 
 
 223 
 
 16 . . 169. 205 
 
 17 . . . .225 
 
 IV. 1 ... . 267 
 
 2 . . 
 
 . 43 
 
 4 . . 
 
 . 34 
 
 5 . . 
 
 . 46 
 
 6 . 42. 
 
 46. 128 
 
 8 . . 
 
 86. 153 
 
 10 . . 
 
 . . 114 
 
 14 . . 
 
 . . 99 
 
 15 . . 
 
 . . 98 
 
 16 . . 
 
 . 23. 103 
 
 17 . . 
 
 . . 229 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . 34. 164 
 
 TITUS. 
 
 1. 1 
 
 . 136. 109 
 
 5 
 
 . . 96. 98 
 
 7 
 
 . . . 197 
 
 9 
 
 ... 32 
 
 10 
 
 . 133. 194 
 
 11 
 
 ... 141 
 
 13 
 
 ... 159 
 
 II. 2 
 
 . . . 7« 
 
 3 
 
 . 119.203 
 
 4 
 
 . . . 129 
 
 7 
 
 ... 97 
 
 8 
 
 ... 155 
 
 10 
 
 ... 38 
 
 12 
 
 205. 224. 233 
 
 13 
 
 . . 36. 255 
 
 14 
 
 . . .72. 189 
 
 16 
 
 ... 43 
 
 II. 1 
 
 . 206. 228 
 
 2 
 
 119.207.228 
 
 3 
 
 ... 196 
 
 4 
 
 ... 187 
 
 5 
 
 . . 8. 157 
 
 10 
 
 ... 60 
 
 14 
 
 . . .100 
 
 PHILEMON. 
 
 3 
 
 ... 184 
 
 6 
 
 . . . 169 
 
 13 
 
 .128. 171. 198 
 
 16 
 
 . . .172 
 
 20 
 
 . . .69. 103 
 
 22 
 
 . ... 121 
 
 CHAP. VER. PAGE 
 
 HEBREWS. 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 VII. 7 . 
 
 9 . 
 11 . 
 
 PAGE 
 
 . . 187 
 . . 147 
 106. 193 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 8 . . • 
 
 10 . . . 
 
 u . . . 
 
 PAGE 
 . 121 
 . 19 
 86.70 
 . 107 
 . 161 
 . 135 
 . 75 
 . 198 
 
 I. 1,2,3 .173.249 
 
 2 . . .42. 191 
 
 3 . . . 72. 98 
 
 4 . . . .199 
 7 . . . .184 
 
 13 . 
 
 14 . 
 16 . 
 18 . 
 22 . 
 
 . . 70 
 . . .151 
 . .59.125 
 . . . 67 
 . . 207 
 
 14 . . . 
 10 . . . 
 17 . . . 
 20 . . - 
 25 . . . 
 
 8 .... 73 
 
 24 . 
 
 25 . 
 
 . . . 31 
 . . .106 
 
 XIII. 2 . . . 
 
 4 . . - 
 
 . 112 
 . 62 
 
 II. 2. 7 . . . 280 
 
 
 . 
 
 5 .... 44 
 13 . . . .140 
 
 15 . . . .215 
 
 16 . . 215. 235 
 
 17 ... . 2.56 
 21 .... 34 
 23 .... 58 
 25 . . . .178 
 
 6 49 
 
 8 . . . .224 
 
 9 . 86. 167. 224 
 10 . 1C6. 217- 2.'^.0 
 
 VIII. 2 . 
 4 . 
 6 . 
 fi . 
 
 . . .221 
 . . .^106 
 . . 62. 234 
 . . .207 
 
 14 . 90. 212. 223. 
 
 232 
 
 15 . . . .165 
 
 16 . 124. 195. 250 
 
 9,10 
 13 . 
 
 IX. 1 . 
 
 . . .137 
 . . .185 
 
 . 205. 221 
 
 17 .... 64 
 
 3 . 
 
 13. 69. 179 
 
 
 
 C . 
 
 . . .221 
 
 
 
 III. 1 . 70. 188. 207 
 3 .... 59 
 
 7 . 
 9 . 
 
 ... 33 
 
 . 214.217 
 
 JAMES. 
 
 
 8 . . . .169 
 
 10 . 
 
 . . .206 
 
 
 
 11 . . . .125 
 
 12 . 
 
 . . .166 
 
 I. 4 . . 
 
 . . 225 
 . . 68 
 
 12 . . . .141 
 
 13 . 
 
 . .37.184 
 
 ' 5 . . 
 
 13. 16. . . 250 
 
 16 . 
 
 . . .174 
 
 9, 10. 
 
 . . 259 
 
 
 17 . 
 
 . 126. 176 
 
 11 . . 
 
 . . 160 
 
 IV. 1 ... . 102 
 2 . . .73. 135 
 
 21 . 
 
 22 . 
 
 ... 71 
 23. 167. 260 
 
 12 . . 
 
 13 . 21 
 
 . . 228 
 
 71. 152 
 
 . . 81 
 
 . . 151 
 
 . . 74 
 
 3 . . . .108 
 
 6 . . . .126 
 
 7 . . . .156 
 
 8 . . . .106 
 
 9 . . . .121 
 
 26 . 
 X. 2 . 
 
 88. 174. 216 
 ... 120 
 
 15 . . 
 10 . . 
 17 . . 
 
 3 . 
 
 ... 119 
 
 18 . . 
 
 19 . . 
 
 . . 49 
 
 10 . 
 
 . . .157 
 
 . . 214 
 
 11 . . 144. 158 
 
 12 . 
 
 . . .215 
 
 21 . . 
 
 . . 226 
 
 12 .... 67 
 
 25 . 
 
 . . ■ . 224 
 
 22 . . 
 
 . . 199 
 
 15 .... 86 
 
 27 . 
 
 ... 12 
 
 24 . . 
 
 . . 91 
 
 16 . . . .220 
 
 29 . 
 
 ... 74 
 
 25 . . 
 
 .72. 216 
 
 
 37 . 
 
 ... 33 
 
 20 . . 
 
 . . 228 
 
 V. 1 . . . .214 
 
 39 . 
 
 ... 70 
 
 27 . . 
 
 . . 109 
 
 2 .... 63 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 . . . .172 
 
 XI. 1 . 
 
 . . .250 
 
 II. 1 . . 
 
 . . 74 
 
 4 . . . . l."»5 
 
 3 . 
 
 . 103. 191 
 
 3 . . 
 
 . . 182 
 
 7 . 152, 163. 165 
 
 5 . 
 
 . 109. 2.'i0 
 
 4 . . 
 
 . 73. 250 
 
 8 . 114.135.260 
 
 6 . 
 
 94. 199. 260 
 
 5 . . 
 
 . 34. 54 
 
 9 . . . .217 
 
 12 . 
 
 . . 48. 265 
 
 6 . . 
 
 . 35. 250 
 
 12 . 116. 168. 191 
 
 13 . 
 
 ... 83 
 
 7 . . 
 
 . . 68 
 
 13 .... 62 
 
 16 . 
 
 ... 75 
 
 13 . . 
 
 . . 119 
 
 
 17 . 
 
 ... 85 
 
 16 . . 
 
 . . 162 
 
 VI. 1 ... . 170 
 4 .... 90 
 
 19 
 
 . . .206 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . . 119 
 
 23 
 
 ... 91 
 
 20 . . 
 
 . . 250 
 
 6 .... 90 
 
 26 
 
 ... 72 
 
 2-2 . . 
 
 .r9. 217 
 
 7 .... 78 
 
 28 
 
 ... 75 
 
 25 . . 
 
 . . 33 
 
 « . . . . 185 
 
 29 
 
 . . .115 
 
 
 
 9 . . . 70. 75 
 
 31 
 
 ... 27 
 
 III. 6 . . 
 
 . . 250 
 
 11 . . . .184 
 
 34 
 
 . ... 153 
 
 7 . . 
 
 . 43. 79 
 
 12 . . . .199 
 
 
 
 9 . . 
 
 . . 157 
 
 14 . . . .127 
 
 XII. 1 
 
 . . I4C. 166 
 
 11 . . 
 
 . . 39 
 
 17 . '. . 62. 57 
 
 2 
 
 . ... 151 
 
 17 . . 
 
 . . 208 
 
 19 . . . .217 
 
 
 
 . ... 224 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . 5G. 79 
 
280 
 
 PASSAGES CITED FROM 1 PETEH TO llEVELATION. 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 IV. 4 . 
 7 . 
 )l . 
 
 12 . 
 14 . 
 
 V. 1 . 
 
 3 . 
 
 4 . 
 10 . 
 
 13 . 
 Ifi . 
 
 FAOK 
 
 198. 250 
 . . 1(17 
 
 . . in« 
 
 192. 250 
 . . 123 
 
 13G. 218 
 . . 210 
 . . 251 
 . 5G. (i4 
 . . 4« 
 
 193. 251 
 
 1 PETER. 
 
 II. 
 
 III. 
 
 IV. 
 
 2 - 
 
 . .19.103 
 
 4 . 
 
 . \m. 212 
 
 5 .158. 1C2. 251 
 
 n . 
 
 . . .251 
 
 13 . 
 
 .91. 17fi 
 
 14 . 
 
 . . 73 
 
 15 . 
 
 . 43. 188 
 
 19 . 
 
 . . 232 
 
 21 . 
 
 . . U8 
 
 22 
 
 . . 188 
 
 2 
 
 . . 223 
 
 3 . 
 
 .91.135 
 
 4 . 
 
 . . 180 
 
 5 . 
 
 . 0. 214 
 
 a . 
 
 .99. 174 
 
 i) . 
 
 . . 189 
 
 10 . 
 
 . 87. 139 
 
 11 . 
 
 55 
 
 13 . 
 
 . . !)9 
 
 15 . 
 
 . . 215 
 
 19 . 
 
 . . 217 
 
 23, 24 
 
 89 
 
 1 . 
 
 . . lie 
 
 4 . 
 
 . . 213 
 
 5 
 
 . 177 
 
 9 . . 
 
 . . 198 
 
 10 
 
 . . 185 
 
 14 . . 
 
 45. 53. 84, 
 
 (i5. 105. 202 
 
 Ki. 21 . 
 
 217. 224 
 
 Ul . . 
 
 . . 172 
 
 20 . 
 
 .37. Ifi5 
 
 22 . 
 
 . . 20C 
 
 1,2 . 
 
 . C5. 87 
 
 4 
 
 . . 190 
 
 n . . 
 
 . . 150 
 
 11 . 
 
 . 27. 84 
 
 13 . 
 
 . . 235 
 
 V, . 
 
 . 23. 2:u 
 
 17 
 
 . . . 21-5 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 V. I . 
 
 II. 
 
 III. 
 
 II. 
 
 3 . 
 
 9 . 
 
 10 . 
 
 11 . 
 
 12 . 
 14 . 
 
 PAGE 
 . 5fi 
 . 91 
 
 . 234 
 . 44 
 74.218 
 27. 34 
 . 90 
 . 73 
 
 2 PETER. 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 8 
 8 
 10 
 12 
 17 
 21 
 
 U7. 185. 185 
 48. 232 
 . 208 
 . 251 
 . 114 
 . 135 
 . 181 
 . 79 
 
 1 . 
 3 . 
 5 . 
 9 . 
 
 10 . 
 
 11 . 
 13, 13 
 14 . 
 21 . 
 22 
 
 3 . 
 
 5 . 
 
 10. 12 
 11 . 
 14 . 
 
 u; . 
 
 18 . 
 
 JUDE. 
 
 73. 251 
 . 82 
 
 81. 247 
 • 27 
 . 197 
 138. 180 
 . 251 
 32. 73 
 
 89. 109 
 
 . lie 
 
 G 
 19 
 
 24 . 
 
 25 . 
 
 . 21G 
 
 . 2.-' I 
 
 . 191 
 
 . 251 
 
 7». 232 
 
 . 184 
 
 . 34 
 
 203 
 71 
 
 200 
 31 
 
 1 JOHN. 
 
 1 . . . 
 
 2 . . . 
 
 3 . . . 
 9 . . . 
 
 . 91 
 
 . 185 
 . 235 
 . 128 
 
 2 .170. 188.215 
 
 9 . . . .131 
 
 l!l .108. 120. 1.=^ 
 
 22 . iSfX. 2iJ 
 
 CHAP 
 
 VER. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 III. 
 
 3 . . 
 
 . . 188 
 
 
 4 . 31. 
 
 194. 251 
 
 
 9 . . 
 
 . . 87 
 
 
 10 . . 
 
 . . |l>8 
 
 
 12 . . 
 
 . . 154 
 
 
 14 . . 
 
 .4G. 212 
 
 
 15 . . 
 
 212. 234 
 
 
 17 . . 
 
 . . 212 
 
 
 18 . . 
 
 ■ . 77 
 
 
 21 . . 
 
 . . 220 
 
 IV. 
 
 2 . . 
 
 . . 86 
 
 
 8 . . 
 
 . . SI 
 
 
 9. 10. 14 . 91. 
 
 
 
 188. 215 
 
 
 15 . . 
 
 . 31. 41 
 
 
 IG . . 
 
 . . 201 
 
 
 17 .148. 
 
 178.220 
 
 
 18 . . 
 
 . . 251 
 
 V. 
 
 5 . . 
 
 . . 41 
 
 
 G . . 
 
 . . 120 
 
 
 18.17. 
 
 . 8. 138. 
 
 
 184. 
 
 190. 194 
 
 
 18,19. 
 
 . . 251 
 
 
 2 JOHN 
 
 
 
 2 . . 
 
 . . 178 
 
 
 6,7 . 
 
 . . 48 
 
 REVELATION. 
 
 I. G . 
 
 7 . 
 
 12 . 
 
 II. 
 
 1 . 
 3 . 
 
 7 . 
 21,22 
 2C . 
 
 III. 
 
 9 . 
 15 . 
 
 18 . 
 
 20 . 
 
 IV. 
 
 7 . 
 11 . 
 
 V. 
 
 7 . 
 
 9 . 
 12 . 
 13 
 
 VI. 
 
 1 . 
 15 . 
 
 34 
 220 
 
 255 
 
 47 
 2?8 
 
 12 
 222 
 173 
 
 209 
 88 
 C4 
 
 105 
 
 30 
 187 
 
 92 
 23G 
 200 
 
 34 
 
 GO 
 . I6i 
 
 PASSAGES CITED VKOM KEVEIATION. 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 
 VII. 2 . 
 
 13 . 
 
 PAGE 
 . 55 
 
 . 34 
 
 VIII. 9 . ■ 212. 23C 
 
 IX. 20, 21 . 03. 222" 
 
 X. 7 . . .91.219 
 
 CHAP. VER. 
 13 . 
 18 . 
 20 . 
 
 XV. 
 
 XI. 7 ■ 
 9 . 
 
 Xll. G . 
 
 9 , 
 
 11 . 
 
 14 
 
 XIII. 3 
 
 XIV. 3 
 8 
 
 . 12 
 62. 83 
 
 . 68 
 
 42. 203 
 
 139. 230 
 
 5G 
 
 . 72 
 
 . 230 
 . 91 
 
 1 . 
 
 2 . 
 
 3 . 
 
 4 . 
 
 XVI. 
 
 3 . 
 
 9 . 
 II . 
 15 . 
 19 . 
 
 XVII. 1 
 
 5.7 
 9 . 
 
 10 . 
 
 12 . 
 
 PAGE 
 
 07. 178 
 . 77 
 . 09 
 
 91 
 . 154 
 . 238 
 . 210 
 
 238 
 108 
 222 
 102 
 , 214 
 
 . 210 
 . 220 
 . 259 
 
 . 42 
 . 34 
 
 XVIII. 13 . 
 
 230 
 
 THE END. 
 
 ■% 
 
 287 
 
 ;hap. vkr. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 14 . . 
 
 . . 71 
 
 23 . . 
 
 . . 221 
 
 XIX. 5 . . 
 
 . . 214 
 
 10 . . 
 
 . . 25ft 
 
 12 . . 
 
 . . 233 
 
 13 . . 
 
 . . 31 
 
 14 . . 
 
 . . 53 
 
 IC . . 
 
 . . 09 
 
 XXI. 3 . . 
 
 . . i7n 
 
 4 . . 
 
 . 212 
 
 8 . . 
 
 . . 234 
 
 21 . . 
 
 . . 104 
 
 24 . . 
 
 .35. 105 
 
 25 . . 
 
 . . 123 
 
 XXII. 2 . . 
 
 . . 12 
 
 3 . . 
 
 . . GO 
 
 8 . . 
 
 . . lOK 
 
 9 . . 
 
 . . 2.i8 
 
 14 . . 
 
 . . 12 
 
 20 . . 
 
 . . 135 
 
 GIMIKKT AND RIVINGTON, PRINTERS, ST. JOIIN'a BaUAKE, l.ONOON. 
 
■>y^ H • ."'*'^ "" '•'■4' '• 
 if.'; "